JP7332119B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, as a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a game machine or the like is known in which a setting state such as a winning probability is set to one of a plurality of settings by a setting change operation by a game hall manager. (For example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-6-91049

However, conventional gaming machines have had the problem of lacking countermeasures against cheating.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving deterrence against fraud .

Effective solutions for achieving the above objectives are shown below. In addition, the operation etc. will be explained as necessary. Also, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations and the like are shown as appropriate in the embodiments of the invention, but they are not limited in any way.

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1,
A game board is provided with a game area in which game balls can flow down, a lottery is performed based on the game balls flowing down the game area entering a predetermined start hole, and a pattern is based on the result of the lottery. and a predetermined winning game can be executed when a winning result is derived as a result of the variable display of the symbols,
a specific mode generating means for generating a specific mode in which progress of the game is disabled;
specific abnormality determination means for determining a specific abnormality;
a specific abnormality notification means for performing specific abnormality notification corresponding to the specific abnormality,
The specific mode can be canceled by a specific administrator operation,
Not only during the normal game, but also during the specific mode, the determination by the specific abnormality determination means is possible,
The specific abnormality notification is executed using a plurality of notification units,
The plurality of notification units include a back side notification unit provided on the back side of the game machine and a front side notification unit provided on the front side of the game machine,
The specific abnormality notification performed during a normal game is executed by both the back side notification section and the front side notification section, but the specific abnormality notification performed during the specific mode is performed by the front side notification section. is executed by the back side notification unit without
Further, the back side notification unit is provided on a predetermined substrate of a game frame to which the game board is mounted, not the game board.
It is characterized by

Advantageous Effects of Invention According to the present invention, it is possible to improve deterrence against fraudulent acts as compared with the prior art.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is an embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from the front; FIG. It is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is sectional drawing which cut|disconnected the door frame in the up-down direction center, and was seen from the top. It is sectional drawing which cut|disconnected the door frame lower unit in the left-right direction center, and was seen from the right. (a) is a perspective view showing a state in which the first movable portion of the door frame effect device is moved to the rising end, and (b) is a state in which the effect operation portion is moved to the rising end from the state of (a). It is a perspective view showing. (a) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the lower front speaker unit, and (b) is an enlarged front view showing a state in which the lower front speaker grille, the grill decoration frame, and the lattice decoration part are removed in (a). (a) is an enlarged front view of the upper part of the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged front view showing a state in which the grill decoration frame and the lattice decoration part are removed in (a). It is a plan view of the door frame lower unit showing a state in which game balls are stored in the upper plate of the door frame. It is an explanatory view showing a surrounding light area in a door frame. (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the door frame effect display device and the effect operation part in the door frame effect device, and (b) is the decoration of the effect operation part by the effect image of the door frame effect display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the collaboration production|presentation by the production|presentation image of a door frame production|presentation display apparatus, and the movable production|presentation of the production operation part. It is a front view of the body frame with the game board removed. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame of the state which removed the game board from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame of the state which removed the game board from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. Fig. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; Fig. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the rear; (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the front lower left corner of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. FIG. 5 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the body frame when opening and closing the door frame with respect to the body frame; (a) is a front perspective view of the dispensing base unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the dispensing base unit. (a) is a front perspective view of a payout unit in a body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the payout unit. (a) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the back. Fig. 3 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (a) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the longitudinal direction when the ball extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . FIG. 4 is a rear view of the dispensing device for explaining the rotational positions of the dispensing blades; It is a rear view of the dispensing device for explaining ball clogging and ball dropout prevention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball in a main body frame. (a) is a front perspective view of the board unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the board unit. FIG. 4 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from below; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the rear; It is an enlarged side cross-sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. (a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. (a) is a plan view of a body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the body frame from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails, etc., viewed from above, and (b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from below. 42(a) is exploded and it is the exploded perspective view seen from the front. FIG. It is an explanatory view showing a region in which the game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame circulate. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the main body frame upper part. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game ball to the detour passage in the main-body frame upper part. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the body frame viewed from behind the hinge side; FIG. 40(a) is an enlarged view of a part of the cross-sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 40(a), and is a schematic diagram of a configuration for dealing with metal powder. FIG. 10 is a configuration for measures against metal powder according to the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration for measures against metal powder according to the second embodiment. FIG. 10 is a configuration for measures against metal powder according to the third embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration for measures against metal powder according to the third embodiment. FIG. 10 is a configuration for measures against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration for measures against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. It is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasures in a state in which the game board is removed. It is a front view of the body frame with the game board attached. It is a front view of the body frame with the game board removed. (A) is a perspective view of the main body frame with the game board removed from the lower right front side, and (B) is a perspective view of the main body frame with the game board removed from the modified example as seen from the lower front right side. (A) The shaded area indicates the upper decorative part of the door frame corresponding to the tank rail hanging down into the opening of the game board mounting part in front view when the game board is removed from the main body frame. (B) is a diagram schematically showing a side view of the pachinko machine as seen from the left side. (A) A plan view schematically showing a tank rail seen from above, and (B) a front view schematically showing a tank rail seen from the front of the pachinko machine. (A) A plan view schematically showing a tank rail seen from above, and (B) a front view schematically showing a tank rail seen from the front of the pachinko machine. (A) is a front view of the inside of the second rail cover viewed from the front, and (B) the inside of the second rail cover in a state in which the pachinko machine is tilted so that the side where the ball guidance unit is provided faces downward. It is a perspective view showing the. It is a front view of the back side of the pachinko machine for explaining the areas A and B. FIG. FIG. 10 is a split perspective view of the pachinko machine provided with a drawer connector; FIG. 4A is a side view of the body frame for explaining the position of the drawer connector when (A) the game board is not attached and (B) when the game board is attached. It is a front view of the back side of the pachinko machine when an external terminal plate is provided below the tank rail. FIG. 4 is a side view of the body frame for explaining the position of the external terminal board when the game board is attached; It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame when the protrusion part was provided from the left front. It is a side view of the main body frame for explaining the position of the projecting portion when (A) the game board is not attached and (B) when the game board is attached. 1 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine in which a game panel and the like are made opaque; FIG. 68 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 67 viewed from the front right. FIG. FIG. 68 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 67 viewed from the front left; It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from the back. FIG. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of routing of wiring from a function display unit on a main control board; 1 is an exploded perspective view of a game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front; FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member, and was seen from the back. 1 is a front view of a game board with a game panel and the like made transparent; FIG. (a) is a front perspective view of the front constituent member and the game panel of the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front constituent member and the game panel. (a) is a front perspective view of the front unit on the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front unit on the game board. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the game panel is made opaque and the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate and the obstructing nails. 78 is an enlarged front view of the group of circulation passages in the upper right corner of FIG. 77; FIG. 78 is an enlarged front view of the attacker unit in the lower right corner of FIG. 77; FIG. (a) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a group of distribution passages for center role different from FIG. is an enlarged view of a main part showing (a) is an enlarged view of a main portion showing an embodiment of a group of distribution passages for a center role different from that of FIG. 80, and (b) is an enlarged view of a main portion showing an embodiment of a group of distribution passages for a center role that is still different It is a diagram. FIG. 81 is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a group of distribution passages for a center accessory different from FIGS. 80 and 81; It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit of the game board from the back. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit, which is disassembled into main components and viewed from the front; It is the exploded perspective view which decomposed|disassembled the back unit for every main structure, and was seen from the back. (a) is a perspective view of the back first effect unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the back first effect unit of the back unit as seen from the back. It is a front view showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the decorative substrate in the first rear effect unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back 2nd production|presentation unit of the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back 2nd production|presentation unit of the back unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back 2nd production|presentation unit mainly for every structure, and was seen from the front. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the back second effect unit, which is mainly disassembled for each configuration and viewed from the rear; It is a front view which shows the mechanism of a drive in a back 2nd production|presentation unit. (a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams showing movements of a plurality of rotary decorations in the second back effect unit. 94(e) to (g) are explanatory diagrams showing the movement of a plurality of rotary decorations in the second back effect unit continuing from FIG. 94. FIG. It is a front view which shows arrangement|positioning of LED in a back 2nd production|presentation unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the back 3rd production|presentation unit of the back unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the back 3rd production|presentation unit of the back unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back 3rd production|presentation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the back 3rd production|presentation unit for every main member, and was seen from the back. FIG. 10 is a front view showing the drive mechanism and decoration substrate in the third back effect unit in a state where the left horizontal ring decoration and the right horizontal ring decoration are moved to the appearing position; FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which a plurality of rotary decorative bodies in the second back effect unit are revolved 15 degrees while being rotated clockwise from a normal state. It is a front view showing an enlarged lower part of the game board in a state in which the special rotary decoration body in the back second effect unit is moved to a specific position. It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the upper vertical ring decoration body and the lower vertical ring decoration body in the back third effect unit are moved to the appearance position. FIG. 10 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the left horizontal ring decoration and the right horizontal ring decoration in the back third effect unit are moved to the appearance position; FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring decoration, the lower vertical ring decoration, the left horizontal ring decoration, and the right horizontal ring decoration in the back third effect unit moved to the appearance positions. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the upper vertical ring decoration body and the right horizontal ring decoration body in the back third effect unit are moved to the middle of the appearance position. FIG. 11 is a front view of the game board showing an example of an effect image on the effect display device when a problem occurs in the upper back third effect unit. FIG. 11 is a front view of a game board showing an example of a shadow effect executed during a light emission effect in the back unit; It is a front view of the pachinko machine shown in a state in which the game board is facing from the door window of the door frame. It is a block diagram which shows roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. FIG. 2(a) is an enlarged view of a part of the area where SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and FIG. FIG. 2A is a schematic diagram (a) of the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate in which SMD type electronic components substituting lead type electronic components are aggregated in a predetermined area, and SMD type electronic components substituting lead type electronic components are aggregated. 1B is a schematic diagram (b) showing the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of a substrate that has been miniaturized. 113 is a diagram showing the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board in the enlarged view of FIG. 112; FIG. 4 is a perspective view of a main control board box of the main control unit; FIG. It is a diagram (a) showing the front surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board, and a diagram (b) showing the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board, in which the main control board box is attached to the game board. It is a figure (c) which shows a lower part part of the left side view of a board. Fig. 12 is a modified example 1(a) showing a lower part of the left side view of the game board with the main control board box attached to the game board, and the game board with the main control board box attached to the game board; It is the modification 2 (b) which shows a lower part of a left side view. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a main-control side power-on process. FIG. 119 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the main-control-side power-on processing of FIG. 118; FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side timer interrupt processing; 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of setting change processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing; It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of payout control unit power-on. FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the processing when the payout control unit power is turned on in FIG. 124. FIG. FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the payout control unit power-on process subsequent to FIG. 125 . It is a flow chart which shows an example of due-out control part timer interruption processing. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when powering on a peripheral control unit; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing; 9 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing; 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power outage warning signal interrupt processing; It is a flow chart showing the procedure for the special symbol and special electric accessary product control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of first starting port passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the second starting opening passage process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design process processing performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design normal process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the big-hit determination process performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. (A) is a big win determination table used for lottery processing for big wins, and (B) is a symbol determination table used for lottery processing for types of big wins. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop design setting process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design variation process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special design stop process performed by the main-control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control processing performed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a big winning opening opening/closing process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment; FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the procedure of a second reception port opening/closing process executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment; It is a flow chart showing the procedure for normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing the procedure of gate passage processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment; It is a flow chart showing the procedure for normal symbol normal processing executed by the main control MPU of the same embodiment. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a main-control side power-on process. It is a time chart showing a modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine during the setting change of the setting value. It is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine during confirmation display of the setting value. 4 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during confirmation display of set values. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraud during setting change of setting values; FIG. FIG. 10 is a time chart showing a monitoring state of fraud during confirmation display of setting values; FIG. It is a time chart showing command transmission timing when the pachinko machine is powered on. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a main-control side power-on process. It is a time chart showing the transmission timing of the game information command when the power of the pachinko machine is turned on. It is a time chart which shows the case where an alert notification is extended and performed after completion|finish of a change permission state or a confirmation display state. It is a time chart showing a case where the initial action of the production member is performed after the end of the change permission state and the confirmation display state. FIG. 11 is a time chart showing a modified example of a fraudulent activity monitoring state during setting change or setting value confirmation display; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the modification of a 1st fluctuation pattern setting process. A table showing the transition of the variation pattern table after the pachinko machine is powered on, Is a time chart showing the execution timing of various effects based on the fluctuation pattern, A variation pattern table C used when the number of variations of special symbols after power-on of the pachinko machine is 500, This is a specific example of a roulette effect as the suggestive effect A2. It is a table showing a modified example of transition of the variation pattern table after the pachinko machine is powered on. 2 is a circuit diagram for explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of a power supply substrate; FIG. It is the perspective view which expanded the power supply board partially. FIG. 173 is a view in the direction of arrow B of FIG. 172; Silk printing of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board (part 1). Silk printing of electronic components printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board (part 2). It is a figure which shows the specific electronic component among several electronic components which have the same shape by the arrangement|positioning method. Examples (a) and (b) in which the fusion confirmation area is difficult to use, examples (part 1) (c) and (d) in which the fusion confirmation area can be used, and examples in which the fusion confirmation area can be used (part 2) (e) and (f). These are examples (1) (a) and (b) in which the fusion confirmation area can be used, and (2) (c) and (d) in which the fusion confirmation area can be used. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing the arrangement of the fuse that is the easiest to blow among the three fuses. 1 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine; FIG.

[1. Overall Structure of Pachinko Machine]
An overall configuration of a pachinko machine 1, which is an embodiment of the present invention, will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 4. FIG. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine that is one embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame and an outer frame.

The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment comprises a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed on an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for closing the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and which is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable; and a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which game balls B are hit by. In addition, what is comprised from the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 is called a front frame.

As shown in FIG. 4, the outer frame 2 is formed into a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left portion 10 and an outer frame right portion 20 which are spaced apart in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and an outer frame connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left portion 10 and the outer frame right portion 20 to each other. The upper part 30, the outer frame lower part 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left part 10 and the outer frame right part 20, the outer frame upper hinge part 50 attached to the left end of the upper surface of the outer frame upper part 30, the outer An outer frame lower hinge portion 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the left frame portion 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the lower outer frame portion 40 is provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island facility of the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and is connected to the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 and the outer frame lower hinge portion 60. The lower hinge part 520 is coaxially rotatably supported, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward about the left side in the front view.

The door frame 3 includes a game window 201 that closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, and an upper plate 130 that stores the game ball B to be hit into the game area 5a. and a lower tray 140, and a handle 111 operated by the player to hit the game ball B stored in the upper tray 130 into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁The door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 by means of a main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and a main body frame lower hinge portion 520 of the main body frame 4 so that the front surface of the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed.

The body frame 4 is formed in a box shape that is open forward. The main body frame 4 includes a game board mounting portion 301 that detachably holds the game board 5 from the front, a main body frame upper hinge portion 510 provided at the upper end on the left side when viewed from the front, and a main body provided at the lower end on the left side. A frame lower hinge portion 520, a ball launching device 540 provided on the right side below the game board mounting portion 301 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, an upper plate 130 and a lower plate. A payout device 580 for paying out game balls B to 140 and a locking unit 650 for locking between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 are provided.

The main body frame 4 has a main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and a main body frame lower hinge portion 520 attached to the outer frame 2 by an outer frame upper hinge portion 50 and an outer frame lower hinge portion 60 so as to be openable and closable. A door frame 3 is attached to a main body frame 4 via an upper frame hinge portion and a lower door frame hinge portion so as to be openable and closable.

The game board 5 is detachably attached to the game board mounting portion 301 of the body frame 4 . Although illustration is omitted, the game board 5 includes a general prize winning opening and a first starting opening for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, a predetermined number of game balls B to be paid out) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. , a gate section, a second starting opening, a big winning opening, and an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying an effect image.

[2. Outer frame]
The outer frame of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 4 and the like. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The outer frame 2 is formed in a rectangular frame extending vertically when viewed from the front.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 has a left outer frame portion 10 and a right outer frame portion 20 that are separated from each other in the left and right direction and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the left outer frame portion 10 and the right outer frame portion 20 are connected to each other. outer frame upper part 30, outer frame lower part 40 connecting the lower ends of outer frame left part 10 and outer frame right part 20, and outer frame upper hinge attached to the left end of the upper surface of outer frame upper part 30 and an outer frame lower hinge portion 60 attached to the lower right side surface of the outer frame left portion 10 and the left end of the upper surface of the outer frame lower portion 40 .

The outer frame upper hinge portion 50 of the outer frame 2 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 of the main body frame 4 . The outer frame 2 can coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 and the outer frame lower hinge portion 60. The body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in the front view.

[3. door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10. FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of a door frame in the pachinko machine. FIG. 6 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 7 is a right side view of the door frame. 8 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the door frame cut at the center in the vertical direction and viewed from above.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. It is The door frame 3 has a game window 201 that closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is hit so as to be visible from the front side, and a top for storing the game ball B to be hit into the game area 5a. A plate 130 and a handle 111 operated by the player to hit the game ball B in the upper plate 130 into the game area 5a are provided. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and has various decorative parts. Some of these various decorative portions are not plated with decorative plating at all, while others are plated with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is noble metal plating such as chromium plating or hard gold plating, and has electrical conductivity, so electromagnetic wave noise may enter.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the various decorative portions, those decoratively plated on the entire surface of the front and back surfaces are connected to the metal door frame in the door frame base unit of the door frame 3 described later via wiring (not shown). It is electrically connected to the reinforcement unit (some of the decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring not shown, and the conductive member is directly made of metal). (Some are attached and electrically connected to the door frame reinforcing unit of the door frame). As a result, the electromagnetic wave noise entering the various decorative parts is transmitted to the metallic door frame reinforcing unit, thereby preventing the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative parts from entering the board ground.

Of the various decorative parts, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), and the door frame metal ground described later. It is transmitted to the frame ground substrate 559 via the wire, then transmitted from the frame ground substrate 559 to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, and removed from the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁That is, in this embodiment, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side.

The door frame 3 is composed of a rectangular frame-shaped door frame base unit (not shown) extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a portion extending from the lower end to a height of about 1/4 of the total height, which is located in front of the door frame base unit. The door frame lower unit 100 provided, the door frame upper unit 200 provided on the upper side of the door frame lower unit 100 and in front of the door frame base unit, the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 of the main body frame 4, and A door frame upper hinge portion and a door frame lower hinge portion (not shown) rotatably and detachably supported by the body frame lower hinge portion 520 are provided.

The door frame base unit includes a door frame base (not shown) having a vertically extending quadrangular (rectangular) outer shape when viewed from the front, and having a game window 201 penetrating in the front and rear, and a door frame base on the rear side of the door frame base. A door frame main relay board (not shown) attached near the right end in rear view at the bottom, a door frame secondary relay board (not shown) attached to the left of the door frame main relay board in rear view, and a door frame secondary relay board (not shown). A rear handle relay board (not shown) mounted on the left side of the rear view, a door frame relay board cover (not shown) covering a portion of the door frame main relay board and a part of the door frame sub relay board from the rear side, and a rear handle relay board (not shown) It has a post-handle relay board cover (not shown) covering the board from the rear side, and a cable cover (not shown) covering a wiring cable (not shown).

The door frame base unit consists of a metal frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit (not shown) attached to the rear side of the door frame base, and a metal door frame upper hinge assembly attached to the door frame reinforcement unit. It comprises a solid 120, a door frame lower hinge member 125, and a metal opening/closing cylinder lock 127 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit.

The door frame reinforcing unit is attached to the rear side of the door frame base to reinforce the door frame base and impart rigidity to the door frame base. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 127 cooperates with the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 and is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 .

In addition to the function of reinforcing the door frame base to impart rigidity, the door frame reinforcing unit also functions as a door frame metal ground. properly connected. The frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facilities of the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown).

The door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 includes a handle 111 that can be operated by the player to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, a bulging portion 120 bulging forward, and a bulging portion 120. An upper plate 130 provided on the upper surface of the game area 5a for storing game balls B to be hit into the game area 5a, and a lower plate 140 provided below the upper plate 130 for storing game balls B, A door frame effect device 150 is provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion for presenting a predetermined effect to the player, and a door frame effect device 150 is provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 and the game ball B in the upper tray 130 is placed on the lower tray. An upper tray ball release button 124 to release to, a ball lending button 125 and a return button 126 provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, and a door frame sub provided behind the ball lending button 125 and the return button 126 A display portion 185 and a lower front speaker 191 provided on the front surface of the bulging portion 120 are provided.

The door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 includes a game window 201 having an inverted U shape on the inner circumference, which allows the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5 to be visually recognized from the front, and a transparent closing glass closing the game window 201. 205, a door frame upper interior decoration unit 210 provided along the inner circumference of the game window 201, a door frame upper exterior decoration unit 220 provided outside the door frame upper interior decoration unit 210, and a door frame. A door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 covering the upper inner decoration unit 210 and the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220, and an upper speaker unit 240 provided on the upper front surface of the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230. there is

The door frame 3 also has a ball feeding unit (not shown) for feeding the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4 . The ball feeding unit has a ball feeding solenoid 105 (see FIG. 67) controlled by the firing control section 372 of the payout control board 370 .

[3-1. Door frame lower unit]
Next, the door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 5 to 13 and the like. FIG. 11 is a cross-sectional view of the door frame lower unit cut at the center in the left-right direction and viewed from the right. FIG. 12(a) is a perspective view showing a state in which the first movable portion of the door frame effect device is moved to the rising end, and (b) is a state in which the effect operation portion is moved to the rising end from the state of (a). It is a perspective view which shows a state. FIG. 13(a) is an enlarged front view of the vicinity of the lower front speaker unit, and (b) is an enlarged front view showing a state in which the lower front speaker grille, the grill decoration frame, and the lattice decoration part are removed in (a). .

The door frame lower unit 100 of the door frame 3 is arranged below the game window 201 closing the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main body frame 4 so as to be visible from the front. The door frame lower unit 100 is provided at the lower right corner in front view, and has a handle unit 110 that can be operated by the player to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a, and a handle unit 110 above and to the left of the handle unit 110. and a bulging portion 120 bulging forward with respect to the surface closing the front surface of the body frame 4 .

In addition, the door frame lower unit 100 is provided so as to surround the device placement portion 123 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120, an upper plate 130 for storing the game balls B, and a horizontal direction center below the upper plate 130. A lower plate 140 provided on the left side for storing game balls B, and a door frame effect device provided in a device placement portion 123 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 and capable of presenting a predetermined effect to the player. 150 , a door frame sub-display portion 185 provided in the upper right corner when viewed from the front, and a lower front speaker unit 190 provided in front of the bulging portion 120 .

[3-1a. handle unit]
The handle unit 110 of the lower door frame unit 100 includes a handle 111 that can be gripped and rotated by the player, a handle cover 112 provided on the front side of the handle 111, and a handle 111 rotatably supported. and a handle base 113 which The handle unit 110 is provided in a handle base 113, and includes a handle rotation detection sensor 114 (see FIG. 67) for detecting the rotation angle of the handle 111, and a sensor for detecting that the player is touching the handle 111. It has a handle touch sensor 115 for detection, a handle return spring (not shown) that biases the handle 111 counterclockwise, and a single button 116 that can be pressed by the player.

The handle unit 110 is inclined so that the rotation axis of the handle 111 moves rightward as it goes forward. As a result, the player can easily grasp the handle 111 of the handle unit 110 and can perform the rotation operation without discomfort. Further, the handle unit 110 is configured so that the handle base 113 can extend and contract in the direction in which the rotating shaft of the handle 111 extends, and can be held at a desired extended and contracted position. As a result, the position of the handle 111 in the front-rear direction can be adjusted, so that the handle 111 can be operated at a position that is easy for the player to operate.

The handle 111 is supported by the handle base 113 so as to be rotatable only within a predetermined angular range. The handle 111 has a plurality of (here, four) protrusions spaced apart in the circumferential direction and projecting from the outer peripheral surface. The handle cover 112 is translucent, and can be decorated with light of various colors by a plurality of full-color LEDs arranged on the rear side.

A steering wheel rotation detection sensor 114 of the steering wheel unit 110 is a variable resistor whose internal resistance changes according to the rotation angle of the steering wheel 111 . According to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 114 that changes due to the rotating operation of the handle 111, the driving force of the shooting solenoid 331 in the ball shooting device 540 described later changes, and the game ball is shot with the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 111. B can be driven into the game area 5a.

The handle touch sensor of the handle unit 110 detects electrostatic capacity of the handle 111 and the like. When the player touches the handle 111 or the like, the static capacitance of the handle 111 or the like changes. detect. In this embodiment, when the handle 111 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 115 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 114 is received, and the strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 111 is received. , the driving of the firing solenoid 331 is controlled, and the game ball B can be hit.

That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 111 in some way without touching the handle 111, the handle touch sensor 115 does not detect the contact of the player. Therefore, the shooting solenoid 331 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be hit. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 111 in a manner different from the original method to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

When the single-shot button 116 of the handle unit 110 is pressed by the player while rotating the handle 111 , the firing solenoid 331 is stopped by the firing control section 372 of the payout control board 370 . As a result, the shooting of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotating operation of the handle 111.例文帳に追加By canceling the pressing operation of the single-shot button 116, the game ball B can be hit again into the game area 5a with the hitting strength before the single-shot button 116 is operated.

[3-1b. Bulging part]
The bulging portion 120 of the door frame 3 is formed in a T shape with a short vertically extending axis when viewed from the front, and has a rear end side extending in the left-right direction of the door frame 3 when viewed from above. It is formed in an isosceles trapezoidal shape such that the width of the entire width becomes narrower toward the front (see FIG. 10, etc.). The bulging portion 120 bulges forward with a length slightly longer than half of the full width in the left-right direction. The upper surface of the bulging portion 120 is slightly inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so as to be positioned downward toward the front.

The bulging portion 120 bulges forward over the entire height from the lower end to the upper surface of the door frame 3 at the central portion obtained by dividing the entire width of the door frame 3 into three equal parts in the left-right direction. ) bulges forward from the top to about 1/3 of the total height from the bottom end of the door frame 3 to the top surface. As a result, the shape of the bulging portion 120 when viewed from the front is T-shaped. The bulging portion 120 has a square speaker mounting opening 120a which is open at the lower part of the center of the front surface. A lower front speaker unit 190 is attached to the speaker attachment opening 120a.

In addition, the bulging portion 120 has a vertically extending sound emission slit 120b and a heat dissipation slit on both left and right side surfaces of the vertically extending portion (the portion where the speaker mounting opening 120a is opened) in the front view T shape. 120c are provided. The sound emitting slit 120b is for emitting sound from a lower front speaker 191, which will be described later, to the outside. Also, the heat radiation slit 120c is for releasing heat from the first elevation drive motor 175b, the second elevation drive motor 182, the lower front speaker 191, etc. in the door frame effect device 150, which will be described later, to the outside.

The bulging portion 120 includes a bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 provided on the upper edge of the front surface, a bulging portion lower decorative portion 122 provided on the lower edge of the front surface, and a rear end on the upper surface at the center in the left-right direction. A device placement portion 123 provided so as to protrude forward from the side, an upper tray ball ejection button 124 provided on the upper surface for releasing the game ball B in the upper tray 130 to the lower tray 140, and an upper tray ball. A ball lending button 125 and a returning button 126 provided behind the withdrawal button 124 are provided.

The bulging upper decorative portion 121 and the bulging lower decorative portion 122 are milky white with translucency and are formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. The bulging upper decorative portion 121 extends along the upper edge of the front surface of the bulging portion 120 and is provided to decorate the front upper edge of the upper plate 130 to be described. The swelling upper decorative portion 121 has a plurality of LEDs 121a therein (see FIG. 16). The plurality of LEDs 121a are arranged in a row in the extending direction of the bulging upper decorative portion 121 . These plurality of LEDs 121a are full-color LEDs.

In the bulging upper decorative portion 121, the distance between the two rear ends separated in the left-right direction is within the upper part separated in the left-right direction in the door-frame upper inner decorative unit 210 of the door-frame upper unit 200, which will be described later. It matches the interval between the lower ends of the decorative portion 212 . The bulge upper decoration part 121 is formed to match the upper inner decoration part 212 in the state assembled to the door frame 3, and forms one continuous decoration together with the upper inner decoration part 212. there is The bulging upper decorative portion 121, together with the upper internal decorative portion 212, constitutes a first surrounding light area LA1 for decorating the area around the game window 201 with light emission.

In addition, the bulging upper decorative portion 121 decorates the upper side of the front peripheral wall 134 of the upper plate 130 and raises the front wall (front peripheral wall 134) of the upper plate 130. As shown in FIG. The bulging portion upper decorative portion 121 is configured such that part of the light from the LED 121a is irradiated into the upper plate 130 (inside the storage area 131), and the game stored in the storage area 131 is provided. The sphere B can be illuminated with light to be decorated with light.

The bulging portion lower decorative portion 122 extends along the lower edge of the front surface of the bulging portion 120 . The bulge lower decorative portion 122 has a plurality of LEDs 122a therein (see FIG. 16). The plurality of LEDs 122a are arranged in a row in the direction in which the lower decorative portion 122 extends. These plurality of LEDs 122a are full-color LEDs.

The device placement portion 123 is formed in a shape that is a combination of a rectangle elongated in the left and right direction and an isosceles trapezoid whose base is the front side of the rectangle when viewed from above. The device placement portion 123 has a width in the left-right direction on the rear end side that is approximately half the full width of the door frame 3 . The device placement portion 123 is open at the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 and is formed in a container shape extending into the bulging portion 120 from above.

The upper tray ball ejection button 124 is provided at the right corner of the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 on the right side of the upper tray 130 . By pressing the upper tray ball ejection button 124 downward, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be released from the outlet 136 to the lower tray 140 . This upper tray ball ejection button 124 releases the game ball B in the upper tray 130 to the lower tray 140 only while it is pressed, and when the pressure is released, it moves upward and returns to the original state, Discharge to lower tray 140 is stopped.

The upper tray ball ejection button 124 is formed in a square outer shape. The upper tray ball ejection button 124 has a light-emitting decorative portion 124a that emits light from an LED arranged below. The light-emitting decorative portion 124 a is arranged so as to surround the outer circumference of the top tray ball eject button 124 . By causing the light-emitting decorative portion 124a to emit light, the upper tray ball release button 124 can be decorated with light-emitting.

The ball lending button 125 is arranged on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 behind the upper tray ball ejecting button 124 . The ball lending button 125 has a circular outer shape. The return button 126 is arranged to the right of the ball lending button 125 on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 . The return button 126 has an equilateral triangular outer shape.

The ball lending button 125 is pressed after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1, and a predetermined number of game balls B are raised. The game ball B is supplied to the tray 130 and rented out to the player. When the return button 126 is pressed, the cash or prepaid card put into the ball lending machine is returned after subtracting the amount of the rented game ball B. The remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards thrown into the ball lending machine is displayed on the door frame sub-display section 185 .

[3-1c. Fine plate]
The upper plate 130 of the door frame 3 is recessed downward on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 and has a storage area 131 in which game balls B are stored. The storage region 131 is connected to a front region 131a (a portion surrounded by a dashed line in FIG. 15) on the front side of the device placement portion 123 and side regions 131b on both the left and right sides of the device placement portion 123. (A portion surrounded by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 15).

The front region 131a has a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction. The left side region 131b extends in the front-rear direction so that the width in the left-right direction becomes narrower from the rear end toward the front region 131a. The right side region 131b extends from the side of the front region 131a at the front end partway so that the width in the left-right direction increases toward the rear, and then extends in the front-rear direction so that the width narrows toward the rear end. extended. The upper plate 130 (storage area 131 ) is formed so as to surround the front side and the left and right outer sides of the device placement portion 123 .

The upper plate 130 has a bottom wall 132 forming a bottom surface, a rear peripheral wall 133 rising upward from the rear end of the bottom wall 132, and a front peripheral wall rising upward from the front end of the bottom wall 132. 134, a supply port 135 that opens forward at the rear end of the left side region 131b, a delivery port 136 that opens forward at the rear end of the right side region 131b, and a delivery port 136. and an aligning part 137 which is provided in the vicinity of and aligns the game balls B toward the delivery port 136. - 特許庁

A bottom wall 132 of the upper tray 130 is inclined downward from the supply port 135 side toward the delivery port 136 . The front peripheral wall 134 and the rear peripheral wall 133 rise substantially vertically. Surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134 are mirror-finished. The top plate 130 forms a storage area 131 with a bottom wall 132 , a rear peripheral wall 133 and a front peripheral wall 134 . The depth of the upper plate 130 (the height from the bottom wall 132 to the upper ends of the rear peripheral wall 133 and the front peripheral wall 134) is formed deeper than the diameter of the game ball B even at the shallowest portion (near the supply port 135).

The supply port 135 is for supplying the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 of the main body frame 4 into the storage area 131 . The delivery port 136 is for delivering the game balls B stored in the storage area 131 from the storage area 131 to the ball launching device 540 and the lower tray 140 . The alignment part 137 is bent downward so that the bottom wall 132 is lowered toward the delivery port 136 near the boundary between the rectangle and the isosceles trapezoid in the device arrangement part 123, which is a combination of the rectangle and the isosceles trapezoid in plan view. ing.

In addition, the upper plate 130 is provided with a storage light-emitting decorative portion 138 having a plurality of LEDs 138a capable of irradiating light into the storage area 131. As shown in FIG. A plurality of LEDs 138a of the storage light-emitting decorative portion 138 are provided on the rear peripheral wall 133, and are positioned above the bottom wall 132 by half of the outer diameter of the game ball B and substantially parallel to the upper end of the rear peripheral wall 133. is provided. These LEDs 138a are full color LEDs. By causing the LED 138a of the storage light-emitting decoration part 138 to emit light, the inside of the storage area 131 and the game ball B stored in the storage area 131 can be decorated with light emission.

The upper plate 130 is provided with a bulge upper decorative portion 121 of the bulging portion 120 at the upper end of the front peripheral wall 134. The bulge upper decorative portion 121 raises the front end side of the storage area 131 to allow more storage space. Game balls B can be stored. Further, the upper plate 130 is configured such that part of the light from the LED 121a of the bulging upper decorative portion 121 is irradiated into the storage area 131, and the light from the bulging upper decorative portion 121 also emits light. A game ball B in the storage area 131 is decorated with light emission.

The upper plate 130 has a front region 131a on the front side of the device placement portion 123 where the door frame effect device 150 is placed, and side regions 131b on both left and right sides. Since the game balls B can be stored on the front side, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be easily seen by the player. In addition, in the upper plate 130, the two side regions 131b connected by the front region 131a are regions extending back and forth, so that the game balls B stored in the side regions 131b are also stored in addition to the front region 131a. , can be made easier to see from the player's side.

Therefore, since the game balls B in the upper tray 130 can be easily seen, it is possible to arouse the player's awareness of the amount of the game balls B stored. is consumed and the amount of storage decreases, the player can easily recognize the decrease in the amount of storage, and the game balls B can be replenished in the upper tray 130, so that the player does not notice. The game balls B are prevented from disappearing from the upper tray 130, the sudden interruption of the game can be prevented, the disappointment of the player due to the interruption of the game is prevented, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. can be suppressed.

In addition, in the upper tray 130, the game balls B in the front area 131a and the two side areas 131b can be easily seen from the player side, so that the player's line of sight is directed downward from the game area 5a. Only by dropping the ball onto the device 150, it can be immediately recognized whether or not there is a game ball B in the front area 131a, and the player does not need to carefully confirm whether or not there is a game ball B in the upper tray 130. - 特許庁, it becomes possible to make the player concentrate on the game easily, to enjoy the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, in the upper tray 130, the game balls B supplied from the supply port 135 into the storage area 131 are delivered out of the storage area 131 from the delivery port 136 through the front area 131a. When the game ball B in the plate 130 is consumed, the game ball B flows in front of the player's eyes (front area 131a), making it easy for the player to recognize the consumption speed and consumption amount of the game ball B. It is possible to make it easier to achieve the effects described above.

Further, the upper plate 130 is provided with a storage light-emitting decorative portion 138 that irradiates light into the storage area 131, and the light from the storage light-emitting decorative portion 138 (LED 138a) is reflected upward by the game ball B. The game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be glittered and decorated with the light emitted from the light emitting decoration part 138, and the player can enjoy the light emitting decoration of the game balls B. Thus, the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130, and the amount of the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be confirmed to achieve the same effects as described above. can.

In addition, since the inner surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134 of the upper tray 130 are mirror-finished, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 are Since it is reflected on the peripheral wall of 130, the player can have the illusion that the game balls B are stored beyond the peripheral wall, and it appears that many game balls B are stored on the upper tray 130.例文帳に追加be able to.

Furthermore, in the upper tray 130, since the alignment part 137 is provided near the delivery port 136 to align the game balls B, it is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the vicinity of the delivery port 136. The game balls B stored in the tray 130 can be smoothly delivered from the delivery port 136 to the ball launching device 540 and the lower tray 140. - 特許庁Therefore, interruption of the game due to clogging of the game balls B can be avoided, and the player can enjoy the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, in the upper plate 130, the delivery port 136 arranged in the right side region 131b is visible from the front, so that the game ball B is ejected from the delivery port 136, which could not be seen in the past pachinko machines. It is possible to see how the game is sent out, which surprises the player and strongly attracts the player's interest, thus providing the same effects as those described above.

[3-1d. lower plate]
The lower plate 140 is provided below the upper plate 130 and to the left of the central portion of the bulging portion 120 that bulges forward, and is formed in the shape of a shallow plate that opens upward. A space is provided between the lower plate 140 and the upper plate 130 (the lower surface of the left portion of the bulging portion 120) to allow the player's hand to be inserted. The front surface of the lower plate 140 is formed in substantially the same shape as the front surface of the bulging portion 120 in plan view.

The lower tray 140 is formed at the lowest part of the bottom wall, and has an openable and closable lower tray ball extraction hole 141 (see FIG. 9). A lower tray ball ejection button 142 for ejecting game balls B downward, and a full tank detection sensor 143 (see FIG. 67) for detecting that the lower tray 140 is full of game balls B are provided. are doing.

The game ball B in the upper tray 130 is supplied to the lower tray 140 by operating the upper tray ball ejection button 124 . Also, the lower tray 140 is supplied with the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 in a state in which the upper tray 130 is filled with the game balls B. As shown in FIG. When the lower tray 140 is filled with game balls B, the full tank detection sensor 143 detects that the lower tray 140 is full. is temporarily suspended. After that, when the lower tray 140 is no longer full (the full-tank detection sensor 143 becomes non-detected), the temporary suspension of dispensing is released.

The lower tray ball release button 142 is provided on the front surface of the lower tray 140 and has a rectangular outer shape. When the lower tray ball removal button 142 is pushed backward, the lower tray ball removal hole 141 is opened and the lower tray ball removal button 142 is held in a pressed state. When the lower tray ball removal button 142 is pushed further rearward in this state, the lower tray ball removal hole 141 is closed and the lower tray ball removal button 142 moves forward to return to the original state.

The lower tray ball ejection button 142 has a light-emitting decorative portion 142a that emits light from an LED (not shown). The light-emitting decorative portion 142a is arranged so as to surround both the left and right sides and the upper side of the lower tray ball release button 142. As shown in FIG. By causing the light-emitting decorative portion 142a to emit light, the lower tray ball release button 142 can be light-emitting and decorated. For example, during a "jackpot" game in which a large number of game balls B are paid out, the player's attention can be drawn to the lower tray 140 by decorating the lower tray ball ejection button 142 with the light emitting decoration part 142a. By operating the lower tray ball eject button 142, the game balls B in the lower tray 140 can be ejected into a dollar box or the like below, and the lower tray 140 becomes full and the payout of the game balls B is temporarily stopped. can be avoided.

[3-1e. Overall configuration of the door frame production device]
The door frame effect device 150 is arranged in the device arrangement portion 123 provided on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 . The door frame effect device 150 includes a transparent device cover 151 that closes the device placement portion 123 that opens upward, a door frame effect display device 152 that is provided so as to be visible from the front through the device cover 151, a lower speaker unit 153 provided in front of the door frame effect display device 152; A production operation unit 160 that is provided in a movable part 155 so that it can be raised and lowered and can be operated by a player, a first lifting mechanism 170 that raises and lowers the first movable part 155, and a second lifting mechanism that raises and lowers the production operation unit 160. a mechanism 180;

[3-1e-1. Equipment cover]
The device cover 151 has the same shape as the device placement portion 123 in plan view, and is formed in a shape that combines a horizontally elongated quadrangle and an isosceles trapezoid with the front side of the quadrangle as the base. The device cover 151 has an isosceles trapezoidal portion with an opening 151a that is wide open in an isosceles trapezoidal shape, and a rectangular portion that is bent and inclined such that the rear end side is upward in the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction. It has a surface portion 151b and a plurality of grille holes 151c penetrating in a hexagonal shape near the front end of the square portion. The entire device cover 151 is inclined so that the front end side is lowered. A first movable portion 155 is inserted through the opening 151 a of the device cover 151 .

The device cover 151 has the upper end of the inclined surface portion 151 b aligned with the lower end of the door frame upper cover 232 of the door frame upper unit 200 . Further, the device cover 151 is inclined such that the front side thereof is lower than the inclined surface portion 151b. Thereby, even if the game ball B is placed on the upper surface of the device cover 151, it can roll forward and be released into the upper tray 130. - 特許庁

[3-1e-2. Door frame effect display device]
The door frame effect display device 152 has a display screen for displaying a effect image formed in a rectangular shape elongated in the left and right direction, and the length in the left and right direction is slightly shorter than 1/2 of the full width of the door frame 3. - 特許庁The door frame effect display device 152 is provided in an inclined state so that the lower side is located forward with respect to the upper side. That is, the door frame effect display device 152 is directed toward the vicinity of the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 . The door frame effect display device 152 has an upper side positioned near the upper end of the door frame lower unit 100 and a lower side positioned below the bottom surface of the front area 131 a of the upper tray 130 . The door frame effect display device 152 has an upper side located near the rear end of the lower door frame unit 100 (device cover 151) and a lower side located near the front end of the inclined surface portion 151b of the device cover 151. The door frame effect display device 152 is a liquid crystal display device with a screen ratio of 16:9.

[3-1e-3. Lower speaker unit]
The lower speaker unit 153 includes a pair of lower speakers 153a spaced apart to the left and right, a lower speaker base 153b to which the pair of lower speakers 153a are attached, and a lower speaker base 153b attached to the lower speaker 153a. and a lower speaker decoration portion 153c that decorates the outer periphery and between the lower speakers 153a. The pair of lower speakers 153a are tweeters that output high-pitched sounds.

The lower speaker base 153b has a front surface that is inclined so that the rear edge is positioned upward with respect to the front edge, and a rear surface that extends downward from the rear edge of the front surface perpendicularly to the front surface. It is formed in the shape of a container that is open to the left and right and is long. In addition, the lower speaker base 153b has circular mounting holes formed in the front surface thereof so as to be spaced apart from each other to the left and right. The front surface of the lower speaker base 153b is inclined at a smaller angle from the horizontal than the angle of inclination from the horizontal of the door frame effect display device 152 (see FIG. 11, etc.).

The lower speaker decorative portion 153c is attached to the front surface of the lower speaker base 153b, and includes an annular portion arranged on the outer periphery of the lower speaker 153a and a plurality of portions arranged between the pair of lower speakers 153a. It is composed of an arc-shaped part. The lower speaker decoration part 153c has translucency, and can be decorated with light emission by causing an LED (not shown) mounted on the lower speaker decoration substrate to emit light.

The lower speaker unit 153 is mounted inside the lower speaker base 153b so that the pair of lower speakers 153a face forward from the mounting holes of the lower speaker base 153b. As a result, the pair of lower speakers 153a are directed toward the vicinity of the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. As shown in FIG. The lower speaker unit 153 has an upper end located at a height slightly lower than the center of the door frame effect display device 152 in the vertical direction, and a lower end located at a height slightly lower than the lower end of the door frame effect display device 152. there is

The front end of the lower speaker unit 153 is located forward from the rear end of the opening 151 a of the device cover 151 (slightly rearward from the effect operation section 160 ), and the rear end of the lower speaker unit 153 is located at the front end of the inclined surface portion 151 b of the device cover 151 . located nearby. The lower speaker unit 153 is visible through the transparent device cover 151 . Also, the sound output from the pair of lower speakers 153a can be radiated to the outside (outside the pachinko machine 1) through the grill hole 151c of the device cover 151 and the grill hole 156b of the first movable portion main body 156.

In addition, the lower speaker unit 153 has the lower speaker 153a and the speaker grill of the lower speaker 153a (the device cover 151 and the first movable part main body) by decorating the lower speaker decoration part 153c with the LED of the lower speaker decoration board (not shown). 156 (upper wall of 156)), and the player can see the luminous decoration inside the speaker, which has not been seen in conventional pachinko machines.

[3-1e-4. First moving part]
The first movable portion 155 includes a first movable portion main body 156 which is container-shaped and transparent and whose rear and lower sides are open, a first movable portion base 157 attached to the lower side of the first movable portion main body 156, a It comprises a first movable part cover 158 attached to the upper surface of one movable part main body 156 and a first movable part decoration board 159 attached to the inside of the side surface of the first movable part main body 156 (see FIG. 11). and FIG. 12). The first movable portion 155 is arranged in the opening 151 a of the device cover 151 . The first movable portion 155 is supported by the first elevating mechanism 170 so as to be able to ascend and descend, and is raised and lowered by the first elevating mechanism 170 .

The shape of the first movable portion main body 156 in plan view is similar to the shape of the opening 151a of the device cover 151, and is shaped like a combination of a rectangle elongated in the left and right direction and an isosceles trapezoid whose base is the front side of the rectangle. formed into a shape. The first movable portion main body 156 has an upper wall shaped like a combination of a quadrangle and an isosceles trapezoid, and side walls extending downward from the sides of the upper wall except for the rear side, and the rear and lower sides are open. It is formed in a container shape. The upper wall (upper surface) of the first movable portion main body 156 is inclined so that the front side is lower and curved so that the center in the left-right direction is higher.

The first movable portion main body 156 has an opening 156a that penetrates in a rectangular shape that is long in the left and right direction near the front end of the upper wall, and a plurality of hexagonal grills that penetrate through the upper wall except for the opening 156a. It has a hole 156b and a plurality of rectangular through-holes 156c that are arranged in a line in the circumferential direction in the side wall. The lower end of the opening frame portion 158a of the first movable portion cover 158 is inserted into the opening portion 156a. The through hole 156c is formed in a size that allows the LED 159a mounted on the first movable part decoration board 159 to face outward.

The first movable portion base 157 is formed in a flat plate shape elongated in the left and right direction. The first movable portion base 157 has a width in the front-rear direction that is shorter than the width in the front-rear direction of the opening 156 a of the first movable portion main body 156 . The first movable portion base 157 is attached to the first movable portion main body 156 so that the front end thereof is positioned substantially at the same position in the front-rear direction as the front end of the opening 156 a of the first movable portion main body 156 . The first movable portion base 157 is attached to the first movable portion main body 156 in a horizontal state. A pair of elevating sliders 172 of the first elevating mechanism 170 are attached to the lower surface of the first movable part base 157, and a second elevating base 181 of the second elevating mechanism 180 is attached to the upper surface.

The first movable part cover 158 has the same outer shape and size as the upper wall of the first movable part main body 156 . The first movable part cover 158 has a horizontally long rectangular opening frame part 158a corresponding to the opening part 156a of the first movable part main body 156, and a plurality of louver parts 158b extending left and right and separated in the front-rear direction. ,have. The first movable part cover 158 is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface. The lower end of the opening frame portion 158 a of the first movable portion cover 158 protrudes downward from the lower end of the louver portion 158 b and is inserted into the opening portion 156 a of the first movable portion main body 156 . A rendering operation unit 160 is inserted in the frame of the opening frame portion 158a.

The louver portion 158b of the first movable portion cover 158 extends with a constant width except for both ends in the left-right direction, and is formed in a triangular shape such that both ends in the left-right direction spread obliquely forward. . A plurality of (here, five) louver portions 158b are provided at intervals slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the game ball B can be stored between the louver portions 158b. Incidentally, one game ball B is placed between the first louver portions 158b from the front, two game balls B are placed between the second louver portions 158b, and the third louver portions 158b are placed between the third louver portions 158b. Three game balls B can be respectively stored between them (see FIG. 15).

A plurality of LEDs 159 a are mounted on the front surface of the first movable part decoration board 159 . The plurality of LEDs 159 a are arranged at positions corresponding to the through holes 156 c of the first movable portion body 156 . The first movable part decoration board 159 is attached to the inner side of the side wall of the first movable part main body 156, so that the plurality of mounted LEDs 159a face outward from the through holes 156c of the side wall. The LED 159a of the first movable part decoration board 159 is a full-color LED.

When the LED 159a is lit with the first movable portion 155 lowered (normal state), the first movable portion decoration substrate 159 is arranged such that the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 and the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156 are aligned. Through the gap, the upper part of the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 can be decorated with light. In addition, when the LED 159a is caused to emit light while the first movable portion 155 is raised, the first movable portion decoration substrate 159 can decorate the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156 with light emission, and the inside of the storage area 131 and Light can be emitted forward (toward the player).

[3-1e-5. Production operation section]
The effect operation unit 160 is provided so as to be able to move up and down with respect to the first movable unit 155, and is a so-called push button that can be pressed by the player. The effect operation unit 160 is supported so as to be vertically movable by the second lifting mechanism 180, and is lifted and lowered by the second lifting mechanism 180 (see FIGS. 11 and 12).

The effect operation unit 160 includes a light-transmitting pressing operation unit 161 having the characters “PUSH” formed on the upper surface, and an operating unit arranged below the pressing operation unit 161 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface. An operating portion movable base 163 on which a pressing operation portion 161 and an operating portion decorative substrate 162 are attached on the upper surface thereof, and a second elevating mechanism 180 which supports the operating portion movable base 163 so as to be able to move up and down. An operation portion base 164 attached to the first movable portion 155 via (the second elevating base 181), an operation portion spring that biases the operation portion movable base 163 upward, and a biasing force of the operation portion spring. and a press detection sensor 165 (see FIG. 67) that detects the press operation portion 161 that has moved downward against the pressure.

The pressing operation part 161 has a rectangular shape elongated in the left and right direction, and the character "PUSH" is formed in relief on the upper surface thereof. The pressing operation portion 161 has an outer peripheral shape that is slightly smaller than the inside of the opening frame portion 158 a of the first movable portion cover 158 .

A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the operation section decoration board 162 are full-color LEDs. On the upper surface of the operation section decoration board 162, a first LED that emits light upward and a second LED that emits light outward along the upper surface of the operation section decoration board 162 are mounted. The operating section decoration board 162 can light-embellish the pressing operating section 161 (characters of "PUSH") by causing the first LED to emit light. In addition, by illuminating the second LED, the peripheral wall of the operating section movable base 163 can be decorated with light, and when the effect operating section 160 is at the lowered end, the opening frame section 158a of the first movable section cover 158 can be opened. Can be decorated with luminescence.

The operation unit movable base 163 is formed in a box shape elongated in the left and right direction with an open bottom. The operation portion movable base 163 is formed slightly smaller than the outer circumference of the pressing operation portion 161 . A pressing operation portion 161 is attached to the upper surface of the operation portion movable base 163 so as to sandwich the operation portion decoration substrate 162 . The operating portion movable base 163 is inserted into the operating portion base 164 from below.

The operation unit base 164 has a box-shaped portion that is large enough to be inserted into the inside of the operation unit movable base 163 and has an open top that is long in the left and right direction. and a flange-like portion protruding outward. The operating section base 164 supports the operating section movable base 163 so that it can move up and down within a predetermined range. A second elevating mechanism 180 is attached to the lower surface of the operating portion base 164 .

The operation spring has its upper end in contact with the lower surface of the upper wall of the operation portion movable base 163 and its lower end in contact with the upper surface of the lower wall of the operation portion base 164 . The pressing detection sensor 165 is attached inside the operation portion base 164 and detects a detection piece (not shown) of the operation portion movable base 163 to detect the pressing operation of the pressing operation portion 161 via the operation portion movable base 163 . detect.

[3-1e-6. First lifting mechanism]
The first elevating mechanism 170 is attached inside the bulging portion 120 as shown in FIG. 11 and serves to elevate the first movable portion 155 . The first elevating mechanism 170 includes a pair of elevating rails 171 that are attached to the inside of the bulging portion 120 so as to be separated from each other and extend vertically, and a pair of elevating rails 171 that are guided in the vertical direction by the pair of elevating rails 171 . A slider 172, a connecting portion 173 that connects the pair of lifting sliders 172, and a pole whose one end is rotatably attached to the lifting slider 172 and whose other end is rotatably attached to the bulging portion 120. A pair of elevating arms 174 shaped like a pair of elevating arms 174, a first elevating drive mechanism 175 that rotates the pair of elevating arms 174, a first elevating detection sensor 176 that detects the elevating position of the elevating slider 172 (first movable part 155), It has

The pair of elevating rails 171 are left and right separated by an interval longer than the length of the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161) in the left-right direction. A pair of elevating rails 171 are attached inside the bulging portion 120 so as to extend vertically. The pair of elevating sliders 172 have upper ends attached to the lower surface of the first movable portion base 157 of the first movable portion 155 and lower ends attached to the connecting portion 173 .

The pair of elevating arms 174 are attached to the corresponding elevating sliders 172 at their front end sides so as to be rotatable around axes extending in the left-right direction and slidable in the longitudinal direction of the elevating arms 174 . . The pair of lifting arms 174 are attached at their rear end sides to the bulging portion 120 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the left-right direction. Each of the pair of elevating arms 174 has a slit 174a extending in the longitudinal direction at a position closer to the front end than the center in the longitudinal direction.

The first lifting drive mechanism 175 is provided for each pair of lifting arms 174 . That is, a pair of the first lifting drive mechanisms 175 are provided. The first elevating mechanism 170 rotates the pair of elevating arms 174 in a direction in which the front end sides of the pair of elevating arms 174 move upward by the first elevating drive mechanism 175, respectively, thereby moving the tips of the pair of elevating arms 174 upward. The first movable portion 155 (the production operation portion 160) can be moved up and down via a pair of lifting sliders 172 to which are attached respectively.

More specifically, the first elevation drive mechanism 175 is slidably inserted into the slit 174a of the elevation arm 174 and revolves around an axis extending in the left-right direction. It has a pin 175a and a first lifting drive motor 175b that revolves the first lifting pin 175a. More specifically, the first elevation drive mechanism 175 includes a flat drive base 175c that is attached inside the bulging portion 120 and extends in the front-rear direction and the up-down direction, and a drive base 175c that extends in the left-right direction on the drive base 175c. A lifting gear 175d having a spur gear shape and having a first lifting pin 175a attached to a position eccentric to the rotation axis, which is mounted rotatably about an axis, engages with the lifting gear 175d to provide a first lifting pin 175a. and a driving gear 175e attached to the rotation shaft of the lifting drive motor 175b.

In this embodiment, two first elevation drive motors 175b are attached to the drive base 175c, and the drive gears 175e attached to the rotating shafts of the respective first elevation drive motors 175b are attached to the elevation gears 175d. They mesh with each other. That is, one lifting gear 175d is rotated by two first lifting drive motors 175b.

The first elevation drive mechanism 175 rotates the drive gears 175e attached to the rotary shafts of the two first elevation drive motors 175b in the same direction. 175d rotates, the first lifting pin 175a revolves around the axis of the lifting gear 175d. By revolving the first lifting pin 175a, the first lifting pin 175a slides in the slit 174a of the lifting arm 174 and presses the inside of the slit 174a in the vertical direction, and the lifting arm 174 moves toward the rear end side. is rotated (rotated) around the center. As a result, the front end of the lift arm 174 moves vertically, so that the first movable portion 155 can be lifted or lowered via the lift slider 172 to which the front end of the lift arm 174 is attached.

The first elevation detection sensor 176 enters a detection state when the pair of elevation sliders 172 is positioned at the downward movement end (lowering end). That is, the first elevation detection sensor 176 detects via the elevation slider 172 that the first movable portion 155 is positioned at the lower end.

[3-1e-7. Second lifting mechanism]
The second elevating mechanism 180 is attached to the upper surface of the first movable part base 157 in the first movable part 155, and supports the operation part base 164 of the effect operation part 160 so that it can be raised and lowered. A second lifting drive motor 182 attached to a second lifting base 181, and a second lifting pin 183 attached to the rotation shaft of the second lifting drive motor 182 and revolving at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft. , a lifting transmission piece 184 having a slit 184a extending in the front-rear direction into which a second lifting pin 183 is slidably inserted and whose upper part is attached to the operation unit base 164; and a second up/down detection sensor 180a that detects the up/down of the.

The second elevating base 181 of the second elevating mechanism 180 moves the operation unit base 164 in a direction perpendicular to the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 161 (in the direction in which the inclined axis extends forward as it goes upward). ) so that it can move up and down.

In the second lifting mechanism 180, when the second lifting drive motor 182 causes the second lifting pin 183 to revolve, the second lifting pin 183 slides in the slit 184a of the lifting transmission piece 184 and moves up and down on the inner surface of the slit 184a. direction, and the elevation transmission piece 184 moves in the vertical direction. Since the operation portion base 164 of the effect operation portion 160 is attached to the elevation transmission piece 184 , the effect operation portion 160 can be moved up and down via the elevation transmission piece 184 .

In the second lifting mechanism 180, the second lifting pin 183 is positioned near the rear end of the slit 184a extending in the front-rear direction when the lifting transmission piece 184 (the effect operation unit 160) is positioned at the lower end. there is That is, the second lifting pin 183 is positioned at the bottom dead center. When raising the elevation transmission piece 184 from this state, the second elevation driving motor 182 causes the second elevation pin 183 to revolve so as to have a forward movement vector. As a result, the second lifting pin 183 slides forward in the slit 184a, and the second lifting pin 183 pushes the inner surface of the slit 184a upward, so that the lifting transmission piece 184 moves upward. Become.

As the second lifting pin 183 revolves further, when the line connecting the center of the second lifting pin 183 and the center of revolution passes the central axis of the slit 184a, the second lifting pin 183 moves upward along the inner surface of the slit 184a. While being pressed downward, it slides rearward in the slit 184a. Then, when the second lifting pin 183 reaches the vicinity of the rear end of the slit 184a, the driving of the second lifting drive motor 182 stops, and the revolution of the second lifting pin 183 stops. In this state, the second lift pin 183 is positioned at the top dead center, and the lift transmission piece 184 is positioned at the upper end.

In a state in which the elevation transmission piece 184 (effect operation unit 160) is positioned at the rising end, when a force is applied to move the elevation transmission piece 184 downward by pressing the effect operation unit 160 or the like, Since the second lifting pin 183 is positioned at the top dead center, no force acts on the second lifting pin 183 in the front-rear direction. Therefore, since the second lifting pin 183 does not revolve, the lifting transmission piece 184 does not move downward.

Further, when the effect operation unit 160 is pressed while the elevation transmission piece 184 is positioned at the rising end, the effect operation unit 160 is operated by the player positioned in front of the effect operation unit 160. , a backward motion vector acts in addition to the downward motion vector. On the other hand, in the state of the rising end, the second lifting pin 183 is positioned at the rear end of the slit 184a. The second lifting pin 183 comes into contact with the rear end of the slit 184a to prevent the rotation of the second lifting pin 183, the lifting transmission piece 184 does not move downward, and the effect operation unit 160 is moved to the upper end position. can be maintained.

The second lift detection sensor 180a enters the detection state when the second lift base 181 is positioned at the downward movement end (lower end). In other words, the second elevation detection sensor 180a detects, via the second elevation base 181, that the effect operating section 160 is positioned at the lower end.

[3-1f. Door frame sub-display]
The door frame sub-display unit 185 is arranged on the right side of the door frame effect display device 152 in the door frame effect device 150 and behind the top tray ball removal button 124 , the ball lending button 125 and the return button 126 . The door frame sub-display section 185 is composed of three 7-segment LEDs arranged side by side. The door frame sub-display portion 185 is provided in an inclined state so that the lower end side is located forward with respect to the upper end side. The lower end of the door frame sub-display portion 185 is arranged at the same height as the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 from which the upper tray ball ejection button 124, the ball lending button 125 and the return button 126 protrude.

The door frame sub-display unit 185 includes a frame-shaped sub-display unit decoration frame 186 that illuminates the outer periphery of the three square 7-segment LEDs, and the door frame effect device 150 that covers the three 7-segment LEDs and the sub-display unit decoration frame 186. and a transparent sub-display unit cover 187 inclined at the same angle as the inclined surface portion 151b of the device cover 151 in .

[3-1g. Lower front speaker unit]
As shown in FIGS. 11 and 13, the lower front speaker unit 190 includes a lower front speaker 191 attached behind the speaker mounting opening 120a of the bulging portion 120, and a plurality of grille holes extending through the speaker mounting opening 120a. A lower front speaker grill 192 that closes the lower front speaker grill 192, a horizontal lattice-like grill decoration frame 193 that is arranged in front of the lower front speaker grill 192 and attached to the front surface of the bulging portion 120, and each lattice in the grill decoration frame 193 A rod-shaped lattice decoration part 194 arranged on the rear side of each part, and lattice decoration LEDs 195 provided at both ends of each lattice decoration part 194 and decorating the lattice decoration part 194 with light emission are provided.

The lower front speaker 191 is a woofer that outputs low frequency sound. A lower front speaker grill 192 is mounted inside the bulge 120 . The lower front speaker grill 192 is punching metal.

The grill decoration frame 193 is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface. The grill decoration frame 193 is a square frame along the inner periphery of the speaker mounting opening 120a of the bulging portion 120, and a plurality of vertically spaced apart frames that connect two vertically extending sides of the frame. and a lattice portion of The lattice portion extending left and right of the grille decorative frame 193 has a portion (general portion) extending with a constant width except for both ends in the left and right direction, and both ends in the left and right direction are slanted downward toward the ends. It is formed in a trapezoidal shape that expands to a certain width after being widened.

The lattice decoration part 194 is translucent and formed in a columnar shape elongated in the left-right direction. Both ends of the lattice decoration part 194 in the left-right direction are positioned behind the trapezoidal parts of the lattice part of the grille decoration frame 193, and the remaining parts are positioned below the general parts of the lattice part. As a result, the lattice decoration part 194 can be visually recognized from the front except for both ends. A plurality of lattice decorations 194 are provided in front of the lower front speaker grill 192 . The lattice decoration LED 195 is a full color LED.

The lower front speaker unit 190 can output sounds in the low range (low frequency) among sounds to be output through the lower front speaker 191 . Since the lower front speaker unit 190 faces forward from the front surface of the bulging portion 120 that bulges forward, it imparts sound pressure to the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. can be made In addition, the lower front speaker unit 190 can light-embellish the lattice decoration part 194 by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of lattice decoration LEDs 195, and the grille decoration frame 193 (lower front speaker The front side of the grille 192) can be decorated with light.

[3-1h. cylinder lock]
Next, the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame base unit will be briefly described. The cylinder lock 127 is attached to a cylinder mounting frame of a metal door frame reinforcing unit (not shown), and cooperates with the locking unit 650 to open and close the door frame 3 and the body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the body frame. It is used for opening and closing and locking with 4. The cylinder lock 127 includes a metal cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) extending back and forth, a metal keyhole 128 formed in the front end face of the cylinder body, and a keyhole 128 attached to the rear side of the cylinder body. and a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) which is inserted into and rotates together with a regular metal key.

The cylinder body of the cylinder lock 127 penetrates from the rear through the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit, and the rear end is attached to the front piece portion. The rotation transmission member is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is arranged at positions facing each other across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmission member is formed such that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4, the metal transmission cylinder 654 of the metal locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 is inserted from behind. By inserting the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the keyhole 128) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate. When the rotation transmission member of the cylinder lock 127 in the door frame 3 and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 are in contact with each other when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4, the cylinder lock 127 and locking unit 650 are electrically connected.

When the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 3, the cylinder lock 127 is operated by an official metal lock 127. The key is inserted into the keyhole 128 of the cylinder lock 127 and rotated in a predetermined direction (clockwise or counterclockwise, respectively). A staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall, when inserting a regular metal key into the keyhole 128 of the cylinder lock 127, charges himself/herself and discharges static electricity. , and is transmitted to the cylinder lock 127 . Therefore, in the present embodiment, various substrates (for example, a substrate having a power supply line and a substrate ground line) are not arranged in the vicinity of the cylinder lock 127 in order to prevent electromagnetic noise from entering.

[3-2. Door frame upper unit]
Next, the door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 5 to 10 and 14. FIG. FIG. 14(a) is an enlarged front view of the upper portion of the door frame, and (b) is an enlarged front view showing a state in which the grill decoration frame and the lattice decoration are removed in (a). The door frame upper unit 200 of the door frame 3 has a game window 201 which enables the inside of the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main body frame 4 to be visually recognized from the front when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. A door frame upper unit base 202 is formed in an inverted U shape with an outer periphery that is vertically elongated when viewed from the front and an inner periphery that becomes the game window 201 is opened downward. A transparent closing glass 205 that closes the inverted U-shaped inner periphery (game window 201) of the door frame upper unit base 202 is provided.

In addition, the door frame upper unit 200 includes a door frame upper interior decoration unit 210 provided in a belt shape along the inner circumference of the inverted U shape of the game window 201 on the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, and a door frame upper unit. A door frame top exterior decoration unit 220 provided outside the door frame top interior decoration unit 210 on the front surface of the base 202, a door frame covering the door frame top interior decoration unit 210, and the door frame top exterior decoration unit 220. An upper outer edge decoration unit 230 and an upper speaker unit 240 provided on the upper front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 are provided.

[3-2a. Door frame upper unit base]
The door frame upper unit base 202 forms the rear surface of the door frame upper unit 200 (see FIG. 10). The door frame upper unit base 202 is flat and formed in a gate shape that opens downward. The door frame upper unit base 202 has a vertically elongated quadrangular outer periphery when viewed from the front, and an inverted U shape with an inner periphery opened downward. The size of the inner periphery of the door frame upper unit base 202 is formed larger than the game area 5a of the game board 5 arranged behind.

[3-2b. closing glass]
The closing glass 205 is detachably provided at the rear end of the door frame upper unit base 202 so as to close the inner periphery (game window 201) of the door frame upper unit base 202 (see FIG. 10). . The closing glass 205 prevents the game ball B from falling forward from the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. for closing the front side of the The closing glass 205 is transparent tempered glass.

[3-2c. Door frame upper interior decoration unit]
The upper door frame interior decoration unit 210 includes a wall-like upper inner base 211 that extends along the inner periphery of the door frame upper unit base 202 with a constant width and protrudes forward, and along the upper inner base 211 A semi-cylindrical upper inner decoration part 212 extending and provided at the front end of the upper inner base 211, and an upper inner decoration part 212 provided behind the upper inner decoration part 212 and having a plurality of LEDs 213a mounted on the front surface. A decoration substrate 213 is provided.

The upper inner base 211 is formed in an inverted U shape when viewed from the front. At the front end of the upper inner base 211, a pair of linearly extending portions of the inverted U shape extend vertically in the vertical direction, and the semicircular portions of the inverted U shape extend upward. curved to protrude forward. The upper inner base 211 is formed to be opaque. The interval in the horizontal direction at the lower end of the upper inner base 211 matches the interval between the laterally separated rear ends of the bulging upper decorative portion 121 in the bulging portion 120 of the lower door frame unit 100 .

The upper interior decoration part 212 is milky white with translucency and is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. The upper interior decoration substrate 213 is attached to the upper interior base 211 , and a plurality of LEDs 213 a mounted on the front surface are arranged in rows along the upper interior decoration portion 212 . A plurality of LEDs 213a of the upper interior decoration substrate 213 are full-color LEDs. By appropriately causing the plurality of LEDs 213a of the upper interior decoration substrate 213 to emit light, the upper interior decoration portion 212 can be decorated with light.

The door frame upper interior decoration unit 210 is formed so that the lower end of the upper interior decoration part 212 is aligned with the rear end of the bulge upper decoration part 121 of the bulge part 120 when assembled to the door frame 3 . The upper inner decoration part 212 and the bulging upper decoration part 121 form one continuous decoration.

The upper interior decoration portion 212 of the door frame upper interior decoration unit 210 is combined with the bulging portion upper decoration portion 121 to decorate the area around the game window 201 with light emission. parts). In addition, since the upper interior decoration part 212 is formed milky white, it is possible to reduce the light from the plurality of LEDs 213a and radiate it outward, so that the game window surrounded by the upper interior decoration part 212 It is possible to prevent the inside of 201 from becoming difficult to see due to glare, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the front through the game window 201 in a good condition.

[3-2d. Door frame upper exterior decoration unit]
The door frame upper exterior decorative unit 220 has a rear end attached to the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202, protrudes forward, and includes a plurality of protruding bases 221 that are spaced apart in the vertical direction. , the upper outer crest decoration 222 provided at the front end of the projecting base 221, the upper outer valley decoration 223 arranged between the protruding bases 221, and the rear of the upper outer crest decoration 222, respectively. and an upper outer valley LED 225 arranged behind the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 .

The projecting base 221 is formed to have an isosceles triangle shape when viewed from the side. The projecting base 221 extends in the left-right direction from the outer peripheral surface of the upper inner base 211 to near the left and right side pieces of the door frame upper unit base 202 and extends outward from the upper inner base 211 . The front end of the projecting base 221 projects forward to substantially the same position as the front end of the portion in contact with the upper inner base 211 .

The plurality of upper outer apex decorative portions 222 are formed in a cylindrical shape extending in the left-right direction, and both left and right ends are formed in a hemispherical shape. The outer diameter of the cylinder of the upper outer top decorative portion 222 is approximately one-third the outer diameter of the upper inner decorative portion 212 . The upper outer top decorative portion 222 is formed to have a length corresponding to the length in the horizontal direction of the projecting base 221 provided. These upper outer top decorative portions 222 are translucent.

The upper outer valley decorative portion 223 includes a portion (vertical surface portion) extending parallel to the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 between the protruding bases 221, and the lower surface and upper surface of the protruding base 221 from the upper side and lower side of the portion. and a portion (slanted portion) that obliquely extends to the vicinity of the front end of the projecting base 221 along the . The upper outer valley decorative portion 223 has a mirror-like plated layer on its surface (front surface). The upper outer valley decorative portion 223 has a rectangular opening formed in a portion extending parallel to the front surface of the door frame upper unit base 202 so that the upper outer valley LED 225 arranged in the rear faces forward. ing.

The top rim LED 224 is a full color LED. The upper outer valley LED 225 is a high brightness full color LED.

The door frame upper external decoration unit 220 can light-embellish the upper external apex decorative part 222 by appropriately lighting the upper external apex LED 224 . In addition, the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 can light-embellish the upper outer valley decoration part 223 by appropriately emitting light from the upper outer valley LED 225, and the upper outer top decoration part 222 separated in the vertical direction You can brighten the space between them.

The upper outer top decorative portion 222 and the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 of the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 are the second surrounding light area LA2 (Fig. 16 The part surrounded by the two-dot chain line in ) is configured. In addition, the front ends of the upper outer peak decorative portion 222 and the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 of the upper door frame outer decoration unit 220 are located behind the front ends of the upper inner decoration portion 212 of the upper door frame inner decoration unit 210. Therefore, the light emitted from the upper outer peak LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 to the game window 201 side is blocked by the upper inner base 211 and the upper inner decorative portion 212, and the upper outer peak decorative portion 222 and the upper outer Even if the valley decoration part 223 is decorated with light emission, the inside of the game window 201 is prevented from becoming difficult to see due to glare, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the front through the game window 201 in a good condition.

[3-2e. Door frame upper outer edge decoration unit]
The upper door frame outer edge decoration unit 230 includes a plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 arranged in rows along the outer peripheral edge (both left and right sides and upper side) of the upper door frame unit base 202 and the outer periphery of the upper door frame unit base 202. A door frame upper cover 232 that is attached to the edge and covers the door frame upper inner decoration unit 210 and the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220, and an opaque decoration part 233 provided on both left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232. ing. The plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 are full color LEDs.

The door frame upper cover 232 includes a pair of side walls extending forward from portions near the left and right ends of the door frame upper unit base 202, and connecting the upper sides of the pair of side walls to close the upper end of the door frame upper unit base 202. It is composed of a top wall extending forward from a part and a front wall connecting the front sides of a pair of side walls and the front sides of the top wall, and is formed into a box shape that is open at the rear and bottom. It is The door frame upper cover 232 is entirely transparent.

The door frame upper cover 232 is formed in a shape along the shape of the front end of the upper interior decoration part 212 so that the front end of the side wall is positioned slightly forward of the front end of the upper interior decoration part 212 . Specifically, the front end of the side wall of the door frame upper cover 232 extends vertically from the lower end to the height near the upper end of the linearly extending inverted U-shaped portion of the game window 201, from which the door frame upper unit base 202 extends. It curves and extends in an arc shape so as to be located forward as it goes upward to approximately the same height as the state. In addition, the front ends of the left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232 are curved upward in an arc shape, and are curved toward each other as they go upward.

The door frame upper cover 232 is formed with a pair of speaker mounting openings 232a to which the decorative grille frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240 and the like are mounted at both right and left corners of the upper part of the front wall.

The opaque decorative portions 233 are provided on the outer surfaces of the left and right side walls of the door frame upper cover 232 . The opaque decorative portion 233 is formed with a slit 233a extending back and forth at the same height as the projecting base 221 in the door frame upper external decorative unit 220. As shown in FIG. A part of the transparent side wall of the door frame upper cover 232 faces outward through the slit 233 a of the opaque decorative portion 233 .

The door frame top outer edge decoration unit 230 covers the door frame top interior decoration unit 210 and the door frame top exterior decoration unit 220 with a door frame top cover 232 so as to be visible from the front. In addition, the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 appropriately emits light from a plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231, so that the outer edge of the door frame upper unit base 202 and the outer edge of the front wall of the door frame upper cover 232 (side wall and upper wall, respectively) are illuminated. front end) can be decorated with luminescence.

In addition, since the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 has opaque decoration parts 233 on both the left and right outer sides, the light from the upper outer peak LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 of the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 It is possible to prevent other players seated in front of other pachinko machines arranged adjacent to the machine 1 from being irradiated.

A plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 of the door frame upper outer edge decoration unit 230 (front end outer edge of the door frame upper cover 232) are arranged in a third surrounding light area LA3 ( 16). In addition, the plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 of the door frame upper outer edge decorative unit 230 are arranged in front of the door frame upper unit base 202, that is, behind the front end of the upper inner decorative portion 212 of the door frame upper inner decorative unit 210. Therefore, the light emitted from the upper outer edge LED 231 to the game window 201 side is blocked by the upper inner base 211 and the upper inner decorative portion 212, and even if the plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 are caused to emit light, the inside of the game window 201 is blocked. Difficulty in seeing due to glare is prevented, and the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the front through the game window 201 in a good condition.

[3-2f. Upper speaker unit]
The upper speaker unit 240 includes upper speakers 241 mounted near the left and right corners of the front upper portion of the door frame upper unit base 202, and closing the speaker mounting openings 232a of the door frame upper cover 232 in front of the upper speakers 241. An upper speaker grill (not shown), a horizontal lattice-shaped grill decorative frame 243 arranged in front of the upper speaker grill and attached to the front wall of the door frame upper cover 232, and substantially the same lattice parts in the grill decorative frame 243. Rod-shaped lattice decorations 244 arranged at intervals behind the upper speaker grille, lattice decoration LEDs 245 provided at the outer ends in the left-right direction of each lattice decorations 244 and emitting light to the lattice decorations 245 (Fig. 14).

Each of the upper speakers 241 is attached obliquely to the center of the door frame upper unit 200 in the left-right direction so as to face slightly downward. The upper speaker 241 is attached behind the adjoining upper outer top decoration part 222 in the door frame upper outer decoration unit 220 . The upper speaker 241 is a full-range speaker that outputs a full range of sound from low to high. The upper speaker grill is mounted inside the door frame upper cover 232 (rear surface of the front wall). The upper speaker grill is punching metal.

The grill decoration frame 243 is provided with a plated layer having a silver metallic luster on its surface. The grille decoration frame 243 is arranged so as to be separated vertically by connecting a frame portion shaped along the inner periphery of the speaker mounting opening 232a of the door frame upper cover 232 and two vertically extending sides of the frame portion. and a plurality of grid portions. The lattice portion extending laterally of the grille decorative frame 243 has a portion (general portion) excluding the laterally outer end portion of the door frame 3 extending with a constant width. is formed in a trapezoidal shape extending obliquely downward toward the end and then extending with a constant width.

The lattice decoration part 244 has translucency and is formed in a columnar shape elongated in the left and right direction. The lattice decoration part 244 can be visually recognized from the front through the upper speaker grill. The grid-decorated LED 245 is a full-color LED.

The upper speaker unit 240 is close to the head of the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and can output high-quality stereo sound to the player. In addition, the upper speaker unit 240 can light-embellish the lattice decoration part 244 by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of lattice decoration LEDs 245 . rear side) can be decorated with light emission.

Also, in the upper speaker unit 240 , the upper outer top decorative portion 222 arranged in the upper speaker grill (grill decorative frame 243 ) is located forward of the upper speaker 241 in front view. That is, between the upper speaker 241 and the upper speaker grille, the lattice decoration part 244 and the upper outer top decoration part 222 which can be decorated with light are arranged. As a result, when the upper outer top decoration part 222 and the lattice decoration part 244 are decorated with light emission, the player can see the effect that the inner side of the speaker grill is decorated with light emission, which has not been seen in the past pachinko machines. .

[3-3. Overall configuration of door frame]
Next, the overall structure of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 5 to 16. FIG. FIG. 15 is a plan view of the door frame lower unit showing a state in which game balls are stored in the upper plate of the door frame. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram showing the peripheral light area in the door frame. The door frame 3 makes most of the front surface including the game area 5a of the game board 5 held by the body frame 4 visible from the front through the game window 201 in a state where the front surface of the body frame 4 is closed. be able to. Also, the closing glass 205 of the game window 201 can close the front side of the game board 5 (game area 5a).

As shown in FIG. 16 and the like, the door frame 3 has a bulging upper decorative portion 121 and an upper inner decorative portion 212 which are connected in a ring shape. A game window 201 and the like are arranged. In other words, the upper plate 130, the door frame effect device 150, the game window 201, and the like are surrounded by the bulging upper decorative portion 121 and the upper inner decorative portion 212 (the first surrounding light area LA1). Furthermore, the outside of the upper inner decorative portion 212 is surrounded by the upper outer crest decorative portion 222, the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 (second surrounding light area LA2), and the upper outer edge LED 231 (third surrounding light area LA3). there is In other words, the game window 201 is triple surrounded by three surrounding light areas, the first surrounding light area LA1, the second surrounding light area LA2, and the third surrounding light area LA3.

The door frame 3 is formed so that the storage area 131 of the upper tray 130 surrounds the front side and the left and right sides of the door frame effect device 150, and the game balls B supplied from the supply port 135 are supplied to the bulging portion 120. It flows along the front edge and is delivered from the delivery port 136 to the outside (lower tray 140 or ball launcher 540).

In the normal state of the door frame 3, the first movable portion 155 and the effect operation portion 160 of the door frame effect device 150 are positioned at the downward movement end (lowering end). In this state, the upper surface of the first movable portion 155 (first movable portion main body 156 ) is positioned slightly above the upper surface of the device cover 151 through the opening 151 a of the device cover 151 . Also, the effect operation section 160 has the pressing operation section 161 positioned slightly above the upper surface of the first movable section main body 156 through the opening 156 a of the first movable section main body 156 .

The door frame 3 is provided with a bulging upper decorative portion 121 over the entire length at the upper end of the front peripheral wall 134 of the upper tray 130 . The upper end of the wall of the upper plate 130 for storing the game balls B is raised by the bulging upper decorative portion 121 . The upper end of the front side (front region 131a side) of the bulging upper decorative portion 121 is higher than the front end of the upper surface of the door frame effect device 150 (first movable portion 155) in the normal state. As a result, when the upper tray 130 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B overflow toward the door frame presentation device 150, and the player is informed that the upper tray 130 is full of the game balls B. can be easily recognized, and the game ball B can be prevented from spilling forward from the upper plate 130.例文帳に追加

In the door frame 3, the upper tray ball ejection button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126 are gathered at the right corner of the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 on the right side of the upper tray 130. As shown in FIG. The surface on which the upper plate ball release button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126 are provided is provided at a position higher than the upper plate 130 and lower than the bulging upper decorative portion 121, and forward. It slopes down towards you. As a result, when the game ball B lands on the surface provided with the upper tray ball release button 124, the ball lending button 125, and the return button 126, the game ball B is rolls toward the upper tray 130 side and can be released into the upper tray 130 .

In the door frame 3, the surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134 that constitute the upper tray 130 (that is, the inner surface of the upper tray 130) are mirror-finished. Since the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 are reflected on the inner surface of the upper tray 130, the reflected game balls B can be seen to create the illusion that many game balls B are stored in the upper tray 130.例文帳に追加In addition, the volume of the upper plate 130 can be made to appear large.

In the upper plate 130 of the door frame 3, the game ball B supplied from the supply port 135 first rolls forward in the left side area 131b, and then enters the front area 131a to reach the front area 131a. Roll inside to the right. Then, the game ball B enters the right side area 131b from the right end of the front area 131a, rolls backward in the right side area 131b, and is then sent out from the outlet 136 to the player. (see FIG. 15). At this time, since the game ball B circulates in the front area 131a closer to the player on the front side than the door frame effect device 150, the game ball B in the front area 131a can be visually recognized well. It is possible to easily check the amount of game balls B stored in the .

Further, in the door frame 3, since the delivery port 136 is provided at the rear end of the right side region 131b where the game ball B rolls backward in the upper plate 130, the delivery port 136 can be visually recognized from the player side. can. As a result, the player can see how the game ball B is sent to the ball shooting device 540 from the delivery port 136 (upper tray 130), which could not be seen in the conventional pachinko machine.

In the door frame 3, the pair of lower speakers 153a can be visually recognized through the transparent device cover 151 and the upper wall of the first movable part main body 156, and the door frame effect display device 152 can be visually recognized behind the lower speakers 153a. be able to. The upper end of the door frame effect display device 152 of the door frame 3 is close to the upper end of the lower door frame unit 100 , that is, the lower end of the game window 201 . As a result, the door-frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 of the game board 5 are brought close to each other, so that the effect image is such that the door-frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 constitute one screen. can be displayed.

In the door frame effect display device 152 arranged behind the effect operation part 160, the door frame 3 is arranged so that the lower side is positioned below the upper front end of the effect operation part 160 and the upper side is positioned at the upper front end of the effect operation part 160. The upper part of the door frame effect display device 152 is higher than the effect operation part 160.例文帳に追加As a result, even if the door-frame effect display device 152 is brought closer to the effect operation unit 160, the door-frame effect display device can be viewed from the player side as compared with the case where the entire door-frame effect display device 152 is lower than the effect operation unit 160. 152 can be made visible. In addition, since the depth in the front-rear direction applied to the door frame effect display device 152 can be reduced, the forward bulging amount of the bulging portion 120 can be suppressed. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of excitement, and to allow the player to enjoy the game in a comfortable state, thereby suppressing the decline in interest.

In addition, the door frame 3 is a door that is arranged diagonally behind the effect operation unit 160 so that the vertical projection range VP of the display screen (range between two dashed lines in FIG. 11) is in the vicinity of the effect operation unit 160. Since the frame effect display device 152 is provided, when the door frame effect display device 152 is viewed from the player side, the effect operation section 160 can be seen near the outer edge of the lower side of the door frame effect display device 152. By displaying an effect image for decorating the effect operation part 160 on the door frame effect display device 152, the effect operation part 160 can be decorated with the effect image, and the effect operation part can be changed by changing the effect image. The 160 decorations can be changed in various ways, making it difficult for the player to get bored.

Furthermore, since the display screen of the door frame effect display device 152 can be seen in the vicinity of the effect operation unit 160, the door frame 3 does not need to display the image of the effect operation unit 160 on the door frame effect display device 152. An image such as an arrow pointing to 160 or a hand can be displayed to prompt the player to operate the production operation section 160, so that the player's line of sight can be immediately directed to the production operation section 160. , the operation timing of the performance operation unit 160 can be made difficult to delay, and the player can enjoy the player participation type performance of operating the performance operation unit 160 to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, the door frame 3 has the lower front speaker grille 192 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the upper speaker grille of the upper speaker unit 240 so that the lower front speaker 191 and the upper speaker 241 are forward (player side) in a normal state. ) is difficult to see.

[3-4. Electromagnetic noise countermeasures for the door frame]
Next, noise countermeasures for the door frame 3 will be briefly described. As described above, the door frame 3 is provided with a door frame base unit (not shown) and the like having a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. As described above, the door frame base unit has a square (rectangular) shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. A metal frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) attached to the door frame, and a metal opening/closing cylinder lock 127 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit. As described above, the door frame reinforcement unit functions as a door frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the door frame base to impart rigidity. 4 is electrically connected to the frame earth substrate 559 provided in the 4. That is, in this embodiment, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side. The frame grounding board 559 collects electromagnetic noise generated in various places and can be grounded (grounded) to the island facilities of the game hall. is electrically connected to the ground of

As described above, the various decorative portions provided on the door frame 3 include those with no decorative plating at all, and those with decorative plating applied to the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has electrical conductivity. Of the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the door frame reinforcing unit via wiring (not shown) or a metal conduction plate (not shown). there is For this reason, for example, when a player touches a decorative portion that has been subjected to decorative plating, the static electricity charged to the player is discharged as electromagnetic noise, which is transmitted from the player to the door frame reinforcing unit via the decorative portion, From the door frame reinforcement unit, it is guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall through the door frame metal ground wire (not shown), the frame ground substrate 559, and the island equipment ground wire (not shown) and removed.

When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the body frame 4, as described above, the rotation transmitting member of the cylinder lock 127 in the door frame 3 and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the body frame 4 come into contact with each other to generate electricity. Therefore, when an attendant such as a game hall clerk opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 while the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, for example, , A staff member such as a game hall clerk or a person who has a setting key described later (in addition to changing the setting value, a limited person who can check the current setting value that is set) is the main body frame When the locking unit 650 in 4 is touched, the static electricity charged in the staff such as the game hall staff or the person holding the setting key described later is discharged as electromagnetic noise, and the staff such as the staff in the game hall or the setting key described later is discharged. The signal is transmitted from the possessor to the door frame reinforcement unit through the locking unit 650, and from the door frame reinforcement unit, the door frame metal ground wire (not shown), the frame ground substrate 559, and the island equipment ground wire (not shown) of the game hall. It is designed to be removed by being guided to the ground of the equipment.

[3-5. Luminescence production of the door frame]
Next, the lighting performance by the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 consists of the upper plate 130, the door frame effect device 150, the game window 201, etc., and the bulging upper decorative portion 121 and the upper inner decorative portion 212 (first circular light It is surrounded by an area LA1). The plurality of LEDs 121a of the bulging upper decorative portion 121 and the plurality of LEDs 213a of the upper inner decorative portion 212 are arranged in a line in the direction in which they extend. As a result, the surroundings of the game window 201 and the like can be decorated with light emission by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 121a and LEDs 213a. At this time, if the plurality of LEDs 121a and LEDs 213a are made to emit light in order, the player can see a light emission effect in which light circulates around the game window 201.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the door frame 3 is provided with the upper outer crest decorative portion 222 and the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 (second surrounding light area LA2) arranged outside the upper inner decorative portion 212, the upper outer crest LED 224 And the upper outer valley LED 225 illuminates the upper outer apex decorative portion 222 and the upper outer valley decorative portion 223, so that the outside of the first surrounding light area LA1 can be decorated with light, and the outside of the game window 201 is doubled. It is possible to show the player a luminous effect of luminous decoration.

Since a plurality of upper outer apex decorative parts 222 are arranged at intervals in the vertical direction, by sequentially emitting light from one side in the vertical direction, the player can see a light emitting effect like a level meter. . For example, when a chance arrives, the expected value for the game can be shown to the player as a level meter, or a sound meter matching the output music can be shown to the player.

Further, since the upper outer valley decorative portion 223 is formed in a mirror surface shape, the upper outer valley LED 225 emits light to make the space between the upper outer top decorative portions 222 brighter than the upper inner decorative portion 212. It is possible to show the player a lighting effect that can strongly attract the player's interest.

Since the door frame 3 has a plurality of upper outer edge LEDs 231 arranged in rows on the outer edge of the door frame upper unit base 202, by lighting these upper outer edge LEDs 231, it can be seen in the conventional pachinko machine 1. It is possible to show the player a light emission effect in which the outer edge of the door frame 3 (the third surrounding light area LA3) emits light.

Further, in the door frame 3, outside the game window 201, there are triple light surrounding areas of the first light surrounding area LA1, the second light surrounding area LA2, and the third light surrounding area LA3. By appropriately emitting light in the surrounding light area, various light emitting effects such as going around the game window 201, going to the game window 201 from the outside, going to the outside from the game window 201, etc. It is possible to show a player a light emitting effect.

In addition, in the door frame 3, the grid decoration LED 195 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the grid decoration LED 245 of the upper speaker unit 240 are caused to emit light as appropriate, so that the grid portion (grid decoration portion 194) of the grille decoration frame 193 and the grille are displayed. The lattice portion (lattice decoration portion 244) of the decoration frame 243 can be decorated with light emission, and the player can enjoy the light emission effect that makes the grille decoration frame 193 of the lower front speaker unit 190 and the grille decoration frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240 stand out. can be shown to

Furthermore, in the door frame 3, the lower speaker decoration portion 153c of the lower speaker unit 153, the lattice decoration portion 244 of the upper speaker unit 240, the plurality of upper outer peak LEDs 224 and the grille decoration frame 243 of the upper speaker unit 240 in the upper outer valley LEDs 225 ( By illuminating the upper outer peak LED 224 and the upper outer valley LED 225 located behind the upper speaker grill), between the pair of lower speakers 153a and the upper wall of the first movable part main body 156, the upper speaker 241 and A space between the speaker grill and the upper speaker grill can be decorated with light, and a player can see a light-emitting performance that cannot be seen in the past pachinko machines in which the space between the speaker and the speaker grill is decorated with light.

Further, in the door frame 3, since the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper tray 130 is provided with a plurality of LEDs 138a of the storage light-emitting decorative portion 138, the plurality of LEDs 138a emit light to store the liquid in the upper tray 130 and in the upper tray 130. The game ball B that is being played can be decorated with light emission. For example, when the game balls B are not stored in the upper plate 130, the plurality of LEDs 138a are made to emit light, and the inner surface of the upper plate 130 is mirror-finished, so that the entire inside of the upper plate 130 is dazzling. A player can be shown the luminous performance decorated with light emission, and the player who is selecting the pachinko machine to play is attracted to the pachinko machine 1 by shining the top plate 130 of the pachinko machine 1 brightly. can be strongly attracted.

Since the storage light-emitting decoration part 138 is provided above the bottom wall 132 of the upper tray 130 by more than half the outer diameter of the game ball B, a plurality of storage light-emitting decoration parts 138 are provided in a state where the game ball B is stored in the upper tray 130. When the LED 138a emits light, the light is irradiated to the upper half side of the game ball B and reflected upward, and the game ball B stored in the upper tray 130 shines. can show people.

When the bulging upper decorative portion 121 is decorated with light, part of the light is also irradiated into the upper plate 130 . A player can be shown a luminous performance in which the stored game balls B are decorated with luminescence.

In addition, since the door frame 3 includes the light-emitting decorative portion 124a surrounding the upper tray ball eject button 124 and the light-emitting decorative portion 142a surrounding the lower tray ball eject button 142, By making the light-emitting decoration part 124a of the ball-drain button 124 and the light-emitting decoration part 142a of the bottom-ball-drain button 142 emit light, the top-dish ball-drain button 124 and the bottom-dish ball-drain button 142 can be decorated with light. Therefore, when a large number of game balls B are paid out, such as during a "jackpot" game, the upper tray 130 and the lower tray 140 can be ejected by illuminating the upper tray ball ejection button 124 and the lower tray ball ejection button 142. In order to prevent the tank from becoming full with , the player can be shown a light emitting effect for prompting the player to operate the upper tray ball ejection button 124 or the lower tray ball ejection button 142.例文帳に追加

In this way, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment can present various lighting effects to the player, and by appropriately combining them, it is possible to present more diverse effects to the player. can be enjoyed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

[3-6. Effect of door frame effect device]
Next, the rendering of the door frame 3 by the door frame rendering device 150 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 17 and the like. FIG. 17(a) is an explanatory view schematically showing the relationship between the door frame effect display device and the effect operation section in the door frame effect display device, and (b) is the effect operation part by the effect image of the door frame effect display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of decoration, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the collaboration production|presentation by the production|presentation image of a door frame production|presentation display apparatus, and the movable production|action of a production operation part.

In the normal state of the door frame effect device 150, the first movable portion 155 and the effect operation portion 160 are positioned at the lower moving end (lowering end). In this state, the upper surface of the first movable portion 155 (first movable portion main body 156 ) is positioned slightly above the upper surface of the device cover 151 through the opening 151 a of the device cover 151 . Also, the effect operation section 160 has the pressing operation section 161 positioned slightly above the upper surface of the first movable section main body 156 through the opening 156 a of the first movable section main body 156 . Even in this normal state, the pressing operation portion 161 in the effect operation portion 160 can be pressed.

In a normal state, when the first LED of the operating section decoration board 162 is lit, the player can see a light emitting effect in which the upper surface of the pressing operating section 161 is decorated with light. Also, in a normal state, when the second LED of the operating section decoration board 162 emits light, the opening frame section 158a of the first movable section cover 158 surrounding the outer side of the pressing operating section 161 emits a light-emitting decoration. can show people. By these light emitting effects, the player's interest can be directed to the pressing operation part 161, and the player is encouraged to press the pressing operation part 161 to operate the pressing operation part 161. can facilitate participation in

In addition, when the plurality of LEDs 159a of the first movable part decoration substrate 159 are illuminated in a normal state, the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 and the first movable part main body 156 through the side wall of the first movable part main body 156. The space between can be decorated with light. In other words, the player can see the light-emitting effect in which the vicinity of the upper end of the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 is decorated with light.

In this normal state, when a predetermined sound is output from the pair of lower speakers 153a, the sound is radiated toward the player through the grille hole 151c of the device cover 151 and the grille hole 156b of the first movable portion main body 156. , the player can hear a sound effect in which the sound can be heard from the direction of the effect operation part 160 (pressing operation part 161). As a result, the sound from the lower speaker 153a attracts the player's attention to the pressing operation section 161, prompting the player to press the pressing operation section 161 to operate the pressing operation section 161. It is possible to make it easier for the player to participate in the player participation type production.

In addition, in the normal state, the door frame effect display device 150 can be visually recognized from the player side through the device cover 151 in a good condition, and the door frame effect display device 152 displays the door frame effect display device 150. The effect image can entertain the player (see FIG. 17(a), etc.).

In a normal state, the door frame effect device 150 rotates the first lifting pins 175a by means of the four first lifting drive motors 175b of the first lifting mechanism 170, thereby moving the pair of lifting arms 174 and the lifting slider 172. , the player can see a movable effect in which the first movable part 155 moves to the upward movement end (rising end) together with the effect operation part 160.例文帳に追加As a result, the first movable part 155 pops out together with the effect operation part 160, so that the player can be surprised, and the player can be strongly urged to perform the pressing operation of the pressing operation part 161. At the same time, by raising the first movable portion 155, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, and to increase the player's sense of anticipation for the game.

When the first movable portion 155 is moved to the raised end, the side wall of the first movable portion main body 156 becomes visible from the player side, as shown in FIG. 12(a). In this state, when the plurality of LEDs 159a of the first movable part decoration board 159 are caused to emit light, the player can see the lighting effects in which the side wall of the first movable part main body 156 is decorated with light. Therefore, when the first movable part 155 is moved from the lower end to the upper end while the side wall of the first movable part main body 156 is decorated with light, an effect is played in which the first movable part 155 rises from the light. It can be shown to other people, and can give a strong impact to the player.

Further, when the plurality of LEDs 159a of the first movable part decoration board 159 are caused to emit light while the first movable part 155 is moved to the upper end, part of the light is emitted to the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130. Since the light is emitted, the plurality of LEDs 159a can also show the player a light-emitting effect of shining the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130, and the same effect as described above can be achieved.

In addition, since the first movable portion 155 can be moved up and down by the four first elevation drive motors 175b, the first movable portion 155 is vibrated by repeating forward and reverse rotation of the first elevation drive motors 175b. can be made As a result, when the player touches the first movable part 155 or the effect operation part 160 while the first movable part 155 is vibrating, the player can be surprised by the vibration. Further, if the first movable portion 155 is vibrated at the timing of pressing the effect operation portion 160 (pressing operation portion 161), the operational feeling of the pressing operation can be changed by making it heavier or lighter. can entertain.

Further, when the first movable part 155 is moved from the lower end to the upper end, the plurality of grill holes 156b formed in the upper wall of the first movable part main body 156 move upward. and the pair of lower speakers 153a. As a result, the volume between the lower speaker 153a and the grille hole 156b changes, thereby changing the natural vibration of that part and changing the resonance frequency of the sound output from the lower speaker 153a. The player can be made to listen to a sound effect in which the timbre of the sound emitted to the player side through the grille hole 156b changes.

In addition, when the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the first movable part 155 from the lower end to the upper end, the upper part of the first movable part 155 moves to the door frame effect display device 152. Appears to cover the bottom of the display screen. As a result, when the first movable portion 155 is moved to the rising end, part of the effect image displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 is blocked by the first movable portion 155, so that the player can It is possible to make the user notice that the movable portion 155 has risen, and to obtain the same effect as described above.

At this time, the door frame effect display device 152 displays, for example, an effect image in which a predetermined character lifts the first movable portion 155, an effect image in which the predetermined character is lifted by the rise of the first movable portion 155, and the like. By displaying , the player can see the collaboration effect of the movable effect of the first movable part 155 and the effect image, and the player can be greatly entertained.

In addition, when the door frame effect device 150 revolves the second lifting pin 183 by the second lifting drive motor 182 of the second lifting mechanism 180 in a normal state, the effect operation unit 160 moves upward via the lifting transmission piece 184. It is possible to show the player a movable effect of moving to the moving end (rising end) of. As a result, the upper surface of the pressing operation part 161 of the effect operation part 160 protrudes upward more than the upper surface of the first movable part 155, so that the player's interest is strongly attracted to the pressing operation part 161.例文帳に追加can strongly prompt the player to press the pressing operation part 161, and the rising of the pressing operation part 161 makes the player think that something good will happen. It is possible to heighten the player's sense of anticipation for the game.

When the effect operation part 160 is moved to the raised end, the peripheral wall of the operation part movable base 163 below the pressing operation part 161 is exposed to the outside, as shown in FIG. 12(b). In this state, when the second LED of the operating section decoration board 162 is caused to emit light, the player can see a lighting effect in which the peripheral wall of the operating section movable base 163 emits light. Therefore, when the performance operating section 160 is moved from the lower end to the rising end while the peripheral wall of the operating section movable base 163 of the performance operating section 160 is decorated with light, the performance operating section 160 appears to rise from the light. can be shown to the player, and a strong impact can be given to the player.

In addition, since the effect operation unit 160 can be moved up and down by the second elevation drive motor 182, the effect operation unit 160 can be vibrated by repeatedly rotating the second elevation drive motor 182 forward and reverse in small increments. . As a result, when the player touches the effect operation unit 160 while the effect operation unit 160 is vibrating, the player can be surprised by the vibration. Further, by vibrating the effect operation part 160 (pressing operation part 161) at the timing of pressing the effect operation part 160, the operation feeling of the pressing operation can be changed by making it heavy or light, and the player can enjoy. can entertain.

Further, when the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 moves the effect operation unit 160 from the lower end to the upward end, the upper part of the effect operation unit 160 is displayed on the display screen of the door frame effect display device 152. appears to cover the bottom of the As a result, when the effect operation unit 160 is moved to the upward end, a part of the effect image displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 is blocked by the effect operation unit 160, so that the effect operation unit 160 is displayed to the player. can be made aware of the increase in the temperature, and the same effects as those described above can be achieved.

At this time, the door frame effect display device 152 displays, for example, an effect image (see FIG. 17B) that decorates the periphery of the effect operation unit 160, and an effect that the effect operation unit 160 is lifted by a predetermined character. By displaying an image, an effect image in which a predetermined character is lifted by raising the effect operation unit 160 (see FIG. 17(c)), etc., a collaboration effect is produced by the movable effect of the effect operation unit 160 and the effect image. can be shown to the player, and the player can be greatly entertained.

The effect operation part 160 can be moved to the rising end when the first movable part 155 is at the lowered end, and can be moved upward when the first movable part 155 is at the rising end (Fig. 12(b)). state). For example, after moving the first movable part 155 from the lower end to the rising end, by moving the effect operating part 160 from the lower end to the rising end, the player can perform a movable effect in which the effect operating part 160 rises in two stages. can be shown to As a result, since the performance operating part 160 rises in two steps, the player is made to strongly think that a ``big win'' game is started (the special lottery result is ``big win'') when the performance operating part 160 is operated. , the player's sense of anticipation for the game can be heightened, and the player can be made to operate the performance operation section 160 to enjoy the player participation type performance.

As described above, the door frame effect device 150 can present various effects to the player, such as the light emission effect, the movable effect, the image effect, the player participatory effect, the sound effect, and the like. By appropriately combining them, it is possible to present more diverse effects to the player, to make the player less likely to get bored, and to entertain the player.

[3-7. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the door frame effect device 150 is arranged on the upper surface of the bulging portion 120 of the door frame 3 provided in front of and below the game area 5a where the game is played. The upper plate 130 having the storage area 131 for the game balls B surrounding the device placement portion 123 is provided by the front region 131a on the front side of the device placement portion 123 and the side regions 131b on both left and right sides. The game balls B are stored on the front side of the door frame effect device 150 by the area 131a, so that the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be easily seen by the player. In addition, since the two side regions 131b connected by the front region 131a are regions that extend back and forth, in addition to the front region 131a, the game balls B stored in the side regions 131b can also be viewed from the player side. Visual recognition can be facilitated.

Therefore, since the game balls B in the upper tray 130 can be easily seen, it is possible to arouse the player's awareness of the amount of the game balls B stored. is consumed and the amount of storage decreases, the player can easily recognize the decrease in the amount of storage, and the game balls B can be replenished in the upper tray 130, so that the player does not notice. The game balls B are prevented from disappearing from the upper tray 130, the sudden interruption of the game can be prevented, the disappointment of the player due to the interruption of the game is prevented, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, since the game ball B in the front area 131a and the two side areas 131b can be easily seen from the player side, the player can direct the player's line of sight from the game area 5a to the door frame presentation below. Only by dropping the ball onto the device 150, it can be immediately recognized whether or not there is a game ball B in the front area 131a, and the player does not need to carefully confirm whether or not there is a game ball B in the upper tray 130. - 特許庁, it becomes possible to make the player concentrate on the game easily, to enjoy the game and to suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the supply port 135 is arranged on the left side of the two side regions 131b connected by the front region 131a, and the delivery port 136 is arranged on the opposite right side, the front region 131a is connected to the supply port 135. Since it is provided on the way to the exit 136, the game ball B supplied from the supply port 135 into the storage area 131 is sent out of the storage area 131 from the delivery port 136 through the front area 131a. When the game ball B in the upper tray 130 is consumed by playing a game, the game ball B flows in front of the player's eyes (front area 131a). can be easily recognized, and the above-described effects can be easily achieved.

Furthermore, since the supply port 135 is arranged on the left side of the side region 131b on both the left and right sides of the device placement portion 123, and the delivery port 136 is arranged on the right side, the space between the supply port 135 and the delivery port 136 in the horizontal direction can be increased, it is likely that the storage area 131 is also increased in the horizontal direction, so that the amount of game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be increased. Therefore, since many game balls B can be stored in the upper tray 130, the player can play the game without worrying about the amount of the game balls B stored, and the player can concentrate on the game. In addition, the player can immediately recognize whether or not there is a game ball B in the front area 131a simply by dropping the player's line of sight from the game area 5a to the lower door frame effect device 150.例文帳に追加This eliminates the need for the player to carefully check the presence or absence of the game ball B in the upper tray 130, making it easier for the player to concentrate on the game, making the game more enjoyable and reducing interest. can be suppressed.

In addition, a storage light-emitting decorative portion 138 for irradiating light into the storage area 131 of the upper tray 130 is provided above the half of the outer diameter of the game ball B from the bottom surface (bottom wall 132) of the upper tray 130. Since the light from the LED 138a of the storage light-emitting decoration part 138 is irradiated to the part above the half of the game ball B stored in 131, the light from the storage light-emitting decoration part 138 is emitted by the game ball B can be reflected upwards. Therefore, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be glittered and decorated with light from the light from the stored light-emitting decoration part 138, and the player can enjoy the light-emitting decoration of the game balls B. At the same time, the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130, and the amount of the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be confirmed to achieve the same effects as above. can play.

In addition, since the storage light-emitting decorative portion 138 is provided on the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130, the forward-facing rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130 emits light by causing the LED 138a of the storage light-emitting decorative portion 138 to emit light. It is possible to show a player a luminous decoration that cannot be seen in a conventional pachinko machine, surprise the player, and direct the player's attention to the upper tray 130 (storage area 131). By having the player confirm the amount of game balls B stored, it is possible to reliably achieve the above-described effects. At this time, since the inner surface of the upper plate 130 is mirror-finished, the light from the storage light-emitting decoration part 138 or the light from the storage light-emitting decoration part 138 reflected by the game ball B is reflected on the upper plate 130. By reflecting the light on the inner surface, it is possible to further increase the glittering feeling in the storage area 131 by the storage light-emitting decorative portion 138, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decrease in interest.

In addition, since the alignment part 137 is provided near the delivery port 136 to align the game balls B, clogging of the game balls B can be prevented in the vicinity of the delivery port 136, and the game balls B are stored in the upper tray 130. It is possible to smoothly deliver the game ball B from the delivery port 136 to the ball launching device 540 and the lower tray 140.例文帳に追加Therefore, interruption of the game due to clogging of the game balls B can be avoided, and the player can enjoy the game and suppress the decrease in interest.

Furthermore, since the delivery port 136 arranged in the side region 131b of the upper plate 130 is visible from the front, the game ball B is delivered from the delivery port 136 that could not be seen in the conventional pachinko machines. The situation can be seen, the player can be surprised, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

In addition, since the front area 131a in the storage area 131 in which the game ball B is stored is provided on the front side of the device placement portion 123, the game ball B is placed on the door frame effect device 150 provided in the device placement portion 123. Even if it rolls forward on the ball, it will fall into the front area 131a, and the game ball B can be prevented from falling forward from the bulging part 120.例文帳に追加

In addition, since the inner surfaces of the bottom wall 132, the rear peripheral wall 133, and the front peripheral wall 134 of the upper tray 130 are mirror-finished, the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 can be Since it is reflected on the peripheral wall of the upper tray 130, the player can be given the illusion that the game balls B are stored beyond the peripheral wall, and it appears that many game balls B are stored on the upper tray 130.例文帳に追加can be done.

In addition, since the storage area 131 is equipped with the storage light emitting decorative portion 138 that irradiates light into the storage area 131, the light from the storage light emitting decorative portion 138 or the light from the storage light emitting decorative portion 138 reflected by the game ball B is emitted upward. By reflecting the light on the inner surface of the plate 130, the feeling of glitter in the storage region 131 by the storage light-emitting decoration part 138 can be further increased, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the door frame effect device 150 is arranged in the device arrangement portion 123 of the bulging portion 120, the player can be entertained by the effect by the door frame effect device 150, and the player's interest in the game is suppressed. can be made

In the above-described embodiment, the storage area 131 in which the game balls B are stored in the upper tray 130 includes the front area 131a in front of the device placement section 123 (door frame effect device 150) and the left and right sides of the device placement section 123. However, it is not limited to this, and the front region in front of the device placement portion 123, one side region on the left side of the device placement portion 123, It may be configured with a back region behind the device placement portion 123 . Alternatively, it is composed of a front region 131a in front of the device placement portion 123, two side regions 131b on the left and right sides of the device placement portion 123, and a back region behind the device placement portion 123 (the device placement portion 123 is provided in the form of islands in the upper plate 130). It should be noted that the back area of the storage area 131 may be tunnel-shaped so that the game ball B cannot be visually recognized from the player side. Also, the back area of the storage area 131 may pass between the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect operation section 160 in the door frame effect device 150 .

In the above embodiment, the inner surface of the upper plate 130 is mirror-finished, but the inner surface of the upper plate 130 may be non-mirror-finished.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the storage light emitting decorative portion 138 is provided on the rear peripheral wall 133 of the upper plate 130, but the storage light emitting decorative portion 138 is provided on the front peripheral wall 134. You can do it.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the first movable portion 155 of the door frame effect device 150, a certain number of game balls B are placed on the upper surface of the first movable portion 155 by the plurality of louver portions 158b of the first movable portion cover 158. However, it is not limited to this. The game ball B placed on the upper plate 130 may be rolled onto the upper plate 130 so that the game ball B is not stored (continued to be placed) on the upper surface of the door frame effect device 150.例文帳に追加

[4. Body frame]
The body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 4 and 18 to 39. FIG. The main body frame 4 holds a game board 5 having a game area 5a where a game is played by hitting a game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side (upper tray 130 of the door frame 3). , to discharge the game balls B used in the game to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island facility side of the game hall).

[4-1. Overall configuration of main body frame]
As shown in the figure, the body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is attached openable and closable to a frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted possible.

The body frame 4 includes a frame-shaped body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. a main frame upper hinge portion 510 attached to the upper end and rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge portion 50 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame upper hinge portion of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; a main body frame lower hinge portion 520 attached to the lower end on the left side in the front view, rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge portion 60 of the outer frame 2, and to which the door frame lower hinge portion of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached; I have.

The body frame 4 includes a metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side of the body frame base unit 500 in front view and reinforcing the body frame base unit 500, and a front lower portion of the body frame base unit 500. A ball launching device 540 for hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and an inverted L attached along the upper side and left side of the body frame base unit 500 in front view on the rear side of the body frame base unit 500. A glyph-shaped payout base unit 550, a payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the payout base unit 550 for putting out game balls B to the player side (upper tray 130 and lower tray 140), and a body frame base. A board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, which is attached to the lower side surface of the unit 500 when viewed from the rear and is equipped with a power switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, and a body frame base which will be described later. A back cover 640, which covers the back side of the game board 5 attached to 501 and is formed with a plurality of slits 641 penetrating back and forth and extending vertically, and a right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. A metal locking unit 650 for locking between the cage outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 is provided.

The body frame reinforcement frame 530 has a rear portion extending rightward from the front end thereof to prevent the game board 5 inserted into the game board mounting portion 301 of the body frame base 501 to be described later from moving forward and up and down. Two regulating left position regulating members 531 are attached with a space therebetween in the vertical direction.

The body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, which will be described later. Prevents unauthorized tools from being inserted into the inside (game board 5).

The main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 is recessed rearward in a range of about 3/4 of the total height downward from the upper end when viewed from the front, and the game board 5 is detachably inserted from the front side. It has a mounting portion 301 . The ball shooting device 540 is attached to the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500 at a position lower than the game board attachment portion 301 .

Further, the body frame base unit 500 of the body frame 4 has a door frame opening mechanism for detecting opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 at a position below the cylinder insertion opening through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. A switch 4a is attached. When the door frame 3 is opened (released) with respect to the body frame 4, the door frame open switch 4a is depressurized so that the opening of the door frame 3 can be detected. A detection signal from the door frame open switch 4 a is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633 . Further, the body frame base unit 500 of the body frame 4 has a body frame open switch 4b for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 on the rear surface below the position where the door frame open switch 4a is attached. installed. When the body frame 4 is opened (released) with respect to the outer frame 2, the body frame open switch 4b is depressing and can detect the opening of the body frame 4. As shown in FIG. A detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b is input to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633.

The door frame opening switch 4a and the body frame opening switch 4b open the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4, and The opening of the body frame 4 is not detected, but the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 and the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are detected independently of the opening/closing operation by the locking unit 650. ing. Further, the door frame open switch 4a and the body frame open switch 4b are not arranged in the vicinity of the cylinder lock 127, and the transmission cylinder 654 of the lock unit 650 has The door frame opening switch 4a is arranged at a position below the cylinder insertion opening through which the door frame opening switch 4a is inserted. A body frame opening switch 4b is arranged on the rear surface of the . In this manner, even if electromagnetic noise enters the cylinder lock 127, the signal transmission lines from the door frame opening switch 4a and the body frame opening switch 4b are not affected by the electromagnetic noise.

The body frame base unit 500 includes a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a connection cable guide member for guiding a connection cable 503 for connection to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5. The main body frame base 501 is formed with a game board mounting portion 301 into which the game board 5 is detachably inserted from the front side. It is

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and a box-shaped ball tank attached to the payout base 551 extending left and right and opening upward. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 when viewed from the front and extending to the left side when viewed from the front in the shape of a groove that opens upward, and a first rail cover attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. 554, a second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 away from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 , a ball stopper member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 , and an external ball disposed above the tank rail 553 and attached to the dispensing base 551 . It is provided with a terminal plate 558 and a frame ground substrate 559 accommodated in a substrate accommodation portion 551aa formed in a payout base 551 corresponding to the front of the external terminal plate 558 (the front of the pachinko machine 1). The external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side, and can transmit various information to the hall computer. The frame grounding substrate 559 can temporarily collect electromagnetic noise generated in various places and ground it to the island facility of the game hall.

The dispensing base 551 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and includes a top plate portion 551a extending left and right with a substantially constant width in the front-rear direction, and a top plate portion having a width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a when viewed from the front. A left side plate portion 551b extending long downward with substantially the same width, and a right side plate portion 551c extending short downward with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction from the front view right side of the top plate portion 551a. , a back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and an approximately constant rightward direction from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b. A rear plate left portion 551e extending to the vicinity of the lower end in width, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the rear plate left portion 551e to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and a left side plate portion 551b. A bottom plate portion 551g extending rightward from the front portion of the lower side to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and a connecting plate portion 551h connecting the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. and has. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape when viewed from the front, and is formed in a box shape that is open forward and inward of the L shape. On the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d, an eaves portion 551da projecting rearward is formed in the left-right direction at a portion spaced apart from the lower side by a predetermined length.

The payout base 551 has a top plate portion 551a extending in the horizontal direction with a length substantially equal to the horizontal width of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and a left side plate portion 551b extending above and below the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends vertically with a length substantially equal to the height of the direction. The dispensing base 551 has front ends of a top plate portion 551a, a left side plate portion 551b, and a right side plate portion 551c attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501. As shown in FIG.

In addition, the dispensing base 551 has a vertically extending shallow concave portion opened rearward by the left side plate portion 551b, the left side portion 551e of the back plate, and the inner side plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is attached. In addition, the dispensing base 551 protrudes rightward from the upper portion of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f when viewed from the front, and has a back cover attachment portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

The payout unit 560 is guided by the ball guide unit 570 having one guide passage 570a for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and the one guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out game balls B one by one based on instructions from a payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides downward the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580, and an upper full tank. A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through the ball path unit 600 to the side of the door frame 3 or the side of the board unit 620 is provided.

The board unit 620 is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 500 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the speaker unit 620a is attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 below the game board mounting portion 501c. a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b; a payout control unit 620d attached to the right side of the power supply unit 620c when viewed from the front; and an attached interface unit 620e.

The base unit 620b includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a rear base 626 attached to the rear side of the front base 625 and having the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear surface.

The power supply unit 620c includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 (not shown) of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover 631 attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. , is equipped with

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped transparent payout control board box 632 detachably attached to the right side of the power supply board cover 631 in the front view of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board housed in the payout control board box 632. a substrate 633; The payout control board box 632 is composed of a transparent cover and a transparent base. The payout control board 633 is accommodated in the payout control board box 632 and configured as a caulking case. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 and payout commands from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. Then, the instructed number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper tray 201 or lower tray 202).

The payout control board box 632 is composed of a cover body (not shown) and a base body (not shown). The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparently. A payout control board 633 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. In this way, since the cover body and the base body are transparently molded from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the payout control board 633 (whether or not unauthorized alteration has been made, or whether or not (whether or not the IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the payout control board box 632 . In addition, the payout control board box 632 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively. In order to open the control board box 632, its sealing mechanism must be destroyed, and the opening and closing of the payout control board box 632 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to discover illegal opening and closing of the payout control board box 632, and the deterrence against tampering with the payout control board box 632 is enhanced.

In addition, the payout control board 633 includes an error LED indicator (not shown) for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, as well as an RWM clear button 633z and the like having a pressing operation part serving as a plurality of functions. In this embodiment, a lead type RWM clear button 633z is adopted, and each lead of the RWM clear button 633z is soldered to the rear surface (solder surface) of the payout control board 633. The pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is exposed from the opening formed in the transparent cover body, and the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed when the payout control board 633 is accommodated in the payout control board box 632. can be operated by pressing the

The RWM clear button 633z is stored in the RAM built in the payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and the main control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided in the main control board for controlling the game content (game progress). It functions as a RAM clear switch to completely erase the information stored in the built-in RAM, functions as a setting switch button to select and switch setting values, and is displayed on the error LED indicator. function as an error release switch for canceling an error that has occurred. In other words, in this embodiment, the setting change function related to game specifications (function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching setting values) is provided separately from the main control board that controls game content (game progress). It is mounted on the payout control board 633 which is a board. In addition, the separate board may not be the payout control board 633, and the board that is not housed in the board case, the board that is housed in the board case, and the board that is housed in the board case configured as a caulking case. can be considered. However, the setting change function (function as a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values) is an important function for a game machine, so it is desirable to have high security, and it is better to put it in the board case rather than the board that is not stored in the board case. The board housed has higher security, and the board with even higher security is the board housed in a board case configured as a caulking case. Since the dispensing control board 633 is a board housed in a board case configured as a caulking case, it can be said that security is high. A main control board 1310 for controlling game content (game progress) is attached to a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 as will be described later. Being attached to the frame 4 also contributes to the improvement of security.

The interface unit 620e covers the board base 634 attached to the left side of the power supply board cover 631 in the front view of the power supply unit 620c, the interface board 635 attached to the rear surface of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. and an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634 in such a manner.

One end of a connection cable from the body frame 4 side is connected to the interface board 635 . The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board for controlling the game content (game progress), the peripheral control board for controlling the progress of performance, etc., and the like. It is connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in front view from the interface board 635 so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 which is inserted from the front into the game board mounting portion 301 of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 . The back cover 640 has its right side as seen from the front attached to the right end of the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 as seen from the front so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically, and the left side as seen from the front is the back cover attachment portion of the dispensing base 551 . 551i and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 are pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable. A lock screw 642 is provided on the left side of the back cover 640 and in a portion corresponding to the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 . The left side of the back cover 640 is attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i of the dispensing base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600, and the locking screw 642 is screwed into the back cover attachment portion 601a to secure the back. Cover 640 is secured. The back cover 640 can rotate about 180 degrees from a closed state covering the rear side of the game board 5 to an open state opening the rear side of the game board 5.例文帳に追加

The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side of a flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward when viewed from the front. It is formed so as to be positioned on the surface. The rear cover 640 is formed with a plurality of heat radiation slits 641 penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in the vertical direction. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the body frame 4 can be seen from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 . The slit 641 is not formed at all in a region corresponding to a main control board box attached to the rear side of the game board 5, which will be described later.

By the way, the game balls B flowing into the tank rail 553 from the ball tank 552 are worn by the game balls B colliding with each other or rubbing against each other, and the metal powder is peeled off from the game balls B and falls. Therefore, when the tank rail 553 on which the game ball B rolls in the downstream direction is in a state where metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B adheres, the downstream flow of the game ball B is hindered. As a result, it becomes difficult to supply the game balls B smoothly toward the downstream side, and the payout of the game balls B by the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is stopped.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of notch portions 553aa are formed on the lower side of the tank rail 553 (the lower side of the rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front), and the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B is removed. can be removed from the tank rail 553. As a result, for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B naturally falls outside from the tank rail 553 through the notch portion 553aa, so that the metal powder can be removed from the tank rail 553. Metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B adhering to the inside of the tank rail 553 due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling inside the tank rail 553 falls to the outside from the tank rail 553 through the notch 553aa. The powder can be removed from the inside of the tank rail 553, and metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B adhering to the inside of the tank rail 553 can be removed by inserting a cotton swab into the notch 553aa by an attendant such as a game hall clerk. The metal powder can be removed from the inside of the tank rail 553 by performing the operation of removing the .

The pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a plurality of rows opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, and the game balls B discharged from the pachinko machine 1 are polished by a ball polishing device and then re-fed by a ball lifting device. Since the balls are supplied to the ball tank 552, the temperature inside the island facilities of the game hall is much higher than the indoor temperature of the game hall. For this reason, the back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 includes various substrates provided for the game board 5, electric drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, various LEDs and various lamps. In order to radiate the heat emitted from the light emitting means, etc., to the outside of the pachinko machine 1, as described above, a plurality of heat radiation slits 641 extending vertically through the front and rear are formed. In addition, since the back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B dropped through the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 enters the back side of the game board 5. Although it is difficult to completely prevent this, it is possible to prevent the metal powder from entering the back side of the game board 5 .

In addition, inside the island facility of the game hall, a plurality of types of wiring for electrically connecting with various connection terminals of the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are suspended from the upper part thereof. , there are wiring that is electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 and wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 . In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 becomes unconnected wiring, and is suspended from the upper part inside the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in a plurality of rows opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, the unconnected wiring is connected to various substrates provided on the game board 5, electric drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, various LEDs and various lamps. If you touch the light-emitting means such as the light-emitting means, a short circuit may occur and damage may occur (which may cause a fire). Although the back cover 640 has a plurality of slits 641 formed therein, many of the ends of the unconnected wires and their vicinity are bent. Since it is difficult to intrude toward the back surface side, a short circuit can be prevented.

Of the various substrates provided on the game board 5, the substrates near the back cover 640 (excluding relay substrates such as a panel relay substrate 1410, which will be described later) are molded from a non-conductive resin that constitutes the substrate box. It is covered with the cover body, and even if the tip of the unconnected wiring intrudes into the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641 and comes into contact with the cover body, the board covered with the cover body is not affected at all. . A relay board such as a panel relay board 1410 to be described later is a board that relays one board and another board. It is formed not on the surface (mounting surface) of the relay board on which various connectors are mounted, which is the surface facing the back cover 640, but on the back surface (solder surface) of the relay board opposite to the surface facing the back cover 640. , The surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the relay board are colored in a predetermined color (e.g., green, yellow, red, blue, black) except for through-holes through which pin terminals of various connectors can be inserted and soldered. etc.), the wiring pattern is covered with a resist of a predetermined color and is not exposed. In other words, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring enters the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641 and touches the relay board, the relay board is not affected.

In this way, the rear cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 includes a protective cover capable of protecting the rear side of the game board 5 by covering the rear side of the game board 5 . and by covering the rear side of the game board 5, heat emitted from various substrates provided on the game board 5, electrical drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, and light emitting means such as various LEDs and various lamps A heat dissipation function that can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the slit 641 of the tank rail 553, and metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B that has fallen through the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 A metal powder intrusion suppression function that can suppress intrusion into the side of the game hall, and an unconnected wiring suspended from the inside of the island facility of the game hall. and a protection wall function capable of preventing contact with light-emitting means such as a driving source, various LEDs, various lamps, and the like.

Locking unit 650 in body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 39(a) is a front perspective view of the locking unit of the body frame, and FIG. 39(b) is a rear perspective view of the locking unit. The locking unit 650 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and locks the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 . The locking unit 650 includes a metal unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of metal door frame hooks 652 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of locking with the door frame 3, and a unit A plurality of metal outer frame hooks 653 that protrude backward from the base 651 and can be engaged with the outer frame 2, and a metal transmission cylinder that vertically moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653. 654, a metal lock spring 655 that biases the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and a metal spring that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward. and an unlocking lever 656 for outer frame.

The body frame reinforcement frame 530 attached to the left side of the body frame base unit 500 in front view is attached to the left side of the body frame base 501 in the body frame base unit 500 in front view. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in plan view that is U-shaped with an open right side in front view, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In this embodiment, the main body frame reinforcement frame 530 is formed of a metal extruded profile.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the body frame 4 , a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 , transmission cylinders 654 , and outer frame unlocking levers 656 are positioned forward of the front surface of the body frame base 501 . Protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501f of the main body frame base 501, and by closing the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. Engaged with the transmission member 133, the rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotated. In addition, the locking unit 650 has a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 locked to the hooking member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of the door frame hooks 652 are locked. hook 653 for the outer frame is engaged with the upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2 .

When the lock unit 650 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in a front view. The door frame hook 652 moves upward and the door frame 3 is unlocked from the body frame 4 . On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654 to unlock the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 . When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4 , sliding the outer frame unlocking lever 656 downward causes the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 to move downward. 4 is unlocked. Thus, locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the front end sides of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are inclined to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are moved by the hooking member 116 and the upper hooking member. 24 and the lower hooking member 25, it is locked by the biasing force of the lock spring 655. As shown in FIG.

The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 made of metal has a function of reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500 to impart rigidity, and also functions as a main body frame metal ground. It is electrically connected to the frame earth substrate 559 described above. The frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facilities of the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown). In addition to the function of reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500 to impart rigidity to the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 made of metal, the fact that it also functions as a main body frame metal ground will be described later.

[4-3. Electromagnetic noise countermeasures for the main body frame]
Next, noise countermeasures of the body frame 4 will be briefly described. As described above, the body frame 4 includes a frame-like body frame base unit 500 whose rear part can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer circumference of the game board 5. Inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper side and left side in front view on the rear side, the game ball B received by the payout base unit 550 to the player side (upper tray 130 and lower tray 140) A payout unit 560 for payout, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 having a power switch 630a capable of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, and a payout control board 633 are provided.

As described above, the main body frame base unit 500 is formed of a metal extruded member, and includes the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 and the like attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 when viewed from the front. As described above, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 functions as a main body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the main body frame base unit 500 to impart rigidity. are electrically connected to the above-described frame ground substrate 559 provided in the body frame 4 . In other words, in this embodiment, the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 serves as a frame ground on the main body frame side. In addition, the ball tank 552 has a metal plate (not shown) disposed on the entire bottom thereof electrically connected to the above-described frame ground substrate 559 via a ball tank ground wire (not shown). A ground connection terminal (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 is electrically connected to the frame ground board 559 via an interface ground wire (not shown). A ground connection terminal (not shown) provided on the power supply substrate 630 of the substrate unit 620 is electrically connected to the above-described frame ground substrate 559 via a power supply ground wire (not shown). This frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facilities of the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown).

In this way, as noise countermeasures for the main body frame 4, electromagnetic wave noise that enters the main body frame reinforcing frame 530, the ball tank 552, the interface board 635 in the board unit 620, and the power board 630 in the board unit 620 is suppressed by the main body frame reinforcing frame 530. , the ball tank 552, the interface board 635 in the board unit 620, the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620, various corresponding ground wires (not shown), the frame ground board 559, and the island equipment of the game hall via the island facility ground wire (not shown). It is designed to be guided to ground and removed.

[4-4. Frame ground board]
Next, the frame ground substrate 559 will be briefly described. As described above, the frame grounding board 559 can once collect electromagnetic noise generated in various places and ground it to the island facility of the game hall, and has a plurality of grounding terminals. The first ground terminal (interface ground terminal) is electrically connected as an interface ground to a ground connection terminal provided on the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 via an interface ground wire (not shown). , The second ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) is electrically connected to the ground connection terminal of the island facility of the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown) as the island facility ground. A terminal (ball tank grounding terminal) has one end of a ball tank grounding wire (not shown) attached to a metal plate (not shown) arranged on the entire bottom of the ball tank 552 with a metal screw (not shown). The other end of the tank ground wire is electrically connected, and the fourth ground terminal (main body frame metal ground terminal) serves as the main body frame metal ground, and is connected to the metal main body of the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4. One end of a main body frame metal ground wire (not shown) is attached to the frame reinforcing frame 530 with a metal screw (not shown), and the other end of the main body frame metal ground wire is electrically connected. The ground terminal) is electrically connected as a power supply ground to a ground connection terminal provided on the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 via a power supply ground wire (not shown). As a door frame metal ground, one end of a door frame metal ground wire (not shown) is attached to a metal door frame reinforcement unit in a door frame base unit (not shown) of the door frame 3 with a metal screw (not shown). , the other end of the door frame metal ground wire is electrically connected.

In the circuit of the frame ground board 559, a third ground terminal (ball tank ground terminal) as a ball tank ground is electrically connected to one end of a first resistor (not shown), and the other end of the first resistor is used as a power supply ground. is electrically connected to the 5th ground terminal (power ground terminal), the 2nd ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) as the island facility ground, and the 1st ground terminal (interface ground terminal) as the interface ground. A fourth ground terminal (body frame metal ground terminal) as a frame metal ground and a sixth ground terminal (door frame metal ground) as a door frame metal ground are electrically connected to one end of a second resistor (not shown). Along with this, the other end of the second resistor is connected to the fifth ground terminal (power ground terminal) as power ground, the second ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) as island facility ground, and the first ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) as interface ground ( interface ground terminal). That is, the other end of the first resistor and the other end of the second resistor are electrically connected. In this embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are used as the first resistor and the second resistor.

The electromagnetic noise flowing through the first ground terminal (interface ground terminal) as an interface ground is grounded to the island facility of the game hall via the second ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) as the island facility ground and the island facility ground wire. The electromagnetic noise that flows through the third ground terminal (ball tank ground terminal) as the ball tank ground and is removed by being guided to the second ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) as the island facility ground, through the island facility ground wire Then, the electromagnetic wave noise that is guided to and removed from the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and flows to the fourth ground terminal (body frame metal ground terminal) as the main body frame metal ground is transferred to the second ground terminal (island ground) as the island facility ground. Equipment ground terminal), island equipment ground wire, is guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed, and the electromagnetic wave noise flowing to the 5th ground terminal (power ground terminal) as the power ground is used as the island equipment ground. 2nd ground terminal (island facility ground terminal), through the island facility ground wire, it is guided to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed, and the 6th ground terminal (door frame metal ground) as the door frame metal ground The electromagnetic wave noise flowing in the game hall is guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the second ground terminal (island equipment ground terminal) as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire, and is removed.

By the way, the ball tank 552, the payout unit 560 and the like are attached to the payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4. As shown in FIG. The ball tank 552 is supplied with the game balls B from the island facility of the game hall, and the game balls B are supplied from the ball tank 552 to the payout unit 560 . The game ball B is ground in the island equipment of the game hall, rubs against each other in circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and emits electromagnetic noise by being charged and electrostatically discharged. For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 that can retain the game balls B are attached.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the frame ground substrate 559 is arranged near the sphere tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate, and as a result of which static electricity tends to accumulate, the sphere tank 552 and the payout unit are strongly affected by electromagnetic noise. In the frame ground substrate 559 , a third ground terminal (ball tank ground terminal) and the fourth ground terminal (main body frame metal ground terminal) as the main body frame metal ground (main body frame metal ground terminal), through the first resistor and the second resistor, respectively, the electromagnetic wave noise is gradually passed and attenuated, and the instantaneous high voltage is generated. The second ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) as the island facility ground can be led to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the island facility ground wire. In other words, the electromagnetic wave noise entering from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity tends to accumulate is transferred from the frame ground board 559 through the ball tank 552 and the metal body frame reinforcement frame 530 as a frame ground called frame ground. By leading to the ground of the island facility of the game hall, the electromagnetic noise entering from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be flowed to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed. Thus, in this embodiment, the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 functions as a body frame metal ground in addition to the function of reinforcing the body frame base unit 500 to impart rigidity.

Moreover, as described above, some of the various decorative portions provided on the door frame 3 are plated with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is noble metal plating such as chrome plating or hard gold plating, and has electrical conductivity. The ornamental plated decorative portion is electrically connected to the door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit (not shown) of the door frame 3 via wiring (not shown) or a metal conductive plate (not shown). It is For this reason, for example, when a player touches a decorative portion with decorative plating, the static electricity charged in the player is discharged and transmitted as electromagnetic noise from the player to the door frame reinforcing unit via the decorative portion. In addition, a staff member such as a game hall clerk or a person who has a setting key described later (a limited person who can check the current setting value that has been set in addition to changing the setting value) When the locking unit 650 in the frame 4 is touched, as described above, the static electricity charged in the game hall clerk or the person holding the setting key, which will be described later, is discharged as electromagnetic wave noise. or from a person who possesses a setting key, which will be described later, is transmitted to the door frame reinforcing unit via the locking unit 650. FIG.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sixth ground terminal (door frame metal ground) as the door frame metal ground is provided in the frame ground board 559 for the door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit (not shown) of the door frame 3. Through the second resistor, the electromagnetic wave noise is gradually allowed to flow and attenuate to suppress the instantaneous discharge of high voltage, and the second ground terminal (island facility ground terminal) as the island facility ground line through the island facility ground wire It is designed to be able to lead to the ground of the island facility of the game hall. In other words, the decorative parts with decorative plating, the players, staff members such as clerks in the skill hall, and those who have setting keys (described later) (in addition to changing the setting values, checking the current setting values that are set) The electromagnetic noise from the limited person who can perform such as) is guided from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall through the door frame reinforcement unit as a frame ground called frame ground. Plated decorative parts, players, clerks at skill halls, etc., and those who possess setting keys described later (in addition to changing the setting values, checking the current setting values that are set) Electromagnetic wave noise from limited people who can do it) can be removed by flowing it to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall.

[4-5. Detailed configuration of the upper part of the body frame]
Next, the detailed configuration of the upper portion of the body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 40 to 47. FIG. FIG. 40(a) is a plan view of the body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). FIG. 41 is an enlarged view showing an enlarged upper portion of the perspective view of the body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 42(a) is a perspective view of the sphere tank assembled with tank rails, etc., viewed from the front and above, and FIG. 42(b) is a perspective view of (a) viewed from the front and bottom. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 42(a) exploded and viewed from the front. FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing a region in which game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame circulate. FIG. 45 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 46 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls to the detour passage in the upper part of the body frame. FIG. 47 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind the hinge side.

As described above, the body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2, and can be attached to and detached from the outer frame 2 by means of the body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the body frame lower hinge portion 520, and the hinge can be rotated. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 which is removably attached and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped payout attached along the front view upper side and left side on the rear side of the body frame base 501. A base 551, a sphere tank 552 that is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box shape (container shape) that extends left and right and is open upward, and a groove that is attached to the left side of the sphere tank 552 and is open upward. a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553; A second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end, a ball straightening member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and the tank rail 553 A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end, and a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 on the rear side of the payout base 551 and for paying out the game balls B to the player side. I have it.

The sphere tank 552 has a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction when viewed from above. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, and a left side wall 552d and a right side wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a. It is The ball tank 552 stores game balls B supplied from an island facility such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed.

Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f which is cut from above in the front wall 552b and is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f extends from the end of the left side wall 552d of the front wall 552b toward the opposite side (right side wall 552e side) of the front wall 552b and has a length of about 3/4 of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction. It is formed over

The tank rail 553 communicates with the inside of the ball tank 552 on the right end side (upstream side) when viewed from the front, and the downstream side extends to one side (left side) in the left-right direction so as to move away from the ball tank 552 . . The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a formed so that only one game ball B can flow in the width direction perpendicular to the direction of circulation of the game ball B. have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. In a plan view, the main guiding portion 553a extends leftward from the right end parallel to the axis extending in the leftward and rightward direction from the right end to a position about 1/10 of the total length in the leftward and rightward directions, and then leftward. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to a position about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move rearward as it goes, and extending from there to the left end in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction. .

The main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 has a portion extending from the left end to the right in parallel with the axis extending in the left-right direction. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. As shown in FIG. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed so that the height of the passage through which the game ball B flows becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game ball B is formed at the downstream end. is formed at a height (slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) at which only one can be circulated.

In addition, the tank rail 553 has a predetermined length (in this embodiment, approximately 30 mm) are formed at predetermined intervals (about 10 mm in this embodiment). Due to the rectangular notch 553aa, the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a has a thickness of about 7 mm added forward from the rear wall of the main guiding portion 553a to the thickness of the rear wall (about 2.5 mm in this embodiment). A rectangular hole having a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed in the rear wall of the main guide portion 553a. , about 2.5 mm) and a length of about 30 mm in the horizontal direction.

The game balls B flowing into the tank rail 553 from the ball tank 552 are worn such that the game balls B collide with each other, rub against each other, and the metal powder is peeled off from the game balls B and falls. Therefore, when the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B adheres to the main guide portion 553a, the downstream flow of the game ball B is hindered, and the game ball B is smoothly moved toward the downstream side. , and the payout of the game ball B by the payout device 580 is stopped.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a plurality of notch portions 553aa are formed in the main guide portion 553a so that the metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. As a result, for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B naturally falls outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa, and the metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. Due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guide portion 553a, the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B adhering to the main guide portion 553a falls outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa. Metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a by this, and the game ball B attached to the main guide portion 553a is worn out by inserting a cotton swab into the notch portion 553aa by an attendant such as a store clerk of the game hall. The metal powder can be removed from the main guide portion 553a by performing an operation to remove the metal powder.

In addition, the tank rail 553 extends above the main guide portion 553a from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the main guide portion 553a is arranged so that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in the width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b that bulges wider than the width of the guide portion 553a and that changes in width direction from the upstream end toward the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guide portion 553a. there is By this bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B as it goes downstream. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end toward the main guiding portion 553a downward. Thus, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing in the bulging portion 553b so that the width direction is aligned in a row toward the downstream side and downward side.

The center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 is arranged on the inner side, and the bulging portion 553b is formed in a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of curvature of the bulging portion 553b is located above the main guiding portion 553a, the tank rail 553 has a slight bulge at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved swelling portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the swelling portion 553b acts depends on the position of the contacting swelling portion 553b. Since the direction changes in various directions, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of spheroids in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed in a shape that extends constantly, the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b is always subjected to reaction force in a constant direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b. As a result, the reaction force becomes difficult to disperse, and the game ball B inside is always pushed in a fixed direction, making it difficult for the game ball B to escape and ball clogging (ball jam) is likely to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b is a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B. By dispersing the directions in which the plurality of game balls B to be pushed are dispersed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball jam) can be made difficult to occur.

Also, the tank rail 553 is molded from a transparent material (polycarbonate resin or the like) so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. As a result, even if a ball clog (ball jam) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so the clogged place can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, the clogging of the balls in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, so that the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of clogging of the balls can be shortened as much as possible, and the interest of the player in the game due to the interruption of the game can be increased. A decrease can be suppressed. In addition, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen through the tank rail 553 from the rear. When a problem occurs in the movement of the movable effect unit or the like, the state of the transmission mechanism such as the drive motor, gears, belts, etc. can be checked while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4. It is possible to achieve the same effect as the effect of use.

The body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552 and extends in the front-rear direction, and the same side (left side in front view) as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction is outside the left side wall 552 d of the ball tank 552 . In order to return the game balls B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is inclined so that the height is higher. and an overflow surface portion 501m extending rearward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m to above the bulging portion 553b where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. , and the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction is inclined to be lower, and part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m and a detour passage 552g that guides the

In addition, the body frame 4 is provided on the side opposite to the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 among both left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g. Discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than the portion of tank rail 553 where the upper side is open, and a position lower than overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side of detour passage 552g across discharge portion 551j. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring can be connected from the rear, and the upper side of the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered, and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. and a terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the body frame base 501 . The overflow surface portion 501m is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. extended to The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the length in the horizontal direction is about 1/3 of the length in the horizontal direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in a front view extends from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is positioned to the right of 1/3 of the total length in the horizontal direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed so that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. This overflow surface portion 501m forms a gap with a distance of about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame upper member 30 in a state where the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. .

The main body frame base 501 is arranged on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m, and includes a flat plate-like left step portion 501n and a right step portion 501o extending substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface portion 501m, The upper end of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o is higher than the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right outer sides, and extends in the front-rear direction in a strip shape. and a plurality of ribs 501p arranged at intervals narrower than the diameter. The left step portion 501n is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is shorter than the length in the front-rear direction. In addition, the left step portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear end right corner is slightly lower when viewed from the front. The right stepped portion 501o is longer in the left-right direction than in the front-rear direction. Further, the right stepped portion 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the left corner of the rear end is slightly lower when viewed from the front.

The plurality of ribs 501p of the main body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is raised. The gap between is formed at a height narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

When the body frame base 501 is assembled to the body frame 4, the right end of the overflow surface portion 501m is aligned with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the ball tank 552 in the front view. The right end of the right stepped portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction.

The detour passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG. In the following, the container-shaped area surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is simply referred to as the sphere tank 552 as well. The detour passage 552g extends leftward from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in a flat plate shape, and has a passage surface 552h whose front end is at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and whose rear end is lower. and a dam portion extending upward from the opposite side of the passage surface 552h to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. The rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 at the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side when viewed from the front. It extends diagonally so as to move forward as it goes from the right end side. In addition, the passage surface 552h of the detour passage 552g may be horizontally inclined in the horizontal direction.

The detour passage 552g is arranged so that the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is aligned with the front end side of the portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction in a crank-like shape and that extends obliquely in the left-right direction. extended. That is, the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided backward by the detour passage 552g changes its circulation direction from the slanted rear end so as to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (distribution direction of the game ball B in the tank rail 553). Therefore, from the rear end of the detour passage 552g, since the game ball B is released in a direction substantially perpendicular to the circulation direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the detour passage 552g A game ball B from can be received. In addition, since the game ball B is supplied from the detour passage 552g into the tank rail 553 in a substantially vertical direction (perpendicular direction) to the circulation direction of the game ball B, the tank rail by the game ball B from the detour passage 552g Ball clogging in 553 can be made difficult to occur.

Since the rear end of the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction so as to move backward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the obliquely extending rear end allows the game ball B to be released to the upstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is wider than the downstream side where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrowed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball slugs in the tank rail 553 by discharging the fuel to a wide area.

In addition, the part where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to the rear part of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the outside of the front view left part of the rear wall 552c in the tank rail 553 . A game ball B that passes under the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 (the ceiling side of the opening 552k) from inside the ball tank 552 flows through this portion. For this reason, in the portion behind the detour passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). height). Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 in the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) in which the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured, so that the detour passage 552g The tank rail 553 can surely receive the game ball B guided backward by the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not fall backward from the tank rail 553.例文帳に追加

The sphere tank 552 has a flat plate shape extending to the right from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface portion 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end side extending from the left end of the front wall 552b to the left end of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the position about 1/3 of the total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the left end of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b to about 1/2 of the full length in the front-rear direction of the left side wall 552d at about 1/9 of the full length, it extends in parallel with the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, From there, it extends parallel to the rear wall 552c with a constant width in the front-rear direction from the left end of the rear wall 552c to about 1/3 of the total length in the left-right direction of the rear wall 552c.

In the sphere tank 552, in plan view, a straight line connecting the right end side of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape and the end on the front wall 552b side and the end on the rear wall 552c side of the right end side. The enclosed area has an opening 552k formed to penetrate vertically. In addition, the ball tank 552 has flat flanges extending laterally outward and vertically on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the detour passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. In the ball tank 552, the height of the upper edge of the portion of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edge of the two flange portions 552l is equal to the upper edge of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (body frame base 501). upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled together, the opening 552k of the ball tank 552 is connected to the upstream end (right end in front view) of the tank rail 553 . In addition, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the left portion extending straight in the left-right direction are positioned (protruded) behind the ball tank 552 . )are doing. The rear end side of the left detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is positioned at the front end of the diagonally extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

The discharge portion 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. As shown in FIG. The discharge part 551j is arranged in the ball tank 552 so that when assembled to the main body frame 4, the height lower than the bypass passage 552g is lowered rearward in a stepwise manner to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in front view to the tank rail 553, it extends leftward along the tank rail 553 to a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). position in the vicinity), and then extends backward.

The external terminal plate 558 has a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a arranged in the lateral direction on the rear surface thereof. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal in which the gripping portion can be opened by operating a lever to grip the tip of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 in a state assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. As shown in FIG. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552. As shown in FIG.

Next, the function and effect of the upper portion of the body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left step portion 501n, the right step portion 501o, and the detour passage 552g are arranged such that the rear end side of the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are lowered as indicated by the white arrows in FIG. The left stepped portion 501n has a rear right corner, and the right stepped portion 501o has a rear left corner. Also, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined so that the left end side thereof becomes lower when viewed from the front. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the right end side in the direction opposite to the bottom wall 552a is lowered.

Then, when the amount of game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island equipment, first, the overflow portion 552f, which is the lowest in the upper edge of the outer periphery, is crossed. The game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501m, and can be made to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the front overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B that has been dropped can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface portion 501m (see FIG. 45). Therefore, since it is possible to prevent the game balls B from increasing further in the ball tank 552, it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the ball tank 552 (increase in ball pressure). , it is possible to prevent the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball jam) due to meshing of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 .

Further, since the bypass passage 552g is provided, as shown in FIG. 46, the game balls B overflowing the overflow surface portion 501m from the ball tank 552 can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game balls B accumulated in the overflow surface portion 501m from exerting a strong backward pressure on the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and clogging of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be avoided. can be prevented. In addition, since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m can be prevented from spilling outside (rear side) of the body frame 4. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the problem that the game ball B spilled outside the body frame 4 is caught between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4 and the body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

Furthermore, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552 Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a fixed position, the flow (pressure) by the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass passage 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. , it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pushing each other in the tank rail 553 and prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

In addition, since the height of the upper edge of the outer periphery of the ball tank 552 other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, after overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m over the overflow portion 552f, the game ball B circulating from the overflow surface portion 501m to the bypass passage 552g is on the left side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the game ball B from returning from the detour passage 552g to the ball tank 552 side, and the game ball B on the detour passage 552g side presses the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the ball is released. It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552 .

Furthermore, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the detour passage 552g is positioned from the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m (passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the detour passage 552g). Since the height is also high, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the detour passage 552g without passing through the overflow surface portion 501m. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) with respect to the detour passage 552g, so that the flow of the game ball B in the detour passage 552g is prevented from the overflow surface portion 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a constant direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a constant direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing each other and getting stuck due to the direction of the pressure applied to the game balls B being different, and the occurrence of clogging of the game balls B can be prevented. can be prevented.

In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, thereby aligning in the horizontal direction. Since they are aligned, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the tank rail 553 has a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged in a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, the game ball released from the rear end of the detour passage 552g The ball B can be reliably received, and the effects described above can be reliably achieved.

In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to the portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end toward the downstream side so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a becomes smaller. Since they are changed so as to coincide with each other, a plurality of game balls B can be aligned in a line in the width direction as they go downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game ball B circulates decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side) By circulating a plurality of game balls B stacked in multiple stages in the height direction to the downstream side through the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, the number of stages in the height direction is reduced and a row is formed. can be aligned to Therefore, the tank rail 553 can guide a plurality of game balls B to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a row.

Furthermore, since the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g are provided, it is possible to store a certain number of game balls B in them, and the tank rail 553 is provided with a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the capacity inside the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552 .

In addition, on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j in between, an external terminal plate 558 provided with a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a to which electrical wiring is connected, and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a ( Since it is provided with a terminal cover 551k covering the upper side of the external terminal plate 558), the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be distant from the ball tank 552 to which game balls B are supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility bounces or is vigorously supplied in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to reach (abut) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. , the contact of the game ball B does not cause a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring.

In addition, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed backward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is made higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 is placed in the ball tank 552. Even if it bounces on the overflow surface portion 501m, it can be made difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it can be made difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of such a problem.

Furthermore, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface portion 501m to the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 45) due to the inclination of the guide surface portion 552j. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B on the guide surface portion 552j from pressing the game ball B in the ball tank 552 in the downstream direction, and clogging of the game ball B occurs in the ball tank 552. can be prevented.

In addition, the game ball B supplied from the island facility to the ball tank 552 bounces on the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface portion 501m, and rides on the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o on both left and right sides of the overflow surface portion 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 45, these inclinations can guide the game ball B to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g. can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball B flows from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game ball B passes under the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game balls are piled up on the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, on the downstream side of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j) on the tank rail 553, that is, on the rear end side of the detour passage 552g, a space (empty) capable of stacking the game balls B upward can be secured. , the game ball B guided by the detour passage 552g can be reliably received.

Furthermore, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of the part where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed, even if the game ball B falls backward from the terminal cover 551k, The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

In addition, while the sphere tank 552 is made of an electric conductor (in this example, it is made of conductive synthetic resin), the tank rail 553 is insulated from the peripheral control board box of the peripheral control unit 1500, which will be described later. It is composed of a body (in this example, it is molded from a non-conductive synthetic resin). In the present embodiment, when the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box are charged, they become the same polarity. is attached to the peripheral control board box of the same polarity as the tank rail 553 . That is, the metal powder of the game ball B moves to the tank rail 553 without adhering to the ball tank 552, adheres to the tank rail 553, stays in the tank rail 553, and further adheres to the tank rail 553. When the metal powder of the game ball B falls from the notch 553aa, it adheres to the peripheral control board box of the same polarity as the tank rail 553 (for example, the upper surface of the peripheral board box).

[4-6. Configuration of measures against metal powder]
Next, electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by the metal powder of the game ball B falling outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553. ) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 48 is an enlarged schematic diagram showing a part of the cross section taken along line CC of FIG.

As described above, the metal powder (foreign matter) of the game ball B falling from the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 is disposed below the tank rail 553. The peripheral control unit If it adheres to 1500, electrical troubles may occur, causing troubles in the peripheral control unit 1500, malfunctions, and the like. For example, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 includes ICs such as a peripheral control IC, ROM, and SDRAM, and the peripheral data ROM board, which will be described later, includes ICs such as a peripheral data ROM. As the pin intervals of these ICs become smaller, the pin intervals of various connectors and special connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 become narrower. Since the distance between the connector and the special connector is narrow, it is necessary to take measures against electrical troubles caused by foreign objects falling from the tank rail.

First, as shown in FIG. 48, a plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 are located behind the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Compared to the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface, it is shifted backward (in this embodiment, about half the diameter of the game ball B). are displaced by the distance dimension).

As described above, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a of the dispensing base 551 on which the tank rail 553 is arranged extends from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a (from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a). It is formed in a stepped shape that bends downward in multiple directions. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 48, the lower end of the top plate portion constitutes a first eaves portion 551da extending rearward of the pachinko machine 1 so as to be substantially flush with the rear surface of the tank rail 553. . Further, when the rear cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper end portion of the rear cover 640 is in surface contact with the rear surface of the first eaves portion 551da.

As a result, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa can be received and adhered to the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. there is That is, the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a allows the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa to cover body 1501 and base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. The metal powder of the game ball B falling to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is suppressed from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the game It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 .

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, furthermore, in the state assembled to the main body frame 4, the back cover 640 covers at least a part of the rear side of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Since it extends downward from the top plate portion 553aa, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa and adheres to the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a When falling from the first canopy part 551da of 551a, this metal powder is on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 falls toward the base body 1502, and the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the first canopy part 551da of the top plate part 551a is the cover of the peripheral control unit 1500. By suppressing entry into the body 1501 , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 .

In this way, the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and the back cover 640 are configured to collect the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. is prevented from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). functioning as a canopy or cover Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553 .

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, since the first eaves portion 551da is provided below the notch portion 553aa, not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened, the main The metal powder of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the guide portion 553a can be received and adhered to the first eaves portion 551da, and the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa. The metal powder falls toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the metal powder of the game ball B falling from the main guide part 553a to the outside through the cutout part 553aa falls to the peripheral control unit. Entry into the cover body 1501 of the ball 1500 is suppressed, and the occurrence of electrical trouble due to adhesion of the metal powder of the game ball B to the peripheral control board 1510 can be suppressed.

In the above example, the upper end of the back cover 640 is in contact with the rear surface of the first eaves portion 551da when assembled to the main body frame 4, but the upper end of the back cover 640 and the first eaves You may make it space apart and arrange|position the part 551da. That is, the back cover 640 and the first canopy portion 551da work together so that the metal powder of the game ball B falling outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is trapped inside the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. Any form of arrangement between the back cover 640 and the first eaves portion 551da may be used as long as it suppresses the intrusion.

In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of notch portions 553aa are formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553, and the back side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back side of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the attached effect display device 1600) is displaced in the front-back direction of the pachinko machine 1 (in this embodiment, it is about half the diameter of the game ball B). 1) (that is, due to the structure in which the peripheral control unit 1500 is not arranged directly below the notch 553aa), the game ball B from the tank rail 553 It is effective as a countermeasure against metal powder that can prevent electrical troubles caused by metal powder.

Further, the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided in the rear surface of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate to be described later), whereas the upper side, the left side, and the left side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate to be described later) are provided. Since it is not provided on each cover side wall provided on the lower side and the right side, it is assumed that the metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later). Intrusion into the inside of the cover body 1501 can be made difficult even if it is.

Of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e provided on the upper, left, lower, and right sides of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, any one or a combination of ventilation holes A plurality of 1501az may be formed. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in 1501e, or a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover flat plate 1510a may be combined to form a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az. . Even with this configuration, foreign matter produced by the game ball B (for example, metal powder produced by abrasion of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation hole 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. As a result, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles caused by falling foreign matter onto various boards in the peripheral control board box 1505 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent electrical troubles due to falling foreign matter from the tank rail 553 . The reason why the ventilation holes 1501az are not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation holes 1501az were formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 would be exposed to the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation holes 1501az. Foreign matter generated by the game ball B (for example, metal powder generated by the wear of the game ball B) falls toward the inside of the box 1505 and enters the various boards of the peripheral control board box 1505. This is because the probability of trouble occurring is increased.

Also, when the ventilation holes 1501 are not provided on the upper surface of the cover body 1501, the heat dissipation function is compensated by increasing the number of the ventilation holes 1501 provided on the other surface or expanding the area of the ventilation holes 1501. may This can contribute to suppressing the temperature rise of the peripheral control board box 1505, and can suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles such as thermal runaway.

Further, the upper surface of the cover body 1501 attached to the pachinko machine 1 is substantially horizontal. Therefore, when the metal powder of the game ball B drops from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa and adheres to the upper surface of the cover body 1501, the metal powder can be retained on the upper surface of the cover body 1501. can. As a result, it is possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from entering the inside of the cover body 1501 . Part or all of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 may be inclined as long as the metal powder of the game ball B is not dropped toward the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 .

Also, the first eaves member 551a arranged below the tank rail 553 may be attached to the top plate portion 551a as a separate member (another structural component).

In addition, when the top and rear of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are covered by the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a and/or the back cover 640, When the plurality of cutouts 553aa and the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 are displaced in the longitudinal direction of the pachinko machine 1, the plurality of cutouts 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a If there is a low probability that the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the peripheral control unit 1500 will move toward the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the upper surface of the cover body 1501 in the state of being attached to the pachinko machine 1 Ventilation holes 1501az may be provided in portions (for example, corners of the cover body 1501, ventilation holes 1501az are formed in a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 although most of the upper surface is closed, etc.).

Further, the present technical idea is not limited to completely preventing the metal powder of the game ball B falling from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. , compared to the conventional pachinko machine, the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is suppressed from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. For example, a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 (for example, corners of the cover body 1501, most of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 is closed, but a part of the upper surface of the cover body 1501 in the state of being attached to the pachinko machine 1 has the ventilation holes 1501az. The present technical idea also applies to the provision of the ventilation holes 1501az in the sintered body, etc.).

Also, a plurality of slit holes are formed in the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 . In addition, along the lower side of the cover body 1501, the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501 has seven connectors (to be described later) provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and seven connector holes and seven connector holes at positions corresponding to volume control switches. A volume adjustment hole is formed in each, and two connector holes are formed in positions corresponding to two connectors provided on a liquid crystal output board, which will be described later. When the peripheral control board 1510 is attached inside the cover body 1501, gaps are formed between the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. The seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are exposed through the seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between the volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole formed in the cover body 1501. A volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed through this volume control hole. Further, when a liquid crystal output board, which will be described later, is attached inside the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board and the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. Two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board are exposed through these two connector holes.

A cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 allows air from outside the peripheral control unit 1500 to pass through a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 and a shield plate accommodated in a space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. 1540 through a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az, and the gaps described above (the gaps formed in the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501, A gap formed between a volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a volume control hole formed on the cover body 1501, two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board, and two connectors formed on the cover body 1501. It will be taken in through the hole and the gap formed in the hole.

By the way, when the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 takes in the air outside the peripheral control unit 1500, the heavy metal powder of the game ball B is affected by the air flow and moves toward the inner space of the cover body 1501. electrical trouble (short circuit) due to the sucked metal powder, various electronic components provided on various boards such as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 attached inside the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. etc., malfunction (failure) will occur.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), the first canopy portion 551da is formed along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500. It can be configured to have a function as a canopy to prevent the heavy powder B metal powder from being sucked into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 . A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be given later.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of notch portions 553aa are formed in the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 so that metal powder generated by wear of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. However, the ball passage in which the game ball B rolls may be formed with a cutout portion, a hole, or a groove similar to the cutout portion 553aa. Specifically, in the ball guide unit 570 having a single guide passage 570a that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, as shown in FIG. A notch, hole or groove may be formed in the rear surface of the guide unit base 571 of the guide unit 570 shown in FIG. Below the ball guiding unit 570, as shown in FIG. 33, a dispensing device 580, a substrate unit 620, and the like are arranged. , the board unit 620 has the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the interface board 635, etc. shown in FIG. 34, and various boards are arranged. Therefore, when a notch, hole, or groove is formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571, the game ball falling through the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the induction unit base 571 It is necessary to prevent the B metal powder from adhering to various substrates arranged below the induction unit 570 . Therefore, an eaves-like member can be formed so as to protrude rearward along the upper side of the dispensing device rear lid 582 of the dispensing device 580 shown in FIG. The positions of the cutouts, holes, or grooves formed in the blade rotation detection sensor 590 and the positions of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted in the dispensing device 580 can be staggered, or both can be adopted. It can also be configured as Also, along the upper side of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, and the like shown in FIG. The position of the notch, hole, or groove formed on the rear surface of the guide unit base 571, the power supply board cover 631, the payout control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636 can be configured by protruding. and , can be shifted, or both can be employed.

Next, another configuration of the present invention that can avoid electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B (hereinafter referred to as "metal powder countermeasures according to second to fifth embodiments") ) will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 51. FIG. FIG. 49 shows a configuration for measures against metal powder according to the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration for measures against metal powder according to the second embodiment. FIG. 50 shows a configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the third embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the third embodiment. FIG. 51 shows a configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. In FIGS. 49 to 51, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 48 (hereinafter referred to as "structure for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment") are denoted by the same reference numerals. , the outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only the parts of the game board 5 necessary for explanation are represented as cross-sectional views.

[Comparison between the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged extends from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a ( The top plate portion 551a is formed in a stepped shape bent downward along the direction from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a. It constitutes a first eaves portion 551da extending rearward.

On the other hand, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. The top plate portion 551a is formed in a stepped shape that is bent downward from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), and the lower end portion of the top plate portion 551a extends to the rear of the pachinko machine 1. Although the first eaves portion 551da is configured, the first eaves portion 551da is not extended so as to be substantially on the same plane as the rear surface of the tank rail 553, but is extended to the front of the pachinko machine 1 (see FIG. 48). In the example shown, only the notch portion 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 is provided.

On the other hand, the upper end of the back cover 640 is bent toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 (in the direction of the game board 5) when assembled to the main body frame 4, and formed into a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553. A second eaves portion 640a extending right below the notch portion 553aa is configured, and the second eaves portion 640a is in contact with the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a. Also, the rear end surface of the back cover 640 is arranged further rearward of the pachinko machine 1 than the rear surface of the tank rail 553 .

As described above, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, the first eaves portion 551da alone constitutes an eaves portion, whereas in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the second embodiment, The configuration is different in that the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a are connected to jointly constitute the eaves portion.

In addition, if the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a are connected to jointly constitute the eaves portion, the length of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a, that is, the eaves portion The ratio of each to occupy and the position where the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a are brought into contact are not limited to those described above. For example, the first eaves portion 640a is extended to the vicinity of the front surface of the tank rail 553, and the second eaves portion 640a is extended to the vicinity of the front surface of the tank rail 553 and brought into contact with the first eaves portion 640a (tank rail 553 The metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is received and adhered mainly to the second eaves portion 640a. may

The configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the second embodiment can also achieve the same effects as the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment. In other words, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a is deposited in the first canopy portion 551da arranged below the tank rail 553. It can be received and adhered, or received and adhered to the second eaves portion 640 a of the back cover 640 . Furthermore, since the rear surface of the rear cover 640 extends so as to cover at least a part of the rear side of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the state assembled to the main body frame 4, the main body can be opened through the notch 553aa. The metal powder of the game ball B falling from the guide portion 553a to the outside and adhering to the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a and the second eaves portion 640a of the back cover 640 is deposited on the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a and the second eaves portion 640a. When falling from the second eaves portion 640a of the back cover 640, this metal powder is behind the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 side) of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. It is possible to suppress the metal powder from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510. there is

[Comparison between the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged extends from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a ( The top plate portion 551a is formed in a stepped shape bent downward along the direction from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a. The rear cover 640 is provided behind the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 without the top panel 551a.

On the other hand, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. Along with being arranged, the rear end portion of the top plate portion 551a is bent downward to form a back plate upper portion 551d that extends. The lower end of the back plate upper portion 551 d is in contact with the upper end of the back cover 640 . It should be noted that the length of the back plate upper portion 551d is not limited to the example shown in FIG. Instead of extending to a position covering just behind the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 as shown, it may be extended to above.

As described above, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, the back cover 640 alone covers at least a portion of the rear side of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. In the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the second embodiment, the upper part of the back plate 551d and the back cover 640 are connected to jointly cover at least a part of the rear part of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. is different.

The configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the third embodiment can also achieve the same effects as the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment. In other words, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a is deposited in the first canopy portion 551da arranged below the tank rail 553. It can be received and adhered, or received and adhered to the second eaves portion 640 a of the back cover 640 . Furthermore, in the state assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper portion of the back plate 551d and the rear surface of the back cover 640 are connected to jointly cover at least a part of the rear side of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. , the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa and adheres to the first eaves portion 551da of the top plate portion 551a and the second eaves portion 640a of the back cover 640 is deposited on the top plate. When falling from the first eaves portion 551da of the portion 551a or the second eaves portion 640a of the back cover 640, the metal powder is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the (rear side of the effect display device 1600 that is installed) is suppressed from falling toward the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa. The metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the outside is suppressed from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the peripheral control board 1510 causing electrical trouble. It is designed to suppress the occurrence of

[Comparison between the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged extends from the front side to the rear side of the top plate portion 551a ( The top plate portion 551a is formed in a stepped shape bent downward along the direction from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a. It constitutes a first eaves portion 551da extending rearward.

On the other hand, in the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. Although it is formed in a stepped shape bent downward from one side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is formed on the top plate portion 551a. Along with being parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a, a predetermined distance dimension downward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a (in this embodiment, a distance dimension of about half the diameter of the game ball B ). In other words, the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged to protrude downward compared to the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a.

In addition, in the configuration of the metal powder countermeasure according to the fourth embodiment, the upper side of the back cover 640 is greatly bent forward when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 to form the second eaves portion 640a. The front surface is arranged parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a, and is in surface contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a that is arranged to protrude downward from the bottom portion of the main guide portion 553a. state. In addition, the contact portion between the front surface of the second eaves portion 640a and the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a is arranged so as to be displaced farther forward than the plurality of notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a.

As described above, in the structure for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment, the first eaves portion 551da alone constitutes the eaves portion, whereas in the structure for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, The configuration is different in that the first eaves portion 551da is not provided and the second eaves portion 640a alone constitutes the eaves portion.

The configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the fourth embodiment can also achieve the same effects as the configuration for dealing with metal powder according to the first embodiment. In other words, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a is dropped to the upper side of the back cover 640 arranged below the tank rail 553. It can be received and attached to the upper surface of the second eaves portion 640a which is formed by bending the side portion toward the front. Furthermore, since the rear surface of the rear cover 640 extends so as to cover at least a part of the rear side of the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the state assembled to the main body frame 4, the main body can be opened through the notch 553aa. When the metal powder of the game ball B falling from the guide portion 553a to the outside and adhering to the second eaves portion 640a of the back cover 640 falls from the second eaves portion 640a of the back cover 640, the metal powder is released into the game board 5. The peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) falls toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 In addition, the metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is suppressed from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and the game is played. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 .

In the first to fourth embodiments described above, the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 constitutes the first eaves portion 551da. However, it is not limited to this, and any of the members attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 such as the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000, or the member attached to the main body frame base unit 500 You may make it comprise the 1st canopy part 551da by either of them.

[4-7-1. Checking for dust when attaching/detaching the game board 1]
As partially described above, conventionally, by dropping foreign objects such as metal powder and dust from the discharge hole 553aa provided in the tank rail, it is possible to smoothly flow down the game ball on the tank rail. When the foreign matter adheres to the control board or the like arranged below, trouble occurs in the game parts, causing the game machine to malfunction or malfunction. Specifically, metal powder generated by game balls flowing down on the tank rail falls from the discharge hole 553aa of the tank rail and adheres to a predetermined portion (connector portion, etc.) of the control board arranged below. In this case, an electrical trouble may occur in the control board, which may hinder the progress of the game on the game machine. In addition, there is also a problem that a foreign object falls downward from the discharge hole 553aa of the tank rail that is not to be replaced due to vibrations or the like caused by the work of replacing with a new game board (removing the game board, etc.). If a foreign object in the tank rail drops downward due to the vibration generated when the new game board is attached, there is a risk that the operation of the game machine with the new game board will be hindered. In order to cope with such a problem, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the game board 5 is attached and detached, the presence of foreign matter such as metal powder and dust of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 (the lower surface of the tank rail 553) Accumulation of foreign matter, adhesion of foreign matter on the side surface of the tank rail 553, etc.) can be easily confirmed, and countermeasures (removal of foreign matter, etc.) can be performed before a problem occurs. This example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 52 is a schematic diagram showing the outline of the configuration of the metal powder countermeasures with the game board 5 of this example removed, and FIG. 53 is a front view of the body frame 4 with the game board 5 of this example attached. FIG. 54 is a front view of the main body frame 4 with the game board 5 removed, and FIG. FIG. 56(A) is a perspective view showing that when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, the tank rail 553 hangs down in the opening (upper part of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 in front view. 56(B) is a diagram schematically showing a side view of the pachinko machine 1 as seen from the left side. FIG. is.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are attached to the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550, as described above. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the payout base 551 and the tank rail 553 are provided with permeable portions. Specifically, the dispensing base 551 and the tank rail 553 are entirely made of a transparent synthetic resin (colorless and transparent synthetic resin in this embodiment) so that the dispensing base 551 and the tank rail 553 are entirely transparent. ing. In addition, the ball guide unit 570, which is provided downstream of the tank rail 553 and has a single guide passage 570a that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, is also wholly (or partly) transparent. The guide passage 570a is made of a transparent synthetic resin (colorless and transparent synthetic resin in this embodiment), and is configured so that the entire guide passage 570a (or part of it) is transparent. In addition, the second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the sphere straightening member 556, and the entire sphere tank 552 are made of opaque synthetic resin (black color in this embodiment). (synthetic resin), and these are configured to be impermeable.

In addition, in the tank rail 553 of this example, in a state where the tank rail 553 is attached to the payout base 551, a portion overlaps the payout base 551 in the front-rear direction from the side where the payout base 551 is located (the front side of the pachinko machine 1). (directly supported part), and a part (not directly supported and hollow) that does not overlap the payout base 551 in the front-rear direction from the side where the payout base 551 is located (the front side of the pachinko machine 1). ) are provided (see FIG. 54). In this example, these parts of the tank rail 553 are made visible through the opening of the game board attachment portion 301 formed in a state where the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side is removed. , the presence of metal powder and dust in the tank rail 553 can be confirmed, and it is possible to prevent the game operation from being hindered after the game board 5 is replaced with a new one.

Below, by looking up inside the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, metal powder in the tank rail 553 will be described. The details of checking the presence of foreign matter such as dust and dirt will be described.

As described above, FIG. 53 is a front view of the main body frame 4 with the game board 5 of this example attached, and FIG. 54 is a front view of the main body frame 4 with the game board 5 of this example removed. be. In FIG. 55(A), as is clear from a comparison with FIG. 53, an opening is formed for the game board attachment portion 301 formed in a state where the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side is removed. The tank rail 553 is arranged so that at least a portion of the tank rail 553 is positioned within the opening (upper portion of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 when viewed from the front. That is, in this example, the tank rail 553 is arranged so that the tank rail 553 hangs down in the opening (upper portion of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 when viewed from the front. However, if the entire tank rail 553 faces the inside of the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, the area of the tank rail 553 that can be visually recognized through the opening becomes large, and the checker cannot confirm the existence of the foreign object. Therefore, in this example, in view of speeding up the confirmation of the presence of foreign matter, the presence of foreign matter in the tank rail 553 is more focused than on the entire tank rail 553. Only the specific parts that need to be checked (in this example, the bottom and side surfaces of the tank rail 553, which are in the vicinity of the parts where the discharge holes 553aa for dropping foreign objects are formed) are the parts of the game board mounting portion 301 when viewed from the front. It is arranged so that it hangs down from the upper part of the opening.

The right side portion of the tank rail 553 that faces the opening (upper portion of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 shown in FIGS. (A part that is not directly supported and is arranged in a hollow shape). It can be visually recognized, and the inner surface side of the tank rail 553 (the inner side of the bottom surface and the side surface) can be confirmed. In addition, the left side portion is a portion (directly supported portion) where the tank rail 553 and the payout base 551 overlap in the front-rear direction. The tank rail 553, which is made of transparent synthetic resin, can be seen through the dispensing base 551, which is made of transparent synthetic resin. ing. As described above, in this example, not only the tank rail 553 but also the portion to which the tank rail 553 is attached is made of transparent synthetic resin so as not to limit the area where the presence of foreign matter in the tank rail 553 is checked. I have to.

Also, in this example, when the game board 5 is attached as shown in FIG. It is impossible to confirm the presence of foreign matter in the rail 553 . However, by forming the whole of the payout base 551 and the tank rail 553 from a transparent synthetic resin, even when the game board 5 is attached, the main body frame 4 can be easily accessed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to check the presence of a foreign object in the tank rail 553 from the lateral side when the tank rail 553 is opened and closed forward from the left side of the front view.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 (upper side of the tank rail 553 in the vertical direction), the first rail cover 554, the ball straightening member 556, and the ball tank 552 Since the detour passage 552g is formed of an opaque synthetic resin, when looking up inside the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, the second rail cover 555 located on the back of the tank rail 553 and the first rail The cover 554, the ball rectifying member 556, and the detour passage 552g are visible through the payout base 551 and the tank rail 553 formed of transparent resin. In this way, the second rail cover 555, the first rail cover 554, the ball rectifying member 556, and the detour passage 552g are located at the position where they can be visually recognized on the back of the tank rail 553, and the opening of the game board mounting portion 301. By looking up at the upper inside, the presence of the foreign matter accumulated in the tank rail 553 becomes clear by the member formed of opaque resin, and the presence of the foreign matter can be easily confirmed from the front of the pachinko machine 1 and removed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being hindered after the game board 5 is replaced with a new one.

In the above example, the entire dispensing base 551 and tank rail 553 are made of transparent synthetic resin. good. For example, while the dispensing base 551 is made of opaque resin, the entire tank rail 553 is made of transparent resin. A configuration may be adopted in which the inside of the rail 553 can be checked.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the ball tank 552 is made of transparent resin. It is Specifically, in this example, the entire sphere tank 552 is molded from a conductive synthetic resin. On the other hand, the tank rail 553, which is made of transparent resin, is made of a non-conductive insulator (in this example, it is made of non-conductive synthetic resin). Also, the ball tank 552 is electrically connected to the frame ground board 559, and the electromagnetic noise entering the ball tank 552 is guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed. As a result, the static electricity of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is removed (the static electricity is eliminated), foreign objects such as metal powder adhering to the game ball B can be dropped, and the metal powder dropped from the game ball B can be removed. Foreign matter such as metal powder can be moved from the inside of the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 as the game ball B flows down.

In addition, as described above, the tank rail 553 is provided with a plurality of cutouts 553aa so that foreign objects such as metal powder falling from the game ball B can be dropped to the outside. However, since the tank rail 553 is made of an insulating material, foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the game ball B adheres to the tank rail 553 and stays within the tank rail 553 . As described above, since the tank rail 553 is made of an insulating material, foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the game ball B can adhere to the inside of the tank rail 553 and be held thereon, thereby preventing metal powder and dust from entering the tank rail 553. In addition to facilitating confirmation of the existence of the game ball B, foreign objects such as metal powder falling from the game ball B fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and in turn falling from the game ball B Foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the game ball B is suppressed from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and electrical trouble caused by adhesion of foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the game ball B to the peripheral control board 1510. It is designed to suppress the occurrence of

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in addition to the tank rail 553, the eaves provided below the tank rail 553 (the first eaves 551da and/or the second eaves 640a) and the back cover 640 are also insulators ( Polycarbonate resin, etc.). That is, when the tank rail 553, the eaves portion (the first eaves portion 551da and/or the second eaves portion 640a) and the back cover 640 are charged, they have the same polarity. Therefore, when foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the game ball B falls from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553, the eaves having the same polarity as the tank rail 553 (first eaves 551da and/or second eaves 640a) and the rear cover 640 are designed to adhere foreign matter such as metal powder due to electrostatic force.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the tank rail 553 is made of an insulating material (in this example, it is made of a non-conductive synthetic resin), so that the game ball B dropped from the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553 is formed. In addition to the fact that foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the tank rail 553 by electrostatic force and is held there, even if the foreign matter such as metal powder adhering to the tank rail 553 falls from the notch 553aa, Even if there is, the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) composed of an insulator (in this example, molded from a non-conductive synthetic resin) prevents foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen. , the upper surface of the rear cover 640, or the like, by electrostatic force, and the scattering of foreign matter to the outside can be suppressed. As a result, in addition to facilitating the confirmation of the presence of metal powder and dust, foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the game ball B falls toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is possible to doubly prevent foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the game ball B from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500, and eventually the metal powder dropped from the game ball B. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles caused by foreign substances such as foreign matter adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 .

In this example, the tank rail 553 is made of an insulating material (in this example, it is molded with a non-conductive resin). Foreign matter such as metal powder dropped from the game ball B in the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553 may be adhered to the tank rail 553 by electrostatic force.

Further, in the above example, the second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the ball straightening member 556, and the detour passage 552g in the ball tank 552 are made of opaque resin. However, the second rail cover 555 made of opaque resin, the first rail cover 554, and the ball straightening member 556 can be seen through the tank rail 553 made of transparent resin. At least one of the members visible through the tank rail 553 made of transparent resin is made of opaque resin, metal, or the like, or an opaque seal is pasted on the surface, or paint is applied. The back may be obscured (including obscured). That is, since most of foreign matter such as metal powder and dust accumulates on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, when intensively checking the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 from the front side of the pachinko machine 1, A position visible through the transparent bottom surface of the tank rail 553, for example, the outside of the left side wall portion of the tank rail 553 in FIG. A member made of metal or the like may be provided, or the side wall portion on the left side of the tank rail 553 in FIG. It may be configured as a separate member such as.

Further, when the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) is provided below the tank rail 553, these eaves portions (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a ) may be partially or wholly made of a transparent synthetic resin. As a result, when the game board 5 is removed, metal powder and dust inside the tank rail 553 can be visually recognized through the eaves (the first eaves 551da and/or the second eaves 640a) formed of transparent synthetic resin. become. Further, the entire back cover 640 may be made of a transparent synthetic resin, or only a part of the back cover 640 including the part constituting the second eaves portion 640a may be made of a transparent synthetic resin. may

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. be. Further, when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 shown in FIGS. Even in the removed state, the eaves portion (the first eaves portion 551da in the example shown in FIG. 52, but the second eaves portion 640a or the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a correspond to the other embodiments described above) remains attached to the tank. Since it remains below the rail 553, the eaves (first eaves 551da and/or second eaves 640a) catch metal powder and dust falling from the inside of the tank rail 553, and the game device such as the connector positioned below receives the dust. It is possible to suppress the falling and sticking, and to prevent the game operation from being hindered after the replacement with the new game board 5.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 52, when the tank rail 553 is checked from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side removed, , Metal powder and dust adhering to the eaves (the first eaves 551da and/or the second eaves 640a) formed of transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the tank rail 553 formed of transparent synthetic resin Since both the metal powder and the dust can be visually recognized, the presence of the metal powder and the dust can be collectively confirmed. Also, the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) formed of transparent synthetic resin and the tank rail 553 formed of transparent synthetic resin pass through and are formed of opaque synthetic resin. Since it is possible to visually recognize members such as the second rail cover 555, the first rail cover 554, and the ball straightening member 556, the second rail cover 555 and the first rail cover formed of opaque synthetic resin 554 and ball rectifying member 556 remove metal powder and dust adhering to the eaves (first eaves 551da and/or second eaves 640a) and metal powder and dust accumulated in tank rail 553. becomes clearer, the presence of metal powder and dust can be easily confirmed, and the game operation can be prevented from being hindered after replacement with a new game board 5.例文帳に追加

The tank rail 553 made of transparent synthetic resin and the member made of opaque synthetic resin are connected to the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side removed. When the tank rail 553 is confirmed through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, at least a portion thereof overlaps with the tank rail 553 and can be visually recognized. It changes depending on the person who confirms the presence of metal powder and dust, such as a store clerk. That is, when the store clerk sticks his head into the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 and looks up directly from the position directly below the tank rail 553, the second position is provided directly above the tank rail 553. The second rail cover 555, the first rail cover 554, and the ball straightening member 556 are members that overlap the tank rail 553, and when the tank rail 553 is looked up from the outside of the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, A member provided directly behind (rear of the pachinko machine 1) or at the upper part of the rear side (rear of the pachinko machine 1) is a member that overlaps the tank rail 553. - 特許庁In this way, a person who confirms the presence of metal powder and dust can visually recognize the opaque member overlapping the tank rail 553 by appropriately changing the position to look into, making the presence of metal powder and dust clear. It is possible to easily confirm the presence of metal powder and dust.

When the game board 5, which is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side as described above, is removed and the inside of the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is looked up, the first rail located behind the tank rail 553 can be seen. The cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are visible through the payout base 551 and the tank rail 553 formed of transparent resin. 45, each of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 is formed with a locking portion 555a having a locking hole. It is detachably attached to the tank rail 553 by press-fitting the locking projection 553c formed on the outside of the side wall of the tank into the locking hole formed in the locking portion 555a.

Looking up inside the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side is removed, a payout base 551 and a tank rail 553 formed of transparent resin can be seen. Locking portions 555a (all of the locking portions 555a may be visible through the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556). part of the locking portions 555a may be visible) and the locking projections 553c formed on the tank rail 553 (all the locking projections 553c may be visible, or a plurality of locking projections 553c may be visible). A portion of the locking projections 553c may be visually recognized) is visible. Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball straightening member 556, and , that is, the state of engagement between the engagement portion 555a and the engagement projection 553c can be confirmed, and an abnormality in the ball flow path in the tank rail 553 can be prevented.

In addition, when the game ball B exists in the tank rail 553, the rear view of the game ball B is obstructed, but a locking projection 553c is formed on the outside of the side wall of the tank rail 553 to The rail cover 554 , the second rail cover 555 , and the ball rectifying member 556 are attached to the tank rail 553 in such a manner that the locking portions 555 a sandwich the passage of the tank rail 553 . In other words, in a state where the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 are attached to the tank rail 553, the game ball B positioned in the tank rail 553 does not interfere with visual recognition. , at least a portion of the locking portion 555a formed on the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556, and at least a portion of the locking projection 553c formed on the tank rail 553 are provided. there is In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 are provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 from the tank rail 553 in a state where they are attached to the tank rail 553. The locking portion 555a (all or part of the locking portion 555a provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 than the tank rail 553) and the tank rail 553 provided on the outside of the side wall portion on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 The locking projection 553c (all or part of the locking projections 553c provided on the outside of the front side wall of the pachinko machine 1 in the tank rail 553) is the game ball B located in the tank rail 553. Visibility is not obstructed by

In addition, when the game ball B does not exist in the tank rail 553, the inner side (surface on the lower side in the vertical direction) of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 is transparent. Visible through the payout base 551 and the tank rail 553 formed of a resin, the inner surface of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 (upper and lower side) It is possible to check the adhesion status of foreign substances such as metal powder and dust to the surface). As a result, the state of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 can be easily confirmed from the front of the pachinko machine 1 when the game board 5 is replaced with a new one, and the removal work is performed. can be determined, and it is possible to prevent an abnormality from occurring in the ball flow path in the tank rail 553 .

Further, as described above, when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, the tank rail 553 is arranged so as to face the opening (upper part of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 in a front view. Then, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 under conditions other than checking the presence of metal powder or dust, the tank rail 553 can be visually recognized in the opening (upper part of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301. Therefore, when there is an opportunity to display only the main body frame 4 before the game board 5 is changed or when the model is announced, there is a possibility that the pachinko machine 1 will lose its decorativeness. In order to avoid this, when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, the tank rail 553 is arranged so as to face the opening (upper part of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 in a front view. Alternatively, the portion where the tank rail 553 hangs down may be covered with the door frame 3 .

Specifically, the upper decorative part X is provided on the upper part of the door frame upper unit 200 provided on the front surface of the door frame base unit of the door frame 3, for example, on the upper part of the glass window of the door frame 3. The front end side of the upper decoration part X is provided so as to hang down more than the rear end side of the upper decoration part X, so that the hanging part of the front end side of the upper decoration part X in the front view is inside the opening of the game board mounting part 301. It can be exemplified that the tank rail 553 hangs down (upper part of the opening) to cover all or part of the facing area. FIG. 56(A) corresponds to the portion where the tank rail 553 hangs down in the opening (upper part of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 in front view when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4. It is the figure which showed the part where the upper decoration part X of the door frame 3 is located with the hatched part. As a result, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 under conditions other than checking the presence of metal powder or dust, the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 can be achieved by closing the door frame 3 when viewed from the front. It is possible to make it difficult for the tank rail 553 to be visually recognized inside (upper part of the opening), and the decorativeness of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved on occasions such as when only the main body frame 4 is displayed before the game board 5 is changed or when the model is announced. Loss can be suppressed.

The upper decorative portion X is provided so that the hanging portion on the front end side protrudes into the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, in other words, into the opening of the game window 201. The rear end side of X is provided so that the lower end portion is located outside the game window 201 and has a predetermined width dimension in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, and the width dimension of the rear end side of the upper decorative portion X is provided. The game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting part 301 so that the game board 5 can be played as the original pachinko machine 1 by making the front end side of the upper decorative part X hang down at a position away from the game window 201 toward the front of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加A player facing the game window 201 while seated thereon can visually recognize the entire game area 5 a of the game board 5 from between the upper decorative portion X and the game window 201 . That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the game board mounting part 301 and the game is played as the original pachinko machine 1, the hanging part on the front end side allows the player facing the game window 201 to play the game of the upper decorative part X. When the game board 5 is detached from the body frame 4, all or part of the tank rail 553 is covered by the hanging part on the front end side of the upper decorative part X without obstructing the visual recognition of the game area 5a of the board 5.例文帳に追加1 can be suppressed from being lost.

[4-7-2. Checking for dust when attaching/detaching the game board 2]
In the above example, the dispensing base 551 and the tank rail 553 are made of transparent synthetic resin so that the presence of metal powder and dust inside the tank rail 553 can be checked. A configuration in which the presence of metal powder and dust falling from the tank rail 553 and adhering to the upper surface of the eaves (the first eaves 551da and/or the second eaves 640a), not in the inside 553, can be confirmed intensively. is exemplified.

That is, in this example, the tank rail 553 in FIGS. 52, 54, and 55(B) is made of an opaque synthetic resin (black resin in this example), while the eaves located below it (see FIG. 52 In the example shown, the first eaves portion 551da, but in the above-described other embodiments, the second eaves portion 640a or the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a correspond) are made of a transparent synthetic resin. . The rear cover 640 may be entirely made of a transparent synthetic resin, or only a portion of the rear cover 640 including the second canopy portion 640a may be transparent. It may be made of a synthetic resin. In making the tank rail 553 opaque, the tank rail 553 is not limited to being made of opaque synthetic resin. Any other configuration may be adopted as long as it is made impermeable (including obscured state) by attaching a transparent seal or applying paint.

In this example, the eaves portion (in the example shown in FIG. 52, the first eaves portion 551da, but in the other embodiments described above corresponds to the second eaves portion 640a or the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a). The portion located below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is visible through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 formed with the game board 5 detachably mounted on the main body frame 4 from the front side removed. By doing so, it is possible to check the presence of metal powder and dust that have fallen from the tank rail 553 to the eaves (first eaves 551da and/or second eaves 640a) and adhere to the eaves, and a new game board 5 It is possible to prevent the game operation from being hindered after the replacement.

Below, by looking up inside the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side removed, the canopy part ( Details of confirming the presence of foreign substances such as metal powder and dust that have fallen and adhered to the first eaves portion 551da and/or the second eaves portion 640a will be described.

FIG. 55(B) is a perspective view of the body frame from which the game board of another example is removed, as seen from the lower front right. As described above, in this example, the tank rail 553 is made of opaque synthetic resin, and is arranged so as to hang down and face the opening (upper portion of the opening) of the game board mounting portion 301 when viewed from the front. In addition, the payout base 551 to which the tank rail 553 is attached is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. It is arranged so as to hang down and face the inside of the opening (upper part of the opening) of the mounting portion 301 .

A plurality of notches 553aa are formed in the tank rail 553, and the metal powder, dust, etc. It is designed to be dropped onto one canopy portion 551da. When the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is viewed from the front, the upper surface of the payout base 551 made of a transparent synthetic resin is visible, and the lower portion of the notch portion 553aa of the first eaves portion 551da is visible. It is possible to check the presence of metal powder, dust, etc. attached to the part.

When the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is viewed from the front, the tank rail 553 can be seen through the payout base 551 made of transparent synthetic resin. Since the tank rail 553 is made of opaque synthetic resin, when looking up inside the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, the tank rail 553 made of opaque synthetic resin located behind the payout base 551 can be seen. Therefore, the presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the first eaves portion 551da becomes clear, making it easier to confirm the presence of foreign matter, and hindering the game operation after replacing the game board 5 with a new one. can be prevented.

In the above example, all of the tank rails 553 are formed so that their backs are difficult to see (including those made obscure). The part opposite to the first eaves part 551da is made of opaque synthetic resin, metal, etc., an opaque sticker is pasted on the surface of the part facing the first eaves part 551da, or paint is applied to make the back part difficult to see. (including blurring) may be used. For example, the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 and the side wall portion on the left side of the tank rail 553 in FIG. An opaque sticker is pasted on the surface of the bottom surface of the rail 553 or the side wall portion on the left side of the tank rail 553 in FIG. The back may be made difficult to see (including obscured).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. be. In addition, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 shown in FIGS. The first canopy part 551da catches the liquid and prevents it from falling and adhering to a game device such as a connector located below, and prevents the game operation from being hindered after the game board 5 is replaced with a new one.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are made of an opaque resin. It is composed of an electric conductor having

Specifically, in this example, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are entirely molded from conductive resin. Also, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559, and the electromagnetic noise entering the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 is guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed. It is designed to be As a result, in addition to facilitating the confirmation of the presence of metal powder and dust as described above, the static electricity of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 is removed (charged), and the game ball B Foreign matter such as metal powder that adheres to the ball can be dropped from the game ball B, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the game ball B is difficult to adhere to the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553. As the game ball B flows down from the inside of the tank 552 to the tank rail 553, foreign matter such as metal powder moves, and the foreign matter such as metal powder in the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 is actively dropped from the notch 553aa. can be done.

On the other hand, in this example, the eaves (the first eaves 551da and/or the second eaves 640a) provided below the tank rail 553 and the rear cover 640 are made of an insulator made of transparent synthetic resin. As a result, in addition to facilitating confirmation of the presence of the metal powder and dust, foreign matter such as metal powder of the game ball B that has fallen from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is removed by electrostatic force. It can be adhered to (the first eaves portion 551da and/or the second eaves portion 640a), the upper surface of the back cover 640, or the like, thereby suppressing scattering of foreign matter to the outside.

That is, while foreign substances such as metal powder of the game ball B are positively removed from the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553, foreign substances such as metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 are removed. Since foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the game ball B is adhered to the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) and the upper surface of the back cover 640, the cover body of the peripheral control unit 1500 1501 and the base member 1502 , foreign matter such as metal powder is prevented from entering the cover member 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 , and foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the peripheral control board 1510 . It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to

In the above example, the sphere tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are made of conductive synthetic resin. Metal, conductive rubber, or the like may be used. If a part or all of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are made of metal, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 can be neutralized in a very short time. On the other hand, when the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are partially or wholly made of conductive synthetic resin or conductive rubber, it takes a longer time than when metal is used. and the tank rail 553 are gradually neutralized. In this way, when the sphere tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are partly or wholly made of conductive synthetic resin or conductive rubber, the sphere tank 552 and the tank rail 553 can be gradually neutralized. Therefore, discharge is less likely to occur, and electronic components mounted on various substrates are not affected.

Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the tank rail 553 is formed with a notch portion 553aa, whereas the ball tank 552 is not formed with a notch portion. Further, although the details will be described later, the substrate accommodated in the substrate case is arranged below the tank rail 553 in which the notch portion 553aa is formed, and furthermore, no ventilation hole is formed in the upper surface of the substrate case. It's like On the other hand, not only the substrates accommodated in the substrate case but also the substrates not accommodated in the substrate case are arranged below the ball tank 552 where the notch portion is not formed. In other words, the board not housed in the board case is arranged below the ball tank 552 in which the notch is not formed, so that the metal powder of the game ball B falls toward this board and adheres to it, and eventually the board. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the board which is not housed in the case. It should be noted that the board case that accommodates the board arranged below the sphere tank 552 without the notch may have a ventilation hole formed in the upper surface of the board case. It may be one in which no ventilation hole is formed on the upper surface of the device.

Further, in this example, an eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a) and a back cover 640 are provided below the sphere tank 552 where the notch portion is not formed, and are accommodated in the substrate case. The substrate that is not covered is placed inside the space formed by the eaves (first eaves 551da and/or second eaves 640a) and back cover 640. As shown in FIG. Therefore, even if a small amount of metal powder should drop from the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the bottom of the ball tank 552, the eaves portion (the first eaves portion 551da and/or the second eaves portion 551da and/or the second Since it can be attached and fixed to the two eaves part 640a) and the back cover 640, it suppresses the metal powder of the game ball B from adhering to the substrate that is not housed in the substrate case, thereby suppressing the occurrence of electrical troubles. can.

In addition, eaves (first eaves 551da and/or second eaves 640a) and a back cover 640 are provided below the tank rail 553 where the notch 553aa is formed, and the substrate accommodated in the substrate case is provided. is arranged inside the space formed by the eaves portion (the first eaves portion 551da and/or the second eaves portion 640a) and the back cover 640. Metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 adheres to the eaves (the first eaves 551da and/or the second eaves 640a) and the rear cover 640, which are made of an insulating material, and stays there. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to the metal powder of the game ball B entering into the board case, and by extension, the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition, since no ventilation holes are formed in the upper surface of the substrate case that accommodates the substrate arranged below the tank rail 553 where the notch portion 553aa is formed, a game ball dropped from the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 The metal powder of B falls below the eaves (first eaves 551da and/or second eaves 640a) without adhering to the eaves (first eaves 551da and/or second eaves 640a). Also, the metal powder of the game ball B can be received on the upper surface of the substrate case, and adhesion to the substrate can be suppressed. It should be noted that the substrate case that accommodates the substrate arranged below the tank rail 553 in which the notch portion 553aa is formed may be made of an insulator. can be adhered to the upper surface of the board case to prevent metal powder from entering the board case, preventing electrical troubles caused by the metal powder from game ball B adhering to the board. can be suppressed.

In this way, the tank rail 553 is configured so as to positively drop the metal powder of the game ball B from the notch 553aa, and the substrate below the tank rail 553 is arranged in a state of being accommodated in the substrate case, Furthermore, since the upper part and the rear of this board case (the rear of the pachinko machine 1) are covered by the eaves part (first eaves part 551da and/or second eaves part 640a) and the back cover 640 composed of an insulator, the game ball B can be prevented doubly from entering into the substrate case of the substrate arranged below the tank rail 553, and the metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the substrate, causing electrical damage. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of such troubles.

In the above example, the third embodiment shown in FIG. 50 has been described, but similar functions and effects can be obtained in the first embodiment in which the eaves portion is configured only by the first eaves portion 551da as in the third embodiment. . In addition, the second embodiment in which the eaves portion is composed of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a, and the fourth embodiment in which the eaves portion is composed only of the second eaves portion 640 have similar effects. .

Specifically, in the second embodiment in which the eaves portion is composed of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a, as shown in FIG. Configure. In this example, the dispensing base 551 forming the first eaves portion 551da and the back cover 640 forming the second eaves portion 640a are formed of transparent synthetic resin. Also, metal powder, dust, etc. in the tank rail 553 are removed from the notch 553aa formed in the tank rail 553. The first eaves 551da and the second eaves 551da formed of transparent synthetic resin are provided below the tank rail 553. The eaves 640a are dropped onto the eaves.

When the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is viewed from the front, the upper surface of the eaves portion composed of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a made of transparent synthetic resin can be visually recognized. It is possible to check the presence of metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the portion below the notch portion 553aa of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a.

When the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is viewed from the front, the tank rail 553 can be seen through the payout base 551 made of transparent synthetic resin or the back cover 640 made of transparent synthetic resin. It is visible. Since the tank rail 553 is made of an opaque synthetic resin, when looking up inside the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, the payout base 551 and the back cover 640 are formed of an opaque synthetic resin. The presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the upper surface of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a is made clear by the tank rail 553, which facilitates the confirmation of the existence of foreign matter, and the new game board 5 It is possible to prevent the game operation from being hindered after the replacement.

In the above example, all of the tank rails 553 are formed so that their backs are difficult to see (including those made obscure). And/or the portion facing the second eaves portion 640a is formed of an opaque synthetic resin, metal, or the like, or an opaque sticker is pasted on the surface of the portion facing the first eaves portion 551da and/or the second eaves portion 640a. Anything that makes the back part difficult to see (including obscured state) by wearing or applying paint may be used. For example, the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 and the side wall portion on the left side of the tank rail 553 in FIG. An opaque sticker is pasted on the surface of the bottom surface of the rail 553 or the side wall portion on the left side of the tank rail 553 in FIG. The back may be made difficult to see (including obscured).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. be. Also, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 shown in FIGS. The first eaves portion 551da and/or the second eaves portion 640 receive the metal powder and dust that are generated and prevent them from falling and adhering to the game device such as the connector located below. It is possible to prevent the game operation from being hindered.

In the above example, the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a, which constitute the eaves portion, are all made of transparent synthetic resin. If it is possible to check the presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the upper surface of the eaves, one of the first eaves 551da and the second eaves 640a is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the other is made of opaque. It may be made of synthetic resin, or a part of the first eaves part 551da and a part of the second eaves part 640a may be made of transparent synthetic resin, and the rest may be made of opaque synthetic resin. good too. For example, the payout base 551 (all or part of the payout base 551 and at least the first eaves portion 551da is made of transparent synthetic resin) constitutes the first eaves portion 551da provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 from the tank rail 553. formed from a transparent synthetic resin, and the back cover 640 constituting the second eaves portion 640a (all or part of the back cover 640 and at least the second eaves portion 640a is formed from an opaque synthetic resin. ) may be made of opaque synthetic resin. In this case, when the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is viewed from the front, the player can see through the payout base 551 made of transparent synthetic resin. It is possible to confirm the presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the upper surfaces of the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a.

In addition, in the fourth embodiment in which the eaves portion is composed only of the second eaves portion 640a, as shown in FIG. 51, the eaves portion is composed of only the second eaves portion 640a. In this example, the dispensing base 551 and the back cover 640 forming the second canopy portion 640a are made of transparent synthetic resin. In addition, the metal powder, dust, etc. in the tank rail 553 are removed from the notch 553aa formed in the tank rail 553, and the second canopy 640a made of a transparent synthetic resin is provided below the tank rail 553. drop it onto the eaves.

When the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is viewed from the front, the upper surface of the eaves portion composed of the second eaves portion 640a made of transparent synthetic resin can be visually recognized. It is possible to check the presence of metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the portion below the notch portion 553aa.

When the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is viewed from the front, the tank rail 553 can be seen through the payout base 551 made of transparent synthetic resin or the back cover 640 made of transparent synthetic resin. It is visible. Since the tank rail 553 is made of opaque synthetic resin, when looking up inside the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, the tank rail 553 made of opaque synthetic resin located behind the back cover 640 can be seen. The presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the second eaves portion 640a becomes clearer, making it easier to confirm the presence of foreign matter, and hindering the game operation after replacement with a new game board 5. can be prevented.

In the above example, the entire tank rail 553 is formed so that the back portion thereof is difficult to see (including those made obscure). The part facing the second canopy part 640a is made of opaque synthetic resin, metal, etc., an opaque seal is attached to the surface of the part facing the second eaves part 640a, or paint is applied to make the back part difficult to see. (including blurring) may be used. For example, the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 and the side wall portion on the left side of the tank rail 553 in FIG. An opaque sticker is pasted on the surface of the bottom surface of the rail 553 or the side wall portion on the left side of the tank rail 553 in FIG. The back may be made difficult to see (including obscured).

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. be. Also, even when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 shown in FIGS. The second eaves part 640 catches it and prevents it from falling and adhering to a game device such as a connector located below, and prevents the game operation from being hindered after the replacement with a new game board 5. - 特許庁

Further, in the above example, the dispensing base 551 and the second eaves portion 640a constituting the eaves portion are all made of transparent synthetic resin. If it is possible to check the presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the upper surface of the part, one of the dispensing base 551 and the second canopy part 640a is formed of transparent synthetic resin, and the other is formed of opaque synthetic resin. Alternatively, a portion of the dispensing base 551 and a portion of the second canopy portion 640a may be formed of transparent synthetic resin, and the rest may be formed of opaque synthetic resin. For example, a portion of the payout base 551 provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 from the tank rail 553 and a portion of the back cover 640 constituting the second eaves portion 640a facing the radial cutout portion 553aa are made transparent. In this case, when the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 is viewed from the front, the transparent synthetic resin of the payout base 551 may be formed of a transparent synthetic resin. It is possible to confirm the presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the upper surface of the second eaves portion 640a through the portion formed by .

[4-8-1. Promotion of falling metal powder 1]
The pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is characterized by the shape of the tank rail 553 and the position where the notch 553aa is formed so that the metal powder, dust, etc. of the game ball B are positively dropped from the notch 553aa. It is supposed to have A detailed description will be given below with reference to FIGS. 40 to 45 and 57. FIG. 57(A) is a plan view schematically showing the tank rail 553 seen from above, and FIG. 57(B) is a front view schematically showing the tank rail 553 seen from the front of the pachinko machine 1. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 57(A), the tank rail 553 of the pachinko machine 1 of this example has a first bent portion 553da and a second bent portion 553db. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 57, the tank rail 553 is an axis extending leftward from the right end (upstream side, right end shown in FIG. 57A) in the front view of the pachinko machine 1. After extending from the right end to the position of about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction parallel to the , a first bent portion 553da is formed that moves backward as it goes to the left, and the first bent portion 553da extends left and right from the first bent portion 553da. After obliquely extending to a position of about 4/10 of the total length in the direction, a second bent portion 553db is formed that moves in a direction parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction as it goes leftward. It is formed to extend to the left end parallel to the axis extending in the left-right direction from 553db. As a result, the game ball guided from the ball tank 552 rolls in the tank rail 553 like a crank.

Further, as described above, the tank rail 553 is formed with a plurality of notches 553aa. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, there are six rectangular notches 553aa having a predetermined length (about 30 mm in this embodiment) in the horizontal direction at predetermined intervals (about 10 mm in this embodiment). formed.

Specifically, the rear side of the main guiding portion 553a in the first bending portion 553da (in this example, the bottom surface and the rear wall of the main guiding portion 553a) and the front side of the main guiding portion 553a in the second bending portion 553db. The rear side (in this example, the bottom surface and the rear wall of the main guide portion 553a), the front side in front view (in this example, the bottom surface and front wall of the main guide portion 553a), and the rear portion of the main guide portion 553a in front view (this In the example, a notch portion 553aa is formed in the bottom surface and the rear wall of the main guide portion 553a. In addition, in the first bent portion 553da, the notch portion 553aa is formed only in the inner portion of the bent passage, whereas in the second bent portion 553db, the inner portion and the outer portion of the bent passage are formed. Notch portions 553aa are formed at two locations.

As described above, the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 enters the tank rail 553 through the opening 552k formed on the downstream side. In addition, the opening 552k is wide on the rear side of the ball tank 552 when viewed from the front. That is, the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 flows down toward the tank rail 553 toward the left rear side in front view. In addition, as the game ball B flows down, foreign matter such as metal powder in the ball tank 552 also moves in the left rear direction in front view, that is, in the vicinity of the first bent portion 553da. In this way, metal powder, dust, and the like gather near the first bent portion 553da. It is dropped from a notch 553aa formed in 553da and removed to the outside of the tank rail 553 .

Foreign matter such as metal powder that has not fallen from the notch 553aa formed in the first bent portion 553da and foreign matter such as metal powder generated inside the tank rail 553 travels inside the tank rail 553 to the first bent portion 553da. It moves in the left rear direction in a front view together with the game ball B flowing down toward the downstream side. In addition, the game ball B flowing down inside the tank rail 553 contacts the inner wall of the tank rail 553 at the second bent portion 553da, and changes the rolling direction along the inner wall of the tank rail 553 . In addition, the game ball B rolling in the tank rail 553 moves straight until it contacts the inner wall of the tank rail 553 at the second bent portion 553da. The acting reaction force increases.

Then, the game ball B contacts the inner wall of the tank rail 553 at the second bent portion 553da and rolls along the inner wall of the tank rail 553 while receiving a large reaction force from the inner wall of the tank rail 553. By rubbing against the inner wall of the tank rail 553, the metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the surface of the game ball B are peeled off.

Thus, at the second bent portion 553da of the tank rail 553, the game ball B is rubbed against the inner wall of the tank rail 553, and the metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the surface of the game ball B are peeled off. . In addition, metal powder, dust, etc. not adhering to the game ball B in the tank rail 553 move in the direction of the second bent portion 553da together with the game ball B rolling in the direction of the second bent portion 553da. . That is, metal powder, dust, and the like gather in the vicinity of the second bent portion 553da of the tank rail 553 .

In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, in addition to molding the tank rail 553 into a bent shape so that metal powder, dust, etc., gather in the second bent portion 553da, the bottom surface of the main guide portion 553a in the second bent portion 553da is By forming the notch portion 553aa so as to sandwich it, metal powder, dust, and the like collected on the second bent portion 553da are dropped to the outside of the tank rail 553 . Therefore, metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the game ball B rolling in the tank rail 553 and metal powder, dust, etc. existing in the tank rail 553 without adhering to the game ball B are positively tanked. It can be dropped from the rail 553 and removed from the tank rail 553 . It is sufficient that the second bent portion 553da has the notch portion 553aa at least on the outer side (rear side in front view) of the passage. Foreign matter such as metal powder and dust collected in the groove may be discharged from the notch portion 553aa.

In the above example, the notch portion 553aa is formed in the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db. A notch portion 553aa may be formed. Moreover, even if the notch portion 553aa is not formed in either the first bent portion 553da or the second bent portion 553db, the notch portion 553aa is formed downstream of the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db. After collecting foreign substances such as metal powder and dust at the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db, they may be discharged from the notch portion 553aa formed on the downstream side. That is, by forming the notch portion 553aa downstream of the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db, the metal peeled off from the surface of the game ball B at the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db. Any foreign matter such as powder or dust can be dropped to the outside of the tank rail 553 from the notch 553aa formed downstream of the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db. Intrusion of metal powder, dust, etc. into the ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the rail 553 is suppressed, and it is possible to suppress occurrence of trouble in the game operation.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the tank rail 553 is made of an insulating material. , the electromagnetic wave noise entering the ball tank 552 or the tank rail 553 may be guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed. In this case, since the metal powder adhering to the surface of the game ball B can be easily peeled off, the metal adhering to the surface of the game ball B at the first bent portion 553da and the second bent portion 553db of the tank rail 553 The powder can be reliably peeled off and dropped from the notch 553aa to the outside of the tank rail 553, thereby suppressing the entry of metal powder, dust, etc. into the guide passage 570a and preventing the game operation from being hindered.

Further, as described above, the eaves (first eaves 551da and/or second eaves 640a) and back cover 640 molded from a transparent material are provided below the tank rail 553 . When the tank rail 553 is made of an electrical conductor such as a conductive synthetic resin, the tank rail 553 becomes opaque. In the detached state, the presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the eaves (first eaves 551da and/or second eaves 640a) is checked from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301. In this case, the presence of metal powder and dust can be made clear to facilitate confirmation of the presence of metal powder and dust.

Further, as described above, since the eaves (first eaves 551da and/or second eaves 640a) and back cover 640 are made of an insulator (polycarbonate resin or the like), the notch 553aa of tank rail 553 is The metal powder of the dropped game ball B can be adhered to the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and/or second eaves portion 640a), the upper surface of the back cover 640, and the like. As a result, the metal powder of the game ball B can be prevented from falling toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical trouble caused by entering the cover body 1501 of the game ball B and by extension, the metal powder of the game ball B adhering to the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition, in the ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the tank rail 553 shown in FIG. You may make it mold|mold by polycarbonate resin etc.). In this case, it is possible to check metal powder, dust, etc. that have entered the guide passage 570a without being discharged from the notch 553d of the tank rail 553. FIG. As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 to which the payout unit 560 (ball guide unit 570) is attached is molded of transparent synthetic resin. Metal powder, dust, etc. entering the guide passage 570a through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 can be confirmed in a state where the game board 5 detachably mounted from the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is removed.

In addition, a member made of opaque synthetic resin may be arranged in part or all of the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, or a part of the guide passage 570a on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 may be disposed. Alternatively, an opaque seal may be affixed to the entire surface, or paint may be applied to make the back portion difficult to see (including obscuring). When confirming metal powder, dust, etc. entering the guide passage 570a through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5 detachably attached from the front of the pachinko machine 1 Since the presence of metal powder and dust that has entered becomes clearer, it becomes easier to confirm that the metal powder and dust have entered the guide passage 570a. can be prevented.

In addition, a member made of opaque synthetic resin may be arranged in part or all of the guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1, or a part of the guide passage 570a on the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 may be disposed. Alternatively, the dispensing unit 560 (ball guiding unit 570) is attached without making the back part obscured (including obscuring) by affixing an opaque seal or applying paint to the entire part. The left portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 may be made of an opaque synthetic resin. Since the presence of metal powder and dust present in the inner space becomes clear, it becomes easy to confirm that the metal powder and dust have entered the guide passage 570a, and it is possible to prevent the game operation from being hindered.

[4-8-2. Promotion of falling metal powder 2]
Next, a first modification of a mode in which the metal powder, dust, etc. of the game ball B is positively dropped from the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 will be described. A detailed description will be given below with reference to FIGS. 40 to 45 and FIGS. 58(A) and (B). FIG. 58(A) is a plan view schematically showing the tank rail 553 seen from above, and FIG. 58(B) is a front view schematically showing the tank rail 553 seen from the front of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In addition, the first modified example described below is combined with a mode in which metal powder, dust, etc. of the game ball B is positively dropped by the shape of the tank rail 553 and the position where the notch portion 553aa is formed. It may be performed together, or may be performed independently.

As shown in FIG. 58(A), in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a first rail cover 554, a ball straightening member 556, and a second rail cover 555 are attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in this order from the upstream side. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 58(B), the tank rail 553 has a flow path through which the game ball B circulates at a portion where the first rail cover 554, the ball straightening member 556, and the second rail cover 555 are attached. is formed so that the height becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end), and at the downstream end, only one game ball B can flow (height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B) is formed in

The ball straightening member 556 is formed with a ball pressing portion 556a projecting downward (toward the bottom surface of the tank rail 553). The ball holding part 556a protrudes to a position where the distance from the bottom surface of the tank rail 556 is slightly shorter than the outer shape of two game balls B, and the game ball passes under the ball straightening member 556 in an overlapping state. B is always in contact with the ball pressing portion 556a. Further, when the game ball B in the upper layer among the game balls B overlapped in two layers comes into contact with the ball pressing portion 556a, the game ball B in the upper layer cannot flow down to the downstream side.

On the other hand, the game ball B in the lower layer among the game balls B overlapping the two layers can flow downstream even when the game ball B in the upper layer is in contact with the ball holding portion 556a. The game ball B in the upper layer falls toward the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 as the game ball B in the lower layer flows downstream while the game ball B is in contact with the ball pressing portion 556a. Metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the surface of the game ball B are peeled off by the impact of the drop. That is, the game ball B in the upper layer among the game balls B passing through the tank rail 553 in a state of being superimposed in two layers contacts the ball pressing portion 556a of the ball straightening member 556 and falls toward the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. As a result, metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the surface are peeled off. Also, at this time, foreign substances such as metal powder and dust that have fallen off the game ball B fall onto the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 58(B), a notch 553aa is formed in the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 facing the ball rectifying member 556, and the game ball B passing below the ball rectifying member 556 is held by the ball holder. Foreign matter such as metal powder and dust peeled off from the game ball B can be dropped from the notch portion 553aa by coming into contact with the portion 556a and falling toward the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. Also, the game ball B, which has come into contact with the ball holding portion 556a, drops to the upstream side of the tank rail 553 as shown in FIG. 58(B). Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the notch portion 553aa on the upstream side of the ball pressing portion 556a is formed larger than the notch portion 553aa provided on the downstream side of the ball pressing portion 556a. As a result, foreign objects such as metal powder and dust that have fallen off the game ball B falling in contact with the ball holding portion 556a can be dropped from the notch portion 553aa on the upstream side of the holding portion 556a. .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B passes below the ball straightening member 556, the game ball B is brought into contact with the ball holding portion 556a and dropped toward the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. Foreign matter such as metal powder and dust adhering to the surface of the ball B is peeled off, and the metal powder and dust are dropped from the notch 553aa formed in the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 facing the ball straightening member 556. It has become. That is, from the notch portion 553aa formed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 facing the ball straightening member 556, the metal powder and dust adhering to the surface of the game ball B passing under the ball straightening member 556 are peeled off. Metal powder, dust, etc. can be positively removed from the tank rail 553 by dropping it immediately. As a result, entry of metal powder, dust, etc. into the ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the tank rail 553 is suppressed, and it is possible to suppress interference with the game operation.

In addition, after peeling off metal powder, dust, etc. from the game ball B passing under the ball straightening member 556, the peeled metal powder, dust, etc. are formed on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 facing the ball straightening member 556. Since the ball can be immediately dropped from the notch portion 553aa, it is possible to suppress reattachment of metal powder, dust, etc. to the game ball B.

Also, the game balls B flowing into the tank rail 553 from the ball tank 552 are stacked in a plurality of layers. Then, the game balls B that are stacked in three or more layers come into contact with the first rail cover 554 provided on the upstream side of the ball straightening member 556, and by contacting the first rail cover 554, three or more layers A game ball B falls and becomes a state of being superimposed in two layers. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. When foreign substances such as metal powder and dust are peeled off from the game ball B that has changed to the state of being superimposed in two layers, the metal powder and dust are dropped from the notch portion 553aa.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the plurality of layered game balls B are gradually broken into a single layer. In addition, foreign objects such as metal powder and dust that come off when the game balls B stacked in a plurality of layers are broken to make the layers thinner are dropped from the notch 553aa to remove them from the tank rail 553. Intrusion of foreign matter such as metal powder and dust into the ball guiding unit 570 provided downstream of 553 is suppressed, and it is possible to suppress occurrence of hindrance to the game operation.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, as shown in FIG. 58(A), depressions 554a, 555b, and 556b are formed on the upper surfaces of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556. . Then, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 from the game ball B in contact with the upstream end of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 When foreign matter such as metal powder or dust moves to the upper surface of the housing, the depressions 554a, 555b, and 556b receive and hold the foreign matter. As a result, when foreign matter such as metal powder and dust moves from inside the tank rail 553 to the upper surfaces of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 outside the tank rail 553, these foreign matter can be fixed to the upper surfaces of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball straightening member 556 to prevent them from falling. That is, foreign matter such as metal powder and dust that has moved from inside the tank rail 553 to the upper surfaces of the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 outside the tank rail 553 is removed from the cover body of the peripheral control unit 1500. 1501 and the base body 1502 , and by suppressing entry into the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 . It is possible to suppress the occurrence of serious troubles.

In addition, by configuring the tank rail 553 with an electrical conductor such as a conductive synthetic resin and electrically connecting it to the frame grounding substrate 559, electromagnetic noise entering the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 can be eliminated from the game hall. may be removed by guiding it to the ground of the island facility. In this case, since it becomes easy to peel off the metal powder adhering to the surface of the game ball B, the metal powder adhering to the surface of the game ball B passing under the ball straightening member 556 is reliably peeled off and cut. It can be dropped from the notch 553aa to the outside of the tank rail 553, and metal powder, dust, etc. can be prevented from entering the guide passage 570a, and interference with the game operation can be prevented. In addition, since the static electricity of the game ball B in contact with the tank rail 553 can be removed, it is possible to suppress re-adhesion of the metal powder peeled off from the surface of the game ball B to the game ball B.

Further, when the tank rail 553 is made of an electrically conductive material such as an opaque synthetic resin having conductivity, the front of the pachinko machine 1 can be placed in a state in which the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side is removed. When confirming the presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the eaves (first eaves 551da and/or second eaves 640a) through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301, the presence of metal powder and dust can be made clear to facilitate confirmation of the presence of metal powder and dust.

In addition, the sphere rectifying member 556 (whole or part thereof (at least the sphere holding portion 556a) may be made of an electrically conductive material such as an opaque synthetic resin having electrical conductivity so as to be electrically connected to the frame ground substrate 559). By connecting, the electromagnetic wave noise of the ball rectifying member 556 (all or part (at least the ball holding portion 556a)) may be guided to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed. In this case, adhesion of metal powder, dust, etc., peeled off from the game ball B to the ball pressing portion 556a can be suppressed.

In addition, as described above, since the eaves (first eaves 551da and/or second eaves 640a) and back cover 640 are made of an insulator (a transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate resin), the ball straightening member 556 Metal powder and dust falling from the notch portion 553aa peeled off from the game ball B passing under the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or second eaves portion 640a) and the upper surface of the back cover 640 It can be attached and held. As a result, the metal powder of the game ball B can be prevented from falling toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles caused by entering the cover body 1501 of the game ball B and by extension, attaching the metal powder of the game ball B to the peripheral control board 1510 .

In addition, in the ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the tank rail 553 shown in FIG. By molding with polycarbonate resin or the like), metal powder, dust, or the like that has entered the guide passage 570a without being discharged from the notch 553d of the tank rail 553 may be confirmed. In this case, with the game board 5 detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, the game board 5 is detached from the front of the pachinko machine 1 through the opening of the game board mounting portion 301 through the payout base 551 molded of transparent synthetic resin. Metal powder, dust, etc. that have entered the guide passage 570a can be confirmed, and they can also be confirmed from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

[4-8-3. Promotion of metal powder falling 3]
Next, a second modification of a mode in which the metal powder, dust, etc. of the game ball B is positively dropped from the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 will be described. A detailed description will be given below with reference to FIGS. 40 to 45 and FIGS. 57(A) and (B). As described above, FIG. 57(A) is a plan view schematically showing the tank rail 553 seen from above, and FIG. 57(B) is a front view schematically showing the tank rail 553 seen from the front of the pachinko machine 1. It is a diagram. In addition, the second modification described below is based on the shape of the tank rail 553 and the position where the notch 553aa is formed. It may be performed in combination with one or both of the modifications, or may be performed alone.

In the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the ball tank 552 is formed with an in-tank step portion 552m, and the tank rail 553 is formed with an in-tank rail step portion 553m. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 57A and 57B, an in-tank stepped portion 552m is formed along the edge of the opening 552k of the ball tank 552, and the first curved portion of the tank rail 553 is formed. A tank rail inner step portion 553m is formed at a portion on the upstream side of 553da. The in-tank stepped portion 552m and the in-tank rail stepped portion 553m are inclined at an angle larger than the inclination angle of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 . Specifically, the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined at an angle X, the tank rail inner stepped portion 553m is inclined at an angle Y, the tank inner stepped portion 552m is inclined at an angle Z, and the tank rail inner stepped portion 553m is inclined at an angle Z. and the inclination angle Z of the tank inner stepped portion 552m are larger than the inclination angle X of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 . Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the inclination angle Z of the tank inner stepped portion 552m is larger than the inclination angle Y of the tank rail inner stepped portion 553m. The inclination angle Y of the tank rail inner step portion 553m may be larger than the inclination angle Z of the tank inner step portion 552m. The inclination angle Z of the step portion 552m may be the same as that of the stepped portion 552m.

When the game ball B flows into the tank rail 553 from the ball tank 552 , the flowing speed is accelerated by the tank inner step portion 552 and falls to the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 . Also, foreign matter such as metal powder and dust adhering to the surface of the game ball B is peeled off by the impact at this time and falls to the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 . Foreign matter such as metal powder and dust falling on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 at the tank inner step portion 552 moves downstream in the tank rail 553 as the game ball B flows down.

A tank rail inner step portion 553m is formed on the downstream side of the tank inner step portion 552 . Then, the game ball B flowing down inside the tank rail 553 accelerates the rolling speed at the step portion, and the metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the surface of the game ball B is caused by the impact when it falls to the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. is peeled off and falls on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 . As described above, the tank rail inner stepped portion 553m is formed upstream of the first bent portion 553da. The notch portion 553aa is formed in the first bent portion 553da as described above.

That is, foreign matter such as metal powder or dust that has fallen to the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 at the tank inner step portion 552 and has gathered at the first bent portion 553da, or metal that has fallen to the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 at the tank rail inner step portion 553m. Foreign matter such as powder and dust falls from the notch portion 553aa formed in the first bent portion 553da.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the ball tank 552 is provided with the tank inner stepped portion 552m, and the tank rail 553 is provided with the tank rail inner stepped portion 553m so that the game ball B is impacted when it passes through the stepped portion. Foreign substances such as metal powder and dust adhering to the surface of the game ball B are peeled off and dropped on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553, and the dropped foreign substances such as metal powder and dust are collected in the first bent portion 553da to form the second ball. It can be dropped from a notch portion 553aa formed in one bent portion 553da. That is, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are formed so that when the game ball B flows into the tank rail 553 from the ball tank 552, it always passes through the tank inner stepped portion 552m and the tank rail inner stepped portion 553m. Metal powder, dust, etc. are removed from the tank rail 553 by peeling foreign substances such as metal powder and dust adhering to the ball B and dropping them from the notch 553aa formed in the bottom surface of the tank rail 553. do. As a result, entry of metal powder, dust, etc. into the ball guiding unit 570 provided on the downstream side of the tank rail 553 is suppressed, and it is possible to suppress interference with the game operation.

In addition, in the above-described example, since the game ball B flowing into the tank rail 553 from the ball tank 552 is configured to drop at two stepped portions, the tank inner stepped portion 552m and the tank rail inner stepped portion 553m, the game ball B Foreign matter such as metal powder and dust adhering to the surface can be removed at a high rate.

In the above example, the sphere tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are each provided with a stepped portion. Alternatively, only one stepped portion may be provided on only one of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 .

In addition, the tank rail 553 is made of an electrical conductor such as synthetic resin having electrical conductivity, and is electrically connected to the frame grounding substrate 559 so that the electromagnetic noise entering the tank rail 553 is transferred to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall. It may be guided and removed, and by configuring in this way, the effect of removing the metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the game ball B described above can be enhanced. That is, when the game ball B flows into the tank rail 553, the static electricity is removed and the attraction force of metal powder and dust is weakened. Metal powder, dust, etc. adhering to the surface of the game ball B are easily peeled off by the impact when passing through. As a result, it is possible to increase the probability that metal powder, dust, etc., will fall off the game ball B and drop it from the notch 553aa to the outside of the tank rail 553, thereby suppressing the entry of metal powder, dust, etc. into the guide passage 570a. At the same time, it is possible to prevent the game operation from being hindered. In addition, since the static electricity of the game ball B in contact with the tank rail 553 can be removed, it is possible to suppress re-attachment of the metal powder peeled off from the surface of the game ball B to the game ball B.

Also in this example, the tank rail 553 is made of an electrically conductive material such as an opaque synthetic resin having conductivity, so that the pachinko machine can be operated without the game board 5 which is detachably attached to the body frame 4 from the front side. 1 from the front of the game board mounting portion 301 through the opening of the eaves portion (first eaves portion 551da and / or second eaves portion 640a) when confirming the presence of metal powder and dust adhering to the It is possible to make the presence of dust clear and facilitate confirmation of the presence of metal powder and dust.

In addition, the eaves portion (the second Since it can be attached and fixed to the upper surface of the first eaves portion 551da and/or the second eaves portion 640a) and the back cover 640, the metal powder of the game ball B is removed from the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from falling toward the peripheral control board 1510, and the metal powder of the game ball B is prevented from entering the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of electrical troubles due to adhesion.

Also, the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 may be molded with a transparent material (polycarbonate resin, etc.). Metal powder, dust, etc. that have entered can be confirmed. Metal powder, dust, etc. that have entered the guide passage 570a can be checked by opening the game board mounting portion 301 from the front of the pachinko machine 1 with the game board 5, which is detachably mounted on the main body frame 4 from the front side, removed. It is also possible to check through the payout base 551 molded from a transparent synthetic resin, and it is also possible to check from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 .

[4-9. Suppression of metal powder movement when game machine tilts]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the movement of the metal powder is suppressed when the pachinko machine 1 is tilted. Description will be made below with reference to FIGS. 35, 42 to 45, and 59. FIG. Fig. 59(A) is a front view of the inner side of the second rail cover 555, and Fig. 59(B) shows the pachinko machine 1 tilted so that the side where the ball guide unit 570 is provided faces downward. FIG. 12 is a perspective view showing the inside of the second rail cover 555 in a folded state;

As shown in FIG. 35, in the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment, the tank rail 553 is connected to the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 at the most downstream portion (lower right end in FIG. 35) and passes through the tank rail 553. A game ball is guided to the ball guidance unit 570. - 特許庁

In addition, the tank rail 553 has a groove shape that is open upward, forming a flow path that slopes downward to the right in the drawing toward the most downstream portion. It is designed to change direction.

A second rail cover 555 provided at the upper end of the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 has a downstream inner wall (lower right portion in the drawing) having a curved surface shape. and the inner wall of the tank rail 553 on the downstream side (the right end in the drawing) are arranged so as to be continuous to constitute the wall portion on the downstream side (the right end in the drawing) of the tank rail 553 . That is, the curved upstream portion of the second rail cover 555 bears the ceiling of the tank rail 553, and the curved downstream portion bears the side wall of the vertical passage, which is the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553. It's becoming

As described above, the second rail cover 555 is detachable from the tank rail 553 . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, the second rail cover 555 is formed with a locking portion 555a having a locking hole so as to face the side wall portion of the second rail cover 555. Locking projections 553c are formed on the outer side of the portion so as to correspond to the locking portions 555a of the second rail cover 555, respectively. Then, as shown in FIG. 44, the tank rail 553 is covered with the second rail cover 555 from above so that the tank rail 553 is inserted between the side walls of the second rail cover 555, and the tank rail 553 is locked. The second rail cover 555 is locked to the tank rail 553 by press-fitting the protrusion 553 c into the locking hole formed in the locking portion 555 a of the second rail cover 555 .

When the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 are in the locked state, if a predetermined load or more acts on the side wall of the second rail cover 555 in a direction away from the groove of the tank rail 553, the second rail cover 555 and tank rail 553 are locked. The side wall portion of the second rail cover 555 is deformed and the locked state between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 is released. The manner in which the second rail cover 555 is locked to the tank rail 553 is merely an example, and is limited to this as long as the second rail cover 555 can be detachably attached to the tank rail 553. Instead, the second rail cover 555 may be screwed onto the tank rail 553, for example.

Also, as shown in FIG. 35, the second rail cover 555 prevents the tank rail 553 from moving when the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side on which the ball guide unit 570 is provided (the right side in FIG. 35) faces downward. It constitutes a wall portion on the extension line of the bottom surface. Also, when the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side of the pachinko machine 1 where the ball guide unit 570 is provided (the right side in FIG. 35) is downward, the metal powder accumulated on the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 Foreign matter such as dust and dirt moves inside the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream side and contacts the inner wall side of the second rail cover 555 provided at the most downstream side of the tank rail 553 .

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the detachable second rail cover 555 is provided at the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 to constitute the wall portion of the tank rail 553, and the side portion ( By tilting the pachinko machine 1 so that the right side in FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side portion (the right side portion in FIG. 35) where the guidance unit 570 is provided faces downward, from inside the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 The moving metal powder and dust can be received by the second rail cover 555 and can be prevented from entering the guide passage 570 a of the ball guide unit 570 .

Also, the inner wall of the second rail cover 555 is formed with a recess 555c. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 59(A), bottomed portions are provided at the end of the second rail cover 555 (the right end in the figure) that serves as the side wall of the vertical passage and the portion that serves as the ceiling of the tank rail 553. A recess 555c is formed. When the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side of the pachinko machine 1 where the ball guide unit 570 is provided (the right side in FIG. 35) faces downward, the second rail cover 555 moves vertically as shown in FIG. The portion that serves as the side wall of the passage is the lower surface, and foreign matter such as metal powder and dust that has moved toward the most downstream side in the tank rail 553 is formed on the inner wall of the portion that serves as the side wall of the vertical passage of the second rail cover 555. The recess 555c is entered. That is, by tilting the pachinko machine 1 so that the side where the ball guide unit 570 is provided (the right side in FIG. 35) faces downward, the metal powder and dust that move in the tank rail 553 toward the downstream side. A recessed portion 555c formed in a portion of the second rail cover 555 that bears the side wall of the vertical passage receives and stops foreign matter such as the foreign matter. As a result, metal powder and dust moving from inside the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 can be prevented from entering the guide passage 570 a of the ball guide unit 570 .

In this example, the second rail cover 555 has the bottomed concave portion 555c, but the same effect can be obtained with a through hole. That is, a through hole is formed in a portion of the end portion (right end portion in the drawing) of the second rail cover 555 that bears the side wall of the vertical passage and a portion that bears the ceiling of the tank rail 553, and the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided. When the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side portion (the right side in FIG. 35) is downward, foreign objects such as metal powder and dust that have moved toward the most downstream side in the tank rail 553 are removed. A through hole formed in the inner wall of the rail cover 555 may release the metal to the outside of the tank rail 553 . It is possible to suppress the entry of powder and dust into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570.

In addition, since the second rail cover 555 is detachably attached to the tank rail 553, the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the side portion (right side in FIG. 35) provided with the ball guide unit 570 faces downward. By releasing the locked state between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 in this state and removing the second rail cover 555, the metal received by the second rail cover 555 and adhering to the second rail cover 555 is removed. Powder and dust can be removed from the inside of the tank rail 553, and metal powder and dust received by the second rail cover 555 enter the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 when the pachinko machine 1 is normally erected. can be suppressed.

The second rail cover 555 can be reused by cleaning the second rail cover 555 after discarding the attached metal powder and dust. Thus, metal powder, dust, etc. inside the tank rail 553 can be easily removed from inside the tank rail 553 by removing the second rail cover 555 .

That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is removed from the island facility of the game parlor, the locked state between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 is released, the second rail cover 555 is released, and the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 is removed. By tilting the pachinko machine 1 so that the wall (the side where the ball guide unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided (the right side in FIG. 35) (the right side in FIG. 35) is downward while the wall of the pachinko machine 1 is missing, the ball Metal powder and dust that move from inside the tank 552 and the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 can be discharged from the part of the second rail cover 555 where the wall portion is missing.

Also, when the pachinko machine 1 is removed from the island facility of the game parlor and moved, the wall portion of the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 where the second rail cover 555 is provided (the side where the ball guide unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided) By tilting the pachinko machine 1 so that the part (right side in FIG. 35) is downward, metal powder and dust moving from the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 toward the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 are removed. , can be received by the second rail cover 555. In this state, by releasing the locked state between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 to release the second rail cover 555, the second rail cover 555 can receive the Metal powder and dust adhering to the second rail cover 555 can be removed from inside the tank rail 553 .

In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by releasing the locked state between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 and removing the second rail cover 555, the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided. By tilting the pachinko machine 1 so that the side portion (the right side in FIG. 35) facing downward, metal powder, dust, etc. within the moved tank rail 553 can be easily removed from the inside of the tank rail 553. . Also, when the pachinko machine 1 is normally erected, metal powder and dust received by the second rail cover 555 can be prevented from entering the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570.例文帳に追加

In the above example, the second rail cover 555 is provided so that the downstream inner wall of the second rail cover 555 and the downstream inner wall of the tank rail are continuous, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, a step may be provided between the inner wall of the second rail cover 555 on the downstream side and the inner wall of the tank rail 553 on the downstream side. When a step is provided such that the second rail cover 555 is provided, the wall portion of the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 where the second rail cover 555 is provided (the side portion where the ball guidance unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided (the right side in FIG. 35) )) is downward, the inner wall of the second rail cover 555 is recessed downward compared to the inner wall of the tank rail 553, so the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 The inner wall of the second rail cover 555 can receive and stop metal powder and dust moving toward the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 from the second rail cover 555, thereby releasing the locked state between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553. By detaching the second rail cover 555 by pressing the second rail cover 555 , the metal powder and dust received by the second rail cover 555 and adhering to the second rail cover 555 can be removed from the inside of the tank rail 553 .

Further, as shown in FIG. 35, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the wall portion of the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 on which the second rail cover 555 is provided (the side portion on which the ball guiding unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided (see FIG. 35 When the pachinko machine 1 is tilted so that the right side )) faces downward, various substrates, connectors, etc. are not positioned below the second rail cover 555 . Specifically, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an external terminal plate 558 is provided above the tank rail 553 and the second rail cover 555 in FIG. A payout control board box 632 for accommodating a payout control board 633, an interface board 635 and the like are provided at a predetermined distance below.

In this way, the wall portion of the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 where the second rail cover 555 is provided (the side portion where the ball guidance unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided (the right side portion in FIG. 35)) is arranged downward. When the pachinko machine 1 is tilted, various boards, connectors, etc. are prevented from being positioned below the second rail cover 555. Therefore, the locked state between the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 is released. With the second rail cover 555 detached, the pachinko ball is placed so that the wall of the most downstream portion of the tank rail 553 (the side where the ball guide unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided (the right side in FIG. 35)) faces downward. When the machine 1 is tilted, the wall part of the most downstream part of the tank rail 553 (the side part where the ball guidance unit 570 of the pachinko machine 1 is provided (right side in FIG. 35)) is downward. is tilted, the second rail cover 555 and the tank rail 553 are released from the locking state and the second rail cover 555 is removed, the tank rail 553 is removed from the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553. Prevents metal powder and dust moving downstream from falling toward various substrates and connectors and adhering to various substrates and connectors, avoiding electrical troubles (short circuits) caused by metal dust. can do. In particular, if metal powder or dust falls toward the interface board 635 that is not accommodated in the board case, the metal powder or dust tends to adhere to the interface board 635 and cause an electrical trouble (short circuit). is effective in avoiding electrical troubles (short circuits).

[4-10. Positional relationship between the notch of the tank rail and various substrates]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a plurality of cutouts 553aa are formed on the lower side of the tank rail 553 (on the lower side of the rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front). It is configured so that foreign matter such as powder can be removed from the tank rail 553, and furthermore, some of the plurality of substrates on which the pachinko machine 1 is arranged on the back side are removed from the back side of the game board 5. In order to make it less likely to be affected by foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the tank rail 553, the board installation mode on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 has a unique configuration. Description will be made below with reference to FIG.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the pachinko machine 1 of this example is viewed from the back side, a tank rail 553 is provided on the upper right side of the back side of the pachinko machine 1 (upper right side of the back side of the body frame 4). there is A plurality of cutouts 553aa are formed on the lower side of the tank rail 553 (lower rear surface of the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front) so that metal powder or the like generated by the wear of the game ball B can be removed. It is configured such that foreign matter is removed from the tank rail 553 so that the game ball B can smoothly flow down on the tank rail 553 .

FIG. 60 is a front view of the pachinko machine 1 of this example from the back side, and the leftmost notch 553aa provided in the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side. A virtual line is drawn in the vertical direction so as to pass through the left side of the notch 553aa, the horizontal direction of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 is divided by the virtual line, and the area on the right side of the virtual line is defined as the area A. It is the figure which represented the area|region of the left side bordering on the imaginary line as the area|region B. FIG. In this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, the tank rail 553 having the notch portion 553aa is located above the area A. Therefore, the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 It is a region (region with a high possibility of foreign matter falling) that is susceptible to foreign substances such as metal powder falling from the surface. On the other hand, there is no tank rail 553 having the notch 553aa above the area B, and there is only the ball tank 552 not having the notch 553aa. The cutout portion 553aa of the rail 553 is a region (low foreign matter drop possibility region) that is less likely to be affected by foreign matter such as metal powder falling. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the opening/closing axis of the main body frame 4 (the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 520) is provided at the right end portion of the area A. As shown in FIG. As a result, the area B that is farther from the opening/closing axis of the main body frame 4 than the area A (the area B that is closer to the open end side than the area A) is more exposed to the outside than the area A when the main body frame 4 is in the open state. The area is easily accessible. Area A closer to the opening/closing axis of main body frame 4 than area B (area A farther from the open end side than area B) is more accessible from the outside than area B when main body frame 4 is in the open state. It has become a difficult area.

In each of area A and area B, a plurality of substrates are arranged on the back side of game board 5 (rear side of game panel 1100) in such a manner that the mounting surface of electronic components can be viewed from behind pachinko machine 1. there is Of these, in area A, panel relay board 1700A is arranged, while in area B, peripheral control board 1510 of peripheral control unit 1500, panel drive board 1720 of drive board unit 1700, and main control unit 1300 are arranged. A main control board 1310 is arranged. Although the details will be described later, the panel relay board 1700A is mounted in such a manner that each of the connectors is exposed to the outside. There is a need to be provided in area B where it is difficult to In addition, the panel relay board 1700A includes a peripheral control board 1510 and various sensor bodies and movable bodies controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, various sensors provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, drive motors, speakers, etc.). and is connected to each member by wiring (harness, etc.), but by providing it in area B that is easily accessible from the outside, it is easy to connect and disconnect these wiring has the advantage of being able to On the other hand, peripheral control board 1510 of peripheral control unit 1500, panel drive board 1720 of drive board unit 1700, and main control board 1310 of main control unit 1300 give priority to panel relay board 1700A being provided in region B. In addition, it is provided in a region A where foreign matter such as metal powder is likely to fall from the notch portion 553 aa of the tank rail 553 . However, although the area A is susceptible to foreign substances such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553, it is difficult to access from the outside. By providing the board 1510, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in the area A, it is possible to prevent tampering with these boards.

First, on the back side of the game board 5 (rear side of the game panel 1100), the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board of the main control unit 1300 are arranged in order from the top. 1310 are provided so that the mounting surface of the electronic components can be visually recognized from the rear of the pachinko machine 1 . These substrates arranged in the area A are housed in substrate boxes (box-like boxes composed of a box body molded of non-conductive resin and a cover body constituting the substrate box). Therefore, in the area A, foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is removed from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, etc. by the board box while maintaining the difficulty of access from the outside. can be prevented from directly adhering to the substrate, and the risk of failure of the substrate, which is important for game control, can be reduced. A plurality of minute ventilation holes are formed in each board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are accommodated. However, these ventilation holes are not provided on the upper surface of the board box when each board box is attached to the pachinko machine 1, so that foreign matter such as metal powder can be prevented from entering through the ventilation holes. ing.

In the area A, among the boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 provided on the back side of the game board 5 (the rear side of the game panel 1100), the main control board 1310 It is provided at the farthest position from the notch 553aa. Between the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310, there are a peripheral control unit 1500 having a peripheral control board 1510 and a drive board unit 1700 having a panel drive board 1720. is provided. For this reason, foreign substances such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 are less likely to adhere to the main control board 1310 than other boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, thereby improving game control. It is possible to reduce the risk of failure of the main control board 1310, which is the most important.

Note that the boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged so that not only the area A but also part of them are located in the area B in consideration of the ease of confirmation from the outside. However, even in the case where the board is provided across the area A and the area B in this way, among the electronic parts mounted on the board, the electronic parts with high importance (for example, the main control MPU, the peripheral control MPU, etc.) It is desirable to place it on the area B side to enhance safety. In addition, as long as even a part of the board is located in the area A, the entire board is housed in the board box, and foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is prevented from adhering to the box. It is preferable to prevent In this embodiment, the main control board 1310 has a higher confirmation frequency than the peripheral control board 1510 and other boards, so the area extending from the area A to the area B is larger than that of the peripheral control board 1510 .

Further, as described above, although the main control board 1310 is arranged so as to straddle the area A and the area B, the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on this main control board 1310 cannot be changed illegally. In consideration of making it difficult, it is arranged on the side of the area A that is difficult to access from the outside when the body frame 4 is in the open state. However, as described above, the area A is more susceptible to foreign substances such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 than the area B. In addition to accommodating the control board 1310, the setting key cylinder is arranged on the main control board 1310 so that the setting key cylinder in the area A is located at a place avoiding the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. preferably. Specifically, the tank rail 553 of this embodiment is provided with a plurality of notches 553aa spaced apart (separated) at predetermined intervals in the left-right direction. , and the setting key cylinder is arranged on the main control board 1310 so that the setting key cylinder is positioned directly below a portion of the tank rail 553 where the notch portion 553aa is not provided. is preferred. As a result, it is possible to avoid the risk of foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 to the setting key cylinder and causing an abnormality, while making it difficult to tamper with the setting key cylinder.

In addition, if the setting key is left inserted in the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a located in the area A due to the carelessness of the hall manager or the like, foreign matter such as falling metal powder adheres to the setting key. , there is a risk of causing an abnormality. In order to suppress such a risk, in this embodiment, in addition to the arrangement of the setting key cylinders described above, the insertion/removal operation (insertion/removal operation) of the setting key with respect to the setting key cylinder is performed by grasping the setting key with respect to the main control board 1310 . Both sides of the part (the part other than the insertion part inserted into the setting key cylinder) are configured to be enabled only in a posture in which both sides face the horizontal direction (a posture parallel to the vertical direction of the pachinko machine 1). As a result, at least at the end of work related to setting change or setting confirmation, both sides of the holding part of the setting key are oriented in the horizontal direction. Even if the key is left inserted, it is possible to reduce the possibility that foreign matter such as falling metal powder will accumulate on the setting key.

In area B, a panel relay board 1710A is provided on the back side of the game board 5 (rear side of the game panel 1100) so that the mounting surface of the electronic components can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1. ing. Unlike the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, the panel relay board 1710A of this embodiment is not equipped with a CPU, and is controlled by the peripheral control boards 1510 and 1510. It mainly serves to electrically connect various sensor bodies and movable bodies (for example, various sensors provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5, drive motors, speakers, etc.), and this panel relay board 1710A is integrated into the electrical connection of the performances to improve the productivity in manufacturing the game machine, and to specify the cause part and disconnect the electrical connection when some abnormality occurs in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 is made easy, and convenience in terms of manufacturing and inspection of the pachinko machine 1 can be enhanced. Since the panel relay board 1710A is connected to each member by wiring (harness, etc.), a plurality of connectors, which are connection terminals for connecting these wirings, are mounted corresponding to the number of wirings to be connected to each board. It is Each of these connectors is preferably mounted so as to be exposed to the outside in consideration of the above-mentioned convenience. The board is not housed in a board box and has a higher exposed portion (degree of exposure) to the outside than other boards.

In addition, the panel relay board 1710A of the present embodiment is preferably mounted so as to be exposed to the outside in consideration of convenience as described above. In consideration of the high cost due to the change in the number, etc.), it is not housed in a box-shaped board box such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and the mounting surface of the electronic components on the back cover 640 is covered. I'm trying That is, when the back cover 640 is opened, the mounting surface of the electronic components is entirely exposed behind the pachinko machine 1 . It should be noted that if the high cost due to changes in the connection mode (change in the number of connectors, etc.) when designing the game machine is not taken into consideration, a simple cover with each connector portion opened is considered only for the above-mentioned convenience. The panel relay board 1710A may be covered with a body, and only each connector portion may be exposed.

As described above, the area B is less susceptible to foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 than the area A. In this embodiment, the panel relay board 1710A is provided in such area B. FIG. Specifically, the boards such as the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 were positioned across the regions A and B, but the panel relay board 1710A of this embodiment is located on the region B side as a whole. arranged to fit in the By doing so, foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 adheres even to the panel relay board 1710A, which has a higher exposed portion (degree of exposure) to the outside than other boards. Therefore, the risk of failure of the panel relay board 1710A can be reduced.

In addition, as described above, the panel relay board 1710A of this embodiment is arranged so that the entirety of the panel relay board 1710A can be accommodated in the area B side, and furthermore, the side end portion of the panel relay board 1710A is arranged as far away from the area A as possible. I am trying to That is, the panel relay board 1710A of the present embodiment is arranged so that the whole of the panel relay board 1710A fits securely in the area B side and is separated from the area A by a predetermined distance. side) are arranged in the up-and-down direction. As a result, the panel relay board 1710A is separated from the area A by a predetermined distance, and foreign matter such as metal powder is prevented from falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and adhering to the exposed portion of the panel relay board 1710A. I'm trying

In this embodiment, in order to remove the foreign matter from the tank rail 553 preferentially, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, the rear surface of the pachinko machine 1 is positioned slightly to the left from the center in the left-right direction. An imaginary line is set at the deviated position, and the area of the area A is larger than the area of the area B, but the pachinko machine 1 is provided on the tank rail 553 when viewed from the back side. If an imaginary line is drawn in the vertical direction so as to pass through the leftmost cutout portion 553aa among the cutout portions 553aa located at the leftmost end, the area of the region A is smaller than the area of the region B. Alternatively, a virtual line may be set so that the area of the area A and the area of the area B are substantially the same, and the areas A and B may be set. In addition, when not only the tank rail 553 but also the ball tank 522 is provided with a notch portion that plays a role equivalent to the notch portion 553aa, the ball tank 522 is provided with the pachinko machine 1 in a state in which the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side. Regions A and B may be set as an aspect in which a virtual line is drawn in the vertical direction so as to pass through the left side of the leftmost cutout of the cutouts.

In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of wirings connected to the panel relay board 1710A are kept as close to the area B side as possible (so that the bent portion does not enter the area A). Specifically, more wire fixing portions (members such as hooks) for fixing various wires connected to the panel relay board 1710A are provided on the area B side of the back surface of the pachinko machine 1 than on the area A side. and as many wirings as possible are kept on the area B side. As a result, the plurality of wirings connected to the panel relay board 1710A is also less likely to be affected by foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. FIG.

Further, as described above in detail, the first eaves portion 551da is provided below the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, and the first eaves portion 551da is provided on the back side of the game board 5 (the game board 5). It extends to the left of the panel 1100 (the rear side of the panel 1100 ) to below the ball tank 552 located on the left side of the tank rail 553 . That is, in the region A, the first eaves portion 551da is located between the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the substrates such as the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510. , the first canopy portion 551da is located between the ball tank 552 located on the left side of the tank rail 553 and the panel relay board 1710A. As described above, in the region A, since the first eaves portion 551da is positioned between the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the substrates such as the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the back cover 640 Not only when the rear cover 640 is closed, but also when the back cover 640 is opened, foreign matter such as metal powder falling to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa can be received and adhered to the first eaves portion 551da. To prevent foreign matter such as metal powder falling outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa from falling toward the substrates such as the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 positioned below. can be done. As a result, the substrates such as the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 provided in the area A are protected not only by the substrate box that stores the substrates, but also by the first canopy portion 551da. Adhesion can be prevented.

On the other hand, in region B, the first eaves portion 551da provided below the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 extends below the ball tank 552 and is positioned above the panel relay board 1710A. Foreign matter such as metal powder falling outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is received and adhered to the first eaves portion 551da not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened. Thus, it is possible to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder falling outside from main guide portion 553a through notch portion 553aa from falling toward panel relay substrate 1710A positioned to the lower left thereof. As a result, although the panel relay board 1710A provided in the area B is not housed in the board box, the first eaves portion 551da prevents foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the panel relay board 1710A. can be done.

In the above description, as a configuration for dealing with foreign matter such as metal powder according to the first embodiment, the case where the first eaves portion 551da constitutes the eaves portion has been described. When the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a are connected to jointly constitute the eaves portion as in the configuration of , the third When the one eaves portion 551da constitutes the eaves portion, the first eaves portion 551da is not provided and the second eaves portion 640a is provided alone as in the configuration for dealing with foreign matter such as metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. may be configured. That is, in the region B, the eaves provided below the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 extends below the ball tank 552 located on the left side of the tank rail 553, and extends above the panel relay board 1710A. At least when the back cover 640 is closed, foreign matter such as metal powder falling to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa can be received and adhered to the eaves portion. It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder falling outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa from falling toward the panel relay substrate 1710A positioned on the left lower side. As a result, although the panel relay board 1710A provided in the area B is not stored in the board box, the eaves can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the panel relay board 1710A.

Further, in the above description, the canopy portion of the region A provided below the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is configured to extend below the ball tank 552 in the region B. A canopy is not provided below the ball tank 552, so that foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the canopy of the area A through the notch 553aa moves to the area B side. You may comprise so that the movement prevention part which prevents may be provided. For example, the eaves of the region A provided below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 may be configured to bend upward at the boundary between the regions A and B. In such a configuration as well, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the eaves portion of the region A through the notch portion 553aa does not move to the region B side and moves to the region B side. It is possible to suppress the falling toward the located panel relay board 1710A. As a result, the panel relay board 1710A provided in the area B is not housed in the board box, but is prevented from moving toward the area B side by the eaves of the area A and the movement prevention section. , the adhesion of foreign matter such as metal powder can be prevented.

Further, in this embodiment, on the back side of the game board 5 (rear side of the game panel 1100), the color of the board on the mounting surface side of the board of the panel relay board 1710A provided in the area B is the same as that provided in the area A. The main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 are painted in a color different from the board color on the mounting surface side. Specifically, the color of the resist or the color of silk printing applied to the board surface of the panel relay board 1710A is changed to the color of the resist or the color of silk printing applied to the board surface of the main control board 1310 or the peripheral control board 1510. It is different from As a result, for the panel relay board 1710A provided in the area B, the peripheral control board 1510 and various sensor bodies and movable bodies controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the door frame 3 and various sensors, drive motors, speakers, etc.), and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main induction portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa adheres to the substrate. It can be easily determined from the outside that it is located in the area B where it is difficult to Note that the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and other boards provided in the area A are prone to adhere to foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa. Therefore, it is preferable to use a color such as a dark color (green, black, etc.) that makes it easy to determine whether or not foreign matter such as metal powder has adhered. However, the panel relay board 1710A provided in the area B is also located in the area B where foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the main guide portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portion 553aa is difficult to adhere. As with the provided substrate, it may be painted with a color (such as green or black) that makes it easy to determine whether or not foreign matter such as metal powder has adhered.

In addition, as a method for facilitating the determination from the outside of the existence of the region B where foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the notch portion 553aa is difficult to adhere, the mounting surface of the substrate can be easily detected. Regardless of the difference in substrate color between the two sides, the portion covering the area A and the portion covering the area B of the back cover 640 in the closed state are marked with some kind of marking, so that the existence of the areas A and B can be discriminated from the outside. You can make it easier. Specifically, the specific marking B may be provided in a portion of the back cover 640 covering the area B, and the specific marking B may not be provided in the area A. As the specific marking B, for example, a sticker or print with specific information indicating that it is the area B (character information or symbol information such as "high safety" or "relay board side") is attached. Alternatively, specific information (such as character information or symbol information such as "high security" or "relay board side") representing the area B may be formed and processed on the back cover 640 itself. Alternatively, a specific marking A may be provided on a portion of the back cover 640 that covers the area A, and the specific marking A may not be provided on the area B. As the specific marking A in this case, for example, a sticker or print indicating specific information indicating that the area is A (such as character information or symbol information such as "low safety level" or "main control board side") Or, specific information indicating that it is area A Specific information indicating that it is area A (such as character information and symbol information such as "low safety level" and "main control board side") For example, the rear cover 640 itself may be formed and processed. In addition, specific markings A and B may be provided on the portion covering area A and the portion covering area B of the back cover 640, respectively.

Note that the panel relay board 1710A provided in the area B on the back side of the game board 5 (the rear side of the game panel 1100) is provided directly below the tank rail 553 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to be provided at a predetermined distance from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side. That is, the panel relay board 1710A is located in the region B separated from the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1, and in addition, the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1. may be provided at a position spaced apart by a predetermined distance. In such a case, since the panel relay board 1710A is located at a predetermined distance from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1, the panel relay board 1710A falls from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. Foreign matter such as metal powder can be prevented from adhering to panel relay board 1710A, and the risk of failure of panel relay board 1710A can be reduced.

In addition, when the panel relay board 1710A is provided at a position separated from the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 by a predetermined distance when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side, the notch portion The panel relay board 1710A may be arranged in the region B so that the ball tank 522 itself without the 553aa is positioned directly above like a canopy. As a result, even if foreign matter falls from above the pachinko machine 1, etc., including the island equipment, etc. instead of the cutout portion 553aa, such foreign matter is prevented from adhering to the panel relay board 1710A. It is possible to reduce the risk of failure of the relay board 1710A.

Also, the panel relay board 1710A may be divided into a plurality of boards instead of being provided on one board. When the panel relay board 1710A is divided into a plurality of parts and provided, all the boards may be provided in the area B, or may be arranged in the areas A and B separately. For example, when the panel relay board 1710A is divided into a panel relay board 1710A1 and a panel relay board 1710A2 having different board areas and a plurality of panel relay boards 1710A1 and 1710A2 are provided, a board with a large board area and a high possibility of adhesion of foreign matter (for example, the panel relay board 1710A1) is placed in the region B where safety is high, and a substrate with a small substrate area and a low possibility of adhesion of foreign matter (for example, the panel relay substrate 1710A2) is placed at a location sufficiently distant from the notch 553aa in the region A side ( For example, it may be arranged in the lower right corner on the rear side of the game panel 1100).

[4-11. Positional relationship between the notch of the tank rail and the drawer connector]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the body frame 4 and the game board 5 are electrically connected via a predetermined relay board, and the game board 5 is attached to the body frame 4 as such a relay board. A drawer connector DCN may be provided that can directly electrically connect the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 without requiring a separate wiring work. Description will be made below with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 61, when the main body frame 4 is viewed from the front, each terminal is located on the front side of the main body frame 4 on the lower right side of the front surface of the main body frame 4 (on the lower left side when the main body frame 4 is viewed from the back side). Main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 is provided so as to face . In addition, when the game board 5 is viewed from the front, on the lower right side of the rear surface of the game board 5 (on the lower left side when the game board 5 is viewed from the back side), each terminal faces the back side of the game board 5 . A panel-side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 is provided. Then, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 is guided to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4, and the game board 5 Each terminal of the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 and each terminal of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4 are electrically connected.

Two sets of drawer connectors are provided, consisting of a drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 on the main frame side and a drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 on the game board side. Depending on one drawer connector DCN, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 is connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4, thereby A control signal line for transmitting various control signals is formed by the control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 provided in the body frame 4 . In addition, depending on the other drawer connector DCN, the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 is connected to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4, whereby the game board 5 A control signal line for transmitting various control signals and detection signals is formed by the peripheral control board 1510 provided, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3, various sensors, various speakers, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 60, the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are connected to the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510, and the like. It is not stored in the board box, and is provided in area B, which is the area on the side where the ball tank 552 located on the left side of the tank rail 553 is provided, like the panel relay board 1710A described above. That is, foreign matter such as metal powder falls from the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5. It is provided not in the area A, which is susceptible to the influence, but in the area B, which is less susceptible to the influence of foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. As shown in FIG. More specifically, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are connected to the main body with the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. It is provided in the position of the region B, which is the furthest from the notch 553 aa of the tank rail 553 , within the frame of the frame 4 . In this way, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are provided in the region B instead of the region A. Foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the main frame 4 is prevented from adhering to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5. , the failure risk of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 can be reduced.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 62(A), when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, the game board mounting portion 301, which is the portion of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is to be attached, is opened. In this state, no member is provided between the tank rail 553 and the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4 . Also, when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4, foreign objects such as metal powder accumulated in the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 are likely to drop due to the impact of the removal. In this respect, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 is provided in the region B instead of the region A, so that each terminal is exposed when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4. Although it is in the state, it prevents foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 from adhering to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4. It is possible to reduce the risk of failure of the side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1.

When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side as shown in FIG. , the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are provided directly under the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 at a predetermined distance P1. Note that the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided on the lower rear side of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 . That is, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are separated from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the horizontal direction of the pachinko machine 1. In addition to being the region B, it is provided at a position separated from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 by a predetermined distance P1. In this way, for the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5, the cutout portion of the tank rail 553 in the front and rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 is formed. 553aa is positioned away from the tank rail 553aa by a predetermined distance P1. Prevent foreign matter from adhering to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5, Type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 can be reduced in failure risk.

In this example, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 extend from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 to the pachinko machine 1. Although it is provided at a position away from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the rear by a predetermined distance P1 toward the front side (for example, the body frame side) It may be provided at a position where the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 do not exist directly above the drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2. In such a configuration as well, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are connected to the tank rail 553 in the longitudinal direction of the pachinko machine 1. Since it is positioned apart from the notch portion 553aa by the predetermined distance P1', the same effect as described above can be obtained. Also, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 are directed toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 1 from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. When provided at a position separated by a predetermined distance P1', the ball tank 552 does not exist directly above the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2. Not only foreign objects such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the rail 553, but also game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and dropping fall into the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type). type), and the failure risk of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 can be further reduced. In addition, there is a new risk (external exposure to In consideration of falling foreign matter, etc., a means (back cover 640, etc.) for preventing foreign matter from falling from the outside by covering directly above the drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 on the main frame side and the drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 on the game board side ) is preferably provided separately from the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 .

The body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4 is provided in a box-shaped body having a rectangular opening so that the opening of the box-shaped body faces the front side of the body frame 4. More specifically, when the body frame 4 is viewed from the back side, the opening of the box-shaped body faces slightly to the left. That is, the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the body frame 4 is designed so that the opening of the box-shaped body does not face the side of the region A in the region B, but faces the side opposite to the region A. is provided. In this way, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 is arranged so as not to face the area A where foreign matter such as metal powder is likely to fall from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. Since the opening of the box-shaped main body is provided in the body frame 4, foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 not only when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 but also when the game board 5 is not attached. However, it becomes difficult to enter the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 from the opening of the box-shaped main body, and the risk of failure of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 is reduced. can be done.

The main body frame side drawer connector (recessed type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 is provided so that the box-shaped main body having a rectangular opening is vertically long (the vertical direction is the longitudinal direction). In other words, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 has a vertically elongated box-shaped body (vertical Since the direction is the longitudinal direction, the area of the upper surface of the box-shaped main body can be reduced. As described above, for the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4, the upper surface of the box-shaped main body, which is susceptible to foreign substances such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553, becomes small. Since the box-shaped main body is provided as shown in FIG. It becomes difficult to adhere to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the frame 4, and the risk of failure of the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 can be reduced.

In the area B, the first canopy 551da provided below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 extends below the ball tank 552, and the body frame side drawer connector (concave) of the body frame 4 Type) Since it is located above the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5, the notch 553aa is used not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened. Foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the guide portion 553a can be received and adhered to the first eaves portion 551da. can be suppressed from falling toward the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 positioned on the left lower side. Further, since the first eaves portion 551da is provided on the main body frame 4, the main guidance is provided through the notch portion 553aa not only when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 but also when the game board 5 is not attached. Foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the portion 553a can be received and adhered to the first eaves portion 551da. , the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 located on the left lower side thereof. As a result, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 provided in the area B are not housed in the board box. However, the first eaves portion 551da can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering.

In the above description, as a configuration for dealing with foreign matter such as metal powder according to the first embodiment, the case where the first eaves portion 551da constitutes the eaves portion has been described. When the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a are connected to jointly constitute the eaves portion as in the configuration of , the third When the one eaves portion 551da constitutes the eaves portion, the first eaves portion 551da is not provided and the second eaves portion 640a is provided alone as in the configuration for dealing with foreign matter such as metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. may be configured. That is, in the region B, the eaves provided below the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 extends below the ball tank 552 located on the left side of the tank rail 553, and the main body frame of the main body frame 4 is provided. It may be configured to be positioned above the side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5, at least when the back cover 640 is closed, the notch 553aa is the main drawer connector. Foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the guide portion 553a can be received and adhered to the eaves portion, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa can It is possible to suppress falling toward the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 located at the lower left. As a result, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 provided in the area B are not housed in the board box. However, the eaves can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering.

Further, in the above description, the canopy portion of the region A provided below the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is configured to extend below the ball tank 552 in the region B. A canopy is not provided below the ball tank 552, so that foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the canopy of the area A through the notch 553aa moves to the area B side. You may comprise so that the movement prevention part which prevents may be provided. For example, the eaves of the region A provided below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 may be configured to bend upward at the boundary between the regions A and B. In such a configuration as well, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the main guide portion 553a to the eaves portion of the region A through the notch portion 553aa does not move to the region B side and moves to the region B side. It is possible to suppress falling toward the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 located there. As a result, the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 of the main body frame 4 and the game board side drawer connector (convex type) DCN2 of the game board 5 provided in the area B are not housed in the board box. However, the eaves of the region A and the movement prevention portion that prevents movement to the region B side can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering.

Further, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, the game board attachment portion 301, which is the portion of the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is to be attached, is opened, and the main body frame side of the main body frame 4 is opened. The drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 is visible, and a predetermined area around the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 is painted black. As a result, before the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it is possible to clearly see whether or not foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the periphery of the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1. If foreign matter such as metal powder is attached, it can be removed from the installation surroundings, so that when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it will not adhere to the main body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the risk of failure of the drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 on the main body frame side.

In addition, the main body frame 4 is provided with a game board mounting portion 501c that forms the lower side of the game board insertion opening 501b and on which the game board 5 is mounted. is located behind the game board mounting portion 501c, but between the main frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 and the game board mounting portion 501c, as shown in FIG. 62(A) A protruding portion 501z is provided as a step so that the installation location of the body frame side drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 is higher than the game board placing portion 501c. Further, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is attached so as to move from the front side to the rear side on the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c. be done. Therefore, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, if there is foreign matter such as metal powder on the upper surface of the game board placing portion 501c, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, , the foreign matter is pushed out from the front side toward the rear side on the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c, and the pushed foreign matter is connected to the body frame side drawer connector ( Concave type) can suppress movement toward DCN1. As a result, although the drawer connector (concave type) DCN1 on the main body frame side is positioned behind the game board mounting portion 501c, it is possible to prevent foreign matter from adhering due to the difference in level with the game board mounting portion 501c. can be done.

[4-12. Positional relationship between notch of tank rail and external terminal plate]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, an external terminal plate 558 electrically connected to the hall computer installed on the game hall side is provided above the tank rail 553, and the position where the external terminal plate 558 is provided may be provided below the tank rail 553 . Description will be made below with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 63, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, an external terminal plate 558 is provided below the tank rail 553 so that each terminal faces the back side of the pachinko machine 1 . The external terminal board 558 connected to the payout control board 633 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side by connecting wiring from the game hall side. The hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

The external terminal board 558 is located on the side where the tank rail 553 is provided, similarly to the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300. It is provided in area A, which is an area. In other words, the external terminal plate 558 is not located in the region B where foreign substances such as metal powder fall from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553, but from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. It is provided in the area A that is likely to be affected by Further, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700, and the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 provided in the area A are housed in board boxes. Since the external terminal plate 558 must be connected to the wiring from the game hall side, it is not housed in the board box and the wiring connection terminals are exposed.

In this regard, in the area A, on the back side of the game board 5 (rear side of the game panel 1100), from the top, the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500, the external terminal board 558, and the panel drive of the drive board unit 1700 are arranged. A board 1720 and a main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 are provided. That is, a peripheral control unit 1500 having a peripheral control board 1510 is provided between the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal plate 558. As shown in FIG. The external terminal plate 558 is formed so that its width is smaller than the width of the board box that houses the peripheral control board 1510 so that it does not protrude in the lateral direction with respect to the width of the board box that houses the peripheral control board 1510 . It is provided below the peripheral control unit 1500 . As described above, for boards such as the external terminal board 558 that require wiring connection work and are difficult to store in the board box, although the wiring connection terminals are exposed, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided. By being provided directly under the unit 1500, foreign substances such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 are prevented from adhering to the external terminal plate 558, and the risk of failure of the external terminal plate 558 is reduced. can be done.

As described above, the peripheral control unit 1500 having the peripheral control board 1510 is provided between the notch 553 aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal plate 558 . The control board 1510 is positioned closer to the cutout portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 . Therefore, for example, if foreign matter such as metal powder continues to fall from the notch 553 aa of the tank rail 553 , there is a possibility that the foreign matter such as metal powder will adhere to the peripheral control board 1510 rather than the external terminal plate 558 . is high, and there is a high possibility that electrical trouble will occur in peripheral control board 1510 before electrical trouble occurs in external terminal plate 558 .

The board provided between the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal plate 558 is different from the peripheral control board 1510, except for the main control board 1310 which affects the progress of the game itself. Other substrates may be used. For example, the door frame 3 may be provided with a dummy movable body that performs a predetermined operation when a predetermined condition is met (e.g., the elapse of a certain period of time). is provided between the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal plate 558, and the dummy substrate is electrically connected before electrical trouble occurs in the external terminal plate 558. It may be configured to increase the possibility of trouble occurrence. If an electrical trouble occurs in such a dummy substrate, the dummy movable body will stop moving, and it is highly likely that an electrical trouble will occur in the external terminal plate 558 after that. can be done. Further, the substrate provided between the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal plate 558 is not limited to one substrate, and a plurality of substrates may be used.

Here, the external terminal plate 558 is electrically connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. However, if an electrical trouble occurs in the external terminal board 558, the hall computer cannot monitor the player's game, and the pachinko machine 1 Even if a fraudulent act is committed, a problem arises that the hall manager cannot grasp on the game hall side. By exploiting these characteristics, a fraudulent person applies impact to the pachinko machine 1, for example, intentionally drops a foreign object such as metal powder from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553, and the external terminal board It is feared that an electrical trouble may occur in the 558 so that the game can be monitored by the hall computer, and then some kind of fraudulent act will be carried out. On the other hand, the peripheral control board 1510 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, etc. When is generated, although the game can be progressed on the main control board 1310, various effects such as light emission effects, sound effects, and movable effects by various decorative boards, display effects by the effect display device 1600, etc. are executed. There is a problem that you can't do it. In this respect, for example, when foreign matter such as metal powder continues to fall from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553, first, electrical trouble occurs in the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 By putting various performances into non-execution states, the occurrence of troubles in the pachinko machine 1 is notified to the outside. That is, during the period when an electrical trouble occurs in the peripheral control board 1510, since various effects by the peripheral control board 1510 are not executed, it is difficult for the pachinko machine 1 to perform fraudulent acts. . In this way, when an electrical trouble occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 is first caused to have an electrical trouble, thereby preventing an electrical trouble from occurring in the external terminal board 558. Measures can be taken to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which fraudulent acts are performed on the pachinko machine 1 during the period when an electrical trouble occurs in the external terminal board 558.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that the external terminal plate 558 is provided in a region A on the side of the pachinko machine 1 where the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided in the left-right direction. As described above in detail, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back side, the opening/closing axis of the main body frame 4 (the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 520) is positioned at the right end of the area A. I'm trying to set it to That is, the area A closer to the opening/closing axis of the body frame 4 than the area B (the area A farther from the open end side than the area B) is accessed from the outside compared to the area B when the body frame 4 is in the open state. It has become a difficult area. In this respect, the external terminal board 558 is provided in the area A that is difficult to access from the outside, making it difficult for a fraudulent person to access the external terminal board 558 . As a result, it is possible for a fraudulent player to monitor the game using the hall computer, and to prevent any fraudulent activity. In order to electrically connect the external terminal board 558 to the hall computer, it will be connected to the wiring provided in the island facility. , the tank rail 553 hangs down from above toward the region A on the side where the notch 553aa is provided. there is

As shown in FIG. 64, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side, the effect display device 1600, the peripheral control unit 1500, the drive board unit 1700, and the main control unit 1300 provided on the game board 5 are located below the tank rail 553. On the other hand, the external terminal plate 558 provided on the game board 5 is provided at a position separated from the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 toward the front side of the pachinko machine 1 by a predetermined distance P2. there is Note that the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided on the lower rear side of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 . That is, the external terminal plate 558 is located in the region A on the side where the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided in the left-right direction of the pachinko machine 1, but the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 is provided at a position separated by a predetermined distance P2 from the . As described above, the external terminal plate 558 is positioned apart from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 by the predetermined distance P2, so that the external terminal plate 558 falls from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553. Foreign matter such as metal powder can be prevented from adhering to the external terminal plate 558, and the risk of failure of the external terminal plate 558 can be reduced.

A terminal cover 551k having a horizontally extending upper surface is provided on the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 provided below the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 so as to cover the upper side of the external terminal plate 558. ing. Since the terminal cover 551k is located above the external terminal plate 558, it falls outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened. Foreign matter such as metal powder can be received and adhered to the terminal cover 551k. You can prevent it from falling towards you. As a result, although the terminal cover 551k is provided in the area A that is susceptible to foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 when not housed in the board box, the terminal cover 551k is not stored in the board box. The cover 551k can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering. The terminal cover 551k may be provided integrally with the external terminal plate 558, or may be provided on the substrate holder 1200 to which the external terminal plate 558 is attached.

In this example, the external terminal plate 558 is provided below the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 below the tank rail 553. Like the panel relay board 1710A, boards with wiring connection terminals exposed, that is, boards that require wiring connection work and are difficult to store in a board box may be provided. Even in this case, the same effects as when the external terminal plate 558 is provided can be obtained.

Also, in the region A, the first eaves portion 551da provided below the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is positioned above the external terminal plate 558 . That is, in the region A, the first eaves portion 551da is located between the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the external terminal plate 558. As shown in FIG. In this way, in the region A, since the first eaves portion 551da is positioned between the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the substrates such as the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the back cover 640 Not only when the rear cover 640 is closed, but also when the back cover 640 is opened, foreign matter such as metal powder falling to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa can be received and adhered to the first eaves portion 551da. It is possible to prevent foreign matter such as metal powder falling outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa from falling toward the external terminal plate 558 positioned below. As a result, the external terminal plate 558 is provided in the region A, which is susceptible to foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 when not housed in the board box. The first eaves portion 551da can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering.

In the above description, as a configuration for dealing with foreign matter such as metal powder according to the first embodiment, the case where the first eaves portion 551da constitutes the eaves portion has been described. When the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a are connected to jointly constitute the eaves portion as in the configuration of , the third When the one eaves portion 551da constitutes the eaves portion, the first eaves portion 551da is not provided and the second eaves portion 640a is provided alone as in the configuration for dealing with foreign matter such as metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. may be configured. That is, in the region A, the eaves provided below the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 may be positioned above the external terminal plate 558. At least when the back cover 640 is closed, the notch is Foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the portion 553aa can be received and adhered to the eaves portion. It is possible to suppress foreign matter such as the above from falling toward the external terminal plate 558 located therebelow. As a result, the external terminal plate 558 is provided in the region A, which is susceptible to foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 when not housed in the board box. The eaves can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering.

[4-13. Suppression of metal powder movement when mounted on a game board]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the projecting portion 501z is provided in front of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, Movement of foreign matter such as metal powder may be suppressed. Description will be made below with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 65, the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500 in the body frame 4 includes a base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a base body 501a slightly extending from the upper end of the base body 501a. A game board insertion opening 501b, through which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, and a lower side of the game board insertion opening 501b are formed, penetrating back and forth in a range of about 3/4 of the total height from the lower position. A game board placing portion 501c on which the cage game board 5 is placed, and a game board that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placing portion 501c in the left-right direction and restricts the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rearward. and a regulating portion 501d. The game board 5 side (game panel 1100) is formed with a notched portion corresponding to the game board regulation portion 501d so that the game board 5 can be inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b at the correct position. However, if the game board 5 is inserted into the game board insertion slot 501b at an incorrect position (position shifted to the left or right), the game board regulation part 501d to prevent the game board 5 from being inserted.

In addition, the base unit 620b of the board unit 620 of the body frame 4 is provided with a discharged ball receiver 628 capable of discharging the game ball B to the outside. As shown in FIG. 66B, the ejected ball receiving portion 628 is located directly below the ejection portion 1201 of the board holder 1200 of the game board 5 when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 . As a result, all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. The ball can be discharged to the outside from the discharge part 1201 formed in the bottom through the discharge ball receiving part 628 below.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 65 and 66A, in the body frame 4, the discharged ball receiving portion 628 is located behind the game board placing portion 501c. Between the game board mounting portion 501c and the board mounting portion 501c, there is provided a flat plate-like projecting portion 501z that projects upward from the rear end of the game board mounting portion 501c. That is, the protruding portion 501z is located in front of the discharged ball receiving portion 628 and protrudes to a position higher than the discharged ball receiving portion 628 and the game board placing portion 501c. As a result, the projecting portion 501z can restrict the rearward movement of the lower end of the game board 5 together with the game board restricting portion 501d. Also, as shown in FIG. 66(B), when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower surface of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is positioned from the front side of the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c. It is mounted so as to move toward the rear. Therefore, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, the game board 5 can be attached to the main body frame 4 if there is foreign matter such as dust or metal powder on the upper surface of the game board placing portion 501c. At that time, such a foreign matter is pushed out from the front side toward the rear side on the upper surface of the game board placing portion 501c, and the pushed foreign matter is a discharge ball located behind the game board placing portion 501c. Movement toward the receiving portion 628 can be suppressed. As a result, although the ejected ball receiving portion 628 is located behind the game board placing portion 501c, the protruding portion 501z can prevent foreign matter such as dust and metal powder from entering.

The projecting portion 501z extends in the horizontal direction by the same length as the longitudinal direction of the game board placing portion 501c while maintaining the same height with respect to the rear end of the game board placing portion 501c. ing. Also, the projecting portion 501z is configured to be higher than the height of the game board restricting portion 501d. For example, the height of the projecting portion 501z may be equal to or greater than the height of one game ball B. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the game ball B enters the discharged ball receiving part 628 side (back side of the pachinko machine 1) located behind the game board placing part 501c. can be prevented.

Moreover, the projecting portion 501z is formed of a single-color resin member such as black or white. As a result, before the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it is possible to clearly see whether or not foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the protruding portion 501z. When the game board 5 is attached to the body frame 4, it can be prevented from entering the ejected ball receiving portion 628 located behind the projecting portion 501z by removing it from the projecting portion 501z. . Moreover, the projecting portion 501z is formed of a resin member that is an insulator. As a result, foreign matter such as metal powder, which is a conductor, can easily adhere to the projecting portion 501z. Even if it is pushed out from the front side to the rear side on the upper surface of the part 501c, it will not scatter, and it will be on the side of the discharged ball receiving part 628 located behind the game board mounting part 501c (the back side of the pachinko machine 1). entry can be prevented.

In addition, the projecting portion 501z of this example projects upward from the rear end of the game board mounting portion 501c between the discharged ball receiving portion 628 and the game board mounting portion 501c. Although it is provided so as to protrude to a position higher than the game board placing portion 501c, it is not limited to this, and between the discharged ball receiving portion 628 and the game board placing portion 501c Any configuration may be employed as long as a step that is higher than 501c by a predetermined height is provided. For example, a configuration in which the discharged ball receiving portion 628 is provided at a position above the step may be employed. Due to such a step, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, foreign matter such as metal powder pushed out from the front side to the rear side on the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c may Movement toward the discharged ball receiving portion 628 located behind the mounting portion 501c can be suppressed, and foreign matter such as metal powder can be prevented from entering the discharged ball receiving portion 628. .

The game board placing portion 501c is positioned forward of the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553, but is positioned below the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. As shown in FIG. Therefore, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, there is no blocking member, unlike the game board 5, between the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the game board mounting portion 501c. There is a possibility that foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 may adhere to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c. In this respect, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, even if foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the upper surface of the game board placing portion 501c, the ejected ball receiving portion 628 and the game board placing portion 501c may be removed. Since the projecting portion 501z is provided between the portion 501c and the portion 501c, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, foreign substances such as metal powder adhering to the upper surface of the game board placing portion 501c are ejected ball receivers. Movement toward the portion 628 can be suppressed, and foreign matter such as metal powder can be prevented from entering the ejected ball receiving portion 628 .

In addition, an out-port sensor 3032 for detecting the game ball B collected from the out-port 1008 is provided in the passage from the out-port 1008 to the discharge portion 1201 of the board holder 1200 until the game ball B reaches the discharge portion 1201 of the substrate holder 1200 on the game board 5 side. However, after the game ball B is discharged from the discharge part 1201, it may be provided in the passage until the game ball B is discharged from the discharged ball receiving part 628 to the outside on the main body frame 4 side. In such a case, when foreign matter such as metal powder enters from the discharged ball receiving portion 628, the foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the outlet sensor 3032, and game balls B collected from the outlet 1008 cannot be counted normally. there is a possibility. The number of game balls B detected by the outlet sensor 3032 is displayed on the base monitor 1310h. It becomes difficult to display the number of balls normally. In this regard, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, even if foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the upper surface of the game board placing portion 501c, the ejected ball receiving portion 628 and the game board placing portion Since the protruding portion 501z is provided between the portion 501c and the portion 501c, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, foreign matter such as metal powder adhering to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c is ejected. It is possible to prevent it from adhering to the outlet sensor 3032 through the part 628 and prevent electrical troubles such as erroneous counting of the game ball B by the outlet sensor 3032 from occurring.

In the main body frame 4, a power supply unit 620c having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633 are placed behind the game board placing part 501c and behind the discharged ball receiving part 628. A unit 620d, an interface unit 620e having an interface board 635 are provided. In this respect, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, even if foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the upper surface of the game board placing portion 501c, the power supply unit 620c, payout control unit 620d, interface unit 620e and the game board mounting portion 501c, the metal powder adhering to the upper surface of the game board mounting portion 501c is removed when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4. It is possible to suppress movement of foreign matter such as the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e. As a result, the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e are located behind the game board placing portion 501c, but the metal powder or the like pushed out from the game board placing portion 501c by the projecting portion 501z. foreign matter from adhering to the power supply board 620, the payout control board 633, and the interface board 635, and the risk of failure of these boards can be reduced.

[4-14. Metal powder countermeasures for power supply boards]
In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the power supply board 630 is positioned below the tank rail 553, and the protrusion 630h is provided so as to cover the upper side of the power supply board 630, and the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided. It may be configured so that foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen from the surface does not adhere. Description will be made below with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66. FIG.

As described above, the board unit 620 includes the base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, the power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, and the power supply unit 620c. It has a payout control unit 620d attached to the right side in front view, and an interface unit 620e attached to the left side of the power supply unit 620c in front view. The power supply unit 620c includes a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 (not shown) of the base unit 620b, and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631 and .

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66(B), in the body frame 4, at a position below the tank rail 553, a power supply unit 620c having a power supply board 630, a payout control unit 620d having a payout control board 633, an inter An interface unit 620e having an interface board 635 is provided. When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the side, a payout control unit 620d having a payout control board 633 and an interface unit 620e having an interface board 635 are positioned directly below the tank rail 553. The power supply unit 620c with 630 is positioned slightly forward of the tank rail 553.

In addition, the base unit 620b attached to the power supply unit 620c protrudes upward from the vicinity of its rear end, bends backward from a predetermined height, and extends horizontally so as to cover the upper side of the power supply unit 620c. A protruding portion 630h is provided. The protruding portion 630h is formed so that the rear end of its upper surface is located behind the rear end of the power supply unit 620c, and the left and right ends of its upper surface are longer than the length of the power supply unit 620c in the longitudinal direction. is formed as The rear end of the upper surface of the projecting portion 630h is formed to a position behind the rear end of the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553. As shown in FIG. Note that the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is provided on the lower rear side of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1 . Since the upper side of the power supply unit 620c is covered by the protruding portion 620h in this manner, the main guiding portion 553a is not exposed to the outside through the notch portion 553aa not only when the back cover 640 is closed but also when the back cover 640 is opened. Foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen into the protrusion 630h can be received and adhered to the upper surface of the protruding portion 630h. can be suppressed from falling toward the power supply unit 620c located below the upper surface of the . A power supply board cover 631 of the power supply unit 620c is provided with a plurality of holes for dissipating heat generated from the power supply board 630. As shown in FIG. As described above, for the power supply unit 620c, although the power supply board cover 631 is provided with a plurality of holes, the protrusion 630h is positioned so as to cover the upper side of the power supply unit 620c. Foreign matter such as metal powder falling from 553aa can be prevented from adhering to the power supply board 630, and the risk of failure of the power supply board 630 can be reduced.

The projecting portion 630h described above is formed of a resin member of a single color such as black or white. As a result, before and after the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it is possible to clearly see whether or not foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the projecting portion 630h. In such a case, it can be prevented from adhering to the power supply substrate 630 of the power supply unit 620c located below the protrusion 630h by removing it from the protrusion 630h. Moreover, the projecting portion 630h is formed of a resin member that is an insulator. This makes it easier for foreign matter such as metal powder, which is a conductor, to adhere to the protruding portion 630h, and such foreign matter scatters toward the power supply unit 620c positioned below the protruding portion 630h. Therefore, it is possible to prevent adhesion to the power supply substrate 630.

Further, as shown in FIG. 66(A), the projecting portion 630h is provided on the body frame 4 side instead of the game board 5 side, like the power supply unit 620c. That is, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, there is no game board 5 between the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the power supply unit 620c. Since the protruding portion 630h is located so as to cover the main guide portion 553a, it falls to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa not only when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 but also when the game board 5 is not attached. Foreign matter such as metal powder can be received and adhered to the upper surface of the protruding portion 630h. It is possible to suppress the falling toward the power supply unit 620c located on the lower side. As a result, although the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply unit 620c has a plurality of holes, the protrusion 630h can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the power supply board 630. .

In addition, the projecting portion 630h is formed so as to cover not only the upper side of the power supply unit 620c but also a part of the upper side of the payout control unit 620d and the interface unit 620e located behind the power supply unit 620c. It may be formed to cover the entire upper side of the unit 620d and the interface unit 620e. In such a case, foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the payout control board 633 and the interface board 635 due to the protrusion 630h formed so as to cover the upper side of the payout control unit 620d and the interface unit 620e. can be prevented. The projecting portion 630h may be formed so as to cover only the upper side of the power supply unit 620c, and in addition to the upper side of the power supply unit 620c, any one of the upper side of the payout control unit 620d and the interface unit 620e may be formed. may be formed to cover only the

A first canopy portion 551da provided below the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 is positioned above the power supply unit 620c. That is, the first canopy portion 551da is located between the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the power supply unit 620c. In this way, since the first canopy portion 551da is positioned between the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 and the power supply unit 620c, the power supply unit 620c is not only closed when the back cover 640 is closed, but also when the back cover 640 is opened. Foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa can be received and adhered to the first overhang portion 551da. It is possible to suppress foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the lower side from falling toward the power supply unit 620c located therebelow. As a result, although the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply unit 620c has a plurality of holes, the first canopy part 551da prevents foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the power supply board 630. can be done.

In the above description, as a configuration for dealing with foreign matter such as metal powder according to the first embodiment, the case where the first eaves portion 551da constitutes the eaves portion has been described. When the first eaves portion 551da and the second eaves portion 640a are connected to jointly constitute the eaves portion as in the configuration of , the third When the one eaves portion 551da constitutes the eaves portion, the first eaves portion 551da is not provided and the second eaves portion 640a is provided alone as in the configuration for dealing with foreign matter such as metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. may be configured. That is, above the power supply unit 620c, the canopy portion provided below the notch portion 553aa of the tank rail 553 may be positioned. Foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a can be received and adhered to the eaves portion, and foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa can It can be prevented from falling toward the power supply unit 620c located below. As a result, although the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply unit 620c has a plurality of holes, the eaves can prevent foreign matter such as metal powder from adhering to the power supply board 630. FIG.

Also, when the back cover 640 is closed, the back cover 640 and the power supply unit 620c are separated from each other by a predetermined distance in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 1. It is positioned upward. From this point, when the back cover 640 is closed, foreign matter such as metal powder that has fallen to the outside from the main guide portion 553a through the notch portion 553aa is positioned so that the upper end of the back cover 640 is higher than the lower end. It is possible to suppress falling toward the power supply unit 620c. As for the power supply unit 620c, although the power supply board cover 631 is provided with a plurality of holes, foreign matter such as metal powder falling from the notch 553aa of the tank rail 553 is prevented from adhering to the power supply board 630. and the risk of failure of the power supply board 630 can be reduced.

The projecting portion 630h is formed to project upward from the vicinity of the rear end of the base unit 620b and have a vertical surface. That is, in the body frame 4, the power supply unit having the power board 630 is located behind the projecting portion 501z projecting from the rear end of the game board placing portion 501c and further behind the vertical surface of the projecting portion 630h. 620c, a payout control unit 620d having a payout control board 633, and an interface unit 620e having an interface board 635 are provided. As described above in detail, when the game board 5 is not attached to the main body frame 4, even if foreign matter such as metal powder adheres to the upper surface of the game board mounting part 501c, the rear surface of the game board mounting part 501c may be damaged. By providing the protruding portion 501z protruding from the end, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, such a foreign object is prevented from being caught on the side of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 (power source) located behind the protruding portion 501z. side of the unit 620c, etc.). At this time, even if foreign matter such as metal powder enters behind the projecting portion 501z, the vertical surface of the projecting portion 630h, which is a separate member, is provided at a position behind the projecting portion 501z. Thus, when the game board 5 is attached to the body frame 4, such a foreign object can be prevented from moving to the side of the power supply unit 620c or the like positioned behind the vertical surface of the projecting portion 630h. . In other words, not only the protruding portion 501z but also the vertical surface of the protruding portion 630h, which is a separate member, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, foreign substances such as metal powder pushed out from the game board mounting portion 501c are removed. , the power supply unit 620c and the like. As a result, foreign matter such as metal powder extruded from the game board mounting portion 501c is prevented from adhering to the power supply board 620, the payout control board 633, and the interface board 635, and the risk of failure of these boards is reduced. can be reduced. In the above description, the projecting portion 501z is provided in front of the ejected ball receiving portion 628, but the projecting portion 630h is provided in front of the power supply unit 620c, the payout control unit 620d, and the interface unit 620e without providing the projecting portion 501z. It may be configured to provide only vertical surfaces.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67 to 74. FIG. FIG. 67 is a front view of a game board in which the game panel and the like are made opaque in a pachinko machine. 68 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 67 viewed from the front right, FIG. 69 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 67 viewed from the front left, and FIG. 70 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. FIG. 71 is a schematic explanatory diagram of routing of wiring from the function display unit on the main control board. 72 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the front, and FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled into main members and viewed from the back. FIG. 74 is a front view of the game board with the game panel and the like made transparent.

The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which game balls B are hit by the player operating the handle 111 of the handle unit 180. As shown in FIG. In the game area 5a, there are a general prize winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion, and a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B. 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a big prize winning port 2005 are provided. Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B is accepted or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, etc. in the game area 5a. It is for playing a game that allows the user to enjoy the driving operation of the handle 111 and the circulation of the game ball B within the game area 5a.

The game board 5 includes a front structural member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 to define the rear end of the game area 5a. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 is provided. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 77, etc.) that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 that is within the game area 5a. In addition, the game board 5 includes a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A game is performed by hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a. and a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 156 and 111, etc.) for controlling contents.

The game board 5 also includes a function display unit 1400 which displays the game status based on control signals from the main control board 1310 and is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side. A drive board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the game panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 are further provided.

An effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and a peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. - 特許庁A drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600 .

The game panel 1100 has a transparent flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000, and holds the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 75, etc.) which is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The drive board unit 1700 is provided in the front unit 2000 and the back unit according to the command from the panel relay board 1710 which relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510. A panel drive board 1720 for driving the decoration board and the drive motor, and a drive board box 1730 containing the panel relay board 1710 and the panel drive board 1720 are provided. The drive board box 1730 is hinge-rotatably attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 on the left side when viewed from the rear, and detachably attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600 on the right side when viewed from the rear.

The table unit 2000 includes a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open to accept the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are the game areas. A first starting port 2002 that is always open to accept the game ball B at different positions in the 5a, a gate part 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, A second starting port 2004 that enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the ordinary lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 A large prize winning opening 2005 is provided, which enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B.例文帳に追加

In addition, the table unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. , a side unit 2200 having two general winning openings 2001 attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting opening unit 2100 in the front view, and a starting unit 2100 which is the lower right corner in the front view in the game area 5a. From the attacker unit 2400, which is attached to the right side of the opening unit 2100 in front view and has one general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005, the starting opening unit 2100, and the side unit 2200 A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a gate portion 2003 is provided in the upper part of the game area 5a, and is attached slightly above the center in the front view in the game area 5a.

The starting port unit 2100 includes a first starting port sensor 2101 for detecting the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 . The attacker unit 2400 includes a general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided therein, and a second opening for detecting the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004. It is provided with a starting hole sensor 2402 and a big winning hole sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 . Further, the center accessory 2500 includes a gate sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003, and a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects illegally acting magnetism.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. and a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600 . In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided with a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 (Fig. 111). ).

The back unit 3000 includes a back first effect unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 and a back second effect unit 3200 attached inside the back box 3010 behind the first back effect unit 3100. , the back third effect unit 3300 attached in the back box 3010 behind the back second effect unit 3200, and the starter unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 attached to the front of the back second effect unit 3200 A back left ball discharge unit 3030 that receives the game ball B received in the winning opening 2001 and releases it downward, and a game received in the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 A back right ball ejection unit 3040 for receiving the ball B and ejecting it downward is provided.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 75(a) is a front perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel of the game board, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the front constituent members and the game panel.

The front structural member 1000 is formed transparent as a whole. The front structural member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and an inner shape that penetrates in the front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape clockwise from the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in a front view, passing through the upper end of the center in the left-right direction in a front view, and extending obliquely upward to the right; The game is played on the inner rail 1002 which is arranged inside the front structural member 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the horizontal direction when viewed from the front to the oblique upper left when viewed from the front, and the right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 when viewed from the front. and an out-guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

In addition, the front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 that is linearly inclined from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000 so that the right end side is slightly higher, and the lower right rail 1004 . from the right end of the front structural member 1000 along the right side of the front structural member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001, the upper portion of which is curved inwardly of the front structural member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail An impact portion 1006 which connects the upper end of the outer rail 1001 and contacts the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 is provided.

The front structural member 1000 is rotatably supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002 and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front structural member 1000 and the front view clock. The backflow prevention member is rotatable only between the open position where it is rotated in the surrounding direction to open the gap with the outer rail 1001, and is biased by a spring (not shown) so as to return to the closed position side. 1007 is provided.

Furthermore, the front structural member 1000 has an out port 1008 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide section 1003 passes through the out port 1008 and is discharged to the rear of the front constituent member 1000 (game panel 1100).

In addition, the front component member 1000 is provided on the outside of the portion near the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially perpendicularly from the lower ends thereof, the lower side of the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outside of the right rail 1005. Each part has a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security concave portion 1009 projects backward from the security cover 170 on the door frame 3. inserted. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is in a complicatedly bent state by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire tries to enter the game area 5a through between the crime prevention cover 170 and the front component member 1000 from the lower front surface of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the crime prevention concave portion 1009. , it is possible to prevent unauthorized tools from entering the game area 5a.

The front structural member 1000 also has a notch portion 1010 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch 1010 is aligned with the notch 1122 of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1010 and the notch pass through the lower full ball path. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

Further, the front structural member 1000 includes a function display unit mounting portion 1011 formed in the upper left corner in a front view, to which the function display unit 1400 is mounted, and a certificate stamp pasting portion 1012 formed in the lower left corner. there is

In addition, the front structural member 1000 is substantially entirely transparent, so that the panel plate 1110 and the like of the game panel 1100 arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front structural member 1000, and the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 includes a flat panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front structural member 1000 and which is made of transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110 is held. and a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front structural member 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

A panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than that of the panel holder, and is the minimum required thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is implanted in the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that In addition, in this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

The panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 recessed upward from the lower end at the lowest position in the game area 5a and corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front structural member 1000 . In addition, a plurality of openings 1112 are formed through the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction for mounting the front unit 2000 thereon.

Although illustration is omitted, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes formed in the form of round holes and short elongated holes penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the upper edge and the lower edge thereof are separated in the left-right direction. and a plurality of engaging stepped portions formed with a thin plate thickness. The positioning holes are for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting projecting pins (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . The engaging step portion is detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with an engaging claw (not shown) or an engaging piece (not shown) of the panel holder 1120 . be.

As shown in FIG. 75, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center accessory 2500 offset to the upper right from the center when viewed from the front. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and in a front view, the width perpendicular to the distribution direction of the game ball B (the circumferential direction of the frame shape) has a plurality of left and lower sides from the center. It has a wide width in which the balls B can be lined up, and has a narrow width in which a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up on the upper side and the right side.

The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder 1120 is made of transparent synthetic resin (for example, thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding stepped portion (not shown) recessed from the front side toward the rear side and having approximately the same size as the panel plate 1110, and the holding stepped portion has a size substantially equivalent to that of the game area 5a. It has a through hole 1121 penetrating in the front-rear direction.

In addition, the panel holder 1120 has a notch portion 1122 that is cut upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. This notch portion 1122 is formed to match the notch portion 1010 of the front component member 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch portion 1010 and the notch portion and penetrates the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full payout passage 610b of the full ball path unit 610 face forward.

Although not shown, the panel holder 1120 includes a plurality of protruding pins protruding forward from the holding stepped portion and inserted into a plurality of positioning holes of the panel plate 1110, and arranged outside the holding stepped portion. The panel plate 1110 has three engaging claws that elastically engage with the engaging stepped portions of the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 that protrudes upward from the lower outer side of the holding stepped portion. and a pair of engaging pieces respectively engaged with the two engaging stepped portions on the lower side of the . The panel holder 1120 engages the engaging stepped portion on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engaging piece from diagonally above the front, and then moves the upper portion of the panel plate 1110 rearward to tilt the upper side and the lower left side. The panel plate 1110 can be detachably attached while being accommodated in the holding stepped portion by elastically engaging the engaging stepped portion of the portion where the panel plate 1110 is held with the engaging claw. At this time, the protruding pins of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes of the panel plate 1110 to position the panel plate 1110 at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120 .

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73 and the like. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long box that is open at the top and front, and the bottom surface is inclined downward toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is notched rearward from the front end at the center of the bottom surface in the left-right direction. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 in the state assembled to the game board 5 from the lower side and the rear side, and the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 , the ejecting portion 1201 is located directly above the ejected ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620 b of the substrate unit 620 of the body frame 4 . As a result, all the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can be received. The ball can be discharged from the discharge part 1201 formed in the bottom to the discharge ball receiving part 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
Main control unit 1300 in game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 . The main control unit 1300 accommodates a main control board 1310 for controlling game content, payout of game balls B, etc., a setting change board 1311 for setting game performance, and the main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311. and a main control board box 1320 that is mounted on the board holder 1200 .

When the main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, when the game board 5 is viewed from behind, the rectangular main control board 1310 that is long in the horizontal direction is the left side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. It is formed and arranged in a size that occupies about four-fifths of the area from the left side to the right side of the area surrounded by the top, right, and bottom sides, and the remaining one-fifth of the area is A square setting change board 1311 is arranged in a corner region where the upper side and the right side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected.

As described above, the outer frame 2 coaxially rotates the main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the main body frame lower hinge portion 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. Since the body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward about the left side in the front view, the body frame upper hinge portion 510 and the body frame lower hinge portion 520 of the body frame 4 are arranged. The left side of the main body frame 4 in the front view in the up-down direction is the shaft support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4, and the right side of the main body frame 4 in the up-down direction on the opposite side is the open side of the main body frame 4. Become. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4, while the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivotal support side of the main body frame 4 ( A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the closed side).

Further, the rear cover 640 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 as described above. It is a thing. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 , the main control board box 1320 is covered with the back cover 640 . As described above, the back cover 640 has its right side in front view attached to the right end of the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 in front view so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically, and its left side in front view Since it is attached to the rear cover mounting portion 551i of the base 551 and the rear cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600, the right side of the front view becomes the pivotal support side (closed side) of the rear cover 640. The left side in the front view, which is the opposite side, is the open side of the back cover 640 . That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the back cover 640, whereas the back cover is opened. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side.

In this embodiment, green is used as the resist of the main control board 1310, and the entire surface (mounting surface) and the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are solidly coated with green resist except for various land patterns. On the other hand, as the resist of the setting change board 1311, a white color different from that of the resist of the main control board 1310 is adopted, and the entire surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting board 1311 are white. It is solidly coated with resist except for various land patterns.

Here, the use of a color different from the color used as the resist of the main control board 1310 as the resist of the setting change board 1311 will be described. Both the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are boards housed in the main control board box 1320 . The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game (controls the content of the game, the payout of the game ball B, etc.) and is highly important for crime prevention. Awareness about is very high. Therefore, it is not necessary to draw attention to the fact that this board is the main control board 1310 by distinguishing it from other boards. On the other hand, since the setting change board 1311 is a board having a completely new function in the pachinko machine 1 that can set the game performance, it is accommodated in the main control board box 1320, but it is not important for crime prevention. Awareness of the fact that it is an expensive substrate is extremely low. Therefore, it is necessary to draw attention to the fact that this board is the setting change board 1311, distinguishing it from other boards.

Therefore, in this embodiment, green, which is generally used as a substrate resist, is adopted as the resist of the main control board 1310, and white, which is different from the color adopted as the resist of the main control board 1310, is adopted as the resist of the setting change board 1311. adopted. As a result, among the boards housed in the main control board box 1320, the setting change board 1311 stands out more than the main control board 1310, and the setting change board 1311 is also highly important in terms of crime prevention in addition to the main control board 1310. It can contribute to raising awareness of the fact that it is a substrate.

In this embodiment described above, the resist of the setting change board 1311 is white, which is different from the green used as the resist of the main control board 1310. However, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be distinguished. If possible, it may be yellow, red, blue, transparent, and the like.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, as the resist of the setting change board 1311, a white color different from the green used as the resist of the main control board 1310 is used. The surface (mounting surface) and/or the back surface (solder surface) may be printed in white to cover almost the entirety of the surface (mounting surface) and/or in black, blue, yellow, or red. You may print.

Next, the main control board box 1320 that accommodates the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 will be described. The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body and a base body. The cover body and the base body are made of polycarbonate resin and molded transparently. A main control board 1310 and a setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the base body are molded transparently from polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 and setting change board 1311 (whether or not unauthorized alteration has been made, or whether or not an unauthorized IC is mounted) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. In addition, the main control board box 1320 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the base body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the main In order to open the control board box 1320, its sealing mechanism must be destroyed, and the opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left behind. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be discovered, and the deterrence against tampering with the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 is enhanced. The cover body is formed with a plurality of vent holes for heat radiation through which the air inside the main control board box 1320 can be released to the outside air.

A main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 , the peripheral control board 1510 and the setting change board 1311 . In addition, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a first starting opening sensor 2101, a gate sensor 2506, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a big winning opening sensor 2403, a starting opening solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, and a general winning opening sensor. 2401, the general prize-winning sensor 3001, the magnetic sensor 2470, the vibration sensor 3005, and the outlet sensor 3032 are connected.

The setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is provided with a setting key switch 1311a capable of switching the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 and confirming the setting values. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected (inter-board connection) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 (connection between the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 and the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 is connected by a harness). The harness (electrical wiring) absorbs (relieves) the force associated with the operation of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting change board 1311 to the main control board 1310 is connected electrically. can be difficult to transmit to). The signal from the setting key switch 1311a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 by this connector connection (connection between boards). Note that connector connections, which are connections between boards, include connection using a normal connector that does not have a floating mechanism and connection using a special connector that has a floating mechanism. A normal connector that does not have a floating mechanism consists of a socket and a plug, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the plug into the socket. The structure is such that there is absolutely no amount of movement in the direction (for example, vertical direction) relative to the direction in which the plug is inserted and pushed. On the other hand, a special connector with a floating mechanism consists of a socket and a plug. At the time of mating, it is possible to absorb an error (fitting axis misalignment) that occurs when the socket is pushed in by moving the socket in a predetermined distance range in a direction (for example, vertical direction) perpendicular to the direction in which the socket is inserted and pushed in. It has a structure. In this embodiment, a normal connector without a floating mechanism is used as a connector connection between boards, but a special connector with a floating mechanism may be used.

The setting change board 1311 is formed in a square shape with one side having a distance dimension approximately one-fifth of the horizontal distance dimension of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 , and the upper side of the setting change board 1311 being the main control board 1310 . is arranged on the same straight line as the upper side of the main control board 1310, and the lower side thereof is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310 respectively.

The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311 at the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction. , at a position corresponding to the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 . A setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated is arranged at the center point of intersection of the center lines of the square setting change board 1311 in the vertical and horizontal directions. On the main control board 1310, a setting change permission lamp 1310z that can emit a single color (for example, red) is arranged above the center line of the setting change board 1311 in the horizontal direction and near the connector MSCN. Above the center line of the main control board 1310 and near the connector MSCN, a setting display 1310g composed of a single 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) is arranged. A base monitor 1310h composed of six 7-segment LED displays with decimal points (so-called dots) arranged in a row from the center toward the right side is arranged below.

In this embodiment, the position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion opening formed on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a (for example, the longitudinal direction of the insertion opening having a rectangular shape is along the vertical direction). position), the setting key switch 1311a is turned off as an initial position. When the setting key cylinder is at the initial position, the setting key can be inserted into the insertion opening and can be pulled out from the insertion opening. In this embodiment, the back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 is detached from the pachinko machine 1 for some reason, and the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening. On the other hand, even if the main body frame 4 is closed, the member of the other pachinko machine (or the member of the island facility of the game hall) arranged opposite to the island facility of the game hall and the setting key do not interfere with each other. The distance dimension in the depth direction of the setting key switch 1311a is adopted so as not to damage it.

The setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it on. to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . In addition, the setting key cylinder is moved so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key is turned ON to the original position (ie, the setting key cylinder rotation position where the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by turning it counterclockwise by 60 degrees and turning it off. This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 .

The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a corresponds to the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, although it is exposed through the opening formed in the cover of the corresponding main control board box 1320. In order to prevent a wire or the like from entering the "gap" formed in the opening and altering the setting change board 1311 and the main control board 1310, a wire penetration prevention portion is molded in the cover body for the opening. It is a structure that is

The setting key switch 1311a accommodates a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated by a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing. A surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder is formed of non-conductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length. The front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing is arranged on the same plane as the front surface of the setting key cylinder, which is provided with an insertion opening for inserting the setting key. The surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the case (or rectangular) is arranged substantially flush with the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. A state in which the setting key cylinder is accommodated in a cylindrical (or rectangular) metallic housing is a state in which the cylindrical (or rectangular) metallic housing and the setting key cylinder are electrically connected. It has become.

The setting key switch 1311a is provided in the setting key cylinder with a circuit capable of extracting (outputting) a signal indicating whether the setting key switch 1311a is ON or OFF. , the signal can be taken out (output) from a pair of opposing lead terminals projecting from the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. The circuit provided in the setting key cylinder and the pair of lead terminals facing each other are electrically insulated from the setting key cylinder, and are also electrically connected to the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a. effectively insulated.

A pair of opposing lead terminals protruding from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder and a pair of lead terminals facing each other projecting from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder are provided from the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a for a predetermined length at a 90-degree rotation angle. A pair of projecting opposing mounting plate pieces are formed. The pair of mounting plate pieces facing each other pass through mounting slots formed in the setting change board 1311, respectively, and are soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a to the setting change board 1311. can be fixed to

In addition, as described above, the insertion port for inserting the setting key is provided on the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is arranged flush with the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 when the setting change board 1311 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320. That is, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a does not protrude outward from the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. As shown in FIG.

As a result, when the worker mounts the game board 5 on the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 installed on the island facility of the game hall, first, the operator temporarily places the game board 5 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it. Therefore, when the temporarily placed game board 5 accidentally hits the game board 5 and overturns, the setting key switch 1311a can be prevented from colliding with the floor and being damaged. Also, when the game board 5 is removed from the main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the temporarily placed game board 5 is temporarily placed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it. It is possible to prevent the setting key switch 1311a from colliding with the floor and being damaged when the worker's leg accidentally strikes the game board 5 during work and falls.

The setting display 1310g and the base monitor 1310h are housed in the internal space formed by the cover and the base and cannot be touched at all. , the set value displayed by the setting display 1310g and the number of balls displayed by the base monitor 1310h can be visually recognized through the cover.

In order to prevent unauthorized alteration, the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a and the wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key switch 1311a OFF signal are set. They are formed so as not to come close to each other (at a distance from each other) on the change board 1311, and the connection to the terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 (the terminal of the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310) is also formed at a distance. The main control board 1310 also has a wiring pattern for transmitting various signals from the setting key switch 1311a (that is, a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a, and a wiring pattern for transmitting the setting key ON signal of the setting key switch 1311a. The wiring pattern for transmitting the signal of ) is also formed so as not to approach each other (spaced apart from each other), and the wiring pattern for transmitting the signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 are also formed so as not to come close to each other (spaced apart from each other).

Here, the procedure up to operating the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 will be briefly described. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4 as described above. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the support side (closed side). Further, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board box 1320 is covered with the rear cover 640 as described above. In addition, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the back cover 640, whereas the back cover is opened. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the side. That is, when the back cover 640 is opened, the back cover open side of the back cover 640 is the pivotal support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4 , so the main body frame 4 is made larger than the outer frame 2 (approximately 90 degrees), the open side of the back cover 640 interferes with the outer frame 2 and the back cover 640 covering the rear side of the game board 5 cannot be opened. In other words, a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a to operate the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 simply opens the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 by a gap enough to insert his or her arm. Even if an attempt is made to access the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the back cover 640 cannot be opened. In other words, a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 first needs to open the back cover 640 from covering the back side of the game board 5. It is necessary to open the body frame 4 largely (approximately 90 degrees).

Since the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the pivotal support side (closed side) of the main body frame 4 in this way, compared to the case where the setting change board 1311 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4, the setting change board 1311 When a fraudulent person who attempts to illegally access the setting key switch 1311a uses an illegal tool such as a piano wire or a wire, the opening side of the main body frame 4 between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 Therefore, even if an illegal tool is inserted and fed, the path from the open side of the body frame 4 to the setting key switch 1311a becomes long, and the illegal tool must be fed deeply. As a result, the operation time during which an illegal tool is fed into the setting key switch 1311a is also lengthened, so that such fraudulent acts can be easily discovered by a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall.

In addition, since the main control board box 1320 is covered with the back cover 640, the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is covered with the back cover 640. there is As a result, an unauthorized person who attempts to illegally access the setting key switches 1311a of the setting change board 1311 can use an illegal tool such as a piano wire or wire to break the body frame between the outer frame 2 and the body frame 4. Even if an unauthorized tool is inserted and fed from the open side of 4, the unauthorized tool is blocked by the back cover 640 before it reaches the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. It is possible to prevent the switch 1311a from being inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder.

Further, the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is provided with an insertion port for inserting the setting key, and the insertion port of the setting key cylinder is covered with the back cover 640. In order to access the setting key switches 1311a of the setting change board 1311, it is necessary to open the back cover 640. FIG. In order to open the back cover 640, it is necessary to open the body frame 4 largely (approximately 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2. FIG. Accompanied by such a plurality of operations, the security of access to the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 can be enhanced, thereby increasing the deterrence against fraudulent use of an unauthorized tool.

As described above, the rear cover 640 is attached so that its left side in front view is pivotably supported by the rear cover mounting portion 551i of the dispensing base 551 and the rear cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-tank ball path unit 600 so as to be openable and closable. A lock screw 642 is screwed into the back cover mounting portion 601 a to fix the back cover 640 . is arranged on the pivotal support side (closed side) of the body frame 4, which is opposite to the open side of the body frame 4. Therefore, a fraudulent person who attempts to illegally access the setting key switches 1311a of the setting change board 1311 inserts an illegal tool between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the open side of the main body frame 4. Even if it is fed in, the path from the open side of the body frame 4 to the locking screw 642 of the back cover 640 becomes long, so it is necessary to feed the unauthorized tool deeply. In this respect as well, since the operation time during which an unauthorized tool is fed into the locking screw 642 is longer, it is possible to make it easier for a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall to discover such fraudulent acts, and the setting change board. By increasing the security of access to the setting key switch 1311a of 1311, it is possible to increase the deterrence against fraudulent actions using illegal tools.

The setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switches 1311a are arranged is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 together with the main control board 1310, and the main control board box 1320 is attached to the rear side of the board holder 1200 of the game board 5. ing. On the other hand, the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is arranged is accommodated in the payout control board box 632, and this payout control board box 632 is located behind the power supply board cover 631 in the board unit 620 of the body frame 4. installed on the side. In this way, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are separated from each other by arranging the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z on separate substrates, and by making the objects to which the substrates are attached different. can be done. If the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are collectively arranged on one board, only one board needs to be tampered with, which is not preferable in terms of crime prevention. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on separate substrates, and the objects to which the substrates are attached are also different. Security against the clear button 633z is enhanced.

It should be noted that the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) performs game preparation control and game control (controls the game following the game preparation control). The game preparation control is performed in the first step (step S14 in the main control side power-on processing described later) in which the setting value can be changed based on the signal from the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311. Judgment, processing of step S16A), and following this first step, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 (here, it functions as a setting switching button for selecting and switching the set value.) and a second step (determination in step S216 and processing in step S218 in setting change processing to be described later) in which a setting value can be selected and switched based on. Following the game preparation control, the game control consists of a main control side main process in a main control side power-on process described later, a timer interrupt process on the main control side described later, and the like.

Although it is possible to improve such security, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on separate substrates, and the objects to which the substrates are attached are also different. Since the switch 1311a is housed in the main control board box 1320, there is no need to tell where the setting key switch 1311a is located. It may be difficult for staff members such as the store manager of the game hall and the staff of the game hall to know whether or not they are arranged because they may be inexperienced.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. Specifically, the cover body of the main control board box 1320 is pasted with a sticker that indicates the location of the RWM clear button 633z. This sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet, and on this rectangular sheet, for example, "RWM clear button (setting switching button) is on the payout control board" is printed in red translucent characters (height: 7mm). ing. As a result, the location of the RWM clear button 633z (setting switching button) can be communicated to the store manager of the game hall, the store clerk of the game hall, and other staff members. Since the RWM clear button 633z can be easily found when operating the RWM clear button 633z, the user does not get dizzy. Therefore, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

It should be noted that even if this sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320, the visibility of the main control board 1310 is not obstructed. Also, a symbol such as an arrow may be used instead of the characters printed on the rectangular sheet of the sticker.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. When molding the cover body of the board box 1320, concave characters or convex characters may be molded together (that is, the cover body and the characters may be integrally molded). . Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. On the surface (mounting surface) of the board 1311, characters (height: 7 mm) "The RWM clear button (setting switching button) is on the payout control board" may be printed in white by silk printing. Characters (height: 7 mm) "RWM clear button (setting switching button)" may be printed on the surface (mounting surface) in white by silk printing. In addition, the color of silk printing may be the same color, or may be different colors. Also, a symbol such as an arrow may be used instead of silk-printed characters. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. The character portion may be masked on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate 1311, and the character (height: 7 mm) may be formed with a resist as "RWM clear button (setting switching button) is on the payout control board". A character portion may be masked on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 633, and a blank character (height: 7 mm) "RWM clear button (setting switching button)" may be formed with a resist. The colors of the resist may be the same color, but it is preferable to use different colors so that the substrates can be distinguished. In addition, instead of the characters, a character such as an arrow may be masked. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. A similar sticker (this sticker is a transparent rectangular sheet, and this rectangular sheet has, for example, red translucent characters (high (width: 7 mm), and "RWM clear button (setting switching button) is on the payout control board" is printed.), or red translucent on the surface (mounting surface) of the payout control board 633 A transparent rectangular sheet labeled "RWM clear button (setting switching button)" with letters (height: 7 mm) may be attached. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. The position of the button 633z may be indicated by an announcement sound from various speakers, or an announcement image may be displayed on the effect display device 1600. FIG. Specifically, for example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, an attendant such as a store manager of the game hall or a store clerk of the game hall operates the effect operation section 301 of the effect operation unit 300 to display the effect display device 1600. Various setting screens are displayed, and an item regarding the arrangement location of the RWM clear button 633z (setting switching button) is selected. As a result, an announcement voice saying "The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also serves as a setting switching button." An announcement image (which may be photographed) is displayed on the effect display device 1600 to convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. After grasping the arrangement location of the RWM clear button 633z from such announcement voices and announcement images, the staff such as the manager of the game hall and the store clerk of the game hall turn off the power of the pachinko machine 1 to change the setting value. can be done smoothly. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker was affixed to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. When changing the setting of , an announcement voice may be played from various speakers to indicate where the RWM clear button 633z, which also functions as a setting switching button, is arranged. Specifically, for example, by transmitting a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in which the setting value can be changed and determined, the peripheral Tells where the RWM clear button 633z is located by the control of the control board 1510 ``The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. Please change the value." is repeated from various speakers. When the main control MPU 1310a completes the setting change process, it transmits a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, whereby the peripheral control board 1510 stops the announcement sound and proceeds with various processes based on the received predetermined command. It will be done. Even with this configuration, the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be easily known. It should be noted that, following such an announcement sound, an announcement sound that tells how to operate the setting keys after the setting values are determined may be played from various speakers. Also, while the announcement sound is playing, the effect display device 1600 may display an image of "setting".

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 as a notation that serves as location information that can convey the location of the RWM clear button 633z. When changing the setting of , an announcement voice may be played from various speakers to indicate where the RWM clear button 633z, which also functions as a setting switching button, is arranged. Specifically, for example, by transmitting a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on and the main control MPU 1310a performs a setting change process in which the setting value can be changed and determined, the peripheral Tells where the RWM clear button 633z is located by the control of the control board 1510 ``The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. Please change the value." is repeated from various speakers. This eliminates the need to search for the seal attached to the cover body of main control board box 1320 . Although such an announcement sound is played repeatedly from various speakers, assuming that the contents of the announcement sound may be overlooked, a sticker is attached to the cover body of the main control board box 1320 before the next announcement sound starts to flow. , the location of the RWM clear button 633z can be known. In addition to the announcement voice, "The RWM clear button is on the payout control board. The RWM clear button also serves as a setting switching button. Please operate the RWM clear button to change the setting value." You may also make it guide the content which tells the place where the sticker which shows the location of a button is stuck. When the RWM clear button is operated, the main control MPU 1310a transmits a predetermined command to the peripheral control board 1510, whereby the peripheral control board 1510 stops the announcement sound. Even if the person who changes the setting value becomes accustomed to changing the setting value by the work and it is annoying, if the RWM clear button is operated immediately after starting the work, this will be a trigger. , the announcement sound can be promptly stopped, and even if it is unavoidable that the work needs to be done after the game hall opens for business, the work can be started so as not to cause inconvenience to the players. If the RWM clear button is operated immediately, the announcement sound can be quickly stopped using this as a trigger. It should be noted that, following such an announcement sound, an announcement sound that tells how to operate the setting keys after the setting values are determined may be played from various speakers. Also, while the announcement sound is playing, the effect display device 1600 may display an image of "setting".

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z are arranged on separate substrates, and the substrates are attached to different objects. were spaced apart, but if crime prevention can be enhanced, a setting key switch 1311a and a setting switching button (in this case, from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 to the setting switching button functions are removed.) can be aggregated and arranged. For example, the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 have the same vertical distance as the right and left sides of the main control board 1310, and the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 have the same vertical distance as the main control board 1310. A center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310 and a center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the setting change board 1311 , have matching shapes. That is, the setting change board 1311 has a rectangular shape elongated in the vertical direction. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged along the left side of the setting change board 1311 so that the center of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is on the center line. Along the right side of the control board 1310, the center position of the distance dimension in the vertical direction is arranged on the center line. Below the center line of the setting change board 1311 and near the lower side of the setting change board 1311, a setting key switch 1311a having a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated is arranged. A setting switching button having a pressing operation part is arranged above the center line and near the upper side of the setting change board 1311 . That is, on the same board, the setting change board 1311, the setting key switches 1311a are arranged near the bottom side, while the setting switching buttons are arranged near the top side and are spaced apart from each other. In this way, when the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button are separately arranged on the same substrate, the setting key switch 1311a and the setting switching button are integrated on one substrate. are placed close to each other and arranged separately, it is difficult to make unauthorized modifications. Even if it is a thing, there is a case where crime prevention can be improved.

Next, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, and the setting indicator 1310g of the main control board 1310 will be briefly described. Here, first, the case of changing setting values will be briefly described, and the case of displaying the current setting values for confirmation will be briefly described. In addition, since the setting key is an important key that can be used not only to change the setting value but also to check the current setting value, etc., only a limited number of people, including the manager of the game hall, can possess it. Permitted and limited to 2-3 people.

When changing the settings of the set values, when power is restored to the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power failure (momentary power failure that occurs momentarily), the main frame against the outer frame 2 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to be turned ON. It is necessary that the "predetermined set value change permission condition" that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON and the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated is established. In other words, the person who actually changes the setting value must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then check the outer frame 2. After the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn on the setting key switch 1311a. is turned on, and then the power switch 630a is operated while operating the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. FIG.

A person who changes the setting values must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2. Then, the setting key is inserted into the opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn on the setting key switch 1311a. is set key ON. Subsequently, while operating the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, the power switch 630a is operated to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a sets the current setting value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (setting value 1 to setting value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON). value) is displayed on the setting indicator 1310g, and the setting change permission lamp 1310z is switched from the off state to the on state.

A person who changes the setting of the set value presses the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, and the detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z is sent from the payout control board 633 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. is input to Every time the person who changes the setting of the setting value presses the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, the main control MPU 1310a increases the current setting value by 1 based on the detection signal from the RWM clear button 633z. When it reaches the set value 6, which is the maximum value, it returns to the set value 1, which is the initial value, increases again by 1, and performs control to display the set value on the setting display 1310g.

When determining a set value, a person who changes the setting of the set value must move the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on). It is rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return to the turning position of the setting key cylinder to be turned off, and is turned off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a stores the setting value determined by changing the setting in a specific area of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, and hides the setting value from the state where it is displayed on the setting display 1310g. state, and switches from the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1310z is lit to the state in which it is extinguished.

A person who changes the setting value pulls out the setting key from the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and changes the setting value. to complete.

When confirming and displaying the set values currently set, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily), the outer frame 2 When the main body frame 4 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn ON. The "predetermined setting value display permission condition" must be satisfied that the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated. In other words, the person who actually confirms and displays the setting values that are currently set must first confirm that the power of the pachinko machine 1 is not turned on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then The main body frame 4 is opened from the frame 2, and then the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a and turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it on. , the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a without operating the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z.

The person who confirms and displays the currently set setting value must first confirm that the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), and then Then, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion opening of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to turn it on. , the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Subsequently, the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a without operating the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. As a result, a setting key ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . The main control MPU 1310a sets the current setting value stored in the specific area of the built-in RAM (setting value 1 to setting value 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON). value) is displayed on the setting display 1310g. At this time, the state in which the setting change permission lamp 1310z is turned off is maintained. Correspondingly, the setting value is not changed at all, nor is the content displayed on the setting display 1310g.

After confirming the currently set value, the person who confirms and displays the set value currently set must move the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position, which is the original position. The setting key switch 1311a is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder for turning off the setting key switch 1311a) to turn it off. This setting key OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the main control MPU 1310a switches the setting display 1310g from displaying the setting value to not displaying the setting value.

A person who confirms and displays the set value currently set pulls out the setting key from the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, closes the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and displays the current setting. Complete the task of confirming the setting value displayed.

It should be noted that, as described above, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is that when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs instantaneously), the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to be turned on. It is necessary that the setting key is ON and that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. When the power is turned on or when the power is restored after power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily), the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a The setting key is inserted into the insertion opening, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to be turned ON, thereby turning the setting key ON and operating the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. It is necessary that the In this way, the predetermined setting value change permission condition and the predetermined setting value display permission condition are set when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when the power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily). When the power is restored, the body frame 4 is released from the outer frame 2, the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees. There is a common requirement in that the setting key is turned on by being turned on and turned on. When the power is restored after the momentary power failure), the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated", whereas the predetermined setting value display permission condition is Requires that "the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or when power is restored after a power failure (momentary power failure that occurs momentarily)". The difference is that

Also, there are two types of setting key switches: a lead type and a surface mounting type (so-called SMD type). The setting key switch 1311a in this embodiment is basically of a lead type. The setting key switch 1311a has an operation in which the setting key is inserted into and removed from the insertion port. As a result, the substrate on which the setting key switch 1311a is provided is bent by the force associated with this operation. In the lead type, each lead of the setting key switch is arranged inside the outline of the setting key switch and soldered to the rear surface (solder surface) of the board. On the other hand, in the SMD type, each lead of the setting key switch is arranged to protrude outward from the outline of the setting key switch and is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the board.

As a result, with the lead type, if the setting key is caught in the insertion port when the setting key is pulled out from the insertion port, each lead of the setting key switch is arranged inside the outer shape of the setting key switch and the back side of the board ( Since the setting key switch is soldered to the surface (solder surface), compared to the SMD type where the lead of the setting key switch is arranged to protrude toward the outer shape and is soldered to the surface (mounting surface) of the board, the setting key switch The load applied to the part where each lead is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the board increases, and this load acts strongly from the back surface (solder surface) of the board toward the front surface (mounting surface), causing the board itself to bend significantly. becomes. On the other hand, in the SMD type, even if the setting key is caught in the insertion port when the setting key is pulled out from the insertion port, each lead of the setting key switch protrudes outward from the outer shape of the setting key switch. Lead type in which each lead of the setting key switch is placed inside the outer shape of the setting key switch and soldered to the back side (solder side) of the board. The load on the part where each lead of the setting key switch is soldered to the front surface (mounting surface) of the board is smaller than that of the other model, and this load is transferred from the back surface (solder surface) to the front surface (mounting surface) of the board. The substrate itself is hard to bend even when working toward it.

Also, if the board itself bends greatly due to external force acting on the board, there is a concern that the solder part where the SMD type electronic parts are soldered will peel off due to the large peeling load of the land pattern. When using , it is desirable to mount it on a board on which SMD type electronic components are not mounted. In addition, the peeling load of the wiring pattern and land pattern at the soldered part where each lead part of the setting key switch is soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the board is smaller than that of the SMD type, and the solder part of the setting key switch Considering the strength of the solder portion, it is desirable to use a lead type setting key switch because it can be made strong against peeling.

Therefore, in this embodiment, basically, a reed type switch is adopted as the setting key switch 1311a. In this embodiment, lead-type electronic components are mounted on the setting change board 1311 instead of SMD-type electronic components. Even if the setting key is caught in the insertion port when the setting key is pulled out from the insertion port and the board itself is greatly bent as described above, the leads soldered to the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 are not used. There is no risk that other electronic components of the type will come off from the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is connected (connected between boards) to the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 as described above. may be electrically connected via a harness), the signal from the setting key switch 1311 a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 .

A rectangular main control board 1310 elongated in the left-right direction of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 extends from the left side to the right side of the area surrounded by the left, top, right and bottom sides of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. The upper side and the right side of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 are connected to the remaining one-fifth area. A square setting change board 1311 is arranged in the corner area. The setting change board 1311 is formed in a square shape with one side having a distance dimension approximately one-fifth of the lateral distance dimension of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. Compared with the shape of the main control board 1310, it is small. In this embodiment, a lead-type setting key switch 1311a is mounted on the square setting change board 1311 having such a small shape. Even if the board itself bends in , or if the setting key gets caught in the insertion slot when the setting key is pulled out from the insertion slot of the setting key switch 1311a and the board itself bends, the setting change board 1311 is formed on a small board. As a result, the magnitude of deflection can be kept smaller than that of the main control board 1310 . As a result, the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 are brought into contact with the cover body and base body of the main control board box 1320 at positions corresponding to the setting change board 1311 to prevent bending. Since there is no need to provide ribs that can be used to control the setting key switch 1311a, screw holes can be provided in the setting change board 1311 around the position where the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, and the setting change board 1311 can be accommodated in the transparent main control board box 1320. This can contribute to the visibility of the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 .

As described above, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is of the lead type and is arranged on the setting change board 1311, which is separate from the main control board 1310, so that the setting value can be changed. The main control board 1310 does not bend even if the setting change board 1311 bends as a result of inserting and removing the setting key from the insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from bending due to the operation of the lead type setting key switch 1311a.

On the other hand, in place of the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a is arranged on one of the boards such as the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, and the power supply board 630. When an SMD type electronic component is mounted on the board, instead of the lead type setting key switch 1311a, an SMD type switch is adopted, mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board, and temporarily inserted. Even if the setting key is caught in the insertion opening when the setting key is pulled out from the opening, the board itself does not easily bend as described above. There is no risk of peeling off from the surface (mounting surface) of the

Here, to briefly explain the set value, the "set value" is the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or a small hit or not, in addition to the probability It is possible to change the probability for lottery determination when transitioning to time, the allocation rate to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc. The probability (the degree of advantage) of increasing the number of game balls that can be played is set in advance. In the present embodiment, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance as set values. A probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player is set in advance. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a big hit determination table that defines the ratio of the big hit determination value indicating that the big win has been won, A big hit pattern determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the decision, a small hit determination table that defines the ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that the small win has been won, and a ratio of the determination value of the determination value of the small hit pattern Select a small hit pattern determination table, a normal transition determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the transition determination from the probability variation to the normal time, etc.), or use various distribution rates associated with the set value Various tables (for example, a sorting table that defines a sorting time, a block that manages driving of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) is selected. In various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with set values, various determination values are allocated at predetermined ratios. Various tables used for various lottery determinations are set so that at least some values differ from each other, and various tables used for various sorting rates are set so that at least some values differ from each other. The value may differ based on the relationship between the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of one electric drive source and the table corresponding to the block managing the drive of another electric drive source. Some are set to In addition, as the set values described above, six set values (integers) ranging from set value 1 to set value 6 were used, but a smaller range may be used, or a larger range may be used. can be anything. For example, four setting values (integers) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 4 may be used, or eight setting values (integer) ranging from setting value 1 to setting value 8 may be used.

As described above, the setting display 1310g not only displays the set values, but also checks the contents of the internal RAM when the main control MPU 1310a restores power to determine whether or not there is an abnormality. If it is determined that there is an abnormality, and if the main control side power-off processing has not ended normally when the power is turned off, there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the internal RAM (or it is unreliable). is not possible), an error is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

Next, the base monitor 1310h will be briefly described. The base monitor 1310h collects game balls launched into the game area 5a through an out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5. The number of game balls is displayed. Of the game balls launched into the game area 5a, the game balls collected by the outlet 1008 are detected by the outlet sensor 3032, and this detection signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the panel relay board 1710.

The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the outlet 1008, stores the counting result (total number) in a specific area of the built-in RAM, and displays it on the base monitor 1310h. It's becoming

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned on by turning the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it on. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is shifted from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, setting The key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the key switch 1311a to the turning position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the key switch 1311a. , this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the information for transmitting the setting key ON and OFF is serially output to the outside as serial information. The setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a serial output circuit capable of controlling the setting. Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this serial output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311, but may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 633 instead. . When the serial information serially output from this serial output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a determines which of the setting keys are ON and OFF based on the received serial information. It is possible to determine which one is transmitted (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a serial circuit may be described as "setting key modification (1)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it on. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is shifted from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, setting The key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the key switch 1311a to the turning position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the key switch 1311a. , This OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310. However, the information for transmitting the setting key ON and OFF can be output to the outside as a pulse signal. The setting key switch 1311a may be provided with a pulse output circuit capable of Thereby, security can be improved with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a provided with this pulse output circuit is provided on the setting change board 1311, but may be provided on the main control board 1310 or the payout control board 633 instead. . The pulse signal output from the pulse output circuit has a pulse width of 1 ms when the information indicates that the setting key is ON, and a pulse width of 5 ms when the information indicates that the key is OFF. . When the pulse signal output from this pulse output circuit is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a selects one of the setting key ON and OFF from the input pulse signal. , , or (the mode of the setting key switch 1311a having a pulse output circuit may be described as "setting key modification (2)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it on. An ON signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, and the setting key switch 1311a is shifted from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the initial position (that is, setting The key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the key switch 1311a to the turning position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the key switch 1311a. , this OFF signal is input from the setting change board 1311 to the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, but the voltage level of the setting key ON signal and the voltage level of the OFF signal are Between the substrates from the substrate 1311 to the main control substrate 1310, an intermediate potential (for example, a potential of 2 V to 3 V in the range of 0 V to 5 V) is used, and a comparator circuit is provided in the main control substrate 1310 to The main control MPU 1310a may determine ON/OFF of the setting key ON signal and ON/OFF of the OFF signal by inputting the comparison result from the above to the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, it is possible to improve security with respect to the signal from the setting key switch 1311a (the aspect of the setting key switch using an intermediate potential is sometimes referred to as "setting key modification (3)").

In the above-described embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is shifted from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON to the original position (that is, the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF). The setting key switch 1311a can be turned off by rotating it 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return it to the rotational position of ) and then turning it off. 1310, the setting key switch 1311a may be provided on the main control board 1310 (the mode of the setting key switch is referred to as "setting key modification (4)"). sometimes referred to as).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the internal space of the main control board box 1320 composed of the cover body and the base body. It may be housed in a body setting change board box and arranged around or adjacent to the main control board box 1320 . In the main control board box 1320, the cover body and the base body are crimped by a one-way screw or the like of the crimping portion. This crimping part is a sealing mechanism, and has a plurality of crimping parts. The main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping the cover body and the base body with a one-way screw or the like of the crimping part using one sealing mechanism. It is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism. That is, unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed, the cover cannot be removed from the base. Such a structure of the main control board box 1320 can also be applied to the structure of the setting change board box. In this case, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the press operation portion of the enter key button are exposed through openings formed in the cover body of the main control board box 1320 corresponding thereto. It is possible to modify the setting change board 1311 by inserting a wire or the like from the "gap" formed between the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and the pressing operation portion of the enter key button and the corresponding opening. In order to prevent this, a structure is adopted in which a wire penetration prevention portion is molded in the cover body with respect to the opening. It should be noted that unlike the structure of the main control board box 1320 described above, the configuration of the setting change board box is such that the cover body can be opened or closed from the base body. A setting change board cover open/close switch capable of detecting opening of the cover may be provided. In this case, the detection signal from the setting change board cover opening/closing switch may be directly input to the main control board 1310, or (indirectly) input to the main control board 1310 via the setting change board 1311. may be configured to be Based on the detection signal from the open/close switch for the setting change board cover, the case where the cover is released from the base can be included in the predetermined setting value change permission conditions (the setting change board box This aspect may be described as “setting key modification (5)”).

In addition, it is also possible to adopt a mode in which one of the above-described modification examples (1) to (5) of the setting keys is selected and combined as appropriate (the mode of selection and combination of the modification examples is referred to as "Modification example (6) of the setting key"). ”).

In addition, in the above-mentioned setting value, in addition to the probability for lottery determination whether it is a big hit or not, and the probability for lottery determination whether it is a small hit, for lottery determination when shifting from probability variable time to normal time It is possible to change the probability of , the rate of distribution to areas that are advantageous to the player, etc., which is advantageous to the player possible) probability (degree of advantage) is set in advance. In the present embodiment, set value 1, set value 2, set value 3, set value 4, set value 5, and set value 6 are prepared in advance as set values. A probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player is set in advance. By the way, although the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment has a plurality of set values ranging from set value 1 to set value 6, other pachinko machines have a probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player. Some have a single preset value. That is, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, which has a game specification in which the probability of being advantageous to the player (the degree of advantage) exists as a plurality of set values in advance and requires setting changes, is advantageous to the player. There are game specifications in which only a single set value of the probability (advantage degree) exists in advance and no setting change is required. However, if the hardware configuration of the main control board 1310 is changed according to such game specifications and the hardware configuration of the setting change board 1311 is changed or not used, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 depends on the game specifications, the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 have similar or different hardware configurations depending on the game specifications. Therefore, it is desired that the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 can be used in common without depending on the game specifications, that is, without changing the design of the hardware configuration.

For example, in a game specification in which there is only a single set value in advance for the probability (advantage degree) of being advantageous to the player and there is no need to change the setting, the probability (advantage degree) that the set value is advantageous to the player Since there is no need to use it as a can be done.

For example, after the main control MPU 1310a clears a predetermined area of its built-in RAM (an area excluding a specific area out of all areas of the RAM), it is possible to set a plurality of actual machine confirmation operation patterns (after clearing the RAM It can be used as a setting value that allows variation in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1). In this case, the set value 1 is set to "all operations (movable bodies (role Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 1 that specifies "movement of object (object), lighting of light emitter)" is assigned, and real machine confirmation operation pattern 2 that specifies "movable object (character object) operation" is assigned as setting value 2, and set Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 3 that specifies "illumination of light emitting body" is assigned as value 3, and detailed operation of movable body (character object) (variable movement speed, movement over the entire operation area, other An actual machine confirmation operation pattern 4 that specifies "interference check with structures and other movable bodies (accessories), operation order with other movable bodies (accessories)" is assigned, and the setting value 5 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 5 that specifies "lighting of light emitters per port (lighting of light emitters by predetermined output port units (that is, each output port) of the main control MPU 1310a)" is assigned, and set value 6 is " Actual machine confirmation operation pattern 6 specifying "no operation" is assigned (the mode of change setting of actual machine confirmation operation after RAM clearing may be described as "modification (1) by common hardware configuration"). In addition, the main control MPU 1310a performs the operation of the movable body (accessory) and the lighting of the light emitter such as the lamp and the LED by repeatedly performing the operation of confirming the real machine after clearing the RAM and the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives a setting change command (described as a setting change completion command in FIG. 121) from the main control MPU 1310a, controls the peripherals according to the setting value included in the setting change command (actual machine confirmation operation pattern). The board 1510 can operate a movable body (accessory) to be controlled and light a light-emitting body. By changing and setting the actual machine confirmation operation after clearing the RAM, it is possible to provide variations in the method of starting the pachinko machine 1 after clearing the RAM.

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of times from the end of the pattern fluctuation until the demonstration (demonstration effect performed while waiting for the player). In this case, time setting pattern 1 that specifies "10 seconds" is assigned as setting value 1, time setting pattern 2 that specifies "15 seconds" is assigned as setting value 2, and "20 seconds" is assigned as setting value 3. is assigned, time setting pattern 4 is assigned to specify "25 seconds" as setting value 4, time setting pattern 5 is assigned to specify "30 seconds" as setting value 5, A time setting pattern 6 specifying "35 seconds" is assigned as the set value 6 (the mode of changing the setting of the time when the player waits after the completion of the symbol fluctuation is set as "Modified example by common hardware configuration (2 )”). The peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can start the demonstration at a time (time setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By changing and setting the time from the end of the symbol variation to the player waiting state, it is possible to give variation to the time from the end of the symbol variation to the demonstration.

In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of contents of a demonstration (demonstration performed in a waiting state for the player) to be performed after the pattern variation is completed. In this case, a demonstration effect setting pattern 1 that designates "comical effect" is assigned as setting value 1, and a demonstration effect setting pattern that designates "comical effect, movement effect of movable body (character object)" as setting value 2. 2 is assigned, a demonstration effect setting pattern 3 that designates "serious effect" is assigned as the set value 3, and a demonstration effect setting pattern that designates "serial effect, movement effect of the movable body (role object)" is assigned as the set value 4. 4 is assigned, a demonstration effect setting pattern 5 that specifies "historical drama effect" is assigned as setting value 5, and a demonstration effect setting that specifies "historical drama effect, movable body (role object)" is assigned as setting value 6. Pattern 6 is assigned (the aspect of changing and setting the content of the demonstration effect may be described as "modification (3) based on common hardware configuration"). In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 that receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a can demonstrate with a demonstration effect (demonstration effect setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner of changing and setting the content of the demonstration effect, variations can be given to the content of the demonstration effect performed after the pattern variation is completed.

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of default sound volumes to be adjusted by the sound volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 . By rotating the volume control switch, the volume can be increased or decreased from the default volume. In this case, volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2, and "volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3. is assigned a volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "", a volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, a volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "volume 5" is assigned as the setting value 5, A volume setting pattern 6 that designates "volume 6" is assigned as the setting value 6 (the change setting mode of the default volume may be described as "modification (4) based on common hardware configuration"). It should be noted that the volume is set to increase from setting value 1 to setting value 6. FIG. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, sets the default sound volume (volume setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. In addition, the default volume of "volume 1" assigned to setting value 1 is moved to the direction of decreasing the volume of the volume adjustment switch (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of increasing the volume), and the movement to the end of the minimum volume is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the minimum side volume, the sound may be muted, or the volume may be such that the sound can be recognized when the player stops in front of the pachinko machine. In addition, the default volume of "volume 6" assigned to set value 6 is moved in the direction of increasing the volume of the volume control switch (moved in the direction opposite to the direction of decreasing the volume), and the movement to the maximum volume end is completed. When the volume is adjusted to the maximum side volume, the volume may be set to the maximum volume, or the volume may be set to a predetermined percentage (for example, 85%) of the maximum volume. This mode of changing and setting the default sound volume allows variation in the default sound volume adjusted by the sound volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 .

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of sound volumes of error notification sounds for error notification such as various problems, gotos, and errors. Various error notification sounds cannot be adjusted by operating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (that is, are not dependent), and the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound by maximizing the volume is used in the game hall. Although it is easy for a staff member such as a store clerk to notice it, it may be offensive to a player who is playing a game with another pachinko machine. Therefore, there is also a demand for a device capable of adjusting the volume of various error notification sounds. In this case, error notification volume setting pattern 1 that specifies "error notification volume 1" is assigned as setting value 1, and error notification volume setting pattern 2 that specifies "error notification volume 2" is assigned as setting value 2. , error notification volume setting pattern 3 that specifies "error notification volume 3" is assigned as setting value 3, error notification volume setting pattern 4 that specifies "volume 4" is assigned as setting value 4, and setting value 5 is assigned as " An error notification volume setting pattern 5 that specifies "error notification volume 5" is assigned, and an error notification volume setting pattern 6 that specifies "error notification volume 6 (maximum volume)" is assigned as a setting value 6 (error notification sound volume is sometimes described as "modification (5) by common hardware configuration"). In addition, setting value 1 (the volume that does not mute the sound, and the volume that allows you to recognize the error notification sound when you stop in front of the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound) to setting value 6 (the maximum volume, The volume of the error notification sound is set so that the volume of the error notification sound increases toward a volume at which the error notification sound can be sufficiently recognized even if the player is several meters away from the pachinko machine that emits the error notification sound. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, performs control to emit an error notification sound at the error notification sound volume (error notification volume setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. Depending on the manner of changing and setting the volume of the error notification sound, it is possible to provide variation in the volume of the error notification sound in the error notification.

Also, for example, it can be used as a set value for setting a plurality of default luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs. It is possible to increase or decrease the brightness from the default brightness for the light emitters to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a. In this case, the default brightness setting pattern 1 that specifies "brightness 1" is assigned as the setting value 1, the default brightness setting pattern 2 that specifies "brightness 2" is assigned as the setting value 2, and the setting value 3 is " A default brightness setting pattern 3 specifying "brightness 3" is assigned, a default brightness setting pattern 4 specifying "brightness 4" is assigned as the setting value 4, and a default brightness setting pattern specifying "brightness 5" is assigned as the setting value 5. 5 is assigned, and a default brightness setting pattern 6 that specifies "brightness 6" as the setting value 6 is assigned (the mode of change setting of default brightness is sometimes described as "modification (6) by common hardware configuration"). be). Note that the main control MPU 1310a changes the default brightness by repeatedly performing main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to adjust the brightness of the light emitters and perform lighting, blinking, gradation points, and the like of the light emitters. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, is subject to control by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the default brightness (default brightness setting pattern) according to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitters, lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitters can be performed. Variations can be given to the default brightness of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs by changing and setting the content of the default brightness.

In addition, for example, it can be used as a set value that can set a plurality of luminances of light emitters such as lamps and LEDs for reporting errors such as various defects, gotos, and errors. An error notification luminance setting pattern 1 that designates "error notification luminance 1" as the setting value 1 is assigned to the lamp to be controlled by the main control MPU 1310a, and "error notification luminance 2" is assigned as the setting value 2. An error notification brightness setting pattern 2 is assigned to be specified, an error notification brightness setting pattern 3 specifying "error notification brightness 3" is assigned as a setting value 3, and an error notification specifying "error notification brightness 4" is assigned as a setting value 4. A luminance setting pattern 4 is assigned, an error notification luminance setting pattern 5 specifying "error notification luminance 5" is assigned as the setting value 5, and an error notification specifying "error notification luminance 6 (maximum luminance)" is assigned as the setting value 6. A luminance setting pattern 6 is assigned (the manner of changing the luminance of the light emitter in the error notification may be described as "modification (7) based on common hardware configuration"). In addition, from setting value 1 (the brightness of the lamp is low so that the error notification can be recognized when stopping in front of the pachinko machine even though it does not turn off), the lamp brightness is increased from setting value 6 (maximum brightness). Brightness is set to high. The main control MPU 1310a adjusts the brightness of the light emitters by repeatedly performing the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, to change the brightness of the light emitters in the error notification, and control the lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitters. conduct. The peripheral control board 1510, which receives the setting change command from the main control MPU 1310a, is the object to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the error notification luminance (error notification luminance setting pattern) corresponding to the setting value included in the setting change command. By adjusting the brightness of the light emitters, lighting, blinking, gradation points, etc. of the light emitters can be performed. By changing and setting the luminance of the light emitters in this error notification, it is possible to provide variations in the luminance of the light emitters such as lamps and LEDs in the error notification.

Further, the various setting values assigned to the modifications (1) to (7) based on the above-described common hardware configuration are determined when the predetermined setting value display permission condition is established in the setting value confirmation display processing (to be described later) performed by the main control MPU 1310a. However, it may be displayed on the setting display 1310g all the time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on until the power is turned off (set value display (8) may be referred to as "modification (8) by common hardware configuration").

Further, any one of the modifications (1) to (8) based on the common hardware configuration described above may be appropriately selected and employed as the modification (6) of the setting key described above.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 when power is restored to the pachinko machine 1 or when power is restored after a power failure (instantaneous power failure that occurs momentarily). The setting key is inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise by 60 degrees to be turned ON, thereby turning the setting key ON. On the premise of this, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is pressed, the main control MPU 1310a performs setting change processing in the main control side power-on processing described later, and the main control built-in RAM All areas except for a specific area are cleared, and then the game progresses by setting interrupt permission etc., while the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is pressed. If not, the main control MPU 1310a performs set value confirmation display processing in the main control side power-on processing described later, and then proceeds with the game by performing interrupt permission setting and the like. By adopting this mode, the main control MPU 1310a never performs the set value confirmation display process once the progress of the game is started. In other words, the main control MPU 1310a never displays the currently set setting value on the setting display 1310g when the progress of the game is started by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like. The main control MPU 1310a counts the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a defined on the game board 5 in the ball count process of the main control side power-on process described later. In the port output process of the main control side power-on process to be described later, the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 is output to the base monitor 1310h and displayed on the base monitor 1310h. Therefore, the current set value displayed by the setting display 1310g may be displayed on the base monitor 1310h described above. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a uses the base monitor 1310h to display the current set values that have been set during the period from when the power is restored until when the progress of the game is started by performing the interrupt permission setting or the like. In addition, when the progress of the game is started by performing interrupt permission setting etc. after the power is restored, the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008 can be displayed, so the setting display 1310g It is no longer necessary to provide it, and can contribute to cost reduction.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 67, 70 and 71. FIG. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in the state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁This function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display the game state (game situation), the ordinary lottery result, the special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400 has a status indicator, which is not shown in detail, and consists of three LEDs for displaying the gaming status, and two LEDs for displaying the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate section 2003. A normal symbol display made up of LEDs and a normal reservation display made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the passage of the game ball B through the gate portion 2003 are provided.

In addition, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol indicator consisting of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs that displays the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the second start port 2004 A second special pattern indicator consisting of eight LEDs to be displayed, and a second special reserved number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. ing.

Furthermore, the function display unit 1400 has five LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (the number of rounds) of the opening/closing pattern of the big winning opening 2005 when the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery is a "jackpot" or the like. It has a display.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of reservations, patterns, etc., can be displayed by lighting, extinguishing, blinking, etc. of the provided LEDs as appropriate.

Here, as a countermeasure against noise when the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected, A plurality of wirings (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “wirings”) for transmitting control signals from the control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400 will be described in detail.

The wiring FCBL electrically connected via the connector 1400a provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 extends from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the back side of the back box 3010, as shown in FIGS. When pulled up to the upper side, it is bent downward on the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is grouped by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed vertically along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, respectively, to form a game panel. Along the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 that is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of 1100 or that is attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 as it is pulled downwards.

When the wiring FCBL is routed to the lower side of main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left side of main control board box 1320 and extends along the lower side of main control board box 1320 to the function display unit connector MFCN. , and then electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

As described above, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 has a longer wiring length, and in particular, from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and then to the back box. The wiring FCBL routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward on the rear surface of the back box 3010 by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in the vertical direction. The rear surface of the board holders 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 is routed along the right side of the main control board box 1320 to the lower side of the main control board box 1320 . In the state where the game board 5 is attached to the pachinko machine 1, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed in this way is in front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the body frame 4 shown in FIG. will be placed in

A decoration board 1131 on which a plurality of decoration LEDs are mounted is arranged behind the function display unit 1400 . The wiring UPCBL, which is a connection cable that is electrically connected via a connector 1131a provided on the back side of the decoration board 1131, is bent upward on the rear surface of the game panel 1100, and at the upper side of the front surface of the back box 3010. When it is bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 and pulled around to the upper side of the back surface of the back box 3010 in a state (or in contact) with the wiring FCBL described above, it extends downward from the rear surface of the back box 3010. , and bundled by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 vertically formed along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 , and routed to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500 . be. Then, the wiring UPCBL separates from the path of the wiring FCBL described above, and is bent toward the left side at the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500 to extend along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. After being routed and routed above a predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector.

In this way, the wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the decoration board 1131 arranged behind the function display unit 1400 and the panel drive board 1720 has a longer wiring length, and especially from the upper right corner of the game board 5 The wiring FCBL, which is routed to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the rear box 3010, is bent downward on the rear surface of the rear box 3010 and extends vertically along the right side of the rear surface of the rear box 3010. A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 are formed, respectively, and are routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 . The area where the wiring UPCBL is routed in this manner is attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. It will be arranged in front of the payout unit 560 that is set.

As described above, the payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guide passage that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a single guide passage of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out guided game balls B one by one based on an instruction from a payout control board 633, an upper full ball path unit 600 that guides downward the game balls B that have passed through the payout device 580, A lower full ball path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side is provided.

In addition, as described above, the game ball B is ground in the island equipment of the game hall, or rubs against each other in circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and is charged and discharged by static electricity, thereby eliminating electromagnetic noise. discharge. For this reason, static electricity tends to accumulate in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 that can retain the game balls B are attached.

In addition, the main control board 1310, which will be described later in detail, includes a main control MPU 1310a, etc., which is a microprocessor in which a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc. are incorporated. I have it. The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "built-in reset circuit"). The forced reset by the circuit is a mechanism that cannot be controlled and disabled by the user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset is applied without executing the main control side power-off processing described later, and the main control side power-on processing described later is executed again. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power failure processing is not executed, the checksum (sum value) error of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a will always occur, so the contents of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a is completely erased (cleared). That is, when forced reset is performed by the built-in reset circuit, RAM clear is executed when the main control MPU 1310a is activated again.

In addition, in this embodiment, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type is adopted as the package of the main control MPU 1310a. It protrudes from the soldering surface (the surface opposite to the mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 . In other words, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a project toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. FIG.

In this way, since static electricity tends to accumulate in the area where the sphere tank 552 and the payout unit 560 are attached and their surroundings, when electromagnetic noise is emitted due to electrostatic discharge, the function display unit, which is arranged in front of the payout unit 560, is placed in front of the payout unit 560. 1400 and the main control board 1310, and electrically connects the upper left panel decoration board 1131 arranged behind the function display unit 1400 and the peripheral control board 1510. It may invade the wiring UPCBL. As a result, electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring FCBL may jump out and enter the wiring UPCBL, and conversely, electromagnetic noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL may jump out and enter the wiring FCBL.

For example, if the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is assumed to pass through the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, From a predetermined position on the right side of the control board box 1320 to the left side of the main control board box 1320 (for example, on the right side of the main control board box 1320, approximately from the top side of the main control board box 1320) bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 so as to be parallel to the top or bottom side of the main control board box 1320 at the point where it has a quarter of the length), and from the center of the bottom side of the main control board 1310 to the left side When it passes above the function display unit connector MFCN arranged near the side, it is bent toward the lower side of the main control board box 1320, pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320, and then the function display unit connector MFCN. When the wiring FCBL is electrically connected to the wiring FCBL, if electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring FCBL, the wiring FCBL is routed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. Then, when passing through the area in front of the main control board 1310 (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a, the electromagnetic wave noise is mainly transmitted through the wiring FCBL. Intruding into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the control board box 1320, there is a risk that the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly reset by its built-in reset circuit under the influence of this intruding electromagnetic wave noise.

Note that if a wiring receiving groove is formed in the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 instead of the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320, the wiring FCBL , not in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, but along the wiring accommodation groove, and after being pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320, the function display It is electrically connected to the unit connector MFCN. Also in this case, if electromagnetic wave noise enters this wiring FCBL, as described above, if the wiring FCBL is accommodated along the wiring accommodation groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and routed, the main control MPU 1310a When passing through the area in front of the main control board 1310 (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of , electromagnetic wave noise is transmitted to the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL. There is a risk that the main control MPU 1310a will be forcibly reset by its own built-in reset circuit under the influence of electromagnetic wave noise that has penetrated into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward it.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is placed on the main control board as the positional relationship between the mounting position of the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected and the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoints of the right and left sides of the main control board 1310, while being arranged from the center to the left side of the lower side of the main control board 1310. FIG. In other words, in this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged below the center line passing through the midpoints of the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, whereas the function display unit connector MFCN is arranged below this center line. By arranging the main control MPU 1310a above the line, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other on the main control board 1310. FIG.

As a result, the main control MPU 1310a can be arranged away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected. Various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 can be prevented from entering through the space separating the main control board 1310 from the MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

Further, by arranging the main control MPU 1310a away from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, even if electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring FCBL, the main control MPU 1310a is not affected. , on the main control board 1310, or in the space separating the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a on the main control board 1310, the electromagnetic wave noise entering through the wiring FCBL can be attenuated. ing. In this respect as well, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

In this embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged such that the right side of the package is separated from the right side of the main control board 1310 by at least a predetermined distance dimension (hereinafter referred to as "first wiring separation distance dimension"). ing. This is because the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320, so that the electromagnetic waves entering the wiring FCBL This is to prevent noise from entering various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from the wiring FCBL through the space having the first wiring spacing dimension.

The wiring FCBL electrically connecting the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is located in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, as described above. (or accommodated along the wiring accommodation groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200), the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 is attached to the right side of the main control substrate box 1320. When it is routed downward along the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and after being routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to below the function display unit connector MFCN. , and the function display unit connector MFCN, the wiring FCBL is routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 and protrudes toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. It is possible to secure a large distance dimension (hereinafter referred to as "second wiring distance dimension") to various pins of the main control MPU 1310a. This second wire spacing dimension has a larger distance dimension than the first wire spacing dimension. As a result, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL enters various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from the wiring FCBL via the space having the second wiring separation distance dimension. can be prevented. In this respect as well, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

In this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are directly electrically connected by the wiring FCBL. It can also be configured to be directly connected. In this case, it is preferable to provide the panel relay board 1710 with an element capable of reducing or removing the electromagnetic wave noise entering the wiring FCBL (that is, a plurality of elements for transmitting control signals from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400). elements capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic wave noise are preferably provided for each of the wirings FCBL). As a result, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL through which electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

Such elements may include resistors, filter circuits, and the like. From observation results of the waveform of electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of electromagnetic noise is within about 2 microseconds (μs). Designed to pass through.

In addition to resistors, filter circuits, etc., such elements can also include EMC countermeasure parts (coils, beads, capacitors, etc.). When capacitors are used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings FCBL. Further, when a steeper attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted in each of the plurality of wirings FCBL, or a bead and a capacitor may be used. may be inserted respectively.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71 and the like. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 . The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 (see FIG. 111) that controls the effects presented to the player based on control signals from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Comes with a box. The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 for controlling lighting effects, sound effects, movable effects, and the like, and an effect display control part 1512 for controlling effect images.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, the effect display device 1600, and the like.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73 and the like. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. FIG. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the rear wall of the back box 3010 at substantially the center. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in the assembled state of the game board 5 . The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device with a white LED backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510 and can display predetermined still images and moving images.

The performance display device 1600 includes two upper fixed pieces 1601 protruding outward from the upper surface and a lower fixed piece 1602 protruding outward from the lower surface. This performance display device 1600 has a liquid crystal screen facing forward, and two fixed grooves 3010c that are open to the upper inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of the back box 3010, which will be described later, are fitted into the back box. After inserting the two upper fixed pieces 1601 obliquely behind the 3010, the lower fixed piece 1602 side is moved forward to insert the lower fixed piece 1602 into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. It is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding it to the right at .

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 79 and the like. FIG. 76(a) is a front perspective view of the front unit on the game board, and FIG. 76(b) is a back perspective view of the front unit on the game board. FIG. 77 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the game panel is made opaque and the front unit is cut parallel to the surface of the game panel to expose the inside of the game area in which game balls circulate and the obstacle nails. 78 is an enlarged front view of the distribution passage group in the upper right corner of FIG. 77, and FIG. 79 is an enlarged front view of the attacker unit in the lower right corner of FIG.

The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protruding forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the rear end part of the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. , and protrudes rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110 .

The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving the game ball B hit into the game area 5a, and has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 A first starting port 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at different positions in the area 5a, and a gate part 2003 which is attached at a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. , to the second starting port 2004 that allows the acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003, and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 and a big prize winning port 2005 which enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B.

A plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 are arranged below the center in the vertical direction in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side of the center in the horizontal direction. ing. The left general prize winning opening 2001 is arranged at the lower part of the game area 5a, and the right general winning opening 2001 is arranged near the right end of the game area 5a and below the center in the vertical direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowest end at the center in the left-right direction within the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged above the right general prize winning opening 2001 and substantially in the center in the vertical direction. The second starting opening 2004 is arranged at a position higher than the first starting opening 2002 below the general winning opening 2001 on the right side. The big winning opening 2005 is arranged on the left side of the second starting opening 2004 at a height slightly lower than the first starting opening 2002 .

The table unit 2000 is attached directly above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. A side unit 2200 having two general prize winning openings 2001 attached along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the opening unit 2100 in the front view, and a starting opening unit at the lower right corner in the front view in the game area 5a. An attacker unit 2400 attached to the right side of 2100 in front view and having one general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005, and above the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a gate portion 2003 is provided in the game area 5a and is attached slightly above the center in the front view.

[5-8a. starting unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 in the vicinity of the lower end of the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that is always open upwards with a width that can accept only one game ball B, and only one game ball B is accepted at the lower left of the first starting port 2002. It has one general prize winning opening 2001 always open upward with a possible width. The starting port unit 2100 is entirely formed transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 74, etc.).

The starting port unit 2100 includes a first starting port sensor 2101 (see FIG. 77 etc.) that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, and a panel that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. and a guide path 2102 (see FIG. 76) that guides the plate 1110 to the rear and discharges downward (above the substrate holder 1200).

By attaching the starting port unit 2100 to the panel plate 1110, the general prize winning port 2001 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 and is opened upward, and the first starting port 2002 is positioned at the center, which will be described later. It is positioned directly below the center of the stage 2503 of the role object 2500 . Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the center of the stage 2503, it will be received in the first starting port 2002 with a very high probability.

In the starting port unit 2100 assembled on the game board 5, the first starting port 2002 is located directly below the central release portion 2503a of the stage 2503 in the center accessory 2500 described later. It is configured such that the game ball B released from 2503a is received in the first start port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

[5-8b. side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel plate 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes two general winning openings 2001 which are open to receive the game ball B at all times, and a first shelf section 2201 which is inclined such that the upper left and right ends of the two general winning openings 2001 are lowered. , and a second shelf portion 2202 which is inclined so that the right end is lower in the upper part of the two general prize winning openings 2001 . The three general prize winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002 .

The side unit 2200 is provided with two general winning openings 2001 at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100 . The two general prize winning openings 2001 are provided facing each other so as to line up on the left and right. The left general prize winning opening 2001 opens toward the upper left, and the right general winning opening 2001 opens toward the right.

When the side unit 2200 is assembled on the game board 5, the left end of the first shelf 2201 is positioned near the periphery of the game area 5a, and the game ball B that has flowed down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. can be guided to the right. The first shelf portion 2201 is inclined so that the extension line of the upper surface passes between the first starting opening 2002 and the stage 2503 . The second shelf portion 2202 is inclined so that the extension line of the upper surface passes through the opening of the general winning opening 2001 of the starting opening unit 2100 .

The side unit 2200 is entirely transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be seen (see FIG. 74, etc.). By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the two general winning openings 2001, the first shelf portion 2201, and the second shelf portion 2202 protrude forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110. . This side unit 2200 guides the game ball received in the general prize winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel plate 1110 and can deliver it to the guideway of the back unit 3000. - 特許庁A game ball received in the general winning hole 2001 is detected by the general winning hole sensor 3001 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 111).

[5-8c. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is arranged in the game area 5a to the right of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in front view, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 is formed substantially entirely transparent, and the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 74, etc.). This attacker unit 2400 has one general winning opening 2001 out of four general winning openings 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 79, etc.).

The attacker unit 2400 has an L-shaped outer shape in a front view with the upper end on the right side extending upward from the approximate center in the left-right direction. In this attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 is always open upward at the upper right corner, the second starting opening 2004 can be opened upward at the lower left of the general winning opening 2001, and the big winning opening 2005 can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting port 2004 .

The attacker unit 2400 has a general winning opening 2001 that is slightly larger than the game ball B. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a second start opening 2004 that is slightly larger than the game ball and opens upward, and a large winning opening 2005 that extends in the horizontal direction from about three times the outer diameter of the game ball. It is five times wider and opens upwards.

The attacker unit 2400 includes a general winning opening sensor 2401 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening sensor 2402 that detects the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004, and a large opening opening. A large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 is provided (see FIG. 111, etc.).

The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second starter door 2411 capable of opening and closing the second starter 2004 and the second starter door 2411 according to the result of the ordinary lottery that is drawn when the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003. A starting opening solenoid 2412, a large winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005, and a large winning opening door 2413 are selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. and an attacker solenoid 2414 opened and closed according to the result of one special lottery or the result of the second special lottery.

As shown in FIG. 79 and the like, the attacker unit 2400 includes an attacker left passage 2421 and an attacker right passage 2422 through which game balls B can circulate downward on both left and right sides of the general prize winning port 2001 arranged on the upper right, and an attacker left passage. 2421, the second starter guide shelf 2423 is inclined to the left and has the second starter guide 2004 open in the middle. A grand prize winning opening guide shelf 2424 which is inclined to be lower leftward from a position spaced leftward from the left end of the start opening guiding shelf 2423 and has a grand prize winning opening 2005 open in the middle. I have it.

In addition, the attacker unit 2400 includes a communication port 2425 communicating with the attacker right passage 2422 on the right end side of the second starting port guide shelf 2423, and a communication port 2425 that communicates with the attacker right passage 2422 on the right end side of the second starting port guide shelf 2423. From between the attacker lower right passage 2426 that extends to the left end of the big winning opening guidance shelf 2424 so as to be lower toward the left after extending to the second start opening guidance shelf 2423 and the big winning opening guidance shelf 2424 An intermediate passage 2427 extending downward from the big winning opening 2005 and communicating with the attacker lower right passage 2426 is provided.

Furthermore, the attacker unit 2400 extends downward from the lower end of the general prize winning opening 2001, partitions the attacker left passage 2421 and the attacker right passage 2422, and forms a communication port 2425 between the lower end and the second starting opening guide shelf 2423. A partition portion 2428 is formed, and an inclined portion 2429 that is inclined to the left as it goes upward from the lower end of the partition portion 2428 .

The second starting opening door 2411 that can open and close the second starting opening 2004 that is open on the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 extends in the front-rear direction and has a plate-like shape that extends left and right so that the left end is lowered. The left end side is rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction. This second start opening door 2411, the right end side is above the horizontal, by making the state of the position slightly lower than the right end of the opening of the second start opening 2004, the game ball to the second start opening 2004 The second starting port 2004 can be closed by disabling acceptance of B. The second starting opening door 2411, in the state where the second starting opening 2004 is closed, guides the game ball B flowing through the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 from the upstream side (right side) to the left. be able to.

The second starting port door 2411 is rotated counterclockwise so that the right end side moves upward from the state where the second starting port 2004 is closed. Acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 is enabled, and the second starting port 2004 can be opened (opened). When the second starting opening door 2411 is raised so as to raise the right end side to open the second starting opening 2004, the second starting opening door 2411 rises from the second starting opening guidance shelf 2423. As a result, the course of the game ball B rolling on the second start opening guide shelf 2423 is blocked, and the game ball B can be accepted into the second start opening 2004. The second starting port door 2411 closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting solenoid 2412 is ON (when energized). open up.

The big prize gate door 2413 that can open and close the big prize gate 2005 opened in the big prize gate guide shelf 2424 is formed in the shape of a plate that extends back and forth and extends left and right so that the left end is lowered. It is possible to open and close the big winning opening 2005 which opens upward by advancing and retreating back and forth. The big winning gate door 2413 can close the big winning gate 2005 by moving forward, and when the big winning gate 2005 is closed, the big winning gate guide shelf 2424 flows from the upstream side (right side). The incoming game ball B can be guided to the left. In addition, the large winning opening door 2413 is driven backward by the attacker solenoid 2414 to open the large winning opening 2005, and the second starting opening guidance shelf 2423 and the large winning opening guidance shelf 2424 of the center accessory 2500 are circulated. The game ball B that has been played can be received by the big winning opening 2005 . The big winning opening door 2413 closes the big winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the big winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when energized).

Although not shown, the attacker unit 2400 is provided with a first receiving port 2007 that can be opened upward inside the big prize winning port 2005. A second inlet 2008 is provided which is always open. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 includes a first receiving port sensor 2404 that detects the game ball B received in the first receiving port 2007, and a second receiving port sensor that detects the game ball B received in the second receiving port 2008. 2405 and a distribution piece 2415 that opens and closes the first receiving port 2007 (distributes the game ball B received in the big winning port 2005 and circulating inside to either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008) And, a distribution solenoid 2416 that opens and closes the distribution piece 2415 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 , is equipped with The sorting piece 2415 is formed in the shape of a plate that extends in the front-rear direction and extends in the left-right direction so that the right end becomes lower inside the big prize-winning opening 2005, and opens upward by advancing and retreating in the front-rear direction. The first receiving port 2007 (V winning port) can be opened and closed. The sorting piece 2415 moves forward to close the first receiving port 2007, guides the game ball B received in the big winning port 2005 to the right, and the second receiving port is always open upward. 2008 can be accepted. In addition, the sorting piece 2415 is driven by the sorting solenoid 2416 to move backward to open the first receiving port 2007, and the game ball B received in the big winning port 2005 is transferred to the first receiving port 2007 with a high probability. can be accepted by This sorting piece 2415 closes the first receiving port 2007 when the sorting solenoid 2416 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the first receiving port 2007 when the sorting solenoid 2416 is ON (when energized). Let In other words, the sorting piece 2415 can sort the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 so that it can be received in either the first receiving port 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 .

With this attacker unit 2400 attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the general prize winning opening 2001 is located below the gate section 2003 (from directly below) downstream of the distribution passage group 2520 and the gate section 2003 in the center accessory 2500 described later. slightly to the right), the second starting opening 2004 is located at a height between the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 and the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, and the big winning opening 2005 is positioned below the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100 . In addition, when attached to the panel plate 1110, a plurality of obstacle nails N are present between the lower end of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the upper end (general prize winning opening 2001).

Next, the flow of the game ball B in the attacker unit 2400 will be explained. Since the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are located above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 in the state assembled on the game board 5, the game ball B is ejected from the stage 2503. Even if it is released, it will not be accepted by the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 . Therefore, only the game ball B that has flowed down the right side of the center accessory 2500 (circulation passage group 2520) can be accepted by the general prize winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Downstream of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center role 2500, an attacker left passage 2421, a general prize-winning port 2001, and an attacker right passage 2422 are opened side by side from the left. B will enter any of them.

When the game ball B supplied above the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is received in the general winning opening 2001, after being detected by the general winning opening sensor 2401 , is discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. FIG. When the game ball B enters the attacker's left passage 2421 on the left side of the general winning opening 2001 without being accepted by the general winning opening 2001, it falls on the second starting opening guidance shelf 2423, and falls on the second starting opening guidance shelf 2423. Flows toward the second starting port 2004 (left side) along the slope. When the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2411, it flows leftward on the second starting port door 2411 and is discharged leftward from the left end of the second starting port guiding shelf 2423. . When the game ball B passes through the second start opening guide rack 2423, if the second start opening 2004 is opened, the game ball B is accepted into the second start opening 2004 with a very high probability.

The game ball B received in the second starting hole 2004 is detected by the second starting hole sensor 2402 and discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. FIG. When the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center accessory 2500 is not received by the second starting opening 2004, it is released to the left big winning opening 2005 side via the second starting opening guide shelf 2423. - 特許庁

Since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the left side of the second starting opening guide shelf 2423, the game ball B released to the left from the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 will reach the big winning opening 2005 side, Or, it will flow down either to the intermediate passage 2427 side. When it flows down to the big winning opening 2005 side, if the big winning opening 2005 is closed by the big winning opening door 2413, it is guided to the left by the big winning opening door 2413, and from the left end of the big winning opening guidance shelf 2424. Released to the left. When the big winning gate door 2413 closing the big winning gate 2005 is retracted and the big winning gate 2005 is open, the game ball B that has flowed down from the second starting gate guidance shelf 2423 to the big winning gate 2005 side is It is accepted in the grand prize opening 2005 . The game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403 and discharged downward (above the substrate holder 1200) on the rear side of the game panel 1100. FIG.

The game ball B that has entered the intermediate passage 2427 from the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 and the game ball B that has been released leftward from the big winning opening guide shelf 2424 pass through the out port 1008 and the rear side of the game panel 1100. is ejected downward (above the substrate holder 1200).

On the other hand, the game ball B supplied above the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 is not accepted by the general winning opening 2001, and the right side of the general winning opening 2001 When it enters the attacker's right passage 2422, it abuts against the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 and rebounds leftward. In the present embodiment, the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 is provided so that the extension line of the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 matches the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005, so that the attacker can enter the right passage 2422. Then, the game ball B bounced off the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 falls (circulates) onto the second starting port guide shelf 2423 through the communication port 2425 with a high probability.

When the game ball B that enters the attacker right passage 2422 and contacts the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 rebounds above the communication port 2425, the partition portion 2428 forming the upper end side of the communication port 2425 Since the inclined portion 2429 is provided at the lower end, the game ball B comes into contact with the inclined portion 2429 . Since the inclined portion 2429 is inclined so that the upper end is positioned to the right with respect to the lower end, the game ball B in contact with the inclined portion 2429 is reflected downward toward the attacker's lower right passage 2426, The attacker will enter the lower right passage 2426 . In addition, when the game ball B that contacts the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005 rebounds downward from the communication port 2425, it enters the attacker's lower right passage 2426.

The game ball B that has entered the attacker's lower right passage 2426 has no chance of being received by the second starting opening 2004 and the big winning opening 2005, and is discharged out of the game area 5a through the out opening 1008. - 特許庁

The attacker unit 2400 also has a sub-function display section 2450 above the second starting port 2004 . The sub-function display section 2450 has a plurality of (here, six) full-color LEDs. The sub-function display unit 2450 is interlocked with the normal symbol display device, the first special symbol display device, and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the gate part The result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B to 2003, the result of the first special lottery and the result of the second special lottery drawn by receiving the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are displayed. It is something to do.

Furthermore, the attacker unit 2400 has a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects magnetism (see FIG. 111). This magnetic sensor 2470 is for detecting a fraudulent act using a magnet.

[5-8d. Center role]
The center accessory 2500 of the front unit 2000 is arranged above the starter unit 2100 in the game area 5a and slightly above the center when viewed from the front, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. ing. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and through the frame, the production display device 1600 arranged behind the game panel 1100 and various production units provided in the back unit 3000 can be visually recognized from the front. can. Further, the center accessory 2500 is formed substantially entirely transparent so that the rear side (back unit 3000) can be visually recognized.

The frame-shaped center accessory 2500 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 over the entire circumference except for the lower side, and the game ball B hit into the game area 5a is positioned within the frame. to prevent intrusion into

The center accessory 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 which is open to allow the game ball B in the game area 5a to enter, and a frame which can release the game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view. A warp exit 2502 opened inside and a stage 2503 capable of releasing the game ball B released from the warp exit 2502 into the game area 5a after rolling in the horizontal direction are provided.

The stage 2503 of the center role 2500 has a curved shape with the central side in the left-right direction depressed, and the position corresponding to the position directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center role 2500 is positioned on the game panel 1100 (panel plate). 1110), the center position in the left-right direction is formed in a wave shape (W-shape) so that it is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. This stage 2503 has a portion (central release portion 2503a) slightly higher than the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction and the lowest portion (side release portion 2503b) on both left and right sides, which are arranged in a forward direction. It is inclined so that it may become low, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game area 5a from those parts.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised part (central discharge part 2503a) at the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is positioned directly above the first starter opening 2002 of the starter unit 2100. ing. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the central release portion 2503a in the center of the stage 2503, it is received in the first start port 2002 with a very high probability.

The center accessory 2500 has a gate portion 2003 provided below the center in the vertical direction and to the right of the right outer peripheral surface. The gate portion 2003 has a size that allows only one game ball B to pass through the gate portion 2003, and is provided with a gate sensor 2506 for detecting the passage of the game ball. The gate portion 2003 is provided with an interval between the frame-shaped outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 and a space through which only one game ball B can pass.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 constitutes a part of the outer peripheral surface of the upper side, and an upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 that is inclined so as to become lower rightward from a position on the left side of the center in the horizontal direction. , and a distribution passage group 2520 which is provided at the upper right corner and is composed of a plurality of passages through which the game ball B can be circulated. The flow passage group 2520 extends vertically from near the right end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 to above the gate portion 2003 .

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, etc., the distribution passage group 2520 is provided outside the frame of the center accessory 2500, and is provided adjacent to the first distribution passage 2521 and the left side of the first distribution passage 2521. and a second circulation passage 2522 . The first circulation passage 2521 extends in an arc from the entrance side of the upper end downward along the peripheral edge (right rail 1005) of the play area 5a, the vicinity of the lower end is bent leftward in a crank shape, and the exit is downward. opening towards. The outlet at the lower end of the first circulation passage 2521 is located slightly rightward with respect to directly above the gate portion 2003 .

The second circulation passage 2522 has an entrance at its upper end that opens to the left with a gap from the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521, and bends rightward in the vicinity of the upper end into a first It extends downward in an arc shape adjacent to the circulation passage 2521, bends leftward in the vicinity of the lower end in a crank shape, and then bends rightward in a crank shape, and the outlet is downward adjacent to the outlet of the first circulation passage 2521. opening towards. Thereby, the second circulation passage 2522 can attenuate the circulation speed of the game ball B more than the first circulation passage 2521 . In the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522, a plurality of protrusions 2523 are provided at intervals in the direction of circulation of the game ball B, and the game ball B contacts the protrusions 2523. can slow down the flow rate.

This center accessory 2500 is located upstream of the distribution passage group 2520 between the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 and the outer rail 1001 (peripheral edge of the game area 5a) of the front component 1000 when assembled on the game board 5. , an upstream space 2511 through which the game ball B can flow is formed. In addition, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the entrance of the upper end of the first circulation passage 2521 of the circulation passage group 2520 is positioned directly below the blocking portion 1006, and the first circulation passage 2521 is located on the right rail 1005 (game edge of region 5a). Furthermore, between the gate portion 2003 of the center accessory 2500 and the right rail 1005 (peripheral edge of the game area 5a), a gap through which the game ball B can pass is formed.

[5-8e. Flow of game balls through the group of distribution passages for the center role]
Next, the flow of the game ball B through the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79 and the like. When assembled on the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails N are provided between the distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 and the gate portion 2003, and between the gate portion 2003 and the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400. is planted. A plurality of obstructing nails N planted between the circulation passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 prevent the game ball B that has circulated through the first circulation passage 2521 from falling to the right side of the gate portion 2003 (the gate portion 2003 and the right rail 1005). and between) are adjusted to circulate with a high probability. In addition, the plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the circulation passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 are arranged so that the game ball B that has circulated through the second circulation passage 2522 passes through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability. adjusted. Furthermore, the plurality of obstructing nails N planted between the circulation passage group 2520 and the gate portion 2003 have the second highest probability that the game ball B that has circulated through the second circulation passage 2522 is placed in the gate portion after the gate portion 2003. 2003 is adjusted to flow on the left side.

On the other hand, a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the general prize winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 have a high probability that the game ball B that circulates on the right side of the gate portion 2003 will hit the attacker unit 2400. It is arranged to enter the attacker right passage 2422 . In addition, a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the general prize winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 have a high probability that the game ball B that has flowed through the gate portion 2003 or the left side of the gate portion 2003 It is adjusted to enter the attacker left passage 2421 on the left side of the general prize winning port 2001 of the attacker unit 2400, and is adjusted to be accepted in the general prize winning port 2001 with the next highest probability after the attacker left passage 2421.例文帳に追加

In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is hit with such strength that it enters above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 (upstream space portion 2511) of the center accessory 2500, the distribution passage group 2520 The game ball B circulates through either the first circulation passage 2521 or the second circulation passage 2522 . More specifically, the game ball B is hit with a strength that makes contact with the impinging portion 1006 protruding inward from the outer rail 1001 that constitutes a part of the peripheral edge of the game area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). ), the game ball B in contact with the impingement portion 1006 enters the first circulation passage 2521 . A game ball B that has entered the first circulation passage 2521 is likely to be placed on the right side of the gate portion 2003 by a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted between the downstream end of the first circulation passage 2521 and the gate portion 2003. pass through. Then, the game ball B passing through the right side of the gate portion 2003 enters the attacker's right passage 2422 with a high probability due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the attacker unit 2400 . The game ball B that has entered the attacker's right passage 2422 circulates through either the second start opening guidance shelf 2423 or the attacker's lower right passage 2426 .

As described above, the game ball B that has circulated through the first circulation passage 2521 does not pass through the gate portion 2003 very often. It is unlikely that the ordinary lottery results in which the second starting port 2004 is open will be drawn. Therefore, even if the game ball B that has circulated through the first circulation passage 2521 circulates through the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 via the attacker right passage 2422, the second starting opening 2004 is often closed. Since the game ball B is not accepted in the opening 2004 so much, there are few opportunities to receive benefits such as lottery of the second special lottery result and payout of the game ball B when the game ball B is received in the second start opening 2004.例文帳に追加Therefore, when the game ball B circulates through the first circulation passage 2521, the privilege granted to the player is relatively small.

In the above description, the case of hitting to the right has been described, but the game ball B that is hit with such force that it jumps over the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 that opens near the right end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 It will enter the first circulation passage 2521, resulting in the same result as above.

On the other hand, when the game ball B struck into the upstream space portion 2511 enters the second circulation passage 2522 and circulates through the second circulation passage 2522, between the downstream end of the second circulation passage 2522 and the gate portion 2003 A plurality of implanted obstacle nails N pass through the gate part 2003 with a high probability, and the ordinary lottery result is selected. A game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 enters the attacker's left passage 2421 with a high probability due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the attacker unit 2400, and exits the attacker's left passage 2421. It circulates through the second starting port guide shelf 2423 .

At this time, since the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003 and the ordinary lottery result is drawn, if the ordinary lottery result drawn is "ordinary hit", the second start port 2004 is in a predetermined pattern. Since it will be in an open state at , there is a possibility that the game ball B will be accepted by the second starting port 2004 . When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, a lottery for the result of the second special lottery is performed and a privilege such as a predetermined number of game balls B being paid out is provided. Therefore, when the game ball B circulates through the second circulation passage 2522, the privilege granted to the player is relatively high (large).

For this reason, the player is more likely to be awarded a privilege in the second circulation passage 2522, so that the game ball B enters the upstream space 2511 with a striking strength and The hitting strength of the game ball B is adjusted so that the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a with the hitting strength at which the ball B enters the second circulation passage 2522. It is possible to give variation to the hitting operation, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to make the player enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522.例文帳に追加It is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, if the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004 is a "jackpot" or the like that generates an advantageous game state, The large winning opening 2005 becomes capable of receiving the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern, and when the game ball B is received in the large winning opening 2005, a large number of the game balls B are paid out. In such an advantageous game state ("jackpot game state"), if the player is required to adjust the hitting strength of the game ball B, some players may feel impatient or irritated. There is a risk of losing interest in However, in this embodiment, when the game ball B is struck to the right and circulated through the first circulation passage 2521, it circulates through the right side of the gate portion 2003 and the attacker right passage 2422, and then communicates with the step portion 1005a of the right rail 1005. By rebounding toward the opening 2425 and falling through the communication opening 2425 to the second starting opening guide shelf 2423, the game ball B can be circulated to the big winning opening guiding rack 2424 side (big winning opening 2005 side). Therefore, the game ball B can be accepted into the big prize winning opening 2005 by an easy hitting operation without delicate adjustment of the hitting operation, and the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous game state. At the same time, it is possible to give sharpness to the hitting operation of the game ball B according to the game state, and it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the player.

[5-8f. Another Embodiment of Distribution Passage Group for Center Accessory]
Subsequently, a distribution channel group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 of an embodiment different from the above will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 80 to 82. FIG. FIG. 80(a) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a group of distribution passages for a center role different from FIG. 78, etc., and FIG. It is a principal part enlarged view which shows embodiment. FIG. 81(a) is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a group of distribution passages for a center role different from that of FIG. 80, and FIG. It is a part enlarged view. FIG. 82 is an enlarged view of a main part showing an embodiment of a group of distribution passages for the center accessory, which is different from FIGS. 80 and 81. FIG. In addition, in FIGS. 80 and 81, the same reference numerals are assigned to the same components as those described above.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 80( a ) places the upper end inlet of the second flow passage 2522 a spaced distance to the left relative to the inlet of the first flow passage 2521 as compared to FIG. 78 . It is what I did. This circulation passage group 2520 can also provide the same effects as described above.

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 80(b), the impinging portion 1006 of the front component member 1000 is angled so that the game ball B in contact with the impinging portion 1006 easily rebounds toward the entrance side of the second circulation passage 2522. is changed, and the part between the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521 and the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 in the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 is inclined so that the second circulation passage 2522 side (left side) is lower. It is what I let you do. This makes it easier for the game ball B to enter the second circulation passage 2522 side, so that the adjustment range of the hitting strength of the game ball B entering the second circulation passage 2522 is widened. It is possible to make it easy to perform the driving operation of the game ball B aimed at the entrance of the secondary circulation passage 2522.例文帳に追加

In the embodiment shown in FIG. 81(a), in the distribution passage group 2520 of FIGS. 78 and 80, the entrances of the first distribution passage 2521 and the second distribution passage 2522 are opened upward. Then, the upstream sides of the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522 are extended to near the center in the left-right direction above the center accessory 2500, and the respective entrances are aligned vertically and directed leftward. It is designed to be opened.

In this embodiment, part of the outer rail 1001 (periphery of the game area 5a) constitutes part of the first circulation passage 2521, and part of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 is part of the second circulation passage 2522. make up the department. Further, in this embodiment, the length in the left-right direction of the upstream space 2511 between the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 and the outer rail 1001 (peripheral edge of the game area 5a) is the first distribution from the left end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510. It has a length up to the entrances of the passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522, and is narrower than the upstream space 2511 shown in FIGS.

In this embodiment, in order to enter the game ball B into the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522, the striking strength to contact the narrow part on the left side of the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 in the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510, Since it is necessary to hit the game ball B with a hitting strength that directly enters the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 that opens toward the left, compared to the embodiments of FIGS. 78 and 80, The adjustment range of the hitting strength of the game ball B is narrowed. In addition, the game ball B struck into the upstream space portion 2511 on the left side of the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521 and the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 partitions the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522. If it contacts the left end of the wall (the part between the two entrances), it may deviate from the upstream space 2511 depending on the momentum and angle of the rebounded game ball B to the left. In other words, even if the game ball B is hit with the strength to enter the upstream space portion 2511, it deviates leftward from the upstream space portion 2511 and enters neither the first circulation passage 2521 nor the second circulation passage 2522. There is a possibility that the left side of the center accessory 2500 will be distributed. As described above, since the difficulty of the operation of hitting the game ball B is increased, the player's motivation for the operation of hitting the game ball B can be increased, and the player can hit the game medium. It is possible to entertain the operation and suppress the decline in interest.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 81(b) is the embodiment shown in FIG. 81(a), in which a branch portion 2524 is provided in the middle of the first circulation passage 2521 to communicate with the second circulation passage 2522 in a one-way manner. is. The branch portion 2524 is provided directly above a portion of the second flow passage 2522 that extends left and right (the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510) and is bent downward from the right end. In this embodiment, even if the game ball B is hit with the strength enough to enter the first circulation passage 2521, depending on the hitting strength (if the hitting strength is weak), the game ball B may hit the second at the branch portion 2524. Since it branches to the distribution passage 2522 side, the degree of difficulty of distribution of the game ball B to the second distribution passage 2522 can be made lower than in the embodiment of FIG. 81(a).

In addition, in order to enter the game ball B into the second circulation passage 2522, it is necessary to hit the game ball B entering the first circulation passage 2521 weaker than the striking strength, and the first circulation passage 2521 and Since the communicating branch portion 2524 is provided above the portion of the second circulation passage 2522 that is bent downward, the game ball B that has entered the second circulation passage 2522 is bent downward. It does not bounce upward (to the branch 2524 side) and does not enter the first flow passage 2521 through the branch 2524 . In other words, the branch portion 2524 communicates in one way from the first circulation passage 2521 to the second circulation passage 2522 .

In addition, in this embodiment, when the liquid enters the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521 having a branch portion 2524 in the middle and flows through the first circulation passage 2521, the first circulation passage 2521 side at the branch portion 2524 Or because it branches to either of the second circulation passage 2522 side, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited depending on whether the game ball B branches to which side at the branch portion 2524, and the first circulation The flow of the game ball B in the passage 2521 can be entertained and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if the player hits the game ball B aiming at the second circulation passage 2522, the game ball B enters the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521. , There is a possibility that the first circulation passage 2521 branches to the second circulation passage 2522 side at the branch portion 2524, so depending on whether or not to branch to the second circulation passage 2522 side at the branch portion 2524, It can make the player's heart throb and entertain the player, and when branching to the second distribution passage 2522 side at the branching part 2524, the mistake of the player's hitting operation can be covered and the desired second distribution passage 2522 can be opened. The game ball B is circulated, and the player can be made to feel that he or she has won the game, and the player's interest in the game can be suppressed from being lowered.

The embodiment shown in FIG. 82 is such that the second circulation passage 2522 has a bypass portion 2525 crossing the frame of the center accessory 2500 . In this embodiment, the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 opens upward at a position to the left of the left end of the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 . Therefore, all game balls B hit into the upstream space 2511 above the upper right peripheral wall 2510 flow through the first flow path 2521 . According to this embodiment, when the game ball B enters the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 and circulates through the bypass portion 2525, the game ball B crosses the frame of the center accessory 2500, so that the player side Since the circulation of the game ball B can be made conspicuous from the bypass section 2525, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen after the game ball B circulates through the bypass section 2525. To allow a person to perform a hitting operation of a game ball B aiming at the entrance of a second circulation passage 2522 having a bypass part 2525, and to enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball B and suppress the deterioration of interest. can be done.

[5-9. back unit]
The back unit 3000 on the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 83 to 86 and the like. 83 is a front perspective view of the back unit of the game board, and FIG. 84 is a rear perspective view of the back unit of the game board. FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the rear unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the rear. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the game panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500, the performance display device 1600, and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box shape with an open front and a back box 3010 having a square opening 3010a on the rear wall. and a lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600 . In addition, the back unit 3000 is provided with a general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting a game ball B received in a general winning opening 2001 provided in the starting opening unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 (Fig. 111). ).

The back unit 3000 includes a back first effect unit 3100 attached to the front end of the back box 3010 and a back second effect unit 3200 attached inside the back box 3010 behind the first back effect unit 3100. , the back third effect unit 3300 attached in the back box 3010 behind the back second effect unit 3200, and the starter unit 2100 and the side unit 2200 attached to the front of the back second effect unit 3200 A back left ball discharge unit 3030 that receives the game ball B received in the winning opening 2001 and releases it downward, and a game received in the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 A back right ball ejection unit 3040 for receiving the ball B and ejecting it downward is provided.

The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front, and has a square opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall and a plate frame-like shape protruding backward from the periphery of the opening 3010a with a gap therebetween. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c recessed upward from the inside of the frame on the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b into which upper fixing pieces 1601 of the effect display device 1600 are inserted, and the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b. A notch portion 3010d is provided near the center of the lower side in the left-right direction from the rear end to the rear wall of the back case 3010 to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached (see FIGS. 85 and 86, etc.).

The opening 3010 a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600 . Also, the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the performance display device 1600 to be fitted within the frame. The back box 3010 has a lock mechanism 3020 attached to the left side of the cutout portion 3010d on the rear side as viewed from the rear so as to be slidable to the left and right.

In addition, the back box 3010 has a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixing piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with its front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. As shown in FIG. The back box 3010 has bosses, mounting holes, etc. for mounting each movable effect unit and the like at appropriate positions.

Further, the back box 3010 has an insertion opening 3011 that is recessed rearward from the front end near the center in the vertical direction on both left and right sides. The insertion port 3011 is configured to communicate between the space behind the light guide plate 3110 in the rear first effect unit 3100 described later and the outside of the back box 3010 in a state assembled to the game board 5 . When the game board 5 is transported, this insertion opening 3011 inserts a stuffing between the rotary decorative bodies 3210 from the side of the back box 3010, so that the back second effect unit 3200 is moved by the vibration caused by transportation. The rotary decoration 3210 can be made immovable. Alternatively, when a problem arises in the movement of the rotating decorative body 3210 of the back second effect unit 3200, the problem can be resolved by inserting a finger or a tool through the insertion opening 3011.

[5-9a. Back first production unit]
Next, the back first effect unit 3100 in the back unit will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. FIG. 87(a) is a perspective view of the back first effect unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 87(b) is a perspective view of the back first effect unit of the back unit as seen from the rear. FIG. 88 is a front view showing the relationship between the light guide plate and the decoration substrate in the first rear effect unit. The back first effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached at the front end of the back box 3010 so as to close the opening opened forward.

The back first effect unit 3100 includes a transparent flat light guide plate 3110 that closes the front end opening of the back box 3010, and a plurality of light guide plates 3110 that are arranged above the light guide plate 3110 and emit light toward the upper surface of the light guide plate 3110. A rear first upper decorative substrate 3120 on which LEDs 3121 are mounted, and a rear first left on which a plurality of LEDs 3131 arranged to the left of the light guide plate 3110 and emitting light toward the left surface of the light guide plate 3110 are mounted. A diffuser lens 3140 is provided between the decorative substrate 3130 and the plurality of LEDs 3131 on the rear first left decorative substrate 3130 and the left surface of the light guide plate 3110 to diffuse the light from the LEDs 3131 and illuminate the left surface of the light guide plate 3110. and has.

In addition, the rear first effect unit 3100 includes a transparent plate-like upper base 3151 attached to the upper edge of the front surface of the light guide plate 3110, and an upper base 3151 attached to the rear side of the upper base 3151 to hold the light guide plate 3110 therebetween. A transparent upper rear cover 3152 to which the first upper decorative substrate 3120 is attached, a transparent plate-shaped left base 3153 attached to the front left edge of the light guide plate 3110, and attached to the rear side of the left base 3153. A transparent left rear cover 3154 sandwiching the light guide plate 3110 and having a rear first left decorative substrate 3130 and a diffusion lens 3140 attached thereto, and a transparent flat plate attached to the front right edge of the light guide plate 3110. and a transparent right rear cover 3156 attached to the rear side of the right base 3155 and sandwiching the light guide plate 3110 therebetween.

In addition, the back first effect unit 3100 is attached to the front surface of the upper base 3151, and is attached to the front surface of the back first upper decoration body 3161 on which the relief-like decoration is formed, and the left base 3153. , the back first left decoration 3162 on which the relief-like decoration is formed, the back first right decoration 3163 attached to the front surface of the right base 3155 and on which the relief-like decoration is formed, and the guide. A rear first lower decoration 3164 having a relief-shaped decoration attached to the center of the front lower edge of the light plate 3110 in the left-right direction and a rear first lower decorative substrate 3170 on which a plurality of LEDs 3171 capable of irradiating light are mounted.

The light guide plate 3110 of the back first effect unit 3100 has a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a notch 3111 cut upward in a semicircular shape at the center of the lower edge in the left-right direction. Although illustration is omitted, the light guide plate 3110 includes a first pattern that emits light when irradiated from the upper surface and a second pattern that emits light when irradiated from the left side. The first pattern and the second pattern are patterns different from each other. Although not shown, the first pattern is formed so that the LEDs 3121 of the plurality of LEDs 3121 on the back first upper decorative substrate 3120 emit light in different modes.

The LEDs 3121 and 3131 mounted on the rear first upper decorative substrate 3120 and the rear first left decorative substrate 3130, respectively, are full-color LEDs. In addition, the rear first left decorative substrate 3130 is vertically divided into three. Since the rear first left decorative substrate 3130 is divided into three, the diffuser lens 3140 is also vertically divided into three correspondingly. By causing the LEDs 3121 of the back first upper decorative substrate 3120 to emit light, the first pattern of the light guide plate 3110 can be caused to emit light. The pattern can be illuminated.

The back first upper decoration 3161, the back first left decoration 3162, and the back first right decoration 3163 are provided with plating layers having metallic luster. The back first upper decoration 3161, the back first left decoration 3162, and the back first right decoration 3163 are formed in strips along the upper, left, and right sides of the light guide plate 3110. there is

The rear first lower decoration body 3164 has a pair of portions extending in an arc shape concentrically with the arc of the notch 3111 at the center of the lower edge of the light guide plate 3110, and is open at the top and bottom. It is formed in a substantially annular shape. The back first lower decoration body 3164 has a plurality of three-way decorations arranged in an arc shape on the front surface. In addition, the back first lower decoration body 3164 has projections radially extending so as to pass through the parts of the three-storied decoration. These radial projections are long outward from the trident and short towards the center. The back first lower decorative body 3164 is formed by coating a transparent member with a vapor-deposited layer having metallic luster of a predetermined color and translucency. In the state where the LED 3171 of the back first lower decoration substrate 3170 is not emitting light, the rear first lower decoration body 3164 can visually recognize the decoration on the front side in a good condition from the player side due to the metal luster deposited layer. .

On the rear first lower decoration board 3170, an LED 3171 is mounted at a position behind the part of the back first lower decoration 3164 where the tridente decoration is provided. When the plurality of LEDs 3171 of the back first lower decoration substrate 3170 are caused to emit light, the entire back first lower decoration body 3164 can be decorated with light, and at the same time, the part of the three-way decoration can be brightly decorated with light. A plurality of LEDs 3171 on the back first lower decorative substrate 3170 are full-color LEDs.

When the back first effect unit 3100 is assembled on the game board 5, the light guide plate 3110 extends behind the transparent panel plate 1110 and almost to the front above the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 to display the first pattern. and the second pattern can be displayed by light emission. In addition, the back first effect unit 3100 is assembled on the game board 5, and as shown in FIG. are located near the upper edge, left edge, and right edge in the game area 5a.

In addition, the back first lower decoration 3164 is positioned directly above the out port 1008, and the center of the substantially annular back first lower decoration 3164 substantially coincides with the position of the first starting port 2002. . This back first lower decoration 3164 can decorate the outer side of the rotary decoration 3210 positioned at the lowest specific position among the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 of the back second effect unit 3200 . Therefore, the back first lower decoration 3164 can give a special feeling (or a premium feeling) to the rotary decoration 3210 at a specific position.

[5-9b. Back second production unit]
Next, the back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 89 to 96 and the like. 89 is a perspective view of the back second effect unit of the back unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 90 is a perspective view of the back second effect unit of the back unit as seen from the back. FIG. 91 is an exploded perspective view of the back second effect unit mainly disassembled for each structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 is an exploded perspective view of the back second effect unit mainly disassembled for each structure and viewed from the back. It is a diagram. FIG. 93 is a front view showing a driving mechanism in the second back effect unit. Figures 94(a) to (d) are explanatory diagrams showing the movement of a plurality of rotating decorative bodies in the back second effect unit, and Figures 95(e) to (g) are figures in the back second effect unit continuing from Figure 94. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of several rotating decorations. FIG. 96 is a front view showing the arrangement of LEDs in the second back effect unit.

The back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is attached inside the back box 3010 between the back first effect unit 3100 and the back third effect unit 3300 . The back second effect unit 3200 is arranged in a row on a predetermined circumference, and includes a plurality of (here, 12) disk-shaped rotating decorative bodies 3210 that revolve while rotating. Each of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 has a shaft portion 3210a that protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape from the center of the rear surface. The plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 have translucency. A plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are provided in front of a back second outer decorative body 3228 and a back second inner decorative body 3229 which will be described later.

The plurality of rotating decorations 3210 are composed of a plurality of (here, four) special rotating decorations 3211 and the remaining (here, eight) ordinary rotating decorations 3212 . The special rotary decorations 3211 are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction with a certain number (here, two) of the normal rotary decorations 3212 interposed therebetween. In this embodiment, the special rotary decoration 3211 is decorated with a trident. The special rotating decorative body 3211 is formed so that the toe portion is red and other portions are gold with metallic luster, and the whole is translucent. The ordinary rotary decoration 3212 is decorated with petals. The ordinary rotating decorative body 3212 has a petal portion formed in a pink color with metallic luster, and the other fringing portion formed in white, and has translucency as a whole.

The back second effect unit 3200 has a unit base 3220 having a square outer shape and a polygonal through hole 3220a in the center, and an annular fixed gear portion 3220b having a diameter larger than the through hole 3220a, and a unit base. It is rotatably attached to the front surface of the unit base 3220 and penetrates back and forth at regular intervals in the circumferential direction on the same circumference larger than the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220, and the shaft portion 3210a of the rotary decoration 3210 can rotate. and an annular drive ring 3221 having a plurality of shaft holes 3221a to be inserted into and an annular ring gear portion 3221b provided outside the plurality of shaft holes 3221a.

In addition, the back second effect unit 3200 is attached to the rear surface of the upper right corner of the unit base 3220, and has a back second driving motor 3222 whose rotating shaft penetrates the unit base 3220 and protrudes forward. A drive gear 3223 in the shape of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of a drive motor 3222 is in mesh with the drive gear 3223 and with the ring gear portion 3221b of the drive ring 3221, and is rotatable on the unit base 3220. a transmission gear 3224 in the form of a spur gear attached to a rotating body gear 3225, which is fixed to the rear ends of the shaft portions 3210a of the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210 and meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220; , is equipped with

In addition, the rear second effect unit 3200 is provided in front of the drive ring 3221 and attached to the unit base 3220, and has a rectangular outer shape and a through hole 3226a having a diameter slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the drive ring 3221. and an outer base 3226 provided in front of the drive ring 3221 in the through hole 3226a of the outer base 3226 and attached to the unit base 3220, and has a circular outer shape slightly larger than the inner diameter of the drive ring 3221. and an inner base 3227 having a polygonal through-hole 3227a in the center and an outer base 3226 attached to the front surface thereof. A back second outer decoration body 3228 having a through hole 3228a with a smaller diameter, and a back second outer decoration body 3228 is attached to the front surface of the inner base 3227 in the through hole 3228a of the back second outer decoration body 3228, and the inner base 3227 has an outer shape. A back second inner decorative body 3229 having a circular and polygonal through hole 3229a in the center larger than the outer diameter of the second inner decorative body 3229, and a unit base 3220 inserted into the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229. and an annular back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 attached to.

Furthermore, the back second effect unit 3200 includes a rotational position detection sensor 3231 for detecting that the rotating decorative body 3210 that revolves while rotating is positioned at the lowest specific position, and a special position that revolves while rotating. A special rotational position detection sensor 3232 is provided for detecting that the rotary decorative body 3211 is positioned at the lowest specific position.

In addition, the back second effect unit 3200 is attached to the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 between the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 and the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second inner decorative body 3229. It has a rear second decoration substrate 3240 on which a plurality of LEDs 3241 are mounted on the front surface. By appropriately causing the LED 3241 of the back second decoration substrate 3240 to emit light, the rotary decoration 3210, the back second outer decoration 3228, and the back second inner decoration 3229 can be decorated with light.

The unit base 3220 is transparent and formed in a flat plate shape. The drive ring 3221 is formed with a plurality of shaft holes 3221 a that are the same in number as the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 . The inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 is a shape in which trapezoidal portions protruding toward the center are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The trapezoidally protruding portions are provided in the same number as the rotary decorations 3210 (here, 12 pieces). In this embodiment, 12 trapezoidally protruding portions are provided at angles of 30 degrees each in a clockwise direction from the position of the upper end of the circumference.

The drive ring 3221 has a plurality of detection pieces 3221c protruding toward the center from the inner periphery of portions corresponding to the plurality of shaft holes 3221a. In addition, the drive ring 3221 further extends toward the center from the detection pieces 3221c which are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction with a certain number (here, two) of the detection pieces 3221c interposed therebetween. It has a plurality of (here, four) special detection pieces 3221d. That is, the drive ring 3221 of this embodiment has the same number (12 pieces) of detection pieces 3221c as the rotary decoration 3210, and the same number (4 pieces) of special detection pieces 3221d as the special rotary decoration 3211. have. Although not shown, the drive ring 3221 is rotatably supported by a plurality of rollers provided on the unit base 3220 .

The outer base 3226 has the same outer shape as the unit base 3220 . The outer base 3226 is transparent and flat. The outer base 3226 is divided into four parts by a vertical line passing through the center of the through hole 3226 a and a horizontal line, and each part is attached to the unit base 3220 .

The inner base 3227 has a polygonal through-hole 3227a whose inner circumference is the same shape and size as the inner circumference of the through-hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 . The inner base 3227 is transparent and formed in a flat plate shape. The inner base 3227 is divided into four sections, each of which is attached to the unit base 3220, with crosshairs obtained by rotating a vertical line and a horizontal line passing through the center clockwise by about 20 degrees. there is In the present embodiment, the divided portions of the inner base 3227 divided into four are made different from the divided portions of the outer base 3226, so that the unit base 3220 can be compared with the case where each divided portion is the same. The strength and rigidity can be improved when the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227 are attached to each other.

The back second outer decorative body 3228 is formed to have the same shape and size as the outer base 3226 . The inner diameter of the through hole 3228a of the rear second outer decoration 3228 is slightly larger than the circumference of the drive ring 3221 on which the plurality of shaft holes 3221a are arranged. The back second outer decorative body 3228 has a red circular decorative portion 3228b provided in a circular shape with a constant width outward from the through hole 3227a, and two upper corners of the four corners outside the circular decorative portion 3228b. and a corner decoration portion 3228c provided in the . The annular decorative portion 3228b is decorated with stylized plant leaves arranged in a certain pattern in the circumferential direction. The corner decorative portion 3228c is decorated to imitate Karahafu. The back second outer decorative body 3228 has a relief-like decoration formed on its surface. The back second outer decorative body 3228 has a vapor deposition layer having metallic luster and translucency. The back second outer decoration 3228 is divided into four like the outer base 3226 .

The rear second inner decorative body 3229 has a circular outer diameter slightly smaller than the same circumference along which the plurality of shaft holes 3221a in the drive ring 3221 are arranged. The inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3229a of the rear second inner decorative body 3229 is substantially the same as the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3227a of the inner base 3227, and is formed to have the same size. The back second inner decorative body 3229 has a red decoration in which stylized plant leaves are arranged in a certain pattern in the circumferential direction so as to form a pair with the annular decorative portion 3228b of the back second outer decorative body 3228. is applied. The back second inner decorative body 3229 has a relief-like decoration formed on its surface. The back second inner decorative body 3229 has a vapor deposition layer having metallic luster and translucency. The back second inner decorative body 3229 is divided into four like the inner base 3227 .

The back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 is formed to have a length that connects the peripheral edge of the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220 and the peripheral edge of the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decorative body 3229 in the front-rear direction. The inner peripheral side between the base 3220 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 is closed. The back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 has a vapor deposition layer having metallic luster and translucency.

A rotational position detection sensor 3231 is attached to the rear surface of the rear second decorative substrate 3240 . The rotational position detection sensor 3231 detects the lowest detection piece 3221c among the plurality of detection pieces 3221c of the driving ring 3221 (see FIG. 93).

A special rotational position detection sensor 3232 is attached between the unit base 3220 and the inner base 3227 and is for detecting the special detection piece 3221 d of the drive ring 3221 . More specifically, the special rotational position detection sensor 3232 has moved one position clockwise (rotated 30 degrees) from the lowermost portion of the plurality of trapezoidally protruding portions in the through hole 3220a of the unit base 3220. (see Figure 93).

A plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the front surface of the back second decorative board 3240 are full-color LEDs. The rear second decorative substrate 3240 has a rectangular outer shape, and a polygonal through-hole 3240a is formed in the center. In addition, the rear second decorative substrate 3240 is formed with an insertion hole 3240b penetrating in an annular shape on the outer peripheral side of the through hole 3240a. The back second decorative board 3240 is attached to the outer base 3226 at the portion outside the insertion hole 3240b, and is attached to the inner base 3227 at the portion inside the insertion hole 3240b. The rear second decorative substrate 3240 is divided into eight parts corresponding to the four divisions of the outer base 3226 and the inner base 3227, respectively.

Next, the movement of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 in the back second effect unit 3200 will be described. First, in the back second effect unit 3200, the shaft portions 3210a protruding rearward from each of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are arranged in such a manner that the inner periphery of the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the back second inner decorative body 3229 are arranged from the front. , the insertion hole 3240b of the rear second decorative substrate 3240, and between the inner periphery of the outer base 3226 and the outer periphery of the inner base 3227, and the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221. While being inserted, the rear end protrudes rearward from the drive ring 3221 through the shaft hole 3221a. A rotating body gear 3225 is fixed to the rear end of the shaft part 3210a of the rotating decorative body 3210, and meshes with the fixed gear part 3220b of the unit base 3220. As shown in FIG.

Among the plurality of rotary decorations 3210, four special rotary decorations 3211 are moved in the counterclockwise direction from the shaft hole 3221a corresponding to the special detection piece 3221d in the drive ring 3221 when viewed from the front. A shaft portion 3210a of the special rotary ornament 3211 is inserted through the shaft hole 3221a. The remaining eight normal rotary decorations 3212 have their shafts 3210a inserted into the remaining shaft holes in which the shafts 3210a of the special rotary decorations 3211 are not inserted.

In the normal state, the back second effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment has 4 special rotating decorations 3211 out of 12 rotating decorations 3210, as shown in FIGS. They are positioned at both ends in the vertical direction and both ends in the horizontal direction on the circumference. In other words, the four special rotary ornaments 3211 are positioned at 3 o'clock, 6 o'clock, 9 o'clock and 12 o'clock on the watch, and the remaining eight ordinary rotary ornaments 3212 are They are located at 1 o'clock, 2 o'clock, 4 o'clock, 5 o'clock, 7 o'clock, 8 o'clock, 10 o'clock and 11 o'clock. In this embodiment, the 6 o'clock position is the specific position of the rotary decoration 3210 .

In this normal state, the rotational position detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c of the drive ring 3221, and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 detects the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221 (Fig. 93).

When the back second effect unit 3200 is assembled on the game board 5, as shown in FIG. All the rotary ornaments 3210 can be visually recognized from the front in good condition except for . In addition, in the state assembled to the game board 5, the display screen of the performance display device 1600 arranged behind is viewed from the front through the through hole 3229a (the second inner peripheral decoration 3230) of the back second inner decoration 3229. Visible in good condition.

In a normal state, the rotary decoration 3210 positioned at the specific position of the lowermost 6 o'clock position is the center of the substantially annular back first lower decoration 3164 in the back first effect unit 3100. , and the outside is decorated with the back first lower decoration body 3164 . In addition, the rotary decoration body 3210 at the specific position is located behind the first start opening 2002 and can decorate the rear of the first start opening 2002 .

In this normal state, when the driving gear 3223 is rotated clockwise by the rear second driving motor 3222, the transmission gear 3224 meshing with the driving gear 3223 and the ring gear portion 3221b meshing with the transmission gear 3224 are rotated. , the drive ring 3221 rotates clockwise. When the drive ring 3221 rotates, the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221 also moves in the circumferential direction, and the rotating decorative body 3210 also moves in the circumferential direction via the shaft portion 3210a inserted into the shaft hole 3221a. Become.

At this time, since the rotating body gear 3225 fixed to the shaft portion 3210a of the rotary decorative body 3210 is meshed with the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220, as the shaft portion 3210a moves in the circumferential direction, The rotary gear 3225 rotates about the shaft portion 3210a in the same direction as the rotation direction of the drive ring 3221 (here, clockwise direction). As a result, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated clockwise by the rear second drive motor 3222, the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210 revolve clockwise while rotating clockwise. Become.

In this embodiment, the gear ratio between the fixed gear portion 3220b of the unit base 3220 and the rotating body gear 3225 is configured such that when the drive ring 3221 rotates 30 degrees, each rotating decorative body 3210 rotates once. .

As described above, when the driving ring 3221 rotates clockwise, the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 revolve while rotating. The detection sensor 3231 detects the detection piece 3221c of the drive ring 3221, and the special rotational position detection sensor 3232 does not detect the special detection piece 3221d of the drive ring 3221 (see FIG. 94(a)).

Then, when the driving ring 3221 rotates further in the clockwise direction and the special rotating decoration 3211 approaches a specific position, the normal rotating decoration preceding the special rotating decoration 3211 with respect to the rotation direction of the driving ring 3221 The special detection piece 3221d corresponding to the shaft hole 3221a into which the shaft portion 3210a of the body 3212 is inserted approaches the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 (FIGS. 94(b) to (d) and FIG. 95(e). ), see (f)).

When the drive ring 3221 further rotates clockwise and the special rotary decoration 3211 reaches a specific position, the shaft 3210a of the special rotary decoration 3211 is inserted into the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221. The detection piece 3221c is detected by the rotation position detection sensor 3231, and the shaft hole 3221a into which the shaft portion 3210a of the normal rotation decoration 3212 preceding the rotation direction of the special rotation decoration 3211 is inserted. A special detection piece 3221d projecting from the detection piece 3221c corresponding to is detected by the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 (see FIG. 95(g)). That is, when the special detection piece 3221d is detected by the special rotation position detection sensor 3232, it is detected that the special rotation decoration 3211 is positioned at the specific position.

The back second effect unit 3200 rotates the back second drive motor 3222 in the opposite direction to rotate the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 in the counterclockwise direction opposite to the above. It is also possible to revolve in the counterclockwise direction.

Next, the light emitting effect by the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decoration board 3240 in the back second effect unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 96 and the like. A plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decorative substrate 3240 are high-intensity full-color LEDs. These LEDs 3241 can irradiate the player side with the emitted color regardless of the decoration colors of the rotary decoration 3210, the back second outer decoration 3228, and the back second inner decoration 3229 arranged on the front side. can. That is, depending on the emission color of the LEDs 3241, the rotating decoration 3210, the back second outer decoration 3228, and the back second inner decoration 3229 can be illuminated with appropriate colors.

A plurality of LEDs 3241 on the back second decorative board 3240 are in a state (normal state) in which the rotating decorative body 3210 is stopped at a specific position, and 12 LEDs are provided at the rear portion of each rotating decorative body 3210. , 12 intermediate LED groups 3255 provided between each rotating decoration LED group 3250, and the corner decoration part 3228c of the back second outer decoration 3228. An upper left corner LED group 3256 and an upper right corner LED group 3257 that are provided at the position, a lower left corner LED group 3258 that is provided at the lower left corner behind the side unit 2200, the starting port unit 2100 and the side and a winning hole LED group 3259 provided in the rear portion of each general winning hole 2001 of the unit 2200 .

The 12 rotating decoration LED groups 3250 are arranged in the clockwise direction, with the first rotating decoration LED group 3250a positioned behind the lowermost specific position, the second rotating decoration LED group 3250b, and the third rotation. Decoration LED group 3250c, fourth rotary decoration LED group 3250d, fifth rotary decoration LED group 3250e, sixth rotary decoration LED group 3250f, seventh rotary decoration LED group 3250g, eighth rotary decoration LED group 3250h , a ninth rotary decoration LED group 3250i, a tenth rotary decoration LED group 3250j, an eleventh rotary decoration LED group 3250k, and a twelfth rotary decoration LED group 3250l. The LEDs 3241 provided in each of the 12 rotating decoration LED groups 3250 can emit light independently.

Each of the 12 rotating decoration LED groups 3250 emits radiation from the rotation center of the rotation decoration 3210 through the rotation center of the rotation decoration 3210, and the rotation center of the rotation decoration 3210 around the rotation center of the rotation decoration 3210. and a first LED group 3251 , a second LED group 3252 , a third LED group 3253 and a fourth LED group 3254 . The four first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254 that constitute one rotating decorative body LED group 3250 are provided with LEDs 3241, It is possible to emit light independently

The first LED group 3251 of the rotating decoration LED group 3250 is on the revolution center side (inside) of the rotation center of the rotation decoration 3210, and on the counterclockwise revolution direction side of the radiation passing through the rotation center of the rotation decoration 3210. positioned. The second LED group 3252 is located on the opposite side (outside) of the rotation center of the rotating decorative body 3210 to the revolution center side with respect to the first LED group 3251 . The third LED group 3253 is located on the opposite side (clockwise direction side) of the radiation passing through the rotation center of the rotary decoration 3210 with respect to the first LED group 3251 . The fourth LED group 3254 is located on the opposite side (outside) of the rotation center of the rotary decoration 3210 from the rotation center of the third LED group 3253 .

The 12 intermediate LED groups 3255 have a first intermediate LED group 3255a that is adjacent to the lowermost specific position in the clockwise direction, and a second intermediate LED group 3255b that is clockwise. third intermediate LED group 3255c, fourth intermediate LED group 3255d, fifth intermediate LED group 3255e, sixth intermediate LED group 3255f, seventh intermediate LED group 3255g, eighth intermediate LED group 3255h, ninth intermediate LED group 3255i, A tenth intermediate LED group 3255j, an eleventh intermediate LED group 3255k, and a twelfth intermediate LED group 3255l are provided.

In the normal state, the back second effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment emits light from the LEDs 3241 of the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 among the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decoration substrate 3240. The rotary decoration 3210 can be decorated with light. In other words, the player can see 12 circular luminous decorations arranged on the circumference. At this time, each rotary decoration 3210 can be illuminated with a different color, or the special rotary decoration 3211 can be illuminated with a different color from the normal rotary decoration 3212 .

In addition, by causing the 12 rotating decoration LED groups 3250 to emit light in order in the circumferential direction, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect in which the light rotates in the circumferential direction. At this time, before the next rotary decoration LED group 3250 is caused to emit light, an intermediate LED group 3255 positioned between the rotary decoration LED group 3250 may be caused to emit light. As a result, the light emission between the rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 is compensated for by the light emission of the intermediate LED group 3255, so that the player can see a smoother turning light emission effect.

Further, since each rotating decoration LED group 3250 is divided into four groups of a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, and a fourth LED group 3254, for example, the first After the LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 are illuminated, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are illuminated, followed by the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254. When the intermediate LED group 3255 is made to emit light, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting effect of smoother turning or a light-emitting effect of turning in small steps. Then, when the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are revolving while rotating, if the above-described light emission effect is performed in accordance with the revolution speed of the rotating decorative bodies 3210, it is as if the rotating decorative bodies 3210 themselves are provided with LEDs. It is possible to show the player an effect as if the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves while emitting light.

Further, in each rotating decoration LED group 3250, for example, a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, a fourth LED group 3254, a first LED group 3251, ... By emitting light in this order, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect as if the light is rotating in one rotary decoration LED group 3250 . As a result, when the rotating decorative body 3210 is stopped in a normal state, the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254 are caused to emit light in order. It is possible to give the player the illusion that the rotating decorative body 3210 is rotating (rotating) without revolving.

Further, in each of the rotating decoration LED groups 3250, for example, after the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are caused to emit light, the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are caused to emit light. It is possible to show the player a luminescence effect that moves to and spreads out. Alternatively, if the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are caused to emit light after the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are caused to emit light, the player can see a light emitting effect that converges from the outside toward the center. be able to.

In addition, when the LEDs 3241 of the rotary decoration LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are caused to emit light at the same time, the player can see the ring-shaped luminous decoration. At this time, by increasing the luminance of the luminous decoration, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize (difficult to see) the shape of the rotating decorative body 3210 and the like. As a result, for example, in a state in which the rotary decoration 3210 is made difficult to see by increasing the brightness and is illuminated in an annular shape, the rotary decoration 3210 is rotated and revolved to change the position of the special rotary decoration 3211, After that, by lowering the luminance or extinguishing the light, the rotary decoration 3210 can be easily seen, so that the player can see an effect as if the rotary decoration 3210 is suddenly moving.

Thus, according to the back second effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment, various movable effects can be performed by the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, and various light emission can be performed by the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decoration substrate 3240. can perform. In addition, by appropriately combining the movable effects and the light emitting effects, it is possible to present a variety of effects to the player, thereby making it difficult for the player to get bored.

[5-9c. Back third production unit]
Next, the back third effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 97 to 101 and the like. 97 is a front perspective view of the back third effect unit of the back unit, and FIG. 98 is a rear perspective view of the back third effect unit of the back unit. Fig. 99 is an exploded perspective view of the back third effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and Fig. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the back third effect unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. It is a diagram. FIG. 101 is a front view showing the drive mechanism and decoration substrate in the third back effect unit with the left horizontal ring decoration and the right horizontal ring decoration moved to the appearing position. The back third effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached inside the back box 3010 behind the back second effect unit 3200 .

The back third effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached in the back box 3010, and includes a rectangular frame-shaped unit base 3301, an upper unit 3310 provided on the upper front surface of the unit base 3301, and the unit base 3301. A lower unit 3330 provided on the lower front surface of the unit base 3301, a left unit 3350 provided on the left front surface of the unit base 3301, and a right unit 3370 provided on the right front surface of the unit base 3301. and have.

The upper unit 3310 of the back third effect unit 3300 includes an upper vertical ring decoration 3311 attached to the upper part of the unit base 3301 near the center in the left-right direction so as to be openable, and attached to the rear side of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311. an upper vertical ring decoration substrate 3315 attached to the base 3301; a rear third upper driving motor 3320 attached to the upper right corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301; A drive gear 3321 in the shape of a spur gear attached to the rotary shaft of a motor 3320, a rotary link member 3322 rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3321 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and rotation of the rotary link member 3322 and a slide link member 3323 that slides in the left-right direction to open and close the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 .

In addition, the upper unit 3310 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover an upper detection sensor 3324 for detecting the open/closed position of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and a part of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 from the front side. A front cover 3325, a gear cover 3326 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3321 from behind, and an upper vertical ring decoration 3311 bias the slide link member 3323 in a closing direction. and an upper spring 3327 .

The upper vertical ring ornamental body 3311 includes a first ornamental body 3312 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth at its proximal end, and a right side of the proximal end of the first ornamental body 3312. and a second decorative body 3313 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending forward and backward on the base end side. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are formed symmetrically with respect to the vertical line, except for some parts. The first ornamental body 3312 and the second ornamental body 3313 extend short in a straight line from the base end side, and are approximately semicircular so that the extension line of the straight portion from the tip faces the inner side of the bowstring. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the bow of the string is further directed in the same direction and formed into a wave shape extending in the direction away from the base end side in an approximately 1/2 semicircular arc shape.

The first ornamental body 3312 and the second ornamental body 3313 extend with a substantially constant width from the base end side to the tip end side. The first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 have three large-diameter large-diameter decorative parts 3311a and six small-diameter small-diameter decorative parts 3311b along the extending direction.

The first ornamental body 3312 has a shaft hole 3312a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and is provided in an arc shape centering on the axial hole 3312a so as to face the second ornamental body 3313 side. A first gear portion 3312b, a link piece 3312c protruding from the base end side to the opposite side to the tip end side, and an elongated hole-shaped link slit 3312d penetrating the link piece 3312c and extending toward the shaft hole 3312a. and have A transmission pin 3323b of a slide link member 3323, which will be described later, is slidably inserted into the link slit 3312d.

The second ornamental body 3313 has a shaft hole 3313a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and is provided in an arc shape centered on the axial hole 3313a so as to face the first ornamental body 3312 side. and a second gear portion 3313b that meshes with the first gear portion 3312b. When the first decoration 3312 is rotated, the second decoration 3313 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decoration 3312 due to the engagement between the first gear portion 3312b and the second gear portion 3313b. As a result, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 is movable such that the first decoration 3312 and the second decoration 3313 are opened and closed at the tip side around the base end side.

The upper vertical ring decoration substrate 3315 is attached to the rear surface of each of the first decoration 3312 and the second decoration 3313, and the first LED 3316 behind the large diameter decoration portion 3311a and the rear side of the small diameter decoration portion 3311b. A second LED 3317 is mounted. In this embodiment, the first LED 3316 is a full color LED and the second LED 3317 is a single color LED.

The rear third upper drive motor 3320 uses a motor with high drive torque. The rotary link member 3322 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position on the left side of the rear third upper drive motor 3320 and at the same height as the rotation axis of the rear third upper drive motor 3320 . The rotary link member 3322 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3322a that meshes with the driving gear 3321, and a crankpin 3322b that projects forward in a cylindrical shape from an eccentric position. A crankpin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3323a of a slide link member 3323, which will be described later.

The base end of the slide link member 3323 is positioned near the rear third upper driving motor 3320, and the tip end thereof is positioned in the center of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction (the portion where the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is rotatably supported). ), and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the horizontal direction. The slide link member 3323 is provided above the center of rotation of the rotary link member 3322 . The slide link member 3323 has a transmission slit 3323a extending vertically on the base end side and into which the crank pin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 is slidably inserted, and a forward cylindrical projection on the distal end side. It has a transmission pin 3323b slidably inserted into the link slit 3312d of the decorative body 3312 and a detection piece 3323c detected by an upper detection sensor 3324 on the base end side.

The transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323 is located to the right of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3322, and its lower end is located below the rotation center of the rotation link member 3322, and extends toward the tip side. It is curved like Further, the slide link member 3323 has a hook portion 3323d to which one end side (left end side) of the upper spring 3327 is hooked. The slide link member 3323 is always biased rightward by an upper spring 3327 hooked to the hook 3323d.

In the normal state, the slide link member 3323 of the upper unit 3310 is positioned at the end of movement to the right, and the tips of the first decoration 3312 and the second decoration 3313 are farthest apart from each other and the upper vertical ring The decorative body 3311 is in the state of the most open standby position. When the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 is in the standby position, the first decoration 3312 and the second decoration 3313 are positioned near the upper edge of the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301 . Also, in a normal state, the crank pin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 is positioned at the bent portion of the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, the detection piece 3323c of the slide link member 3323 is detected by the upper detection sensor 3324 in a normal state.

In this normal state, the tip end sides of the first decoration 3312 and the second decoration 3313 of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 are away from the vertical line passing through the center of rotation of each, so that the gravitational force exerted on each A rotational moment acts to make the tip ends approach each other, and the rotational moment moves the slide link member 3323 to the left through the link slit 3312d of the first ornament 3312 and the transmission pin 3323b of the slide link member 3323. There is a force acting to move it. The force to move the slide link member 3323 to the left acts on the crank pin 3322b via the transmission slit 3323a of the slide link member 3323 to move the crank pin 3322b to the left.

In a normal state, the crankpin 3322b is positioned below the center of revolution (the center of rotation of the rotary link member 3322). However, since the crank pin 3322b is positioned at the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a, the crank pin 3322b cannot revolve further in the clockwise direction, and the crank pin 3322b revolves. no. That is, in a normal state, even if a force from the side of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 acts, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 does not close (moves to the appearance position side), and the standby position remains open. is locked in this state, and the load from the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 side to the rear third upper driving motor 3320 is cut off.

In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3322 is rotated counterclockwise via the drive gear 3321 by the rear third upper drive motor 3320, the crankpin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 rises in the transmission slit 3323a. The slide link member 3323 slides leftward against the biasing force of the upper spring 3327 . When the slide link member 3323 moves to the left, the transmission pin 3323b at the tip moves the first decoration 3312 through the link slit 3312d so that the tip side moves downward in a counterclockwise direction around the shaft hole 3312a. While rotating in the direction, the second decoration 3313 rotates clockwise about the shaft hole 3313a by the second gear portion 3313b meshing with the first gear portion 3312b. That is, the tip of the first ornamental body 3312 and the tip of the second ornamental body 3313 rotate so as to approach each other (so that the upper vertical ring ornamental body 3311 closes).

Further, when the slide link member 3323 slides to the left, the detection piece 3323c also moves to the left, so the upper detection sensor 3324 is in a non-detection state.

As the crankpin 3322b of the rotary link member 3322 revolves counterclockwise, the crankpin 3322b slides upward in the transmission slit 3323a and then slides downward. When it revolves 180 degrees or more from the state and is positioned in the vicinity of the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a (below the center of revolution), the drive of the rear third upper drive motor 3320 stops. In this state, the tips of the first decoration 3312 and the second decoration 3313 are close to each other so that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 is closed. The appearance position state is a state in which the first decorative body 3312 and the second decorative body 3313 are each rotated 50 degrees from the standby position state.

In this emerging position, the biasing force of the upper spring 3327 acts to move the slide link member 3323 to the right. A force is acting to move it to the right. In this appearance position, the crankpin 3322b is positioned below the center of revolution (the center of rotation of the rotary link member 3322), so that the crankpin 3322b moves downward and to the right. However, since the crankpin 3322b is positioned at the lower end of the transmission slit 3323a, the crankpin 3322b cannot revolve further in the counterclockwise direction, and the crankpin 3322b revolves. never do. In other words, in the appearance position state, even if the force from the upper spring 3327 or the like acts, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 does not open (moves to the standby position side), and the appearance position state remains closed. , and the load from the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 side to the rear third upper drive motor 3320 is cut off.

In this embodiment, the first ornamental body 3312 and the second ornamental body 3313 do not rotate until their tips are in contact with each other, and are rotated 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 is moved from the standby position to the appearing position side, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 (the first decoration 3312 and the second decoration 3313) enters the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. Positioned. In addition, when moving the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 from the appearance position to the standby position, the rear third upper drive motor 3320 is operated as described above until the detection piece 3323c of the slide link member 3323 is detected by the upper detection sensor 3324. can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

Thus, in the upper unit 3310, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 can be opened and closed between the open waiting position state and the closed appearing position state by the rear third upper drive motor 3320.

In addition, in this embodiment, the driving gear 3321 is rotated with high torque by driving the rear third upper driving motor 3320 by a constant current driving method, and the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311 is moved to the standby position and the appearing position. and can be moved (opened and closed) in an extremely short time of 650 ms.

The lower unit 3330 of the back third effect unit 3300 includes a lower vertical ring decoration 3331 attached to the lower part of the unit base 3301 near the center in the left-right direction so as to be openable, and attached to the rear side of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331. a lower vertical ring decoration substrate 3335 attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301; A drive gear 3341 in the shape of a spur gear attached to the rotary shaft of a motor 3340, a rotary link member 3342 rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3341 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and rotation of the rotary link member 3342 and a slide link member 3343 that slides in the left-right direction to open and close the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 .

In addition, the lower unit 3330 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover a part of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 from the front side, and a lower detection sensor 3344 for detecting the open/closed position of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331. A front cover 3345, a gear cover 3346 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the drive gear 3341 from behind, and a lower vertical ring decoration 3331 bias the slide link member 3343 in a closing direction. A lower spring 3347 is provided.

The lower vertical ring ornamental body 3331 includes a first ornamental body 3332 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth at its proximal end, and a left side of the proximal end of the first ornamental body 3332. and a second decorative body 3333 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending forward and backward on the base end side. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are formed symmetrically with respect to the vertical line, except for some parts. The first ornamental body 3332 and the second ornamental body 3333 extend short in a straight line from the base end side, and are approximately semicircular so that the extension line of the straight portion from the tip faces the inside of the bowel of the string. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the bow of the string is further directed in the same direction and formed into a wave shape extending in the direction away from the base end side in an approximately 1/2 semicircular arc shape.

The first ornamental body 3332 and the second ornamental body 3333 extend with a substantially constant width from the base end side to the tip end side. The first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 have three large-diameter large-diameter decorative parts 3331a and six small-diameter small-diameter decorative parts 3331b along the extending direction.

The first ornamental body 3332 has a shaft hole 3332a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and is provided in an arc shape centering on the shaft hole 3332a so as to face the second ornamental body 3333 side. A first gear portion 3332b, a link piece 3332c protruding from the base end side to the side opposite to the tip side, and an elongated hole-shaped link slit 3332d penetrating the link piece 3332c and extending toward the shaft hole 3312a. and have A transmission pin 3343b of a slide link member 3343, which will be described later, is slidably inserted into the link slit 3332d.

The second ornamental body 3333 has a shaft hole 3333a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and is provided in an arc shape centered on the axial hole 3333a so as to face the first ornamental body 3332 side. and a second gear portion 3333b that meshes with the first gear portion 3332b. When the first decoration 3332 is rotated, the second decoration 3333 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decoration 3332 due to the engagement between the first gear portion 3332b and the second gear portion 3333b. As a result, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 is movable such that the first decoration 3332 and the second decoration 3333 are opened and closed at the tip side around the base end side.

The lower vertical ring decorative substrate 3335 is attached to the rear surface of each of the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333, and the first LED 3336 behind the large-diameter decorative portion 3331a and the rear side of the small-diameter decorative portion 3331b. A second LED 3337 is mounted. In this embodiment, the first LED 3336 is a full color LED and the second LED 3337 is a single color LED.

A motor with high drive torque is used for the rear third lower drive motor 3340 . The rotary link member 3342 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position on the right side of the rear third lower drive motor 3340 and at the same height as the rotation axis of the rear third lower drive motor 3340 . The rotary link member 3342 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3342a that meshes with the drive gear 3341, and a crankpin 3342b that projects forward in a cylindrical shape from an eccentric position. A crankpin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3343a of a slide link member 3343, which will be described later.

The base end of the slide link member 3343 is located in the vicinity of the rear third lower drive motor 3340, and the tip end thereof is located in the center of the unit base 3301 in the left-right direction (the portion where the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 is rotatably supported). ), and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the horizontal direction. The slide link member 3343 is provided below the center of rotation of the rotary link member 3342 . The slide link member 3343 has a transmission slit 3343a that extends vertically on the base end side and into which the crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 is slidably inserted, and a forward cylindrical projection on the distal end side. It has a transmission pin 3343b slidably inserted into the link slit 3332d of the decorative body 3332, and a detection piece 3343c detected by a lower detection sensor 3344 on the base end side.

The transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343 is positioned to the left of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3342, and its upper end is positioned above the rotation center of the rotation link member 3342, and extends toward the distal end side. It is curved like Further, the slide link member 3343 has a hook portion 3343d to which one end side (left end side) of the lower spring 3347 is hooked. The slide link member 3343 is always biased leftward by a lower spring 3347 hooked to the hook 3343d.

In the normal state of the lower unit 3330, the slide link member 3343 is positioned at the leftward movement end, and the ends of the first decoration 3332 and the second decoration 3333 are farthest apart from each other and the lower vertical ring The decorative body 3331 is in the state of the most open standby position. When the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 is in the standby position, the first decoration 3332 and the second decoration 3333 are positioned near the lower edge of the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301 . Also, in a normal state, the crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 is positioned at the bent portion of the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, the detection piece 3343 c of the slide link member 3343 is detected by the lower detection sensor 3344 in a normal state.

In this normal state, the tip end sides of the first decoration 3332 and the second decoration 3333 of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 are away from the vertical line passing through the center of rotation of each of them. A rotational moment acts to make the tip ends approach each other, and the rotational moment moves the slide link member 3343 to the right through the link slit 3332d of the first decorative body 3332 and the transmission pin 3343b of the slide link member 3343. There is a force acting to move it. The force to move the slide link member 3343 to the right acts on the crank pin 3342b through the transmission slit 3343a of the slide link member 3343 to move the crank pin 3342b to the right.

In a normal state, the crankpin 3342b is positioned above the center of revolution (the center of rotation of the rotary link member 3342), so that the crankpin 3342b moves upward and to the right. However, since the crank pin 3342b is positioned at the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a, the crank pin 3342b cannot revolve further clockwise, and the crank pin 3342b does not revolve. no. That is, in a normal state, even if a force from the side of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 acts, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 does not open further, and is locked in the standby position. The load from the ring decoration 3331 side to the rear third lower drive motor 3340 is cut off.

In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3342 is rotated counterclockwise via the drive gear 3341 by the rear third lower drive motor 3340, the crank pin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 descends in the transmission slit 3343a. The slide link member 3343 slides rightward against the biasing force of the lower spring 3347 . When the slide link member 3343 moves to the right, the transmission pin 3343b at the tip moves the first decoration 3332 through the link slit 3332d so that the tip side moves upward in a counterclockwise direction around the shaft hole 3332a. While rotating in the direction, the second decoration body 3333 rotates clockwise about the shaft hole 3333a by the second gear portion 3333b meshing with the first gear portion 3332b. That is, the tip of the first ornamental body 3332 and the tip of the second ornamental body 3333 rotate so as to approach each other (so that the lower vertical ring ornamental body 3331 closes).

Further, when the slide link member 3343 slides to the right, the detection piece 3343c also moves to the right, so that the lower detection sensor 3344 is in a non-detection state.

As the crankpin 3342b of the rotary link member 3342 revolves counterclockwise, the crankpin 3342b slides downward in the transmission slit 3343a and then slides upward, so that the crankpin 3342b moves normally. When it revolves 180 degrees or more from the state and is positioned in the vicinity of the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a (above the center of revolution), the drive of the rear third lower drive motor 3340 stops. In this state, the ends of the first decoration 3332 and the second decoration 3333 are close to each other so that the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 is closed. The appearance position state is a state in which the first decorative body 3332 and the second decorative body 3333 are each rotated 50 degrees from the standby position state.

In this emerging position, the biasing force of the lower spring 3347 acts to move the slide link member 3343 to the left. A force is acting to move it to the left. In this emerging position, the crankpin 3342b is positioned above the center of revolution (the center of rotation of the rotary link member 3342), so that the crankpin 3342b is rotated counterclockwise so as to move upward and leftward. However, since the crankpin 3342b is positioned at the upper end of the transmission slit 3343a, the crankpin 3342b cannot revolve further in the counterclockwise direction, and the crankpin 3342b revolves. never do. That is, in the appearance position state, even if the force from the lower spring 3347 or the like acts, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 does not open (moves to the standby position side), and remains closed in the appearance position state. , and the load from the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331 side to the rear third lower drive motor 3340 is cut off.

In this embodiment, the first ornamental body 3332 and the second ornamental body 3333 do not rotate until their tips are in contact with each other, and are rotated 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 is moved from the standby position to the appearing position side, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 (the first decoration 3332 and the second decoration 3333) moves into the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. Positioned. In addition, when moving the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 from the appearance position to the standby position, the rear third lower drive motor 3340 is operated as described above until the detection piece 3343c of the slide link member 3343 is detected by the lower detection sensor 3344. can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

Thus, in the lower unit 3330, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 can be opened and closed between the open waiting position state and the closed appearing position state by the rear third lower driving motor 3340.

In addition, in this embodiment, the driving gear 3341 is rotated with high torque by driving the rear third lower drive motor 3340 in a constant current drive system, and the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331 is moved to the standby position and the appearing position. and can be moved (opened and closed) in an extremely short time of 650 ms.

The left unit 3350 of the back third effect unit 3300 includes a left horizontal ring decoration 3351 attached to the left part of the unit base 3301 near the center in the vertical direction so that it can be opened and closed, and a left horizontal ring decoration 3351 behind the left horizontal ring decoration 3351. A left horizontal ring decoration board 3355 attached, a rear third left drive motor 3360 attached to the upper left corner on the front surface of the unit base 3301 and having a rotating shaft protruding rearward of the unit base 3301, a rear third A drive gear 3361 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of the left drive motor 3360, a rotary link member 3362 rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3361 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and a rotary link member 3362 and a slide link member 3363 for opening and closing the left lateral ring ornamental body 3351 by sliding in the vertical direction by rotation.

The left unit 3350 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover a left detection sensor 3364 for detecting the open/closed position of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and a part of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 from the front side. and a gear cover 3366 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the driving gear 3361 from behind.

The left lateral ring decoration 3351 includes a first decoration 3352 attached to the unit base 3301 so that the proximal end can rotate about an axis extending back and forth, and an upper side of the first decoration 3352 on the proximal side. and a second decorative body 3353 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending forward and backward on the base end side. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are formed vertically symmetrical with respect to the horizontal line, except for some parts. The first ornamental body 3352 and the second ornamental body 3353 extend short in a straight line from the base end side, and are approximately semicircular so that the extension line of the straight portion from the tip faces the inside of the bowel of the string. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the bow of the string is further directed in the same direction and formed into a wave shape extending in the direction away from the base end side in an approximately 1/2 semicircular arc shape.

The first ornamental body 3352 and the second ornamental body 3353 extend with a substantially constant width from the base end side to the tip end side. The first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 have three large-diameter large-diameter decorative parts 3351a and six small-diameter small-diameter decorative parts 3351b along the extending direction.

The first ornamental body 3352 has a shaft hole 3352a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and is provided in an arc shape centering on the shaft hole 3352a so as to face the second ornamental body 3353 side. A first gear portion 3352b, a link piece 3352c protruding from the base end side to the side opposite to the tip end side, and an elongated hole-shaped link slit 3352d penetrating the link piece 3352c and extending toward the shaft hole 3352a. and have A transmission pin 3363b of a slide link member 3363, which will be described later, is slidably inserted into the link slit 3352d.

The second ornamental body 3353 has a shaft hole 3353a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and is provided in an arc shape centered on the axial hole 3353a so as to face the first ornamental body 3352 side. and a second gear portion 3353b that meshes with the first gear portion 3352b. When the first decoration 3352 is rotated, the second decoration 3353 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decoration 3352 due to the engagement between the first gear portion 3352b and the second gear portion 3353b. As a result, the first decoration 3352 and the second decoration 3353 of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 are movable so that the distal end side opens and closes around the base end side.

The left horizontal ring decoration board 3355 is attached to the rear surface of each of the first decoration 3352 and the second decoration 3353, and is connected to the first LED 3356 behind the large diameter decoration part 3351a and behind the small diameter decoration part 3351b. A second LED 3357 is mounted. In this embodiment, the first LED 3356 is a full color LED and the second LED 3357 is a single color LED.

The back third left driving motor 3360 uses a motor with high driving torque. The rotary link member 3362 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position below the rear third left driving motor 3360 on a vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the rear third left driving motor 3360 . The rotary link member 3362 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3362a that meshes with the driving gear 3361, and a crank pin 3362b that projects forward from an eccentric position in a cylindrical shape. A crankpin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3363a of a slide link member 3363, which will be described later.

The base end of the slide link member 3363 is located in the vicinity of the rear third left drive motor 3360, and the tip end thereof is located in the vertical center of the unit base 3301 (the portion where the left lateral ring decorative body 3351 is rotatably supported). ), and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The slide link member 3363 is provided to the left of the rotation center of the rotary link member 3362 . The slide link member 3363 has a transmission slit 3363a extending left and right on the base end side and into which the crank pin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 is slidably inserted, and a forward cylindrical projection on the distal end side. It has a transmission pin 3363b that is slidably inserted into the link slit 3352d of the decoration 3352, and a detection piece 3363c that is detected by the left detection sensor 3364 on the base end side.

The transmission slit 3363a of the slide link member 3363 is located below the rotation center of the rotation link member 3362, and the right end is located to the right of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3362, and extends toward the tip side. It is curved like

In the normal state of the left unit 3350, the slide link member 3363 is positioned at the upper movement end, and the ends of the first decoration 3352 and the second decoration 3353 are the farthest from each other and The decorative body 3351 is in the most open standby position. When the left lateral ring decoration 3351 is in the standby position, the first decoration 3352 and the second decoration 3353 are positioned near the left edge of the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301 . Also, in a normal state, the crankpin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 is positioned at the right end of the transmission slit 3363a in the slide link member 3363. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, the detection piece 3363c of the slide link member 3363 is detected by the left detection sensor 3364 in a normal state.

In this normal state, the tip sides of the first decoration 3352 and the second decoration 3353 of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 approach the vertical line passing through the center of rotation, and the center of gravity is closer to the center of rotation than the center of rotation. Located on the right. Therefore, the first decoration 3352 and the second decoration 3353 are each subjected to a rotational moment that tends to rotate in the clockwise direction. Since the second gear portion 3353b of the second ornamental body 3353 is meshed with each other, the rotational moments applied to them are offset, and the state of the standby position is maintained. As a result, almost no force acts to slide the slide link member 3323 vertically from the side of the left lateral ring ornament 3351 via the link slit 3352d and the transmission pin 3363b. A load is hardly applied to the rear third left drive motor 3360 from the body 3351 side.

In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3362 is rotated counterclockwise by the rear third left drive motor 3360 via the drive gear 3361, the crankpin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 moves leftward in the transmission slit 3363a. It revolves so as to slide in the direction, and the slide link member 3363 slides downward. When the slide link member 3363 moves downward, the transmission pin 3363b at the tip causes the first ornament 3352 to move upward through the link slit 3352d in a counterclockwise direction around the shaft hole 3352a. At the same time, the second decoration 3353 rotates clockwise around the shaft hole 3353a by the second gear portion 3353b meshing with the first gear portion 3352b. That is, the tip of the first decoration 3352 and the tip of the second decoration 3353 rotate so as to approach each other (so that the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 closes).

Further, when the slide link member 3363 slides downward, the detection piece 3363c also moves downward, so the left detection sensor 3364 is in a non-detection state.

As the crank pin 3362b of the rotary link member 3362 revolves counterclockwise, the crank pin 3362b slides leftward in the transmission slit 3363a and then slides rightward. When it revolves 180 degrees or more from the normal state and is positioned near the right end of the transmission slit 3363a (to the right of the center of revolution), the drive of the rear third left drive motor 3360 stops. In this state, the tips of the first decoration 3352 and the second decoration 3353 are close to each other so that the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 is closed. The appearance position state is a state in which the first decorative body 3352 and the second decorative body 3353 are each rotated 50 degrees from the standby position state.

In this appearance position, the first decoration 3352 and the second decoration 3353 of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 extend to the right from their rotation centers. and the second ornament 3353, a rotational moment to rotate clockwise acts on them, respectively. Since the second gear portion 3353b is engaged with the second gear portion 3353b, the rotational moment applied to each of them is canceled and the appearance position is maintained. As a result, almost no force acts to slide the slide link member 3323 vertically from the side of the left lateral ring ornament 3351 via the link slit 3352d and the transmission pin 3363b. A load is hardly applied to the rear third left drive motor 3360 from the body 3351 side.

In this embodiment, the first ornamental body 3352 and the second ornamental body 3353 do not rotate until their tips are in contact with each other, and are rotated 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 is moved from the standby position to the appearing position side, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 (the first decoration 3352 and the second decoration 3353) moves into the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. Positioned. When moving the left lateral ring decoration 3351 from the appearance position to the standby position, the back third left drive motor 3360 is operated as described above until the detection piece 3363c of the slide link member 3363 is detected by the left detection sensor 3364. can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

Thus, in the left unit 3350, the rear third upper driving motor 3320 can open and close the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 between the open standby position and the closed appearing position.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rear third left driving motor 3360 is driven by a constant current driving method to rotate the driving gear 3361 with high torque, and the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351 is moved to the standby position and the appearing position. and can be moved (opened and closed) in an extremely short time of 650 ms.

The right unit 3370 of the back third effect unit 3300 includes a right horizontal ring decoration 3371 attached to the right part of the unit base 3301 near the center in the vertical direction so that it can be opened and closed, and a rear side of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. A right lateral ring decoration board 3375 attached, a rear third right drive motor 3380 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the unit base 3301 and having a rotating shaft protruding rearward from the unit base 3301, a rear third drive motor 3380 A drive gear 3381 in the form of a spur gear attached to the rotating shaft of a right drive motor 3380, a rotary link member 3382 rotated by the rotation of the drive gear 3381 and rotatably attached to the unit base 3301, and a rotary link member 3382 and a slide link member 3383 for opening and closing the right lateral ring ornamental body 3371 by sliding in the vertical direction by the rotation of.

The right unit 3370 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover a right detection sensor 3384 for detecting the open/closed position of the right lateral ring decoration 3371 and a part of the right lateral ring decoration 3371 from the front side. and a gear cover 3386 attached to the rear surface of the unit base 3301 so as to cover the driving gear 3381 from behind.

The right lateral ring decoration 3371 consists of a first decoration 3372 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending back and forth at its proximal end, and an upper side of the proximal end of the first decoration 3372. and a second decorative body 3373 attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending forward and backward on the base end side. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are formed vertically symmetrical with respect to the horizontal line, except for some parts. The first ornamental body 3372 and the second ornamental body 3373 extend short in a straight line from the base end side, and are approximately semicircular so that the extension line of the straight portion from the tip faces the inside of the bowel of the string. After extending in the direction away from the base end side, the bow of the string is further directed in the same direction and formed into a wave shape extending in the direction away from the base end side in an approximately 1/2 semicircular arc shape.

The first ornamental body 3372 and the second ornamental body 3373 extend with a substantially constant width from the base end side to the tip end side. The first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 have three large-diameter large-diameter decorative parts 3371a and six small-diameter small-diameter decorative parts 3371b along the extending direction.

The first ornamental body 3372 has a shaft hole 3372a that is rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and an arc shape that faces the second ornamental body 3373 around the shaft hole 3372a. A first gear portion 3372b, a link piece 3372c protruding from the base end side to the side opposite to the tip end side, and an elongated hole-shaped link slit 3372d penetrating the link piece 3372c and extending toward the shaft hole 3372a. and have A transmission pin 3383b of a slide link member 3383, which will be described later, is slidably inserted into the link slit 3372d.

The second ornamental body 3373 has a shaft hole 3373a rotatably supported by the unit base 3301 on the base end side, and is provided in an arc shape centered on the axial hole 3373a so as to face the first ornamental body 3372 side. and a second gear portion 3373b that meshes with the first gear portion 3372b. When the first decoration 3372 is rotated, the second decoration 3373 rotates in the opposite direction to the first decoration 3372 due to the engagement between the first gear portion 3372b and the second gear portion 3373b. As a result, the first decoration 3372 and the second decoration 3373 of the right lateral ring decoration 3371 move so that the distal end side opens and closes around the base end side.

The right lateral ring decoration substrate 3375 is attached to the rear surface of each of the first decoration 3372 and the second decoration 3373, and is attached to the first LED 3376 behind the large-diameter decoration portion 3371a and behind the small-diameter decoration portion 3371b. A second LED 3377 is mounted. In this embodiment, the first LED 3376 is a full color LED and the second LED 3377 is a single color LED.

The rear third right driving motor 3380 uses a motor with high driving torque. The rotary link member 3382 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 at a position above the rear third right drive motor 3380 on a vertical line passing through the rotation axis of the rear third right drive motor 3380 . The rotary link member 3382 includes a spur gear-shaped transmission gear portion 3382a that meshes with the drive gear 3381, and a crankpin 3382b that projects forward in a cylindrical shape from an eccentric position. A crankpin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 is slidably inserted into a transmission slit 3383a of a slide link member 3383, which will be described later.

The base end of the slide link member 3383 is located near the rear third right driving motor 3380, and the tip end thereof is located in the vertical center of the unit base 3301 (the part where the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 is rotatably supported). ), and is attached to the unit base 3301 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction. The slide link member 3383 is provided to the right of the rotation center of the rotary link member 3382 . The slide link member 3383 has a transmission slit 3383a extending left and right on the base end side and into which the crank pin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 is slidably inserted, and a forward cylindrical projection on the distal end side. It has a transmission pin 3383b that is slidably inserted into the link slit 3372d of the decoration 3372, and a detection piece 3383c that is detected by the right detection sensor 3384 on the base end side.

The transmission slit 3383a of the slide link member 3383 is located above the rotation center of the rotation link member 3382, and the left end is located to the left of the rotation center of the rotation link member 3382. It bends to the other side.

In the normal state of the right unit 3370, the slide link member 3383 is positioned at the upper end of movement, and the ends of the first and second decorations 3372 and 3373 are farthest apart from each other, and the right lateral ring The decorative body 3371 is in the most open standby position. When the right lateral ring decoration 3371 is in the standby position, the first decoration 3372 and the second decoration 3373 are positioned near the right edge of the frame-like unit base 3301 . Also, in a normal state, the crankpin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 is positioned at the left end of the transmission slit 3383a in the slide link member 3383. As shown in FIG. Furthermore, the detection piece 3383c of the slide link member 3383 is detected by the right detection sensor 3384 in a normal state.

In this normal state, the tip sides of the first decoration 3372 and the second decoration 3373 of the right lateral ring decoration 3371 approach the vertical line passing through the center of rotation, and the center of gravity is closer to the center of rotation than the center of rotation. Located on the left. Therefore, the first decoration 3372 and the second decoration 3373 are each subjected to a rotational moment that tends to rotate in the counterclockwise direction. Since the second gear portion 3373b of the second decorative body 3373 is engaged with the second gear portion 3373b, the rotational moment applied to each of them is canceled and the state of the standby position is maintained. As a result, almost no force acts to slide the slide link member 3383 vertically from the side of the right lateral ring ornament 3371 via the link slit 3382d and the transmission pin 3383b. A load is hardly applied to the rear third right driving motor 3380 from the body 3371 side.

In this normal state, when the rotary link member 3382 is rotated clockwise through the driving gear 3381 by the rear third right drive motor 3380, the crankpin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 moves rightward in the transmission slit 3383a. , and the slide link member 3383 slides downward. When the slide link member 3383 moves downward, the transmission pin 3383b at the tip moves the first ornament 3372 clockwise around the shaft hole 3372a so that the tip side moves upward through the link slit 3372d. As it rotates, the second gear portion 3373b meshing with the first gear portion 3372b causes the second ornament 3373 to rotate counterclockwise around the shaft hole 3373a. In other words, the tip of the first decoration 3372 and the tip of the second decoration 3373 rotate so as to approach each other (so that the right lateral ring decoration 3371 closes).

Moreover, since the detection piece 3383c also moves downward together with the sliding of the slide link member 3383 downward, the right detection sensor 3384 enters a non-detection state.

As the crankpin 3382b of the rotary link member 3382 revolves clockwise, the crankpin 3382b slides rightward in the transmission slit 3383a and then slides leftward. After revolving 180 degrees or more from the state of , and being positioned in the vicinity of the left end of the transmission slit 3383a (to the left of the center of revolution), the drive of the rear third right driving motor 3380 stops. In this state, the ends of the first decoration 3372 and the second decoration 3373 are close to each other so that the right lateral ring decoration 3371 is closed. The appearance position state is a state in which the first decorative body 3372 and the second decorative body 3373 are each rotated 50 degrees from the standby position state.

In this appearance position state, the first decoration 3372 and the second decoration 3373 of the right lateral ring decoration 3371 are in a state of extending to the left from their rotation centers. and the second ornament 3373, a rotational moment to rotate in the counterclockwise direction acts on each of them. are meshed with the second gear portion 3373b of the second gear portion 3373b. As a result, almost no force acts to slide the slide link member 3383 vertically from the side of the right lateral ring ornament 3371 via the link slit 3372d and the transmission pin 3383b. A load is hardly applied to the rear third right driving motor 3380 from the body 3371 side.

In this embodiment, the first ornamental body 3372 and the second ornamental body 3373 do not rotate until their tips are in contact with each other, and are rotated 50 degrees from the normal state (standby position). Stop at (appearance position). When the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is moved from the standby position to the appearing position side, the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 (the first decoration 3372 and the second decoration 3373) moves within the frame of the frame-shaped unit base 3301. Positioned. When the right lateral ring decoration 3371 is moved from the appearance position to the standby position, the rear third right drive motor 3380 is operated as described above until the detection piece 3383c of the slide link member 3383 is detected by the right detection sensor 3384. can be returned to the standby position by driving in the opposite direction.

In this way, in the right unit 3370, the rear third right drive motor 3380 can open and close the right lateral ring decoration 3371 between the open standby position and the closed appearing position.

In addition, in this embodiment, the rear third right driving motor 3380 is driven by a constant current driving method to rotate the driving gear 3381 with high torque, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is moved to the standby position and the appearing position. and can be moved (opened and closed) in an extremely short time of 650 ms.

In the back third effect unit 3300 of this embodiment, an upper vertical ring decoration 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration 3331, a left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and a right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are formed in the same shape. The upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 of the back third effect unit 3300 are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. The left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are provided at the same position in the front-rear direction. Also, in the back third effect unit 3300 , the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are provided behind the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 .

In this embodiment, two-phase stepping motors are used as the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380. .

Further, in this embodiment, when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are attached, 200 pps (the width of one pulse is 5 ms). Further, self-starting is possible even when excitation is performed with a pulse of 200 pps from a stopped state without slow-up processing.

In addition, the movement of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 from the standby position to the appearance position is completed in 130 steps. = 650 ms], and it is possible to make it appear and retreat (appear/retreat) in 650 ms.

Next, a movable effect using the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 in the back third effect unit 3300 will be described. The upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the back third effect unit 3300 are normally in the standby position. ing. When the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 are in the standby position, the rear second effect unit 3200 arranged in front is positioned on the rear side. It is located outside the through hole 3229a of the second inner decorative body 3229 and is invisible from the front (player's side).

In this normal state, when the back third upper driving motor 3320 and the back third lower driving motor 3340 are driven to move the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 from the standby position to the appearance position, At the center of the frame of the unit base 3301 when viewed from the front, the tip of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 are close to each other, and the three rings are arranged vertically (up and down). It can be shown to the player (see Figure 104).

Further, in a normal state, when the back third left driving motor 3360 and the back third right driving motor 3380 are driven to move the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 from the waiting position to the appearing position, At the center of the frame of the unit base 3301 when viewed from the front, the tip of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the tip of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are close to each other, and three rings are arranged side by side (right and left). can be shown to the player (see Figure 105).

Furthermore, in a normal state, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven to drive the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311. , the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position, respectively, the upper vertical The tip of the ring decoration 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 are close to each other, and the tip of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the tip of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are close to each other. A player can be shown a decoration in which rings are arranged in a criss-cross fashion (see Figure 106).

Further, in the back third effect unit 3300, in a normal state, for example, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven to drive the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. is moved to a position halfway from the standby position to the appearance position, the tip of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 (the first decoration 3312 and the second decoration 3313) and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 (the first The end portions of the decoration body 3372 and the second decoration body 3373) are positioned inside the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration body 3229 in the back second effect unit 3200 in a front view, and are partially facing the player side. (see Figure 107). In this state, the two ends of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 appear at the upper left and right corners of the four corners in the through-hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration 3229, and the two ends of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 appear. Since the two ends appear at the right upper and lower corners among the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration 3229, the inner peripheral shape of the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration 3229 can be changed. can.

Thus, according to the back third effect unit 3300 of the present embodiment, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are combined appropriately. By moving to the appearance position with , the ring decorations arranged vertically, horizontally, or crosswise can be made to appear, and the player can see a variety of movable performances.

In addition, the first LED3316 and second LED3317 of the upper vertical ring decoration substrate 3315, the first LED3336 and second LED3337 of the lower vertical ring decoration substrate 3335, the first LED3356 and second LED3357 of the left horizontal ring decoration substrate 3355, the right horizontal ring By appropriately causing the first LED 3376 and the second LED 3377 of the decoration substrate 3375 to emit light, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are decorated with light emission. Therefore, various lighting effects can be shown to the player.

[5-10. Production on the game board]
Next, main effects on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 102 to 110 and the like. FIG. 102 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which a plurality of rotary ornaments in the back second effect unit are revolved 15 degrees while being rotated clockwise from the normal state. FIG. 103 is a front view showing an enlarged lower part of the game board with the special rotary ornament in the back second effect unit moved to a specific position. FIG. 104 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the upper vertical ring decoration and the lower vertical ring decoration in the back third effect unit are moved to the appearance position. FIG. 105 is a front view of the game board showing the state in which the left horizontal ring decoration and the right horizontal ring decoration in the back third effect unit are moved to the appearance position. FIG. 106 is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring decoration, the lower vertical ring decoration, the left horizontal ring decoration, and the right horizontal ring decoration in the back third effect unit moved to the appearance positions. be. FIG. 107 is a front view of the game board showing the upper vertical ring decoration and the right horizontal ring decoration in the back third effect unit moved halfway to the appearance position.

Also, FIG. 108 is a front view of a game board showing an example of an effect image on the effect display device when a problem occurs in the upper back third effect unit. FIG. 109 is a front view of the game board showing an example of a shadow effect executed during the light emission effect in the back unit. FIG. 110 is a front view of the pachinko machine showing the game board facing through the game window of the door frame.

In the game board 5, the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 that defines the rear end of the game area 5a, the starter unit 2100, the side unit 2200, the attacker unit 2400, the center accessory 2500, etc. Since they are formed transparently, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. Back first upper decoration 3161, back first left decoration 3162, back first right decoration 3163, back first lower decoration 3164, back second effect unit 3100 in the back first effect unit 3100 in the plurality of rotations The decoration 3210 (the special rotating decoration 3211 and the normal rotating decoration 3212), the back second outer decoration 3228, the back second inner decoration 3229, and the back second inner peripheral decoration 3230, etc. can be visually recognized well. can be done.

In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 74 and the like, four special rotating decorations 3211 out of the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 in the back second effect unit 3200 are aligned with both ends in the vertical direction on the circumference of the revolution orbit. , at both ends in the left and right direction. In other words, one special rotary ornament 3211 is located at the lowest specific position (the 6 o'clock position on the clock) on the revolution orbit. The special rotating decorative body 3211 positioned at this specific position is positioned in the center of the substantially circular ring-shaped back first lower decoration body 3164 in the back first effect unit 3100, and the outer side is the back first lower decoration body 3164. It is in a state of being decorated by In addition, the special rotating decoration 3211 (rotating decoration 3210) at a specific position is positioned behind the first starting port 2002 and decorates the rear of the first starting port 2002 (see FIG. 103).

In addition, in the normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the back third effect unit 3300 are in the standby position. By being positioned outside the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 in the back second effect unit 3200 in front view, the front is a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210, the drive ring 3221, and the back second outer side. It is covered with the decorative body 3228, the back second inner decorative body 3229, etc., and is in a state that cannot be visually recognized from the player side.

In this normal state, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 arranged behind is displayed on the player side (front) through the inside of the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 in the back second effect unit 3200. can be viewed in good condition from

The game board 5 is the first back of the back unit 3000 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B at the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. The production unit 3100, the second rear production unit 3200, and the third rear production unit 3300 perform a predetermined movable production.

First, the effect using the back second effect unit 3200 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 102 and 103 and the like. As an effect using a plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210 of the back second effect unit 3200, for example, as shown in FIG. , It is possible to perform a movable effect in which a plurality (12 pieces) of rotary decorations 3210 revolve clockwise while rotating clockwise. As a result, the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 revolve around the performance image visible through the inner side of the back second inner peripheral decoration 3230 while rotating, so that the game area is filled with the rotating decorations 3210. 5a can be made lively, and the player can be entertained.

As described above, in a state in which the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 are rotated and revolved, for example, when the LED 3171 of the back first lower decoration board 3170 in the back first effect unit 3100 is lit, the rotating decorative bodies 3210 rotate behind. Since the substantially annular back first lower decoration 3164 around which 3210 is circling emits light, the player's attention can be directed to the back first lower decoration 3164 . In addition, since the back first lower decoration 3164 is conspicuous, a desired rotating decoration 3210 (special rotating decoration 3211) is placed in the ring (specific position) of the back first lower decoration 3164 for the player. Depending on whether or not the revolution is stopped, the player can be thrilled and excited, and the player can be entertained.

At this time, only the first rotary decoration LED group 3250a corresponding to the specific position among the rotary decoration LED group 3250 may be turned on. As a result, only the rotating decoration 3210 passing through the rear side of the ring of the back first lower decoration 3164 can be visually recognized well, and the other rotating decorations 3210 are difficult to visually recognize, so the back first lower decoration 3164 To make a player see a performance like a roulette or a slot by using the inside of the ring as a window, and to further enhance the feeling of excitement as to whether or not a desired rotating decorative body 3210 stops at a specific position. can be done.

Then, when the desired rotary decoration 3210 (special rotary decoration 3211) stops in the ring (specific position) of the back first lower decoration 3164, as shown in FIG. Since the first starting port 2002 is provided, if the player receives the game ball B in the first starting port 2002, it makes the player think that the possibility of drawing a "big hit" is extremely high. Thus, the player can be urged to hit the game ball B aiming at the first starting hole 2002, and the player can enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball B.例文帳に追加

In addition, when the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 are rotated while being driven by the back second drive motor 3222, according to the movement position of each rotary decoration 3210, the plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decoration substrate 3240 are appropriately turned on. You may make it emit light. For example, when one rotating decoration 3210 is positioned at a specific position, the first LED group 3251, second LED group 3252, third LED group 3253, and fourth LED group 3254 of each rotating decoration LED group 3250 While turning on, each intermediate LED group 3255 is turned off. Subsequently, when the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves about 7 degrees in the clockwise direction, the first LED group 3251 and the fourth LED group 3251 and the fourth The second LED group 3252 is turned off and the middle LED group 3255 is turned on. Furthermore, when the rotary decoration 3210 revolves 15 degrees from the initial position, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are also turned off to turn off the rotary decoration LED group 3250, and only the intermediate LED group 3255 is turned on. leave it alone.

Subsequently, when the rotary decoration 3210 revolves about 22 degrees from the initial position, the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 of the rotary decoration LED group 3250 are turned on to turn on the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group. 3254 is kept turned off, and the intermediate LED group 3255 is kept turned on. Then, when the rotary decoration 3210 revolves 30 degrees from the initial position (the next rotary decoration 3210 is positioned at a specific position), the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254 are turned on to turn on the rotary decoration LED. Group 3250 is turned on and middle LED group 3255 is turned off. As a result, the LEDs 3241 in which the rotary decoration 3210 is positioned in front are turned on, and the LEDs 3241 in which the rotary decoration 3210 is not positioned in front are turned off. It is possible to show the player an effect in which the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves while emitting light as if it were provided with an LED, and it is possible to amuse the player and suppress the decline in interest. .

In addition, in the back second effect unit 3200, in a normal state, all the rotating decoration body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are caused to emit light with high brightness, and then the back second driving motor 3222 drives a plurality of rotating decorations. Rotate and revolve the body 3210, stop the rotation and revolution of the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 in a state different from the normal state, and turn off or dim the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255. can be As a result, all of the rotating decoration LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 emit light with high brightness, making it difficult for the player to visually recognize the plurality of rotating decorations 3210. By changing the position of the 3210, the player can see an effect in which the rotating decorative body 3210 moves without the player's knowledge, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

In addition, in the back second effect unit 3200, the plurality of LEDs 3241 mounted on the back second decoration board 3240 can be appropriately lighted, so that the rotating decoration LED group 3250 can be changed from the first rotating decoration LED group 3250a. , second rotary decoration LED group 3250b, third rotary decoration LED group 3250c, fourth rotary decoration LED group 3250d, fifth rotary decoration LED group 3250e, sixth rotary decoration LED group 3250f, seventh rotary decoration Body LED group 3250g, eighth rotary decoration LED group 3250h, ninth rotary decoration LED group 3250i, tenth rotary decoration LED group 3250j, eleventh rotary decoration LED group 3250k, twelfth rotary decoration LED group 3250l, and so on, it is possible to present the player with a lighting effect as if the light is rotating in a predetermined direction, thereby amusing the player. When the rotation of the light is stopped, the expectation of the player can be heightened and the player can be entertained depending on at which position the rotation of the light stops.

In addition, when stopping the rotation of the light, the rotation speed of the light is gradually reduced, and in the rotating decoration LED group 3250, the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group The LED group 3254 and the intermediate LED group 3255 may be turned on in order so that the light moves in small steps in the direction of rotation and then slowly stops. As a result, the positions at which the light stops are made finer, making it difficult for the player to predict at which position the rotation of the light will stop.

In addition, as described above, the light can be rotated (orbited), so by turning it on and off in turn in the circumferential direction, you can create a light-emitting effect that measures the time like a clock, and the remaining time. It is also possible to perform a suggestive light emitting effect or the like to entertain the player and prevent the player from losing interest.

Furthermore, in each rotating decoration LED group 3250, for example, a first LED group 3251, a second LED group 3252, a third LED group 3253, a fourth LED group 3254, a first LED group 3251, ... You may make it light-emits in order. As a result, it is possible to show the player a light emitting effect as if the light is rotating in the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 at one place, and to the player, in a state where the rotating decorative body 3210 is not revolving. The illusion of rotation (rotation) can be created, and the player can be entertained.

Further, in each of the rotating decoration LED groups 3250, for example, after the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are caused to emit light, the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are caused to emit light. It is possible to show the player a luminescence effect that moves to and spreads out. Alternatively, if the first LED group 3251 and the third LED group 3253 are caused to emit light after the second LED group 3252 and the fourth LED group 3254 are caused to emit light, the player can see a light emitting effect that converges from the outside toward the center. be able to.

Next, the effect using the back third effect unit 3300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 104 to 108. FIG. First, for example, as shown in FIG. 104, the back third upper drive motor 3320 and the back third lower drive motor 3340 are driven from the normal state, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 are driven. Move from the standby position to the spawn position. As a result, the tip of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 are close to each other at the center of the inside of the back second inner peripheral decoration 3230 when viewed from the front, and the three rings are vertically ( (top and bottom) can be shown to the player.

In addition, as an effect using the back third effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. The body 3351 and the right lateral ring decoration 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearing position. As a result, the tip of the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the tip of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are close to each other at the inner center of the back second inner peripheral decoration 3230 when viewed from the front, and the three rings are laterally ( left and right) can be shown to the player.

In this embodiment, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decorative body 3371 of the back third effect unit 3300 are moved to the appearance position, and the decoration in which three rings are arranged side by side is formed. The first special lottery result and the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 are displayed in the parts inside each of the three rings in the display device 1600. A variable display of three symbol rows can be provided to suggest. As a result, compared to the case where the three symbol rows are variably displayed while the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are not moved to the appearance position, the vertical position of the three symbol rows is Since it is physically decorated by the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 at the appearance position, the symbol row that is variably displayed for the player is a game such as "big win". It is possible to make the player think that there is a high possibility that the combination of symbols that are advantageous to the player will be stop-displayed, and the player's expectation for the game can be heightened.

Furthermore, as an effect using the back third effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. And the rear third right drive motor 3380 is driven to move the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 from the waiting position to the appearing position. move. As a result, the tip of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the tip of the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 approach each other at the center of the inside of the back second inner peripheral decoration 3230, and the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 The tip and the tip of the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are brought close to each other, and the player can see the decoration in which five rings are arranged vertically and horizontally in a cross shape.

Further, as shown in FIG. 106, when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are all moved from the standby position to the appearance position, In front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, a decoration in which five rings are arranged in a cross is formed. It is possible to increase the expectation for the "jackpot" game and suppress the decrease in interest.

Also, in the back third effect unit 3300, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved from the waiting position to the appearance position in an appropriate order or combination order. can be For example, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 are moved to their appearance positions in order, or the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring are moved. The decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 may be moved to the appearance positions in this order. As a result, the five rings are arranged in a cross shape after passing through multiple stages, so that the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether or not to proceed to the next stage at each stage. can entertain.

By the way, in the back third effect unit 3300, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are driven by a constant current drive method. Since it is driven by torque, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are driven in an extremely short time of one second or less (here, 650 ms ) to move from the waiting position to the appearing position or from the appearing position to the waiting position. As a result, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 appear and disappear in an instant, giving a strong impact to the player. can be used to entertain players.

Furthermore, in the back third effect unit 3300, for example, as shown in FIG. And the right lateral ring ornament 3371 is moved to a position halfway from the standby position to the appearing position. As a result, the tip portion of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 (the first decoration 3312 and the second decoration 3313) and the tip portion of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 (the first decoration 3372 and the second decoration 3373) are formed. However, it is positioned inside the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 when viewed from the front, and can be partially visually recognized from the player side.

More specifically, in the state of FIG. 107, the two ends of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 appear at the upper left and right corners of the four corners in the through hole 3229a of the back second inner decoration 3229, Two ends of the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 appear at the right upper and lower corners among the four corners in the through hole 3229 a of the back second inner decoration 3229 . As a result, the inner shape of the back second inner peripheral decoration body 3230 facing the display screen of the effect display device 1600 behind changes, so that the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311 and the right horizontal ring decoration body are changed for the player. It is possible to make the player easily notice the movement of 3371, to make the player feel that something will happen, and to heighten the player's expectation for the game.

When the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved from the standby position to the appearance position, only the tip portions are visible. It may be moved halfway as in the following step, and then moved to the appearance position as the next step. As a result, it is possible to make the player's heart throb depending on whether it moves completely to the appearance position, and the player can be entertained. When moving to the middle of this appearance position, it may be reciprocated in small steps between it and the standby position. can be made easier to notice.

In the back third effect unit 3300, the first LED 3316 and second LED 3317 of the upper vertical ring decoration board 3315, the first LED 3336 and second LED 3337 of the lower vertical ring decoration board 3335, the first LED 3356 and second LED 3356 of the left horizontal ring decoration board 3355 The second LED 3357, the first LED 3376 and the second LED 3377 of the right horizontal ring decoration substrate 3375 are appropriately illuminated, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration. The body 3371 can be appropriately decorated with light emission. As a result, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, which have moved to the appearance position side, can be illuminated in various lighting modes. , can entertain the player.

By the way, in this embodiment, in the back third effect unit 3300, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved to the appearance position. Sometimes, as the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are directly behind. A decoration image 3390 similar to that is displayed (see FIG. 108).

Also, in this embodiment, for some reason, at least one of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the back third effect unit 3300 is , When it becomes impossible to move to the appearance position, even if the effect of moving the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is executed , they remain at the standby position and are not moved to the appearance position side, and the effect display device 1600 displays a decoration image 3390 (see FIG. 108). As a result, even if a problem occurs in the back third effect unit 3300, the decoration image 3390 can be seen to make it difficult for the player to recognize the problem, so that the player can prevent the problem from occurring. By recognizing this, it is possible to avoid the feeling of discomfort caused by having to interrupt the game, and it is possible to keep the player enjoying the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, as the effect using the back unit 3000, the effect by appropriately combining the effect by the back second effect unit 3200 and the effect by the back third effect unit 3300 can be performed. As a result, it is possible to show the player more diverse effects, and to prevent the player from getting bored. In addition, since it is possible to show the player more stages of production, it is possible to make the player nervous and excited at each stage, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation and suppress the decline in interest. can.

In addition, as an effect using the back unit 3000, for example, when performing an appropriate light emitting effect using the first back effect unit 3100, the second back effect unit 3200, and the third back effect unit 3300, a specific A shadow performance can be performed in which the LEDs positioned on the line are extinguished and the line is moved from one side to the other side in a predetermined direction in a short time (one second or less) so as to cross the game area 5a. (See Figure 109). Thus, by turning off the LEDs on a specific line, a dark portion (shadow portion 3050) appears on the line in the game area 5a, and the shadow portion 3050 crosses the game area 5a in a short time. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel "wow" and make him feel that something will happen and concentrate on the game. Note that the shadow portion 3050 can be moved not only in the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction and oblique directions.

In addition, the above-mentioned shadow effect is performed when the rotating decoration 3210, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are used for movable effects, It can also be executed when the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is switched. As a result, the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the next movement effect, effect image, etc., using the shadow effect as a delimiter, and the player can be entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

Furthermore, when the game board 5 of the present embodiment is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the player side through the door window 101a of the door frame 3, as shown in FIG. In the door frame 3, the outer periphery of the door window 101a is divided into semi-tubular dish upper left ornaments 271, dish upper right ornaments 276, dish center upper ornaments 312a, door frame left side ornaments 404, and door frame right side ornaments. Enclosed by body 419 and door frame top decoration 453 . In addition, in the door frame 3, the plate upper left decorative body 271, the plate upper right decorative body 276, the plate central upper decorative body 312a, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 are provided. To the rear, the top left decoration board 273, top right top decoration board 278, top center top decoration board 314, left side door frame decoration board 402, right side door frame decoration board 418, top center decoration board 455, top left door frame. Since the decoration board 456 and the door frame top right decoration board 457 are arranged, by properly lighting the LEDs of these decoration boards, the entire outer circumference of the door window 101a (game area 5a) can be illuminated and decorated. , the light can be moved along the perimeter of the door window 101a.

And, as described above, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, various light emission effects can be performed. When the LED group 3252, the fourth LED group 3254, and the LEDs of the decorative substrates of the door frame 3 are illuminated in order, the player can see a light emitting effect that spreads outward from the center. can be directed to the outside of the game area 5a. Alternatively, if the LEDs of the decorative substrates of the door frame 3, the second group of LEDs 3252 and the fourth group of LEDs 3254, and the first group of LEDs 3251 and the third group of LEDs 3253 of the second rear effect unit 3200 are caused to emit light in this order, It is possible to show the player a light emission effect that converges from the outside toward the center, so that the player's interest can be directed to the center of the game area 5a.

In addition, in the back second effect unit 3200, as described above, during the light emission effect in which the light rotates (rotates) in the circumferential direction by the plurality of rotating decorative body LED groups 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255, on the door frame 3 side Alternatively, a lighting effect may be executed in which the light rotates in the circumferential direction of the door window 101a. As a result, it is possible to show the player a luminous effect in which the light circulates around the entire pachinko machine 1 centering on the center of the game area 5a. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, in the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the movable effect and the light emitting effect as described above can be appropriately combined, and the effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600 can also be combined. be able to. As a result, various patterns of effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining light emitting effects, movable effects, display effects, etc., and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored. The player can be entertained, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

[5-11. Characteristic effects of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 of the upper unit 3310 of the back third effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000, the lower vertical ring decoration of the lower unit 3330 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 of the left unit 3350, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the right unit 3370 are placed in the central part of the game area 5a (here, the back second inner circumference of the back second effect unit 3200 The inner periphery of the decorative body 3230 is rotated outward to the retracted position, whereby the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, the left horizontal ring decorative body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration. The body 3371 is positioned behind the rotating decorative body 3210, the back second outer decorative body 3228, the back second inner decorative body 3229, and the back second inner peripheral decorative body 3230 of the back second effect unit 3200, and rotates. An upper vertical ring decoration 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and a left horizontal ring decoration 3351 are formed by a decoration 3210, a back second outer decoration 3228, a back second inner decoration 3229, and a back second inner peripheral decoration 3230. , and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be made invisible from the player side (front), and the player can see the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, And it is possible to make it difficult to notice the presence of the right lateral ring decoration body 3371, and the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 facing the center of the game area 5a can be favorably viewed from the player side (front). The effect image can be visually recognized, and the player can enjoy the performance image.

In this normal state, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are within the range of 0.5 seconds to 1.0 seconds (this embodiment Peripheral control board 1510 controls rear third upper driving motor 3320, rear third lower driving motor 3340, rear third driving motor 3340, and rear third upper driving motor 3320 so as to rotate (move) from the retracted position to the appearing position in 650 ms (0.65 seconds). The third left driving motor 3360 and the back third right driving motor 3380 are driven by a constant current driving method to drive the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring. When the decoration body 3371 is rotated, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are rotated with high torque. A large rotational moment acts on the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 that have stopped due to the height, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, Since the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be rotated to the appearance position at an extremely high speed, the upper vertical ring decoration which the player did not recognize. 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 suddenly appear in the central part of the game area 5a. The upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 suddenly and instantly appear to give a strong impact to the player. It is possible to make the player strongly think that there is something good in the game, heighten the expectation for the game, and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 drives the rear third upper drive motor 3320, the rear third lower drive motor 3340, the rear third left drive motor 3360, and the rear third right drive motor 3380 by the constant current drive method. When the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated with high torque, they are quickly rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearing position. Because the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 partially block the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. , the player can immediately recognize the movement of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to the appearance position. The movement of the vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can greatly surprise the player.

Furthermore, the portions between the base end side and the tip end side of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved from the retracted position to the appearing position. Since it is positioned behind the straight line that connects the proximal side and the distal side when rotating, the shape that extends non-linearly between the proximal side and the distal side (here, an arc) shape), when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearing position, they are initially 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are visible. At this time, the portion (distal side) of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, which is visible from the front, is the proximal end. Since there is a non-linear shape between the side and the tip side, the directions protruding inward from the back second inner peripheral decoration body 3230 are the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration. This direction is different from the base end direction of the body 3351 and the right lateral ring ornamental body 3371 . Therefore, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are stopped halfway to the appearance position side, and only the tip side is visually recognized. When the possible effect is executed (see FIG. 107), the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are different for the player. Since the player can be given the illusion that another decoration is appearing, it is possible to show the player more colorful performances, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are placed at the center of the game area 5a (back second inner peripheral decoration). 3230) is rotatably supported on the outside, and since it is an elongated frame shape that extends to the center of the game area 5a at the tip side at the time of appearance position, the upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, the lower vertical ring When the decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3351 are displayed. Since the tip side of the horizontal ring decoration 3371 is located in the central part of the game area 5a, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the appearance position can be highlighted, and the player's attention can be strongly attracted to the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371.

Further, by driving the rear third upper drive motor 3320, the rear third lower drive motor 3340, the rear third left drive motor 3360, and the rear third right drive motor 3380 by the constant current drive method by the peripheral control board 1510, , the time when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated from the retracted position to the appearance position by high torque is 0. Since the time is within the range of 5 seconds to 1.0 seconds, there is no need to use a large drive motor with unnecessarily high torque. It is possible to suppress an increase in the space required for the drive motor 3360 and the rear third right drive motor 3380. In addition, it is possible to easily secure a space for arranging the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 and other members, and the secured space allows the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration. 3351, right horizontal ring decoration 3371, etc. can be made larger, and large upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, right horizontal ring decoration 3371, etc. The pachinko machine 1 can entertain the players more. In addition, since it is not necessary to use a large drive motor with unnecessarily high torque or use a complicated control circuit for outputting high torque, it is possible to suppress an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine 1. .

In addition, an effect display device 1600 capable of displaying effect images is provided in the center of the game area 5a, and includes an upper vertical ring decoration 3311, a lower vertical ring decoration 3331, a left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and a right horizontal ring. When the ornament 3371 is rotated (moved) from the retracted position to the appearing position or from the appearing position to the retracted position, the display screen is temporarily darkened so that the player can see the upper vertical ring ornament 3311. , the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be difficult to see. The player can see an effect in which the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 suddenly appear or disappear from the central part. The upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 can amuse the player and amuse the player. can be suppressed.

By the way, by driving the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 with a constant current drive method, the upper vertical ring decoration can be performed. Since the body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are rotated with high torque, the rear third upper driving motor 3320 and the rear third lower driving motor 3340, back third left drive motor 3360, back third right drive motor 3380, upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, right horizontal ring decoration 3371, etc. Although there is a risk that malfunctions may occur due to early fatigue, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved to the appearance position. Since the decoration image 3390 is caused to be displayed on the effect display device 1600 by executing the effect to be displayed, a problem occurs in them, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration. 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot move (rotate) to the appearance position, the decoration image 3390 allows the player to see the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3331. , the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 move to the appearance position, and the decoration image 3390 allows the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left It is possible to show the player the same effect as the effect by the horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control unit 1511 and effect display control unit 1512) controls the upper unit 3310 of the back third effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000. The upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331 of the lower unit 3330, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 of the left unit 3350, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 of the right unit 3370 are invisible from the player side. Since the player moves to the retracted position, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized well, and the player can enjoy the effect image. Then, when the peripheral control board 1510 executes the effect of moving the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to the appearance position, an appropriate At the timing when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 move from the retreat position to the appearance position, the effect display device 1600 appears. A decorative image 3390 is displayed behind the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. A specific effect image (for example, a plurality of pattern row) is displayed, the specific effect image is clearly partitioned by the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, and the specific effect The image can be made conspicuous, and the effect by the specific effect image can be enjoyed, thereby suppressing the deterioration of interest.

Then, for some reason, even one of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot be moved to the appearance position. When detected by any of the detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384, the peripheral control board 1510 detects all the upper vertical ring decorations 3311, the lower vertical ring decorations 3331, and the left horizontal ring. Since only the movement control of the decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is suspended, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration are displayed. When the effect of moving the body 3371 to the appearance position is executed, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move from the retracted position. At the same time, the effect display device 1600 displays a decoration image 3390 behind the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. At the same time, a specific effect image is displayed in a portion partitioned by the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 (decoration image 3390) at the appearance position. Since it is displayed, the player has the illusion that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 have moved to the appearance position. The upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration 3390 are similar to the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. The player can see the same effect as the effect by the decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371.例文帳に追加Therefore, even if the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot move to the appearance position due to a problem, the upper vertical ring A decoration image 3390 similar to the decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be shown to the player. The decoration image 3390 can show the player an effect equivalent to the effect by the decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371, and the decoration image 3390 can make the specific effect image stand out. This allows the player to enjoy the performance of the specific performance image, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

In addition, if any one of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot be moved to the appearance position, The movement control of all the upper vertical ring decorations 3311, the lower vertical ring decorations 3331, the left horizontal ring decorations 3351, and the right horizontal ring decorations 3371 is stopped, and the upper vertical ring decorations 3311 and the lower vertical ring decorations are stopped. 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are not moved to the appearance position, so the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the When the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is simultaneously moved to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration moved to the appearance position. A decoration image 3390 that becomes visible by not moving to the appearing position due to a problem can be avoided from performing an effect in which one of the bodies 3371 and the decoration image 3390 that can be visually recognized is mixed, and the player feels uncomfortable. It is possible to prevent it and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Also, when the effect of moving the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 to the appearance position is executed, the decoration image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. The decoration image is displayed regardless of whether the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move to the appearance position. Since 3390 is displayed, an image for when a problem occurs in the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is separately provided. It is not necessary, and the load on the display of the effect image including the decoration image 3390 can be reduced.

In the peripheral control board 1510, the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 detect the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, And when it is detected that the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 does not move, the movement control of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is suspended. Therefore, the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration body 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration body 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are stopped at halfway positions due to a problem, and the operation is incomplete. In addition, only movement control is suspended, and a decorative image 3390 is displayed on the effect display device 1600. is displayed, the player can be entertained by the decoration image 3390, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest.

Furthermore, since the movement control of the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is stopped by detection of a defect, the upper vertical ring decoration Back third upper drive motor 3320, back third lower drive motor 3340, back third left drive for moving body 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and right horizontal ring decoration 3371 Motor 3360 and back third right drive motor 3380 are not overloaded, and upper vertical ring decoration 3311, lower vertical ring decoration 3331, left horizontal ring decoration 3351, right horizontal ring decoration 3371, and so on. It is possible to prevent other members from being damaged, and to avoid an increase in trouble.

In addition, since the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are invisible in the state of the retracted position, the upper vertical ring decoration is for some reason. 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot be moved to the appearance position, the effect display device 1600 can be decorated as described above. Since the image 3390 is displayed, it is possible to enjoy the effect of the decoration image 3390, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration at the retreat position. The player notices that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move because the body 3371 cannot be seen. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uneasy and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, when the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved to the retreat position (normal state), Since the vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 cannot be visually recognized, the player cannot see the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 in the retracted position. , the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be made difficult to notice. When the ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are moved to the appearance position, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration which were not visible are displayed. The appearance of the body 3371 can greatly surprise the player, amuse the player, and make the player think that something good is going to happen. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation and suppress the decline in interest.

In addition, the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 detect the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration. 3371 does not move to the appearance position is detected, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 at the retreat position are moved upward. Since the detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 are used for detection, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring are detected by the peripheral control board 1510. When the decoration body 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration body 3371 are controlled to move to the appearance position, the upper detection sensor 3324, the lower detection sensor 3344, the left detection sensor 3364, and the right detection sensor 3384 move the upper vertical ring decoration body 3311. , the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 are still detected, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 are detected. , and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 have not moved, and the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move to the appearance positions. It is possible to realize a gaming machine that can detect a malfunction and that has the above-described effects.

A decorative image 3390 similar to the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is the upper vertical ring decoration 3311 and the lower vertical ring decoration. 3331 , the left horizontal ring decoration 3351 , and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 may be larger or smaller. When the decoration image 3390 is made larger than the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, the decoration image displayed on the effect display device 1600 3390 has the advantage that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 can be further decorated. On the other hand, when the decorative image 3390 is made smaller than the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371, the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration When the ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 were moved to their appearance position, a problem occurred, causing the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, and the left horizontal ring decoration to move. There is an advantage that the player cannot recognize the decoration image 3390 unless the movement control of the horizontal ring decoration 3351 and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 is stopped.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 has the back second outer decorative body 3228 and the through hole 3329a penetrating back and forth. In front of the back second inner decoration 3229, in a normal state, there are 4 special rotating decorations 3211 with special decorations and the remaining 6 with decorations different from the special rotation decorations 3211. Twelve rotating ornamental bodies 3210 having a plate-like translucent property, which are composed of one ordinary rotating ornamental body 3212, extend back and forth so as to decorate the outer periphery of the through hole 3229a. The display screen of the effect display device 1600, which is arranged on the circumference of the revolution and which is provided behind through the through hole 3229a, faces. In this state, when the drive ring 3221 is rotated by the back second drive motor 3222, the shaft portion 3210a extending rearward from each rotary decoration 3210 is inserted into the shaft hole 3221a of the drive ring 3221, Together with the shaft portion 3210a, the rotary decorative body 3210 and the rotary gear 3225 provided at the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a are arranged on a circumference (revolution circle circumference). At this time, the rotating gear 3225 provided at the rear end of the shaft portion 3210a meshes with the fixed gear portion 3220b provided closer to the center of revolution than the revolution circle of the unit base 3220. When the body gear 3225 revolves, the rotator gear 3225 rolls on the fixed gear portion 3220b and rotates in the same direction as the revolution direction of the rotator gear 3225. At the same time, it rotates (rotates) around the axis extending forward and backward of the shaft portion 3210a. Therefore, by rotating the drive ring 3221 with the back second drive motor 3222, the plurality (12 pieces) of the rotary decorative bodies 3210 revolve in the same direction while rotating, so that a strong impact can be given to the player. It is possible to strongly attract the player's interest, to make the player think that something good will happen, to heighten the player's expectation for the game, and to suppress the decline in interest. can be made

In addition, since the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 that revolve around the axis extending back and forth are formed in a flat plate shape, the surface of the rotary decorations 3210 faces forward, and the entire rotary decorations 3210 can be seen by the player. Since it is easy to see from the side, when these rotating decorative bodies 3210 revolve while rotating, the player can see how the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 rotate round and round, giving the player a lively effect. In addition, the game can give a strong impact to the player and greatly entertain the player, thereby suppressing a decline in the interest of the player.

In addition, behind the plurality of rotating decorations 3210, the back second outer decoration 3228, and the back second inner decoration 3229, within the range of the revolution trajectory of the rotation decoration 3210, a stop position on the revolution circle (one A plurality of (12) rotating decoration LED groups 3250 that are divided in the revolving direction behind the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 that stop revolving at a position where the rotating decoration 3210 stops revolving at a specific position), and each Since it has a plurality of LEDs 3241 of the back second decoration substrate 3240 composed of the intermediate LED group 3255 positioned between the rotating decoration LED groups 3250, the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 is at the stop position In this state, when the LEDs 3241 of the rotating decoration LED group 3250 are made to emit light, the rotating decoration 3210 can be illuminated. When the LED 3241 emits light, the rotary decoration 3210 can be decorated with light. Therefore, when the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 are revolving while rotating, if the LEDs 3241 of the LED group 3250 of the rotary decoration and the LEDs 3241 of the intermediate LED group 3255 emit light in accordance with the revolution of the rotary decoration 3210, the LEDs 3241 emit light. Since the LED 3241 moves along with the revolution of the rotary decoration 3210, the light from the LED 3241 passes through the translucent back second outer decoration 3228 and the back second inner decoration 3229 and the rotary decoration. By irradiating forward (player side) through the body 3210, the rotating decorative body 3210 can be light-emitting decorated as if the rotating decorative body 3210 is provided with an LED 3241, and a plurality of light-emitting decorated bodies can be illuminated. By showing the player the effect of the rotating decorative body 3210 revolving while rotating, the player can be greatly entertained and the loss of interest can be suppressed.

At this time, the plurality of LEDs 3241 constituting the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 are arranged in the revolution direction of the rotating decorative body 3210 such that the first LED group 3251, the second LED group 3252, the third LED group 3253, and the fourth LED group 3254, so that the LEDs 3241 of the rotating decoration LED group 3250 can be finely illuminated according to the revolution of the rotating decoration 3210, so only the LED 3241 located behind the rotating decoration 3210 can be made easy to emit light, and the LED 3241 is provided on the rotating decorative body 3210 that revolves while rotating. It is possible to make the player more amused, and to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

Further, since a plurality of LEDs 3241 composed of the rotating decoration LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are provided within the range of the revolution locus of the rotating decoration 3210, the plurality of LEDs 3241 are arranged in an annular shape. , the upper left corner LED group 3256, the upper right corner LED group 3257, the lower left corner LED group 3258, and the winning opening LED group 3259. When all the LEDs 3241 except for the LEDs 3241 included in the winning hole LED group 3259 are caused to emit light, an annular light emitting effect is shown to the player. be able to. In addition, since the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are alternately provided in the revolution direction (circumferential direction) of the rotating decorative body 3210, the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are arranged along the circumference of the circle. By alternately emitting light in different directions, the player can see a light-emitting decoration in which the light rotates on a circle. Furthermore, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 are provided within the range of the revolution locus of the rotary decoration 3210, the plurality of LEDs 3241 are arranged in an annular shape with a predetermined width. By sequentially emitting light from the outside to the outside, the player can see a light emitting effect in which the ring of light spreads outward, or by causing the plurality of LEDs 3241 to emit light from the outside to the inside of the ring in order, the ring of light can be seen. A player can be shown or given a light emitting effect that converges inward. In this way, since various lighting effects can be shown to the player, it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored with the various effects, and to suppress the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

Also, when performing a light emission effect such that the light rotates in the revolving direction of the rotating decorative body 3210, each rotating decorative body LED group 3250 is the first LED group 3251 and the second LED group 3252 in the revolving direction of the rotating decorative body 3210 Since it is divided into the third LED group 3253 and the fourth LED group 3254, it is possible to make the movement of the light in the revolving direction more fine, so that the player can enjoy a light emission effect in which the light rotates more smoothly. can be shown to In addition, since the movement of the light in the revolving direction of the rotary decorative body 3210 becomes finer, the rotation speed of the light rotating in the circumferential direction can be made slower, and the colorful light emission effect makes it difficult for the player to get bored. can be suppressed.

In addition, by appropriately combining the light emitting effect by the plurality of LEDs 3241 as described above and the movable effect in which the rotating decorative body 3210 revolves while rotating, the player can enjoy effects that could not be seen in the past pachinko machines. This can give a strong impact to the player, strongly attract the player's interest, entertain the player, and suppress a decline in interest.

In addition, since the plurality of LEDs 3241 are grouped into a plurality of rotating decoration LED groups 3250 and a plurality of intermediate LED groups 3255, each rotating decoration LED group 3250 and intermediate LED group 3255 are controlled to emit light. By doing so, compared to the case where the plurality of LEDs 3241 are controlled one by one to emit light, the load on the control can be reduced, and the occurrence of overload causes a problem, which makes the player's interest. can be avoided, the control circuit in the peripheral control board 1510 and the like can be simplified, and the cost can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the rotating decoration LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 are alternately provided in the revolution direction (circumferential direction) of the rotating decoration 3210, for example, only the rotating decoration LED group 3250 is turned on at regular time intervals. The speed of light rotating in the circumferential direction differs between the case of sequentially emitting light in the circumferential direction and the case of alternately emitting light from the rotating decorative body LED group 3250 and the intermediate LED group 3255 at the same time intervals. It is possible to reduce the load on the control of the light emitting effect, and to entertain the player with the light emitting effect in which the light rotates at different speeds, thereby suppressing the loss of interest of the player. can.

In addition, since the back second outer decoration 3228 and the back second inner decoration 3229 having translucency are provided between the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 and the plurality of LEDs 3241, the back second outer decoration 3228 And since the LED 3241 of the back second decoration board 3240 is difficult to see from the front due to the back second inner decoration 3229, it is difficult for the player to notice the existence of the LED 3241 provided separately from the rotating decoration 3210. Therefore, it is possible to easily create the illusion that the LED 3241 is provided on the rotating decorative body 3210, and the impact of the luminous decoration of the rotating decorative body 3210 that revolves while rotating can be further enhanced. The performance by the decorative body 3210 can be made more enjoyable, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, since the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 includes a special rotating decoration 3211 with a special decoration (a three-way decoration), the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 are caused to revolve while rotating. Depending on whether or not the special rotary decorations 3211 stop revolving at a specific position, the player can feel nervous and excited, and the player can enjoy the movable performance by the plurality of rotary decorations 3210, which is interesting. A decrease can be suppressed.

Furthermore, a rotational position detection sensor 3231 for detecting that one rotary decoration 3210 is positioned at a specific position on the revolution circle including the stop position, and one special rotary decoration 3211 is positioned at a specific position. and a special rotational position detection sensor 3232 for detecting that the rotation position detection sensor 3231 is located when the normal rotation decoration 3212 among the plurality of rotation decorations 3210 is positioned at a specific position, only the rotation position detection sensor 3231 is detected, and when the special rotary decoration 3211 is positioned at a specific position, the rotation position detection sensor 3231 and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232 detect it. By combining detection by the position detection sensor 3232, it is possible to detect which of the normal rotary decoration 3212 and the special rotary decoration 3211 is positioned at the specific position. Therefore, when one of the plurality of rotating decorations 3210 is stopped revolving at a specific position, by using the rotation position detection sensor 3231 and the special rotation position detection sensor 3232, the normal rotation decoration that revolves while rotating is detected. Since either the 3212 or the special rotary decoration 3211 can stop revolving at a specific position, it is possible to show the player whether or not the special rotary decoration 3211 stops revolving at the specific position. The player can be entertained by being nervous and excited, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

Also, a detection piece 3221c for detecting the normal rotary decoration 3212 and the special rotary decoration 3211 positioned at a specific position, and a special detection piece for detecting the special rotary decoration 3211 positioned at a specific position. 3221d is provided on the driving ring 3221, the detection piece 3221c and the special detection piece 3221d are not rotated compared to the case where the detection piece and the special detection piece are provided on the rotary decoration body 3210. , the configuration of the detection piece 3221c and the special detection piece 3221d can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 that exhibits the above-described effects can be easily realized.

In addition, since a plurality of rotary decorations 3210 can be revolved while being rotated by one rear second drive motor 3222, when the rotation and revolution of the rotary decorations 3210 are driven by separate drive motors In comparison, it is possible to simplify the configuration of the drive mechanism for the plurality of rotary decorations 3210, to reduce the size of the drive mechanism, and to control the movement of the plurality of rotary decorations 3210. load can be reduced. In addition, as described above, since the drive mechanism for the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 can be made smaller, it is possible to relatively widen the space for arranging the plurality of rotary decorations 3210. The rotating decorative body 3210 can be made larger to make it stand out from the player's side, and a plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 can strongly attract the player's interest.

Furthermore, since the shaft portion 3210a is projected further rearward than the LED 3241, the rotary gear 3225 provided at the rear end is rearward of the LED 3241, and the fixed gear portion 3220b and the drive ring 3221 are also rearward of the LED 3241. , rotator gear 3225, fixed gear portion 3220b, drive ring 3221, etc. do not block light emitted forward from LED 3241, and multiple rotary decorations 3210 can be reliably illuminated.

In addition, since the rear second drive motor 3222 that rotates the drive ring 3221 is provided outside the drive ring 3221, the inside of the fixed gear portion 3220b (the inside of the through hole 3229a) can be widened. The display screen of the effect display device 1600 can be made easier to see, and the effect of the effect image can be exhibited more easily.

In addition, since the drive ring 3221 is provided outside the fixed gear portion 3220b and the rear second drive motor 3222 is provided outside the drive ring 3221, the rear second drive motor 3222 is provided at substantially the same position as the drive ring 3221 in the front-rear direction. Since two drive motors 3222 can be provided, it is possible to suppress an increase in the thickness of the drive mechanism for the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 . In addition, since the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 are flat plate-shaped, the thickness of the plurality of rotary decorations 3210 in the front-rear direction can be reduced. For these reasons, the thickness in the front-rear direction can be reduced, so by relatively widening the space for arranging the plurality of rotating decorations 3210, the diameter of the rotating decorations 3210 can be increased. It is possible to make it stand out from the player's side, to strongly attract the interest of the player to the plurality of rotating decorations 3210, and to provide other members in front and behind the plurality of rotating decorations 3210. By performing performances using other provided members, it is possible to show more diverse performances to the players, to make it difficult for the players to get bored and to suppress the decline in interest.

Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B hit into the upper part of the game area 5a along the peripheral edge from the left side passes through the gate as the privilege providing part provided in the game area 5a. When passing through the part 2003 or accepted by the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 of the attacker unit 2400 as a privilege granting part, a predetermined privilege (for example, an ordinary lottery in which the player is advantageous) A lottery result, special lottery result, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B, etc.) are provided, so that the player is made to hit the game ball B aiming at a privilege providing part such as a gate part 2003. You can play games.

In the game area 5a, an upstream space portion 2511 is provided above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510 on the right side in the left-right direction above the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, and on the downstream side of the upstream space portion 2511. Since the game ball B circulates through different routes according to the hitting strength and the circulation passage group 2520 is provided on the upstream side of the gate portion 2003, the first circulation constituting the circulation passage group 2520 is provided. The probability that the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 on the downstream side differs for each of the passages 2521 and the second circulation passages 2522 . Therefore, the player hits the game ball B at the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522 with a high probability that the game ball B enters the upstream space 2511 and passes through the gate portion 2003. The hitting strength of the game ball B must be adjusted so that the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a with the hitting strength of entering the game ball B. Variation can be imparted, making it difficult for the player to get bored, and the player can enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball B aiming at the desired entrance of the second circulation passage 2522.例文帳に追加, it is possible to suppress the decline in the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the impingement portion 1006 protrudes inward from the peripheral edge of the game area 5a near the end on the right side of the upstream space portion 2511, and the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521 is provided near the impingement portion 1006. Therefore, the game ball B is hit with the strength to abut against the impinging portion 1006 (for example, the hitting strength above a certain level at which the game ball B circulates (rolls) along the periphery of the game area 5a). Then, the game ball B in contact with the impinging portion 1006 enters the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521 near the impinging portion 1006 in the circulation passage group 2520 with a high probability. Therefore, when aiming at the first circulation passage 2521, the game ball B is hit with the strength to contact the impingement portion 1006, and when aiming at the other second circulation passage 2522, the strength is not in contact with the impingement portion 1006. It is sufficient to hit the game ball B with , and the hitting operation of the game ball B can be sharpened, and the player can be entertained and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

Then, by reducing the probability that the game ball B circulating through the first circulation passage 2521 having an entrance near the impinging portion 1006 passes through the gate portion 2003 on the downstream side, there is also an opportunity to give a privilege. Since the game ball B is discharged to the outside of the game area 5a without any damage, the player is asked to adjust the hitting strength of the game ball B so that the game ball B does not enter the entrance of the first circulation passage 2521. Therefore, it is possible to give variation to the operation of hitting the game ball B, to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and to play the game aiming at the entrance of the remaining second circulation passage 2522 for the player. The operation of hitting the ball B can be enjoyed, and the decline in the player's interest in the game can be suppressed.

In addition, since the distribution passage group 2520 is provided in the direction in which the game ball B is hit, the distribution passage group 2520 (the first distribution passage 2521 and the second Circulation passage 2522) can be reliably embodied, and the pachinko machine 1 having the above-described effects can be obtained.

In addition, since the upstream space portion 2511 is provided on the upstream side of the circulation passage group 2520, in order for the player to enter the game ball B into the desired entrance of the first circulation passage 2521 or the second circulation passage 2522, the upstream It is necessary to strike the game ball B into the game area 5a with the striking strength to enter the space 2511 and the desired striking strength to enter the first circulation passage 2521 or the second circulation passage 2522. Thus, the degree of difficulty of the operation of hitting the game ball B can be further increased, and the player can enjoy the operation of hitting the game ball B, thereby suppressing the loss of interest.

Furthermore, since the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522 are adjacent to each other, their entrances are adjacent to each other. Since the entrance of the distribution passage into which the ball enters is likely to be different, the degree of difficulty of the operation of hitting the game ball B by the player can be increased, and the player enjoys the operation of hitting the game ball B to reduce the interest. can be suppressed.

In addition, since the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522 are adjacent to each other, the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522 are aggregated to some extent, so the inside of the game area 5a and the center The inside of the frame of the accessory 2500 can be made relatively wide, and the player can enjoy the game within the game area 5a and the performance within the frame of the center accessory 2500, thereby suppressing the decrease in interest. can.

In the above embodiment, the group of circulation passages 2520 is composed of two circulation passages, that is, the first circulation passage 2521 and the second circulation passage 2522. However, the group is not limited to this. It is good also as what is constituted by one distribution channel.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball B that has entered the attacker right passage 2422 of the attacker unit 2400 is guided onto the second starting entrance guidance shelf 2423 with a high probability by contact with the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005. However, it is not limited to this, and the game ball B that has entered the attacker's right passage 2422 may be guided to the attacker's lower right passage 2426 with a high probability.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210 revolves in the same direction as the direction in which they rotate. It may revolve in the direction opposite to the direction in which it rotates.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of the problem that the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371 do not move to the appearance position, they Although the decorative image 3390 is displayed when the effect using , the decoration image 3390 may be displayed only when a problem occurs in them.

In the above embodiment, the rear third upper driving motor 3320, the rear third lower driving motor 3340, the rear third left driving motor 3360, and the rear third right driving motor 3380 are driven by the constant current driving method. are shown, but they are not limited to this, and since they are stepping motors, they may be driven by a 2-2 phase excitation system, and high torque can be generated.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the back third upper drive motor 3320, the back third lower drive motor 3340, the back third left drive motor 3360, and the back third right drive motor 3380 are stepping motors. However, it is not limited to this, and a DC motor with a large starting torque may be used.

Further, in the above embodiment, the rear third upper driving motor 3320 rotates the upper vertical ring decoration 3311, the lower vertical ring decoration 3331, the left horizontal ring decoration 3351, and the right horizontal ring decoration 3371. , the rear third lower drive motor 3340, the rear third left drive motor 3360, and the rear third right drive motor 3380 are shown, but the drive motors are not limited to these, and may be solenoids, rotary solenoids, or the like. .

[6. control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine. The main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1, as shown, is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls game operations (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit 1511 that controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310, and a door frame effect display device 152 and a door frame sub-controller based on commands from the peripheral control unit 1511. A display unit 185 and an effect display control unit 1512 that controls the display of effect images on the effect display device 1600 are provided. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls payout of the game ball B and a launch control unit 633b that controls launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 111 .

[6-1. Main control board]
Although not shown in detail, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main controller that is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, and the like. MPU 1310a, a main control I/O port as an input/output device (I/O device), a main control input circuit to which detection signals from various detection switches are input, and a main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. A circuit, a setting display 1310g for displaying set values and error displays, and an out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 for displaying the number of game balls collected. and a base monitor 1310h. The main control MPU 1310a has built-in ROM and RAM, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like.

The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in RAM") and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in ROM"). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in WDT") for monitoring the operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built-in.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a incorporates a non-volatile RAM. This non-volatile RAM pre-stores a unique ID code assigned by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a to identify the individual (there is only one code in the world). Since the ID code assigned once is stored in a non-volatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can retrieve the ID code from the non-volatile RAM and refer to it.

The main control MPU 1310a also incorporates a circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter referred to as "internal reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and if the contents of the register change to inconsistent contents, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly affected by electrical noise. This is the reset circuit. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit cannot be controlled and disabled by a user program. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset is applied without executing the main control side power-off processing described later, and the main control side power-on processing described later is executed again. It will be done. In this case, since the main control side power failure processing has not been executed, as will be described later, a checksum (sum value) error will always occur in the main control built-in RAM, so the contents of the main control built-in RAM will be completely erased ( cleared). In addition, even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control board 1310 (main control Only the MPU 1310a) will be restarted, and the payout control board 633 is maintained in the started state.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a includes a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in hardware Random number circuit”) is built in. This main control built-in hard random number circuit generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of 0 as the minimum value and 65535 as the maximum value is preset), The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed) and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first sets one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and the clock signal (main Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed without overlapping, and the values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When all the values of are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU 1310a determines the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a jackpot judgment random number. is set as

The main control input circuit is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information to which detection signals from various sensors are input to its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is not input. In other words, the main control input circuit outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals because the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit that

The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes a first starting opening sensor 2101 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting opening 2002, and a second starting opening that detects the game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004. An opening sensor 2402, a general winning opening sensor 2401 and a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detect a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a gate sensor 2506 that detects a game ball B that has passed through the gate section 2003, and a large winning opening 2005. A large winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the first receiving opening sensor 2403, a first receiving opening sensor 2404 that detects the gaming ball B received in the first receiving opening 2007 after being detected by the receiving opening sensor 2403, and a winning opening A second receiving port sensor 2405 that detects the game ball B received in the second receiving port 2008 after being detected by the mouth sensor 2403, a magnetic sensor 2470 that detects illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, Vibration sensor 3005 for detecting illegal vibrations, and out-port sensor 3032 for detecting game balls B collected by out-port 1008 provided in game area 5a divided and formed on game board 5, etc. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a through the control input circuit.

A detection signal from a setting key 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. In addition, the signal from the RWM clear button 633z provided on the payout control board 633 is also input to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The RWM clear button 633z is a RAM built in the payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 (main control built-in RAM). function as a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in each predetermined area of , function as an error reset switch for clearing the error displayed on the error LED display, and set values It also has a function as a setting switching button for selecting and switching. Therefore, the signal from the RWM clear button 633z input to the main control board 1310 includes a signal (RAM clear signal) as a RAM clear switch for transmitting RAM clear and a signal (RAM clear signal) as an error release switch for transmitting error cancellation. error cancellation signal) and a signal for transmitting selection switching of set values as a setting switching button (setting value selection switching signal). While monitoring the input of the value setting change signal, it does not monitor the input of the error cancellation signal which is the control target handled by the payout control board 633 which is not related to itself.

In addition, the detection signal from the door frame open switch 4a and the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 4b are transmitted via the payout control board 633 (that is, through a payout control input circuit and payout control output circuit, which will be described later). When input to the main control board 1310 as they are without passing through the circuit, they are input to input terminals of predetermined input ports of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit.

The detection signals from the first starter sensor 2101 and the second starter sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board, and are passed through the main control input circuit. input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the general winning opening sensor 2401, the big winning opening sensor 2403, the first reception opening sensor 2404, the second reception opening sensor 2405, the magnetic sensor 2470, the vibration sensor 3005, and the out opening sensor 3032 Each detection signal from is input to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit. ing.

Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a control signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control solenoid drive circuit, thereby causing the starter solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid from the main control solenoid drive circuit. 2414, through the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly, and outputs the respective drive signals to the function display unit 1400 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the status indicator, normal pattern indicator, normal Respective drive signals to the holding display, first special pattern display, first special holding number display, second special pattern display, second special holding number display, round display, etc., and other boards Output directly without intervening. Further, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port based on these detection signals.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) about the game to the payout control board 633 by outputting various information (game information) about the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, By outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, a signal (power failure clear signal) is output to the power failure monitoring circuit, or the game ball B is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B, a launch permission signal for permitting the launch of the game ball B is output to the payout control board 633 . The logic of the launch permission signal that conveys permission to launch is set to the launch permission logic when launch is permitted, while the launch stop logic (fire non-permission logic) inverts the launch permission logic when launch is not permitted. is set to As for the logic of the firing permission signal, as an initial value (default), after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after the power is restored), firing permission signal setting processing in the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is started. Until then, it is configured by hardware including a main control output circuit with a reset function so that the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) is set by inverting the firing permission logic.

In this embodiment, the first start sensor 2101, the second start sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2506, and the prize winning sensor 2403 use non-contact electromagnetic proximity switches. On the other hand, the general prize winning slot sensor 2401 and the general prize winning slot sensor 3001 are contact type ON/OFF mechanical switches. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting hole 2002 and the second starting hole 2004 and frequently passes through the gate part 2003, so that the first starting hole sensor 2101 and the second starting hole sensor 2402 , and the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2506 also occurs frequently. For this reason, proximity switches with high durability and long life are used for the first start sensor 2101, the second start sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2506. FIG.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“jackpot” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the big winning hole 2005 is opened and the game ball B enters frequently. Detection of B also occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is also used for the big winning hole sensor 2403 . In addition, since a large amount of game balls B launched into the game area 5a are collected by the out-port 1008 provided in the game area 5a sectioned and formed on the game board 5, the game ball B can also be detected by the out-port sensor 3032. Occurs frequently. For this reason, a proximity switch with high durability and long life is used for the outlet sensor 3032 as well. On the other hand, detection by the general winning hole sensor 2401 and the general winning hole sensor 3001 does not occur frequently in the general winning hole 2001 into which the game ball B does not enter frequently. For this reason, the general winning slot sensor 2401 and the general winning slot sensor 3001 are mechanical switches having a shorter life than proximity switches. It should be noted that regardless of whether or not the game ball B enters the general winning hole 2001 frequently, a proximity switch with high durability and long life may be used.

In addition, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various information (game information) related to the game and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. or Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to the control of game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 to the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control I/O port. The main control MPU 1310 a , which will be described later in detail, receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 , shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control unit 1511 .

Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 1310 from the power board 630 of the board unit 620 . A power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 has an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "main control side Capacitor”). The main control side capacitor allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various information in the main control built-in RAM during the power-off process even when the power is off. Various information stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM is input to the main control MPU 1310a by a signal (RAM clear signal) that tells that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 has been operated when the power is turned on. Then, it is completely erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors the drop of various voltages supplied from the power supply substrate 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages become equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control MPU 1310a via the main control I/O port, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[6-2. Payout control board]
A payout control board 633 that controls the payout of game balls B includes a payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout, and a launching control unit that performs shooting control by a shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by a ball feeding solenoid 145. It is provided with a control section 633b, an error LED indicator for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, and an RWM clear button 633z having a pressing operation section that serves a plurality of functions. The RWM clear button 633z is a RAM built in the payout control MPU, which is a microprocessor provided in the payout control board 633, and a RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor provided in the main control board 1310 (main control built-in function as a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in each predetermined area of the RAM), function as an error reset switch for resetting the error displayed on the error LED indicator, and setting It also functions as a setting switch button for selecting and switching values.

The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch is the RAM clear determination period after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control side power-on processing described later by the main control MPU 1310a is started until the determination in step S14 in the same process is performed).

The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as a setting switching button is the setting switching valid period after the RAM clear determination period has passed (by the main control MPU 1310a, when the main control side power is turned on after the RAM clear determination period has passed. In the setting change process of step S37 in the process, the setting key inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 causes the setting key switch 1311a to be turned ON. to the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the setting key switch 1311a) until it is determined that the setting key cylinder has been rotated clockwise by 60 degrees). there is

The period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as an error canceling switch becomes a valid period from the time when the RAM clear determination period and the setting switching valid period have passed. In addition, during the RAM clear determination period and the setting switching valid period, even if a signal indicating that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is input to the payout control part 633a (payout control MPU described later), it is invalidated. It is

Note that the period during which the RWM clear button 633z operates as the setting switching button is limited to the setting switching valid period after the RAM clear determination period has elapsed, as described above. However, during this setting change effective period, the main control MPU 1310a does not change the setting key switch provided on the setting change board 1311 in the setting change process of step S37 in the main control side power-on process to be described later after the RAM clear determination period has passed. Since the setting key inserted into the insertion port of the setting key cylinder of 1311a continues to monitor the rotation position of the setting key cylinder, an interrupt permission setting for permitting the start of the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed. (Step S52 in the main-control-side power-on process) cannot be performed, and the fraud detection process of step S112 in the main-control-side timer interrupt process, which will be described later, cannot be performed. In other words, the setting switching valid period is a fraudulent act undetectable period.

During this setting switching effective period, that is, the fraudulent act detection undetectable period, there is a risk that an unauthorized person may make some unauthorized alterations to the setting key switches 1311a of the setting change board 1311. FIG.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when accessing the setting key switch 1311a to operate the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, the back cover 640 first covers the rear side of the game board 5 as described above. In order to secure a space where the state can be opened, the structure is such that the body frame 4 must be opened largely (nearly 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2 . As a result, the main body frame 4 is largely opened (approximately 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2 during the setting switching valid period, that is, the fraud detection undetectable period. If any unauthorized modification is attempted, the fraudulent act will be extremely conspicuous in the game hall, so countermeasures against such fraudulent activity can be taken. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to prevention of fraud.

[6-2a. Payout control unit]
The payout control unit 633a, which performs various controls related to payout in the payout control board 633, is a microcontroller that includes a ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, a RAM that temporarily stores data, etc., although detailed illustration is omitted. A payout control MPU as a processor, a payout control I/O port as an I/O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout It has a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580 and a payout control input circuit into which detection signals from various detection switches relating to payout are input.

In the payout control MPU, in addition to its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in RAM") and its built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in ROM") In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as "payout control built-in WDT") that monitors the operation (system) and a function to prevent fraud are also built in.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) about the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands about the payout in a serial manner via the payout control I/O port, and controls the RWM clear button 633z. In addition to inputting a signal indicating that the pressing operation unit has been operated via the payout control I/O port, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is input, a ball cutoff detection sensor 574, payout Detection signals from the detection sensor 591 and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input. A signal indicating that the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is also output to the main control board 1310. FIG.

Detection signals from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are sent to the input terminal of the predetermined input port of the payout control MPU through the payout control input circuit. is entered.

Detection signals from the door frame open switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame open switch for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are paid out via the payout control input circuit. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the control MPU.

In addition, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 and the power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 are sent to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit. is entered in When the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are no longer discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 is kept inside the storage passage 150e to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the weight of the game balls B causes the upper end of the movable piece 153 to move away from the storage passage 150e against the biasing force of the spring 155. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154 . As a result, it can be determined that the lower tray 202 is filled with the game balls B, so when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the tank is full, the further payout of the game balls B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to inform the player, the staff of the game hall, etc. to that effect and urge them to eliminate the full tank of the lower tray 202.例文帳に追加

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port, outputs a signal for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED indicator, A command for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted to the main control board 1310 in a serial manner, and the number of game balls B actually put out is output to the external terminal board 558 . This external terminal board 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the game played by the player by grasping the number of game balls B paid out by the pachinko machine 1, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like.

An error LED indicator (not shown) is a segment indicator, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, graphics, and the like. Contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator include the following. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it is notified that it is "abnormal connection" (specifically, the main control board 1310 and It informs that an abnormality has occurred in the electrical connection between the boards with the payout control board 633), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is cut Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it informs that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that "ball is caught" (specifically, Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that there is a "counting switch error" (specifically, that the payout detection sensor 591 has malfunctioned based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , when the number "5" is displayed, it informs that a "retry error" has occurred (specifically, that the number of retries for the dispensing operation has reached a preset upper limit), and the number "6" is displayed. When displayed, it indicates that the tank is "full" (specifically, the tank is full with game balls B stored in the foul cover unit 150 based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). Notifies that when the number "7" is displayed, it is "CR unconnected" (that the electrical connection is cut off anywhere from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit), When the number "9" is displayed, it is notified that the game is "in stock" (specifically, the number of game balls B that have not yet been paid out has reached a predetermined number). .

A ball lending request signal for the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and a return requesting signal for the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner. is entered. In addition, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of rented game balls B, and outputs a signal indicating the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220. It is input and displayed on the ball rental display section of the operation unit 220 .

[6-2b. Launch control unit]
The shooting control unit 633b performs shooting control by the shooting solenoid 542 and ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit that receives detection signals from various detection switches related to firing, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals. A firing timing control circuit that outputs a firing reference pulse for firing the game ball B toward the game area 5a based on the firing timing control circuit, a firing solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing and a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on the reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game area 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , to generate a ball-feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and output it to the ball-feeding solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 110, a handle touch sensor 192 detects whether or not the palm or fingers are in contact with the handle 111, and detects whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the player's will. A detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, the CR connection signal is input to the firing control input circuit and the firing timing control circuit. A launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 for permitting launch of the game ball B is input to the launch timing control circuit after being input to the launch control input circuit. A signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the intensity of hitting the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 111, is input to a launch solenoid drive circuit.

Based on the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192, the firing timing control circuit satisfies the firing condition 1 that the palm or fingers are touching the handle 111, and based on the CR connection signal, connects the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate. is electrically connected to the game ball B, and if the launch condition 3 that the game ball B is permitted to be shot based on the launch permission signal from the main control board 1310 is not satisfied, the game ball B , for example, the firing solenoid drive circuit does not output a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 and the game ball B cannot be fired.

Based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, this firing solenoid drive circuit applies a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launching strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 111. Triggered by the input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542 . On the other hand, the ball feed solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feed solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feed reference pulse, thereby causing the game balls stored in the upper plate 130 of the door frame 3 to One ball of B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side by stopping the output of the constant current. send. In this way, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. controlled.

Various voltages are supplied to the payout control board 633 from the power board 630 of the board unit 620 . The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as "payout control side Capacitor”). Due to this payout control side capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the payout control built-in RAM even when the power is cut off during the power cutoff processing. Various information stored in a predetermined area of the payout control built-in RAM is paid out when a signal (RAM clear signal) notifying that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is input to the payout control MPU when the power is turned on. It is completely erased (cleared) from the control built-in RAM. A signal (RAM clear signal) indicating that the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is also output to the main control board 1310 .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the discharge control board 633 is provided with a discharge control section 633b that controls the ball feeding by the ball feeding solenoid 145 as well as the firing control by the firing solenoid 542. may be configured. In this case, the firing permission signal from the main control board 1310 may be configured to be input directly to the power supply board 630, or may be input to the power supply board 630 via the payout control board 633. It may be input to the power supply board 630 via a relay board that does not.

[6-3. Peripheral control board]
Peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. An effect display control unit 1512 that controls drawing of the device 152 and the effect display device 1600 is provided.

[6-3a. Peripheral control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the peripheral control unit 1511, which performs performance control in the peripheral control board 1510, includes a peripheral control MPU as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM that stores various processing programs and various commands, and a high-quality performance. and a sound ROM in which sound information such as music, voice, and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC is stored.

The peripheral control MPU incorporates a plurality of parallel I/O ports, serial I/O ports, etc. When various commands are received from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decoration board of the game board 5 Game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED etc. is sent from the serial I/O port for the lamp driving board through the panel driving board 1720 in the driving board unit 1700. The game board side driving data for transmitting to each decoration board of the game board 5 and for outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various production units provided on the game board 5 is transmitted to the game board decoration drive board serial number. Transmit from the I/O port to the drive motor or drive solenoid of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720, or drive the first elevation drive motor 175b provided on the door frame 3, the second elevation drive motor 182, etc. From door-side drive data for outputting a signal and door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 Control data (display command) from the serial I/O port for the display control unit to the effect display control unit 1512, or output a control signal (sound command) for extracting sound information from the sound ROM to the sound source IC. do.

A plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3210 of the second rear effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5, an upper vertical ring decorative body 3311, a lower vertical ring decorative body 3331, and a left horizontal ring decoration of the third rear effect unit 3300. Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the rotational position, movement position, etc. of the body 3351 and the right lateral ring decorative body 3371 are input to the peripheral control MPU via the panel drive board 1720 .

Further, a detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 165 of the effect operation section 160 in the door frame effect device 150 provided on the door frame 3 is input to the peripheral control MPU. Further, the peripheral control MPU receives a signal (operation signal) from the effect display control unit 1512 that indicates that the effect display control unit 1512 is operating normally. monitoring the action.

The sound source IC extracts sound information from the sound ROM based on control data (sound commands) from the peripheral control MPU, and outputs various sounds from the lower speaker 153a, the lower front speaker 191, the upper speaker 241, etc. provided on the door frame 3. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects are output in accordance with the performance. The volume can be adjusted by rotating a volume protruding rearward from the peripheral control board box in which the peripheral control board 1510 is housed. In this embodiment, the lower speaker 153a, the lower front speaker 191, and the upper speaker 241 of the door frame 3 are supplied with acoustic signals as sound information (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, or 4ch surround signal). .1ch surround signal, etc.), it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound performance) than before.

The peripheral control unit 1511 includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown) in addition to the built-in WDT (watchdog timer) built into the peripheral control MPU. It is used together with WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is running out of control.

A display command output from the peripheral control MPU to the effect display control unit 1512 is performed through a serial input/output port. k) Bps (bits per second, hereinafter referred to as "bps") is set. On the other hand, the initial data, the door frame side lighting and blinking command, the game board side lighting and blinking command, the movable body drive command, etc., which are output from the peripheral control MPU to the panel drive board 1720 of the game board 5, are a plurality of serial numbers different from the display commands. This is performed by an input/output port, and 250 kbps is set as the bit rate in this embodiment.

The panel driving board 1720 outputs a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received door frame side lighting blinking command to the LEDs (LED 121 a, LED 122 a, LED 138 a, LED 153 c, LED 159 a, grid decoration LED 195 ) of each decorative board provided on the door frame 3 . , LED 213a, upper outer peak LED 224, upper outer valley LED 225, upper outer edge LED 231, lattice decoration LED 245, etc.), and the game board 5 is provided with a lighting signal or a blinking signal based on the received game board side lighting blinking command. It is also output to the LED of each decorative board.

In addition, the panel drive board 1720 transmits a drive signal based on the received drive command to the first up-and-down drive motor 175b and the second up-and-down drive motor 182 provided in the door frame 3 and each drive provided in the game board 5. Output to a motor, etc.

[6-3b. Effect display control unit]
The effect display control unit 1512 controls drawing of the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 . Although detailed illustration is omitted, the effect display control unit 1512 includes a display control MPU as a microprocessor, a display control ROM that stores various processing programs, various commands and various data, the door frame effect display device 152 and effect display. A VDP (abbreviation of Video Display Processor) that controls the display of the device 1600, an image ROM that stores various data of screens displayed on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600, and data stored in the image ROM and an image RAM to which various data are transferred and copied.

This display control MPU incorporates a parallel I/O port, a serial I/O port, etc., and controls the VDP based on control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511 to control the door frame effect display device 152 . and drawing control of the effect display device 1600. When the display control MPU is operating normally, the display control MPU outputs an operation signal to the peripheral control unit 1511 to that effect. Further, the display control MPU receives an in-execution signal from the VDP, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the in-execution signal is stopped every 16 ms.

The display control ROM stores not only various programs for generating screens to be drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600, but also control data (display commands) from the peripheral control unit 1511, corresponding schedule data, and A plurality of nonresident area transfer schedule data and the like corresponding to control data (display commands) are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the configuration of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 . The non-resident area transfer schedule data is configured by arranging non-resident area transfer data in chronological order, which defines the order when various data stored in the image ROM are transferred to the non-resident area of the image RAM. This non-resident area transfer data has an order in which the screen data to be drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 are transferred in advance from the image ROM to the non-resident area of the image RAM in accordance with the progress of the schedule data. stipulated.

The display control MPU extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 1511 from the display control ROM and outputs the screen data following the top screen data to the VDP. It extracts from the display control ROM and outputs it to the VDP. In this way, the display control MPU extracts the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the top screen data from the display control ROM and outputs them to the VDP.

When screen data output from the display control MPU is input, the VDP extracts sprite data from the image RAM based on the input screen data and displays it on the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600. Drawing data is generated, and the generated drawing data is output to the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 . Also, when the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 does not accept screen data from the display control MPU, the VDP outputs an execution signal to the display control MPU. Note that the VDP employs a line buffer system. This "line buffer method" is a method in which drawing data for one line for drawing in the horizontal direction of the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 is held in a line buffer, and drawing for one line held in the line buffer is performed. This is a method of outputting data to the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 .

The image ROM stores an extremely large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the image ROM increases, that is, when the number of sprites to be drawn on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 increases, the access speed of the image ROM cannot be ignored, and the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device cannot be ignored. This will affect the speed at which the device 1600 draws. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the image ROM is transferred and copied to the image RAM having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from this image RAM. The sprite data is base data, which is data before the sprite is developed into a bitmap format, and is stored in the image ROM in a compressed state.

Here, a "sprite" will be explained. A "sprite" is an image displayed as a unit on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600. FIG. For example, when displaying various persons (characters) on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600, data for drawing each person is called a "sprite". As a result, when displaying a plurality of persons on the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to the person, the houses, mountains, roads, etc. that make up the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be made into one sprite. For these sprites, the position to be arranged on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap each other (hereinafter referred to as "sprite superimposition order") are set, and the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device are set. Rendered at 1600.

Note that the sprite is constructed by gluing together a plurality of rectangular areas of 64 pixels each in length and width. The data for drawing this rectangular area is called a "sprite character". A small sprite can be expressed using one sprite character, and a relatively large sprite such as a person can be expressed using a total of 6 sprite characters, for example, arranged horizontally by 2×vertically 3. can be expressed. Larger sprites such as backgrounds can be represented using more sprite characters. In this way, the number and arrangement of sprite characters can be arbitrarily specified for each sprite.

The door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 sequentially set the display state of each pixel in one direction along the pixels from left to right when viewed from the front, and the main scanning that intersects the one direction. and a sub-scan in which main scan is repeatedly performed in the direction to be driven. When drawing data for one line output from the effect display control unit 1512 is input to the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600, the front side of the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 is displayed as main scanning. The pixels are sequentially output to pixels of one line from left to right as viewed from the top. When the output for one line is completed, the door frame effect display device 152 and the effect display device 1600 move to the line immediately below as sub-scanning. Based on the drawing data for one line, the pixels are sequentially output from left to right when viewed from the front of the door frame effect display device 152 or the effect display device 1600 as main scanning.

[6-4. Mounting of SMD type electronic components]
Next, countermeasures against discontinued electronic components will be described. First, due to various circumstances of the pachinko machine 1, for boards treated as main boards such as the power supply board, main control board, payout control board, etc., lead-type electronic components are mounted on the mounting surface, which is the front side, and the back side is mounted. It is necessary to solder with the solder side which is the side. However, as described above, lead-type electronic components are important for manufacturers of game machines such as pachinko machines, slots, and hybrid game machines, but other general electronics manufacturers can downsize them. surface mounting type (so-called SMD type) is used. As a result, lead-type electronic components may be discontinued due to a decrease in production numbers. Therefore, a lead-type electronic component, which allows an SMD-type electronic component to be configured as a lead-type electronic component, can be mounted on the mounting surface of the substrate treated as the main substrate.

However, when configured as this lead-type electronic component, the outer shape (shape) of the lead-type electronic component becomes larger than the outer shape (shape) of the lead-type electronic component, and a part or a plurality of the lead-type electronic components has protrusions. It may be formed into a distorted outer shape (shape). When a lead-type electronic component having such an external shape (shape) is mounted on the mounting surface of a board treated as a main board, it may become difficult to arrange them on the board due to the positional relationship with other electronic components. For this reason, it may be difficult to configure an SMD type electronic component as the lead type electronic component described above. Therefore, in addition to such lead-type electronic components, among lead-type electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs, SMD-type electronic components are limitedly used as main boards. Mounting on the mounting surface may be permitted.

Here, an SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 112 to 115. FIG. FIG. 112 is an enlarged view (a) of a part of the area where the SMD type electronic parts are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and a view of this enlarged view from the right side of the main control board (b). FIG. 113 is a schematic diagram (a) of the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate in which SMD type electronic components as substitutes for lead type electronic components are concentrated in a predetermined area. 114 is a schematic diagram (b) showing the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of a board on which electronic components of the type are integrated and miniaturized, and FIG. 115 is a perspective view of the main control board box of the main control unit. 112 and 114, except for electronic parts necessary for explanation, other various electronic parts are omitted for the sake of visibility of the drawings.

The SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 is a substitute for a lead type Schmidt trigger inverter (DIP (Dual Inline Package) type) having the same function. is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 . The SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter mounted on the main control board 1310 is one of the main circuits that make up the main control input circuit to which the detection signals from the various sensors described above are input. When it is missing from the board 1310, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, among various sensors, always determines that there is no entry for those that transmit the entry of the game ball, and illegality is the approach of the magnet and illegal vibration. It is always determined that a fraudulent act is being carried out for things that convey a fraudulent act such as. A plurality of types of electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs are mounted on the main control board 1310 as lead-type electronic components.

In this embodiment, a green resist is used for the main control board 1310, and the entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are solidly coated with green resist except for various land patterns. It is

On the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIGS. 112(a) and 112(b), an SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 (hereinafter simply referred to as "Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30") is mounted. and a lead-type high-frequency bypass capacitor MC30 (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor MC30”) capable of removing noise voltage generated by the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 itself is mounted in the vicinity of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. It has become so. Note that the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 and the capacitor MC30 are omitted from FIG. 112(a) for ease of viewing.

The Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is an SMD package in which six Schmitt trigger inverter circuits are integrated. In this embodiment, an SOP (Small Outline Package) having 14 pins is adopted as an SMD package for the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (hereinafter, the SMD package for the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 may be referred to as "SOP14"). In the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30, seven leads from two opposite sides of the SMD package body are bent outward with a lead-to-lead distance dimension (so-called “lead pitch”, 1.27 mm in this embodiment). After being placed on a rectangular land pattern formed only on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 corresponding to each lead, each lead and the surface of the main control board 1310 ( A rectangular land pattern formed only on the mounting surface 1310x is soldered. The width dimension of each lead is 0.43 mm, and the width dimension of the rectangular land pattern is larger than the width dimension of each lead and is 0.76 mm (the length dimension of the rectangular land pattern is 1.27 mm). is. In this embodiment, the size of the SMD package body is 5.3 mm in width, 10.8 mm in length, and 1.5 mm in height. Including the length of the protruding leads, the width dimension of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is 7.8 mm.

Although the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 is soldered to the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the back surface of the main control board 1310 is used as the solder surface in order to mount lead-type electronic components on the main control board 1310. It is described as "back surface (solder surface) of main control board 1310" (same below).

The capacitor MC30 has two leads protruding from a body having a rectangular parallelepiped shape with a distance between leads (so-called “lead pitch”, 5 mm in this embodiment) protruding outward in parallel straight lines. 1310x and 1310y of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the two leads, respectively of the ring-shaped land patterns (also called through-holes; hereinafter the same), the ring-shaped land patterns formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 are formed on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y. After the two leads are inserted toward the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the main control board 1310, the two leads protruding from the ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and the main control board A ring-shaped land pattern formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of 1310 is soldered. The diameter of the two leads is 0.5 mm, and the inner diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is larger than the diameter of the two leads and is 0.7 mm (the outer diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern is 1.5 mm). 3 mm).

On the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the wiring pattern for transmitting the control signal, the wiring pattern for supplying the power supply, and the area other than the area where various land patterns are formed are grounded (GND). , is formed as a so-called solid earth (substrate ground), and the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310 is also formed with wiring patterns for transmitting control signals, wiring patterns for supplying power, and various land patterns. It is formed as a so-called solid earth (substrate ground) in which the other area except for is grounded (GND). The solid earth (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and the solid ground (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 are different from each other. Holes (copper-plated The same ground (GND) is established by being electrically connected through a hole). The diameter of the through hole is 0.3 mm, which is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring-shaped land pattern. The through holes include a solid earth (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 and a solid earth (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. , are electrically connected to the same ground (GND), and are used to route various wiring patterns on both sides (surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310. There are also multiple

On the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. 112(a), a region MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including direction specification) where the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged is printed in white as silk-screen printing. A solid line (or a solid black line) is printed, and a part number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMIC30 and in the lower left corner. Specifically, in the region MSLKMIC30, the lead serving as the first terminal of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is placed on the lower left side and the seventh terminal (ground) so that the longitudinal direction of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is the horizontal direction in FIG. 112(a). (GND) terminal) is placed on the lower right side, the lead for No. 8 terminal is placed on the upper right side, and the lead for No. 14 terminal (power supply terminal) is placed on the upper left side. .

Rectangular land patterns corresponding to the leads that are the 1st to 6th terminals and the 8th to 13th terminals of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 are electrically connected to the respective wiring patterns that transmit the corresponding control signals. A rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead serving as the 7th terminal (ground (GND) terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is a solid ground (board ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. A rectangular land pattern corresponding to a lead that is electrically connected and serves as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is electrically connected to a wiring pattern that supplies power.

On the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols, such as "ABC") and product number (the number listed in the catalog, such as "74XXYYZZ") are engraved. , or printed in a predetermined color (depending on the manufacturer). However, since the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is an SMD package called SOP14 and is small, the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 has a small package body surface area.

In addition, the main control board 1310, which will be described later in detail, is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game. It is housed and sealed in a main control board box 1320 composed of a transparent cover having a plurality of ventilation holes for heat dissipation and a transparent base. This heat-dissipating air vent can release the air inside the main control board box 1320 to the outside air.

Then, when confirming the product numbers (the numbers listed in the catalog) of the various electronic components of the main control board 1310, the surface of the main control board 1310 ( The name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols) and product number (the number listed in the catalog) that are engraved or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 when the (mounting surface) side is viewed through the transparent cover. is small and difficult to see.

Therefore, in this embodiment, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, an information area is provided on the right in the vicinity of the area MSLKMIC30 in FIG. MIC30 part number (number listed in the catalog) MSLK MIC30p is a size that is easy to see compared to the size of the part number (number listed in the catalog) stamped or printed on the package body surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. It is printed in white (or black) as printing. Therefore, the product number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 (the number listed in the catalog) can be visually recognized with certainty.

In addition to the product number (the number listed in the catalog), the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing. In this case, the white (or black) silk-screen printing is printed in white (or black) so as to have a size that is easy to see compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. is preferably printed with As a result, the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be reliably recognized visually.

Also, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the capacitor MC30 is arranged near the rectangular land pattern corresponding to the lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. (The direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity.) is printed with a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing, and in the vicinity of this region MSLKMC30 A part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing on the upper right. Specifically, the region MSLKMC30 is arranged such that the two leads of the capacitor MC30 are arranged in the vertical direction in FIG. It instructs to insert the ring-shaped land pattern and the other lead into the lower ring-shaped land pattern paired with the upper ring-shaped land pattern, respectively.

The wiring pattern to which the ring-shaped land pattern on the upper side is electrically connected is also electrically connected to the lead serving as the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 and the corresponding rectangular land pattern. The ring-shaped land pattern on the lower side is electrically connected to a solid earth (substrate ground) formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control substrate 1310 .

Here, the advantages of mounting SMD type electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate treated as a main substrate will be briefly described. As described above, SMD type electronic components can be made smaller than lead type electronic components. can be extremely suppressed compared to the electronic component mounting density when lead-type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate. Therefore, when mounting an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the lead type electronic component on the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board on which the lead type electronic component is mounted, Since the SMD type electronic components are small, the peripheral area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board on which the SMD type electronic components are mounted can be enlarged, and the lead type electronic components can be replaced with the SMD type electronic components. The area between the replaced parts can also be increased (that is, the electronic parts can be mounted in such a manner that there are many gaps on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate due to the replaced parts). As a result, SMD type electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board can be viewed from multiple directions, so unauthorized modification of SMD type electronic components It is possible to check the mounting state (soldering state) with the electronic component, and the state of various wiring patterns and various land patterns to the SMD type electronic component. Therefore, the use of SMD type electronic components can contribute to the detectability of tampering.

In addition, it is possible to increase the peripheral area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board on which the SMD type electronic components are mounted, and also to increase the area between the components replaced by the SMD type electronic components instead of the lead type electronic components. Therefore, for these areas (board surface (mounting surface)), the SMD type electronic component product number (the number listed in the catalog) is stamped on the SMD type electronic component package body surface or It is possible to print in white (or black) as silk printing so that it is a size that is easy to see compared to the size of the printed product number (the number listed in the catalog), and this product number (the number listed in the catalog) number), the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) can also be printed in white (or black) as silk printing. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the ease of recognition of SMD type electronic components.

When the SMD type electronic component is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board, the distance between the back surface of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the board is extremely short (for example, Schmidt trigger In the inverter MIC 30, the distance between the back surface of the body and the front surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is 0.1 mm to 0.2 mm. There is a problem that even if a fraudulent act of forming some kind of illegal circuit is performed in the gap between the mounting surface and the mounting surface, it is difficult to find such a false circuit.

Therefore, in this embodiment, the following configuration is adopted as a method for preventing the formation of some kind of illegal circuit in the gap between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the substrate.

A configuration is adopted in which each wiring pattern for transmitting control signals is not arranged at all in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(a), a region of the front surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310 corresponding to the rear surface of the main body of Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the lower portion of the main body of Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30) A configuration is adopted in which each wiring pattern for transmitting control signals is not arranged at all in the area passing through the .

In the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, a configuration is adopted in which no wiring pattern for electrical connection with the ground (GND) and no wiring pattern for supplying power are arranged. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(a), a region of the front surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310 corresponding to the rear surface of the main body of Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, the lower portion of the main body of Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30) A configuration is employed in which neither a wiring pattern electrically connected to the ground (GND) nor a wiring pattern for supplying power is arranged in the area passing through the .

A configuration is adopted in which no through holes are arranged in the area of the front surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the rear surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(a), through holes MTH are arranged in the upper right and upper left of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30, and the main control board 1310 surface corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. A configuration in which no through-holes MTH are arranged in the (mounting surface) region (in other words, the region passing through the lower portion of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30) is adopted. As described above, the through-holes MTH are electrically connected by holes (copper-plated holes) passing through both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control board 1310. can be set to the same ground (GND). In addition to the through-holes MTH, the main control board 1310 also has a plurality of through-holes MTH' (not shown) for routing various wiring patterns to both surfaces (front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface)) of the main control substrate 1310. Although present, such a through-hole MTH' also passes through the region of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 (in other words, it passes through the lower portion of the body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30). A configuration in which no through-holes MTH' are arranged in the region where the through-holes MTH' are formed is adopted.

A wiring pattern electrically connected to one of the leads of an SMD type electronic component is formed in a region on the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. adopted a configuration in which the electronic components are not pulled out to the outside. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(a), various wiring patterns to each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are formed on the surface (mounting surface) area of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. In other words, it is not arranged at all in the region passing through the lower portion of the main body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30, but is arranged from above or below the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30.

In order to shorten the wiring pattern that electrically connects one of the leads of the SMD type electronic component to the other lead, the rear surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the corresponding substrate surface (mounting surface) ), the wiring patterns for transmitting control signals are not arranged at all. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112(a), various wiring patterns to each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are formed on the surface (mounting surface) area of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30. In other words, it is not arranged at all in the region passing through the lower portion of the main body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30, but is arranged from above or below the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30.

By soldering each lead of an SMD type electronic component to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, each wiring pattern is electrically connected to the land pattern. A configuration is adopted in which the control signal cannot be taken out. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 112( a ), each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is soldered to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 to form a land pattern. A configuration is adopted in which the control signal cannot be taken out without passing through each wiring pattern electrically connected to the . In other words, a configuration is adopted in which the control signal cannot be taken out from a portion different from each lead of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30.

By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to illegally form a new circuit such as a short circuit or a disconnection circuit in the gap between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the front surface (mounting surface) of the board. can be difficult. In addition, since various wiring patterns to the SMD type electronic component can be visually observed, it is possible to discourage a fraudulent person from providing an illegal circuit to the SMD type electronic component. can be done. Therefore, tampering with SMD type electronic components can be prevented.

In addition, by completely not arranging each wiring pattern for transmitting control signals in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the body of the SMD type electronic component, the back surface of the body of the SMD type electronic component and this SMD A control signal to the SMD type electronic component so that an unauthorized other IC (SMD type electronic component) is not mounted between the back surface of the main body of the type electronic component and the corresponding board surface (mounting surface). and an illegal control signal to another IC cannot be combined and used in the area of the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the corresponding surface (mounting surface) of the board.

In addition, by completely not arranging each wiring pattern for transmitting the control signal in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, an unauthorized other IC (SMD type electronic component) can be detected. As for the type, it is easy to arrange control signals between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of this SMD type electronic component. You can make it impossible to choose things.

In addition, a wiring pattern electrically connected to one of the leads of the SMD type electronic component is formed in a region of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component. By not leading the SMD type electronic component to the outside, it is possible to prevent unauthorized use of the control signal that transmits the wiring pattern led to the outside.

Moreover, by soldering each lead of the SMD type electronic component to a rectangular land pattern formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, each wiring pattern electrically connected to the land pattern can be used. In order to prevent unauthorized use of the control signal that transmits the wiring pattern, it is impossible to extract the control signal from a different part from each lead of the SMD type electronic component. can do.

In addition, in order to shorten the wiring pattern that electrically connects one lead and the other lead among the leads of the SMD type electronic component, the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the corresponding surface of the substrate ( By not arranging the wiring patterns for transmitting control signals in the area of the mounting surface), the wiring patterns electrically connected to the leads of the SMD type electronic component can be arranged from above or below the SMD type electronic component. By arranging them, it is possible to prevent an illegal circuit from being formed around the leads. Among the leads of the SMD type electronic component, unused leads (also referred to as "empty terminals") are electrically connected to a wiring pattern electrically connected to the ground (GND), or Alternatively, when electrically connecting to a wiring pattern that supplies power, it is arranged from above or below the SMD type electronic component so that an illegal circuit cannot be formed around the empty terminal. can be done.

In addition, by arranging no through holes in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the main body of this SMD type electronic component can be To prevent control signals from being taken out through through-holes so that unauthorized other ICs (SMD type electronic components) are not mounted between the back surface and the corresponding surface (mounting surface) of the board. It is possible to prevent unauthorized other ICs from being fixed (soldered) to the through-holes, and the through-holes are used as through-holes for control signals to flow from the back surface (solder surface) to the front surface (mounting surface) of the board. It can be made unavailable for retrieval.

In addition, by not arranging wiring patterns electrically connected to the ground (GND) and wiring patterns for supplying power in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component, , An unauthorized other IC (SMD type electronic component) is mounted between the back surface of the main body of the SMD type electronic component and the surface (mounting surface) of the board corresponding to the back surface of the main body of this SMD type electronic component. It is possible to prevent the IC from becoming a driving source for other unauthorized ICs.

[6-4a. Product number visibility measures by SMD package]
Next, a configuration will be described in which SMD type electronic components are collectively mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of a substrate treated as a main substrate. Since SMD type electronic components can be miniaturized as described above, the size of the board itself can also be miniaturized by collectively mounting them. Here, the main control board 1310 will be described as the main board, and when the main control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and viewed visually, the SMD package is used to measure the visibility of the product number. Another configuration (hereinafter referred to as "configuration for improving the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the second and third embodiments") will be described. 113(a) and 113(b), the embodiment shown in FIGS. ) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the above-described setting display 1310g and base monitor 1310h are omitted for the sake of clarity.

[Comparison between configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to first embodiment and configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to second embodiment]
In the structure of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, the leads are applied to the area of the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 on which the Schmidt trigger inverter, which is a lead-type electronic component, is mounted. The area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including orientation designation) for disposing the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the type electronic component, is a solid white line (or a black line) as silk printing. ), and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMIC30 and on the lower left.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as described above, information is provided near the area MSLKMIC30 and to the right. In this information area, the product number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 MSLKMIC30p is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it has a size that is easy to see compared to the original.

On the other hand, in the structure of the SMD package according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. Except for the lead-type ICs, resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, LEDs, and other electronic components, substitute SMD-type electronic components having the same functions are aggregated on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310′. ) 1310x′. The external dimensions (vertical dimension, horizontal dimension, and thickness dimension) of this main control board 1310′ are the same as the external dimensions of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for the visibility measure of the product number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. .

The main control board 1310' has a straight line that passes through the midpoints of the upper side and the lower side of the main control board 1310'. and a part arrangement area 1310xa' for arranging various connectors, and the part number and part number (listed in the catalog) are provided in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310' on the right side of the center line. number) is formed as a parts list area 1310xb' which is an information area written like a parts list of electronic parts arranged in a manner.

Specifically, in the component arrangement area 1310xa′, a ZIP (Zigzag Inline Package) type main control MPU 1310a included in the lead type, various lead type connectors MCN1 to MCN4 (other plural connectors not shown), a resistor MR0 ~ MR4 (other resistors not shown), capacitors MC0 to MC5, MC30 (other capacitors not shown), diode D0 (other diodes not shown), Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (other various IC) is mounted. In the component placement area 1310xa′, a white solid line (or a black solid line) is printed as a silkscreen to indicate the position (orientation may also be specified) at which these various electronic components and various connectors are to be placed. , and in the vicinity of these various electronic components and various connectors, the corresponding part numbers are printed in white (or black) as silk printing. In addition, various connectors are of the lead type. This is because when wiring is connected to the connector, the stress caused by this wiring (this stress is caused by the routing in the wiring route until the wiring is connected to the connector). This is because the accompanying reaction force of the wiring acts on the connector) to prevent the wiring from peeling off from the substrate.

In the parts list area 1310xb', a parts list of electronic parts configured in a manner in which part numbers and part numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) are aligned is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. The part number and the size of the part number are larger (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) than the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the part placement area 1310xa'. is printed in white (or black) as A delimiter ":" is provided between the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. . With this delimiter, it is possible to distinguish and identify the part number from the part number (the number listed in the catalog).

In addition to the product number (the number listed in the catalog), the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be silk-screened in white (or black). Further, in addition to describing the information of such parts, notes regarding the gaming machine may be described. For example, a note such as "The main control board is a security-critical board and should be handled with great care" may be used to draw attention.

In this way, since the surface (mounting surface) area of the main control board 1310′ can be divided into the component placement area 1310xa′ and the parts list area 1310xb′, the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310′ can be divided. It is possible to make it easy to recognize various electronic components and various connectors mounted on the device.

Instead of the silk printing printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310', the foil-extracted area and the foil-extracted area in the configuration for the visibility measure of the product number by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment to be described later. Characters may be employed, and a resist removal region using two coats of resist and white resist removal characters using two coats of resist in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment for visibility measures of the product number. and may be adopted.

[Comparison between configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to first embodiment and configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to third embodiment]
In the structure of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, the leads are applied to the area of the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 on which the Schmidt trigger inverter, which is a lead-type electronic component, is mounted. The area MSLKMIC30 indicating the position (including orientation designation) for disposing the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, which is an alternative SMD type electronic component having the same function as the type electronic component, is a solid white line (or a black line) as silk printing. ), and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMIC30 and on the lower left.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as described above, information is provided near the area MSLKMIC30 and to the right. An area is provided in which the part number (the number listed in the catalog) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 MSLKMIC30p is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number listed in the catalog). It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it has a size that is easy to see compared to the original.

On the other hand, in the structure of the SMD package according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. Except for the lead-type ICs, resistors, capacitors, diodes, coils, LEDs, and other electronic components, alternative SMD-type electronic components having the same functions are aggregated on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310′. ) 1310x′. The size of the main control board 1310' can be reduced by integrating the SMD type electronic components and mounting them on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'. The external dimensions (vertical dimension, horizontal dimension, and thickness dimension) of this main control board 1310′ are the horizontal Only the dimensions are half the length (vertical dimension and thickness dimension are the same).

Various electronic components and various connectors are arranged on a surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'. These various electronic components and various connectors are arranged in the component arrangement area 1310xa' formed on the main control board 1310' in the configuration of the SMD package according to the above-described second embodiment for visibility of the product number. (In other words, areas not shown that indicate the positions (orientation designation may also be included) for arranging these various electronic components and various connectors are the same arrangement and are printed in white (or , black).), and the part numbers corresponding to the vicinity of these various electronic components and various connectors are also printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the same arrangement. In addition, various connectors are of the lead type. This is because when wiring is connected to the connector, the stress caused by this wiring (this stress is caused by the routing in the wiring route until the wiring is connected to the connector). This is because the accompanying reaction force of the wiring acts on the connector.

On the rear surface (soldered surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' is a parts list which is an information area formed on the main control board 1310' in the configuration for the visibility measure of the part number by the SMD package according to the second embodiment described above. In the area 1310xb′, a white (or black) silk-printed part number and a part number (number listed in the catalog) are printed in white (or black), and a white (or , black). The size of the part number and part number (the number listed in the catalog) is compared to the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310'. Large (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. A delimiter ":" is provided between the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. . With this delimiter, it is possible to distinguish and identify the part number from the part number (the number listed in the catalog). The product number (the number listed in the catalog) and the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be silk-screened in white (or black). Further, in addition to describing the information of such parts, notes regarding the gaming machine may be described. For example, a note such as "The main control board is a security-critical board and should be handled with great care" may be used to draw attention.

In addition, on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310', each lead of the ZIP type main control MPU 1310a (shown as part number "MIC1" in the figure) and lead-type electronic components are mounted. The leads of certain capacitors MC0 to MC5, MC30 and resistors MR0 to MR4 protrude from the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' and are soldered to the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310'. The part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) are the main control board 1310' so as not to overlap (avoid) this part. is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the parts list area 1310xb' formed in .

In this way, the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310' is used as an area for arranging components, and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' is used for the part number and the part number (listed in the catalog). ) are used as an area for use as a parts list of electronic parts configured in an aligned manner, the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310' and the back surface of the main control board 1310' Since the role of (solder surface) 1310y' can be distinguished, various electronic components and various connectors mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310' can be easily recognized.

In addition, by integrating SMD type electronic components and mounting them on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310', the size of the main control board 1310' can be reduced. The number of ring-shaped land patterns required for mounting electronic components can be determined and reduced. As a result, various leads of lead-type electronic components protrude from the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310', and the number of soldered portions is reduced. The solder surface 1310y' can be formed as a flat surface.

In addition, since various leads of lead-type electronic components protruding from the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' are soldered, when light from a fluorescent lamp or the like hits them, they are reflected and feel dazzling. Although it may be difficult to see the attached portion, as described above, various leads of lead-type electronic components protrude from the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' for soldering. Since the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310' can be formed as a flat surface by reducing the number of soldered portions, even if the flat surface is exposed to light from a fluorescent lamp or the like, There is no problem that it is difficult to visually recognize a parts list of electronic parts configured in a manner in which silk-printed part numbers and part numbers (listed in catalogs) are aligned.

Instead of silk printing printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x' and the back surface (solder surface) 1310y' of the main control board 1310', the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, which will be described later, is used to improve the visibility of the product number. A foil-extracted area and foil-extracted characters may be employed in the configuration, and a resist-extracted area and a two-time coating using resist in the configuration for visibility measures of the product number by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment. It is also possible to employ white resist-extracted characters using a resist.

By the way, general electric appliance manufacturers use multi-layer substrates in which various wiring patterns can be formed on each layer. However, the main control board and payout control board used in game machines are two-layer boards (double-sided boards) that form various wiring patterns on the front side (mounting side) and back side (solder side) of the board in order to enhance security. ) is employed, and it is necessary to mount various electronic components only on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate, regardless of whether they are lead-type electronic components or SMD-type electronic components. For example, in order to improve security, it is necessary to mount a ZIP type main control MPU 1310a included in the lead type on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, and lead type electronic components can be mounted for profit. In some cases, SMD type electronic parts are not used, and lead type electronic parts are mounted.

When SMD type electronic components and lead type electronic components are mounted together on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board or payout control board, the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board or payout control board Compared to the case where only lead-type electronic components are mounted on the substrate, the number of leads of the lead-type electronic components protruding from the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board and the dispensing control board is reduced. As a result, it is possible to increase the area used as the area for forming various wiring patterns on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board and the payout control board, and also acquire the area used as the area used for other functions. can be done.

Therefore, for example, various SMD type ICs and various SMD type connectors are not mounted on the main control board that is produced as a mass-produced machine in the area on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board where the area has increased as described above. A mounting land pattern formation region 1310ya' (see FIG. 113(b)) can be provided in which various land patterns for mounting and pad patterns for extracting signals can be formed. In the main control board produced as a mass-produced machine, since SMD type electronic components are not mounted on various land patterns and pad patterns in the mounting land pattern forming region 1310ya', various lands in the mounting land pattern forming region 1310ya' The pattern and the pad pattern become non-mounted patterns, and the mounting land pattern forming area 1310ya' becomes an empty area.

When such a non-mounted pattern is formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board, various electronic components and various connectors on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board are controlled by the area where the non-mounted pattern is formed. and the routing of various wiring patterns are subject to restrictions. The entire area of the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board can be effectively used without being subject to restrictions on the placement of various electronic components and various connectors and the routing of various wiring patterns on the mounting surface.

In addition, since such an unmounted pattern is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board, it cannot be seen from the front surface (mounted surface) of the main control board, and the existence of the unmounted pattern can be hidden. , is preferred for security reasons.

It should be noted that part of such unmounted patterns may be formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board for convenience' sake. For example, a connector (SMD type connector) may be easier to connect with wiring if it is arranged on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board.

Further, part of such unmounted patterns may be formed as a lead-type electronic component or a lead-type connector for convenience' sake. For example, there may be a case where strong soldering strength is required, such as a connector that is inserted and pulled out many times.

Next, when the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320, the surface area of the small Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30, which is an SMD package, is small. ) and another configuration of the present invention in which the part number (the number listed in the catalog) is small and difficult to see, and the visibility of the part number is taken by the SMD package (hereinafter referred to as "fourth to sixth embodiments. The configuration of the product number visibility countermeasure by the SMD package” will be described. 114(a) to (c), the embodiment shown in FIGS. 112(a) and 112(b) (hereinafter referred to as "configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to first embodiment"). ) are denoted by the same reference numerals.

[Comparison between configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to first embodiment and configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to fourth embodiment]
In the structure of the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is provided with the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 at the position (orientation is also specified) as described above. ) is silk-printed with a white solid line (or a black solid line), and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-printed in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30 and on the lower left. is printed in white (or black) as

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as described above, information is provided near the area MSLKMIC30 and to the right. An area is provided in which the part number (the number listed in the catalog) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 MSLKMIC30p is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 (number listed in the catalog). It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it has a size that is easy to see compared to the original.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 has the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 as described above. ), an area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is to be placed (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is silk-printed. It is printed with a solid white line (or a solid black line), and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30 and on the upper right. .

On the other hand, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. An area MSLKMIC30′ indicating the position (including orientation designation) where the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is to be arranged is printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310, and is indicated by a white dashed line as silk printing. (or a black dashed line), and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30' and on the upper left. This part number is printed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control board 1310 . This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component numbers and place and print them near the corresponding electronic components. On the other hand, since no electronic components are mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased and printed.

In addition, in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. Instead of the product number MSLKMIC30p, this product number MSLKMIC30p is provided on the rear surface (soldered surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and an information area is provided near and below the area MSLKMIC30'. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it is a size that is easy to see compared to the size of the product number stamped or printed on the surface of the package body (the number listed in the catalog). Therefore, the product number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 (the number listed in the catalog) can be visually recognized with certainty.

The product number MSLKMIC30p may be the same size as the product number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for visibility of the product number, or may be larger. may This is because multiple electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p and place it near the corresponding electronic components for printing. On the other hand, since no electronic parts are mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p can be increased for printing.

In addition to the product number (the number listed in the catalog), the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be printed in white (or black) as silk printing. In this case, the white (or black) silk-screen printing is printed in white (or black) so as to have a size that is easy to see compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. is preferably printed with As a result, the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be reliably recognized visually.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the fourth embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number, printed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. At a position corresponding to the region MSLKMC30 where the capacitor MC30 is placed (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity), the region MSLKMC30' is printed with a white solid line (or a black solid line) as silk printing. Along with being printed, the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30' and in the upper left corner. This part number is printed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310 x of the main control board 1310 . This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the size of the part number is reduced in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number. While it is necessary to reduce the size and place it near the corresponding electronic component and print it, the electronic component is not mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, so the size of the component number is increased. This is because it can be printed as

[Comparison between configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to first embodiment and configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to fifth embodiment]
In the structure of the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is provided with the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 at the position (orientation is also specified) on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x. ) is silk-printed with a white solid line (or a black solid line), and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-printed in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30 and on the lower left. is printed in white (or black) as

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as described above, information is provided near the area MSLKMIC30 and to the right. In this information area, the product number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 MSLKMIC30p is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it has a size that is easy to see compared to the original.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is provided as described above. ), an area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is to be placed (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is silk-printed. It is printed with a solid white line (or a solid black line), and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30 and on the upper right. .

On the other hand, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. An area MSLKMIC30′ indicating the position (including direction designation) where the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is to be arranged is indicated by a dashed line as a foil extraction area at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310. In addition, a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30' and in the upper left corner as foil-cut letters.

In the layer (copper plane) on which various wiring patterns are formed, the foil-extracted area is a wiring pattern that is copper foil, except for the wiring pattern that transmits control signals, the wiring pattern that supplies power, and various land patterns. This is an area formed by making a hole and removing the copper foil around it. A region MSLKMIC30' formed as a foil-cut region has a notch portion 1310yMIC30 in a part on the left side in FIG. 114(b). As a result, the region MSLKMIC30′ becomes a katakana U-shape, and through the notch 1310yMIC30, a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and the U-shaped region MSLKMIC30 ' can be electrically connected to the inner region of . Since the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 is mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the back surface (solder surface) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 corresponding to this mounting area is grounded (GND). This is because the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be prevented from malfunctioning due to noise (strengthened against noise) by securing the area of .

The foil-cut characters are formed by forming characters with a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil. The part numbers formed as foil-cut characters are formed as foil-cut characters larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 . This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component numbers and place them near the corresponding electronic components for printing. On the other hand, since electronic components are not mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased to form foil-cut characters.

In addition, in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. Instead of the product number MSLKMIC30p, this product number MSLKMIC30p is provided on the rear surface (soldered surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, and an information area is provided near and below the area MSLKMIC30'. It is formed as a foil-cut letter so that it has a size that is easy to see compared to the size of the product number stamped or printed on the surface of the package body (the number listed in the catalog). The foil-cut characters are formed by forming characters with a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil. Therefore, the product number of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 (the number listed in the catalog) can be visually recognized with certainty.

The product number MSLKMIC30p formed as foil-cut characters is the same size as the product number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. It may be there, or it may be large. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p is reduced in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. While it is necessary to reduce the size and place it in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic parts for printing, no electronic parts are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p is increased. This is because it is possible to form foil-cut characters.

In addition to the product number (the number listed in the catalog), the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may also be formed as foil-cut characters. In this case, the letters should be formed as foil-cut letters so that they are larger than the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 so as to be easy to see. is preferred. As a result, the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be reliably recognized visually.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the fifth embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number, printed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. An area MSLKMC30′ indicating a position where the capacitor MC30 is to be arranged (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is formed as a foil extraction area by a dashed line at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMC30. ' and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as foil-cut letters on the upper left. In the layer (copper plane) on which various wiring patterns are formed, the foil-extracted area is a wiring pattern that is copper foil, except for the wiring pattern that transmits control signals, the wiring pattern that supplies power, and various land patterns. This is an area formed by making a hole and removing the copper foil around it. The foil-cut characters are formed by forming characters with a wiring pattern made of copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil. The part numbers formed as foil-cut characters are formed as foil-cut characters larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 . This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component numbers and place them near the corresponding electronic components for printing. On the other hand, since electronic components are not mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased to form foil-cut characters.

In addition, the wiring patterns forming the foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters are electrically insulated from various electronic components, and also include wiring patterns for transmitting control signals, wiring patterns for supplying power, and various wiring patterns. It is formed electrically insulated from the land pattern and solid earth (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control substrate 1310. FIG.

[Comparison between configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to first embodiment and configuration of part number visibility measure by SMD package according to sixth embodiment]
In the structure of the SMD package according to the first embodiment, the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 is provided with the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 at the position (orientation is also specified) as described above. ) is silk-printed with a white solid line (or a black solid line), and a part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is silk-printed in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30 and on the lower left. is printed in white (or black) as

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, as described above, information is provided near the area MSLKMIC30 and to the right. In this information area, the product number (number listed in the catalog) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 MSLKMIC30p is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. It is printed in white (or black) as silk printing so that it has a size that is easy to see compared to the original.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the 14th terminal (power supply terminal) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is provided as described above. ), an area MSLKMC30 indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is to be placed (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is silk-printed. It is printed with a solid white line (or a solid black line), and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30 and on the upper right. .

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for visibility of the product number, green is adopted as the resist of the main control board 1310, and the entire surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 are used. ) The entire surface is solidly coated with green resist except for various land patterns.

On the other hand, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number, on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, as shown in FIG. A region MSLKMIC30′ indicating the position (including direction designation) where the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is to be arranged is printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the control board 1310 at a position corresponding to the region MSLKMIC30. The part number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed by a dashed line as a white resist removal area using a resist, and the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 in the vicinity of this area MSLKMIC30' is in the upper left. It is formed as an outline character.

Further, in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, printing is performed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number by the SMD package according to the first embodiment. Instead of the product number MSLKMIC30p that is printed on the package body surface of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30, this product number MSLKMIC30p is stamped or printed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 near and below the region MSLKMIC30'. It is formed as a white resist-cut character using two coats of white resist so that it has a size that is easy to see compared to the size (the number listed in the catalog).

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment for improving the visibility of the part number, printed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 and on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. The region MSLKMC30′ indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is placed (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is the white resist removal region using the white resist applied twice. , and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as white resist-extracted characters using double-coated white resist in the vicinity of this region MSLKMC30' and on the upper left.

Specifically, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is entirely covered with the white resist as the first of the two-coat white resist (that is, the two-coat white resist). For the first time, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is entirely coated with a white resist except for various land patterns). Then, the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is, as the second coat of white resist applied twice, at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMIC30 printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. , a region MSLKMIC30' indicating the position (including direction designation) where the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged is masked as a white resist removal region in a chain line shape, and the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is located in the vicinity of this region MSLKMIC30' and to the upper left. is masked as characters without white resist, and an information area is provided near and below this area MSLKMIC30', and in this information area, the part number MSLKMIC30p of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is masked as characters without white resist. , and an area MSLKMC30 indicating a position where the capacitor MC30 is arranged (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) at a position corresponding to the area MSLKMC30 printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. ' is masked as a white resist removal area in a chain line, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is masked as white resist removal characters in the vicinity of this area MSLKMC30' and on the upper left.

In this masked state, the entire back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310 is covered with white resist except for various land patterns. In other words, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with a green resist except for various land patterns.

As a result, two layers of white resist are formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, but the whole is covered with the white resist of the first layer, and the white resist of the second layer is formed. By covering the entire area except for the masked area with the resist, the masked area is recessed as a recess, and the area MSLKMIC30' indicating the position (including orientation designation) where the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is arranged is white. The part number corresponding to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as white resist removal characters, and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) is stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. MSLKMIC30p is formed as white resist characters, a region MSLKMC30' indicating the position where the capacitor MC30 is arranged (the direction is not specified because the capacitor MC30 has no polarity) is formed by a chain line, and the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is indicated. It is formed as a white resist character. Therefore, the product number (the number listed in the catalog) of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be visually recognized with certainty.

When the part number corresponding to the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is formed as characters with white resist removed, the part number is formed larger than the size printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. FIG. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component numbers and place and print them near the corresponding electronic components. On the other hand, since electronic components are not mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased to form white characters without resist.

When the product number MSLKMIC30p is formed as characters without white resist, the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p printed on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310 in the configuration of the SMD package according to the first embodiment for improving the visibility of the product number. may be the same as or larger than This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p is reduced in the configuration for improving the visibility of the product number using the SMD package according to the first embodiment. While it is necessary to reduce the size and place it in the vicinity of the corresponding electronic parts for printing, no electronic parts are mounted on the back surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the size of the product number MSLKMIC30p is increased. This is because the characters can be formed as white resist removed characters.

The product number (the number listed in the catalog) and the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be formed as white resist-cut characters. In this case, the characters are formed as white resist removed characters so as to have a size that is easy to see compared to the size of the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) stamped or printed on the surface of the package body of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30. is preferred. As a result, the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) of the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be reliably recognized visually.

When the part number corresponding to the capacitor MC30 is formed as characters without white resist, the characters are printed larger than the size printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310. FIG. This is because a plurality of various electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, so it is necessary to reduce the size of the component numbers and place them near the corresponding electronic components for printing. On the other hand, since electronic components are not mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, the size of the component number can be increased to form white characters without resist.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310 is solidly coated with green resist except for various land patterns. It may be configured such that it is solidly painted except for the pattern. In this case, the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 (mounting surface) is silk-printed to indicate the positions (which may also include direction designation) of the various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. The surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is printed with dark solid lines such as dark green, black, gray, etc., and the part numbers corresponding to various electronic components are printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 in dark green, black, gray, etc. are printed as dark characters. With this configuration, the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the other substrates are coated with green resist except for various land patterns. A feature that the control board 1310 can be highlighted can be provided. In addition, among various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the product number of the SMD type electronic component (when the manufacturer name (including abbreviations and symbols) is also written in addition to this ) may also be printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by silk printing.

The entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns. It may be configured to be printed by silk screen printing using two different color resists in which the color of the resist (background) and the color of the resist for the second time are different. As the first time (base), the entire surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 is printed in white, except for various land patterns, by silk printing. Main control board 1310 for the second time while masking the area indicating the position (orientation may also be specified) of the various electronic components to be mounted and the part numbers corresponding to the various electronic components. The entire surface (mounting surface) of , except for various land patterns, may be silk-screen printed in any one of black, blue, yellow, and red. Even with this configuration, the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the other substrates are coated with a green resist, except for various land patterns, so that the other substrates are mainly It can have a feature that the control board 1310 can be highlighted. In addition, it is possible to visually recognize the area indicating the position (orientation designation may be included) of various electronic components and the part numbers corresponding to the various electronic components.

In addition, in the configuration of the SMD package according to the sixth embodiment, the entire back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310 is solidly coated with white resist except for various land patterns. The entire surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310 is solidly coated with green resist except for various land patterns. It may be configured such that it is solidly painted except for the pattern. In this case, on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, an area indicating the position (orientation may also be specified) of various electronic components to be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 A solid line is formed as a white resist removal region, and the part numbers corresponding to various electronic components are formed as white resist removal characters on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 . In addition, among the various electronic components mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the product number of the SMD type electronic component (in addition to this product number, the name of the manufacturer (including abbreviations and symbols)) is also It may be formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1310 as white resist-cut characters.

[6-4b. Anti-tampering measures for SMD type electronic components]
Next, miniaturized electronic components called SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and are replaced with illegal electronic components to acquire illegal game balls. I will explain the point of preventing the act.

As described above, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30, which is an SMD type electronic component mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, has a width dimension of 5.3 mm and a length dimension of 5.3 mm as the size of the SMD package body. is 10.8 mm, the height is 1.5 mm, and the width of the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is 7.8 mm, including the length of the leads protruding from the two sides of the SMD package body.

Since the main control board 1310 is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game, it is necessary to prevent the main control board 1310 from being illegally altered to acquire illegal game balls. It is housed and sealed in a main control board box 1320 composed of a transparent cover body having a plurality of pores and a transparent base body. In the main control board box 1320, as shown in FIG. 115, a cover body 1301 and a base body 1302 are crimped by a one-way screw of a crimping portion 1303 or the like. This crimping part 1303 is a sealing mechanism, and has a plurality of crimping parts. Main control board box 1320 can be closed by crimping cover body 1301 and base body 1302 with a one-way screw or the like of crimping part 1303 using one sealing mechanism, and then main control board box 1320 is opened. must destroy its sealing mechanism. In other words, the structure is such that the cover body 1301 cannot be removed from the base body 1302 unless the sealing mechanism is destroyed.

However, the SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is removed from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by some illegal means such as a thin wire in the main control board box 1320, and the SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 is illegally removed. If a game ball is replaced with an electronic component that is not suitable for such a purpose, there is a risk that a person who makes such unauthorized alterations may acquire an illegal game ball.

Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 115, a plurality of vent holes 1301z having an inner diameter (2 mm in this embodiment) smaller than the size of the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 are formed in the transparent cover body 1301. A configuration was adopted. As a result, even if the SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 by some illegal means such as a thin wire attached to the main control board box 1320, the SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 can be removed. The trigger inverter MIC30 cannot be removed from the main control board box 1320 through the vent 1301z. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 from being replaced with an illegal electronic component.

As described above, the Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 is one of the main circuits that make up the main control input circuit to which detection signals from various sensors are input. Then, the main control MPU 1310a, of the various sensors, always determines that there is no ball entry for those that transmit the entry of a game ball, and for those that transmit fraud such as the approach of magnets and illegal vibrations. It is determined that a fraudulent act is taking place. As a result, the SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and if the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 is missing, a person who makes unauthorized modifications will not be allowed to enter the ball. By maintaining the state, illegal game balls will not be acquired, and by reporting fraudulent activity, the fact that illegal modifications have been made will be communicated to the hall computer of the game form (hall) and the game will be played. The information can also be sent to a staff member such as a store clerk in the hall. In addition, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that a fraudulent act is always taking place with respect to sensors that report fraudulent activity such as the approach of magnets and fraudulent vibrations, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a firing permission signal as described above. is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) to control the game ball so that it cannot be launched toward the game area 5a. It cannot be done at all.

In the above-described embodiment, the SMD type Schmitt trigger inverter MIC 30 is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 as an SMD type electronic component. For example, when a resistor is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, the SMD type resistor peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 and passes through the ventilation hole 1301z to the main control board box 1320. The inner diameter of the ventilation hole 1301z must be smaller than the resistance of the SMD type so as not to protrude from the inside of the .

Since such an SMD type resistor is small, even if it peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is possible to visually check whether it is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. It may be difficult to determine Also, when the SMD type resistor peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 protrudes from the inside of the main control board box 1320 to the outside through the ventilation hole 1301z, the inside lower side of the main control board box 1320 Since there is no trace of the SMD type resistor that has peeled off, it becomes more difficult to visually determine whether or not it is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 .

Therefore, for example, when a JIS standard 1/8 watt 2012 type resistor is adopted as an SMD type resistor, the 2012 type has a length dimension of 2.0 mm and a width dimension of 1.2 mm. With such a small SMD type resistor, even if there is a problem that the main control board 1310 is bent and peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it can be removed from the inside of the main control board box 1320. In order not to protrude to the outside, the inner diameter of the vent hole 1301z is smaller than the smaller one of the length dimension and the width dimension of the small SMD type resistor (here, 1.2 mm of the width dimension). (here, for example, 1.0 mm).

As a result, even if the small SMD type resistor is peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, it is reliably prevented from jumping out of the main control board box 1320 through the ventilation hole 1301z. Therefore, it is possible to obtain an opportunity to visually check the peeled-off small SMD type resistor inside the main control board box 1320, and if the main control board box 1320 is shaken up and down or left and right, this A small chipped SMD type resistor collides with the inner wall of the main control board box 1320 and the main control board 1310 to generate a sound, and this sound provides an opportunity to recognize the small chipped SMD type resistor. Obtainable. In addition to this small SMD type resistor, when electronic parts such as SMD type capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs are used instead of lead type capacitors, diodes, coils, and LEDs, makes the inner diameter of vent 1301z smaller than the smallest of these dimensions.

In this way, even if small SMD type electronic components are peeled off from the surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310, they can be reliably ejected from inside main control board box 1320 to the outside through ventilation hole 1301z. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to increase the probability of discovering the defect that the SMD type electronic component peels off from the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 due to the bending of the main control board 1310 .

In the above-described embodiments (including the configuration of the SMD package according to the first to sixth embodiments for visibility of the product number), SMD type electronic components are mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. Although the point has been described, SMD type electronic components can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the board treated as the main board such as the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633 .

[6-4c. test connector]
The pachinko machine 1 is tested by a specific testing institution and cannot be shipped to the gaming hall unless it is approved by the specific testing institution. The main control board 1310 is provided with a test connector 1310k for extracting various signals related to games. This test connector 1310k is an SMD type electronic component. The test connector 1310k is a straight SMD type connector (a type in which each pin of the connector is arranged vertically and parallel to the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board). , When the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a testing machine to be tested by a specific testing institution, it is usually mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310, and on the transparent cover body 1301 facing the test connector 1310k. While the test harness cover side opening 1301k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k is formed, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass-produced machine shipped to the game hall, the main control board 1310 is formed. The test harness cover body side opening 1301k is not formed in the transparent cover body 1301. As shown in FIG. Therefore, in the main control board 1310 produced as a mass-produced machine, the area for mounting the test connector 1310k is formed as an empty area on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310 .

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a testing machine to be tested by a specific testing institute, the testing connector 1310k is attached to the mounting land pattern forming area 1310ya on the back surface (solder surface) of the main control board 1310. ' (see FIG. 113(b)), and a test harness base body side opening 1302k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k is formed in the transparent base body 1302 facing the test connector 1310k. We adopted the configuration to form As a result, even when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a testing machine to be tested by a specific testing institution, and even when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a mass-produced machine shipped to game halls, the surface of the main control board 1310 Since the area where the test connector 1310k is mounted on the (mounting surface) is not formed as an empty area, other SMD type electronic components can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. . Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310 can be increased.

In addition, by configuring in this way, in preparation for starting the test of the pachinko machine 1 at a specific testing institution, the test operator first removes the main control board box 1320 from the board holder 1200 of the game board 5, and then Subsequently, a test harness electrically connected to a test apparatus installed in a specific test institute is passed through a test harness base body side opening 1302k formed in a transparent base body 1302 to the main control board. It is electrically connected to a test connector 1310k mounted on a mounting land pattern formation area 1310ya' on the back surface (solder surface) of 1310. FIG. Subsequently, the test operator attaches the main control board box 1320 to the board holder 1200 . In this state, the test harness can be sandwiched and held between the transparent base body 1302 of the main control board box 1320 and the board holder 1200, so that the test harness can be moved toward the test connector 1310k. By applying a load in the direction in which the test harness is pushed in, the electrical connection between the test connector 1310k and the test harness becomes unstable due to vibrations caused by the movable body operated by various electric drive sources provided in the pachinko machine 1. In addition, it is possible to prevent twisting and disconnection of the test harness for extracting various important signals related to the game in the test of the pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加

In this embodiment, the test connector 1310k is a straight SMD type connector (each pin of the connector is arranged in parallel with the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board in the vertical direction). However, right-angle SMD type connectors (a type in which each pin of the connector is arranged parallel to the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the main control board) were mainly used. The side wall of the transparent cover body 1301 (transparent cover body 1301 A test harness cover body side opening 1301k for attaching the test harness to the test connector 1310k is formed in the side wall facing the test connector 1310k among the left side wall, the lower side wall, the right side wall, and the upper side wall of the may be adopted. Even with this configuration, the main Since the area for mounting the test connector 1310k on the surface (mounting surface) of the control board 1310 is not formed as an empty area, other SMD type electronic components can be mounted on the surface (mounting surface) of the main control board 1310. can be implemented. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface (mounting surface) of main control board 1310 can be increased. Moreover, as preparation for starting the test of the pachinko machine 1 at a specific testing institution, the test operator first performs the specific test without removing the main control board box 1320 from the board holder 1200 of the game board 5 shown in FIG. A test harness electrically connected to a test device installed in an engine is attached to the rear surface (solder surface) of the main control board through a test harness cover body side opening 1301k formed in a transparent cover body 1301. It can be electrically connected to the mounted test connector 1310k.

Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine in which a game control device (game control board) is provided with a test firing test terminal (test connector) to which a cable for transmitting game information to a test device in a specific testing institution is connected. (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-128621 (paragraph [0054] and FIG. 6)). By the way, in the game machine described in this document, the test connector is mounted on the surface of the game control board when it is tested by a specific testing institution, whereas when it is used in a game hall Since the test connector is not mounted on the surface of the game control board and becomes a vacant area, there is a problem that the vacant area makes it impossible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface of the game control board.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which surface-mount type electronic components are mounted on a board (for example, JP-A-2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, the surface mount type electronic components in the game machine described in this document may have identifiers such as product numbers corresponding to the surface mount type electronic components. There is a problem that the identifier is difficult to visually recognize due to its small size.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which surface-mount type electronic components are mounted on a board (for example, JP-A-2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, when the surface mount type electronic components in the gaming machine described in this document are mounted on a game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game, the surface mount type electronic components may be removed by some illegal means. There is a risk that an illegal game ball may be obtained by removing it from the game control board and replacing it with an illegal electronic component.

Further, conventionally, game machines have been proposed in which a tact switch or the like is provided on a substrate so that a user can feel the switch being turned on or off with a click feeling when operating a pressing operation part. JP-A-2017-023427 (paragraph [0071] and FIG. 70)). By the way, the electronic parts such as the tact switch described in this document are of a lead type in which each lead is inserted into a through hole provided in the substrate from the front surface to the back surface of the substrate and soldered on the back surface side of the substrate. electronic components. When such lead-type electronic components are mounted on a board such as a game control board that controls the progress of a game, for example, when the board is flexed as the lead-type electronic components are operated, the board flexes. There is a risk that the soldered parts of other electronic components mounted on the board may come off and cause electrical problems.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine in which various control boards are arranged at predetermined positions on the back of the game board (for example, JP-A-2013-128621 (paragraph [0032] to paragraph [0034], and FIG. 3)). By the way, the game control board that controls the progress of the game is an important board that determines whether or not to give a profit to the player. Preventive measures are required.

Also, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which surface-mounted components are mounted on a board (for example, JP-A-2014-144218 (paragraph [0042] and FIG. 4)). By the way, when the surface-mounted components in the gaming machine described in this document are mounted on a game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game, the surface-mounted components are mounted within the surface area of the game control board. When the wiring pattern is routed, the distance between the back surface of the surface-mounted component and the surface of the game control board is small, so even if this wiring pattern is modified by some unauthorized means, it becomes difficult to see, and the surface-mounted type electronic component There arises a problem that it is impossible to prevent fraudulent acts against

In addition, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine in which a main control board for controlling a game is arranged on the back side while being housed in a case (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2016-214975 (paragraph [0030], paragraph [0031], and Fig. 2) By the way, like the game machine described in this document, the main control board is an important part for controlling the game, so it is housed in a case and sealed as a crime prevention measure. It is placed on the back side, and it is required to improve the crime prevention performance for important items in terms of crime prevention.

[6-5. Countermeasures against electromagnetic noise that enters through the metal housing of the setting key switch]
Next, a countermeasure against electromagnetic noise that enters through the metallic housing of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 116 is a diagram (a) showing the front surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, and a diagram (b) showing the back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311. The main control board box 1320 is connected to the game board 5. FIG. It is a figure (c) which shows a lower part of the left side view of the game board 5 in the state attached to.

As described above, the setting key switch 1311a contains a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated in its metallic tubular (or rectangular) housing. The surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder is formed of non-conductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length, as described above. The front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing is arranged substantially flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder, which is provided with the insertion opening for inserting the setting key, as described above. The surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the cylindrical (or rectangular) housing made of steel is arranged substantially flush with the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface (rear surface) of the setting key cylinder, as described above. ing.

As described above, the setting key switch 1311a is a circuit that can take out (output) a signal indicating whether the setting key switch 1311a is ON or OFF. The signal can be taken out (output) from a pair of opposing lead terminals provided in the cylinder and protruding from the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. As described above, a pair of opposing lead terminals projecting from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder and a 90-degree rotation angle are provided from the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a. A pair of opposing mounting plate pieces are formed which have and project a predetermined length.

The setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switches 1311a are mounted has, on its front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface), vertical and horizontal directions of the setting change board 1311, as shown in FIGS. A pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a so that the setting key switch 1311a is arranged at the center point where the center lines of the A pair of opposed long through-holes SLH1 and SLH2 having an elongated hole shape along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 through which the . A pair of opposing through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2, through which a pair of opposing lead terminals protruding from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted, rotates 90 degrees with the pair of opposing long through holes SLH1 and SLH2. is formed on the center line of the setting change board 1311 in the vertical direction.

The setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switches 1311a are mounted has connector connection (connection between boards) with the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. Three through holes SSTH1, SSTH2 and SSTH3 are formed through which various pin terminals (first to third pin terminals) of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 can be inserted.

Among these three through holes SSTH1, SSTH2, and SSTH3, the upper through hole SSTH1 through which the first pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted is a pair of through holes projecting from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. A wiring pattern SPTN1 is formed on the rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 so as to be electrically connected to the upper through-hole SLTH1 of the pair of through-holes SLTH1 and SLTH2 through which the opposite lead terminals can be inserted. A pair of opposing lead terminals protruding from the rear surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted through the lower through hole SSTH3 through which the third pin terminal of the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is inserted. A wiring pattern SPTN2 is formed on the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 so as to be electrically connected to the lower through hole SLTH2 of the pair of opposing through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2. The middle through-hole SSTH2 through which the second pin terminal is inserted is electrically connected to a solid earth (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 .

On the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, a copper plane encloses the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 for the setting key switch 1311a and the through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2 for the setting key switch 1311a. A foil extraction area SINSx having a rectangular shape elongated in the left-right direction is formed. Due to this foil extraction area SINSx, the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 and the through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2 are electrically connected to solid earth (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. is insulated from On the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, a copper foil is removed from the copper plane except for the peripheries of the through holes SSTH1 and SSTH3 for the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311. A foil-punched area is also formed, and the foil-pumped area electrically insulates from solid earth (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. It has become.

On the back surface (soldered surface) of the setting change board 1311, a copper plane is provided at a position corresponding to the foil extraction area SINSx formed on the front surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311. In addition to having a rectangular shape, a foil-extracted region SINSy is formed by removing the copper foil, excluding the periphery of the above-described wiring patterns SPTN1 and SPTN2. This foil area SINSy is formed along the wiring patterns SPTN1 and SPTN2 up to the periphery of the through holes SSTH1 and SSTH3 for the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 . Due to this foil removal area SINSy, the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2, the through holes SLTH1 and SLTH2, the wiring patterns SPTN1 and SPTN2, and the through holes SSTH1 and SSTH3 are formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and rear surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311. It is in a state of being electrically insulated from the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the .

Through holes STH are formed at the four corners of the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, respectively. These four through-holes STH are a solid earth (board ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) 1311x of the setting change board 1311 and a solid earth (board ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface) 1311y of the setting change board 1311. ) are electrically connected to form the same ground (GND).

The entire front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 are coated with a resist of a predetermined color so as to cover the copper plane except for the various through holes described above. On the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, a region SSLKCN1 indicating the position where the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is to be arranged is silk-printed on the resist of the predetermined color, in a color different from the predetermined color of the resist. A region SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is to be arranged is silk-printed as a region SSLKSW1 showing the position where the setting key switch 1311a is to be arranged in a color different from the predetermined color of the resist. Printed in solid lines of the same color. The size of the area SSLKSW1 is formed to be one size larger than the outer shape of the setting key switch 1311a. ), the boundary line (circular solid line) of the area SSLKSW1 is arranged outside the outline of the setting key switch 1311a. In other words, even if the setting key switch 1311a is mounted, the setting key switch 1311a prevents the boundary line (circular solid line) of the area SSLKSW1 from overlapping. As for the area SSLKCN1 indicating the position where the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 is arranged, as with the area SSLKSW1, even if this connector SMCN is mounted, the connector SMCN prevents the boundaries (U-shaped solid lines) of the area SSLKCN1 from overlapping each other. It's like

In the region SSLKSW1 indicating the position where the setting key switch 1311a is arranged, a reference mark SSTD indicating the rotational position (initial position) of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch of the setting key switch 1311a is turned off is printed. ing. This reference mark SSTD prevents the operator of the manufacturer from turning the setting key switch 1311a upside down (wrongly soldering) when mounting the setting key switch 1311a on the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311. I have to. If the reference mark SSTD is not printed, for example, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned upside down and soldered, the setting key switch 1311a will turn ON and OFF. When the state of the setting key switch 1311a is taken out as a signal, the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is ON and the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is OFF are reversed.

Here, the reason why the foil extraction areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 are formed in the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 will be described. As described above, the setting key switch 1311a contains a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated in its metallic tubular (or rectangular) housing. The surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder is formed of non-conductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length, as described above. The front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing is arranged substantially flush with the front surface of the setting key cylinder, which is provided with the insertion opening for inserting the setting key, as described above. The surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the cylindrical (or rectangular) housing made of steel is arranged substantially flush with the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface (rear surface) of the setting key cylinder, as described above. ing. Further, when the setting key cylinder is accommodated in the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing, as described above, the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder are separated from each other. They are electrically connected. In other words, the front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or setting key cylinder, which can serve as a member for electromagnetic wave noise to enter the setting change board 1311, is exposed from the cover 1301 of the main control board box 1320. It has become.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is metallized by forming the foil removal areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. A pair of opposed mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of a cylindrical (or rectangular) housing made of metal can be inserted through the setting change board 1311, which has long long holes along the vertical direction. The long through-holes SLH1 and SLH2 can be electrically insulated from solid earth (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. there is In other words, in this embodiment, the board ground of the setting change board 1311 (main control board 1310) is not exposed through the setting key switches 1311a. As a result, a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a are inserted into the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 and soldered. Even if the electromagnetic wave noise enters from the front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or the setting key cylinder, this electromagnetic wave noise is transmitted to the front surface (mounting surface) and rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. Intrusion into the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 is prevented through the foil extraction areas SINSx and SINSy formed in the metal is damped by the cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or the setting key cylinder itself. In other words, in this embodiment, electromagnetic noise from the front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or the setting key cylinder is prevented from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311 by the foil extraction areas SINSx and SINSy. can do. As a result, in the present embodiment, the setting change board 1311 can prevent electromagnetic noise from entering from the front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or the setting key cylinder. can be reliably stopped from advancing to the board ground of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game, through the setting change board 1311. It does not change the line. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic parts.

A non-conductive resin (insulating resin) is filled between the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder, and the setting key cylinder is made of a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) shape. ), and adopting a configuration in which the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder are not electrically connected but insulated. good. Even with this configuration, even if electromagnetic wave noise intrudes from the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing, the electromagnetic wave noise will be transmitted from the front surface (mounting surface) and rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. ) are prevented from penetrating into the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311 via the foil extraction areas SINSx and SINSy formed in the . damped by the cylindrical (or rectangular) housing itself. In other words, the foil-extracted areas SINSx and SINSy can prevent electromagnetic noise from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311 from the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing. As a result, the setting change board 1311 side can prevent the electromagnetic wave noise from entering from the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing. advance to the board ground of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board for controlling the progress of the ground, can be reliably stopped, and the ground line transmitting the board ground (ground) is not affected. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic parts.

A state in which electromagnetic noise may enter the setting key switch 1311a will be described. As described above, the setting key is inserted into the insertion opening provided on the front surface of the setting key cylinder housed in the setting key switch 1311a. This setting key is an important key that can be used not only to change the setting values, but also to check the current setting values that have been set. limited to 2-3 people. For this reason, when confirming the set values or when changing the set values, first, an attendant such as a store clerk in the game hall opens the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2, and then presses the setting key. The possessor accesses the setting key switch 1311a. In other words, the person who opens the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a may be different.

As a result, a game hall clerk who opens the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 charges himself when inserting a regular metal key into the keyhole 128 of the cylinder lock 127 and turning it. Electromagnetic wave noise caused by electrostatic discharge can be transmitted to the cylinder lock 127 through a regular metal key. As described above, the cylinder lock 127 is attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit of the door frame 3, and the metal door frame reinforcement unit is connected to the frame ground via the door frame metal ground wire. It is electrically connected to the substrate 559 . This frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facilities of the game hall via the island facility ground wire. In other words, a game hall clerk who opens the main body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 charges himself and discharges static electricity when inserting a regular metal key into the keyhole 128 of the cylinder lock 127. By transmitting the electromagnetic noise caused by this to the cylinder lock 127 via a regular metal key, the cylinder lock 127, the door frame reinforcement unit, the door frame metal ground wire, the frame ground substrate 559, the island equipment ground wire, and It can be transmitted to the earth of the island equipment of the game hall and removed from the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁On the other hand, the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a is charged with electricity by not touching the cylinder lock 127, and the electromagnetic wave noise caused by the static electricity is discharged through a regular metal key. 1311a.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the setting key switch 1311a is accessed by forming the foil extraction areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. Electromagnetic wave noise caused by static electricity discharged by charging the user himself can be attenuated by the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. As a result, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic wave noise from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311, which is caused by static electricity discharged by the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a.

As described above, the door frame 3 is provided with various decorative parts, and electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the various decorative parts is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), and is transferred to the door frame metal. It is transmitted to the frame ground board 559 via the ground wire, then transmitted from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, and removed from the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁Various decorative parts decorate the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1, and are arranged on substantially the entire door frame 3. Therefore, a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a is conscious of the door frame 3 when accessing. If the door frame 3 is touched without the door frame 3, the door frame 3 is touched with various decorative parts, and electromagnetic wave noise due to self-charging and static electricity discharge is eventually transmitted to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed from the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁It is designed to be

In this embodiment, the foil extraction areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 are formed in the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, In addition, a long length along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 through which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a can be inserted. A pair of opposed long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having hole shapes are formed. It may be configured to be electrically connected to a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the back surface (solder surface), or the long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 may be connected to the setting change substrate via corresponding resistors. It may be configured to be electrically connected to a solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of 1311 respectively. In this way, electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a is prevented from passing through the metal tubular (or rectangular) housing or setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. By transmitting it to a resistor, it can be attenuated by this resistor. As a result, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic noise from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311, which is caused by static electricity discharged by the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a.

In this embodiment, an electrostatic removal pad capable of removing electromagnetic noise may be provided at a predetermined location on the front surface of the door frame 3, and when the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2, The upper body frame hinge portion 510 and the lower body frame hinge portion 520 of the body frame 4 are arranged so that the left side of the body frame 4 in the front view in the vertical direction is opposite to the pivotal support side (closed side) of the body frame 4. The right side in the vertical direction when viewed from the front may be provided on the open side portion of the body frame 4 . In addition, since the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a plurality of rows facing back to the island facilities of the game hall, when the body frame 4 of one pachinko machine 1 is released from the outer frame 2, this one pachinko machine 1 faces back. A staff member such as a store clerk of a game hall can reach the rear side of the other pachinko machine 1 which is set to be. When the main body frame 4 of one pachinko machine 1 is released from the outer frame 2 for some reason, a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall moves behind the other pachinko machine 1 facing back to the one pachinko machine 1.例文帳に追加You can also access the side. Therefore, it is necessary to remove the electromagnetic noise caused by the electrostatic discharge caused by the staff members such as game hall staff being charged and discharged. It may be provided on the rear surface side of the back cover 640, may be provided on the rear surface side of the interface board cover 636, may be provided on the rear surface side of the cover body of the dispensing control board box 632, or may be provided on the rear surface of the dispensing device 580. Can be placed on the side.

Further, in the present embodiment, the body frame base unit 500 of the body frame 5 may be formed by molding a conductive resin. Since the main body frame base unit 500 has the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface thereof when viewed from the front, the main body frame base unit 500 and the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 are electrically connected. . The body frame reinforcement frame 530 is electrically connected to the above-described frame ground board 559 via a body frame metal ground wire (not shown). The frame ground board 559 is electrically connected to the ground of the island facilities of the game hall via an island facility ground wire (not shown). As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4, a staff such as a store clerk of the game hall or a person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a can, for example, touch the main body frame base unit 500 on the open side of the main body frame 4. Since the left hand can be placed to support the body and the right hand can be extended to the rear side of the main body frame 4 or the rear side of the game board 5, when the left hand is placed on the main body frame base unit 500, it is charged with static electricity. When the electromagnetic wave noise caused by the discharge is transmitted to the main body frame base unit 500 and then to the metal door frame reinforcement unit, it is transmitted to the frame ground substrate 559 via the door frame metal ground wire, and then from the frame ground substrate 559 to the island equipment ground. It is transmitted to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the wire and removed from the pachinko machine 1. - 特許庁

In this embodiment, the cylinder lock 127 is attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit of the door frame 3 as described above, and the metal door frame reinforcement unit is connected to the door frame metal ground. The frame ground substrate 559 was electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the ground wire of the island equipment. The wire is not electrically connected to the frame grounding board 559, but is electrically connected to the terminal of the power supply board 630 of the body frame 4, and the metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply board 630 are electrically connected. can be The door frame 3 is for decorating the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1, and has various decorative parts. Among the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the entire front and back are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown). The frame ground board 559 was electrically connected to the ground of the island facilities of the game hall through the island facility ground wire, but the door frame metal ground wire was not electrically connected to the frame ground board 559, and the main body frame The metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply board 630 may be electrically connected by electrically connecting to the terminals of the power supply board 630 of No. 4. The power board 630 is supplied with AC 24V from the island facilities of the game hall. This AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board 630 to which L (line) is input is connected to the non-grounded side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply substrate 630 is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) that protects against transient excessive voltage is provided on the power supply board 630 . This surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has a high resistance value and does not allow current to flow. , has the ability to return to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). As a result, the electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcement unit is transmitted from the terminal of the power supply board 630 to the ground side (earth) from the N terminal of the power supply board 630 by the surge protection element (surge absorber) and removed from the pachinko machine 1. be done.

By the way, as described above, the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 . The performance display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 has the drive board box 1730 attached to the rear surface as described above. When the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, as shown in FIG. The rear surface has a distance dimension da with respect to the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and is arranged closer to the front side of the game board 5 .

To explain this arrangement, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is provided with an insertion port for inserting the setting key, as described above. The front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is arranged flush with the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320 when the setting change board 1311 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320. That is, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a does not protrude outward from the surface of the cover body of the main control board box 1320. As shown in FIG. When a worker attaches the game board 5 to the body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 installed on the island facility of the game hall, first, it is temporarily placed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it. When the game board 5 is removed from the body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1, the removed game board 5 is temporarily placed on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it. For this reason, the worker's legs accidentally hit the game board 5 while working on the temporarily placed game board 5, and the operator may fall over.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 is A configuration is adopted in which the drive board box 1730 has a distance dimension da from the rear surface of the cover body and is arranged near the front side of the game board 5 . As a result, when the operator temporarily places the game board 5 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it, the worker's leg accidentally hits the game board 5, and the back side of the game board 5 faces the floor of the game hall. Even if it falls down, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 has a distance dimension da with respect to the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and is arranged near the front side of the game board 5, so that the main Since the cover of the drive board box 1730 protrudes compared to the control board box 1320, even if the cover of the drive board box 1730 and the lower side of the main control board box 1320 come into contact with the floor of the game hall, the setting key The front portion of the setting key cylinder of the switch 1311a can be prevented from colliding with the floor of the game hall by reliably forming a space between it and the floor of the game hall.

In addition, inside the island facility of the game hall, as described above, a plurality of types of wiring for electrically connecting with various connection terminals of the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are suspended from the upper part, Depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 , there are wiring that is electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 and wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 . In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 becomes unconnected wiring, and is suspended from the upper part inside the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in a plurality of rows opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, the unconnected wiring is connected to various substrates provided on the game board 5, electric drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, various LEDs and various lamps. If you touch the light-emitting means such as the light-emitting means, a short circuit may occur and damage may occur (which may cause a fire). Although the back cover 640 has a plurality of slits 641 formed therein, many of the ends of the unconnected wires and their vicinity are bent. Since it is difficult to intrude toward the back surface side, a short circuit can be prevented. When the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 , the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 is the cover body of the drive board box 1730 . Since it is arranged near the front side of the game board 5 with a distance dimension da from the rear surface, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring enters the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641, the driving The cover body of the board box 1730 prevents entry into the main control board box 1320, and the tip of the unconnected wiring comes into contact with the front part of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311. can be reliably prevented.

Even if the tip of the unconnected wiring contacts the front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311, in the present embodiment, the above-described As described above, the metal cylinders of the setting key switches 1311a are formed by forming the foil removal areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change substrate 1311. A pair of opposing long through holes that are elongated along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 through which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the rectangular (or rectangular) housing can be inserted. SLH1 and SLH2 are in a state of being electrically insulated from the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, and the setting change board 1311 (main control Since the board ground of the board 1310) is not exposed through the setting key switch 1311a, there is no influence on the board ground of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game through the setting change board 1311. , no variation is given to the ground line that transmits the substrate ground (ground). Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic parts.

The cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 are molded from non-conductive resin. In addition, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the back cover 640 and the cover body of the drive board box 1730 are arranged substantially in parallel in the vertical direction without contacting each other. 640 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are arranged substantially in parallel in the vertical direction without contacting each other.

Although the setting key switch 1311a employed in the present embodiment described above has a predetermined number of tumbler pins arranged in the setting key cylinder accommodated therein, a switch having a larger number of tumbler pins may be employed. In this way, security can be further enhanced, and if the product is mass-produced and widely available in the market, the unit price can be lowered, contributing to cost reduction. Regarding the case of mounting a setting key switch 1311a′ accommodating a setting key cylinder having more tumbler pins than the setting key cylinder accommodated in the setting key switch 1311a on the setting change board 1311, see FIG. explain. FIG. 117 is a modified example 1(a) showing a lower part of the left side view of the game board with the main control board box attached to the game board, and the main control board box attached to the game board. It is a modified example 2 (b) showing a lower part of the left side view of the game board in . In addition, in FIG. 117, the same reference numerals are given to the same components as described above.

When the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, the state shown in FIG. , the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' protrudes from the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320, and the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' protrudes from the cover body of the drive board box 1730. is arranged to protrude to the rear of the game board 5 with a distance dimension db from the rear surface of the game board 5 . In order to protect the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' projecting from the rear surface of the cover of the drive board box 1730, a protective cover 1304 is pivotally supported by the cover 1301' of the main control board box 1320 and can be opened and closed. is provided in A locking projection (not shown) is formed on the protective cover 1304 , and a locking groove (not shown) for locking the locking projection is formed in the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board box 1320 . When the locking projections of the protective cover 1304 are released from the locking grooves of the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320, the protective cover 1304 is pivotally supported to open from the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320, and the setting key switch is operated. 1311a' can be accessed.

By providing such a protective cover 1304 on the cover body 1301' of the main control board box 1320, when the operator temporarily places the game board 5 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it, the operator may accidentally Even if the back side of the game board 5 hits the game board 5 and falls toward the floor of the game hall, the protective cover 1304 provided on the cover body 1301 ′ of the main control board 1320 contacts the floor of the game hall. The front portion of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' can be prevented from colliding with the floor of the game hall by reliably forming a space between it and the floor of the game hall.

In addition, inside the island facility of the game hall, as described above, a plurality of types of wiring for electrically connecting with various connection terminals of the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are suspended from the upper part, Depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 , there are wiring that is electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 and wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 . In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 becomes unconnected wiring, and is suspended from the upper part inside the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in a plurality of rows opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, the unconnected wiring is connected to various substrates provided on the game board 5, electric drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, various LEDs and various lamps. If you touch the light-emitting means such as the light-emitting means, a short circuit may occur and damage may occur (which may cause a fire). Although the back cover 640 has a plurality of slits 641 formed therein, many of the ends of the unconnected wires and their vicinity are bent. Since it is difficult to intrude toward the back surface side, a short circuit can be prevented. When the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200, a protective cover 1304 is provided on the cover body 1301' of the main control board 1320. Therefore, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring enters the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641, it is blocked by the protective cover 1304 provided on the cover body 1301' of the main control board 1320, and the tip of the unconnected wiring can be reliably prevented from contacting the front portion of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311 a ′ provided on the setting change board 1311 . The cover body of the drive board box 1730, the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320, and the protective cover 1304 are molded from non-conductive resin.

In addition, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the back cover 640 and the cover body of the drive board box 1730 are not in contact with each other and are arranged substantially parallel to each other in the vertical direction. The cover body 1301 of the control board box 1320 is arranged substantially parallel to the vertical direction without contacting each other, and the back cover 640 and the protective cover 1304 provided on the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are separated from each other. They are arranged substantially in parallel in the vertical direction without contacting each other.

A board holder 1200 in which the length of the board holder 1200 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the pachinko machine 1 in front view is shorter than that of the board holder 1200 attached to the rear lower part of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. ', when the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 is attached to the rear surface, the front surface of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' is the main control board, as shown in FIG. 117(b). Although it protrudes from the cover body 1301' of the box 1320, the front face of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' has a distance dimension dc from the rear face of the cover body of the drive board box 1730, and the front face of the game board 5 placed to the side. As a result, when the operator temporarily places the game board 5 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it, the worker's leg accidentally hits the game board 5, and the back side of the game board 5 faces the floor of the game hall. Even if it falls over, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 has a distance dimension dc from the rear surface of the cover body of the drive board box 1730 and is arranged near the front side of the game board 5, so that the main Since the cover of the drive board box 1730 protrudes compared to the control board box 1320, even if the cover of the drive board box 1730 and the lower side of the main control board box 1320 come into contact with the floor of the game hall, the setting key The front portion of the setting key cylinder of the switch 1311a' can be prevented from colliding with the floor of the game hall by reliably forming a space between it and the floor of the game hall. In other words, when the operator temporarily places the game board 5 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 or around it, the worker's leg accidentally hits the game board 5 and the back side of the game board 5 faces the floor of the game hall. In order to prevent the front part of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' from coming into contact with the floor of the game hall even if it falls over, length is adjusted. In order to prevent the front portion of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' from coming into contact with the floor of the game hall, the length of the board holder 1200' in the front-view front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the pachinko machine 1 is adjusted. In addition, a recess is formed in the rear lower part of the game panel 1100 to which the substrate holder 1200' is attached, and the depth of this recess (the length of the pachinko machine 1 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) when viewed from the front) is adjusted. Alternatively, the length of the pachinko machine 1 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the pachinko machine 1 by the recess and the substrate holder 1200' may be adjusted.

In addition, inside the island facility of the game hall, as described above, a plurality of types of wiring for electrically connecting with various connection terminals of the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 are suspended from the upper part, Depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine 1 , there are wiring that is electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 and wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal board 558 . In other words, the wiring that is not electrically connected to the external terminal plate 558 becomes unconnected wiring, and is suspended from the upper part inside the island facility of the game hall. Since the pachinko machine 1 is arranged in a plurality of rows opposite to the island facilities of the game hall, the unconnected wiring is connected to various substrates provided on the game board 5, electric drive sources such as various motors and various solenoids, various LEDs and various lamps. If you touch the light-emitting means such as the light-emitting means, a short circuit may occur and damage may occur (which may cause a fire). Although the back cover 640 has a plurality of slits 641 formed therein, many of the ends of the unconnected wires and their vicinity are bent. Since it is difficult to intrude toward the back surface side, a short circuit can be prevented. When the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 are accommodated in the main control board box 1320 and attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 ′, the rear surface of the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 is the cover of the drive board box 1730 . Since it is arranged closer to the front side of the game board 5 with the distance dimension dc from the rear surface of the body, even if the tip of the unconnected wiring enters the back side of the game board 5 through the slit 641, The front portion of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a' provided on the setting change board 1311 is blocked by the cover of the drive board box 1730 and cannot enter toward the main control board box 1320. can be reliably prevented from coming into contact with The cover body of the drive board box 1730 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board 1320 are molded from non-conductive resin.

In addition, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the back cover 640 and the cover body of the drive board box 1730 are not in contact with each other and are arranged substantially in parallel in the vertical direction. 640 and the cover body 1301 of the main control board box 1320 are arranged substantially in parallel in the vertical direction without contacting each other.

[7. Game content]
The contents of games played by the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 to 79 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the player rotates the handle 111 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3, and the game balls B stored in the upper tray 130 of the door frame 3 are played. is hit into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B hit to the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the hitting strength. The hitting strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 111. The more the handle 111 is rotated in the clockwise direction, the stronger the ball can be hit. B, that is, game balls B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

In addition, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110), and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N. As a result, the falling speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are imparted to the game ball B so that the movement can be enjoyed. Also, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill that rotates when the game ball B abuts is provided at a position between the first shelf 2201 of the side unit 2200 and the warp entrance 2501. .

When the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 to the left side of the highest part in front view (left side of the upper right peripheral wall part 2510), While contacting a plurality of obstructing nails N, it flows down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 . When the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2501 opening on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500, it is supplied from the warp exit 2502 to the stage 2503.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth to the left and right, and is released forward from the central portion in the left and right direction. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center release portion 2503a in the center of the stage 2503, the center release portion 2503a is located directly above the first start port 2002, so there is a high probability that it will be the first ball. It is received in the starting port 2002 . When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 130 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first starting hole 2002 or the general winning hole 2001 of the starting hole unit 2100.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it will be moved to the center in the left-right direction by the first shelf portion 2201 of the side unit 2200 and the obstacle nail N, and the side unit 2200, or the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, and the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general prize winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 130 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

On the other hand, the game ball B hit to the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a is located on the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (upstream space above the upper right peripheral wall portion 2510). 2511), it passes through either the first distribution passage 2521 or the second distribution passage 2522 of the distribution passage group 2520 of the center role 2500, and is discharged above the gate portion 2003 of the center role 2500. After coming into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the portion 2003, it passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

The distribution passage group 2520 of the center accessory 2500 includes a first distribution passage 2521 whose entrance is open near the impingement portion 1006, and an entrance which is spaced leftward from the entrance of the first distribution passage 2521. and a second circulation passage 2522. As a result, when the game ball B is hit with the strength to contact the impingement portion 1006 (so-called right hitting), it enters the first circulation passage 2521, enters the upstream space portion 2511, and hits the impingement portion 1006. When the game ball B is hit with a strength that does not touch (strength that is somewhat weaker than hitting to the right), it enters the second circulation passage 2522 with a high probability. That is, the game ball B struck into the upstream space 2511 circulates through either the first circulation passage 2521 or the second circulation passage 2522 according to the striking strength.

On the other hand, the game ball B that has circulated through the first circulation passage 2521 is guided to the right side of the gate portion 2003 with a high probability by a plurality of obstructing nails N planted above the gate portion 2003, and the gate portion 2003 passes through the gate portion 2003. It circulates on the right side of the gate section 2003 without passing through. On the other hand, the game ball B that has circulated through the second circulation passage 2522 is guided to the left side of the gate portion 2003 rather than the right side by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted above the gate portion 2003 with a high probability. It passes through the gate unit 2003 with probability.

When the game ball B passes through the gate part 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2506, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and when the normal lottery result of the lottery is "normal hit", the attacker unit 2400 The closed second starting port 2004 is opened for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 .

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to the indication of the ordinary lottery result (for example, 0 .01-60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). This general lottery result suggestion is displayed on the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display section 2450 of the game board 5 . The second starting port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

If the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 before the normal lottery result is indicated after the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, the normal lottery result cannot be suggested. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is put on hold until the previous suggestion of the ordinary lottery result ends. Further, the upper limit of the number of retained lottery results is set to four, and even if the game ball B passes through the gate section 2003, it is discarded without being retained. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the holdings.

A game ball B that has passed through the right side of the gate portion 2003 has a very high probability of being placed on the right side of the general prize winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 due to a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. of the attacker enters the right passage 2422 . On the other hand, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 or the game ball B that has passed through the left side of the gate portion 2003 is blocked by a plurality of obstacle nails N planted between the gate portion 2003 and the attacker unit 2400. It is guided to the left side of the attacker's right passage 2422 with a very high probability, and enters the attacker's left passage 2421 with a high probability.

In addition, the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is arranged on the left side of the attacker right passage 2422, and when the game ball B is received in this general winning opening 2001 and detected by the general winning opening sensor 2401, A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper tray 130 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 .

Game ball B that has entered the attacker's right passage 2422, by contacting the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005, passes through the communication port 2425 with a high probability and enters onto the second starting port guide shelf 2423, and is closed. It circulates on the second starting door 2411 . When the game ball B that has entered the attacker's right passage 2422 does not enter onto the second starting opening guidance shelf 2423, it enters the attacker's lower right passage 2426 and is involved in the second starting opening 2004 and the big winning opening 2005. It is discharged out of the game area 5a from the out port 1008 without. In addition, the game ball B that has entered the attacker left passage 2421 enters onto the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 and circulates on the closed second starting opening door 2411 .

Then, when the game ball B enters onto the second start opening guidance shelf 2423, the ordinary lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate part 2003 is "ordinary hit", and the second start opening door 2411 is opened. In the open state, the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004. - 特許庁When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game ball B is paid out to the upper tray 130 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. be done.

The game ball B, which entered onto the second starting opening guide shelf 2423 and was not accepted by the second starting opening 2004, was released to the big winning opening guiding rack 2424 side and rolled on the closed big winning opening door 2413. Later, it is released into the game area 5a and discharged from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a. In addition, since a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted between the second starting entrance guide shelf 2423 and the big winning entrance guide shelf 2424, and the intermediate passage 2427 is opened, the second starting entrance guide The game ball B released from the shelf 2423 to the big winning opening guidance shelf 2424 side enters the intermediate passage 2427 with a low probability. The game ball B that has entered the intermediate passage 2427 is ejected from the out port 1008 to the outside of the game area 5a without being involved in the big winning port 2005.例文帳に追加

From the above, the game ball B that has circulated through the first circulation passage 2521 does not pass through the gate portion 2003 so much, so that the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 to open the second start port 2004. It is rare that the ordinary lottery result is drawn, and the game ball B is not often accepted in the second start port 2004.例文帳に追加On the other hand, since the game ball B that has circulated through the second circulation passage 2522 passes through the gate portion 2003 with a high probability, the normal lottery result ( There is a high possibility that a "normal hit") will be drawn, and a high possibility that the game ball B will be accepted in the second starting port 2004. - 特許庁

For this reason, since the player performs the operation of hitting the game ball B aiming at the entrance of the second circulation passage 2522, the hitting strength at which the game ball B enters the upstream space 2511 In addition, the hitting strength of the game ball B must be adjusted so that the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a with the hitting strength at which the game ball B enters the second circulation passage 2522. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored by giving a change to the hitting operation of the game ball B, and to suppress the deterioration of interest by making the player enjoy the hitting operation of the game ball B.例文帳に追加can be made

By the way, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 enters an advantageous game state (for example, "jackpot") that is advantageous to the player. ”) will be drawn for special lottery results. Then, the special lottery result of the lottery is indicated to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also called special fluctuation time). The special lottery results drawn when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 include "loss", "15R big win A", "15R big win B", and the like. .

The special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is the special lottery result that generates an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the elapse of the special fluctuation time, the large winning opening 2005 is in a state in which it is possible to receive the game ball B in a predetermined opening/closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the big winning opening 2005 when the big winning opening 2005 is open, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is sent from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. , are paid out to the upper tray 130. Therefore, when the big winning hole 2005 is capable of receiving the game ball B, by allowing the big winning hole 2005 to accept the game ball B, a lot of the game balls B can be paid out and the player can be entertained. can.

If the special lottery result is a "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the large winning opening 2005 becomes an open state capable of accepting the game ball B, or a predetermined time to the large winning opening 2005 An opening/closing pattern (one opening/closing pattern is referred to as one round) in which, when any of the conditions of acceptance of the number (for example, 10) of game balls B is satisfied, the closed state in which the game balls B cannot be accepted is Repeat for a predetermined number of times (predetermined number of rounds). For example, if it is a "15R big hit", 15 rounds are repeated to generate an advantageous game state advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the "big hit", when the big winning opening 2005 is in the open state due to the big winning game state, if the game ball received in the big winning opening 2005 is distributed to the second receiving opening 2008 by the distribution piece 2415, the big winning game After the state ends, ST (special time) is generated as an advantageous game state. This ST is a probability change that changes the probability that a special lottery result such as a "big hit" will be drawn during a predetermined specific number of times of fluctuation, and a time reduction that changes the display time of a performance image suggesting the special lottery result. state is maintained.

In this embodiment, from the start of the special lottery by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 until the special lottery result drawn is suggested, the first start port 2002 and Since the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started when the game ball B is accepted in the second start port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started until the suggestion of the previously drawn special lottery result is completed. Reserved. The number of reserved special lottery results to be reserved is up to four for the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, it is discarded without withholding the special lottery result. As a result, an increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating reservations.

In addition, as described above, by the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, when the large winning opening 2005 is in an open state, the second distribution passage When the player hits the game ball B aiming at the entrance of 2522, it is necessary to finely adjust the hitting operation. There is a fear that the interest in the game will be reduced. However, in this embodiment, when the game ball B is hit to the right and circulated through the first circulation passage 2521, the right side of the gate portion 2003, the attacker right passage 2422, the stepped portion 1005a of the right rail 1005, the communication port 2425, and the third Since the game ball B can be circulated to the big winning opening guiding shelf 2424 side (big winning opening 2005 side) via the second start opening guiding shelf 2423, it is easy to adjust the delicate driving operation. The game ball B can be accepted into the big prize winning opening 2005 by the hitting operation, and the player can enjoy the game in an advantageous game state, and the hitting operation of the game ball B can be sharpened according to the game state. can be attached, and the decline in interest of the player can be suppressed.

By the way, the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 indicate the special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 . The function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display section 2450 are directly controlled by the main control board 1310 to suggest the result of the special lottery. Suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 is performed by repeatedly lighting and extinguishing a plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time, and then suggesting the special lottery result by the combination of the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the special lottery result is suggested as a effect image. A performance image suggesting a special lottery result on the performance display device 1600 is a pattern row displayed in a state in which three pattern rows made up of a plurality of patterns are arranged in the horizontal direction and each pattern row is varied. are sequentially stop-displayed, and the respective pattern rows are stop-displayed so that the patterns of the three stop-displayed pattern rows are in a combination corresponding to the result of the special lottery. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a confirmation image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is executed. An advantageous game state (for example, 15R big win game A, 15R big win game B, etc.) occurs according to the special lottery result.

Note that the time indicating the special lottery result on the function display unit 1400 (blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 (the pattern row fluctuates and the confirmed image does not appear). The time until it is displayed is different from that of the function display unit 1400 and the sub-function display section 2450, which is set to a longer time.

In the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the pressing operation of the effect operation unit 160 on the door frame 3 is performed according to the special lottery result of the lottery. A player-participation-type effect can be performed by operating the unit 161 . In the player participatory performance, the pressing operation part 161 can be raised and conspicuous by the first elevation drive motor 180a and the second elevation drive motor 182, and the player participatory performance can be enjoyed by operating the performance operation part 160. be able to.

In addition, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decoration board provided on the door frame 3, each decoration board provided on the game board 5, and the back first effect unit 3100 and the back second effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 , and the back third effect unit 3300, etc. can be appropriately used to perform light emitting effects, movable effects, etc., and various effects can entertain the player, and the player's interest in the game is reduced. can be suppressed.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, according to the special lottery result drawn, the first back of the back unit 3000 on the game board 5 By appropriately using the production unit 3100, the second rear production unit 3200, the third rear production unit 3300, etc., it is possible to perform light-emitting production, movable production, display production, etc., and the player can be attracted by various productions. It is possible to keep the player entertained and prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

[8. Various control processing of the main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 111 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 123. FIG. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 118, and FIG. 120 is an example of main control side timer interrupt processing. 121 is a flowchart showing an example of setting change processing, FIG. 122 is a flowchart showing an example of setting value confirmation display processing, and FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing an example of error display processing. First, various random numbers used for game control are explained, followed by movement of the initial value update type counter, main control side power on processing, main control side timer interrupt processing, setting change processing, error display processing, setting value confirmation Display processing will be described. In the following description, the main control MPU 1310a may be simply referred to as "main control MPU".

[8-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used for game control, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big win game state or a small win game state, and an initial value for hit determination for use in determining the initial value of this special random number A decision random number, a reach determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a reach (reach loss) when not generating a jackpot gaming state, and a first special symbol display and a second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 A variable display pattern random number for use in determining a variable display pattern of special symbols to be variably displayed on the symbol display device, and a first special symbol display device and a second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 when a jackpot game state is generated. A symbol random number used for determining the jackpot symbols and minor winning symbols derived and displayed on the symbol display (determining the winning type), and a random number for determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol used for determining the initial value of this symbol random number. etc are provided. Also, in addition to these random numbers, the normal symbol hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to open and close the movable piece that allows the reception of the game ball of the second start port 2004, and this normal symbol hit determination An initial value determination random number for determination of a normal symbol hit for use in determining the initial value of the random number, and a normal symbol for use in determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400. A random number for a variable display pattern is prepared.

Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the special random numbers are updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

For example, the special random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hard random number circuit built into the main control MPU. When the main control MPU is reset, the main control built-in hard random number circuit first uses one value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value, and performs a high-speed preselection based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. Other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another, and when all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and the main control Other values within a predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another at high speed based on the clock signal input to the MPU. Such a high-speed lottery is repeatedly performed by the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the main control MPU sets the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a special random number. It is designed to

On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for determining a normal symbol is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. This counter counts up from the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination toward the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a counter updating method is called an "initial value updating type counter". The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated at the time of power-on, it is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU in the main control side power-on process, which will be described later. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the total of various information as numerical values is the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power failure processing (at power failure). When clearing except for a specific area out of all areas of the main control built-in RAM, such as when they do not match, the initial value determination random number for normal symbol per determination is stored in the non-volatile RAM that the main control MPU incorporates The ID code is extracted from the extracted ID code, and an initial value derivation process for always deriving the same fixed value from the fixed numerical range of the counter for updating the random number for normal symbol per determination is executed based on the extracted ID code, and this derived fixed value is set. That is, the initial value determination random number for determining a normal per symbol is always overwritten with the same fixed value derived based on the ID code by executing the initial value deriving process. In this way, the value set to the initial value determination random number for normal per symbol determination is derived using the ID code, and is stored in the non-volatile RAM built into the main control MPU by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU. The first security measure is to prevent the ID code from being rewritten using an external device once the ID code is stored. A second security measure of deriving the same fixed value based on the ID code by execution is taken to prevent analysis by taking a two-step security measure.

Here, the advantage of taking out the ID code from the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU and using the taken out ID code as the initial value determination random number for normal per symbol determination will be described. For example, a person who illegally acquires game balls to be paid out as prize balls obtains the game board 5 by some means, disassembles it, and uses the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number obtained illegally and the normal symbol hit determination value coincide with each other, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is attached, it is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the non-volatile RAM built in the main control MPU' provided in the other game board 5'. That is, in the other game board 5', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5'. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is completely useless in the other game board 5', that is, in the other pachinko machine 1', so it is disassembled and analyzed. Even if a momentary power failure is generated at each predetermined interval, and the game ball is passed through the gate portion 2003 at each predetermined interval, the movable piece is opened and closed so that the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004. game state cannot be generated.

[8-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control MPU is circuit-configured so that the stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. This stack pointer indicates, for example, the address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) in use, or the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

Under the control of the main control MPU, as shown in FIGS. 118 and 119, main control side power-on processing is performed. When this main-control-side power-on process is started, the main control MPU sets RAM access permission (step S10). By setting this RAM access permission, it is possible to update the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S10, the main control MPU performs power failure clear processing (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs (phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes smaller than the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input as a power failure forecast from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Similarly, when the voltage becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage during the period from when the power is turned on until it rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, in the wait timer process, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage and becomes stable. In this embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). It is

Following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S14). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error cancel switch) that also serves three functions. Acts as a RAM clear switch function to completely erase the information. In this judgment, the main control MPU judges that the RAM clear is not performed when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that tells that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 has been operated is HI. While it is determined that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, if the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) notifying that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is LOW, the RAM is cleared. It is determined that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated. It should be noted that the period from the start of the main control side power-on process, which is this routine, to the determination in step S14 is extremely short. The operator turns on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z.

When the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, it sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, the main control MPU makes it possible to perform RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM built in the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in RAM) for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on. The RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG described above is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU, game information related to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls This flag indicates whether or not to erase various types of information, including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter, etc.). . The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S16A and S16B is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not the body frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON (step S18). In this determination, the main control MPU receives a detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b for detecting the opening of the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2, and detects whether the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a. Then, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position (that is, the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off) to turn it on, thereby setting the setting key switch 1311a. This is done based on the setting key ON signal from the setting key switch 1311a when the key is turned ON. It should be noted that the period from the start of the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, to the determination in step S18 is extremely short, and therefore the person who actually turns on the setting key switch 1311a , the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on after the setting key switch 1311a is turned on.

In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b, and determines that the setting key switch is activated based on the setting key ON signal. When 1311a determines that the setting key is ON, it sets the value 1 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b, and/or the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 0 (step S20B). The setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the current setting value (the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a) stored in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU (a setting value dedicated area in a specific area, which will be described later). is a flag that indicates whether or not it is permitted to change or confirm the setting of the set value 1 to set value 6 at the time when is turned ON. A value of 1 is set when display is permitted, and a value of 0 is set when setting changes of set values and confirmation display are not permitted. The value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG set in steps S20A and S20B is stored in the general storage element (general purpose register) of the main control MPU.

Following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process. In addition, since the payout control board 633 completes booting in a short time compared to the peripheral control board 1510 at the time when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process, the payout control board 633 is controlled by the main control board 1310 (main control MPU ) can receive various commands.

Following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage drops below the power failure forecast voltage, a power failure forecast signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure forecast. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure warning signal. When the main control MPU determines in step S24 that there is an input of the power failure warning signal, it returns to the determination of step S24 and repeats the determination of step S24 as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. A detailed description of the fact that the determination in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22 will be given later.

In the determination of step S24, when the main control MPU determines that there is no power failure warning signal input, whether the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is value 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is value 1. (step S25). By determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, the main control MPU determines that the predetermined set value change permission condition is established. judge.

When the main control MPU determines in step S25 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not 1, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 1. Also, it is determined whether or not the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0 (step S26). The main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, so that the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied. , it is determined to erase various information in the same manner as when a predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied.

When the main control MPU determines in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not 0, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to 0. Also, it is determined whether or not the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1 (step S27). By determining that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, the main control MPU determines that the predetermined set value display permission condition is established. judge.

In step S27, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, and that the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that there is, a setting value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). In this set value confirmation display process, which will be described later in detail, the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM are displayed on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S28 or in the determination of step S27, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is not 1 (RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0), a checksum is calculated (step S29). This checksum is calculated by regarding the various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S29, the main control MPU compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (at power-off), which will be described later. It is determined whether or not they match (step S30). When the main control MPU determines in step S30 that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S32). This backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as various information, checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG value in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power failure processing described later. It is set to a value of 1 when the main-control-side power-off process has been completed normally, and set to a value of 0 when the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the calculation of the checksum in step S29 and the determination in step S30 are performed. , will be described later.

When the main control MPU determines in step S30 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has not ended normally, an error display processing is performed (step S33), and an infinite loop is entered. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is terminated is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

The pachinko machine 1 is powered off, the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key cylinder is shifted from the initial position (that is, the rotation position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). After turning clockwise by 60 degrees and turning ON, the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while operating the depressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, and this routine is executed again. A certain main control side power-on processing is started. The main control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated in the determination of step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. At the same time, in the determination of step S18 described above, it is determined that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by the setting key ON signal. is set key ON, and the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in step S20A described above. 1 and the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, it is determined that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, and following the setting change processing of step S37, which will be described later, In the process of step S38, by clearing all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area, the RAM error can be canceled and the game can proceed (hereinafter referred to as "first RAM error release method”).

As a method different from this first RAM error canceling method, the pachinko machine 1 is powered off, and the setting key cylinder remains at the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder rotation position for turning off the setting key switch 1311a). By turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, the main control side power-on processing, which is this routine, is started again. The main control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated in the determination of step S14 described above, and sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A described above. On the other hand, in step S18 described above, it is determined that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by the detection signal from the body frame opening switch 4b, and/or the setting key is turned on by the setting key ON signal. Since the switch 1311a determines that the setting key is not turned ON and sets the value 0 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG in the above-described step S20B, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in the above-described step S26. is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, that is, the predetermined setting value change permission condition is not satisfied, but the predetermined setting value change permission condition is satisfied. In step S38, which will be described later, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, thereby canceling the RAM error and allowing the game to proceed. (hereinafter referred to as "second RAM error canceling method").

Thus, in this embodiment, when the main control MPU determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match in the determination of step S30, or in the determination of step S32, the main control MPU When the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally, an error is displayed in step S33, and the main control built-in RAM If there is an abnormality in the contents stored in the memory (or it is unreliable), there are two canceling methods: the first RAM error canceling method and the second RAM error canceling method. It can be done by As a result, when there is no need to change the settings of the set values, the RAM error can be cleared by performing the second RAM error clearing method using the RWM clear button 633z.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S32, when the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when determining that the main control side power failure processing has been completed normally, the main control built-in A working area of the RAM is set (step S34). For this setting, the power recovery information is read from the ROM built in the main control MPU (that is, the main control built-in ROM), and this power recovery information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, various information is read out from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Further, the main control MPU progresses the game based on the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition to the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, the term “recovery of power” refers to the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or instantaneous A high frequency from a hidden high frequency output device) is irradiated to the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU itself resets and then returns.

Following step S34, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 0 (step S36). As a result, various information, checksum values (sum values), etc. are changed as a result of subsequent various processes, so that the main control side power failure processing (to be described later) ends normally and the backup flag BK- If FLG is not set to 1, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, as will be described later.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, that is, the predetermined set value is changed. When it is determined that the permission condition is satisfied, setting change processing is performed (step S37). This setting change process, which will be detailed later, is performed based on a signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633. FIG. As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switching button, and error canceling switch) that also serves three functions. Works as a button function. Every time the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, a signal (set value selection switching signal) is input to change the set value and display it on the setting display 1310g, and the setting key switch 1311a is changed. When the setting key cylinder is turned from ON to OFF, the changed setting value is determined based on the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM built in the main control MPU. .

In the process of step S37 or the determination of step S26, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, the predetermined Although the set value change permission condition is not satisfied, when it is determined to erase various information in the same way as when the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, all areas of the main control built-in RAM except for a specific area to clear (step S38). Here, the main control MPU writes the value 0 to a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (all areas of the main control built-in RAM excluding a specific area). In this embodiment, when the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it is determined to erase various information, and when the setting change process ends, the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM (an area of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM excluding the specific area)) is cleared. Here, the "specific area" means a set value dedicated area in which set values are stored, and a count of the number of game balls collected through an out port 1008 provided in the game area 5a divided and formed on the game board 5. and an out-ball counting dedicated area in which the result (total number) is stored. The set value dedicated area stores set values to be changed in setting change processing described later, and the out ball count dedicated area stores game balls collected by the out port 1008 counted in the ball counting process described later. The number count result (total number) is stored.

Note that the main control MPU may read out a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM and set it as an initial value. In addition, the main control MPU is when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch, and the logic of a signal (RAM clear signal) that conveys that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated When erasing various information by instructing RAM clearing, when the sum value does not match, or when the main control side power failure processing is not completed normally, the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU A unique ID code stored in advance is taken out, and an initial value derivation process is carried out for always deriving the same fixed value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for judging a normal pattern based on the taken out ID code. A fixed value is set to the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination for use in determining the initial value of the normal symbol hit determination random number described above.

Following step S38, the main control MPU sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is carried out by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting this initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize number information output determination counter is set (set) to 0, which is the initial value. Further, the main control MPU progresses the game based on the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S41). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter referred to as " A timer set value is set in the WDT control register) to activate the main control built-in WDT and start counting time until the main control MPU is reset. When the main control built-in WDT is activated, the main control built-in WDT starts clocking, and the watch dog timer clear register built into the main control MPU ( hereinafter referred to as "WDT clear register"), the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and starts timing, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register before the clocked time reaches the time set by the timer set value, The clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared and clocking is restarted. In this way, the operation (system) of the main control MPU operates normally by repeating the process of clearing the clocking by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the clocking. It is possible to monitor whether or not

Following step S41, the main control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S42). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

Following step S42, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input/output ports built in the main control MPU (for example, a serial input/output port (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the payout control board 633, a serial input/output port (receiving channel and transmitting channel) for the peripheral control board 1510 ), the transmission serial port prescaler is set for the communication speed and the presence or absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is set for initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

Following step S44, the main control MPU performs test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various test information is initialized (set to OFF data output) when the power is turned on in the game machine testing facility.

Following step S46, the main control MPU performs activation setting of the main control built-in hard random number circuit (step S48). Here, among various random numbers related to the game, a special random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a jackpot game state is stored in a hardware random number control register built into the main control MPU in order to update the hardware. In addition to making settings such as latching and acquiring, settings such as activation of the hard random number circuit incorporated in the main control are set in the hard random number setting register. When the main control built-in hard random number circuit is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another without duplication based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU, and the predetermined When all values within the numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is again extracted, and the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU. successively extract the other values in the , without duplication. When the main control MPU acquires a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hardware random number circuit, it outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hardware random number circuit. A random number (random value) extracted by the random number circuit is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU. The main control MPU sets the acquired random number as a special random number.

Following step S48, the main control MPU performs reservation setting of commands to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). Create a power-on state command, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on, and use it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. memorize to In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands corresponding to this various information are stored. be. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information, then the state command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later. A detailed description of the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be given later.

Following step S50, the main control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process described later is repeatedly performed at the interrupt period set at step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

Following step S52, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S54). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, or when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit to the main control MPU as a power failure warning. be. The determination in step S54 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

In the judgment of step S54, when the main control MPU judges that there is no input of the power failure warning signal, the main control MPU performs non-hit-or-lose random number update processing (step S56). In this non-hit-lose random number update process, the above-described ready-to-win determination random number, variable display pattern random number, big win symbol initial value determination random number, small winning symbol initial value determination random number, etc. are updated. In this way, in the non-hit-lose random number update process, software updates the random numbers that are not related to the hit-lose determination (big hit determination). Incidentally, the above-described random numbers for normal symbol hit determination, normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random numbers, normal symbol variation display pattern random numbers, etc. are also updated by this non-hit-lose random number update process.

After step S56, the process returns to step S54, and the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. The processing of steps S54 to S56 is called "main control side main processing".

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S54 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the main control MPU sets interrupt prohibition (step S58). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not performed, preventing writing to the main control built-in RAM, and protecting the above-mentioned game information and various information including other information from being rewritten.

Following step S58, the main control MPU starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting to output the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S12 is performed.

Following step S60, the main control MPU, for example, stops outputting drive signals to various displays of the function display unit 1400, the starting solenoid 2404, the attacker solenoid 2405, the base monitor 1310h, etc. (step S62).

Following step S62, the main control MPU calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated by considering the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, as numerical values.

Following step S64, the main control MPU sets the backup flag BK-FLG to 1 (step S66). This completes the storage of the game backup information.

Following step S66, the main control MPU sets RAM access prohibition (step S68). This setting of RAM access prohibition disables access to the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

After step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU for the main control built-in WDT activated in step S41, and the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the clocking starts again. As a result, the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU performs the main control side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control side power failure processing".

As described above, when the main control MPU is affected by electrical noise, it is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit. In this case, the main control MPU cannot perform the determination of step S54, and cannot perform the main control side power failure processing. Therefore, when the main control MPU is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU is reset without executing the main control side power failure processing, and the main control side power on processing is executed again. . In other words, the checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power failure processing based on immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored because the main control side power failure processing is not executed. The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control side power failure processing is executed at the time of power failure, and the checksum calculated in step S29 when restarting after forced reset by the built-in reset circuit. There is no way that the value (sum value) and the value (sum value) match, and it always becomes a checksum (sum value) error in the main control built-in RAM, and in the processing of step S38, out of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM, except for a specific area It will be completely erased (cleared).

The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure.

In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control internal RAM is normal. are inspecting. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the game backup information has been stored by fraud.

Further, in the determination of step S25, it is determined that the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied, assuming that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1. If so, the setting change process of step S37 is performed, and in the process of step S38, all areas of the main control internal RAM are completely erased (cleared) except for a specific area, and in the determination of step S26, the RAM clear notification flag RCL -FLG has a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when the predetermined set value change permission condition is not satisfied, but the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied. Similarly, when it is determined that various information is to be erased, it is completely erased (cleared) in the process of step S38, except for a specific area, out of the entire area of the main control built-in RAM. In this way, when the pressing operation part is operated at the time of power restoration (more precisely, when the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch and the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on while the pressing operation is performed), even if it is not a setting change that can change and determine the setting value (when the main control MPU performs setting change processing), the main The control MPU always clears a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM. This is when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch, and when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is pressed, for example, when the game hall is closed, the pachinko machine 1 is in an advantageous state for the player (for example, a state of probability variation (probability variation) winning, etc.), it is necessary to erase (clear) the above-mentioned game backup information before the start of the next business. Therefore, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch, the game hall clerk or other staff member needs to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. In the case of deciding to change the setting value, if the setting change process is performed, even if the current setting value is maintained as a result, the setting value obtained before the setting change process is performed It is necessary to erase (clear) game backup information including various information such as game information from the main control built-in RAM. As described above, the setting key is an important key that can be used not only to change the setting value but also to check the current setting value that has been set. Only 2 or 3 people are allowed to possess it. In this embodiment, even if the setting value is not determined to be changed, that is, even if there is no setting key possessed only by a limited specific person, the staff such as a game hall clerk clears (clears) the game backup information. When the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch when it is necessary to perform the game backup information by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 while pressing the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z. It can be erased (cleared) from the control built-in RAM.

Here, it will be described that the determination of the presence/absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby process in step S22. First, the problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure warning signal in step S24, that is, the problem in the case where the processing after step S26 is performed after the wait time waiting processing of step S22 will be described.

As described above, the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, is charged with the electrolytic capacitor MC2 when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off. DC +5 V is applied for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In other words, even if the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the charge charged in the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5 V, and the island of the game hall The main control-side power-off processing can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the facility is cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the island equipment of the game hall When the power supply from the main control side is cut off, the main control side power cut-off processing can be reliably completed.

However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time waiting process of step S22 when the power is restored, the waiting time (boot timer) until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts up (boots). 2.5 seconds is set.), and if an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs immediately before reaching the standby time, a hardware called an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. Although the electric charge charged in the DC +5 V is applied as DC +5 V, within a period of about 7 ms, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the timer interrupt processing is performed and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated, it may not be possible to complete the main control-side power-off processing in the main control-side power-on processing. Therefore, the main control side power-on processing is started when the power is restored again without storing the value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

Then, when the power is restored this time, the main control side power-on processing is started, and the wait time standby processing of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurred. Instead, in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area. In other words, when the power is restored, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 operates as a RAM clear switch, and the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated by a staff member such as a game hall clerk to clear the RAM. There is a problem that the aforementioned game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is forcibly erased (cleared) even if there is no indication of intention by a hall clerk or other attendant.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input, Returning to the determination of step S24, the determination of step S24 is repeatedly performed as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input. As a result, the game cannot be progressed. Before the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed, although a value is set in the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S16A or step S16B, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is mainly Since it is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU, even if RAM access permission is set in step S10, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all.

In this way, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is input (that is, step When it is determined by the determination of step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process of S22), the process returns to the determination of step S24 again, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, By repeating the determination in step S24, the game cannot be progressed, and various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the main prize number information output determination counter) can be prevented from being updated, so that the checksum calculation result does not fluctuate. As a result, when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is restarted, the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation and stored value in step S64 can be determined to match. Therefore, the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM and held immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. Therefore, when the power is restored, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure from being initialized.

Further, immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, a process of determining whether or not a power failure warning signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure warning signal is not input (that is, step S22 When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not cut off after waiting in the wait time standby process), when the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is progressing the game, the pachinko machine 1, the supply of power from the electrolytic capacitor MC2 to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU, supplies game information and other information (e.g., the number of main prize balls) according to the progress of the game. Information indicating the value of the information output determination counter), which is a backup process for storing various information including the process of steps S58 to S68 and the process when the main control side power is turned off, which is composed of an infinite loop, is performed by the main control board. Since the main control MPU of 1310 can be completed, the main control MPU of the main control MPU, when it restarts, receives the checksum calculation result in step S28 and the checksum calculation in the backup process. Since it is determined that the result (that is, the calculated and stored value of the checksum in step S64) matches, the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure that is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be activated by restoring the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs.

Furthermore, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that a power failure warning signal has been input, the main control built-in WDT causes the main control MPU to forcibly reset the contents of the main control built-in RAM. On the other hand, immediately after the wait time standby process of step S22, when it is determined that the power failure warning signal has not been input in step S24, the power failure warning signal has not been input. As a result, the main control side power failure processing can be reliably completed within the "power supply securing period for momentary power failure or power failure" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the main control side power-on processing is performed at the time of power restoration, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is cut off. The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the MPU, as DC +5V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the occurrence of a power failure or momentary power failure. Therefore, if the main control side power failure processing cannot be completed within the "instantaneous power failure or power supply securing period" of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22 In step S24, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input, and if the power failure warning signal has been input, the process returns to step S24, and as long as the power failure warning signal continues to be input, the determination of step S24 is performed. is repeated, the game cannot be progressed.

By preventing the progress of the game by such software, the steps after step S24 (specifically, the interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and then the interrupt permission is enabled in step S52). By blocking the progress to the control flow of setting and starting the main control side timer interrupt processing described later), the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize number information output determination A mechanism was adopted in which updating of various information (including information indicating the value of the counter for use) can be avoided. In this way, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the island equipment of the game hall is cut off, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, main prize number information output judgment (Information indicating the value of the counter for use, etc.)) is covered by software so that it is not changed at all, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information, and Other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the number of main prize balls) is divided into two parts, one is covered by hardware so that it is not changed at all. , The content of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating the value of the counter for determining the output of the number of main prize balls information, etc.)) is reliably prevented from being changed. can be done.

Next, a description will be given of the fact that a command to be transmitted at power-on is reserved in step S50. In step S50, as described above, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, it is determined that the power has been turned on (power has been restored). In order to communicate, create a power-on state command that is classified as power-on, a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and a counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls information output when power is turned on, and incorporate the main control as transmission information. Stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. This main control return destination command at power-on mainly consists of information instructing the drive state of the starter solenoid 2404 and information instructing the drive state of the attacker solenoid 2405 . Here, first, the problem in the case where the main control return destination command at power-on does not include information indicating the driving state of the starter solenoid 2404 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2405, that is, Next, a problem in the case where the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is not performed for the main control return destination command at the time of power-on in step S50 will be described.

For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big win game state screen (for example, the big win game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2405. When a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while the big prize opening 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member, and then the power is restored, the main control board 1310 performs the main control in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored to start driving the attacker solenoid 2405 to open and close the big winning port 2005. The state of being closed by the member is transferred to the state of being open.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a jackpot game state as a game state, an instantaneous power failure or a power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 will be the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from, even if the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state and returned, the jackpot game state It is not possible to indicate at all which round of That is, for example, when a game ball enters the big winning hole 2005 and is detected by the big winning hole sensor 2403, the main control board issues a large winning hole 1 count display command to convey the number of game balls that have entered the big winning hole 2005. Even if 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control board 1510 receives it, the peripheral control board 1510 produces the number of game balls entering the big winning hole 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it is not possible to display at all which round (that is, what round) of the jackpot game state.

In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving the attacker solenoid 2405 and the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening/closing member when, for example, the four rounds (fourth round) of the jackpot game state are finished. The main control board 1310 sends a large winning gate 1 closed display command to the peripheral control board 1510 to indicate that the main control board 1310 is to shift from the closed state to the closed state (that is, start closing the big winning gate 2005 of the attacker unit 2100 between rounds). , and when the main control board 1310 starts the 5th round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, it starts driving the attacker solenoid 2405 and opens the big winning port 2005 from the state closed by the opening and closing member. The main control board 1310 transmits to the peripheral control board 1510 a large winning hole opening 5th display command that instructs the transition to the state where the large winning hole 2005 is opened (that is, the opening of the 5th round of the large winning hole 2005). As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches from the screen according to the probability and time-saving state described above to display the screen of the start of the 5th round of the jackpot game state in the display area of the effect display device 1600 .

In addition, for example, a screen that informs the player that the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 and that the game state is advantageous to the player (for example, a screen that tells the player that the movable piece is open) When the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the starting opening solenoid 2404 to open the movable piece and open the second starting opening 2004 is in a state of being opened, and when power is restored after that, the main control board 1310 resets the main control built-in RAM in setting the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery information set in the work area, the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is restored, so that the starting port solenoid 2404 is started to drive and the movable piece is closed. A transition is made to a state in which the second start port 2004 is closed.

However, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. , and then when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can be restored based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in the game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004 as the game state and the game state is generated in an advantageous game state for the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs. After that, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 is based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it is possible to display and return to the display area of the effect display device 1600, it is in a game state in which the game ball can be received into the second start port 2004, and it is in a game state advantageous to the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display the transmitted screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. Therefore, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine is surprised at the momentary power failure or power failure, and when the power is restored, the game ball is accepted into the second start port 2004 just before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. In such a case, the game state is returned to the second start port 2004 as the game state at the time of power restoration so that the game ball can be accepted. Nevertheless, the screen for instructing the game (that is, the screen for instructing the game to enter the game ball into the second start port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 when the power is restored. There is also a problem that the player does not understand what kind of game should be played.

As described above, in the two examples described above, there is a problem that the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure cannot be quickly restored after the power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. There was a problem.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including when the power is turned on, and when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the power-on state command and a command to return to main control at power-on to the peripheral control board 1510, in step S50, a state command at power-on classified as power-on, a command to return to main control at power-on, and a command at power-on A counter notification command for main prize number information output determination is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 receives from the main control board 1310 based on the power-on state command and the power-on main control return destination command, for example, in the above-described example, in the 4 rounds of the jackpot game state, When power is restored after a momentary power failure or power failure, the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven as a return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large prize winning opening 2005 is opened from the closed state by the opening and closing member. Since it is possible to tell the peripheral control board 1510 to shift to the state, the peripheral control board 1510 is a screen specifying that it is 4 rounds of the jackpot gaming state (that is, a screen showing how many rounds) can not be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but it is in a jackpot game state, the attacker solenoid 2405 is started to be driven, and the big winning port 2005 is opened by the opening and closing member. (For example, a screen that conveys a message to the player, "It's a big win. The big winning slot is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the big winning slot."). It is possible to instruct a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine by displaying it in the display area to enter a game ball into the big winning opening 2005 after the power is restored. In a state in which a game ball can be accepted into the second start port 2004 and in a state in which the game state is advantageous to the player, an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then power is restored, the main control board 1310 As a return destination, a screen notifying that the drive of the starting port solenoid 2404 is started to open the movable piece to open the second starting port 2004 (for example, "The movable piece is open. Play the game so as to enter the game ball into the second starting port.”) is displayed on the display area of the performance display device 1600 by the peripheral control board 1510, and the front surface of the pachinko machine. A game of entering a game ball into the second starting port 2004 after the power is restored to the player sitting on the seat can be instructed.

As a result, when power is restored after an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the main control board 1310 can give detailed instructions on the return destination of the peripheral control board 1510 . Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored. In other words, a player sitting in front of the pachinko machine, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs, and then the power is restored, the system of the pachinko machine appears to be in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state, and misunderstands that it has failed. can be prevented.

Next, in the main control board inspection process which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S29 when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the power supply of the main control board 1310 is turned on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board configured by the above-described backup processing of steps S58 to S68 and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has not executed the control-side power-off processing even once, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S29, in step S30 In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area.

As a result, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the state command at power-on classified as power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on By creating an output determination counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the power-on state command, the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and the main prize ball when power is turned on. Only three commands, namely, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in the main control side timer interrupt processing to be described later, these commands first transmit a power-on state command, then transmit a main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then transmit the number of main prize balls when power is turned on. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. Utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after manufacturing for inspection, the main control board 1310 issues a power-on status command as the first command. It will be sent to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

By the way, the power-on state command is when the power is turned on (including when the power is restored when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure in addition to when the power is turned on), the RWM clear button of the payout control board 633 When the RWM clear button 633z operates as a RAM clear switch and the depressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated to clear the RAM, information instructing that effect, and when the power is turned on (in addition to turning on the power, Including when the power is restored due to a power failure or momentary power failure), any of the above-mentioned low-probability short-time state, high-probability short-time state, low-probability non-short-time state, and high-probability non-short-time state state (probability and time saving state) and information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. Here, a problem in the case where the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine is not included in the power-on state command will be described.

The model code of the pachinko machine is the copyright of which work when creating the so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310). What kind of game specification (for example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times ), it is possible to specify whether it is a game specification (such as a so-called ST machine) in which probability fluctuations occur in the state of being played.

In the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when manufacturing the main control boards 1310, there are cases where the main control boards 1310 for copyrights of a plurality of types of works coexist. Then, the worker of the production line is the owner of the copyright of which work out of the copyrights of multiple types of works (for example, the copyright of works such as movie A, movie B, drama C, movie D, manga E, and manga F). It becomes unclear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing to the production line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the work called movie D) among the copyrights of multiple types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is being sent to the production line to manufacture 1310, the main control board 1310 is required to manufacture the main control board 1310 for other copyrights (for example, the copyright of the work Manga F). There is also an assumption and misunderstanding that it flows to the production line.

For this reason, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the worker of the production line may It is not possible to confirm which work the manufactured main control board 1310 is copyrighted, and even if the same work is copyrighted, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type) type), and what kind of game specification (game specification or ST machine that when a probability change occurs, that state is continued until the next big win game state occurs).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 in the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works coexists, the main control board for the copyrights of a plurality of types of works is produced. With 1310 mixed, it is sent to the game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5 . For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line sometimes attaches to the game board 5 the main control board 1310 that does not correspond to the game board 5 with respect to the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is lowered.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine In step S50, in order to transmit a power-on state command including information indicating to the peripheral control board 1510, a power-on state command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on A counter notification command for main prize number information output determination is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in main control-side timer interrupt processing, which will be described later.

As a result, an operator on the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the production line, so that the inspection device can operate the main control board 1310. Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the above-mentioned max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the series code for specifying which type it is, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (for example, when the probability fluctuation occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specification that the state is continued until it occurs, a game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is limited; Based on this, by visually checking the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor, it is possible to determine which work the main control board 1310 belongs to. The model type (max type, middle type, and sweet digital type), and what kind of game specifications (if the probability change occurs, the state will continue until the next big win game state occurs) It is also possible to discriminate whether it is a game specification or ST machine).

As a result, when manufacturing the main control board 1310 on the production line of the manufacturer that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of types of works is mixed, the main control board inspection process of the production line The operator can visually check the inspection monitor to accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specifications, so that the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work can be sorted into the following. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. The operator of the game board assembly line can surely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board 1310 not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent the production efficiency of the game board 5 from being lowered by the work of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5 . Therefore, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5 .

[8-3. Main control side timer interrupt processing]
Next, main control side timer interrupt processing will be described. This main-control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS. 118 and 119 .

When the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, the main control MPU switches register banks as shown in FIG. 120 (step S100). The general-purpose storage elements (general-purpose registers) of the main control MPU have two register banks consisting of a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the main control side power-on process described above, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine. In step S100, in order to use the second register bank in the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, switch the register bank to the other register tank. In this embodiment, when the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine is started, the processing of saving each register to the stack is not required.

Following step S100, the main control MPU performs timer subtraction processing (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display device and the second special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 light up according to the variable display pattern determined by the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time when the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern determined by the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing described later, the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) transmitted Time management such as ACK signal input judgment time set as a judgment condition when judging whether or not the payer ACK signal that informs that the payout control board 633 has normally received various commands is input or not. . Specifically, when the variation time of the variation display pattern or the normal symbol variation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interrupt cycle is set to 4 ms, so each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the variation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. These various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S102, the main control MPU performs switch input processing (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, the main control MPU, for example, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 2101, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402 detection signal, the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403, the detection signal from the outlet sensor 3032, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470, the detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 Signal (Since the signal from the RWM clear button 633z is not an important signal in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, it may be masked to omit reading.), the door frame open switch 4a A detection signal from, a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. The payer ACK signal from the board 633 is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, when the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 2101 and the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402 are respectively read, the corresponding starting opening winning command classified into others is used as transmission information in the main control built-in RAM. Store in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start sensor 2101, a start win prize command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and from the second start sensor 2402 When there is a detection signal of , the starting opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

In the present embodiment, the state in which all input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those subjected to vacant terminal processing) is changed when this switch input processing is started. , are read first, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs) has elapsed, they are read again for the second time. Then, the result of the second reading is compared with the result of the first reading. It is determined whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the third time, and the result of the third reading is compared with the result of the second reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the results are not the same, they are read again for the fourth time, and the result of the fourth reading is compared with the result of the third reading. It is determined again whether or not there are any of the comparison results that are the same. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there is no entry of the game ball or as if the input is ignored.

In this way, in the switch input processing, the state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU are input (including those subjected to vacant terminal processing) is checked for the first to third times. It is possible to avoid erroneous detection due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc. Since it is possible, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 2101, the detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, A detection signal from the big winning mouth sensor 2403, a detection signal from the out mouth sensor 3032, a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3005, a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 (this RWM The signal from the clear button 633z is not an important signal in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, so it may be masked to omit reading.), the detection signal from the door frame open switch 4a. , a detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4b, a signal from the setting key switch 1311a, and a prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control process described later. The reliability of the payer ACK signal can be increased.

Following step S104, the main control MPU performs input terminal malfunction monitoring processing (step S105). In this input terminal defect monitoring process, the state of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU that have undergone empty terminal processing is checked based on the information acquired in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU is grounded to the ground (GND) as an idle terminal processing, so the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring process, the information obtained in the switch input process in step S104 determines whether or not the logic state of the input terminal to which the idle terminal process is performed is LOW among the input terminals of the various input ports. based on When the main control MPU judges that the logic state of the input terminal subjected to empty terminal processing is not LOW, the main control MPU is divided into a notification display to inform that a malfunction has occurred in the peripheral circuit of the main control MPU. The defective command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

Following step S105, the main control MPU performs win-loss random number update processing (step S106). In this winning/losing random number update process, the above-described symbol random number is updated. Also, in addition to these random numbers, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol, which is updated in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 119, And the random number for determining the initial value for small winning symbols is also updated. These big hit symbol initial value determination random numbers and small winning symbol initial value determination random numbers are updated in the main control side main processing and this main control side timer interrupt processing, respectively, thereby enhancing the randomness. . On the other hand, since the symbol random number is a random number related to win/lose determination (win/lose determination), each counter counts up only each time this win/lose random number update process is performed. Incidentally, the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number and normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number are also updated by this win/lose random number update process.

For example, the counter for updating the random number for determining per normal symbol is, as described above, an initial value update type counter, and is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical range ranging from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value to the maximum value is counted up by incrementing the value by 1 each time this main control side timer interrupt processing is performed. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination is counted up toward the maximum value, and then the minimum value is counted up toward the initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit determination initial value determination random number is updated by this win/lose random number update process. The initial value determination random number for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process of drawing one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number.

In this embodiment, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small winning symbol are set to the non The win/lose random number update process and the win/lose random number update process of step S106 in the main control side timer interrupt process, which is this routine, are updated respectively, but each time an interrupt timer occurs, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven. If the number of executions of the non-hit-lose random number update process in step S56 is random by repeatedly executing the main control side main process within the remaining time until the interrupt timer is generated, the random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol , and the small-hit symbol initial value determination random number may be updated only in the non-hit-lose random number update process of step S56.

Following step S106, the main control MPU performs ball number counting processing (step S107). In this ball counting process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a detection signal from the outlet sensor 3032 is input to the game area 5a that is partitioned and formed on the game board 5. When the out-port sensor 3032 detects game balls collected by the provided out-port 1008, the value of the collected ball counter for counting the number of game balls collected by the out-port 1008 is incremented by 1. Perform an (increment) operation. The main control MPU stores the value of the recovered ball counter, which is the calculation result, as the count result (total number) of the number of game balls recovered through the out port 1008, and stores it in the dedicated area for counting out balls in a specific area of the main control built-in RAM. At the same time, the output of the lighting signal to be displayed on the base monitor 1310h is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. In addition, when the value of the recovered ball counter is divisible by the value 10, that is, every time the number of game balls recovered at the out port 1008 reaches 10, the main control MPU creates a ball recovery command to notify that effect. and stored in the output information storage area as transmission information. When the value of the collected ball counter, which is the calculation result, reaches the maximum value (in this embodiment, the value is 65535) and the value of the collected ball counter is incremented by 1, the main control MPU The value of the counter overflows and becomes a value of 0, and an operation to add from this value of 0 is performed.

Following step S107, the main control MPU performs prize ball control processing (step S108). In this prize ball control process, input information is read out from the input information storage area described above, and a prize ball command for paying out game balls is created based on this input information. Create a self-check command to check the connection status between boards. Then, the generated prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the big winning hole 2005, a prize ball command to pay out 15 prize balls is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10. Therefore, the output of the main prize number information output signal is set to notify that effect, the output information is stored in the output information storage area, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, or this prize ball When the payout control board 633 does not receive a payer ACK signal indicating that the payout control board 633 has normally received the command within a predetermined time, a self-check command for checking the connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is issued. It creates it and transmits it to the payout control board 633 .

Further, in the prize ball control process of step S108, when the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10, the input information is read out from the above-mentioned input information storage area and based on this input information. , a main award number information output command classified as other is created to convey that effect, and is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. The main prize number information output command is created based on the value of the main prize number information output determination counter. The value of this main prize number information output determination counter is determined based on the input information read out from the above-described input information storage area. , second starting hole 2004, and big winning hole 2005 (hereinafter referred to as "various winning holes provided on the game board 5"). It counts the number of game balls to be put out, and is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control process of step S108. In the prize ball control process of step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read. is read from the input information storage area, and based on this input information, the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out as prize balls is added to the value of 10. (that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10), a main prize number information output command is created to notify that effect, and as transmission information In addition to storing in the output information storage area, the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the value of the main prize number information output judgment counter value. It has become.

Following step S108, the main control MPU performs frame command reception processing (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (eg, frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into state displays. In the frame command reception process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to notify the payout control board 633 is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, the main control MPU formats the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands classified into status display (frame status 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command)) are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

Following step S110, the main control MPU performs fraud detection processing (step S112). In this fraudulent act detection process, although the second starting opening door 2411 is not in the open state, there is a ball entering the game ball B in the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening door 2413 is not in the open state. First, it is confirmed whether there is an abnormal state regarding the winning ball, such as the entry of the game ball B into the big winning opening 2005 . In addition, in this embodiment, when it is determined that an abnormal state related to the prize ball has occurred in the fraudulent act detection process, the hall computer installed on the game hall side is sent via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 Therefore, the main control MPU outputs a security signal, which contributes to the early detection of an abnormal state of the prize ball by a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall. In addition, the security signal output when it is determined that an abnormal state related to the prize ball has occurred is the security signal output when it is determined that the magnet goto described later is being performed, or the vibration signal described later. This signal is the same as the security signal that is output when it is determined that a goto is being performed. In addition, the security signal is output to the hall computer installed on the game hall side through the payout control board 633 and the external terminal board 558 connected to the payout control board 633 by the main control MPU. However, after the main control MPU has sent a command for instructing the output of the security signal to the payout control board 633, the payout control MPU, through the external terminal plate 558 connected to the payout control board 633, the game hall side A security signal may be output to a hall computer installed in the hall.

Further, in the fraud detection process in step S112, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470 is input, fraud using a magnet (hereinafter referred to as "magnet goto") is detected. ) is being performed, and the value of the magnetic goto counter is incremented by one. The value of this magnet counter is incremented each time it is determined that a magnet counter has been played in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. is set to a value of 0 (zero). When the value of the magnetic goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle at which the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed in the fraudulent act detection processing). ), a magnet goto notification command classified as a notification display for notifying that the magnet goto is being performed is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that a magnet is being played in the fraudulent act detection process, the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is By outputting the security signal from the control MPU, it is possible to contribute to the fact that a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall can find the magnetic goto at an early stage.

Further, in the fraud detection process in step S112, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005 is input, fraudulent activity by vibration (hereinafter referred to as "vibration goto") ) is being performed, and the value of the vibration counter is incremented by one. The value of this vibrating counter is incremented each time it is determined that a vibrating counter is performed in the fraud detection process, and is included in the game backup information. is set to a value of 0 (zero). When the value of the vibration goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in this embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is the interrupt cycle at which the main control side timer interrupt processing is performed in the fraud detection process. ), a vibrating goto notification command classified into a notice display indicating that the vibrating goto is being performed is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the vibrating goto is being performed in the fraudulent act detection process, the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is By outputting the security signal from the control MPU, it is possible to contribute to the fact that staff members such as store clerks in the game hall can find the vibrating goto at an early stage.

Further, in the fraudulent act detection process of step S112, for example, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403 is input when it is not in the jackpot game state (big winning opening 2005 when a game ball enters), a winning abnormality display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. .

In the fraud detection process of step S112, when the magnet goto and/or the vibrating goto are detected, the value 1 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud, while the magnet goto and the vibrating goto are detected. When not detected, a value of 0 is set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as fraud is not detected. This fraud detection flag FD-FLG is included in the game backup information, and is set to 0 (zero) as an initial value when the RAM is cleared. Also, when detecting the occurrence of an abnormal winning of a large winning opening, the value 1 may be set to the fraud detection flag FD-FLG as detection of fraud.

Following step S112, the main control MPU performs a firing enable signal setting process (step S113). In this shooting permission signal setting process, the logic of the shooting permission signal that tells the shooting control section 633b of the payout control board 633 that the shooting of the game ball B is allowed is set. Specifically, when the fraud detection flag FD-FLG is 0 based on the value of the fraud detection flag FD-FLG, the main control MPU determines that fraud has not been detected. Sometimes, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to the firing permission logic and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. is detected, the logic of the firing permission signal is set to firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) obtained by inverting the firing permission logic, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. The logic of the firing permission signal is set by hardware including the main control output circuit with a reset function so that the initial value (default) is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inversion of the firing permission logic. Although it is configured, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (after the power is restored), it is set to the firing permission logic.

Following step S113, the main control MPU performs special symbol and special electric accessory control processing (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and the random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is Obtained from a hard random number latch register built into the control MPU, and set this obtained random number as a special random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the special random number (that is, the random value obtained from the hard random number latch register built into the main control MPU) matches the jackpot judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (jackpot It is determined whether or not to generate a game state (referred to as "special lottery")), and the value of the counter for updating the symbol random number is taken out and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM according to the big hit type and the small hit type. It is determined (determines the hit type) whether it matches with any of the hit type determination values.

When these determination results (lottery results) are due to the first start opening sensor 2101, while creating various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, the determination results (lottery results) are the second start opening sensor 2402 If it is due to, various commands related to special figure 2 tuning effect are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the above-described random number for the variable display pattern. Then, the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 to light up the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined special symbol fluctuation display pattern The output of the lighting signal to the indicator is set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when it becomes a big win game state, various commands classified as related to big wins (big win opening command, large winning mouth 1 open Nth time display command, big winning mouth 1 closing display command, large winning mouth 1) Winning mouth 1 count display command, jackpot ending command, and jackpot pattern display command) is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, or for example, a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 to open and close the opening and closing member. The output is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area. The output of the lighting signal to the 2nd round indicator lamp is set so as to light the round indicator lamp, and is stored as output information in the output information storage area. A function display unit 1400 for setting the output of a lighting signal to the 15-round display lamp so as to light the 15-round display lamp, storing it in the output information storage area as output information, and lighting the presence or absence of time saving in a predetermined color. The output of the lighting signal to the status indicator is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

Following step S114, the main control MPU performs normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing (step S116). In this normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the normal winning opening winning process is performed based on this input information. In this normal winning opening winning process, it is determined from the input information whether or not the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. Based on this judgment result, when the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port, the value of the counter for updating the above-mentioned normal symbol per judgment random number is extracted and incorporated into the main control as normal winning opening winning prize information. It is stored in the normal winning opening winning information storage area of the RAM.

0th section to 3rd section (four sections) are provided in this normal winning opening winning information storage area, and the normal winning opening is provided in order of 0th section, 1st section, 2nd section, and 3rd section. Winning information is stored. For example, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the 0th section to the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the normal winning opening Winning information is stored in the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage.

The normal winning opening winning information stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When the normal winning opening winning information is set, the normal winning opening winning information in the first section of the normal winning opening winning information storage is stored in the 0th section of the normal winning opening winning information storage and the second section of the normal winning opening winning information storage. The normal winning entry winning information of the section is stored in the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage, and the normal winning entry winning information of the third section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is stored in the second section of the normal winning entry winning information storage. After shifting, the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage becomes an empty area. For example, if the normal winning entry winning information is stored in the first and second sections of the normal winning entry winning information storage, the normal winning entry winning information in the first section of the normal winning entry winning information storage is the normal winning. The normal winning prize winning information in the second division of the normal winning prize information storage is shifted to the 0th section of the normal winning prize information storage, and the normal winning prize winning prize information in the second section of the normal winning prize winning prize information storage is shifted to the first section of the normal winning prize winning prize information storage. The 2nd section and the 3rd section of the normal winning opening prize information storage become empty areas. Here, if the normal winning opening winning information is stored in the first section to the third section of the normal winning opening winning information storage, the total number of the stored normal winning opening winning information is regarded as a reserved ball, and the normal winning opening of the function display unit 1400 Based on the above-described normal winning opening winning prize information, the output of the lighting signal for the normal holding display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the holding display, and is stored as the output information in the above-described output information storage area.

Following the normal winning opening winning process, the normal winning opening winning information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the value of the random number for normal symbol per determination is taken out from the read normal winning opening winning information and the main control is performed. It is determined whether or not the value coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value pre-stored in the built-in ROM (referred to as "normal lottery"). Whether or not to open and close the movable piece is determined based on the determination result (lottery result by ordinary lottery). When the opening/closing operation is performed by this determination, the game ball can be received into the second starting port 2004 by opening the movable piece, and the game state is advantageous to the player. The normal symbol variation display pattern corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-described random number for the normal symbol variation display pattern, various commands classified into the normal symbol synchronization effect are created, and the above-described transmission information storage is performed as transmission information. In addition to storing in the area, output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above.

Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for judging normal symbol hit matches the normal hit judgment value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to normal electric role performance are created and transmitted. Information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2412 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area. When the value of the random number for judging the symbol per pattern does not match the judgment value of the normal per symbol pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM, the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is determined based on the above random number for the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern. , Creating various commands classified into normal pattern synchronization production related, storing as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, and lighting the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 according to the determined normal symbol fluctuation display pattern The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to cause it to be set, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. In this example, the probability of winning the normal lottery (probability of winning a normal prize) is 1/2.

Following step S116, the main control MPU performs port output processing (step S118). In this port output process, output information is read from the above-described output information storage area from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU, and various signals are output based on this output information. This main control MPU, for example, from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the main control MPU based on the output information, when the various commands from the payout control board 633 has been normally received, the main payout control board 633 Or, when in a jackpot game state, output a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 that performs the opening and closing operation of the opening and closing member of the big winning port 2005, and output a drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2412 that performs the opening and closing operation of the movable piece In addition, 15 rounds big hit information output signal, 2 rounds big hit information output signal, small hit information output signal, special design display information output signal, normal design display information output signal, short time medium information output signal, start winning prize information Various information (game information) signals related to games such as output signals are output to the payout control board 633, or a launch permission signal set to the firing permission logic or firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) is output to the payout control board 633. Or output a display signal to the base monitor 1310h that displays the counting result (total number) of the number of game balls collected by the out port 1008, or store it in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM It outputs a lighting signal for displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g.

Following step S118, the main control MPU performs peripheral control board command transmission processing (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This transmission information includes various commands that are classified into special figure 1 synchronization effect related, various commands that are classified into special figure 2 synchronization effect related, and are classified into big hit related Various commands (for example, a large winning opening 1 count display command corresponding to a large winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the large winning opening sensor 2403 when a game ball entering the large winning opening 2005 is detected) , Various commands categorized as power on, various commands categorized as related to normal drawing synchronization effects, various commands categorized as normal electric role effects related, various commands categorized as notification display, various commands as categorized as status display Commands, various commands classified into test-related commands, and various commands classified into others (for example, the main control board 1310 is scheduled to pay out prize balls based on the game balls that enter various winning holes provided on the game board 5 Each time the number of game balls reaches 10, a main prize ball number information output signal is transmitted to the hall computer via the external terminal plate 558 as main prize ball number information. number information output command, etc.), and various commands classified into a specific history (for example, a ball collection command that notifies each time the number of game balls collected at the outlet 1008 reaches 10 balls, and set values are set). A setting change command that informs that a change has been made, an error display command that informs that there is an abnormality (or is unreliable) in the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM, a specific area of the main control built-in RAM A setting value confirmation display command, etc., for notifying that the setting values stored in the setting value exclusive area described later are to be confirmed are stored. One packet of the main circumferential serial data is composed of 3 bytes. Specifically, the main peripheral serial data includes a status indicating a command type having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status and a sum value calculated by considering the mode as a numerical value, and this sum value is created at the time of transmission.

In this peripheral control board command transmission processing, status, mode, and sum value, which constitute various commands as main peripheral serial data, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. As described above, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied as DC +5 V to the VDD terminal, which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU. The main-circumference serial transmission port incorporated in the main control MPU transfers at least the command set in its transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit, and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main-circumference serial data. can be done. When power is turned on to the pachinko machine 1, or when power is restored when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the power is turned on, the In order to notify that the power has been restored in the reservation setting of the command to be performed, a power-on state command that is classified as power-on, a main control return destination command at power-on, and a counter for determining the number of main prize balls information output at power-on Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the order of the status, mode, and sum value that constitutes the power-on state command as the main peripheral serial data Transmit to the peripheral control board 1510, then transmit to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then main prize ball number information when power is turned on. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the output determination counter notification command, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order. In addition, in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on process, various information is read from the game backup information and various commands may be stored. In such a case, first, after completing the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information, then the state command at power-on, the main control return destination command at power-on, and the main prize number information at power-on. An output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

When the number of game balls collected at the outlet 1008 reaches 10, a ball collection command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 receives the received ball. For each collection command, the number of game balls collected at the out port 1008 is counted, and ball collection information (counted value (that is, collected at the out port 1008 update the information that associates the total number of game balls played) with the updated date and time). It should be noted that, if the pachinko machine 1 is powered off at the end of the business hours of the game hall without being able to receive the ball recovery command, the last counted value (that is, the game balls recovered at the outlet 1008) Ball recovery information in which the total number of balls (total number of balls) and the updated date and time are associated is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the game hall starts operating, the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 starts operating the ball collection information stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown). The ball recovery information is created again from the day, and the ball recovery information is stored and held in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) as ball recovery history information. It should be noted that the counted value to be stored as ball collection information in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) may be a value counted from 0 (zero) on that day, or a value counted from 0 (zero) on that day. Both the counted value and the sum of the counted values so far may be used.

Following step S120, the main control MPU clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT in step S122 is performed by setting the timer clear set value in the WDT clear register built into the main control MPU. As a result, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, by restarting the clocking by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU can be prevented from being forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT.

In addition, as described above, the main control board 1310 has the above-described backup function for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off while the game is progressing. The process can be executed and completed, and at the time of power restoration, the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off based on the game information that has executed the backup process as a return destination for the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. output to the peripheral control board 1510 when the main control is to be returned to the peripheral control board 1510 when power is turned on. It is possible to do so. In other words, the main control board 1310, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at step S50 in the power-on process on the main control side shown in FIG. In order to notify that the power has been turned on (power has been restored) based on the power recovery information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of , a power-on state command classified as power-on, When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command and when the power is turned on, the main prize number information output determination counter notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and in step S120 of this routine. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, as main peripheral serial data, the status, mode, and sum value that constitute the power-on state command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, and then the main control return destination at power-on. The status, mode, and sum value constituting the command are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order, followed by the status, mode, and sum value constituting the counter notification command for determining the output of the main winning ball number information at power-on. are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in this order.

For this reason, the peripheral control board 1510, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, sets the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored to the display area of the effect display device 1600. can be displayed in As a result, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs while a player is playing a game and power is subsequently restored, the game state immediately before the power failure or power failure can be quickly restored after the power is restored. In addition, since the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and notified, the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a stuck state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding that the machine is out of order. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from misunderstanding a malfunction by quickly returning to the game state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure after power is restored.

Also, in the main control board inspection process, which is the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is powered on for the first time after being manufactured for inspection, as described above, as shown in FIG. At step S38 in the main control side power-on processing shown, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are always cleared except for a specific area. As a result, in the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same processing shown in FIG. , main control return destination command when power is turned on, and main prize number information output determination counter notification command when power is turned on and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A state in which only three commands, namely, the status command, the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and the counter notification command for main prize number information output judgment command when power is turned on, are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Then, in the peripheral control board command transmission processing of step S120 in this routine, the status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the state command at the time of power-on, are sent as the main peripheral serial data to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in this order. Then, transmit to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the main control return destination command when power is turned on, and then output main prize ball number information when power is turned on. The status, mode, and sum value, which constitute the determination counter notification command, are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process in this order. The inspection device in the main control board inspection process configures the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information representing the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , the series code for specifying which type is the above-mentioned model type from the max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, the copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and the game specifications (For example, when a probability change occurs, in addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big win game state occurs, the game specification that the probability change occurs in a state where the number of special symbol changes is limited (ST machine), etc.), and detailed model information is displayed on the inspection monitor in the main control board inspection process.

[8-4. Setting change process]
Next, setting change processing will be described. This setting change process is a process performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

When the setting change process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current setting values as shown in FIG. 121 (step S200). Here, the main control MPU obtains the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. When acquiring this setting value, it may be read out or taken out. When the setting value is taken out, the taken out setting value is set in a predetermined area.

Following step S200, the main control MPU calculates a checksum (step S202). This checksum is calculated by considering various information stored in the main control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the sum of them. This is the same processing as the calculation of .

Subsequent to step S202, the main control MPU stores the calculated checksum value (sum value) in the main control side power failure processing (power failure time) in the main control side power activation processing shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not the checksum value (sum value) matches (step S204). When the main control MPU determines in step S204 that they match, it determines whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S206). The determination of step S204 and the determination of step S206 are the same as the determination of step S30 and the determination of step S32 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 118, respectively. As described above, the backup flag BK-FLG stores game backup information such as various information, the checksum value (sum value), and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG in the main control side power failure processing described later. A flag indicating whether or not data is stored in the RAM, and is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power failure processing has been completed normally, and to a value of 0 when the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally. be done.

When the main control MPU determines in step S204 that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1. When (the value is 0), that is, when it is determined that the main-control-side power-off processing has not ended normally, it is determined whether or not the set value acquired in step S200 is within the normal range (step S208). . Here, the "normal range" is a value that can be set and changed. It is preset to values up to a value of 6. When it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM by proceeding to the determination of step S208, or when it is determined that the main control side power-off processing has not been completed normally at the time of power-off. Therefore, the contents stored in the main control built-in RAM are abnormal (or unreliable). Therefore, in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU determines that the setting values stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM acquired in step S200 are set values 1 to 6, which are within the normal range. It is determined whether or not it is in any of the values, and when it is determined that it is within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines that it is out of the normal range in the determination of step S208, it sets the set value 1, which is the initial value, to the set value acquired in step S200 (step S210). In the determination of step S208, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM obtained in step S200 is within the normal range of setting values 1 to 6. However, the main control MPU determines that the checksum value (sum value) does not match in the determination of step S204 without performing the determination of step S208. or in the determination in step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not 1 (is 0), that is, the main control side power failure processing has not been completed normally. In some cases, the process of step S210 may proceed to set the setting value 1, which is the initial value, to the setting value obtained in step S200.

In the determination of step S206, the main control MPU determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is 1, that is, when the main control side power failure processing has been normally completed, or in the determination of step S208, the main control MPU When the MPU determines that it is within the normal range, or following step S210, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to light the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S212).

Following step S212, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value on the setting display 1310g, and displays the setting value on the setting display 1310g (step S214). .

Following step S214, the main control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is operated (step S216). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switching button, and error canceling switch) that also serves three functions. Works as a button function. This determination reads a signal (setting value selection switching signal) that tells that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 has been operated, and reads the setting change signal of the setting value from the RWM clear button 633z. It is determined whether or not a detection signal is input. The main control MPU determines that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated when the setting value selection switching signal is input from the RWM clear button 633z, while the main control MPU determines that the setting value from the RWM clear button 633z is changed. When the selection switching signal has not been input, it is determined that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated.

When the main control MPU determines in step S216 that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, the main control MPU adds (increments) the set value by 1 to update it (step S218). ). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area 1 is added (incremented) to the setting value set in .

Following step S218, the main control MPU outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value updated in step S216 on the setting display 1310g, and the updated setting value is displayed on the setting display 1310g. is displayed (step S220).

Subsequent to step S220 or in the determination of step S216, when the main control MPU determines that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the main control MPU determines whether the setting key has been turned off. (step S222). In this determination, the main control MPU moves the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder is turned on). When the switch 1311a is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return to the turning position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the switch 1311a, and is turned off, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, and an off signal is sent from the setting key switch 1311a. When the OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. It is determined that no operation has been performed.

When determining in step S222 that the setting key has not been turned OFF, the main control MPU returns to the determination in step S216 to determine whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated. . In the judgment of step S216, when the main control MPU judges that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, the processing of steps S218 and S220 is performed again, the judgment of step S222 is made, and the setting key is pressed. is not turned off, the process returns to the judgment of step S216, and the setting value is changed each time the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated until the setting key is turned off. The value is incremented by 1 and updated and displayed on the setting display 1310g. If the push operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, the set value updated by the operation of the push operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z immediately before is set and displayed. displayed on device 1310g. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs and the power is restored before it is determined in step S222 that the setting key has been turned off, the setting values updated immediately before the power failure or momentary power failure occur are mainly used. Since it is not stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the internal control RAM, it is discarded and the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control internal RAM is not changed.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S222 that the setting key has been turned OFF, it stores the updated set value in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM (step S224). At this time, when the setting value is acquired in step S200, if the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM is taken out and set in the predetermined area, this predetermined area , the updated setting value is returned to the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. Even if a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the processing of step S224 is completed and the power is restored, the updated set values when the enter key is operated before the power failure or momentary power failure occur are stored in the main control built-in RAM. is stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of

Following step S224, the main control MPU stops outputting a lighting signal to the setting indicator 1310g for displaying the updated setting value on the setting indicator 1310g, and displays the updated setting value on the setting indicator 1310g. is hidden (step S228).

Following step S228, the main control MPU stops the lighting signal to the setting change permission lamp 1310z to turn off the setting change permission lamp 1310z (step S230).

Following step S230, the main control MPU sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to 0 (step S232). As described above, this setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the current setting value (when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. This is a flag that indicates whether or not to permit setting change and confirmation display of the setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the point in time). A value of 1 is set when the setting is permitted, and a value of 0 is set when the setting change of the setting value and confirmation display are not permitted. In the process of step S232, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 0, thereby disallowing setting changes and confirmation display of setting values thereafter.

After step S232, the main control MPU determines whether the set value stored in step S224 is within the normal range (step S233). "Normal range" is the same as the determination in step S208. It is preset to values up to a value of 6. In the determination of step S233, the main control MPU determines whether the set value stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM in step S224 is normal in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value. A determination is made as to whether or not the value is within the range of set values 1 to 6, and if it is determined to be within the normal range, the set value is used as it is.

In the determination of step S233, when the main control MPU determines that it is within the normal range, it performs serial communication initialization (step S234), then creates a setting change command to set transmission information (step S236), Subsequently, peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing is performed to transmit the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data (step S238), and this routine ends. The serial communication initial setting in step S234 is the same process as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initialization in step S234, the transmission information (setting change command) set in step S236 is mainly transmitted in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S238 prior to the serial communication initialization in step S44. Although it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as peripheral serial data, this is prioritized before the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the processing at power-on on the main control side shown in FIG. This is to inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the setting value has been changed by the setting change command. The setting change command is a command for notifying the changed setting value and the completion of storing the setting value. When the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the setting change command, it updates the setting value history information (information that associates the setting value with the date and time) stored in the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown).

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S233 that it is not in the normal range, it performs error display processing (step S240) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is terminated is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

[8-5. Setting value confirmation display process]
Next, setting value confirmation display processing will be described. This setting value confirmation display process is a process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG.

When the set value confirmation display process is started, the main control MPU acquires the current set values as shown in FIG. 122 (step S350). Here, the main control MPU obtains the set values stored in the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM.

After step S350, the main control MPU determines whether or not the set value acquired in step S350 is within the normal range (step S352). The “normal range” is the same as the determination in step S208 and the determination in step S233 in the setting change process of FIG. A value of 3, a set value of 4, a set value of 5, and a set value of 6 are set in advance. In the determination of step S357, the main control MPU, in order to reconfirm whether the set value is an abnormal value, the set value acquired in step S350 (that is, the set value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM set value stored in ) is within the normal range of set values 1 to 6, and if it is determined to be within the normal range, the set value is used as it is. do.

In the determination of step S352, when the main control MPU determines that the setting value obtained in step S350 is within the normal range, it outputs a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g to display the setting value on the setting display 1310g. The set value is displayed for 1310g (step S354).

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines that it is not within the normal range in the determination of step S352, it performs error display processing (step S356) and enters an infinite loop. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is terminated is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all, and the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off and then turned on again. This error display process will be described in detail later, but if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the contents of the main control built-in RAM, or if the main control side power supply interruption processing has not completed normally at the time of power supply interruption, If it is determined, the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is determined to be abnormal (or unreliable), and an error message is displayed to that effect. In this embodiment, the main control MPU displays the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error indication.

After step S354, the main control MPU determines whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key (step S358). In this determination, the main control MPU moves the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder when the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a to the initial position (that is, the setting key cylinder is turned on). The setting key cylinder is turned counterclockwise by 60 degrees so as to return the switch 1311a to the turning position of the setting key cylinder that turns off the switch 1311a. When the OFF signal from the setting key switch 1311a is input, it is determined that the setting key has been turned OFF. If not, it is determined that the setting key has not been turned off.

When the main control MPU determines in step S358 that the setting key has not been turned off, the main control MPU returns to the determination of step S358 and repeats the determination of step S358 until the setting key is turned off.

On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S358 that the setting key has been turned OFF, it sends a lighting signal to the setting display 1310g for displaying the setting value acquired in step S350 on the setting display 1310g. The output is stopped and the acquired setting value is hidden from the setting display 1310g (step S360).

After step S360, the main control MPU sets the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to 0 (step S361). As described above, this setting key ON flag CS-FLG is the current setting value (when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON) stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM. This is a flag that indicates whether or not to permit setting change and confirmation display of the setting value (the value set among setting values 1 to 6 at the point in time). A value of 1 is set when the setting is permitted, and a value of 0 is set when the setting change of the setting value and confirmation display are not permitted. In the process of step S232, the value 0 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG, thereby disallowing setting change of setting values and confirmation display thereafter.

Following step S361, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S362), then creates a setting value confirmation display command and sets transmission information (step S364), and then in step S364 A peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting the set transmission information (set value confirmation display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data is performed (step S366), and this routine ends. The serial communication initial setting in step S362 is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. This is the same processing as the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing of step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Here, in the serial communication initialization in step S362, the transmission information (set value confirmation display command) set in step S364 is performed prior to the serial communication initialization in step S44 in the peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S366. is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data. This is in order to preferentially inform the peripheral control board 1510 that the confirmation of the setting value has been completed by the setting value confirmation display command. The setting value confirmation display command indicates that the setting value confirmation display processing of this routine has ended (that is, the setting value stored in the setting value dedicated area in the specific area of the main control built-in RAM has been confirmed). ).

[8-6. Error display processing]
Next, error display processing will be described. This error display process is the process performed in step S33 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 118, and the process performed in step S37 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 118), and the processing performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 118 (step S356 in the set value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 122 It is a process performed in

When the error display process is started, the main control MPU stops the firing permission signal as shown in FIG. 123 (step S400). As described above, the launch permission signal tells the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted. On the other hand, if the logic is set to the firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic) that is the inverse of the launch permission logic, it is possible to tell that the launch is to be stopped (non-permission). .

The error display process, which is this routine, is one of the processes performed in step S33 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 118 and the process performed in step S37 in the main-control-side power-on process shown in FIG. (Specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 121) or the process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 119), the main control MPU can perform the interrupt permission setting of step S52 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. Therefore, the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 120 cannot be performed, and the firing permission signal setting processing of step S113 in the same processing cannot be performed. Since the firing permission signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU to the firing control section 633b of the payout control board 633 via the main control output circuit with the reset function, at the time of power recovery, The main control output circuit is reset, and its logic is fire stop logic (fire non-permission logic) which is the inverse of the fire enable logic.

Therefore, the error display processing of this routine is the processing performed in step S33 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. 118 and the processing performed in step S37 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. One process (specifically, the process performed in step S240 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 121) or the process performed in step S28 in the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. 118 (specifically, 122), the main control MPU, in step S400, after the power is restored and the error display processing of this routine is started, Also, in order to reliably prevent the game ball B from being shot, the logic of the shooting permission signal is set to firing stop logic (fire non-permission logic), and the reset function is performed from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. It outputs to the discharge control section 633b of the payout control board 633 via the attached main control output circuit.

Following step S400, a lighting signal for displaying the letter E on the setting display 1310g as an error display is output to the setting display 1310g to display an error on the setting display 1310g (step S402).

Following step S402, the main control MPU displays an error on the function display unit 1400 (step S404). In this step S404, a lighting signal for lighting all the various indicators of the function display unit 1400 is output to the function display unit 1400, and an error is displayed on the function display unit 1400. FIG.

Following step S404, the main control MPU performs serial communication initialization (step S406), then creates an error display command and sets transmission information (step S408), and then sets in step S406. A peripheral control board transmission command transmission process for transmitting transmission information (error display command) to the peripheral control board 1510 as main peripheral serial data is performed (step S410), and this routine ends.

The serial communication initial setting in step S406 includes the serial communication initial setting in step S234 in the setting change process shown in FIG. 121, the serial communication initial setting in step S362 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. This processing is the same as the serial communication initial setting in step S44 in the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. Control board transmission command transmission processing, peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S366 in the setting value confirmation display processing shown in FIG. 122, and peripheral control board transmission in step S120 in the main control side timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. This process is the same as the command transmission process. The error display processing, which is this routine, is the processing performed in step S33 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 118, the processing performed in step S37 in the main-control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 122) and step S356 in the setting value confirmation display process shown in FIG. Due to this infinite loop, the state in which the error display processing is completed is maintained, and the game cannot be progressed at all.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, serial communication initialization is performed in step S406, and the transmission information (error display command) set in step S408 is used as main peripheral serial data in peripheral control board transmission command transmission processing in step S410. Sending to 1510.

The error display command is a command to notify that there is an abnormality (or that the content stored in the main control built-in RAM is unreliable). When the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, the error display history information (information that associates the error display command with the received date and time) stored in the internal RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown) is stored. Update.

In addition, when the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command, it displays a blue background image and a white background image of "RAM error occurred. Please call the attendant." In addition to performing control to display a message image of characters, the volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 to announce "A RAM error has occurred. Please call the person in charge." Controls the output from various speakers by forcibly setting the maximum volume without depending on the The process of notifying the RAM error by the error display command is the process with the highest priority. When the peripheral control MPU in the peripheral control board 1510 receives the error display command after receiving the command notifying another error, the RAM error notification is performed. with the highest priority.

[9. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 161 will be described with reference to FIGS. 124 to 127. FIG. FIG. 124 is a flow chart showing an example of processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit, FIG. 125 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the processing when power is turned on for the payout control unit in FIG. 124, and FIG. FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing the continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 127 is a flow chart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[9-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
First, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a in the payout control board 633, as shown in FIGS. . When this payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU sets the interrupt mode (step S500). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority of the interrupt of the payout control MPU. In the present embodiment, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is set to have the highest priority.

Following step S500, the payout control MPU performs input/output setting (input/output setting of I/O) (step S502). In this I/O input/output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU are set.

Following step S502, the payout control MPU performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until it reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or momentary power failure occurs (phenomenon in which the power supply is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops, and when it becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. . Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage after the power is turned on until it rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 . Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage after the power is turned on and stabilized. ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is made based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310. FIG.

Following step S508, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated (step S512). As described above, the RWM clear button 633z has a function (RAM clear switch, setting switch button, and error cancellation switch) that also serves three functions, and here, it is stored in a predetermined area of the payout control built-in RAM Acts as a RAM clear switch function to completely erase the information. In this judgment, when the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that tells that the pushing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is HI, it is judged that the RAM is not cleared, and the pushing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is pushed. While it is determined that the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, if the logic of the signal (RAM clear signal) that tells that the depressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is to be cleared, and the RWM clear button 633z is pressed. It is determined that the pressing operation part is being operated.

In the judgment of step S512, when the payout control MPU judges that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, it sets the value 1 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S514). That is, the payout control MPU makes it possible to perform RAM clear processing for initializing the RAM (that is, payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU for a predetermined period of time after the power is turned on.

On the other hand, when the payout control MPU determines in step S512 that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated, it sets the value 0 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). This payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas (for example, prize ball information storage area The logic state of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc., and the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area are set. This is a flag indicating whether or not to erase the payout information related to payout (PRDY signal output setting information, etc.). Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU.

Following step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU performs setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM can be performed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read.

After step S518, the payout control MPU sets the stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack to temporarily store the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a temporary return address of this routine when returning to this routine after terminating a subroutine. It indicates the address stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. At step S520, the initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the register contents, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

After step S520, the payout control MPU determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is erased, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU calculates a checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0, that is, when it determines not to erase the payout information (step S524). This checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as numerical values and calculating the total.

Following step S524, the payout control MPU determines whether the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in payout control unit power-off processing (at power-off) described later. (step S526). When the payout control MPU determines that they match in step S526, it determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S528). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in payout control unit power failure processing described later. A value of 1 is set when the control unit power failure processing is normally completed, and a value of 0 is set when the payout control unit power failure processing is not completed normally.

In the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU, when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that the process at the time of power failure of the payout control unit is normally completed, payout control built-in RAM is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, the power recovery time information is read from the ROM built in the payout control MPU (that is, the payout control built-in ROM). Information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, which are the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various information stored in the various information storage area (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area) Ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., and PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area, in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of mismatch counter reset determination time, etc., stored in the time management information storage area. Note that "recovery of power" includes not only the state in which the power is turned on after the power has been cut off, but also the state in which the power has been restored after a power failure or momentary power failure.

On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (is 1), that is, when it determines to erase the payout information, or in the determination of step S526, When the payout control MPU determines that the checksum values do not match, or when the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not 1 (is 0) in the determination of step S528, that is, When it is determined that the processing at the time of power failure of the payout control unit has not ended normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

Following step S532, the payout control MPU sets the working area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM and this initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU performs interrupt initialization (step S536). This setting is to set the interrupt period when the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

Following step S536, the payout control MPU performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). Due to this setting, the interrupt period set in step S536, that is, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every 2 ms.

Following step S538, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in this order.

Following step S539, the payout control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S540). When the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, power failure or momentary power failure occurs, as described above, when the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. be done. The determination in step S540 is made based on this power failure warning signal.

In the judgment of step S540, when the payout control MPU judges that there is no power failure warning signal input, it judges whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S542). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process that is processed every 2 ms, which will be described later. set.

In the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU returns to step S540 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, and the payout control MPU receives the power failure warning signal. Determine whether or not

On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is the value 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544 ).

After step S544, the payout control MPU sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, a value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

Following step S546, the payout control MPU performs port output processing (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, the payout motor 584 is controlled by payout ACK information indicating that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (a prize ball command and a self-check command) have been received normally. Various information such as drive information, information on the number of winning balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on an error LED display are stored, and payout control is performed based on this output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the MPU, the payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 and the drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Alternatively, the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is output to the external terminal plate 558 as a winning ball number information output signal (in this embodiment, the payout motor 584 actually pays out 10 game balls). A prize number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 each time the ball is played.

Specifically, a winning ball number information output determination counter is provided for determining whether or not to output the winning ball number information. The number of game balls put out is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) not shown for monitoring.

In the process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584, the number of prize balls information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM The number of game balls actually put out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 to be described later, and the memory is updated.

In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize number information output determination counter value is read from the prize ball information storage area. In other words, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches 10, a prize number information output signal is output to the external terminal plate 558 (at this time, the number of balls exceeded is indicated). The value is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the above-mentioned payout control built-in RAM as the value of the counter for determining the number of prize balls information output), and a display signal is output to the error LED indicator.

Following step S548, the payout control MPU performs port input processing (step S550). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminals of various input ports of the payout control MPU are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, a signal from the RWM clear button 633z (for example, when the RWM clear button 633z operates as an error clearing switch, it becomes an error clearing signal for notifying that the error displayed on the error LED indicator has been cleared), A detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the dispensing detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, a BRDY signal, and a CR connection signal, which are transmitted by the command transmission process described later. The main payment ACK signal or the like from the main control board 1310 that informs that the main control board 1310 has received the various commands normally received is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

Following step S550, the payout control MPU performs timer update processing (step S552). In this timer update process, when determining whether or not the ball is stuck due to the payout vane 589 to which the rotation of the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted, the ball stickiness determination time set as the determination condition; Skip determination time that is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, is set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the bottom tray 202 is full with the game balls stored During the full tank determination time, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 is a predetermined number or more. In addition to performing time management such as the ball out judgment time set as the judgment condition, the number of game balls received and paid out by the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the actual payout detection sensor 591 When determining whether or not to reset an inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not inconsistent game ball payouts due to inconsistency between the number of balls detected in step 1 and the number of balls detected in step 1 are repeated Time management is performed for the mismatch counter reset determination time that is set as the condition. For example, when the ball jam determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms. By setting it to 0, it accurately measures the time it takes to determine if the ball is stuck. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the RAM with built-in payout control.

Following step S552, the payout control MPU performs CR communication processing (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, it is determined whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal and CR connection signal) are input from the CR unit. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage areas etc. (for example, prize ball stock number PBS, real ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout such as PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the signal is set.

By this process, for example, even if there is an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. just before the momentary power failure or power failure. As a result, even if the payout operation of the game balls is executed by the payout device 580 and cannot be continued due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure, the payout operation can be continued when the power is restored. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the upper tray 201 and the lower tray 202 just enough. In other words, the payout control MPU, while exchanging various signals with the CR unit in the CR communication process, when the gaming balls are being put out to the upper tray 201 or the lower tray 202, the momentary power failure or power failure causes the CR unit Even if the exchange of various signals is interrupted and the game ball payout cannot be continued, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. at the time of power restoration By restoring the value stored as payout backup information to the value of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure, the instantaneous The exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit immediately before a power failure or power failure can be continued from the time of power restoration, and the payout of game balls can be continued. ing.

In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or stoppage when the power is restored even if the momentary power failure or stoppage occurs. This prevents the various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit from changing due to the effects of an instantaneous power failure or stoppage. Therefore, the reliability of exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) and the CR unit can be enhanced.

Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication process, when the power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If the PRDY signal output setting information read out by the lever is set to, for example, the logic state of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible, the PRDY signal is put out and controlled. Output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU to the CR unit. Then, in, for example, a retry operation monitoring process that is performed as one process of the main operation setting process, the value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information to determine whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, and if the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball stick operation determination setting processing, As an error state output setting to the CR unit, for example, the logical state (LOW) of the PRDY signal that informs that the dispensing operation for dispensing rental balls is impossible when not communicating with the CR unit is output. It is set in the setting information and stored in the CR communication information storage area.

As a result, in the CR communication process, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area at the next timer interrupt after the power is restored, and the PRDY signal is sent to the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU. to the CR unit. In this way, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, the state is restored when the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the dispensing operation for dispensing the rental balls is impossible can be output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU to the CR unit. It is possible to inform that the game ball payout operation by is in an abnormal state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the CR unit from outputting BRDY, which is a useless ball rental request signal, at an extremely early stage after power is restored.

Further, in the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. 1 is turned on and the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are electrically connected, PRDY is used to notify that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible. While outputting the logic state of the signal as HI to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU, when the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout control MPU sets the logic state of the PRDY signal to LOW in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental balls is impossible. is output to the CR unit from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. In addition, the logic state of the EXS signal that informs the start or end of one payout operation is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and the payout control board 633 and A CR connection signal that tells whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

Following step S554, the payout control MPU performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing (step S556). In this full-tank and ball-out check process, input information is read out from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, a game ball stored in the lower tray 202 is detected by a detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154. , and the number of game balls introduced into the guide passage 570a of the above-mentioned ball guide unit 570 by the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 exceeds a predetermined number. and determine whether or not For example, the determination of whether or not the bottom tray 202 is full of stored game balls is made by using the timer interrupt period of 2 ms, and the full tank detection sensor 154 is detected in the current full tank and out of ball check processing. When the detection signal is ON, and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned OFF in the previous (2 ms ago) full tank and bulb out check process, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is turned from OFF to ON. When the transition is made, timing of the full-tank determination time described above is started in the timer update process of step S552. Then, when the full-tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full-tank determination time is reached, the full-tank and out-of-ball check process checks whether the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON. determine whether or not In this determination, when the detection signal from the full-tank detection sensor 154 is ON, full-tank information indicating that the lower tray 202 is full of stored game balls is stored in the above-described state information storage area. do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, it is determined that the lower tray 202 is not full of stored game balls, and full tank information is stored in the state information storage area.

Judgment whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also performed using the timer interrupt period of 2 ms in the current full tank and ball exhaustion check process. When the detection signal from the ball-out switch is ON, and the detection signal from the ball-out switch is OFF in the previous (2ms ago) full tank and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 is When it transitions from OFF to ON, it starts counting the above-mentioned dead ball determination time in the timer updating process of step S552. Then, when the dead ball determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the dead ball determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the dead ball detection sensor 574 is ON in this full tank and dead ball check process determine whether or not In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball run-out detection sensor 574 is ON, the number of game balls taken into the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 is determined to be equal to or greater than a predetermined number, and the ball run-out is communicated. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is assumed that the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number. Bulb-out information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

Following step S556, the payout control MPU performs command reception processing (step S558). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 (prize ball command and self-check command) are received. When these various commands are normally received, payer ACK information to that effect is stored in the output information storage area described above. On the other hand, when various commands can not be received normally, there is an abnormality in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (abnormalities occur in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

Following step S558, the payout control MPU performs command analysis processing (step S560). In this command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

Following step S560, the payout control MPU performs main action setting processing (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, rental balls, ball removal, and ball picking are performed, retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (the number of prize balls in stock) is monitored. .

Following step S562, the payout control MPU performs LED display data creation processing (step S564). In this LED display data creation process, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED indicator of the payout control board 633 is created, and stored as LED display information in the above-described output information storage area. do. For example, the above-mentioned out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number, a corresponding action is taken. Display data (in this embodiment, display value 1 (number "1")) is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

Following step S564, the payout control MPU performs command transmission processing (step S566). In this command transmission process, various kinds of information are read out from the above-described state information storage area, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancellation navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into state displays are created based on the various information. and transmit it to the main control board 1310 . For example, when out-of-ball information is read out from the state information storage area, frame state 1 is determined based on the out-of-ball information when the number of game balls introduced into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number. It creates commands and transmits them to the main control board 1310 .

After step S566, the payout control MPU sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

Following step S568, returning to step S539, the payout control MPU sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, determines in step S540 whether or not a power failure warning signal is input, and determines whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. If no signal is input, it is determined in step S542 whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1. If the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, 2 ms has elapsed, step S544. 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to 0 in step S546, value B is set to watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, port output processing is performed in step S548, port input processing is performed in step S550, and step S552. performs timer update processing, performs CR communication processing in step S554, performs full tank and out-of-ball check processing in step S556, performs command reception processing in step S558, performs command analysis processing in step S560, and performs command analysis processing in step S562. Main operation setting processing is performed, LED display data creation processing is performed in step S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeated. conduct. The processing of steps S539 to S568 is called "payout control unit main processing".

Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310, the processing contents of the payout control unit main processing differ. Therefore, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU will vary. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU preferentially outputs to the main control board 1310 a payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received. there is Thereby, the payout control MPU secures the processing time so as to sufficiently perform other processing that fluctuates.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S540 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the payout control MPU sets interrupt prohibition (step S570). Due to this setting, the later-described payout control section timer interrupt processing is not performed, preventing writing to the payout control built-in RAM and protecting the rewriting of the payout information described above.

Following step S570, the payout control MPU stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). As a result, the payout of game balls is stopped.

Following step S574, the payout control MPU clears the watchdog timer (step S576). This clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, as described above.

After step S576, the payout control MPU calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated by considering the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, as numerical values.

After step S578, the payout control MPU sets the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to 1 (step S580). This completes the storage of the payout backup information.

Following step S580, the payout control MPU performs prohibition setting of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). By this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

Following step S582, the payout control MPU enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, the watchdog timer is not cleared because the watchdog timer clear register HWCL is not set to the values A, B and C in that order. Therefore, the payout control MPU is reset, and thereafter, the payout control unit power-on processing is performed again. It should be noted that the processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as "payout control unit power failure processing".

The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU) is reset when there is a power failure or momentary power failure, and the payout control unit power-on processing is performed by the subsequent restoration of power.

In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal, and in step S528, it is checked whether or not the payout control unit power failure processing has been completed normally. are inspecting. In this way, by double-checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, it is inspected whether or not the payout backup information has been stored by fraud.

[9-2. Dispensing Control Unit Timer Interrupt Processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt period (2 ms in this embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS. 124 to 126.

When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU, as shown in FIG. 127, disables the timer interrupt and switches (saves) the register (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the payout control unit main processing described above is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of general-purpose registers used in the payout control unit main processing.

Following step S590, the payout control MPU sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). This 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms each time this payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms, and has a value of 1 when 2 ms has elapsed, and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. set respectively.

After step S592, the payout control MPU switches (restores) the register (step S594). This return is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main processing, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing.

Following step S594, the payout control MPU sets interrupt permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[10. Various control processing of the peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) shown in FIG. 161 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 132. FIG. FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 129 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 130 is a flow chart showing an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. 131 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 132 is a flow chart showing an example of peripheral control unit power outage notice signal interrupt processing. First, peripheral control unit power-on processing will be described, followed by peripheral control unit V-blank interrupt processing, peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing. . In this embodiment, as the priority of interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing is set to the highest priority, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing. It is set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

As described above, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 has a CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, various I/O interfaces, etc. integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[10-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the peripheral controller power-on process will be described with reference to FIG. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, under the control of the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510, as shown in FIG. When the peripheral controller power-on processing is started, the peripheral controller MPU performs initialization processing (step S1000). This initial setting process includes a process of initializing the peripheral control MPU itself, a hot start/cold start determination process, a process of setting a wait timer after resetting, a process of transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like. I do. The peripheral control MPU first performs processing to initialize the peripheral control MPU itself, but the time required for the processing to initialize the peripheral control MPU is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU can be initialized in an extremely short time. can be As a result, the peripheral control MPU is in a state in which the interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing to be described later, the command related to the control of the game effect and the pachinko game output from the main control board 1310 are output. Various commands such as commands relating to the state of the machine 1 can be received.

Following step S1000, the peripheral control MPU performs current time information acquisition processing (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information specifying the year, month, day and time information specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU as the current time. Set calendar information and current time information.

In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU acquires calendar information and time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. Further, the peripheral control MPU outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) after performing the current time information acquisition processing so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

Following step S1002, the peripheral control MPU sets the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing described later. are set to the value 0 when not executed. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU with a V blank signal indicating that the screen data (information defining the configuration of the screen) from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later, executed on this occasion. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized once by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the peripheral control MPU outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

Following step S1004, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 (step S1006). When the peripheral control MPU determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not 1 (is 0), it returns to step S1006 to determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1. repeatedly determined. By repeating such a determination, a standby state is established until the peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed. Further, the peripheral control MPU outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after determining whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 or not so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

In the determination in step S1006, when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is to be executed, the peripheral control MPU first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG to 1. is set (step S1008). The steady-processing flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and set to a value of 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

Following step S1008, the peripheral control MPU performs 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing (step S1010). In this 1 ms interrupt timer start processing, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is started, and the number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed by starting this 1 ms interrupt timer is counted. 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting is set to 1 to initialize the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN. This 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing.

Following step S1010, the peripheral control MPU performs effect operation unit monitoring processing (step S1014). In this production operation unit monitoring process, in the production operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the press detection provided in the production operation unit 300 Rotation (rotation direction) and rotation of the rotary operation unit 302 based on detection signals from various detection sensors such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382 (hereinafter referred to as “various sensors provided in the production operation unit 300”). Various types of information obtained by operating the pressing operation unit 303 (for example, rotation (rotating direction) history information of the rotation operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300, and pressing operation Operation history information of the unit 303, etc.) is set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. It is appropriately determined whether or not to reflect the operation state of the operation unit 303 in the game presentation. Specifically, if the sound volume has been adjusted in the effect operation unit information acquisition process, the schedule data for sound generation is rewritten according to the adjusted volume, and if the brightness has been adjusted, the lighting mode is changed according to the adjusted brightness. Rewrite the schedule data for generation. As a result, the adjustment of the volume and brightness is reflected in real time, and the performance proceeds with the adjusted volume and brightness.

The peripheral control MPU also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of LEDs used as direct light, the luminance of LEDs used as indirect light, and respectively. During the progress of the production, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, the player (or the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall) operates the production operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303), and the first When one specified brightness value ranging from the specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value, which is the maximum brightness, is set, the above-described level set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is set so as to achieve the specified specified brightness value. Tone information can be updated.

Here, the brightness designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value that constitute the lamp palette setting table will be briefly described. As the brightness specification value, one brightness specification value can be set in a range of 32 levels ranging from the 0th (zero) brightness specification value that is the minimum brightness (lights off) to the 31st brightness specification value that is the maximum brightness. A normal palette value and a special palette value, which will be described later, are set in advance corresponding to the 0 (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, respectively. A player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall) operates an operable effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to obtain a 31st luminance that is the maximum luminance from the first luminance specified value. A specified brightness value can be set up to a specified value.

For example, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in a game hall) designates the 0th (zero) brightness assuming that the current brightness is the minimum brightness (turns off) when rotating the rotary operation unit 302 clockwise. When the value is set to the first specified brightness value, which is the next highest level of brightness, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear The brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be higher along the tone curve or spline tone curve), while the rotary operation unit 302 is reversed. When the current brightness is set to the maximum brightness in the case of the clockwise rotation operation, a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, linear or spline tone curve), the luminance of the LED used as indirect light and the luminance of the LED used as direct light are changed to be lower. When the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 to select a desired luminance and presses the push operation unit 303, the selected desired luminance is confirmed. In this embodiment, a case is prepared in advance where the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) can set the brightness while the effect is in progress. , etc.) can set a desired brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 . In addition, when the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the rotary operation unit 302, the predetermined luminance value to the 31st luminance are displayed at predetermined positions in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of the effect. By displaying a bar-shaped indicator that indicates the position up to the specified value, it is possible to visually indicate in the form of an image how much brightness the player (or staff such as a game hall clerk) desires. It is possible. Further, in the present embodiment, the 14th luminance specified value is set as an initial value (default).

Normally, the pallet value is set as the above-mentioned gradation information for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side that are directly irradiated as light. be. For the normal palette value, one level is selected from among 17 levels in 5% increments from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the maximum value. A formula (for example, a linear tone curve , or a spline-like tone curve).

The minimum palette value (20%) is the maximum palette value corresponding to one luminance designation in the 32-step range from the 0 (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is the luminance designation value described above. (100%) is a value of 20%, and similarly for the other palette values, the values (%) written in parentheses are the above-described brightness specified values, 0 (zero) brightness specified value ~ It is the value for the maximum palette value (100%) corresponding to one luminance designation in the range of 32 levels up to the 31st luminance designation value.

In this embodiment, the maximum palette value (100%) is normally selected in advance for various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are directly irradiated as light. Among the various decorative boards provided on the side of the game board that are set as the gradation information described above and that are directly illuminated as light, the palette A value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the gradation information described above.

The special palette value is set as the gradation information described above for the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light. Unlike the normal palette value, the special palette value has only one level, and is one of the 32 levels ranging from the 0 (zero) brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value, which are the brightness specified values described above. Palette values corresponding to luminance designations are set as the gradation information described above along predetermined mathematical expressions (for example, linear tone curves or spline curve-like tone curves).

As described above, if the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is the same as the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. Therefore, in this embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special palette value instead of using the normal palette value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light at the first luminance designated value, which is the next highest luminance step after the 0th (zero) luminance designated value, which is the minimum luminance (lights off). As the lowest possible brightness, it is set to a value almost equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%), and the range from the 1st brightness specified value to the 31st brightness specified value Among them, one luminance designation value and the corresponding palette value are set according to a predetermined formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline tone curve).

Thus, in the lamp palette setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the LED When setting the brightness and the brightness of the LED used as direct light, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall) operates the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. Brightness by operating While set according to the normal palette value corresponding to the specified value, the player (or a staff member such as a game hall clerk) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 and presses the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. It is set according to the special palette value corresponding to the luminance specified value by the operation of 303 . As a result, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as direct light is dazzling and sets the brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in order to reduce the brightness, The brightness of the LED used is set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest brightness level after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights off)), and in conjunction with this In addition, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is also set to the lowest brightness (that is, the first brightness specified value that is the next highest level of brightness after the 0th (zero) brightness specified value that is the minimum brightness (lights off)). Even so, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value approximately equal to the 18th brightness specified value when the normal palette value is set to the maximum palette value (100%). The minimum brightness is set so that the light guide plate can be visually recognized as emitting light by indirect light.

In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side for the LEDs used as direct light. Even without setting, the light emission mode accompanying the flow of performance is set, and the flow of performance by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side. , set the normal palette value to a small palette value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too bright (or a slightly darker luminance can produce a more dramatic effect), and other By setting the normal palette value to the maximum palette value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the overall light emission mode can be changed very easily. That is, the player (or a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall) operates the operable effect operation section 301 (rotation operation section 302, pressing operation section 303) to obtain the maximum brightness from the first brightness specified value to the 31st brightness. Even if one specified brightness value is set up to the specified brightness value, a small palette value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one specified brightness value is set for a particular decorative board. , one brightness designation value and the corresponding maximum palette value (100%) are set for the other decoration boards, respectively, so that the relationship between the mutually set light emission modes (bright or dark Therefore, the brightness can be adjusted very easily without destroying the relationship of .

Furthermore, indirect light from the light guide plate is more difficult to adjust the brightness than direct light, but for LEDs used as indirect light, a special palette value different from the normal palette value (that is, independent from the normal palette value) The brightness can be set by . As a result, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is managed by the special palette value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is managed by the normal palette value. and the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

Following step S1014, the peripheral control MPU performs display data output processing (step S1016). In this display data output process, in the display data creation process to be described later, the VDP of the peripheral control MPU reads image data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the peripheral control MPU and generates one screen ( 1 frame) is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 . As a result, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600 . In the display data output process, when drawing is performed in excess of the drawing capability of the VDP of the peripheral control MPU, the output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. there is As a result, it is possible to prevent delays in processing time, but so-called dropped frames may occur. It is a mechanism that can give priority to production.

Following step S1016, the peripheral control MPU performs sound data output processing (step S1018). In this sound data output process, the tone generator of the peripheral control MPU reads sound data from the SDRAM based on instructions from the peripheral control MPU, and outputs the data to various speakers from the set output channels in the sound data creation process described later. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

Following step S1018, the peripheral control MPU performs scheduler update processing (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, of the screen data arranged in time series that constitutes the schedule data for screen generation, to instruct which screen data from the top screen data is to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control MPU. , update the pointer.

Further, in the scheduler update process, the pointer is set to indicate the number of the light emission data to be output from the top light emission data among the light emission data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for generating the light emission mode. Update.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the sound data of the production sounds such as music and sound effects arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, and the sound command data instructing the sound data of the notification sounds and notification sounds, The pointer is updated to indicate what number of sound command data from the first sound command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control MPU.

Further, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series that constitute the electric drive source schedule data, the drive data of what number from the head drive data is to be output. Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in time series, which constitute the electric drive source schedule data, are repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt is generated by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt, which will be described later. It is updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid drive processing, which is repeatedly executed each time this 1ms timer interrupt occurs, the electric drive sources such as the motor and solenoid are driven according to the drive data indicated by the pointer, and the next drive specified in chronological order is executed. Update the pointer to the data and update the pointer each time you do your own work. In other words, the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive process is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process. Even if another drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be instructed, the scheduler update process is forcibly updated so that the drive data that should be instructed is instructed.

Following step S1020, the peripheral control MPU performs received command analysis processing (step S1022). In this received command analysis processing, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing described later, and the received various commands are analyzed and used for various settings of effects. Update the random number (for example, the random number used for pending lookahead-related effects). Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Analyzes various commands received. Based on the analyzed various commands, the peripheral control MPU reads (extracts) screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, and the like from the peripheral control ROM. and) is set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU.

Note that the peripheral control MPU also performs a lamp palette setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp palette setting process, the luminance of the LED used as direct light and the luminance of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on the lamp palette setting table composed of the above-described luminance designation value, normal palette value, and special palette value. and , respectively. The peripheral control MPU analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads out (extracts) the schedule data for generating the lighting mode from the peripheral control ROM based on the analyzed various commands, and executes the lamp palette setting process. Executed, the player (or staff such as a game hall clerk) operates the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) to become the maximum brightness from the first specified brightness value. When one specified brightness value is set up to the 31st specified brightness value, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU so as to become the specified specified brightness value. It is possible.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU determines that the command from the main control board 1310 received in this peripheral control unit command interrupt process is, for example, a starting winning prize command for instructing the start of a starting winning prize effect, the number of normal symbols to be held Normal pattern storage command for identifying (0 to 4), variation pattern command for instructing the start of variable production such as variable display of decorative patterns in production display device 1600 in synchronization with variable display of special patterns, It is analyzed whether it is a pattern storage command output when the number of start pending changes, and a large winning opening 1 count display command output each time a game ball is accepted in the big winning opening 2005, and in which game state is currently being played. recognize that there is

Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Analyze various commands. Various commands include various commands classified as related to special figure 1 synchronization effect, various commands classified as related to special figure 2 synchronization effect, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power on, normal Various commands categorized as related to figure synchronization effect, various commands categorized as normal electric role effect related, various commands as categorized as notification display, various commands as categorized as status display, various commands as categorized as test related, and In addition, there are various commands classified. In addition, the peripheral control board 1510 executes lottery processing related to advance notice and the like based on the received command, and based on the result of the lottery, schedule data for screen generation, schedule data for light emission mode generation, schedule data for sound generation, and electrical Drive source schedule data and the like are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. As a result, an effect corresponding to the lottery result of the peripheral control board 1510 is executed.

The peripheral control ROM stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control section 1511, the performance display control section 1511, and the like. The various schedule data include screen generation schedule data for generating a screen to be drawn on the effect display device 1600, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, and sound for generating sound effects such as music and sound effects. There are generation schedule data and electric drive source schedule data for generating the driving mode of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data that defines the structure of the screen in time series, and defines the order of the screens to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 . The schedule data for generating the lighting mode is configured by arranging the lighting mode data defining the lighting modes of various LEDs in chronological order. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects are played. This sound command data includes an output channel number for indicating which output channel is to be used among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU, and a plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU. , and a track number for indicating in which track sound data such as music and sound effects are to be incorporated. The electric drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines operations of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

Following step S1022, the peripheral control MPU performs warning processing (step S1024). In this warning process, when the commands analyzed in the received command analysis process in step S1022 include various commands classified as notification displays, an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications is set. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, etc. are read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In addition, in the warning process, when multiple abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed in order of the priority registered in advance, and the abnormality notification is automatically changed to the remaining abnormality notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is designed to Thus, a plurality of anomalies can be monitored simultaneously without losing information that one anomaly has occurred due to the occurrence of another anomaly before the anomaly is resolved after the occurrence of one anomaly. can be done.

Following step S1024, the peripheral control MPU performs RCT acquisition information update processing (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are updated. By this RCT acquisition information updating process, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, are updated, and based on this updated time information, the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. Date is updated.

Following step S1026, the peripheral control MPU performs display data creation processing (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for screen generation is stored in the peripheral control ROM. , and outputs it to the VDP of the peripheral control MPU.

When screen data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the VDP of the peripheral control MPU reads out image data from the SDRAM based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600 for one screen ( 1 frame) drawing data is generated in the built-in VRAM.

Following step S1030, the peripheral control MPU performs sound data creation processing (step S1032). In this sound data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and among the sound command data arranged in time series constituting the schedule data for sound generation, the sound command data indicated by the pointer is It is read (extracted) from the peripheral control ROM and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. When the sound command data is input from the peripheral control MPU, the sound source of the peripheral control MPU reads the sound data from the SDRAM, incorporates the sound data such as music and sound effects according to the track number specified in the sound command data, and outputs the sound data. Set the output channel to use according to the channel number.

In the sound data creation process, each time the sound data creation process is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit steady-state process is performed), the rotational position of the volume adjustment switch is changed based on the volume adjustment operation signal from the volume adjustment switch. are identified. The peripheral control MPU controls the sound source of the peripheral control MPU so that the sound volume corresponds to the rotational position of the volume control switch. Output sound data to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects are played from various speakers in accordance with various presentations.

Specifically, the resistance value is changed by rotating the volume control switch, and the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume switch is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and the value is 0 to 0. It is converted into values in 1024 steps up to a value of 1023. In this embodiment, the values of 1024 steps are divided into 7 and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The board volume 0 is set to mute, and the board volume 6 is set to the maximum sound volume. The sound source of the peripheral control MPU is controlled so that the volume is set to the board volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects are played from various speakers. In this manner, music and sound effects are played from various speakers by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch.

The sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sound data and the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound volume, the sound data and the sound volume of the notification sound for notifying the hall clerk of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraudulent action against the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. subvolume values to be included.

Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set as the sub-volume value, and for the notification sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the volume adjustment switch is set. The maximum volume is set as the sub volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the operation. The sub-volume value of the effect sound is set for a predetermined period after the power is turned on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)) and the special symbol display. A certain period of time (in this example, the peripheral control unit 0.5 seconds after receiving the variable pattern command and starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, or 0.5 seconds after the stop display command is received by the peripheral control unit and after the fixed display of the decorative pattern. ) can be adjusted by operating the rotation operation section 302 and the pressing operation section 303 of the effect operation unit 300 .

Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, a predetermined period after power-on (specifically, the period until the peripheral control unit completes the initial setting process (step S1000) and the current time setting process (step S1002)), A certain period of time when starting or stopping the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) (in this example, peripheral Until 0.5 seconds have passed since the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern after receiving the variation pattern command in the control unit, or 0.5 seconds after the peripheral control unit has received the stop display command and after the fixed display of the decorative pattern. Seconds have elapsed), by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300, the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotation position of the volume control switch in the sound data creation process is applied to the substrate. The voltage is converted into seven levels of volume 0 to 6, and further divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the volume control switch. By adding or subtracting a predetermined value accordingly, the sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume to set the substrate volume.

The sound specification data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the channel to be output. Of the tracks, the sound data of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the effect sound incorporated in the track to be used are synthesized, and the volume of the synthesized effect sound is In practice, the sound is amplified up to a master volume value, which is the sound volume that flows from various speakers, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output as audio data.

In this embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and when the volume of the synthesized effect sound is at the maximum volume, it is amplified to the master volume value, so that the volume flowing from various speakers is the maximum allowable volume. is set to be Specifically, for the sound effect, among the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source of the peripheral control MPU, the sound data of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used and the volume of the sound effect incorporated in the track to be used is synthesized with the substrate volume adjusted by turning the volume adjustment switch set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume, and the volume of this synthesized effect sound becomes the volume actually flowing from various speakers. Amplify up to the master volume value, serialize this amplified effect sound and output it as audio data. The maximum volume, which is set as a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the notification sound and is based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch, is synthesized with the maximum volume, and the volume of the synthesized notification sound is actually adjusted. , the amplified notification sound is serialized and output as audio data.

Here, a brief description will be given of the control of playing the notification sound in order to notify the pachinko hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a problem with the pachinko machine 1 or of an illegal act with respect to the pachinko machine 1 when the effect sound is being played from various speakers. Forcibly set the sub-volume value of the track that contains the sound effect to mute, and the sound data of the track that contains this sound effect, the sub-volume value that was set to mute, and the informational sound. Synthesize the sound data of the track and the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume, and use the volume of the synthesized effect sound and the volume of the notification sound as the volume actually flowing from various speakers. is amplified to a master volume value, and the amplified effect sound and notification sound are serialized and output as audio data. In other words, the sounds that are actually emitted from the various speakers are only the notification sounds with the maximum volume. At this time, since the sound effects are muted, the sound effects are progressing according to the above-described schedule data for sound generation, although they do not flow from the various speakers.

In this embodiment, the notification sound is played from various speakers for a predetermined period of time (for example, 90 seconds). The volume of the effect sound that is being played is set again as a sub-volume value by the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the sound volume adjustment switch (at this time, the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 300 are turned. When the volume of the effect sound is adjusted by the operation, it is set to the adjusted sub-volume value of the effect sound), and is played from various speakers.

In this way, when the effect sound is played from various speakers, the volume of the effect sound is increased when the notification sound is played to notify the pachinko hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or of an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1. Although the muted informational sound is played from various speakers, the muted effect sound progresses according to the schedule data for sound generation. The sound does not start playing again from the point where it started playing, but starts playing again from the point where it progresses according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the sound started playing.

In addition, the notification sound and announcement sound are designed to flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the volume adjustment switch. The sound source can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even if an attendant such as a store clerk in a game hall rotates the volume control switch to set the volume to a low volume, the performance sounds such as music and sound effects played from various speakers become small, but the pachinko machine 1 does not. When a problem occurs or the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (maximum volume in this embodiment) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the notification sound from making it difficult for staff members such as store clerks in the game hall to notice the occurrence of a problem or the player's dishonesty.

Following step S1032, the peripheral control MPU performs backup processing (step S1034). In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are copied and backed up to a regular process backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are provided in the SDRAM. Make a backup by copying to the backup area for regular processing.

Following step S1034, the peripheral control MPU performs WDT clear processing (step S1036). In this WDT clearing process, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

Following step S1036, the peripheral control MPU sets the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 as execution completion of the steady-state processing of the peripheral control units (step S1038), returns to step S1004 again, and sets the V blank signal detection flag VB. -FLG is initialized by setting a value of 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until a value of 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. That is, in step S1006, the system waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004. In this way, when it is determined that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006, steps S1008 to S1038 are performed. The processing from step S1008 to step S1038 is called "peripheral control unit regular processing".

In this peripheral control unit steady-state processing, first, in step S1008, the value 1 is set to the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG assuming that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed. , and step S1036, and finally in step S1038, the normal processing in-progress flag SP-FLG is set to 0 to indicate completion of execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing, and the processing is completed. Become. The peripheral controller steady-state processing is executed when the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set when a V blank signal is input from VDP of the peripheral control MPU to the peripheral control MPU to indicate that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU can be accepted. A value of 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process, which will be described later. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). In other words, the peripheral controller steady-state processing is repeatedly executed approximately every 33.3 ms.

[10-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed when a V blank signal is input from the VDP of the peripheral control MPU to indicate that it is ready to receive screen data from the peripheral control MPU. do. When this peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0 (step S1045), as shown in FIG. As described above, the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when the processing is completed.

When the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1045 that the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is not 0 (is 1), ie, that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed, the routine continues. finish. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 (step S1050), and this routine ends. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. Each of them is set to a value of 0 when no part-stationary processing is executed.

In this embodiment, it is determined in step S1045 whether the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is executed. When the processing is completed, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to 1 in step S1050. When the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is set to a value of 1, it is determined in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the execution of the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is started from the beginning, in order to prevent this, step S1008 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing) in FIG. By setting the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to a value of 1, the fact that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing is being executed is notified to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, and the peripheral control of FIG. By setting the steady-state processing flag SP-FLG to 0 in step S1038 in the power-on processing (peripheral control unit steady-state processing), the peripheral control unit of this routine indicates that the peripheral control unit steady-state processing has been completed. By notifying the V blank signal interrupt processing, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in the determination in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of this routine, that is, whether the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. In other words, this is a measure to be taken when the peripheral controller steady-state processing cannot be completed until the next V-blank signal is input after the V-blank signal is input.

As a result, in the current peripheral control unit steady-state processing, if the processing cannot be completed within about 33.3 ms and the processing fails, the next time is determined in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. is in a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the current peripheral controller steady-state processing that failed is approximately 66.6 ms. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is normally executed every time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by activating a 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing (peripheral control unit regular processing) in FIG. is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady process, but if there is the current peripheral control unit steady process that failed as described above, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process is executed 64 times. is executed only 32 times. In other words, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing fails, the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, are not consistent. It is designed not to collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral controller steady-state processing fails, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the presentation.

[10-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by starting the 1 ms interrupt timer at step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing of the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. 128 will be described. . When this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33 times, as shown in FIG. 130 (step S1100). As described above, the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by this routine after the 1ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times that a certain peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In this embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency (the number of screen updates per second) of the effect display device 1600 is set to approximately 30 fps per second. .3 ms (=1000 ms/30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed at intervals of about 33.3 ms, after starting the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the next peripheral control unit steady processing is executed. is executed, the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the second, . will occur.

In step S1100, the peripheral control MPU determines that the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than 33, that is, the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has started. Sometimes this routine just ends. If the occurrence of the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the priority of the interrupt processing is given to the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. Although it is set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to this 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, , the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled in order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing. Then, after the 1ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing is newly started due to the generation of the first 1ms timer interrupt. ing.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1100 that the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, it adds 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increments it in step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated by the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. The number of times the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is executed increases by one.

Following step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid drive processing, a pointer indicates the drive data of electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids which are arranged in time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In accordance with the drive data, an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid is driven, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series. Every time this motor and solenoid drive processing is executed, the pointer is updated. do. As a result, electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids managed by the peripheral control MPU (for example, electrical drive sources provided in the door frame 3 and electrical drive sources provided in various effect units provided in the game board 5) , is driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

Following step S1104, the peripheral control MPU performs movable object information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 have been input. position history information, movable position history information, etc.) and set it in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. The peripheral control MPU sets the original positions (standby positions) of various movable bodies provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 based on history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. or by obtaining the movable position.

Following step S1106, the peripheral control MPU performs effect operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, by determining whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300 are input, history information of detection signals from various sensors (for example, rotation operation unit 302 rotation (rotation direction) history information and operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. The rotation direction of the rotary operation unit 302 and whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 is operated can be obtained from history information of detection signals from various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, by operating the effect operation unit 301, the volume of the effect sound output from various speakers can be adjusted, and a plurality of decorative boards mounted on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are provided. It is possible to adjust the brightness of various LEDs.

Following step S1108, the peripheral control MPU performs backup processing (step S1110) and ends this routine. In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are copied to a backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU for backup, and the contents stored in the SDRAM are transferred to the SDRAM. It is backed up by copying it to the provided backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing. In this embodiment, the backup area for 1ms timer interrupt processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU and the backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are set in different areas, and the SDRAM The backup area for 1 ms timer interrupt processing provided in the SDRAM and the backup area for regular processing provided in the SDRAM are set in different areas.

As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process, various processes relating to the effects of steps S1104 to S1108 are executed within a period of 1ms as the progress of the effects. On the other hand, in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing in the peripheral control unit power-on processing of FIG. there is In the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not less than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt occurs and this peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing is started, Therefore, even if the occurrence of the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next occurrence of the V-blank signal, the peripheral control unit will not be affected by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt. After forcibly canceling the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt processing and restarting the 1 ms interrupt timer again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady-state processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control is performed by newly generating the first 1 ms timer interrupt. 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. That is, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt process which is the timer interrupt control is prevented from collapsing. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the state of progress of the production.

Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the size of the liquid crystal of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is output even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In this embodiment, the V blank signal is a signal that governs the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the part V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control part 1 ms timer interrupt process due to the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in the present embodiment, even if the interval at which the V blank signal is output changes slightly, by forcibly canceling the start of the peripheral controller 1ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt, this It is possible to absorb the time lag due to slight changes in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[10-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 start to be sent as serial data, the peripheral control MPU uses this as a trigger to transmit the main peripheral serial data to the serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU as 1 byte (8 bits). The information is fetched into the receive buffer, and when this fetch is completed, an interrupt occurs with this as a trigger, and the peripheral controller command reception interrupt processing is performed. One packet of the main-circumference serial data consists of 3 bytes. The 1st byte is the status, the 2nd byte is the mode, and the 3rd byte is the status and mode. is assigned a sum value calculated from

When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 131 (step S1200). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main cycle serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

In the judgment of step S1200, the peripheral control MPU receives 1 byte (8 bits) information of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 when the 1 byte reception period timer has not timed out. If it is determined that it is within the period for receiving data, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I/O port of the peripheral control MPU is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added (incremented) to the reception counter SRXC (step S1204). ). This reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the main circumference serial data is read out from the reception buffer. When it is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, is taken out from the reception buffer, the value is 3. An initial value of 0 is set to the reception counter SRXC when the power is turned on.

Following step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, are sequentially sent from the receive buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

In step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is not 3, that is, after the status, which is the first byte of the main peripheral serial data, the mode, which is the second byte of the main peripheral serial data, and If it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, has not been taken out from the reception buffer in order, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. A 1-byte reception period timer is set in step S1208, thereby setting a period during which the mode, which is the second byte of the main cycle serial data, or the sum value, which is the third byte of the main cycle serial data, can be received.

On the other hand, in the determination in step S1206, when the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, the peripheral control MPU determines the status, which is the first byte of the main circumference serial data, followed by the mode, which is the second byte of the main circumference serial data. Then, when it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data, has been taken out from the reception buffer in order, the reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value of 0 (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1212). . This calculation is performed by considering the status, which is the first byte of the main-circumference serial data, and the mode, which is the second-byte of the main-circumference serial data, which have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, as numerical values, and summing them (sum value ) is calculated.

Following step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main circumferential serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1214). The sum value, which is the third byte of the main-circumference serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main-circumference serial data among the main-circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island facilities of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other and become electrically charged, static electricity is discharged and noise is generated. It is in a receptive environment.

Therefore, in this embodiment, on the side of the peripheral control board 1510, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main peripheral serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are regarded as numerical values. The total (sum value) is calculated using the main control board 1310, and does this calculated sum value match the sum value assigned as the 3rd byte of the main peripheral serial data among the main peripheral serial data from the main control board 1310? is determining whether or not As a result, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not the main peripheral serial data between the main control substrate 1310 and the peripheral control substrate 1510 has been affected by noise and changed to non-normal main peripheral serial data. be able to.

In the judgment of step S1214, the peripheral control MPU judges that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, matches the sum value calculated in step S1212. Then, the received status assigned as the first byte of the main peripheral serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main peripheral serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU (step S1216), Exit this routine.

On the other hand, in the judgment of step S1200, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, the peripheral control MPU receives 1-byte (8-bit) information out of the main peripheral serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the receivable period has passed, or in the determination in step S1214, the peripheral control MPU stores the sum value, which is the third byte of the main peripheral serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202, and the sum value in step S1212. If it is determined that the sum value calculated in (1) and (1) do not match, this routine ends.

[10-5. Peripheral control unit blackout warning signal interrupt processing]
Next, a description will be given of the peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt process executed when the power outage warning signal from the power outage monitoring circuit of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 as a trigger. 132, the peripheral control MPU starts a 2-microsecond timer (step S1300) and checks whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. Determine (step S1302). When the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it ends this routine.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1302 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it determines whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether or not the timer started in step S1300 has passed 2 microseconds. When it is determined in step S1304 that two macroseconds have not elapsed, the peripheral control MPU returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input, and determines that the power failure warning signal has not been input. Sometimes, this routine ends as it is, but when it is determined that a power failure warning signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether or not 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination in step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure warning signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine.

In the determination in step S1304, when the peripheral control MPU determines that the power failure warning signal continues to be input for 2 microseconds after the start of the peripheral control unit power failure warning signal interrupt processing, which is this routine, power saving processing is performed ( step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially executing the turning off of the backlight of the performance display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motors and solenoids provided on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing, stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is the time during which the peripheral control MPU can operate even if the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off.

Following step S1306, the peripheral control MPU performs command reception standby processing (step S1308). In this command reception waiting process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, a period of at least 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control MPU can receive the commands being transmitted. It is supposed to wait. When the command is received, the peripheral controller command reception interrupt process described above is started and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral controller MPU.

Following step S1308, the peripheral control MPU performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup process, the commands stored in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU are copied to a regular process backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control MPU for backup.

Following step S1310, the peripheral control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input (step S1312). When the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has been input, it performs WDT clear processing (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset.

On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, or after step S1314, the process returns to step S1312 to determine whether the power failure warning signal has been input. judge. In other words, it is endlessly determined whether or not the power failure warning signal is input. By endlessly continuing the determination in this way, when the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has not been input, it becomes unable to output a clear signal to the external WDT. While the MPU is reset, if the peripheral control MPU determines in step S1312 that the power failure warning signal has been input, the WDT clear processing is performed in step S1314, and the peripheral control MPU is not reset. When the peripheral control MPU is reset, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. 128 is started again.

In this way, if the input of the power failure warning signal continues in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the WDT clearing process is executed in step S1314 so that the peripheral control MPU is not reset immediately before the power failure occurs. It has become. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. It's becoming As a result, even if the peripheral controller power outage warning signal interrupt process, which is this routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise is generated for a period of 2 microseconds or more, and the judgment in step S1302 is passed, step If it is determined in S1312 that the input of the power failure warning signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop, the peripheral control MPU is reset because the WDT clearing process of step S1314 is not executed. Such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting.

[11. Control processing of the main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU) will be described. FIG. 133 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special symbol and special electric accessary product control process (step S114).

Now, assuming that the random numbers used for various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. On the condition that the detection signal is in the ON state (the ball has entered the first starting port 2002) (step S2031), the first special random number of the first special symbol is obtained from the random number counter and stored in the RAM. The first start opening passage processing such as storing in one special symbol reservation storage area is executed (step S2032). Also, on the condition that the detection signal by the second starting port sensor 2402 is in the ON state (there is a ball entering the second starting port 2004) (step S2033), the second special random number of the second special symbol is the random number A second starting port passing process such as acquiring from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol reservation storage area of the RAM is executed (step S2034).

Next, it is determined whether or not a big win execution flag indicating that the big win game state is being controlled is set (step S2035), and if the big win execution flag is set, the big win game state is controlled. Big hit control processing (step S2039) is executed. In addition, in the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) at the time of stopping the variable display is a mode suggesting "15R big hit A", A distribution piece 2415 that controls the opening and closing of the big winning opening 2005 according to the 15R jackpot game state A, and distributes the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 to either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008. Drive control is performed, and the process of setting the active state in the 15th round in which the game ball B can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008 is executed. In addition, when it becomes a mode suggesting "15R big win B", opening and closing of the big winning hole 2005 is controlled according to the 15R big winning game state B, and the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is transferred to the first receiving hole. 2007 or the second receiving port 2008 to drive and control the sorting piece 2415, and execute the process of setting to the valid state in the 15th round in which the game ball B can be sorted to the second receiving port 2008.

Here, the "valid state" and the "invalid state" will be explained. First, in this embodiment, as a state when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008, it has an "effective state". Here, the "valid state" means that in the 15th round in which the game ball B can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008, the game ball B is received by the second receiving port 2008, and after the jackpot game state is finished, It is a state in which control to a stochastic state is allowed (enabled). Therefore, by receiving the game ball B in the second receiving port 2008 in the "effective state", it will be controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, in this embodiment, as a state in which the game ball B is not received in the second receiving opening 2008, there is an "ineffective state" different from the "effective state". Here, the "invalid state" is a state in which the game ball B is not received in the second receiving port 2008 in principle, such as the 1st to 14th rounds in which the game ball B is distributed to the first receiving port 2007. Even if the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008, it is not permitted (invalidated) to control to the high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, even if the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 in the "invalid state", it is not controlled to the high probability state after the big hit game state is finished. In addition, the "invalid state" enables notification of information on the occurrence of such an abnormality to the hall management side when the game ball B is received at the second receiving port 2008 due to an abnormality such as fraud. Therefore, it is a period during which it is monitored whether or not the game ball B has been received by the second receiving port 2008 . In addition, in this embodiment, in a predetermined round (15th round) that allows the game balls B to be distributed to the second receiving port 2008, the "effective state" is set, and the second receiving port 2008 is set to the game ball B Whenever the ball B is accepted, the game is controlled to a high probability state after the big win game state is finished. Also, in a predetermined round (1st to 14th rounds) in which game balls B are not distributed to the second receiving port 2008, it is set to "disabled state", but may be set to "enabled state". Even if the "effective state" is set in all the rounds in the jackpot game state, in principle, the game ball B is not accepted in the second receiving port 2008 in the 1st to 14th rounds. As in the case of setting the "invalid state" in the 14th round, it is important whether or not the game ball B can be received in the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round when the "valid state" is set.

Also, in the jackpot control process (step S2041), after performing the opening control of the big winning opening 2005, each set process of a high probability flag, a time saving flag, and a time saving number counter is executed. A high-probability flag is a flag indicating a high-probability state. During the execution of the jackpot game state based on the jackpots (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B), game balls B can be distributed to the second receiving port 2008 in the 1st to 15th rounds in which the jackpot 2005 is opened. When the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, the high probability flag is set by controlling to the high probability state (high probability time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game state. Although it is set, when the game ball B is not received in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, it is controlled to a high probability state (high probability time saving state) after the end of the jackpot game state. Since it does not, the high probability flag is not set. Then, when the high probability flag is set, when the next big hit, or when the counter value of the time saving number counter becomes "0", the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. 144 described later or A high probability flag is reset by the second special symbol stop processing (not shown).

In addition, the time saving flag is a flag indicating that it is a time saving state, and the jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B) that is controlled to the time saving state (high probability time saving state, low probability time saving state) after the end of the big hit game state It is set when ending the big hit game state based on. Then, the time saving flag is the first special symbol stop processing shown in FIG. Reset by processing.

In addition, the time-saving number counter is a counter that indicates the remaining number of variable display of special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) as the number of times the time-saving state continues, and after the end of the jackpot game state, the time-saving state (high probability When the jackpot game state based on the jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B) controlled in the time saving state, low probability time saving state) is ended, the number of times the time saving state continues is set, and the time saving number counter is set. , the counter value is counted down every time the variable display of the special symbols is executed until the counter value reaches "0". is reset by the first special symbol stop processing or the second special symbol stop processing (not shown) (returns the counter value to "0").

Also, if the jackpot execution flag is not set, on the condition that the value of the second special reservation number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is "0" (Step S2036), executes the first special symbol process processing including the lottery processing related to the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped (step S2037), the second stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of special random numbers is not "0" (step S2036), the second special design including the lottery process related to the display mode when the fluctuation display of the second special design is stopped Process processing is executed (step S2038). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reservation number counter is not "0", the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

FIG. 134 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first starting opening passing process (step S2032).

Now, in the process of step S2031, if it is determined that the first starting hole sensor 2101 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the first starting hole 2002, the process shown in FIG. Thus, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number from the random number counter as the process of step S2041.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the first special reservation number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area from the main control built-in RAM, and this Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is the maximum value (upper limit) of "4" (step S2042). In the processing of this step S2042, when it is determined that the first pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S2043- The processing of S2045 is to be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S2043, the first special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Then, as the process of step S2044, each random number obtained in step S2041, the first special design reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM store in

In addition, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number acquired in step S2041, the display result of the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. is a big hit, the type of the big hit if it is a big hit, and if it is not a big hit, whether the ready-to-win effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the mode type of the game effect to be executed ( Variation pattern type) and other advance determination information are executed before the start of the variable display corresponding to the start winning (step S2045), and then the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of step S2042, when it is determined that the number of the first reserved memory is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the process of steps S2043 to S2045, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the number of the first reserved memory changes based on the game ball B entering the first start port 2002, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the first special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is first reserved. Along with updating to correspond to the number of memories, in the above-mentioned memory processing (step S20), set a command (first reservation number specification commands 0 to 4) for instructing the first reserved number of memories and send it to the peripheral control board 1510 It is designed to In addition, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0-4.

FIG. 135 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S2045). When the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 starts the effect pre-determination process, the random number obtained in the pre-determination table (not shown) and the above step S2041, specifically the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation By comparing with the random number, it is determined whether or not a big win will occur, if a big win will occur, the type of the big win will occur, and if a big win will not occur, a ready-to-win performance will be executed as a game performance executed by a performance display device 1600.例文帳に追加The mode type of game production is specified (step S2061).

Then, the specified advance determination information (whether or not it will be a big hit, if it will be a big hit, the type of the big hit, if it will not be a big hit, whether to execute a ready-to-win production as a game production executed by the production display device 1600 Aspect type of game production to be played), type of special random number obtained (first special random number), and reserved memory number (value of reserved number counter) stored corresponding to the obtained special random number Set the pre-determination command. For example, in the effect pre-determining process for the first special symbol executed in step S2045 of the first starting opening passing process, the specified pre-determining information, the acquisition of the first special random number, and the first pending memory number (the One special reservation number counter value) and set the first special symbol pre-determination command according to (step S2062).

Then, by transmitting a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 in the special symbol command control process (step S16), it is stored corresponding to the first start opening 2002 where the start winning has occurred. In addition to the number of pending memories, whether or not the display result of the variable display of the special symbols based on the generated starting winning is a big win, the kind of big win in the case of a big win, and executed by the performance display device 1600 in the case of no big win. The peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 executes the ready-to-win effect as the game effect to be executed, or pre-determination information such as the mode type of the game effect to be executed, before starting the variable display according to the start winning. becomes comprehensible.

When the peripheral control MPU mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives a pre-determination command from the main control board 1310, it stores the pre-determination information indicated by the received pre-determination command. Specifically, the RAM of the peripheral control MPU is provided with a first reservation storage area for storing pre-determination information regarding the variable display of the first special symbol.

The first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control MPU stores the advance judgment information indicated by the received advance judgment command in the first (first) storage area. Store in order from the area. Then, when the advance judgment command is received when the advance judgment information is stored in the nth (n=1 to 3) storage area, the advance judgment information notified to the (n+1)th storage area (n=1 to 3). is stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area according to the first variation pattern command received when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of the variation display of the first special symbol is received. Discard the determination information and move the advance determination information stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area to the N-1th (N=2 to 4) storage area (to the reserved storage area). shift the stored pre-determined information). As a result, the pre-determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest pre-determination information.

When the variable display control is placed in a suspended state in this way, even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (suspended state), the degree of expectation for the big hit (pseudo winning probability) of the variable display control ) can be notified at a predetermined timing such as, for example, when the pending display is newly output or when the pending display is shifted according to the completion of the pending display. .

FIG. 136 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second start opening passing process (step S2034).

Now, in the process of step S2033, if it is determined that the second starting hole sensor 2402 is in the ON state and the game ball B has entered the second starting hole 2004, the process shown in FIG. Thus, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the fluctuation random number from the random number counter as the process of step S2051.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the second special reservation number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and based on this counter value, the second reservation storage number is set to its maximum value (upper limit value ) is "4" (step S2052). In the processing of this step S2052, when it is determined that the second pending memory number is not the maximum value, the following step S2053 ~ The process of S2054 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S2053, the second special reservation number counter is counted up (1 is added). Then, as the process of step S2054, each random number obtained in step S2051, the second special design reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter of the storage area of the main control built-in RAM store in

On the other hand, in the processing of step S2052, when it is determined that the second reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the processing without executing the processing of steps S2053 to S2054, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly suspended.

In addition, when the number of second reserved storage changes based on the game ball B entering the second start port 2004, the lighting state of the two LEDs of the second special reserved number indicator in the function display unit 1400 is changed to the second reserved state. Along with updating to correspond to the number of memories, set a command (second reservation number specification command 0 to 1) for instructing the second reserved number of memories in the above-mentioned memory processing (step S20) and send it to the peripheral control board 1510 It is designed to In addition, the peripheral control MPU of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0-4.

FIG. 137 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S2037). In addition, the first special symbol process process executed in step S2037 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process and the second special symbol process process executed in step S2038 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process are the same. is a program module, and only the random numbers and tables used for determination are different, so here only the first special symbol process processing executed in step S2037 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control processing will be described. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag described above.

1. Read the first special random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU, based on the read first special random number, lottery processing and the like for the display mode at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol is performed first special Design normal processing (step S2080)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081 )
3. Variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the variable random number, and variation mode of the effect display executed corresponding to the special symbol on the effect display device 1600. First variation pattern setting process (step S2082) in which lottery process etc. are performed for
4. First special symbol variation processing (step S2083) to wait until the variation display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
5. Regarding the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped, the mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped determined based on the result of the lottery process is displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400. First special symbol stop processing (step S2084) to stop the variable display of the first special symbol so that

In addition, the first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal process (step S2080) should be performed in the process of step S40 (see FIG. 118).

FIG. 138 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the first special symbol normal process (step S2080).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of 2, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state based on the counter value of the first special pending number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the pending state, then as the process of step S2102, it is stored in the first special symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. The random number stored in the first storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol is read from the same RAM. . And next, as the processing of steps S2103 and S2104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down, and the first stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of special symbols is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the first special symbol reservation storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and stores the random numbers extracted according to the occurrence of the start winning in order from the first (first) area. Then, when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area and a start winning occurs, the extracted random number is stored in the n+1-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, and the first When the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and stored in the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N-1)th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs is memorized so that it can be specified, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). become.

After that, as the process of step S2105, a big hit determination process, which is a lottery process for winning or losing the big hit, is performed based on the first special random number of the read first special symbol. After that, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated (step S2106) so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081), this process is terminated.

FIG. 139 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process (step S2105).

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, if the current gaming state is a high probability state (high probability time-saving state, high probability non-time-saving state) (step S2111), at the time of high probability shown in FIG. 140 (A) Select the jackpot determination table (step S2112), if the current game state is a low probability state (step S2111), select the jackpot determination table at the time of low probability shown in FIG. 140 (A) (step S2113), select The big hit determination table and the first special random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process are compared (step S2114).

The big hit determination table shown in FIG. 140 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and when the gaming state is low probability (normal state (low probability non-time saving state) and time saving state (low probability time saving state)) and a jackpot determination table for high probability used when the game state is high probability (high probability time saving state). Then, in the big hit determination table at the time of low probability, 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, 1/299 when the setting value is 3, and 1/299 when the setting value is 4 1/289 when the set value is 5, 1/279 when the set value is 6, and 1/269 when the set value is 6. The above-mentioned first special random numbers are associated with each other such that the first special random numbers other than the first special random numbers match with the loss determination value indicating the above-mentioned loss. In addition, in the second special symbol process process executed in step S2038 of the special symbol and special electric auditors control process, in the low probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the first Like the jackpot determination table at low probability that is referred to for comparison with the special random number, 1/319 when the setting value is 1, 1/309 when the setting value is 2, and when the setting value is 3 1/299, 1/289 when the set value is 4, 1/279 when the set value is 5, and 1/269 when the set value is 6. The second special random number wins the jackpot. The second special random numbers are associated with each other so as to match the big hit determination value indicating that the other second special random numbers match the loss determination value indicating the loss.

Also, in the big hit determination table at the time of high probability, 1/31.9 when the set value is 1, 1/30.9 when the set value is 2, 1/29.9 when the set value is 3, 1/28.9 when the set value is 4, 1/27.9 when the set value is 5, and 1/26.9 when the set value is 6. The first special random number (low probability The first special random number that is the same as the first special random number set in the jackpot determination table.) matches the jackpot determination value, and the other first special random numbers match the loss determination value. A special random number is associated with each. Thus, in this embodiment, in the high-probability state (high-probability time-saving state), for each set value, the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot was won is low probability (normal state (low-probability non-time-saving state) and time-saving state (low-probability time-saving state)) is increased 10 times. In addition, in the second special symbol process processing executed in step S2038 of the special symbol and special electric auditors product control process, in the high probability jackpot determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number, the first Similar to the high-probability jackpot determination table referenced for comparison with the special random numbers, 1/31.9 when the set value is 1, 1/30.9 when the set value is 2, and the set value 3 1/29.9 when the set value is 4, 1/28.9 when the set value is 4, 1/27.9 when the set value is 5, and 1/26.9 when the set value is 6. With a probability, the second special random number (including the second special random number that is the same as the second special random number set in the jackpot judgment table at low probability) matches the jackpot judgment value, and the other second special random numbers are out. Each of the second special random numbers is associated so as to match the judgment value.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as a result of the comparison between the selected jackpot determination table and the first special random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal processing, when it is determined to be a jackpot (step S2115 ), the big hit flag indicating that the variation has been elected to the big hit is set and the process ends (step S2116), the selected big hit determination table and the first special symbol read out in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process As a result of the comparison with the random number, when it is determined that the hit is lost, the reach determination table (not shown) is compared with the reach random number read in step S2102 (step S2117). Then, as a result of comparing the reach determination table and the reach random number read in step S2102, if it is determined that the reach is out of reach (step S2118), the reach flag indicating that the change is the reach is set and the process is performed. End (step S2119).

FIG. 141 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S2081).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 141, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first, The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the big hit determination process (step S2105) is determined. The result of the lottery process is determined by determining whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S2121).

If the big hit flag is set in step S2121, the main control MPU compares the first symbol random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process with the symbol determination table shown in FIG. (Step S2122), the type of big hit is determined, and the mode (stop design of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the variation control of the first special symbol corresponding to the determined kind of big hit is determined (step S2123). On the other hand, if the big hit flag is not set in step S2121, it is determined to be a missing symbol as a mode of stopping the variation of the first special symbol (step S2124).

As shown in FIG. 140(B), the symbol determination table stores symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) associated with each determination result (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). ing. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the obtained symbol random number. In the symbol determination table of this example, the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the first symbol random number and the determination probability of the type of jackpot determined based on the second symbol random number are set to be different. ing.

in particular,
1.15R Opens and closes the big winning hole 2005 in accordance with the big win game state A. In the 15th round, the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a short time (opened so that the game ball B is difficult to enter. 5 seconds) and for a long time (opening that allows the game ball B to enter (easy). For example, 20 seconds), the effective state state to be controlled to a high probability state after the end), and when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, special after the end of the jackpot game state The variable display of the symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is controlled to a high probability time saving state until 100 times, while the game ball B is placed in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round. If not accepted, the 15R jackpot A is controlled to a low-probability time-saving state until the variable display of special patterns (first special pattern and second special pattern) is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot game state.
2.15R Opening and closing control of the big winning hole 2005 according to the big winning game state B, and the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a short time in the 15th round (opened so that the game ball B is difficult to enter. 5 seconds), it is set to an effective state (a state in which the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 and the state is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state), and the effective state is set in the 15th round. When the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the state, after the end of the jackpot game state, the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol and second special symbol) is performed 100 times. While controlling to the probability time saving state, if the game ball B is not accepted in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round, special symbols (first special symbol and second One of the two types of jackpots, 15R jackpot B controlled to a low-probability time-saving state until the variable display of two special symbols) is executed 100 times, is determined.

In the 15R jackpot gaming state A of the present example, as the operation schedule of the big winning opening 2005 in the 15th round, the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), and the intra-round interval time is a predetermined time (4.5 seconds). Seconds) are set to open the big winning opening 2005 for a long time (20 seconds). In addition, as the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 in the 15th round, when the short opening (0.5 seconds) of the big winning opening 2005 is started, the short time operation (0.2 seconds) of the sorting piece 2415 is started. However, when starting the long-time opening (20 seconds) of the big winning opening 2005, the long-time operation (10 seconds) of the sorting pieces 2415 is started, and during the operation period of the sorting pieces 2415, the second receiving port 2008 It is set so that the game ball B can be accepted at . In addition, as the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round, the effective state (the state in which the game ball B is received by the second receiving port 2008 is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state ).

On the other hand, in the 15R jackpot game state B of this example, the operation schedule of the big winning opening 2005 in the 15th round is set so that the big winning opening 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds). In addition, as an operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 in the 15th round, when the short opening (0.5 seconds) of the big winning opening 2005 is started, the short time operation (0.2 seconds) of the sorting piece 2415 is started. However, it is set so that the game ball B can be received in the second receiving port 2008 during the operation period of the sorting piece 2415 . In addition, as the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round, the effective state (the state in which the game ball B is received by the second receiving port 2008 is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state ).

As described above, both the 15R jackpot game state A and the 15R jackpot game state B are valid in the 15th round (when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008, the high probability state is reached after the jackpot game state ends). However, in the 15R jackpot game state A, the large winning opening 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds) when it is opened for the second time in the 15th round. It is extremely easy for the game ball B to be received, and furthermore, the sorting piece 2415 is operated for a long time (10 seconds) during the period in which the big winning hole 2005 is open for a long time (20 seconds). It is extremely easy for the received game balls B to be distributed (accepted) to the second receiving port 2008 . Thus, in the 15R jackpot game state A, since the probability that the game ball B is accepted in the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round set in the valid state is extremely high, control is performed to a high probability state after the jackpot game state ends. The odds of doing so are extremely high. On the other hand, in the 15R jackpot gaming state B, since the big winning hole 2005 is only opened for a short period of time (0.5 seconds) in the 15th round, it is extremely difficult for the game ball B to be accepted into the big winning hole 2005. Since the sorting piece 2415 is operated only for a short time (0.2 seconds) during the period in which the big winning hole 2005 is opened for a short time (0.5 seconds), the game ball B received in the big winning hole 2005 is second. It is extremely difficult to be distributed (accepted) to the receiving port 2008 . Thus, in the 15R jackpot game state B, since the probability that the game ball B is accepted in the second receiving port 2008 in the 15th round set in the valid state is extremely low, control is performed to a high probability state after the jackpot game state ends. The odds of doing so are extremely low.

The operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 is such that the sorting piece 2415 is operated for a short time (0.2 seconds), and after a predetermined time (4.8 seconds) has passed, the sorting piece 2415 is released for a long time (10 seconds). seconds), and when starting the 15th round in the 15R jackpot game state A and the 15R jackpot game state B, such an operation of the sorting piece 2415 I'm trying to start scheduling. Thus, by setting the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 to a single operation schedule, the amount of data regarding the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 is kept from increasing as much as possible.

In the 15R jackpot game state A and the 15R jackpot game state B of this example, the big win gate 2005 is opened for a long time (20 seconds) as the operation schedule of the big win gate 2005 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds. is set to Also, as the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds, the sorting piece 2415 is not operated, and the game ball B is placed in the first receiving port 2007 instead of the second receiving port 2008 during that period. is set to accept In addition, as the state setting schedule of the second receiving port 2008 in each of the 1st to 14th rounds, the invalid state (in principle, the game ball B is not accepted in the second receiving port 2008, and after the jackpot game state is set to a state that will not be controlled to a high probability state). Thus, in both the 15R jackpot game state A and the 15R jackpot game state B, in the 1st to 14th rounds, the game balls B are distributed to the second receiving port 2008 when the big winning port 2005 is opened as in the 15th round. A game is simply played to see if the game ball B can be accepted when the big winning opening 2005 is opened, without playing a game as to whether it is (accepted) or not.

In this example, a symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol and a symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol are provided. And, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, the allocation of the judgment value is set differently compared to the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, so that the decision ratio of each jackpot is different. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 140(B), in the symbol determination table corresponding to the first special symbol, among the 15R big win A and the 15R big win B, the 15R big win A (15 rounds) is relatively advantageous to the player. 50 determination values are distributed for a jackpot with a high probability that the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state of the eyes and a high probability of controlling to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. is set, 15R jackpot B (the probability that the game ball B is accepted in the second receiving port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round is low, and the jackpot game state ends 50 judgment values are set for a jackpot with a low probability of being controlled to a high probability state later. On the other hand, in the symbol determination table corresponding to the second special symbol, among the 15R big win A and the 15R big win B, 65 determination values are set for the 15R big win A, which is relatively advantageous to the player. On the other hand, 35 determination values are set for the 15R jackpot B, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. In this way, at the time of the first special symbol side big win, either the 15R big win A or the 15R big win B with different degrees of advantage for the player is determined, so what kind of big win is determined at the time of the first big win. can draw attention to. In addition, in the time saving state controlled after the end of the big hit game state, the game on the second special symbol side (the game that allows the game ball B to enter the second start port 2004) is performed, but the second special At the time of the big hit on the pattern side, the 15R big hit game A is determined with a higher probability than at the time of the first special pattern side, so that attention can be paid to how much prize balls can be obtained at the time of consecutive games. can. Therefore, the game does not become monotonous because the game characteristics change between the time of the first big win and the time of consecutive games.

Further, when the type of the big win is determined, the stop symbol corresponding to the type of the big win is determined as the aspect of the first special symbol when the first special symbol is stopped. Specifically, when the 15R big win A is decided, the 15R big win A pattern is decided as the big win pattern, and when the 15R big win B is decided, the 15R big win B pattern is decided as the big win pattern. In addition, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process (not shown), when the 15R big hit A is determined, the 15R big hit A symbol is determined as the big hit symbol.

Then, after the determination process for the stop pattern is performed in this way, as the process of step S2125, these lottery results (type of jackpot, reach loss, or loss are indicated (the mode of the stop pattern of the first special symbol A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that )) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . And after that, as the process of step S2126, this process ends when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S2082). The peripheral control MPU starts variable display of the left, middle, and right decorative patterns based on the received determination result notification command and variable pattern command, and stops and displays in the order of left decorative pattern → right decorative pattern → middle decorative pattern. The display of the effect display device 1600 is controlled as follows.

Specifically, the peripheral control MPU selects 15 R out of the jackpots related to the first special symbol from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) when the variation of the decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped. When the jackpot A is specified, the 15R jackpot A pattern (combination of the same decorative patterns) is determined, and when the 15R jackpot B is specified, the 15R jackpot B pattern (common with the 15R jackpot A pattern) is decided and fluctuated. When the fluctuation time specified from the pattern command has passed (at the end of the ready-to-win effect), the determined stop pattern is displayed on the effect display device 1600. FIG. In this way, when the decorative symbols displayed on the effect display device 1600 are changed and stopped in either the 15R big win A symbols or the 15R big win B symbols, it is possible to determine from the stopped symbols of the decorative symbols that it is a big win. However, since common symbols are used for the 15R big win A symbol and the 15R big win B symbol, it is impossible to distinguish between the 15R big win A and the 15R big win B.

In addition, the peripheral control MPU, as a mode (stop pattern) when the variation of the decorative pattern displayed on the effect display device 1600 is stopped, determines that the out-of-reach pattern is accompanied by the out-of-reach when the out-of-reach is specified from the received determination result notification command. (Combination of decorative patterns that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative patterns are the same.) If the deviation is specified, the lost pattern that does not involve reach (combination of decorative patterns that are not the same. However, the left and right decorative patterns are the same.) are not the same), and display control is performed on the effect display device 1600 for the determined stop symbol when the variation time specified from the variation pattern command elapses (at the end of the game effect).

FIG. 142 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S2082).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 142, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 sets the big hit flag. If it is (step S2141), the type of big hit determined in step S2123 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, and the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the big hit according to the current game state are selected (step S2142), if the reach flag is set (step S2143), select the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach corresponding to the current gaming state (step S2144), both the jackpot flag and the reach flag If it is not set, that is, if it becomes a normal loss (a loss that does not execute the ready-to-win effect), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of loss is selected (step S2145).

Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S2146), and the determined variation pattern is started. A variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set to start the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 (step S2147). In addition, the main control MPU sets the variation time set corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the variation timer (step S2148). As a result, the effect control is performed by the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600 only for the fluctuation time thus determined.

In addition, the variation pattern table of this example is provided with a plurality of types for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). In addition, the variation pattern set in each variation pattern table includes a plurality of variation time information indicating a predetermined time (variation time) required for variation display control of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). It is stored in such a way that it is associated with each variable random number. Thus, the main control MPU, among the plurality of types of variation pattern table according to the determination result based on the special random number and symbol random number, the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read in step S2102 of the first special symbol normal process is compared, and the variation time information associated with the read-out variation random number is obtained from this table to determine the variation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The fluctuation pattern table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU.

In addition, in the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach in this example, it is set so as to determine the mode type of reach effect to be executed by comparing the judgment value indicating which reach effect is to be executed and the fluctuation random number. . For example, in the super ready-to-win performance among the ready-to-win performances, the degree of expectation for the big win is higher than that in the normal ready-to-win performance, and when the super ready-to-win performance is executed, the player's expectation for the big winning game state is increased.

Also, when the variation display control of the first special symbol is started, next, as the process of step S2149, the above-mentioned first special symbol process flag is set so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S2083). This process ends when the update is completed.

In this example, in the variation pattern table at the time of loss, the special symbol variation time information set to about 1 second during time saving is associated with the special symbol random number (first special symbol, second special symbol), while non A variation pattern of special symbols is set in such a way that variation time information of special symbols set to about 12 seconds is associated with the special symbol random numbers (first special symbol, second special symbol) when the time is shortened. That is, the variation pattern at the time of loss selected during time saving, compared to the variation pattern at the time of loss selected during non-time saving, so that the time required for the variation display control of the special symbol is extremely short, the special Pattern variation time information is set.

FIG. 143 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S2083).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As a process of (1), 1 is subtracted from the variable timer in which the variable time corresponding to the variable pattern determined in the lottery process (step S2082) for the variable pattern is set. When it is determined that the variable time timer is 0, that is, the selected variable time has elapsed (step S2172), the process proceeds to step S2173. That is, in the process of this step S2173, when the above-described first special symbol process flag is updated so as to shift to the first special symbol stop process (step S2084), this process is terminated.

FIG. 144 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop process (step S2084).

When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. As the process of , display control is performed to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process on the first special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400, and the effect display device 1600 A stop display command for instructing derivation display of the display result of the decorative design corresponding to the stop design of the first special design is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S2182).

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the time saving flag is set and the counter value of the time saving number counter for which the number of times the time saving state continues is set is "0". (Step S2183). Then, if this counter value is not "0", after counting down the time saving number counter (step S2184), it is further determined whether or not the counter value of the simultaneous short number counter is "0" (step S2185). . As a result, if the counter value is "0", the time saving flag is reset, and if the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset (step S2186). In addition, when it is determined that the counter value of the time saving number counter is "0" in the process of step S2183, or when it is determined that the time saving number counter is not "0" in the process of step S2185 , at which point the process proceeds to step S2187.

Also, when the big hit flag is set (step S2187), set a big hit start command indicating to start the big hit game state (step S2189), start the big hit game state (set the big hit round start command). A waiting time (a period for displaying the start of the jackpot game state, etc.) is set in the interval timer (step S2190). And next, when the high probability flag is set, the high probability flag is reset, when the time saving flag is set, the time saving flag is reset, and further the counter value of the time saving number counter is When it is not "0", after resetting the counter value (returning to "0"), a jackpot execution flag indicating that the jackpot game state is being executed is set (step S2191), and the first special symbol process When the flag is updated so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal process which is the initial value (step S2192), this process is terminated.

The jackpot start command is a command sent to the peripheral control board 1510, and is individually prepared according to the type of jackpot (15R jackpot A, 15R jackpot B). In step S2189, a jackpot start command (15R jackpot A start command, 15R jackpot B start command) corresponding to the type of jackpot is set. As a result, an effect corresponding to the kind of the big win instructed by the big win start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like.

FIG. 145 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big hit control process (step S2039).

In the above step S2189, the waiting time until the jackpot gaming state is started is set in the interval timer, but in the process of step S2401, after the waiting time set in the interval timer has passed, the process goes to 145 in the same figure. As shown, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 controls the opening and closing of the big winning opening 2005, and in the 15th round the effective state (the big winning game state by receiving the game ball B in the second receiving opening 2008). After the end of the large winning opening opening and closing process (step S2402), and the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 in the 15th round to the second receiving opening 2008 Driving control of the distribution piece 2415 so as to enable distribution, and opening and closing of the second receiving port for monitoring whether or not the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round. process (step S2403) and are executed in order.

FIG. 146 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the big winning opening opening/closing process (step S2402).

Now, in the process of step S2411, if it is determined that the big winning hole 2005 is open, as shown in FIG. according to the operation schedule, when a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds when open for a long time, 0.5 seconds when open for a short time) has passed since the opening state of the big winning opening 2005 (step S2412), or When the maximum winning number (for example, 9) of game balls B is won in the open state big winning hole 2005 (step S2413), the open state big winning hole 2005 is controlled to be closed (step S2414). Then, when it is determined that the current round is to end by controlling the big winning port 2005 to be closed (step S2415), the type of jackpot and the number of current rounds are sent as commands to the peripheral control board 1510. A jackpot round end command corresponding to is set (step S2416), and the process proceeds to step S2428.

Also, in the process of step S2411, if it is determined that the big winning hole 2005 is in a closed state, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 closes the big winning hole 2005 as shown in FIG. When it is time to open the big winning hole 2005 according to the operation schedule (step S2417), when it is determined to start a new round by controlling the big winning hole 2005 to open. (step S2418), sets a jackpot round start command corresponding to the type of jackpot and the number of new rounds as a command to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S2419). Then, according to the state setting schedule of the second reception port 2008, when it is determined that it is time to set the valid state flag, that is, the 15th round of the 1st to 15th rounds to open the big winning port 2005 If it is time to start (step S2420), the valid state flag is set (step S2421). If the valid state flag is set at the start of the fifteenth round in step S2420, the valid state flag must be reset at the end of the fifteenth round. Then, the large winning opening 2005 in the closed state or the large winning opening 2005 is controlled to open (step S2422), and the process proceeds to step S2428. If it is determined that a new round will not be started by controlling the large winning opening 2005 to be open (second opening in the same round, etc.) (step S2418), or the valid state flag (not at the start of the fifteenth round) (step S2420), the closed state big winning port 2005 is controlled to be opened (step S2422), step S2428 transition to Thus, an effect corresponding to the type of big win and the current number of rounds indicated by the big win round start command and the big win round end command can be executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, and the like.

It should be noted that the valid state flag indicates that it is set to a valid state (a state in which the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 and the state is controlled to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state). flag to indicate In the 15th round out of the 1st to 15th rounds for opening the big winning opening 2005, the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 in the second receiving opening opening/closing process (step S2403) described later is transferred to the first receiving opening 2007. Alternatively, by driving and controlling the distribution piece 2415 distributed to one of the second receiving ports 2008, the second receiving port 2008 can receive the game ball B and is set to the valid state.

Also, in the process of step S2428, if it is determined that the game ball B has been received in the big winning hole 2005, as shown in FIG. A large prize winning slot entry command is set as a command to be sent to 1510 (step S2429), and this process ends. As a result, when the command for entering the game ball B into the big winning hole 2005 is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the effect display device 1600, the lamp/LED, the speaker, etc. can be executed by

Also, in the processing of step S2417, if it is determined that it is not the timing to open the large winning port 2005, as shown in FIG. When all the round numbers are completed by repeating the open state and the closed state of the prize winning opening 2005 (step S2423), the jackpot execution flag is reset (step S2424). Then, when it is determined that the second acceptance port passing flag described later is set (step S2425), the high probability flag is set (step S2426), the time saving flag is set and the counter value of the time saving number counter When the initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuations of the time saving state (step S2427), this process ends. In addition, when it is determined that the second acceptance port passage flag is not set (step S2425), the high probability flag is not set, and the time saving flag is set to the counter value of the time saving number counter. When the initial value (for example, 100 times) is set as the number of continuations of (step S2427), this process ends. Thus, when it is determined that the second receiving port passing flag is set (the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round), a high probability flag And the time saving flag is set and controlled to a high probability time saving state, but the second acceptance port passage flag is not set (the game ball B is not accepted at the second acceptance port 2008 during the effective state in the 15th round If it is determined that, only the time-saving flag is set, and control is performed to a low-probability time-saving state.

FIG. 147 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the second reception port opening/closing process (step S2403).

Now, in the process of step S2431, if it is determined that the second receiving port 2008 is in an open state (a state in which the game ball B is distributed to the second receiving port 2008 side by the distribution piece 2415), then the same FIG. , the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 follows the operation schedule of the sorting piece 2415 from the open state of the second receiving port 2008 for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds when open for a long time). , 0.2 seconds when it is open for a short time) has passed (step S2432), or when the current round (15th round) is ended by controlling the big winning hole 2005 to the closed state (step S2433), the second receiving port 2008 in the open state is controlled to a closed state (a state in which the game ball B is distributed to the first receiving port 2007 side by the distributing piece 2415) (step S2434).

Also, in the process of step S2431, if it is determined that the second receiving port 2008 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. According to the operation schedule of 2415, when it is time to open the second receiving port 2008 (step S2435), the closed second receiving port 2008 is controlled to open (step S2436).

Next, in the processing of step S2437, if it is determined that the game ball B has been received in the second receiving port 2008 in the open state, as shown in FIG. determines whether or not the game ball B has been received in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the fifteenth round while the valid state flag is being set (step S2438). Then, when it is determined that the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round (step S2438), the second receiving during the valid state in the 15th round When the second receiving port passing flag indicating that the game ball B has been received at the entrance 2008 is not set (step S2439), the second receiving port passing flag is set (step S2440), and the peripheral control board 1510 When the command to pass through the second receiving port is set as the command to be transmitted (step S2441), this process ends. Thus, as long as the game ball B is not received in the second receiving port 2008 during the valid state in the 15th round, the second receiving port passage flag is not set, and the high probability flag is set in step S2426. is not set, there is no control to a high probability state after the end of the jackpot game state. In addition, when the second receiving port passing command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 side, the effect display device 1600, lamps, LEDs, speakers, etc., which produces an effect corresponding to the reception of the game ball B into the second receiving port 2008 can be executed by

FIG. 148 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116).

Now, in the processing of step S2801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is in the ON state and the game ball B has passed through the gate portion 2003, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU of the main control board 1310, as the processing of step S2802, first, acquires the normal random number of the normal symbol from the random number counter and stores it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. Execute.

Then, in the normal symbol and normal electric auditors product control process, one of the following five processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. A normal design normal process (step S2803) in which the normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU is read out, and a lottery process for the display mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal design is performed based on the read normal random number (step S2803).
2. Ordinary design fluctuation time determination processing (step S2804) in which lottery processing and the like are performed for the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the ordinary design displayed on the ordinary design display device of the function display unit 1400 based on the normal design fluctuation random number.
3. Normal symbol variation processing (step S2805) to wait until the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is stopped.
4. The normal symbol display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped is displayed on the normal symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped, which is determined based on the result of the lottery process. Normal design stop processing (step S2806) to stop the fluctuation display of the design
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode at the time of stopping the fluctuation control of the normal pattern becomes a mode suggesting "normal pattern winning", the second start port door 2411 rotates and the game to the second start port 2004 Ordinary electric accessary product opening process (step S2807) for executing the process of controlling the acceptance of the ball B

Incidentally, the normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S2803) should be performed in the process of step S40 (see FIG. 118).

FIG. 149 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gate passage processing (step S2802).

Now, in the processing of step S2801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is on and the game ball B has passed through the gate section 2003, as shown in FIG. 149, The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 first acquires the normal random number and the normal pattern fluctuation random number from the random number counter as the process of step S2811.

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value of the normal reserved number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU. (step S2812). In the processing of this step S2812, when it is determined that the number of pending symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S2813 to S2814 in order to newly suspend the variable display control of the normal symbols. processing will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S2813, the normal pending number counter is counted up (1 is added). Next, as the process of step S2814, each random number obtained in step S2811 is stored in the normal symbol reservation storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal reservation number counter in the storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU. .

However, in the process of step S2812, when it is determined that the number of suspensions of the normal symbols is the maximum value, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not suspended anew. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S2813 to S2814, the variable display control of the normal symbols is not newly suspended.

FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing the procedure for the normal symbol normal process (step S2803).

When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. Based on the counter value of the normal reserved number counter, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the reserved state. As a result, when it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbols in the pending state, the normal symbols stored in the normal symbol pending storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU are then processed in step S2822. The random number stored in the first storage area among the random numbers related to the display mode of the pattern (for example, normal random number, normal pattern fluctuation random number) is read out from the same RAM. Then, as the processing of steps S2823 and S2824, the normal reservation number counter is counted down, and when the fluctuation display of the normal symbols stored in each storage area of the normal reservation storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU is stopped Random numbers related to the display mode (normal random numbers, normal fluctuation random numbers) are shifted in the first-in first-out mode.

Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random number extracted according to the passage of the game ball B to the gate section 2003 is stored from the first (foremost) area. Store in order. When the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 when the random number is stored in the n-th (n=1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random number is stored in the (n+1)-th (n=1 to 3) storage area. is stored, and when the conditions for starting the variable display based on the random numbers stored in the first storage area are satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N=2 to 4) storage is performed. Various random numbers stored in the area are moved to the N-1th (N=2 to 4)th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the normal symbols occurred is memorized so as to be identifiable, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the earliest suspension). .

Next, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310, if the current game state is a time saving state (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state) (step S2826), the normal figure per determination table (not shown) ) is selected (step S2826), and if the current gaming state is a non-time-saving state (low probability non-time-saving state) (step S2825), select a normal figure per determination table (not shown) during non-time-saving (step S2827), the selected normal pattern per determination table and the normal random number read in step S2822 of the normal pattern normal process are compared (step S2828).

In addition, the normal pattern hit determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU, and is used when the game state is time saving (low probability time saving state, high probability time saving state). It is provided with a normal pattern hit determination table for non-shortening working hours used when the game state is non-shortening working hours (low probability non-shortening working hours state). Then, in the time-saving normal pattern hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 251 types of normal random numbers match the normal pattern per decision value, which indicates that the normal pattern has been won. The normal random numbers are associated with each other so as not to coincide with the normal pattern deviation judgment value indicating that it is lost. Thus, in the time saving, when there is a passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003, it is always elected per normal figure, the second start opening door 2411 rotates to the second start opening 2004 is controlled to allow acceptance of the game ball B.

In addition, in the non-short-time general pattern hit determination table that is referenced for comparison with the normal random numbers, all 251 types of normal random numbers can match the normal pattern per judgment value indicating that they have been elected per normal pattern. Instead, the normal random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the normal pattern deviation determination value indicating that the normal pattern is out. In this way, in the non-working hours, even if there is a passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003, since there is no winning per normal figure, the second start door 2411 rotates and the second There is no possibility to control the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. - 特許庁

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 compares the selected normal pattern per determination table with the normal random number read in step S2822 of the normal pattern normal process, and when it is determined that it is per normal pattern (step S2829 ), after setting the normal pattern per flag indicating that the variation has been elected per normal pattern (step S2830), per normal pattern as a mode of stopping the variation control of the normal pattern (stop pattern of the normal pattern) Design is determined (step S2831), on the other hand, as a result of comparison with the normal random number read out in step S2822 of the normal design normal process with the selected normal design per determination table, when it is determined that it is lost, the fluctuation of the normal design A normal pattern loss pattern is determined as a mode (normal pattern stop pattern) at the time of control stop (step S2832). And after that, when the above-mentioned normal design process flag is updated (step S2833) so that the process shifts to the normal design fluctuation time determination process (step S2804), this process ends.

In this example, in the control of the time saving state, the winning probability of the normal design is set to 251/251, the lottery result of the normal design always wins, and the time required for the variable display control of the normal design is extremely is shortened to a much shorter predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds). Then, when the lottery result of the normal pattern becomes a hit, the second starting port 2004 is controlled by an opening/closing pattern in which the opening state is closed for an extremely long predetermined time (for example, 5.5 seconds). . That is, during the control of the time saving state, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol is a hit is extremely high, the time required for the variable display control of the normal symbol is constant and short, and the open state of the second start port 2004 Due to the long time, etc., it is much easier to win the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and it is more efficient to aim at the second start port 2004 than the first start port 2002. You can win B. In addition, in the control of the non-time-saving state, the winning probability of the normal pattern is set to 0/251, and the lottery result of the normal pattern does not always hit, and the second start port 2004 is aimed. Also, the game ball B cannot enter the second starting port 2004.

As described above, during the control of the non-time saving state, even if the second start port 2004 is aimed, the game ball B cannot be won in the second start port 2004, so the first start port 2002 In order for the game ball B to win a prize, the game ball B must be shot aiming at the left side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called "left hitting"). In addition, in the game area 5a on the left side of the center accessory 2500, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, and the game ball B is attached to the obstacle nail. By coming into contact with N, the game ball B is given various movements and flows down. Therefore, even if the game ball B is hit to the left side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the first starting port 2002, the first starting port 2002 is not necessarily won, and the first starting port 2002 is won. The game ball B that has not been played is discharged to the outside from an out port 1008 provided at the lower end of the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a.

On the other hand, during the control of the time saving state, since it is possible to efficiently win the game ball B by aiming at the second start port 2004 rather than the first start port 2002, the game is played at the second start port 2004 In order for the ball B to win a prize, the game ball B must be shot toward the right side of the center accessory 2500 (so-called "right hit"). In addition, due to the structure of the game board 5, when the second starting port 2004 is opened, if the game ball B is hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second starting port 2004, the gate part 2003 The passing game ball B wins the second starting port 2004 with an extremely high probability. Therefore, during the control of the time-saving state, the game ball B hit to the right side of the center accessory 2500 is hardly wasted (exhausted to the outside from the out port 1008), and the control of the non-time-saving state is performed. Compared to the first starting port 2002 in the inside, the game ball B comes to win the second starting port 2004 very efficiently.

Further, during control of the time saving state, in addition to the structure of the game board 5, when passing through the gate part 2003, the probability that the lottery result of the normal symbol will win is extremely high, and the variable display of the normal symbol The time required for control is constant and short, and the time of the open state of the second start port 2004 is long. When the game ball B wins, the time required for the variable display control of the special symbol is set to about 1 second, which is extremely short compared to the range of 10 to 120 seconds during the control of the non-time saving state. The variable display control of the special symbols (suspension of the variable display control of the special symbols) can be digested. That is, when the time-saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot game state, by hitting the game ball B on the right side of the center accessory 2500 aiming at the second start port 2004, it becomes a jackpot again in a short time. It is possible to expect to obtain many game balls B by controlling to a big winning game state. In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, the number of game balls B to be paid out by winning the game ball B to the second starting port 2004 is set to one, so the game to the second starting port 2004 Even if the winning of the ball B occurs frequently, the burden on the game hall side can be reduced while increasing the interest of the player.

[12. Behavior of pachinko machine when power is turned on]
In this embodiment, as the functions of the pachinko machine 1, a function of changing setting values and a function of confirming and displaying the setting values are installed. Specifically, by executing the setting change process in step S37 described above, the setting value can be changed, and by executing the setting value confirmation display process in step S28, the confirmation display of the setting value is displayed. allowing it to be done. In order to change the setting of such a set value, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, in addition to operating the power switch 630a, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 and the setting key switch 1311a In order to confirm and display the setting value, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, in addition to operating the power switch 630a, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 It is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a without operating it. As described above, the RWM clear button 633z also functions as a RAM clear switch, a setting switching button, and an error release switch.

First, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 151 (A) is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the main control built-in RAM is initialized when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and Figure 151 (B) is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the power is turned on. 151(C) is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and FIG. is a time chart showing

As shown in FIG. 151, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. That is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the main control MPU performs RAM access permission setting (step S10), and then performs power failure clear processing (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. As described above, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage after the power is turned on and is stabilized. ) is set.

At timing tx after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, following step S12, the main control MPU operates the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z that operates as a function of the RAM clear switch. It is determined whether or not there is (step S14). When the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, it sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). After step S16A or step S16B, it is determined whether or not the body frame 4 is opened and the setting key is turned ON (step S18). In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b, and determines that the setting key switch is activated based on the setting key ON signal. When 1311a determines that the setting key is ON, it sets the value 1 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b, and/or the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 0 (step S20B). That is, at timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, and it is determined whether or not there is an opening of the body frame 4 and an ON operation of the setting key. The determination result is stored as operation information in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Since the period from the timing t3 to the timing tx is extremely short, the person who presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z can operate the pachinko machine while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. 1, and the person who turns on the setting key switch 1311a must turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1 after turning on the setting key switch 1311a.

After the operation information is stored at timing tx, following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) starts up (boots) the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty at which the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. , and is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU).

At the timing ty when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S24). When it is determined that there is no input, it is determined which combination of the values of the RAM clear notification flags RCL-FLG and the values of the setting key ON flags CS-FLG are (steps S25 to S27). In the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied. If it is established, the setting change process (step S37) is performed. Further, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S26, the main control built-in RAM is initialized. (Step S38) is performed. Further, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1 in the determination of step S27, a predetermined set value display permission is given. When the condition is established, the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. That is, at timing tx, it is determined whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, and it is determined whether or not there is an opening of the body frame 4 and an ON operation of the setting key. The determination result is stored as operation information in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. It is intended to maintain the memory of information. At the timing ty, based on the stored operation information, the main control built-in RAM is initialized (step S38), the setting change process (step S37) is performed, or the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 151 (A), when the main control built-in RAM is initialized, at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the RWM clear button 633z pressing operation section is operated, the setting key switch 1311a is not required to be ON-operated. As described above, when the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated at the timing tx, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a is activated. is not turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 0 as second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. At timing ty, it is decided to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38) based on the stored operation information. Step S38) is to be performed.

When the main control built-in RAM is to be initialized, it is necessary that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at timing tx. There is no need for the pressing operation part to be operated. That is, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives. It is possible to switch from the state in which the pressing operation portion of the button 633z is operated to the state in which it is not operated.

Further, in this example, at timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the first operation information, and at timing ty, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to a value of 0. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG may be reset to a value of 0 between timing ty and completion of the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38).

As shown in FIG. 151(B), when changing the setting of the set value, at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. and the setting key switch 1311a must be ON. As described above, when the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated at the timing tx, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a is activated. is ON-operated, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 1 as second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at timing ty, it is decided to perform the setting change processing (step S37) based on the stored operation information, and from the timing ty, the setting change processing (step S37) is to be performed. . After starting the setting change process (step S37) at the timing ty, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned off from the ON state, the setting change process (step S37) is executed. It is supposed to be completed (timing t4).

In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to operate the push operation part of the RWM clear button 633z and to turn ON the setting key switch 1311a at the timing tx. However, at timing ty, there is no need to operate the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, and similarly, it is not necessary for the setting key switch 1311a to be ON-operated. That is, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives. It is possible to switch from the state in which the pressing operation portion of the button 633z is operated to the state in which it is not operated. It is possible to However, if the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON state to the OFF state before the timing ty arrives, after starting the setting change process (step S37) at the timing ty, The state in which the setting key switch 1311a has been ON must be changed to the state in which it is OFF again, and the state in which the setting key switch 1311a has been ON must be changed to the state in which it is OFF. This is because, in the judgment of step S222 of the setting change process, the main control MPU judges whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key. This is because an OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a when the switch is turned off.

Further, in this example, at timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the first operation information, and at timing ty, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to a value of 0. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to 0 from the timing ty until the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed after the setting change process (step S37). Anything that does. In this example, at timing tx, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and at timing t4 when the setting change process (step S37) is completed, the setting key Although the ON flag CS-FLG is reset to the value 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is changed from the timing ty after the setting change process (step S37) and the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed. It is sufficient if the value is reset to 0 before the time.

As shown in FIG. 151(C), when confirming and displaying the setting value, at timing tx after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. On the other hand, the setting key switch 1311a must be ON. As described above, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the timing tx, the value 0 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the setting key switch 1311a is set. is turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 1 as the second operation information, and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. Then, at timing ty, it is determined to perform the setting value confirmation display processing (step S28) based on the storage of the operation information, and from the timing ty, the setting value confirmation display processing (step S28) is performed. I am planning to do it. After starting the set value confirmation display process (step S28) at the timing ty, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned off from the ON state, the set value confirmation display process ( Step S28) is completed (timing t4).

It should be noted that, in order to confirm and display the setting value, it is necessary that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on at the timing tx, but at the timing ty, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. No need. That is, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives. The state in which the switch 1311a is ON can be changed to the state in which it is OFF. However, if the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON state to the OFF state before the timing ty arrives, the setting value confirmation display processing (step S28) is started at the timing ty. Afterwards, it is necessary to turn the setting key switch 1311a from the ON state to the OFF state, and to turn the ON state of the setting key switch 1311a to the OFF state. This is because, in the judgment of step S358 of the set value confirmation display process, the main control MPU judges whether or not there is an OFF operation of the setting key. This is because an OFF signal is input from the setting key switch 1311a when the state is changed from the ON state to the OFF state.

In this example, at timing tx, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and at timing t4 when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed, The value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is reset to 0, but the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is changed between timing ty and timing t4 when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed. Anything that resets the value to 0 will suffice.

Further, in this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on processing, it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on while the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. The condition is that the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 1 as the second operation information, and the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 in FIGS. This assumes that the situation continues. In this respect, the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 until the timing tx arrives, or the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 from the timing t3 to the timing tx. In the closed state, even if the setting key switch 1311a is ON-operated, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information is restricted so as not to be set to a value of 1 (to be set to a value of 0). there is This is because during the business hours of the game hall, etc., the setting is changed illegally under the condition that the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 (under a situation where it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to notice). This is to prevent confirmation. On the other hand, in this example, the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as a condition for setting the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S14 of the main control side power-on processing. The main body frame 4 is never opened with respect to the outer frame 2 until the timing tx arrives, and the outer frame 2 is opened from the timing t3 to the timing tx. On the other hand, even when the body frame 4 is closed, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when it is determined that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated. According to this, even if some kind of abnormality or malfunction occurs in the body frame open switch 4b and it becomes impossible to recognize whether or not the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the RAM can be cleared. By making it possible to set the notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1, it is possible to prevent the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) from becoming unexecutable. Further, even if some abnormality or trouble occurs in the main body frame opening switch 4b, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles in the game start itself as much as possible.

In this embodiment, at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the setting key ON flag as the second operation information The value of CS-FLG is set, and their operation information is stored in the general-purpose memory element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. After the operation information is stored at the timing tx, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty arrives. Based on this, it is determined whether to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38), to perform setting change processing (step S37), or to perform set value confirmation display processing (step S28), and the determined processing I am trying to do In other words, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx and before the arrival of the timing ty, it is possible to change the operation mode of the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z and the operation mode of the setting key switch 1311a. Even if there is, the operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained without being changed. As a result, after the operation information is stored at the timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the hall manager may mistake the operation mode of the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a. By maintaining the operation information stored at the timing tx so as not to be changed even when the operation mode is changed, there is no need to newly turn on the power of the pachinko machine 1, and the pachinko machine After turning on the power of 1, the processing intended by the hall manager (initialization of main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), setting value confirmation display processing (step S28)) is quickly executed. can do.

Further, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when the main control built-in RAM is initialized, besides operating the power switch 630a, the RWM clear button 633z is pressed without operating the setting key switch 1311a. In order to change the setting value, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a in addition to operating the power switch 630a. In order to perform confirmation display, it is necessary to operate the setting key switch 1311a without operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z in addition to operating the power switch 630a. At timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information , and the operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU, and at timing ty, the hall manager intended processing (initialization of main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), setting value confirmation display processing (step S28)) is executed. For example, when the main control internal RAM is initialized, when the setting value is changed, and when the setting value is displayed for confirmation, if an operation unit is provided for each of the cases, other than the power switch 630a Although it is necessary to provide three operation units for the operation information, by differentiating the processing executed after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 depending on the combination of operation information, the pressing operation unit of the RWM clear button 633z in addition to the power switch 630a and the setting key switch 1311a, and the number of parts required for the operation portion can be saved.

Further, in this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on processing, it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on while the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. The condition is that the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 1 as the second operation information, and as shown in FIGS. The set state of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is held as the second operation information, so that it does not matter whether the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2 . In other words, during the period from timing tx to timing ty, opening and closing of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 can be repeated any number of times. On the other hand, after the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information at the timing tx, the main body frame 4 is moved to the outer frame 2 within the period until the timing ty arrives. When it is closed, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information set at timing tx is reset, and at timing ty, setting change processing (step S37) and setting value confirmation display processing are performed. (step S28), or without resetting the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information set at the timing tx, the setting change process (step S37) at the timing ty. Alternatively, it may not be determined that the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is to be performed. That is, even if the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 at the timing tx, if the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 within the period until the timing ty arrives, may be restricted so that the setting value cannot be changed or the setting value confirmation display cannot be performed. According to this, as described above, during the business hours of the game hall, etc., under the situation where the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 (under the circumstances where it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to notice), the setting is changed illegally. It is possible to prevent unauthorized setting confirmation.

Further, in this example, in step S14 of the main control side power-on process, on the condition that the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated even temporarily, the RAM clear notification flag is set as the first operation information. A value of 1 is set in RCL-FLG, but the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been operated for a predetermined time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds), that is, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has been pressed long. It may be a condition that Similarly, in step S18 of the main control side power-on processing, on the condition that the setting key switch 1311a is ON-operated even temporarily, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information. is set, the condition may be that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on for a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 to 3 seconds). As a result, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, even if the hall manager accidentally touches the RWM clear button 633z pressing operation section or the setting key switch 1311a temporarily, processing unintended by the hall manager will not occur. can be prevented from being executed.

Further, although details will be described later, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of fraud using the magnetic sensor 2470 and monitoring of fraud using the vibration sensor 3005 are restricted so as not to be executed. . In other words, during the period from timing t3 to timing ty, the hall manager changes the state from being operated to the state where the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not being operated, or the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. It is possible to change from the state of being on to the state of being turned off, but it is restricted so that fraud monitoring using the magnetic sensor 2470 and fraud monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005 are not executed. . As a result, even if the hall manager has something that can generate magnetism or applies vibration when operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a, it will be detected as a fraudulent act. It is possible to prevent the work from being done, and to suppress the obstruction of the regular work.

[12-1. Modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine when the power is turned on]
In the above-described embodiment, when the main control built-in RAM is initialized, when the setting value is changed, and when the setting value is displayed for confirmation, the pressing operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 The timing for determining whether or not the unit is operated is the same as the timing for determining whether or not there is an opening of the body frame 4 and an ON operation of the setting key. The timing for determining whether or not there is a key ON operation may be different from the timing for determining whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated. A modified example of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIGS. 152 and 153. FIG. FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing a modification of the main-control-side power-on process. Also, FIG. 153(A) is a time chart showing a modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when the main control internal RAM is initialized when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and FIG. Fig. 153(C) is a time chart showing a modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when changing the settings of the set values when the power of the machine 1 is turned on. It is a time chart which shows the modification of the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 when performing. As described above, the RWM clear button 633z also functions as a RAM clear switch, a setting switching button, and an error release switch.

As shown in FIG. 153, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. In other words, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU sets RAM access permission (step S10), and then performs power failure clear processing (step S12). In this power failure clearing process, wait timer processing is performed to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. As described above, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes larger than the blackout warning voltage after the power is turned on and is stabilized. ) is set.

At timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, following step S12, the main control MPU determines whether or not the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated (step S14). When the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, it sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16A). On the other hand, when the main control MPU determines in step S14 that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z has not been operated, it sets the value 0 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S16B). That is, at timing tx, it is determined whether or not the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, and the determination result is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as the first operation information. ing. Since the period from the timing t3 to the timing tx is extremely short, the person who presses the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z can operate the pachinko machine while pressing the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. 1 must be powered up.

After the first operation information is stored at timing tx, following step S16A or step S16B, the main control MPU performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) starts up (boots) the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty at which the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. , and is ready to receive various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU).

At the timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time standby process, following step S22, the main control MPU determines whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S24). When it is determined that there is no input, it is determined whether or not the body frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON (step S18). In the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b, and determines that the setting key switch is activated based on the setting key ON signal. When 1311a determines that the setting key is ON, it sets the value 1 to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG (step S20A). On the other hand, in the determination of step S18, the main control MPU determines that the body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame open switch 4b, and/or the setting key ON signal. When it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 0 (step S20B). That is, at timing ty1, it is determined whether or not there is an opening of the main body frame 4 and an ON operation of the setting key, and the determination result is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as the second operation information. are doing. Thus, in the modified example, the first operation information is stored at the timing tx before the main control MPU starts the wait time waiting process, whereas at the timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process , the second operation information is stored. As the period from timing t3 to timing ty1, at least 10 seconds (s), which is the standby time (boot timer) until booting in the wait time standby process (step S22), is set. may turn ON the setting key switch 1311a before turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, but after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, the main The setting key switch 1311a may be turned ON until the timing ty1 at which the control MPU completes the wait time standby process.

At timing ty2 after the second operation information is stored at timing ty1, following step S20A or step S20B, the main control MPU changes the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG and the setting key ON flag CS. - Determine which combination of FLG values are (steps S25 to S27). In the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied. If it is established, the setting change process (step S37) is performed. Further, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0 in the determination of step S26, the main control built-in RAM is initialized. (Step S38) is performed. Further, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1 in the determination of step S27, a predetermined set value display permission is given. When the condition is established, the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is performed. That is, at timing tx, it is determined whether or not the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated, and the determination result is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as the first operation information. However, the storage of the first operation information is maintained until the timing ty2 at which the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. On the other hand, at timing ty1, it is determined whether or not the body frame 4 has been opened and the setting key has been turned ON, and the determination result is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU as second operation information. However, the storage of the second operation information is maintained until the timing ty2 at which the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. At the timing ty2, based on the stored operation information, the main control built-in RAM is initialized (step S38), the setting change process (step S37) is performed, or the setting value confirmation display process (step S37) is performed. It is decided whether to perform step S28).

As shown in FIG. 153 (A), when the main control built-in RAM is initialized, at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z must be operated. As described above, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated at the timing tx, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the first operation is performed. Information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, when the main control built-in RAM is to be initialized, the setting key switch 1311a must not be turned ON at timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process after timing tx. As described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on at the timing ty1, the value 0 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the second operation information is used as the main operation information. It is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU. At timing ty2, it is determined to initialize the main control built-in RAM (step S38) based on the stored operation information. Step S38) is to be performed.

When the main control built-in RAM is to be initialized, it is necessary that the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at timing tx. It is not necessary to operate the pressing operation portion of the button 633z. That is, after the first operation information is stored at the timing tx, the first operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. Also, it is possible to switch from the state in which the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated to the state in which it is not being operated.

In addition, when initializing the main control built-in RAM, it is necessary that the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON at timing ty1, but at timing tx or timing ty2, the setting key switch 1311a It may be turned ON. That is, after the second operation information is stored at the timing ty1, the second operation information stored at the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. Since the information is stored, it is possible to freely change the ON state and the OFF state of the setting key switch 1311a during the period from the timing tx to the timing ty1. there is

Further, in this example, at timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the first operation information, and at timing ty2, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to a value of 0. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG may be reset to 0 from timing ty2 until the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed.

As shown in FIG. 153(B), when changing the setting of the set value, at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. must have been As described above, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated at the timing tx, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the first operation is performed. Information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, to change the setting of the set value, the setting key switch 1311a must be turned ON at timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process after timing tx. As described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is ON-operated at timing ty1, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the second operation information is used as the main operation information. It is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU. Then, at timing ty2, it is decided to perform the setting change processing (step S37) based on the stored operation information, and from the timing ty2, the setting change processing (step S37) is to be performed. . After the setting change process (step S37) is started at timing ty2, if the setting key switch 1311a is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the setting change process (step S37) is executed. It is supposed to be completed (timing t4).

In order to change the setting of the set value, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z at the timing tx. There is no need to operate the pressing operation part of . That is, after the first operation information is stored at the timing tx, the first operation information stored at the timing tx is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. Also, it is possible to switch from the state in which the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated to the state in which it is not being operated.

In order to change the set value, the setting key switch 1311a must be ON at timing ty1, but the setting key switch 1311a is ON at timing tx or ty2. It does not have to be. That is, after the second operation information is stored at the timing ty1, the second operation information stored at the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. Since the information is stored, it is possible to freely change the ON state and the OFF state of the setting key switch 1311a during the period from the timing tx to the timing ty1. there is

Further, in this example, at timing tx, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 as the first operation information, and at timing ty2, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is reset to a value of 0. However, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG may be reset to a value of 0 between timing ty2 and the completion of the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38). In this example, at timing ty1, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and at timing t4 when the setting change process (step S37) is completed, the setting key Although the ON flag CS-FLG is reset to the value 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is changed from the timing ty2 after the setting change process (step S37) and the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) is completed. It is sufficient if the value is reset to 0 before the time.

As shown in FIG. 153(C), when confirming and displaying the setting value, at timing tx after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. Should not have been. As described above, when the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at the timing tx, the value 0 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG as the first operation information, and the first operation is performed. Information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU. On the other hand, in order to confirm and display the setting value, the setting key switch 1311a must be turned ON at timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process after timing tx. As described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is ON-operated at timing ty1, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and the second operation information is used as the main operation information. It is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU. Then, at timing ty2, it is determined to perform the setting value confirmation display processing (step S28) based on the stored operation information, and from the timing ty2, the setting value confirmation display processing (step S28) is performed. I am planning to do it. After starting the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) at timing ty2, if the setting key switch 1311a is switched from ON to OFF, the setting value confirmation display process ( Step S28) is completed (timing t4).

It should be noted that in order to confirm and display the set value, the setting key switch 1311a must be ON at timing ty1. It does not have to be. That is, after the second operation information is stored at the timing ty1, the second operation information stored at the timing ty1 is maintained until the timing ty2 arrives. Since the information is stored, it is possible to freely change the state in which the setting key switch 1311a is ON and the state in which it is OFF during the period from timing tx to timing ty1. there is

In this example, at timing ty1, the value 1 is set to the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information, and at timing t4 when the setting value confirmation display process (step S28) is completed. Although the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is reset to a value of 0, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is changed to a value of 0 between timing ty2 and the completion of the setting value confirmation display process (step S28). Anything that resets to

Further, in this example, as described in step S18 of the main control side power-on processing, it is determined that the setting key switch 1311a is turned on while the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2. The condition is that the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set to 1 as the second operation information, and in FIGS. This assumes that the situation continues. In this respect, the main body frame 4 is not opened with respect to the outer frame 2 until the timing ty1 arrives, or the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 from the timing t3 to the timing ty1. In the closed state, even if the setting key switch 1311a is ON-operated, the setting key ON flag CS-FLG as the second operation information is restricted so as not to be set to a value of 1 (to be set to a value of 0). there is This is because during the business hours of the game hall, etc., the setting is changed illegally under the condition that the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 (under a situation where it is difficult for the manager of the game hall to notice). This is to prevent confirmation. On the other hand, in this example, the body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2 as a condition for setting the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG in step S14 of the main control side power-on processing. The main body frame 4 is never opened with respect to the outer frame 2 until the timing tx arrives, and the outer frame 2 is opened from the timing t3 to the timing tx. On the other hand, even when the body frame 4 is closed, the value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG when it is determined that the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is being operated. According to this, even if some kind of abnormality or malfunction occurs in the body frame open switch 4b and it becomes impossible to recognize whether or not the body frame 4 is open with respect to the outer frame 2, the RAM can be cleared. By making it possible to set the notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1, it is possible to prevent the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) from becoming unexecutable. Further, even if some abnormality or trouble occurs in the main body frame opening switch 4b, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of troubles in the game start itself as much as possible.

In this embodiment, at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set as the first operation information, and the first operation information is used as the main control. The first operation information is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the MPU, and the first operation information stored at timing tx is maintained until timing ty2 arrives. At timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process after timing tx, the value of the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is set as the second operation information, and the second operation information is transferred to the main control MPU. , and the second operation information stored at timing ty1 is maintained until timing ty2 arrives. At the timing ty2, based on the stored operation information, the main control built-in RAM is initialized (step S38), the setting change process (step S37) is performed, or the setting value confirmation display process (step S37) is performed. It is determined whether to perform step S28), and the determined process is performed. That is, after the first operation information is stored at the timing tx and until the timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored, the setting key switch 1311a is in the ON state and in the OFF state. It is possible to freely change the state of At timing ty1, the second operation information is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU so as to reflect the operation state of the setting key switch 1311a changed during the period from timing tx to timing ty1. After that, at timing ty2, based on the stored operation information, it is determined whether the main control internal RAM is initialized (step S38), the setting change process (step S37) is performed, or the set value is confirmed. Whether or not to perform the display processing (step S28) is determined, and the determined processing is performed. As a result, when the setting value is changed or the setting value is displayed for confirmation, the hall manager erroneously turns on the setting key switch 1311a at timing tx after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3. Even if the user forgets to operate the pachinko machine 1, the setting key switch 1311a can be changed to the ON state until the timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored. There is no need to turn on the power again, and the processing intended by the hall manager after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 (initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), setting value confirmation display processing (any of step S28)) can be executed quickly. Also, when the main control built-in RAM is initialized, even if the hall manager erroneously turns ON the setting key switch 1311a at timing tx after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, By changing the setting key switch 1311a to the OFF state until the timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored arrives, there is no need to change the setting of the setting value again, and the pachinko machine 1 After the power is turned on, the processing intended by the hall manager (initialization of main control built-in RAM (step S38), setting change processing (step S37), setting value confirmation display processing (step S28)) is quickly executed. be able to.

As described above, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, the period from when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3 to the timing ty1 at which the second operation information is stored, It is configured to be longer than the period until the timing tx at which the first operation information is stored. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, there is no need to simultaneously operate the push operation part of the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a, and the setting key switch 1311a is pushed after the push operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. An ON operation is possible, and the hall manager can easily operate a plurality of operation units.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, in order to initialize the main control built-in RAM or change the setting of the setting value, it is necessary to operate the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, but the RWM clear button 633z is operated at the timing tx immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, not at the timing ty1 when the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. This is because the press operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is composed of a press-type switch that does not maintain the operation state, and after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, until timing ty1 arrives. , even if an attempt is made to continue operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, it is unclear whether or not the timing ty1 has arrived. It may stop. For this reason, as for the timing of operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z, by setting the timing tx immediately after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z can be operated for a long period of time. There is no need to keep doing so, and the initialization of the main control built-in RAM (step S38) and the setting change process (step S37) can be reliably executed as intended by the hall manager.

In addition, as described above, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty at which the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. The initialization process for starting (booting) is completed, and various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received. At the time when the initialization process of the peripheral control board 1510 is completed, a command specifying that it is waiting for determination whether or not there is an ON operation of the setting key at timing ty1 is sent to the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). ), after the initialization processing of the peripheral control board 1510 is completed, until the timing ty1 arrives, the setting key switch 1311a is operated by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. is ON-operated. This setting key operable notification includes a repeated voice message "Setting key operable", message display "Setting key operable!" The lamp is illuminated in a color corresponding to whether or not it is being operated.

Further, although details will be described later, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of fraud using the magnetic sensor 2470 and monitoring of fraud using the vibration sensor 3005 are restricted so as not to be executed. . In other words, during the period from timing t3 to timing ty2, the hall manager changes the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z from the operating state to the non-operating state, or the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON. It is possible to change from a state of being turned off to a state of being turned on, or from a state of being turned off to a state of being turned on. is restricted to not perform fraud monitoring using As a result, even if the hall manager has something that can generate magnetism or applies vibration when operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z or the setting key switch 1311a, it will be detected as a fraudulent act. It is possible to prevent the work from being done, and to suppress the obstruction of the regular work.

[13. Behavior of pachinko machine in change permission state and confirmation display state]
Next, the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 in a state where setting value change permission and setting value confirmation display are performed will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 to 156. FIG. FIG. 154 is a time chart showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during setting change of the setting value, and FIGS. 155 and 156 are time charts showing the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during confirmation display of the setting value. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 is different in the state where the setting value is changed or the confirmation display of the setting value is performed, compared to the state where the setting value is not changed or the confirmation display of the setting value is not performed. It has become a thing. The behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during confirmation display of the set values is substantially the same as the behavior of the pachinko machine 1 during the setting change of the set values. 1 is not operated, even after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, various information at the time of turning off the power is retained.

As shown in FIG. 154, when changing the settings of the set values, first, it is confirmed whether the pachinko machine 1 is in a state where the power is turned on. In some cases, it is necessary to cut off the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t0). When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), the outer frame 2 (timing t1), insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees. By turning ON the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (timing t2). Then, by operating the power switch 630a while operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 that operates as a function of the RAM clear switch, and turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t3), setting It becomes a state in which it is possible to change the value setting (change permission state). In such a change permission state, the setting values (setting values 1 to 6) can be changed each time the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 that operates as a setting switching button is pressed. After that, the setting key cylinder is rotated 60 degrees counterclockwise so as to return the setting key switch 1311a from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key was turned ON to the original position, and then the setting key cylinder is turned OFF. The setting key switch 1311a is turned off (timing t4). In other words, in the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value can be changed (change permitted state). It becomes a state in which it is impossible to change the settings (unchangeable state). Then, the player can play a game by removing the setting key from the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5). state.

In addition, when changing the setting of the set value, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on processing when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, but the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4. Until then, the setting change process in step S37 is not terminated (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S222 of the setting change process), and during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, after that, The interrupt permission setting in step S52 is prohibited, and the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52 is delayed compared to normal power-on. Then, since the main control side timer interrupt processing is not started until the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is performed, the switch input processing of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt processing, the special symbol and special electric accessory control of step S114 Processing, normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control processing in step S116, etc. are not executed and are in a standby state. In other words, in the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value can be changed (change permission state), but the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 When the game ball B enters the various winning openings such as the gate section 2003, the input of the detection signal is not validated, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, the second start opening This is a special period in which the opening operation of the door 2411, the opening operation of the big winning opening door 2413, the sorting operation of the sorting piece 2415, and the like are not performed.

As shown in FIG. 155, in the case of confirming and displaying the set values currently set, first, it is confirmed whether or not the pachinko machine 1 is in a power-on state, and the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. If it is, it is necessary to cut off the power of the pachinko machine 1 (timing t0). When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 while the pachinko machine 1 is not powered on (the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off), the outer frame 2 (timing t1), insert the setting key into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a, and rotate the setting key cylinder clockwise by 60 degrees. By turning ON the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON (timing t2). Then, by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the power switch 630a without operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z (timing t3), the setting value can be confirmed and displayed ( confirmation display state). In such a confirmation display state, the setting display 1310g displays the current set value (the set value among the set values 1 to 6 at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned on). After that, the setting key switch 1311a is turned counterclockwise 60 degrees so as to return to the original position from the rotational position of the setting key cylinder at which the setting key is turned ON, and is turned OFF (timing t4 ), the setting display 1310g is switched from the state of displaying the setting value to the state of not displaying the setting value. In other words, in the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting value can be confirmed and displayed (confirmation display state). It becomes a state in which it is impossible to perform confirmation display (unconfirmable state). Then, the player can play a game by removing the setting key from the insertion opening of the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a and closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 (timing t5). state.

It should be noted that, in the case of confirming and displaying the set value currently set, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on processing. Until the key switch 1311a is turned off, the setting value confirmation display processing in step S28 is not terminated (it is not determined that the setting key switch 1311a has been turned off in step S358 of the setting value confirmation display processing), and from timing t3. During the period up to timing t4, subsequent step S52 interrupt permission setting is prohibited, and the execution timing of step S52 interrupt permission setting is delayed compared to normal power-on. Then, since the main control side timer interrupt processing is not started until the interrupt permission setting of step S52 is performed, the switch input processing of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt processing, the special symbol and special electric accessory control of step S114 Processing, normal symbol and normal electric accessary product control processing in step S116, etc. are not executed and are in a standby state. In other words, in the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it is in a state (confirmation display state) in which it is possible to confirm and display the setting value, but the first start gate 2002, the second start gate 2004, and the big winning gate 2005 When the game ball B enters the various winning openings such as the gate section 2003, the input of the detection signal is not validated, and the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, the second start opening This is a special period in which the opening operation of the door 2411, the opening operation of the big winning opening door 2413, the sorting operation of the sorting piece 2415, and the like are not performed.

[13-1. About special symbols, various ball detection, and payout device]
As shown in FIG. 154, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric auditors control processing in step S114) has not started, A state in which it is impossible to perform variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) of the function display unit 1400 (variation Disabled state A). Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. , the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 can perform variable display of special symbols (variable state).

It should be noted that after turning off the setting key switch 1311a at timing t4, in the case of starting the jackpot game at timing t6, when the game ball B wins the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the detection signal Even though the input is valid, the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 cannot variably display the special symbols (unvariable state B). Thus, the non-variable state A and the non-variable state B are the same in that they are states in which the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 cannot variably display the special symbols, but the non-variable state In A, the input of the detection signal is not validated when the game ball B wins in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, whereas in the non-variable state B, the first start port 2002 or the second The difference is that the input of the detection signal is validated when the game ball B has won the second start port 2004 .

Also, when the power supply is cut off at timing t0, if the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is performing the variable display of the special symbols, or if the variable display of the special symbols is stored as pending. , when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the setting change processing in step S37 of the main control power-on processing is terminated, and then in step S38, a specific region out of all regions of the main control built-in RAM Since it is cleared except for , information regarding the variable display of special symbols will be lost. For this reason, after the end of the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the variable display becomes possible, but the variable display of the special symbols, which was interrupted when the power was cut off, is not resumed. In addition, when the power is turned off, the variable display of the special symbols stored as pending is not performed.

Also, in the variable state, a fraud-related error (for example, a serious error during magnetism detection or vibration detection) that makes it impossible to play a game such as a variable display of special symbols due to some fraudulent act occurred. In this case, the peripheral control MPU performs display processing of fraud-related error information that notifies that fact on a predetermined display device (for example, the effect display device 1600), or performs a display process of fraud-related error information that notifies that fact, or a predetermined light emitting device (for example, a plurality of LED 121a, a plurality of LEDs 213a, etc.) to perform light emission processing in a fraud-related error mode that notifies that effect, or to a predetermined sound output device (for example, lower speaker 153a, etc.) to notify that effect. The fraud-related error output process of outputting the related error sound is performed, but in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the variable display of special symbols cannot be performed ( Although it is in the immutable state A), the fraud-related error output process described above is not performed. It is assumed that the hall clerk opens the body frame 4 from the outer frame 2 to change the setting value in the change permitted state from the timing t3 to the timing t4. This is because the work efficiency of the hall clerk is emphasized rather than the necessity of the fraud-related error output processing intended to suggest to the hall clerk, and the occurrence of an event that hinders the work is suppressed. Regarding the point of not performing fraud-related error output processing, all of the above-described fraud-related error information display processing, fraud-related error mode light emission processing, and fraud-related error sound output processing are disabled. However, in order to suppress the occurrence of an event that hinders the work of the hall clerk, at least a part of the fraud-related error output processing may not be performed. For example, it is exemplified that output processing of a fraud-related error sound that is loud and can reduce the work efficiency of the worker is not performed, while other processing is performed as usual.

In the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) is not started, so the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 , the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, the second receiving opening 2008, and the like, and when the game ball B enters the gate section 2003, the detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to each are controlled by the main controller. There is no input by the MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. It should be noted that the game ball B itself may not be detected by the detection sensor, or the detection signal from the detection sensor may be treated as invalid even though it is input. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the lottery, pattern fluctuation (special pattern fluctuation) display), and the payout of the game ball B will not be performed. Even if the ball is entered at 2004, the progress of the game can be suppressed. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, the first reception opening 2007, and the second reception opening 2008, the game ball B is paid out. , the provision of the high-probability state will no longer be performed, and as a result, the game ball B may accidentally enter the big prize winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, or the second receiving opening 2007 during the normal operation of displaying the set value Even if the ball enters the second receiving port 2008, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

In addition, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU does not input detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to various winning openings and gates (gates). At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is also prevented from being input to the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B discharged from the outlet 1008 is invalidated, for example, the game ball B discharged from the game area 5a in the change permission state is measured by the base monitor 1310h. It becomes possible to exclude it from objects (objects to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to slinging (ball clogging) or the like is detected in the change permission state and the base monitor 1310h. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the number of outs is measured (added to the number of outs counter).

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. , second starting port 2004, big winning port 2005, first receiving port 2007, second receiving port 2008, etc. When game ball B enters various winning ports such as gate portion 2003, detection sensors corresponding to each The main control MPU inputs the detection signal of , and treats the detection of the game ball B as valid. Thus, when the detection of the game ball B is enabled, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, lottery, symbol variation (variation display of special symbol) , the game ball B can be paid out. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is enabled, when the game ball B enters the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, the payout of the game ball B, the high It is possible to give a probability state (when the state is set to "effective state" as the state when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 as described above).

In this example, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big prize winning port 2005, and the first receiving port 2007 start from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, that is, when the change permission state ends. , When the game ball B enters various winning ports such as the second receiving port 2008 and the gate portion 2003, the detection of the game ball B is treated as valid. On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is closed, or when a predetermined time has passed since the setting key switch 1311a was turned off at timing t4, the detection of the game ball B may be treated as valid. This is because before the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to shoot the game ball B, and it is difficult to actually start the game. Because there is

Further, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the payout control MPU starts the payout control power-on process, and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580. , and the game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 580. - 特許庁That is, it is possible for the game ball B to be paid out from the payout device 580 in the change permission state, which is the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. However, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU inputs the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each of the various prize winning openings and gates (gates) as described above. Therefore, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, or the big winning hole 2005 in the change permission state, the game ball B is not paid out. .

Incidentally, when the power supply is cut off at the timing t0, if the game ball B enters the various winning holes and the game ball B is being paid out from the payout device 580, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 while operating, the operation signal (detection signal) of the RWM clear button 633z is input to the payout control board 633 from the main control board 1310, and the payout control built-in RAM Since the entire area is cleared, the information regarding the payout of the game ball B is lost. Therefore, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3, it becomes possible to pay out the game balls B from the payout device 580. It is designed not to restart.

As shown in FIG. 155, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, similarly to the change permission state, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric auditors control processing in step S114) is not started, the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) in the special symbol indicator (first special symbol indicator, second special symbol indicator) of the function display unit 1400 are displayed variably. becomes a state in which it is impossible to change (unchangeable state A). Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. , the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 can perform variable display of special symbols (variable state).

It should be noted that after turning off the setting key switch 1311a at timing t4, in the case of starting the jackpot game at timing t6, when the game ball B wins the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the detection signal Even though the input is valid, the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 cannot variably display the special symbols (unvariable state B). Thus, the non-variable state A and the non-variable state B are the same in that they are states in which the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 cannot variably display the special symbols, but the non-variable state In A, the input of the detection signal is not validated when the game ball B wins in the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, whereas in the non-variable state B, the first start port 2002 or the second The difference is that the input of the detection signal is validated when the game ball B has won the second start port 2004 .

Also, when the power supply is cut off at timing t0, if the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is performing the variable display of the special symbols, or if the variable display of the special symbols is stored as pending. , the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3 while operating the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z (when changing the setting of the set value). At this time, the setting change process of step S37 of the main control power-on process is ended, and then at step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for the specific area, so that the special symbol fluctuation While the information about the display is lost, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3 without operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z (when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed), the timing When the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at t4, the set value confirmation display process of step S28 of the main control power-on process is completed, but all areas of the main control built-in RAM are displayed as after the setting change process of step S37. Since the process of step S38 for clearing is not executed except for the specific area, the information regarding the variable display of the special symbol is retained. For this reason, after the end of the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the changeable state is used as an opportunity to restart the variable display of the special symbols that was interrupted when the power was cut off. In addition, when the power is turned off, the variable display of the special symbols stored as pending is performed.

Also, as described above, in the variable state, some fraudulent act is performed and it is impossible to play games such as variable display of special symbols. If an error occurs, the peripheral control MPU performs processing for displaying illegality-related error information that notifies that fact on a predetermined display device (for example, the effect display device 1600), or performs a display process on a predetermined light emitting device. (For example, a plurality of LEDs 121a, a plurality of LEDs 213a, etc.), light emission processing of a fraud-related error mode that notifies that effect, or a predetermined sound output device (for example, lower speaker 153a, etc.) A fraud-related error output process for outputting a fraud-related error sound notifying that is performed. , Although it is impossible to perform variable display of special symbols (variable state A), the fraud-related error output process described above is not performed. In the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, it is assumed that the hall clerk opens the body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 and performs confirmation display of the setting value. This is because the work efficiency of the hall clerk is emphasized rather than the necessity of the fraud-related error output processing intended to suggest to the hall clerk, and the occurrence of an event that hinders the work is suppressed. Regarding the point of not performing fraud-related error output processing, all of the above-described fraud-related error information display processing, fraud-related error mode light emission processing, and fraud-related error sound output processing are disabled. However, in order to suppress the occurrence of an event that hinders the work of the hall clerk, at least a part of the fraud-related error output processing may not be performed. For example, it is exemplified that output processing of a fraud-related error sound that is loud and can reduce the work efficiency of the worker is not performed, while other processing is performed as usual. In addition, in order not to perform fraud-related error output processing, there is a prohibition processing according to the difference between the control performed in the change permission state described above and the event that hinders the work of the hall clerk. You may make it differ in the kind, number, etc. of . For example, in the change permission state, all fraud-related error output processing is not performed when some fraud-related error occurs, while in the confirmation display state, fraud-related error output is output when some fraud-related error occurs. Only a part of the processing is not performed, or in the change permission state, all fraud-related error output processing is not performed when some fraud-related error occurs, while in the confirmation display state Then, when some fraud-related error occurs, a part of the fraud-related error output processing can be prevented from being performed.

In addition, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, as in the change permission state, the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) is not started, so the first start port 2002, when the game ball B enters various prize winning openings such as the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, the second receiving opening 2008, and the gate section 2003, detection sensors corresponding to each of them. The detection signal from the main control MPU is not input, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. It should be noted that the game ball B itself may not be detected by the detection sensor, or the detection signal from the detection sensor may be treated as invalid even though it is input. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, the lottery, pattern fluctuation (special pattern fluctuation) display) and the payout of the game ball B will not be performed, and as a result, the game ball B will not be placed in the first start port 2002 or the second start port for some reason during the regular work of confirming and displaying the set value. Even if the ball is entered at 2004, the progress of the game can be suppressed. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, the first reception opening 2007, and the second reception opening 2008, the game ball B is paid out. , the provision of the high-probability state will no longer be performed, and as a result, the game ball B may accidentally enter the big prize winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, or the second receiving opening 2007 during the normal operation of displaying the set value Even if the ball enters the second receiving port 2008, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

In the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU does not receive detection signals from detection sensors corresponding to various prize winning openings and gate sections (gates). At the same time, the detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to the out port 1008 is also prevented from being input to the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. In this way, when the detection of the game ball B ejected from the outlet 1008 is invalidated, for example, the game ball B ejected from the game area 5a in the confirmation display state is measured by the base monitor 1310h. It becomes possible to exclude from objects (objects to be added to the out number counter), and the game ball B remaining in the game area 5a due to slinging (ball clogging) or the like is detected in the confirmation display state and the base monitor 1310h is detected. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the number of outs is measured (added to the number of outs counter).

On the other hand, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. , second starting port 2004, big winning port 2005, first receiving port 2007, second receiving port 2008, etc. When game ball B enters various winning ports such as gate portion 2003, detection sensors corresponding to each The main control MPU inputs the detection signal of , and treats the detection of the game ball B as valid. Thus, when the detection of the game ball B is enabled, when the game ball B enters the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004, lottery, symbol variation (variation display of special symbol) , the game ball B can be paid out. Similarly, when the detection of the game ball B is enabled, when the game ball B enters the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, and the second receiving port 2008, the payout of the game ball B, the high It is possible to give a probability state (when the state is set to "effective state" as the state when the game ball B is received in the second receiving port 2008 as described above).

In this example, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big prize winning port 2005, and the first receiving port 2007 start from the time when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, that is, when the confirmation display state ends. , When the game ball B enters various winning ports such as the second receiving port 2008 and the gate portion 2003, the detection of the game ball B is treated as valid. On the other hand, when the body frame 4 is closed, or when a predetermined time has passed since the setting key switch 1311a was turned off at timing t4, the detection of the game ball B may be treated as valid. This is because before the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to shoot the game ball B, and it is difficult to actually start the game. Because there is

Further, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3, the payout control MPU starts the payout control power-on process, and outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580. , and the game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 580. - 特許庁That is, in the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, the game ball B can be paid out from the payout device 580 in the same manner as in the change permission state. However, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control MPU inputs the detection signals from the detection sensors corresponding to each of the various prize winning openings and gates (gates) as described above. Therefore, for example, even if the game ball B enters the first start hole 2002, the second start hole 2004, or the big winning hole 2005 in the confirmation display state, the game ball B is not paid out. .

Incidentally, when the power supply is cut off at the timing t0, if the game ball B enters the various winning holes and the game ball B is being paid out from the payout device 580, the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 (when changing the setting of the set value), at that time, the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 633 RWM clear button 633z operation By inputting a signal (detection signal) and clearing the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM, the information on the payout of the game ball B is lost. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3 (when the setting value is displayed for confirmation), the process of clearing the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is not executed at that time, so the game ball Information about the payout of B is to be held. Therefore, after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 at the timing t3, it becomes possible to pay out the game balls B from the payout device 580, and the game balls B that have not yet been paid out at the time the power is turned off. to resume the payment of

In addition, in the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, the setting display 1310g displays the current setting values (the setting value 1 to the setting value at the time when the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON). 6) is displayed, but in the confirmation display state in which game balls B that have not been paid out at the time the power is shut off as described above are being paid out, there is no payout such as out of balls. When a related error occurs, the payout control MPU notifies the fact to a display other than the setting display 1310g (for example, a 7-segment LED provided on the payout control board 633). Display processing of error information is performed, and payout-related error output processing is performed to perform light emission processing in a payout-related error mode for notifying that to a predetermined light-emitting device (for example, a plurality of LEDs 121a and a plurality of LEDs 213a). I'm trying As a result, in the confirmation display state, it is possible to determine whether the payout of the game ball B, which has not yet been paid out at the time the power supply is shut off, has been completed, or whether an error related to payout such as a ball running out has occurred and the game ball B has been paid out. It is possible to discriminate whether or not there is a loss, thereby preventing the player from incurring a loss. Regarding payout-related error processing, since it is an important event for the smooth operation of the game later, we decided to focus on payout maintenance regardless of the work efficiency of the hall clerk. We are trying to perform the same processing as normal without setting any restrictions and without any restrictions.

As described above, when the power supply is cut off at the timing t0, if the game ball B enters the various winning holes and the game ball B is being paid out from the payout device 580, the RWM clear button 633z is pressed. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at the timing t3 without operating the pressing operation part (when confirmation display of the set value is performed), at that time, the game balls that have not been paid out when the power is cut off. The payout of B can be resumed. On the other hand, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, special symbols (first special symbols) in the special symbol display device (first special symbol display device, second special symbol display device) of the function display unit 1400 , second special symbol) is in a state where it is impossible to perform variable display (variable state A), so at the time of shutting off the power supply at timing t0, the special symbol in the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 Fluctuation of the special symbol When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3 without operating the depressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z when the display is performed or when the variable display of the special symbol is stored as pending. (When confirming and displaying the setting value), at that time, the variable display of the special symbol that was interrupted at the time the power was cut off is resumed, or it is stored as pending at the time the power was cut off. The variable display of special symbols is not performed. In other words, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the variable display of the special symbols that was interrupted at the time the power was cut off is resumed, or it is stored as pending at the time the power is cut off. This is a period during which it is possible to pay out only the game balls B that have not been paid out when the power supply is cut off while preventing the progress of the game by not performing the variable display of the special symbols. . For example, when the hall is closed, when the power is turned off while the game balls B are entering various winning holes and the game balls B are being paid out from the payout device 580, the power is turned off. However, the player is prevented from progressing after the power is turned off by turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 to put it in a confirmation display state. At the same time, it is possible to pay out only the game balls B that have not yet been paid out at the time the power supply is cut off, thereby preventing the loss of the player.

As a modification of the above, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on without operating the depressing portion of the RWM clear button 633z, the setting key switch 1311a is turned on. Until the setting key is turned off, the variable display of the special symbols is made impossible, and the progress of the game after the power is cut off is prevented, while the game balls B that have not been paid out at the time of the power cut off are released. It is also possible to set the period during which only the payout can be performed and not to perform the confirmation display of the setting value. In addition, an operation unit other than the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM clear button 633z, and the power switch 630a is provided. , the variable display of the special symbols is disabled, and only the game balls B that have not been paid out at the time when the hall clerk turns on the operation are put out while preventing the progress of the game after the hall clerk turns the operation on. It may be a period during which it is possible to perform Even in such a case, for example, when the hall is closed, the progress of the game during the period when the operation is turned ON by the hall clerk is prevented, and the game balls B which have not been paid out at the time when the operation is turned ON by the hall clerk are paid out. It is possible to prevent a loss from occurring to the player.

As described above, after the end of the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 will be in a variable state in which it is possible to perform variable display of special symbols. When the power supply is cut off, the special symbols stored as pending are not variably displayed, but after the end of the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the variability becomes possible. Taking this as an opportunity, when the power is cut off, the variable display of the special symbols stored as pending is performed. More specifically, when the ball is entered in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 during the variable display of the special symbol, the special random number is stored as pending in the main control built-in RAM, but the power supply at the timing t0 If the special random number is stored as pending in the main control built-in RAM at the time of shutting down, the special random number is stored and held as game backup information in the main control side power failure processing. Then, when the change permission state is entered after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 at timing t3, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, and when the change permission state ends, it is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Since the stored game backup information is cleared, the special random numbers stored as pending are also lost.

In addition, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, since the special random number stored as pending before the power is turned off is erased, in addition to the pending display on the effect display device 1600, the function display unit 1400 The pending display in the pending number indicator is in a non-display state. In addition, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the ball enters the first start opening 2002 or the second start opening 2004, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. No special random numbers are stored as new pending.

By the way, if the special random number stored as pending is not erased before the power is turned off at the end of the change-permitted state, the following problems will occur. In this example, the higher the set value among the set values 1 to 6, the more the number of big hit determination values set in the big hit determination table so that the probability of the big win increases. When the setting value is changed in the permission state, if the setting value is changed from a low setting value (for example, setting value 1) to a high setting value (for example, setting value 6), the result of the big hit determination is a big hit. Since the special random number increases and the probability of a big hit increases, the special random number that was out of the set value before the power shutdown may become a big hit in the set value after the change permission state ends. On the other hand, when changing the setting value in the change permission state, when changing from a high setting value (for example, setting value 6) to a low setting value (for example, setting value 1), the result of big hit determination Since the special random numbers that are regarded as big hits decrease and the probability of big hits decreases, the special random numbers that were big hits with the set values before the power was turned off may not be the set values after the change permission state ends. . In this regard, in this example, by erasing the special random number stored as pending at the end of the change-permitted state, the result of the jackpot judgment is changed between before power shutdown and after the end of the change-permitted state. It is possible to prevent an unfair situation from occurring. In particular, when a person who is not the hall manager changes the setting value in the change-permitted state due to fraudulent activity, he/she tries to change the setting value to a higher setting value (for example, setting value 6), but the setting value is higher ( For example, even when the set value is changed to 6), the result of the big win determination is not changed to the big win, and it is possible to prevent anyone other than the hall manager from committing fraudulent acts. It should be noted that when the hall manager changes the setting of the set value in the change-permitted state, the special random number stored as pending is erased before the power is turned off, so that the player is not disadvantaged. It is preferable to cut off the power supply in a state where there is no suspension, and then change the setting value in a change-permitted state.

Also, when changing the setting value in the change-permitted state, not only when the low setting value (for example, setting value 1) before power shutdown is changed to a high setting value (for example, setting value 6), Even when the set value before the power shutdown is maintained, the special random number stored as pending is erased when the change permission state ends. For example, when a person who is not the hall manager changes the set value in the change-permitted state due to fraudulent activity, he tries to change the set value to a higher set value (for example, set value 6), but the power has already been cut off. is the high setting and you may not need to change the high setting. Even in such a case, by erasing the special random numbers stored as pending before the power shutdown at the end of the change permission state, the special random numbers that had a high possibility of winning big with the high setting value before the power shutdown can be erased. Since the chance of judging a big hit is lost, it is possible to deter anyone other than the hall manager from committing fraudulent acts.

On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3 and the state is shifted to the confirmation display state, the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, and when the confirmation display state ends, it is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Since the stored game backup information is not cleared, the special random number stored as pending before the power is cut off is held. In addition, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, even if the ball enters the first start hole 2002 or the second start hole 2004, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. No special random numbers are stored as new pending. In such a confirmation display state, only the setting of the setting value is confirmed, and the setting value is not changed unlike the change permission state. In other words, even if a person who is not the hall manager checks the settings of the set values in the confirmation display state due to fraudulent activity, the special random numbers that are stored as pending will not be displayed before the power is turned off and in the confirmation display state. The special random number stored as pending before the power is cut off is retained even after the confirmation display state is terminated, because the result of the jackpot determination is not changed after the termination and no profit is obtained by the fraudulent act. and

Also, if a person who is not the hall manager checks the setting of the set value in the confirmation display state due to fraudulent activity, he/she can access the back of the pachinko machine 1 by some means while pretending to play the game normally. If it is predicted that an unauthorized setting confirmation will be performed by doing so, and the setting value that has been incorrectly confirmed is disadvantageous setting content (for example, setting value 1 with the lowest jackpot probability), advantageous setting content ( For example, it is conceivable that the pachinko machine 1 with the set value 6) having the highest jackpot probability is obtained and immediately leaves the seat. In this regard, in this example, when confirming the setting of the setting value in the confirmation display state, the pending state is retained without being erased. It is possible to make it difficult for the user to take a strange action such as leaving the seat afterward, and by monitoring such a strange action, it is possible to make it easier to catch a person who illegally checks the settings. As a result, it is possible to prevent unauthorized confirmation of settings by anyone other than the hall manager.

In addition, in order to further increase the deterrence of fraud, in the confirmation display state, while holding the special random number stored as pending before the power is turned off, in addition to the pending display on the effect display device 1600, the function display unit The pending display on the pending number display of 1400 is also temporarily hidden, and is displayed as if the special random number stored as pending no longer exists, similar to the change permission state. As a result, it is possible to make the fraudulent player misunderstand that the suspension has disappeared, and to give up the continuation of the game after illegally confirming the setting. In addition, in order to effectively exhibit the effect of deterring fraudulent acts, not only the confirmation display state but also a predetermined return timing after the end of the confirmation display state (for example, when the main body frame 4 is closed or at a predetermined time) The pending display may be kept in a non-display state until the lapse of time, etc., arrives.

[13-2. About jackpot games and launch devices]
As shown in FIG. 154, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric auditors control processing in step S114) has not started, A large winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005 and a distribution piece 2415 for distributing the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 to either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008 are operated. becomes impossible. Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. , the big winning door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated. As a result, after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, when the jackpot game is started at timing t6, it is possible to operate the jackpot door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 as the jackpot game. , the game ball B can be entered into the big winning opening 2005, or the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 can be distributed to the second receiving opening 2008.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that when the power supply is shut off at timing t0, if the jackpot game is being executed and the big winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are operating, the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4. , The setting change process of step S37 of the main control power-on process is ended, and then in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area, so that the big hit game is being executed ( (during operation of the big winning entrance door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415) will be lost. Therefore, after the end of the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, it becomes possible to operate the big winning door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415, but it is interrupted when the power is turned off. The jackpot game being played is not restarted, and the big prize opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are not operated.

As described above, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) is not started. When the game ball B enters various prize winning openings such as the starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, the second receiving opening 2008, and the gate portion 2003, a detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each. is not input by the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. Thus, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, the first reception opening 2007, and the second reception opening 2008, the game ball B Neither the payout nor the provision of the high-probability state is performed, and as a result, the game ball B is accidentally dropped into the big prize winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, or the like during the normal operation of changing the set value. Even if the ball enters the second receiving port 2008, the progress of the game can be suppressed.

Further, in this example, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, that is, when the change permission state ends, the big winning entrance door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, or when a predetermined time has passed after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the big winning entrance door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are operated. It may be in a state in which it is possible to This is because before the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to shoot the game ball B, and it is difficult to actually start the game. Because there is

In addition, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (fire permission signal setting processing in step S113) is not started, but firing by the handle 182 in the change permission state Considering that the operation is checked, etc., the logic of the launch permission signal that informs the launch control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 that the launch of the game ball B is permitted during that period is set, A game ball B can be shot when the handle 182 is operated. In addition, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (fire permission signal setting processing in step S113) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, and the change permission state is changed. , the state in which the game ball B can be shot continues when the handle 182 is operated. In this way, it is possible to operate the handle 182 to prepare for shooting the game ball B before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5. The game can be started immediately after closing.

As shown in FIG. 155, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, similarly to the change permission state, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric auditors control processing in step S114) is not started, the large winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the large winning opening 2005 and the game ball B received in the large winning opening 2005 are distributed to either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008. It becomes impossible to operate the sorting piece 2415 . Then, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric accessory control processing in step S114) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52. , the big winning door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated. As a result, after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, when the jackpot game is started at timing t6, it is possible to operate the jackpot door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 as the jackpot game. , the game ball B can be entered into the big winning opening 2005, or the game ball B received in the big winning opening 2005 can be distributed to the second receiving opening 2008.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that when the power is cut off at the timing t0, if the big winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are operating during the execution of the jackpot game, the timing is changed while operating the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at t3 (when the setting value is changed), when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the setting of step S37 of the main control power-on processing is performed. The change process is terminated, and subsequently, in step S38, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared except for the specific area, so that the big hit game is being executed (the operation of the big winning entrance door 2413 and the distribution piece 2415 While the information about the middle) is lost, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at the timing t3 without operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z (when performing confirmation display of the setting value), When the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the set value confirmation display process of step S28 of the main control power-on process is completed. Since the process of step S38 for clearing is not performed except for the specific area among the areas, the information regarding the execution of the big winning game (during operation of the big winning entrance door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415) is held. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 156, after the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, is completed, it is assumed that the big winning entrance door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated. As a trigger, the jackpot game that has been interrupted when the power is cut off is restarted, and the big winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are operated. Further, as will be described later, it is possible to operate the handle 182 to prepare for launching the game ball B before restarting the jackpot game that was interrupted when the power was cut off at the timing t5, and the jackpot is achieved. The game ball B can be efficiently entered into the big winning opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008 immediately after restarting the game.

As described above, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, since the main control side timer interrupt processing (switch input processing in step S104) has not started, the first start port 2002, the second When the game ball B enters various prize winning openings such as the starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, the second receiving opening 2008, and the gate portion 2003, a detection signal from the detection sensor corresponding to each. is not input by the main control MPU, and the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. Thus, when the detection of the game ball B is invalidated, for example, even if the game ball B enters the big winning opening 2005, the first reception opening 2007, and the second reception opening 2008, the game ball B Neither the payout nor the provision of the high-probability state is carried out, and as a result, the game ball B is accidentally dropped into the big prize winning opening 2005, the first receiving opening 2007, or the like during the normal operation of confirming and displaying the set value. Even if the ball enters the second receiving port 2008, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game.

Also, in this example, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, that is, when the confirmation display state ends, the big winning entrance door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, or when a predetermined time has passed after the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the big winning entrance door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are operated. It may be in a state in which it is possible to This is because before the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5, it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to shoot the game ball B, and it is difficult to actually start the game. Because there is Further, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, that is, when the confirmation display state ends, when the big win game interrupted when the power is cut off is restarted, the big win game is restarted. Although it is difficult to operate the handle 182 to prepare for shooting the game ball B, by delaying the resumption of the big win game interrupted when the power supply is cut off, the game is delayed before the restart of the big win game. It becomes easy to operate the handle 182 to prepare for shooting the game ball B, and the game ball B can be efficiently entered into the big winning opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008 immediately after the big win game is restarted. .

In addition, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, similar to the change permission state, the main control side timer interrupt processing (fire permission signal setting processing in step S113) is not started, but confirmation display is performed. Considering that the shooting operation by the handle 182 is checked in the state, during that period, the shooting permission signal that tells the shooting control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 to allow the shooting of the game ball B Logic is set so that the game ball B can be shot when the handle 182 is operated. In addition, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the main control side timer interrupt processing (fire permission signal setting processing in step S113) is started by executing the interrupt permission setting in step S52, and the change permission state is changed. , the state in which the game ball B can be shot continues when the handle 182 is operated. In this way, it is possible to operate the handle 182 to prepare for shooting the game ball B before closing the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 at timing t5. The game can be started immediately after closing.

[13-3. About staging equipment and staging materials]
As shown in FIG. 154, in this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on process, and the screen of the effect display device 1600 displays a predetermined It is possible to display images. Then, in the change permission state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, the pattern display (decorative pattern display) on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker , a setting change in-progress notification is executed to notify that the setting value is being changed. As for notification during this setting change, a voice repeatedly saying "The setting is being changed", a message "The setting is being changed!"I'm doing it. In addition, the setting change in-progress notification is a notification (effect) that is performed only in the change-permitted state, and is executed with priority over the main body frame open notification that is performed when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. . That is, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open notification (such as display and voice of "the frame is open") is normally performed, but when the change is permitted, the main body frame open notification is performed. It is decided that the notification during setting change is executed with the highest priority without performing Note that the body frame open notification and setting change notification are executed in parallel, the setting change notification is given priority over the body frame open notification, and the body frame open notification is performed after the setting change notification is completed. A form can also be illustrated. Then, after the end of the change permission state at timing t4, until a predetermined period of time (for example, about 20 seconds) elapses, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker change the pattern and the jackpot game. A game start notification is executed to notify that the game can be started.

In addition, in the change-permitted state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, in addition to the image and lamp of the effect display device 1600 and the output from the speaker, the notification from the function display unit 1400 is also sent as the setting change notification. Running. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal pending indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special pending number indicator, a second special In addition to the pattern indicator, the second special hold number indicator, and the round indicator, a setting change indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change permitted state), and the setting value A confirmation display indicator consisting of one LED is provided for indicating that confirmation display is in progress (confirmation display state). In the change permission state, only the LED of the setting changing indicator in the function display unit 1400 is lit, and the LEDs of the other indicators are all extinguished. Thus, in the change-permitted state, the notification from the function display unit 1400 makes it possible to grasp that the game does not progress.

In addition, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, various prizes such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, the second receiving port 2008, etc. When the game ball B enters the mouth or the gate section 2003, even if the main control MPU receives a detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. However, when such a detection signal is input, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker may cause various winning ports and gates to be displayed even though it is not a period during which the game should be played in the change-permitted state. A warning effect A is executed to notify that the game ball B is entering the part. This warning effect A is executed with priority over the setting changing notification and the body frame open notification. That is, when the warning effect A is executed, the warning effect A is executed with the highest priority without performing the setting change notification or the main body frame opening notification.

Further, in the normal time when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it is a period in which the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on. In this case, warning effects B and C are executed for notifying that the setting key is turned on illegally by means of the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is in a state where the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON while the symbol variation is performed normally, until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF, Warning production B is being executed. Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON in a state where pattern variation is not normally performed, a warning effect is produced until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. running C. Moreover, these warning effects B and C are executed with priority over the effects being executed. That is, when the warning effects B and C are executed, the effects being executed are stopped and the warning effects B and C are executed with the highest priority regardless of whether or not the pattern variation is performed. Note that the warning effects B and C are executed in the same manner, but may be executed in different manners so that it can be determined whether or not the symbol variation is being performed.

Further, in this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on process, and detects the operation of the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161). This makes it possible to adjust the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light-emitting members such as lamps and the screen of the effect display device 1600 in stages. In other words, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the operation of the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161) is made detectable, and the volume output from the speaker, the lamp, and the effect display device 1600 are changed. It is possible to adjust the amount of light output from a light emitting member such as a screen in stages. Specifically, by long-pressing the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161), an image for adjustment is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (a volume gauge image representing five levels of adjustment status depending on the length of the long-press, and a light amount gauge image) is displayed, the volume and light intensity are adjusted step by step (1→2→3→4→5→1→2 . . ), and by not operating the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161) for a predetermined time, it is possible to fix the sound volume and the amount of light. However, during the period in which the effect using the effect operation unit 160 is being executed during the symbol change, the effect operation unit 160 is in a state of waiting for the operation of the effect operation unit 160 for the effect. Even if it is operated, it is a prohibition period during which it is not possible to adjust the volume or the amount of light.

Further, in this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on processing, and the production members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 (For example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) are being initialized. In other words, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is in a state where it is impossible to perform variable display of the special symbols (variable state A), while the main body Initial operations of the production members (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) mounted on the frame 4 and the game board 5 are performed. Each of these production members is a member capable of moving between an initial position and an operating position, and in the initial operation of the production member, the production member normally operates from the initial position toward the operating position. It is decided to perform accurate positioning so that the production members are on standby at the initial position. After the end of the change permission state at timing t4, it is possible to execute an effect using the effect member. For example, as a variation pattern (variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when a variation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set during symbol variation is transmitted, the symbol At a predetermined timing during fluctuation, the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON, and if the setting value is not changed or the confirmation display of the setting value is not performed, the change permission state or the confirmation display state Since the main control side timer interrupt processing is started by executing the interrupt permission setting without delaying the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52, immediately after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the function display unit It becomes a state (variable state) in which it is possible to variably display the special symbols on the 1400 special symbol display. However, in such a case, since the transition to the variable state is made without waiting for the completion of the initial operation of the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, for example, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When a variation pattern in which a performance using the performance member is set during pattern variation is transmitted during the initial motion of the performance member, the performance member is moved from the initial position to the operating position based on the variation pattern. Therefore, the opportunity to operate the production member may be lost. On the other hand, in this example, in the change permission state which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 cannot perform the variable display of the special symbols (non-variable state A ), the initial actions of the production members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are performed, so when the state shifts to the variable state after the end of the change permission state, the initial actions of the production members are completed. It is more likely that As a result, even if a variation pattern in which an effect using the effect member is set during the symbol variation is transmitted after the change permission state is ended, the initial operation of the effect member does not affect the change pattern. Based on the variation pattern, the performance member can be moved from the initial position to the operating position, so that the information obtained from the content of the performance is not missed.

However, the initial actions of the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 require a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to complete. Therefore, in the change permission state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4 before the initial operation of the production member is completed, the initialization of the production member Waiting for the completion of the action, it becomes possible to execute the effect using the effect member. In other words, the setting key switch 1311a may be turned off at timing t4 either before or after the completion of the initial action of the effect member. When 1311a is turned off, it is possible to perform symbol variation.

As shown in FIG. 155, in this example, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on process, and the screen of the effect display device 1600 displays a predetermined It is possible to display images. Then, in the confirmation display state, which is a period from timing t3 to timing t4, similarly to the change permission state, the pattern display (decorative pattern display) on the screen of the effect display device 1600 is erased, and the image of the effect display device 1600 and the The output from the lamp and the speaker is used to notify that the confirmation display of the set value is in progress. This notification during the confirmation display consists of a repeated voice saying "Confirmation is being displayed", a message display of "Confirmation is being displayed!" I'm doing it. The notification during confirmation display is a notification (effect) that is performed only in the confirmation display state, and is executed with priority over the notification that the main body frame is opened when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. . That is, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the main body frame open notification (such as display and voice of "the frame is open") is normally performed, but in the confirmation display state, the main body frame open notification is performed. It is decided that the notification during confirmation display is given the highest priority without performing Note that the body frame open notification and the confirmation display notification are executed in parallel, the confirmation display notification is given priority over the body frame open notification, and the body frame open notification is performed after the confirmation display completion notification. A form can also be illustrated. Then, after the end of the confirmation display state at timing t4, until a predetermined period (for example, about 20 seconds) elapses, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker change the pattern and the jackpot game. A game start notification is executed to notify that the game can be started.

In addition, after the end of the confirmation display state at timing t4, the jackpot that has been interrupted at the time the power is cut off is triggered by the state in which the big winning opening door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 can be operated. It is possible to resume the game and operate the big winning entrance door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415, but as shown in FIG. The jackpot game resuming notification for notifying that the jackpot game interrupted when the power is cut off is restarted and the jackpot door 2413 and the sorting piece 2415 are operated is executed by the output from the speaker. In addition, before the restart of the jackpot game, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are waiting for the execution of the jackpot game that has been interrupted when the power is cut off. A big hit game standby notification for notifying that the segment 2415 is in operation standby may be executed. As a result, it is possible to operate the handle 182 to prepare for shooting the game ball B before restarting the jackpot game, and the game can be efficiently moved to the jackpot 2007 or the second reception port 2008 immediately after restarting the jackpot game. Ball B can be entered.

In addition, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, as in the change permission state, in addition to the image and lamp of the effect display device 1600 and the output from the speaker, as the notification during confirmation display described above, Notification by the function display unit 1400 is also executed. Specifically, although not shown, the function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator, a normal symbol indicator, a normal pending indicator, a first special symbol indicator, a first special pending number indicator, a second special In addition to the pattern indicator, the second special hold number indicator, and the round indicator, a setting change indicator consisting of one LED that indicates that the setting value is being changed (change permitted state), the setting value A confirmation display indicator consisting of one LED is provided for indicating that confirmation display is in progress (confirmation display state). In the confirmation display state, only the LED of the confirmation display indicator in the function display unit 1400 is lit, and the LEDs of the other indicators are all extinguished. Thus, in the confirmation display state, the notification from the function display unit 1400 makes it possible to grasp that the game will not progress.

In addition, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, various prizes such as the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, the big winning port 2005, the first receiving port 2007, the second receiving port 2008, etc. When the game ball B enters the mouth or the gate section 2003, even if the main control MPU receives a detection signal from the corresponding detection sensor, the detection of the game ball B is treated as invalid. However, when such a detection signal is input, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker may cause various winning ports and gates to be displayed even though it is not a period during which the game should be played in the confirmation display state. A warning effect A is executed to notify that the game ball B is entering the part. This warning effect A is executed with priority over the in-confirmation display notification and the body frame open notification. That is, when the warning effect A is executed, the warning effect A is executed with the highest priority without performing the notification during confirmation display or the notification of opening the main body frame.

Further, in the normal time when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, it is a period in which the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on. In this case, warning effects B and C are executed for notifying that the setting key is turned on illegally by means of the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Specifically, when the setting key switch 1311a is in a state where the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON while the symbol variation is performed normally, until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF, A warning effect B is being executed. Similarly, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON in a state where pattern variation is not normally performed, a warning effect is produced until the setting key switch 1311a returns to the setting key OFF. running C. Moreover, these warning effects B and C are executed with priority over the effects being executed. That is, when the warning effects B and C are executed, the effects being executed are stopped and the warning effects B and C are executed with the highest priority regardless of whether or not the pattern variation is performed. Note that the warning effects B and C are executed in the same manner, but may be executed in different manners so that it can be determined whether or not the symbol variation is being performed.

Further, in this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on process, and detects the operation of the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161). This makes it possible to adjust the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light-emitting members such as lamps and the screen of the effect display device 1600 in stages. That is, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, similarly to the change permission state, the operation of the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is made detectable, and the volume output from the speaker and the , the amount of light output from light-emitting members such as lamps and the screen of the effect display device 1600 can be adjusted in stages. Specifically, by long-pressing the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161), an image for adjustment is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (a volume gauge image representing five levels of adjustment status depending on the length of the long-press, and a light amount gauge image) is displayed, the volume and light intensity are adjusted step by step (1→2→3→4→5→1→2 . . ), and by not operating the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161) for a predetermined time, it is possible to fix the sound volume and the amount of light. However, during the period in which the effect using the effect operation unit 160 is being executed during the symbol change, the effect operation unit 160 is in a state of waiting for the operation of the effect operation unit 160 for the effect. Even if it is operated, it is a prohibition period during which it is not possible to adjust the volume or the amount of light.

Further, in this example, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the peripheral control MPU starts the peripheral control power-on processing, and the production members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 (For example, the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) are being initialized. In other words, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, similarly to the change permission state, the special symbols on the special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 cannot be variably displayed (non-variable While being in the state A), the initial operation of the production members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) is performed. Such production members are members that can each move between an initial position and an operating position. In the initial operation of the production members, the production members are sequentially or simultaneously operated in a predetermined operation pattern. By operating it, it is possible to confirm whether the production member moves normally from the initial position to the operating position, and to perform accurate positioning so that the production member waits at the initial position. After the end of the confirmation display state at timing t4, an effect using the effect member can be executed. For example, as a variation pattern (variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when a variation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set during symbol variation is transmitted, the symbol At a predetermined timing during fluctuation, the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON, and if the setting value is not changed or the confirmation display of the setting value is not performed, the change permission state or the confirmation display state Since the main control side timer interrupt processing is started by executing the interrupt permission setting without delaying the execution timing of the interrupt permission setting in step S52, immediately after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the function display unit It becomes a state (variable state) in which it is possible to variably display the special symbols on the 1400 special symbol display. However, in such a case, since the transition to the variable state is made without waiting for the completion of the initial operation of the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5, for example, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When a variation pattern in which a performance using the performance member is set during pattern variation is transmitted during the initial motion of the performance member, the performance member is moved from the initial position to the operating position based on the variation pattern. In some cases, the movement of the production member may be lost. On the other hand, in this example, in the confirmation display state which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 cannot perform the variable display of the special symbols (non-variable state A ), the initial actions of the production members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are performed. Therefore, when the transition is made to the variable state after the end of the confirmation display state, the initial actions of the production members are completed. It is more likely that As a result, even if a variation pattern in which an effect using the effect member is set during the symbol variation is transmitted after the confirmation display state is ended, the initial operation of the effect member does not affect the performance. Based on the variation pattern, the performance member can be moved from the initial position to the operating position, so that the information obtained from the content of the performance is not missed.

However, the initial actions of the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 require a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) to complete. Therefore, in the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4 before the initial operation of the production member is completed, the initialization of the production member Waiting for the completion of the action, it becomes possible to execute the effect using the effect member. In other words, the setting key switch 1311a may be turned off at timing t4 either before or after the completion of the initial action of the effect member. When 1311a is turned off, it is possible to perform symbol variation.

When the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are respectively equipped with performance members, at least the performance members mounted on the game board 5 are firstly executed and mounted on the main body frame 4.例文帳に追加It is also possible to delay the initial motion of the presenting effect member until "after closing of the body frame 4 at timing t5". This is because the body frame 4 is in an open state during setting change or setting value confirmation display, and the main body is closed by closing operation of the body frame 4 after setting value setting change or setting value confirmation display is completed. An impact is generated on the frame 4 . Therefore, when the main body frame 4 is closed, there is a possibility that the production members mounted on the main body frame 4 may not operate normally or may be displaced from their initial positions. By starting the initial action of the performance member mounted on the body frame 4 after closing the body frame 4, it is possible to cope with such a situation.

It should be noted that after each of the production members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 has been initialized sequentially or simultaneously, if the initial action of each production member is not completed normally (each production member By the origin detection sensor that detects the initial position of, if there is a production member that is not detected at the initial position at a predetermined time, or if there is a production member that is not detected at the initial position at a predetermined time. Initialization is performed again. If there is a production component that is not detected at the initial position even at a predetermined time after performing an action or retry operation, etc.), the production using the production component that was not completed normally is executed during the pattern change. We are trying to limit it so that it does not. Here, as described above, if the setting key switch 1311a is not turned ON when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the setting value is not changed or the confirmation display of the setting value is not performed, the pachinko Immediately after turning on the power of the machine 1, the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is in a state in which the special symbol can be variably displayed (variable state), and the state in which the initial operation of the production member is performed. . In this example, if the initial action of the production member is not completed normally under such a situation, the player will feel a sense of incongruity that the production member will remain stopped at a position different from the initial position during the variable display of the special symbols. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, setting change of setting values and confirmation display of setting values are performed without turning on the setting key switch 1311a. If not, at a predetermined time after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 (time when it is assumed that each of the presentation members will be positioned at the initial position after the initial action of each presentation member is completed), one of the presentation members is detected at the initial position. When not in use, the initial position error is notified to the outside by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker.

On the other hand, if the effect member is not detected at the initial position by the initial operation while the setting value is being changed (change permitted state) or the setting value is being displayed for confirmation (confirmation display state), the normal setting change or confirmation display is performed. In order to avoid obstruction of the work of (1), even if the effect member remains stopped at a position different from the initial position, the initial position error notification is suppressed so as not to be performed. After the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the initial position error is notified to the outside by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Regarding the initial position error notification, it is designed to start after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, but it is designed to start in advance from the time when the effect member is not detected at the initial position due to the initial operation. may In addition, when the effect member is not detected at the initial position by the initial operation, out of the image, lamp, and speaker output of the effect display device 1600, a notification ( For example, the specification may be such that only the lamp) is executed first.

As a modification of the above, if the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on regardless of whether or not the pressing operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, special While making it impossible to perform the variable display of symbols and preventing the progress of the game, the performance members (for example, the performance operation part 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 are changed. While the initial operation is performed during this period, setting changes of setting values and setting value confirmation display may not be performed. In addition, an operation unit other than the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM clear button 633z, and the power switch 630a is provided. , the variable display of the special symbols is disabled, and the initial action of the production members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed while preventing the progress of the game after the hall clerk turns on the operation. It may be a period of time. Even in such a case, after the hall clerk turns off the operation, even if a variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set during the pattern change is transmitted, the initial action of the effect member is affected. The performance member can be moved from the initial position to the operation position based on the variation pattern without being changed, and the information obtained from the contents of the performance can be prevented from being missed.

As described above, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, that is, the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light-emitting members such as lamps and the screen of the effect display device 1600 are adjusted. It is possible to adjust the More specifically, when changing the setting of the set value or confirming the setting of the set value, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control power-on process, Before the setting change process of step S37 and the set value confirmation display process of step S28 are started, the wait time standby process of step S22 is performed. In this wait time waiting process, the process waits until the system that performs drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is activated (booted). In this embodiment, 10 seconds (s) is set as the waiting time (boot timer) until booting. The peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) performs initialization processing for activating (booting) the drawing control system of the peripheral control board 1510 before the main control MPU completes wait time waiting processing. After completion, various commands can be received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU). As described above, at the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the peripheral control MPU has already completed the initialization process for starting (booting) the system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510. It is possible to detect the operation of the production operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), and to adjust the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light-emitting members such as lamps and the screen of the production display device 1600. It's becoming

In addition, the volume output from the speaker and the amount of light output from light-emitting members such as lamps and the screen of the effect display device 1600 are changed at timing t3 when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Information about the amount of light is not held, and the initial state (for example, a state where the volume and the amount of light are median values) is restored. Therefore, the sound volume and the amount of light after the power is turned on change to a state different from the sound volume and the amount of light adjusted before the power is turned off.

Also, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, the change permission state and the confirmation display state are ended. It has shifted to a variable state in which it is possible to perform variable display of symbols. That is, prior to the state in which the player can start the game in the variable state, the volume output from the speaker, the output from the light emitting member such as the lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600 It is possible to adjust the amount of light. For example, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, as a variation pattern (variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, there is a variation pattern in which a predetermined effect is set during symbol variation. If it is transmitted, while the pattern is changing, sound (game sound) is output from the speaker based on the information set in the effect, or light is emitted from the light emitting member such as a lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600. However, if such an effect is started before adjusting the amount of light or volume, the volume or amount of light will be output in the initial state, which may make the player feel uncomfortable. In this regard, in this example, prior to the player being able to start the game in the variable state, by enabling the adjustment of the volume and the light amount, the player can start the game. The sound volume and the amount of light can be changed from the initial state until the game is started, and the player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable due to the sound volume and the amount of light in the initial state after the player starts playing the game.

In this example, by long-pressing the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161), an image for adjustment (a volume gauge image representing five levels of adjustment status depending on the time of long-pressing, a volume gauge image, After displaying the light intensity gauge image), the sound volume and light intensity are adjusted step by step (1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 1 → 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 1 → 2 . . . ), and by not operating the effect operation section 160 (pressing operation section 161) for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to fix the sound volume and the amount of light. In the variable state, when the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161) is operated, a predetermined change sound is output from the speaker as the volume and light amount are changed. On the other hand, before the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, when the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is operated, the volume and the amount of light can be changed. It is set not to output the change sound. This is because it is assumed that the hall manager is changing the set values and displaying the set values for confirmation in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which are the period from the timing t3 to the timing t4. This is because the work efficiency of the hall manager is emphasized rather than the necessity of outputting a change sound that informs that the volume or amount of light has been changed, and the occurrence of an event that hinders the work is suppressed. It should be noted that when the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161) is operated, light is output from a light-emitting member such as a lamp or the screen of the effect display device 1600 according to the changed light amount as the light amount is changed. is not an event that hinders the work of the hall manager, so it is not prohibited even in the change permission state or confirmation display state.

Further, in this example, in the variable display state, if an operation to change the volume or the amount of light is performed using the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161), at that time, the adjusted volume or the amount of light is output. It is reflected as soon as possible. On the other hand, before the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to perform an operation to change the volume or the amount of light using the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161). After the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the sound volume and light intensity after adjustment are not reflected so as to be output with the adjusted sound volume and light intensity. In other words, during the period from timing t3 to timing t4, which is the change permission state and the confirmation display state, as will be described in detail later, an alarm is issued to the outside to prevent anyone other than the hall manager from committing fraudulent acts. Although it is being executed, the image, lamp, and output from the speaker of the effect display device 1600 that is being executed as such a warning notification cannot be adjusted to the volume and light amount after adjustment, and the volume and light amount are fixed. I'm trying As a result, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, even if an operation to change the sound volume or the amount of light is performed using the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161), it is difficult to notice the alert notification being executed. can be prevented from occurring and the fraud monitoring system can be prevented from weakening.

As described above, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, an alarm is issued to the outside so that anyone other than the hall manager will not commit fraud. Even after the end of the permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to extend and execute the warning notification. If the warning notification is to be extended after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the effect operation unit 160 (pressing operation unit 161) can be used to adjust the volume or the volume even during the execution of the extended warning notification. It is possible to perform an operation to change the light intensity, but at that point, it is not reflected to output the adjusted sound volume and light intensity, and after the extended warning notification ends, the adjusted sound volume and light intensity It is reflected to output with In other words, the output from the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker during the execution of the warning notification cannot be changed to the volume and light amount after adjustment, and the sound volume and light amount are fixed. . As a result, similarly to the change permission state and the confirmation display state, when the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161) is used to adjust the volume and To prevent the occurrence of a situation in which it is difficult to notice an alert notification being executed even if an operation to change the amount of light is performed, and to prevent the fraud monitoring system from being weakened.

In addition, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, it is possible to perform an operation to change the volume and the amount of light using the effect operation unit 160 (press operation unit 161), and after the change permission state and the confirmation display state are ended, , the volume and light intensity after adjustment are reflected in the output, but for some lamps among the multiple lamps, when the operation to change the volume and light intensity is performed, the adjusted volume and light intensity You may reflect it so that it may be output. For example, among the multiple lamps, for the lamps used for warning notifications, when an operation to change the volume or light intensity is performed, the adjusted sound volume and light intensity are reflected in order to maintain the fraud monitoring system. All or part of the lamps not used for alarm notification may be reflected so as to output with the adjusted sound volume or light intensity at the time when the operation to change the sound volume or light intensity is performed.

[13-4. About fraud monitoring]
In this embodiment, various types of fraudulent activity are monitored in the fraudulent activity detection process in step S112 described above. Specifically, by bringing a magnet closer to the pachinko machine 1 to change the path of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5, various winning openings and gates (gates) provided on the game board 5 are changed. ), a magnetic sensor 2470 is provided to detect fraudulent activity such as entering a ball, and the main control MPU judges the presence or absence of fraudulent activity based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470, and monitors fraudulent activity by magnets. , the monitoring result is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU is made to perform fraud-related error processing. In addition, shaking or hitting the pachinko machine 1 vibrates the pachinko machine 1 to change the path of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a partitioned and formed on the game board 5 to change the path of the game ball B to the game board 5.例文帳に追加By installing vibration sensors that detect cheating such as entering balls into various prize-winning openings and gates, the main control MPU determines whether there is cheating based on the detection signal from the vibration sensor. A fraudulent action due to vibration is monitored, the monitoring result is transmitted to the peripheral control MPU, and the peripheral control MPU is made to perform fraud-related error processing. The monitoring of these fraudulent activities is divided into normal conditions (when setting values are not changed or setting values are not displayed for confirmation) and when setting values are being changed or when setting values are being displayed for confirmation. , the mode of monitoring is different.

In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent activity with a magnet, the location where the magnetism is generated There is provided one magnetic sensor capable of specifying the front of the game area 5a located on the front side). Normally, the magnetic sensor 2470 generates magnetism (magnetism due to unauthorized access) that should not be generated in the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switches 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 are provided. It monitors whether it has occurred (whether a magnet has approached), and monitors fraudulent behavior such as an attempt to change the setting or display confirmation by a person other than the person who performs the setting change or confirmation display of the set value. The game board monitors whether or not magnetism (magnetism due to unauthorized access) that should not be generated is generated in the area (whether the magnet is approaching), and changes the course of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a. It monitors illegal acts such as entering the ball into the various winning openings and gates provided in 5. In addition, as a fraudulent act against the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using a magnet, for example, an illegal metal tool is used in the island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed (inside the space where the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed). , a magnet that indirectly operates the metal fraudulent device is installed, and the magnet and the metal fraud are detected through a slight gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the inside of the island facility or an opening created by partially destroying the pachinko machine 1. An act of illegally accessing the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 by operating the equipment is conceivable.

It should be noted that when a detection signal from the magnetic sensor 2470 is input in the fraudulent act detection process in step S112, it is determined that an act of fraudulent activity using a magnet is being performed. When it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed, the main control MPU sends a security signal to the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1. is output so that the hall clerk can grasp that the fraudulent act is being carried out.

Although not shown, the magnetic sensor 2470 of this example is composed of a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, and is a first magnetic detection sensor having a directivity with high sensitivity in the direction perpendicular to one side surface. It is now possible to perform magnetic detection within the region and magnetic detection within the second magnetic detection region having directivity with high sensitivity in the direction perpendicular to the other side, which is the opposite side. ing. It should be noted that "vertically sensitive" means that each side has greater sensitivity in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection area emitted from each side surface is a wide area surrounded by a spherical shape. The magnetic sensor 2470 is arranged so that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the sensor body spread in the front-rear direction when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. includes the surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and the magnetic detection area is the winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the big winning opening 2005, etc. on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and others It is possible to monitor a plurality of points among the main parts of the ball flow path, the other magnetic detection area includes the back side of the pachinko machine 1, and the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided so that it can be monitored. With such a configuration, it is possible to monitor whether the magnet approaches the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided, and whether the magnet approaches the area in front of the game area 5a. .

Further, in this example, as the vibration sensor 3005 for detecting cheating due to vibration, a vibration sensor capable of detecting the occurrence of vibration around the sorting piece 2415 inside the big winning hole 2005 provided on the game board 5 is used. A sensor 3004 is provided. And only during the jackpot game of normal times, the vibration sensor 3005 is used to monitor cheating, and the vibration sensor 3005 is not used to monitor cheating except for the jackpot game. This is because, in the jackpot game, the sorting piece 2415 sorts the game ball B which is received in the big winning opening 2005 and circulates to either the first receiving opening 2007 or the second receiving opening 2008. , when vibration is applied to the sorting piece 2415, it becomes possible to change the course of the game ball B inside the big winning opening 2005 and make the game ball B enter the second receiving opening 2008. , to prevent such fraud. That is, during the jackpot game in the normal state, the vibration sensor 3005 applies vibration (vibration due to unauthorized access) that should not occur to the periphery of the distribution piece 2415 inside the big winning hole 2005. It monitors whether or not the game ball B is caught, and monitors cheating such as changing the course of the game ball B inside the big winning hole 2005 and causing the game ball B to enter the second receiving hole 2008. - 特許庁

It should be noted that when a detection signal from the vibration sensor 3005 is input in the fraudulent act detection process of step S112, it is determined that an act of fraudulent activity is being performed by vibrating around the distribution piece 2415 inside the big prize winning opening 2005. Deciding. Then, when it is determined that a fraudulent act due to vibration is being carried out around the sorting piece 2415 inside the big winning hole 2005, it is installed on the game hall side via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1. The main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer that has been detected, so that the hall clerk can grasp that the fraudulent act is being carried out.

In addition, the security signal output when it is determined that a fraudulent act using vibration is being performed is the same signal as the security signal output when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed. . However, depending on whether the security signal is output when it is determined that a fraudulent act using vibration is being performed or when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed, a security signal is output. The notification mode is different when the external notification is performed in the fraud-related error processing controlled by the control MPU. That is, when it is determined that a fraudulent act is being performed by vibration and a security signal is output, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the speaker are displayed in a manner corresponding to the fraudulent act by vibration. In contrast to the notification by output, when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed and a security signal is output, a presentation is displayed in a manner corresponding to fraudulent activity using a magnet. It is possible to distinguish which fraudulent act is being performed by notifying by the image of the device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker.

Next, the monitoring of fraudulent actions during setting change or confirmation display of setting values will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158. FIG. FIG. 157 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraud while the setting value is being changed, and FIG. 158 is a time chart showing the monitoring state of fraud while the setting value is being displayed for confirmation.

As shown in FIG. 157, the magnetic sensor 2470 is not used to monitor fraud during the change permitted state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4. This is because, in the change permission state, the authorized operator who changes the setting of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 that operates as a function of the setting switching button. This is because there is no room for anyone other than the authorized operator who changes the settings to use the magnet to cheat. In addition, even if the authorized operator who changes the setting value has something that can generate magnetism, it is possible to prevent detection as a fraudulent act using a magnet. , it is possible to suppress the obstruction of regular setting change work.

Further, during the change permitted state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the vibration sensor 3005 is not used to monitor fraudulent activity. This is because, in the change permission state, the authorized operator who changes the setting of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 that operates as a setting switching button. This is because there is no room for anyone other than the authorized operator who makes the change to commit fraudulent acts using vibration. In addition, even if an authorized operator who changes the settings applies vibration when changing the setting values, it is possible to prevent detection of fraudulent actions due to vibrations, and to prevent unauthorized setting change work from being detected. Inhibition can be suppressed.

Further, in this example, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a while operating the depressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z, thereby setting the set value. A change can be made (change permission state), but when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, that is, when the change permission state starts, the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 The main control MPU outputs a security signal to the hall computer installed on the game hall side. In addition to this, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off at timing t4, that is, when the change permission state ends, the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 In response, the main control MPU outputs a security signal. In other words, when the setting value is changed, the security signal is output twice to the hall computer after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. This security signal is generated when a detection signal is input from the magnetic sensor 2470 in a state in which fraudulent activity using a magnet is monitored using the magnetic sensor 2470, and it is determined that fraudulent activity is being performed using vibration, In the state where the vibration sensor 3005 is used to monitor fraud due to vibration, when a detection signal is input from the vibration sensor 3005 and it is determined that fraud due to vibration is being performed, the hall computer It is the same signal as the output signal. However, in the change permitted state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2470 and monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor 3005 are not executed. , by outputting a security signal to the hall computer even in a state where such fraudulent activity is not monitored, the pachinko machine 1 is warned to be monitored through the hall computer, and the set value is set normally. The hall clerk can be made to know through the hall computer that the setting of is being changed. In other words, the hall clerk can monitor through the hall computer whether the set values have been changed by a person who commits fraudulent acts through the hall computer. Also, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the main control MPU outputs the second security signal, and the second security signal completes the setting change of the setting value. can be grasped by the hall clerk through the hall computer.

As for the security signal, it is sufficient that it is output to the hole computer only for a time that the hole computer can recognize, and the time from timing t3 to timing t3' is short (for example, less than 1 second). It may be for a long time (for example, 10 seconds or longer). However, if the output time of the security signal is long, the first security signal output when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on at timing t3, that is, when the change permission state is started, At timing t4, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF, that is, when the change permission state ends, there is a possibility that the change permission state has not ended. In other words, there is a possibility that the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4 before timing t3' at which the output of the first security signal ends arrives. As described above, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, that is, when the change permission state ends, if the output of the first security signal has not ended, the first security signal is not output. After the output of the signal is completed, a second security signal is output after a predetermined interval time (for example, 1 second). In other words, the output of the second security signal is delayed until the output of the first security signal is completed. As a result, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, that is, when the change permission state ends, even if the output of the first security signal has not ended, the hall computer can reliably output the security signal twice.

As another example in which the above-described predetermined interval period is not provided, the following may be done. That is, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, that is, when the change permission state ends, if the output of the first security signal has not ended, a new security signal is generated from that time point. (the timer that counts the signal output time is set again), and the first security signal and the second security signal may be output in a continuous manner. In this case, the security signal is output for a long period of time exceeding a predetermined maximum output time (output time of the first security signal). The hall clerk can be made aware of the completion of the setting change through the output of the security signal over a long period of time. In addition, depending on the environment of the game hall, etc., if it is not necessary for the hall clerk to know through the hall computer that the setting change has been completed using the security signal output mode, based on the operation of a predetermined changeover switch, etc. It may be possible to cancel without outputting the second security signal itself.

As shown in FIG. 158, in the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, as in the change permission state, the magnetic sensor 2470 is not used to monitor unauthorized actions. This is because, in the confirmation display state, an authorized operator who confirms and displays the set values operates the setting key switch 1311a, and a person other than the authorized operator who confirms and displays the set values is illegally using a magnet. This is because there is no room for Also, when confirming and displaying the setting value, even if the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display has something that can generate magnetism, it is prevented from being detected as fraudulent activity using a magnet. , it is possible to suppress the hindrance of the regular confirmation display work.

Further, in the confirmation display state from timing t3 to timing t4, as in the change permission state, the vibration sensor 3005 is not used to monitor fraudulent activity. This is because, in the confirmation display state, the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display of the set value operates the setting key switch 1311a, and there is no room for anyone other than the authorized operator who performs the confirmation display to commit fraudulent acts by vibration. because there is no In addition, even if the authorized operator who carries out the confirmation display of the setting value applies vibration when displaying the setting value, it is possible to prevent detection as an illegal act due to the vibration, thereby preventing the confirmation display work from being performed properly. Inhibition can be suppressed.

Further, in this example, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON, and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on by operating the power switch 630a without operating the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z. The confirmation display is possible (confirmation display state), but when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, that is, when the confirmation display state starts, the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off. A main control MPU outputs a security signal to a hall computer installed on the game hall side via the main control MPU. On the other hand, at the end of the change permission state, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the hall computer installed on the game hall side via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1 is While the control MPU outputs a security signal, at the end of the confirmation display state, when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at timing t4, the signal is sent to the game hall side via the external terminal plate 558 of the pachinko machine 1. The main control MPU is not outputting a security signal to the installed hall computer. In other words, when changing the set value, the security signal is output twice to the hall computer. will be output only once. As a result, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2470 and the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor 3005 are not executed. By outputting a security signal to the hall computer even though such fraudulent activity is not being monitored, the pachinko machine 1 is warned to be monitored through the hall computer and set to be legal. The hall clerk can be made to know through the hall computer that the confirmation display of the value is being performed. In other words, the hall clerk can monitor through the hall computer whether the confirmation display of the set value is not performed by the person who commits the fraudulent act through the hall computer. When the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF at the timing t4, the main control MPU does not output the second security signal as in the change permission state. It is possible to distinguish which of the confirmation display of .

In addition, when it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet or vibration is being performed and a security signal is output to the hall computer, the peripheral control is performed based on the transmission of the monitoring result from the main control MPU to the peripheral control MPU. As external notification in error-related processing controlled by the MPU, notification is performed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. When a security signal is output to the hall computer at the time of setting confirmation (confirmation display state), no information related to the monitoring results to the peripheral control MPU is transmitted, and an error-related error controlled by the peripheral control MPU is prevented. As an external notification in the processing, no notification is performed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, or the output from the speaker. This also makes it possible not to hinder normal setting change and confirmation display work.

As a modification of the above, when the setting key switch 1311a is set to the setting key ON and the pachinko machine 1 is powered on regardless of whether or not the pressing operation section of the RWM clear button 633z is operated, the setting Until the key switch 1311a is turned off, the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 are used to monitor fraudulent activity, while setting values are neither changed nor displayed for confirmation. You may do so. In addition, an operation unit other than the setting key switch 1311a, the RWM clear button 633z, and the power switch 630a is provided. It may be a period during which monitoring of fraudulent activity using is not performed. Even in such a case, even if the authorized operator who performs the inspection work brings the magnet close to the pachinko machine 1 or applies vibration, it will be detected as fraud due to the magnet or vibration. It is possible to prevent this, and suppress the obstruction of regular inspection work. In addition, at least at the start of the period in which the monitoring of fraudulent activity using the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 is not performed, a security signal is output to the hall computer, as at the start of the change permission state and confirmation display state. Thus, it is possible to warn the pachinko machine 1 through the hall computer that the pachinko machine 1 will be monitored, and let the hall clerk know through the hall computer that the inspection work is being carried out normally.

In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent activity by magnets, the location where magnetism is generated 5) is provided, but a plurality of magnetic sensors may be provided, for example, in front of the game board 5. In front of the game area 5a located and around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located behind the game board 5, each magnetic sensor may detect the generation of magnetism. In such a configuration, similar to the above-described configuration in which one magnetic sensor 2470 is provided, during normal times, a plurality of magnetic sensors are used to monitor fraudulent activity. , it may be possible not to monitor fraudulent activity using multiple magnetic sensors, but in the change permission state and confirmation display state, some of the multiple magnetic sensors (for example, setting change It is also possible to monitor fraud using only the substrate 1311 and the magnetic sensor provided around the setting key switch 1311a.

Similarly, in this example, as the vibration sensor 3005 for detecting cheating by vibration, it is possible to detect the occurrence of vibration around the distribution piece 2415 inside the big prize winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5. Although one vibration sensor is provided, a plurality of vibration sensors may be provided. Vibration sensors may detect the occurrence of vibrations around the ball entrance other than 2005 and around the setting change board 13111 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 . In such a configuration, during normal times, fraudulent activity is monitored using a plurality of vibration sensors (however, the vibration sensors provided around the distribution piece 2415 inside the big winning opening 2005 are Only during the jackpot game), in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, it may not be possible to monitor cheating using a plurality of vibration sensors, but in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, Fraudulent activity monitoring may be performed using only some of the plurality of vibration sensors (for example, vibration sensors provided around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switches 1311a).

In addition, fraudulent activity using magnets or vibration may be detected during security signal transmission immediately after the change permission state or confirmation display status ends (immediately after fraudulent activity monitoring is started). There is a concern that the fraud monitoring system may be weakened due to the inability to output important security signals based on behavior detection. In order to prevent such a situation, the following may be done. That is, the output timing of the security signal based on the detection of fraud is delayed until the second security signal output period in the change permission state and the first security signal output period in the confirmation display state have passed. It can be exemplified that the timings of outputting the security signal based on the detection of fraudulent activity do not overlap. Specifically, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, although the monitoring of fraudulent activity is started immediately, the output period of the second security signal in the change permission state or the first security signal in the confirmation display state If there is an opportunity to output a new security signal (detection of fraudulent activity) within the output period of , the previously output security signal is output without discarding the output of the new security signal. The output information of the new security signal may be stored and held until is completed, and the new security signal may be output with a delay from the original output timing. According to such an embodiment, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the output of the security signal based on the detection of the original fraud is not discarded and the fraud monitoring system is weakened. As another example, the timing of starting fraud monitoring itself may be extended until the second security signal output period in the change permission state or the first security signal output period in the confirmation display state ends. may be According to such an embodiment as well, the output of the security signal based on the detection of the original fraudulent act is not discarded, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the fraud monitoring system is weakened.

[14. About command transmission processing]
As described above, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 consists of the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and the payout control board 633 attached to the body frame 4, Each control is shared. Of these, the main control board 1310 controls game operations (progress of the game), while the peripheral control board 1510 controls various effects during the game based on commands from the main control board 1310 . Specifically, at a predetermined timing, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 stores information about the control of game effects and information about the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM (storing commands). By sequentially transmitting the set commands to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 also receives information on the control of game effects and information on the state of the pachinko machine 1. can grasp. However, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control built-in RAM stores information on the control of the game effect and information on the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands when changing the setting of the setting value or confirming and displaying the setting value. , only some of the commands are immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 during execution of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, and the rest of the commands are sent to the change permission state or the confirmation display state. After completion, it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 .

First, the command transmission timing when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 159(A) is a time chart showing command transmission timing when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is normally turned on (when the setting value is not changed or the confirmation display of the setting value is not performed), and FIG. 159(B). 2 is a time chart showing command transmission timings when changing setting values and displaying setting values for confirmation when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. In this example, at the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, at least the switch input processing of step S104 in the main control side timer interrupt processing is started, and the game ball B enters various winning ports and the gate section 2003. It is assumed that the main control MPU receives the detection signals from the corresponding detection sensors when the ball enters the ball.

As shown in FIG. 159, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on at timing t3, the main control MPU starts the main control side power-on processing shown in FIG. Then, during the period from timing t3 to timing ty, as described in the above [Behavior of pachinko machine when power is turned on], the processing of steps S10 to S24 of the main control side power-on processing is executed, and timing When ty arrives, it is determined which combination of the values of the RAM clear notification flags RCL-FLG and the values of the setting key ON flags CS-FLG are (steps S25 to S27). In the determination of step S25, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1, the predetermined set value change permission condition is satisfied. When the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to the setting change process of step S37 to set the setting permission state. Further, when the main control MPU determines in step S26 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, the main control built-in RAM After initializing, set it to a variable state. Further, when the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1 in the determination of step S27, a predetermined set value display permission is given. When the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to the set value confirmation display process of step S28 to enter the confirmation display state. Further, when the main control MPU determines in step S27 that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 0, the main control built-in RAM Make variable state possible without initializing . It should be noted that the variable state, as described above, by starting the main control side timer interrupt processing (special symbol and special electric accessories control processing of step S114) by executing the interrupt permission setting of step S52, function display This is a state in which it is possible to perform variable display of special symbols on the special symbol display device of the unit 1400 .

As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU) activates a system that controls drawing of the peripheral control board 1510 before the timing ty at which the main control MPU completes the wait time waiting process. Since the initialization process for booting has been completed, various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) can be received after timing ty.

As shown in FIG. 159(A), the setting key switch 1311a is not turned on at timing t3, and it is assumed that the power is normally turned on. In this case, if the pressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is operated at timing t3 as well, from timing ty, the main control built-in RAM is initialized in step S38, and then the variable state is set. On the other hand, if the depressing operation part of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated at timing t3, from timing ty, the main control built-in RAM is set to a variable state without being initialized in step S38. In such a variable state, the main control MPU can set information on the control of the game effect and information on the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in the command buffer of the main control built-in RAM. is set, it is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately.

For example, when the main body frame 4 is open at the timing ty, the main control MPU sets a door open command specifying that the main body frame 4 is open in the command buffer, and the door is opened. When the hour command is set, it is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . Then, the peripheral control MPU receives the door open time command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU), and until timing t5 at which the body frame 4 is closed, the effect display device is displayed. A door open notification is executed to notify that the body frame 4 is open by means of the image of 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. The notification when the door is opened consists of repeating a voice saying "The door is being opened", displaying the message "The door is being opened!", and emitting a lamp with a brightness higher than normal. In this way, when the main body frame 4 is open, the hall manager can immediately grasp that the main body frame 4 is open by executing the door open notification to the outside. During the opening of 4, the monitoring system can be strengthened so as to prevent anyone other than the hall manager from committing fraudulent acts.

As shown in FIG. 159(B), the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON at timing t3, and when changing the setting value or displaying the confirmation of the setting value, RWM When the pressing operation part of the clear button 633z is operated, from the timing ty, the change permission state is set so that the setting value can be changed, and at the timing t3, the pressing operation of the RWM clear button 633z is performed. If the part is not operated, a confirmation display state in which confirmation display of the setting value can be performed is made from the timing ty. In the change permission state, at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the change permission state is terminated, and from the timing t4, the main control built-in RAM is initialized in step S38, and then changed. make it possible. On the other hand, in the confirmation display state, at the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the confirmation display state is terminated, and from the timing t4, the main control built-in RAM is changed without initializing the main control built-in RAM in step S38. make it possible.

In the change permission state and the confirmation display state described above, the main control MPU sets information regarding the control of the game effect and information regarding the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the main control built-in RAM. , the storage area of the main control built-in RAM to be set differs depending on the type of the command. Specifically, at least in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, a first storage area (first command buffer) and a second storage area (second command buffer) are used as storage areas (command buffers) of the main control built-in RAM. When a command is set in the first command buffer, the command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. On the other hand, when a command is set in the second command buffer, the set command is sent to The command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off without immediately transmitting it to the peripheral control board 1510. At timing t4, the second command buffer , is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 . In other words, at least in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, commands that need to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately are set in the first command buffer, while the change permission state and the confirmation display state are set in the second command buffer at timing t4. A command that needs to be sent to the peripheral control board 1510 after ending the confirmation display state is set.

Except for the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the main control MPU sets information on the control of the game effect and information on the state of the pachinko machine 1 as various commands in the first command buffer, and stores them in the first command buffer. When a command is set, the command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. FIG. That is, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, commands are set in either the first command buffer or the second command buffer. A command is set only in the first command buffer so as to be immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . However, except for the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the first command buffer and the second command buffer are not divided, and when a command is set in the undivided command buffer, the command is immediately executed. It may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 .

First, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the commands set in the second command buffer include, as commands related to fraud monitoring, a command when the door is opened to specify that the main body frame 4 is open, and various prize openings. (first start opening 2002, second start opening 2004, big winning opening 2005, etc.) and when the game ball B enters the gate portion 2003, the input of the detection signal is set to an invalid period, but the detection itself (abnormal ball entry) ) can be used to specify that there was an abnormal ball entry command. Specifically, the command when the door is opened is set in the second command buffer when the body frame 4 is open at the timing ty when the change permission state or the confirmation display state starts, and the second command When the door open command is set in the buffer, the door open command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. , the door open command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . Also, the abnormal ball entry command is set in the second command buffer when game ball B is detected (abnormal ball entry) in the change permission state or confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4. When the command for abnormal ball entry is set in the second command buffer, the command for abnormal ball entry set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. , at timing t4, the abnormal ball entry command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. FIG.

Then, the peripheral control MPU receives a command for opening the door from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4. , the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used to notify that the main body frame 4 is open when the door is opened. The notification when the door is opened consists of repeating a voice saying "The door is being opened", displaying the message "The door is being opened!", and emitting a lamp with a brightness higher than normal. In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives an abnormal ball entry command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, and thereby controls the image, lamps, and speakers of the effect display device 1600 for a predetermined period from timing t4. , an abnormal ball entry notification is executed to notify that an abnormal ball entry has occurred in various prize winning openings or the gate section 2003 by the output from . This notification of abnormal ball entry is performed by repeating a voice saying "abnormal ball entry", displaying a message "abnormal ball entry!" In this manner, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, it is monitored whether or not the body frame 4 is open and whether or not there is an abnormal ball entry in the various prize winning openings and the gate section 2003, and the change permission state and the confirmation display are performed. After the end of the display state, by executing a door opening notification and an abnormal ball entry notification to the outside, it is possible to confirm that the body frame 4 is open and that an abnormal ball entry has occurred in the various prize-winning openings and the gate section 2003. The hall manager can grasp what happened. After the change permission state and the confirmation display state are ended, it is possible to simultaneously execute the door open notification and the abnormal ball entry notification. notification) may be preferentially executed.

As described above, commands related to fraud monitoring, such as the door opening command and the abnormal prize winning command, are set in the second command buffer in the change permission state or confirmation display state, and the set command is immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Without transmission, the command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. It is designed to be transmitted to the control board 1510 . As a result, when changing setting values or checking and displaying setting values, it is possible to prevent the execution of door open notification or abnormal ball entry notification due to unauthorized detection unintended by the hall manager. can suppress the inhibition of

On the other hand, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the commands set in the first command buffer include, as commands related to settings, a setting change command specifying that the change permission state is to be started, and a confirmation display state start time. A setting confirmation command specifying that it is time, a setting change completion command specifying that it is time to end the change permission state, a setting value confirmation display completion command that specifies that it is time to end the confirmation display state, etc. . Specifically, the setting change command is set in the first command buffer at timing ty when the change permission state starts, and the setting confirmation command is set at timing ty when the confirmation display state starts. , is set in the first command buffer, and any command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after being set. Similarly, the setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer at timing t4 when the change permission state ends, and the setting value confirmation display completion command is set at timing t4 when the confirmation display state ends. At this point, the first command buffer is set and any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 as soon as it is set.

When the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change command or a setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, the peripheral control MPU waits until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. During the period, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used to issue a warning notification corresponding to the type of command. In other words, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which are periods from timing ty to timing t4, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used to issue a warning notification corresponding to the type of command. . The warning notification corresponding to the setting change command is to repeat the voice "Settings are being changed", display the message "Settings are being changed!" and In addition, as an alarm notification corresponding to the setting confirmation command, there is a voice saying "Settings are being confirmed", a message "Settings are being confirmed!" (light emission mode different from the lamp light emission in the corresponding color) is executed during the change of the setting. In this way, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the hall manager can confirm that the setting value can be changed and the setting value can be confirmed and displayed by executing the warning notification to the outside. This can be grasped immediately, and the monitoring system can be strengthened so as to prevent anyone other than the hall manager from committing fraudulent acts in the change permission state or the confirmation display state.

As described above, commands related to settings, such as setting change commands and setting confirmation commands, are set in the first command buffer at timing ty, which is the start of the change permission state or confirmation display state, and the set command is executed. It is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . In the change permission state and the confirmation display state, even if the main body frame 4 is open or an abnormal ball is entered in the various winning openings or the gate portion 2003, the door opening notification is continued until after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends. Because it delays the execution of the abnormal ball entry notification, it is not a normal fraud monitoring system, but prior to the command set in the second command buffer, the setting change command, setting confirmation command, etc. By sending a command (a specific command for warning) related to the setting of to the peripheral control board 1510, the monitoring system is strengthened so that anyone other than the hall manager does not commit fraud even in the change permission state or the confirmation display state. be able to.

Further, when the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change command or a setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, it executes warning notification corresponding to the command type. In the change permission state, it is possible to change the settings of the set values. However, by executing an alert notification corresponding to the type of command, the hall manager can accurately determine whether or not the monitoring system needs to be strengthened.

In addition, when the peripheral control MPU receives a door open command or an abnormal ball entry command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, it executes a door open notification or an abnormal ball entry notification. However, in these notifications, not only are predetermined message contents notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, lamps, and output from the speaker, but also a warning sound such as "beep beep" is added to the sound from the speaker. Output (“The door is open, Beep, Beep, The door is open, etc.”) and execute it with a combination of “message + warning sound”. On the other hand, when a setting change command or a setting confirmation command is received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, an alert notification corresponding to the command type is executed. In the notification, the predetermined message content is notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker, but as for the sound output from the speaker, the warning sound is not output, and only the voice is used. ing. As a result, even if a warning effect corresponding to the type of command is executed when changing the setting value or confirming the setting value, Appeals can be suppressed, and interference with regular work can be suppressed.

[14-1. Timing of sending game information commands]
In the above-described embodiment, when the setting value confirmation display is performed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the processing of steps S29 to S36 is performed after performing the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28. That is, at the end of the confirmation display state (timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned OFF), in step S34, various information is read out from the game backup information, and a game information command corresponding to this various information is issued by the main control. By setting in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the RAM and sequentially transmitting the set game information commands to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 side also grasps the information regarding the game before the power is cut off. be able to. As a result, after the end of the confirmation display state, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the current game state, the variable display of the special symbol that was interrupted when the power was cut off, the number of reservations stored when the power was cut off, and the like. By grasping by the peripheral control MPU, the peripheral control MPU restores the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the effect by the output from the speaker, for example, the fluctuation of the decoration pattern that was interrupted when the power was cut off. The display can be resumed, and the display of the number of pending items stored at the time the power was turned off can be resumed.

In this regard, the game information command is processed in the second command buffer at the start of the confirmation display state (timing ty), not at the end of the confirmation display state (timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off). , and when the game information command is set in the second command buffer, the game information command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. However, the game information command set in the second command buffer may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at the timing t4. The set timing and transmission timing of the game information command when such game backup information is transmitted as the game information command will be described with reference to FIGS. 160 and 161. FIG. FIG. 160 is a flow chart showing a modification of the main-control-side power-on process. FIG. 161(A) is a time chart showing the transmission timing of the game information command when the pachinko machine 1 is normally powered on (when the RWM clear button 633z depressing operation portion and the setting key switch 1311a are not operated). 161(B) is a time chart showing the transmission timing of the game information command when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

In this example, a case is described in which the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is not operated when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the game backup information is transmitted as a game information command. When the RWM clear button 633z is operated when the power is turned on to initialize the main control built-in RAM or to change the settings of the set values, in step S38, it is specified from all areas of the main control built-in RAM Since the area is cleared except for the area, the game backup information is lost, and the game backup information is not transmitted as a game information command.

As shown in FIG. 160, in the main control power-on processing of this example, in the determination of step S26, the main control MPU sets the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG to a value of 1 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG to When it is determined that the value is not 0, first, steps S29 to S36 are performed. Among the processes of steps S29 to S36, in step 32, various information is read out from the game backup information, and a game information command corresponding to the various information is set in a predetermined storage area (command buffer) of the main control built-in RAM. there is After the processing of steps S29 to S36, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG is 1 (step S27). In step S27, the main control MPU determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0 and the setting key ON flag CS-FLG has a value of 1, and that the predetermined set value display permission condition is satisfied. When it is determined that there is, a setting value confirmation display process is performed (step S28). That is, the process of step S32 is performed before performing the set value confirmation display process of step S28, various information is read out from the game backup information, and a game information command corresponding to the various information is transmitted to a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. (command buffer). Further, when performing the processing of steps S29 to S36 after performing the set value confirmation display processing of step S28, the time for calculating the checksum in step S29 and the checksum value (sum value) in step S30 are The restart of the game will be delayed by the time to determine whether or not it matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power failure processing (power failure). , By performing the processing of steps S29 to S36 before performing the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28, the time until the game is restarted after performing the setting value confirmation display processing of step S28 is shortened. will be able to

As shown in FIG. 161(A), when the power is normally turned on, that is, when the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a are not operated at timing t3, the timing ty From this point on, the changeable state is set without initializing the main control built-in RAM in step S38. At the timing ty when such a variable state starts, the main control MPU sets the game backup information as a game information command in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and immediately after setting the game information command It will be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . As a result, the peripheral control MPU quickly restores the effect (the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker) at the time when the power supply is cut off at the timing ty, which is the start time of the variable state. be able to.

In addition, when the peripheral control MPU receives a game information command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, the effect member (for example, effect operation) mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 The initial operation of the unit 160 and the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210) is performed. That is, from the timing ty, which is the start time of the variable state, the initial operation of the production members (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. It is done. Each of these production members is a member capable of moving between an initial position and an operating position, and in the initial operation of the production member, the production member normally operates from the initial position toward the operating position. It is decided to perform accurate positioning so that the production members will wait at the initial position. Thus, even if the production member is at a position deviated from the initial position at the timing ty when the variable state is started, the production member can be returned to the initial position by performing the initial action, When the performance member does not return to the initial position by one initial action, the performance member is kept on standby at a position deviated from the initial position by repeating the control for returning the performance member to the initial position several times. can be prevented. After the completion of the initial motion of the effect member, the effect using the effect member can be executed. For example, as a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, if a variation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set during symbol variation is transmitted, a predetermined At the timing of , the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

As shown in FIG. 161(B), when confirming and displaying the setting value, that is, at timing t3, the setting key switch 1311a is turned ON and the pressing operation portion of the RWM clear button 633z is operated. If not, from the time of timing ty, a confirmation display state is set in which confirmation display of the setting value can be performed. In the confirmation display state, at timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the confirmation display state is terminated, and from the timing t4, the main control built-in RAM is changed without initialization of step S38. make it possible. In such a case, at the timing ty when the confirmation display state starts, the main control MPU sets the game backup information as a game information command in the second command buffer, and stores the game information command in the second command buffer. is set, the set game information command is not immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and until timing t4 at which the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the game set in the second command buffer The information command is held, and the game information command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t4. As a result, the peripheral control MPU can restore the effect (the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker) at the time when the power supply is cut off at the timing ty, which is the start time of the variable state. can.

As described above, the game information command is set in the second command buffer at the timing ty when the confirmation display state starts, and the set game information command is not immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. Until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the game information command set in the second command buffer is held, and at timing t4, the game information command set in the second command buffer is peripherally controlled. It is designed to be transmitted to the substrate 1510 . As a result, when confirming and displaying the setting value, the production (image of the production display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker) at the time when the power is cut off is prevented from being restored, and regular work is prevented. can be suppressed. In addition, since the game backup information has already been set in the second command buffer as a game information command at the timing ty when the confirmation display state starts, in the confirmation display state which is the period from the timing ty to the timing t4 Even if noise occurs and the game backup information is destroyed, the game information command can be reliably transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 .

The setting confirmation command is set in the first command buffer at the timing ty when the confirmation display state starts, and the set setting confirmation command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . Then, when the peripheral control MPU receives a setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, the effect member (for example, effect operation) mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 The initial operation of the unit 160 and the plurality of rotary ornaments 3210) is performed. That is, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing t3 to timing t4, the initial operation of the production members (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is performed. is being done. Each of these production members is a member capable of moving between an initial position and an operating position, and in the initial operation of the production member, the production member normally operates from the initial position toward the operating position. It is decided to perform accurate positioning so that the production members are on standby at the initial position. Thereby, even if the production member is at a position shifted from the initial position at the timing ty when the confirmation display state is started, the production member can be returned to the initial position by performing the initial operation, When the performance member does not return to the initial position by one initial action, the performance member is kept on standby at a position deviated from the initial position by repeating the control for returning the performance member to the initial position several times. can be prevented. After the end of the confirmation display state at timing t4, an effect using the effect member can be executed. For example, as a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, if a variation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set during symbol variation is transmitted, a predetermined At the timing of , the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

As described above, after the end of the confirmation display state at timing t4, while it is possible to transmit the variation pattern command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, the period from timing ty to timing t4 In the confirmation display state, the variation pattern is not transmitted. Therefore, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, the effect member does not operate by transmitting a variation pattern in which the effect using the effect member is set during the pattern variation. It cannot be determined whether or not it is not operating due to a failure of the production member. In this regard, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, the initial stage of the production members (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 is displayed. By performing the action, it is possible to inform the outside that ``the performance member is normal but it is not associated with the game,'' and it is possible to determine that the performance member is not out of order. In this example, in the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, the initial operation of the effect member is performed, but this operation is performed to inform that the effect member is not out of order. For example, in the confirmation display state that is the period from timing ty to timing t4, only a provisional movement of the effect member is performed separately from the initial movement, and after the confirmation display state at timing t4 ends. , the initial motion of the production member may be performed. Note that the temporary motion of the effect member may be a motion different from the initial motion, or may be the same motion as the initial motion.

When changing the setting value, the setting change command is set in the first command buffer at timing ty when the change permission state starts, and the set setting change command is immediately sent to the peripheral control board 1510 . are sending to Then, when the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, it is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 in the same way as when the setting confirmation command is received. The initial operation of the production member (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) is performed. In this way, even in the change permission state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, as in the confirmation display state, the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and a plurality of By performing the initial operation of the rotating decorative body 3210), it is possible to inform the outside that ``the production member is normal, but it is not associated with the game,'' and that the production member is not out of order. can be discriminated.

[14-2. Regarding the extension of the warning notification after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state]
In the above-described embodiment, during the period from timing ty to timing t4, which is the change permission state and the confirmation display state, an alarm corresponding to the type of command is issued by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. Although it is being executed, the warning notification may be extended and executed even after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. A case in which the warning notification is extended after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 162 is a time chart showing a case where the warning notification is extended after the end of the change permission state and the confirmation display state.

As shown in FIG. 162, as described above in detail, at the start of the change permission state at timing ty, the setting change command is set in the first command buffer, and at the end of the confirmation display state at timing ty, the first command A setting confirmation command is set in the buffer, and any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after being set. When the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change command or a setting confirmation command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing ty, the peripheral control MPU waits until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. During the period, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used to issue a warning notification corresponding to the type of command.

When the change permission state ends at timing t4, the setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer, and when the confirmation display state starts at timing t4, the setting value confirmation display completion command is set in the first command buffer. Any command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as soon as it is set. At this time, the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change completion command or a setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, and thereby receives a predetermined time (for example, During the period until timing t4' after 30 seconds) has passed, the warning notification being executed from the timing ty is continuously executed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. there is In other words, during the period from timing ty to timing t4, which is the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the warning notification corresponding to the command type is executed. The warning notification is extended for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) from t4 to timing t4'. The extension of the alert notification is terminated by setting extension termination conditions of the alert notification and satisfying the set extension termination conditions. Specifically, when the extended period of warning notification ends in a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is set in a specific timer section, and the timer section measures the predetermined time. and ends when the time expires. As another example, when the extended period of warning notification ends with a predetermined number of voice notifications (for example, a loop of five message voices), the predetermined number of times is set in a specific counting unit, and the counting is performed. The unit may start counting a predetermined number of times and end when the number of times expires.

As described above, when the change permission state and the confirmation display state are executed, not only the period from the timing ty to the timing t4 but also the timing t4' after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the timing t4. Until then, the warning announcement is extended and executed. For example, in the case of executing the warning notification only when the change permission state or the confirmation display state is executed, in a short time (for example, 1 to 2 seconds) from the timing ty which is the start time of the change permission state or the confirmation display state When the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, the period from timing ty to timing t4, during which the warning notification is executed, is shortened. If the confirmation is displayed, the hall manager may not notice it. In particular, when confirming and displaying the setting values, it is not necessary to change the setting values. people may not notice. On the other hand, if the warning notification is to be extended even after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, a short time (for example, 1 2 seconds), the period from timing t4 to timing t4' is secured as the time for executing the warning notification. For this reason, even if someone other than the hall manager illegally changes the setting value or displays the confirmation display of the setting value in a short time, the hall manager can easily notice it, and the person other than the hall manager can not commit fraudulent acts. The monitoring system can be strengthened to prevent

In addition, as described above in detail, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which are the period from timing ty to timing t4, an alert corresponding to the type of command is displayed by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. running notifications. The warning notification corresponding to the setting change command is to repeat the voice "Settings are being changed", display the message "Settings are being changed!" and In addition, as a warning notification corresponding to the setting confirmation command, the voice "Setting confirmation is in progress", the message "Setting confirmation in progress!" I'm doing it. In addition, if the warning notification is to be extended after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, the content of the warning notification message during the change permission state or confirmation display state may be maintained. The content of the message may be different from the state and the confirmation display state. For example, in the warning notification after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the message content different from the message content during the change permission state or confirmation display state is "The setting change is completed" or "The setting confirmation is completed." It may be configured to loop and output a message such as As a result, it is possible to make it easy for the hall manager to notice not only the countermeasures against the above-described fraudulent act, but also when the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends normally. In addition, when maintaining the message content of the warning notification during the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is necessary to prevent temporary interruption of the warning at t4, which is the timing of switching from the extension of the warning notification. good too. For example, at least the voice output from the speaker of the warning notification executed corresponding to the command type in the change permission state or the confirmation display state is continuously output until the voice is completed so as not to end halfway. As for the sound in the extended warning notification, it can be exemplified that after the sound of the continuously output warning notification is completed, the sound is re-executed from the beginning of the sound.

As for warning notification, predetermined message contents are notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker, but the sound output from the speaker is used to notify when the door is opened or when an abnormal ball is entered. Warning sounds such as "beep beep" that are output as are not output, and are executed only by voice. In addition, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which are periods from timing ty to timing t4, the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is in a non-variable state in which it is impossible to perform variable display of special symbols. On the other hand, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 is in a variable state in which it is possible to perform variable display of special symbols. For example, by transmitting a variation pattern command from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, various effects sounds are output from the speaker. In this regard, even if the warning notification is extended after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, there is no warning sound output from the speaker as a warning notification, so there is a finite number of options for outputting sound. A situation in which there is no vacancy (unused channel) in the finitely provided channels when assigning to the finitely provided channels for outputting various effects sounds. can be avoided as much as possible.

Further, in the case of extending and executing the warning notification after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the peripheral control MPU receives the door opening command or abnormal ball entry from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4. Although the time command is received, the door opening notification and abnormal ball entry notification are not executed at timing t4, and the door is opened from timing t4', which is the end of the extended warning notification. Time notification and abnormal entry time notification are performed. That is, when the warning notification is extended after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the extended warning notification is executed with priority over the door opening notification and the abnormal ball entry notification. As a result, even if someone other than the hall manager illegally changes the setting value or displays the confirmation display of the setting value in a short time, the extended warning notification is given priority, so that the hall manager can It is easy to notice, and the monitoring system can be strengthened so that anyone other than the hall manager does not commit fraudulent acts. It should be noted that the notification suspected of serious fraud (for example, notification of abnormal ball entry) is not at timing t4', which is the end of the extended warning notification, but during the extended warning notification. may be executed at timing t4.

As for the door opening notification and the abnormal ball entry notification, not only is the predetermined message content notified by the image and lamp of the effect display device 1600 and output from the speaker, but also a warning sound such as "beep beep" is emitted from the speaker. is output and executed with a combination of "message + warning sound". The door opening notification and the abnormal ball entry notification are continuously output while the door opening notification and the abnormal ball entry notification are being executed, but are configured to be output only for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds). may be However, in this example, since the door opening notification and the abnormal ball entry notification are executed from the timing t4', which is the end time of the extended warning notification, for example, the extension time of the warning notification (timing period from t4 to timing t4') is longer than or equal to the output time (for example, 10 seconds) of the door open notification or abnormal ball entry notification, the door open notification or abnormal The notification at the time of entering the ball will not be output. In view of the problem caused by this decrease in notification frequency, if the extension time of warning notification (period from timing t4 to timing t4') is longer than or equal to the output time of warning sound (for example, 10 seconds) Alternatively, the door open notification or abnormal ball entry notification may be output only for the remaining time after the warning notification extension time out of the output time of the door open notification or abnormal ball entry notification. . Further, it may be configured such that the door opening notification and the abnormal ball entry notification are newly started after the extension time of the warning notification.

Further, when extending the warning notification after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the door opening notification is executed from the timing t4' when the extended warning notification ends. , when the timing t5 at which the body frame 4 is closed comes earlier than the timing t4', the door opening notification is not executed. In other words, when the body frame 4 is closed during execution of the extended warning notification, the door opening notification is not executed. However, if the body frame 4 is closed during execution of the extended warning notification and the body frame 4 is opened again before timing t4', the extended warning notification is terminated and the door open notification is performed. Running. Normally, the main body frame 4 is only closed after the setting value is changed or the setting value is displayed for confirmation, and the main body frame 4 is not opened again. If an incomprehensible situation arises in which the main body frame 4 is opened again immediately after changing the setting or displaying the confirmation of the set value, the door opening notification consisting of a combination of "message + warning sound" will be changed to warning notification. By giving priority to execution, the hall manager can easily notice that the main frame 4 is open due to an incomprehensible situation suspected of fraud, etc., and the situation in which the main frame 4 is open will continue. The monitoring system can be strengthened to prevent

In addition, as described above in detail, during the period from timing ty to timing t4, which is the change permission state and the confirmation display state, even though the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 are not used to monitor fraudulent activity, On the other hand, after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state, fraudulent activity monitoring is executed using the magnetic sensor 2470 and the vibration sensor 3005 (however, the fraudulent activity monitoring using the vibration sensor 3005 is , only during jackpot games). When it is determined that a fraudulent act is being performed by magnets or vibrations, fraudulent reporting is carried out as an external report by an image of the effect display device 1600, a lamp, or an output from a speaker. At this time, even if the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the fraud notification is executed with priority over the extended warning notification. In this way, by prioritizing fraud alerts suspected of serious fraud, such as magnets and vibrations, over extended warning alerts, the hall manager can easily notice it, and it is possible for anyone other than the hall manager to commit fraud. The monitoring system can be strengthened to prevent

In addition, in the warning notification, the predetermined message content is notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. The image of the device 1600 may be configured not to be output. In such a configuration in which a part of a plurality of notification members (effect display device 1600, lamp, speaker) is used to issue a warning notification, the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. In this case, it is not output from the image of the effect display device 1600 as an extended warning notification, but is output as an extended warning notification if it is determined that a fraudulent act is being performed by a magnet or vibration. The fraud notification may be executed only by the image of the effect display device 1600 that is not used (by notification using only the unused notification members among the plurality of notification members). As a result, when extending and executing the warning notification after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to make the hall manager aware of the fraudulent notification suspected of fraud without canceling the extended warning notification. can. Similarly, regarding the door opening notification and the abnormal winning notification, only the image of the effect display device 1600 that is not output as the warning notification during extension (only the unused notification member out of the plurality of notification members is used) Depending on the notification used), the door opening notification and the abnormal winning notification may be executed.

Also, in this example, the warning notification is extended and executed even after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, but only after the end of the confirmation display state. It is good also as a structure which carries out. For example, when changing setting values, the main control built-in RAM is initialized after the end of the change permission state (in step S38, all areas of the main control built-in RAM are cleared except for a specific area). However, the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, so that a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since timing t4. In the period until timing t4' arrives, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are configured to execute the RAM clear notification to notify that the RAM is cleared instead of the extension of the warning notification. may be As a result, after the end of the change permission state, the hall manager can grasp that the RAM has been cleared.

[14-3. Regarding the case where the initial action of the effect member is performed after the end of the change permission state or confirmation display state]
In the above-described embodiment, during the period from timing ty to timing t4, which is the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the effect members mounted on the main body frame 4 and the game board 5 (for example, the effect operation unit 160 and a plurality of Although the initial operation of the rotating decorative body 3210) is performed, the initial operation of the effect member may be performed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends. A case in which the effect member is initialized after the end of the change permission state and the confirmation display state will be described with reference to FIG. 163 . FIG. 163 is a time chart showing a case where the initial action of the effect member is performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state.

As shown in FIG. 163, when the change permission state ends at timing t4, the setting change completion command is set in the first command buffer, and when the confirmation display state ends at timing t4, the setting value is confirmed in the first command buffer. A display completion command is set, and any command is sent to the peripheral control board 1510 immediately after being set. At this time, the peripheral control MPU is mounted on the main body frame 4 or the game board 5 by receiving a setting change completion command or a setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4. The initial operation of the production member (for example, the production operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorations 3210) has been started. In other words, during the period from timing ty to timing t4, the change permission state and the confirmation display state do not perform the initial action of the production member. is designed to perform the initial operation of

The production members described above include the production operation unit 160 and a plurality of rotary decorations 3210 as members each capable of moving between the initial position and the operating position. In the initial motion of such a performance member, a return process for performing accurate positioning so that the performance member stands by at the initial position and confirmation of whether the performance member operates normally from the initial position toward the operating position are performed. Confirmation processing and are executed in order. For example, if the effect member is in operation when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned off, the effect member will stop at a position deviated from the initial position, and even when the power is turned on after that, the effect member will not be initialized. It is out of position. In this respect, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, at timing t4 when the change permission state or confirmation display state ends, even if the performance member is shifted from the initial position, the return processing is performed. By doing so, the production member can be returned to the initial position, and if the production member does not return to the initial position in one return process, the return process for returning the production member to the initial position is repeated several times. , the production member can be prevented from waiting at a position deviated from the initial position. Also, in the confirmation process, after the performance member moves from the initial position to the operation position, it is operated to return from the operation position to the initial position, so that it can be confirmed whether the performance member operates normally. In addition, if the production member does not return to the initial position even after repeating the return process several times, or if the production member does not move normally to the operating position or the initial position in the confirmation process, the production member is abnormal. The occurrence of is notified to the outside. After the completion of the initial motion of the effect member, the effect using the effect member can be executed. For example, as a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, if a variation pattern in which an effect using an effect member is set during symbol variation is transmitted, a predetermined At the timing of , the effect member is moved from the initial position to the operating position.

Further, the effect member includes a light guide plate 3110 capable of decorating the first pattern and the second pattern with light by irradiating light. In the initial operation of the light guide plate 3110, confirmation processing is performed to confirm whether the light guide plate 3110 is normally decorated with light. In other words, in the confirmation process, the process of irradiating the light guide plate 3110 with light so as to decorate the first pattern and the process of irradiating the light guide plate 3110 with light so as to decorate the light guide plate 3110 with the second pattern are repeated several times. , it can be confirmed whether the light guide plate 3110 is normally decorated with light. It should be noted that the initial operation of the effect operation unit 160 and the plurality of rotary decorative bodies 3210 and the initial operation of the light guide plate 3110 are performed in parallel from the timing t4 when the change permission state and the confirmation display state end. I have to. Then, after the initial operation of the light guide plate 3110 is finished, it is possible to execute the effect using the light guide plate 3110. - 特許庁For example, as the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, when a variation pattern in which the effect using the light guide plate 3110 is set during the pattern variation is transmitted, during the pattern variation At a predetermined timing, the light guide plate 3110 is decorated with the first pattern and the second pattern.

As described above, in this example, after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, are set without performing the initial operation of the effect member. Only the setting change of the value and the confirmation display of the set value are performed, and after the end of the change permission state and the confirmation display state at the timing t4, the initial operation of the effect member is performed. For example, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, if the initial action of the production member is performed, the setting value change or setting value setting change is performed at the time of confirmation work at the factory. At the same time as confirming whether the confirmation display functions normally, it is necessary to confirm whether the presentation member operates normally by the initial operation of the presentation member, and it is difficult for the person who performs confirmation work at the factory to confirm. . However, after the end of the change permission state and the confirmation display state at the timing t4, by performing the initial action of the effect member, the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which are the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, have the set value Only the setting change and the confirmation display of the set value are performed, and after the change permission state and the confirmation display state at timing t4, it is possible to only confirm whether the presentation member operates normally by the initial operation of the presentation member. It is possible to increase the certainty of confirmation because it is not necessary for the person who performs the confirmation work in the factory to confirm at the same time.

In the above description, when the peripheral control MPU receives a setting change completion command or a setting value confirmation display completion command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, the initial operation of the effect member is performed. However, apart from the setting change completion command and the setting value confirmation display completion command, the initial operation command for performing the initial operation of the effect member was received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4. At this time, an initial motion of the effect member may be performed. Such an initial operation command is set in the first command buffer at timing t4 when the change permission state or confirmation display state ends, and is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 when the initial operation command is set. and On the other hand, the initial operation command is set in the second command buffer at the timing ty when the change permission state or the confirmation display state starts, and the set initial operation command is immediately transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The initial operation command set in the second command buffer is held until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, and the initial operation command set in the second command buffer is held at timing t4. may be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . In such a case, even though the initial operation command is set at the timing ty at which the change permission state or the confirmation display state starts, until the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off, The initial action of the effect member can be delayed, and the initial action of the effect member can be performed after the change permission state or confirmation display state ends.

Further, when the change permission state or the confirmation display state is executed, not only the period from the timing ty to the timing t4, but also the period from the timing t4 to the timing t4' after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed. When the warning notification is extended and executed, the extension time of the warning notification is set so as to be longer than the time during which the initial motion of the performance member is performed. In other words, the initial action of the effect member performed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state is ended before the warning notification extended after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state is ended. . As described above, after the end of the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the special symbol display device of the function display unit 1400 shifts to a variable state in which the special symbols can be variably displayed, and the player starts the game. Although it is possible to do so, during the period when the warning notification is extended and executed, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are executed, and the external warning is increased. and For this reason, the period during which the warning notification is extended makes the player hesitate to start the game, and is not actually a period in which the player tries to start the game. In this regard, by ending the initial action of the production member during the period in which the warning notification is extended and executed, the extended warning notification is finished, and when the player tries to start the game. , the initial action of the production member has already been completed. For this reason, after the termination of the warning notification extended after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to execute the effect using the effect member without being affected by the initial operation of the effect member. , it is possible not to miss the information obtained from the content of the presentation. In addition, during the period when the warning notification is extended and executed, in order to encourage the player not to start the game, the content of the extended warning notification is changed to "Please wait a little longer before starting the game". It may be executed in a mode including a special message prompting the player to wait for the game.

In addition, when performing the initial action of the effect member after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, if the effect member does not return to the initial position even if the return process is repeated several times, or if the effect member does not return to the initial position in the confirmation process If the operation position or the initial position does not operate normally, the image of the production display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are used to notify the outside that an abnormality has occurred in the production member. running notifications. At this time, even if the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the accessory abnormality notification is executed with priority over the extended warning notification. In this way, by prioritizing the accessory abnormality notification over the extended warning notification, the hall manager can easily notice and easily confirm whether the production members operate normally.

In addition, in the warning notification, the predetermined message content is notified by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. The image of the device 1600 may be configured not to be output. In such a configuration in which a part of a plurality of notification members (effect display device 1600, lamp, speaker) is used to issue a warning notification, the warning notification is extended and executed after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state. In this case, the image of the production display device 1600 is not output as an extended warning notification, but if it is determined that an abnormality has occurred in the production member, an effect is not output as an extended warning notification. The accessory abnormality notification may be executed only by the image of the display device 1600 (by notification using only unused notification members among the plurality of notification members). Thus, in the case of extending and executing the alert notification after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the hall manager can be made aware of the accessory abnormality alert without canceling the extended alert alert.

In addition, in this example, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, as the initial operation of the production member, a return process for performing accurate positioning so that the production member waits at the initial position, and the production member operates from the initial position. Confirmation processing for confirming whether or not it operates normally toward the position is sequentially executed, but the return processing may be executed first in the change permission state or the confirmation display state. In other words, from the start of the change permission state or the confirmation display state at timing ty, only the return processing of the initial actions of the effect member is executed, and after the change permission state or confirmation display state at timing t4, the effect member The confirmation process may be executed in the initial operation of . Here, regarding the return processing, if the effect member does not return to the initial position in one return processing, the return processing for returning the effect member to the initial position is repeated several times, so a long time is required. may become. In this regard, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, which are the period from timing ty to timing t4, by executing the restoration process in advance, even if the restoration process requires a long time, the change There is no influence on the time until the confirmation process as the initial operation of the performance member is completed after the end of the permission state or the confirmation display state. Therefore, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the initial action of the effect member can be completed relatively quickly, and thereafter the effect using the effect member based on the variation pattern can be executed.

Further, in this example, when the transition to either the change permission state or the confirmation display state occurs at the timing ty, the initial operation of the effect member is performed after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends at the timing t4. However, when shifting to the confirmation display state, the initial action of the effect member may be performed in advance in the confirmation display state. That is, in the case of shifting to the change permission state, after the change permission state and the confirmation display state at the timing t4, the initial action of the effect member is performed, whereas in the case of shifting to the confirmation display state, the timing The initial action of the presentation member may be performed from the start of the confirmation display state at ty. Here, in the confirmation display state, the setting value is not changed unlike the change permission state, and only the setting confirmation of the setting value is performed. Therefore, the confirmation display state can be ended in a relatively short time. is possible. In this regard, when shifting to the confirmation display state, the initial action of the production member is performed in advance in the confirmation display state, so that the initial action of the production member is completed before the confirmation display state ends. can be made Therefore, after the end of the confirmation display state, it is possible to execute the production using the production member based on the variation pattern, and the initial operation of the production member is completed while the confirmation display state is ended in a relatively short time. It is possible to prevent a situation in which it is difficult for a player to start a game because the game is not played.

[14-4. Modifications of Fraud Monitoring]
In the above-described embodiment, the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent activity using a magnet is used as a location where magnetism is generated (around the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5, or around the game board 5). A single magnetic sensor is provided that can identify the area in front of the game area 5a located in front of the game board 5. In front of the game area 5a and around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located behind the game board 5, each magnetic sensor may detect the generation of magnetism. In the change permission state and the confirmation display state, fraudulent acts using only some of the plurality of magnetic sensors (for example, the magnetic sensors provided around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a). monitoring may be performed. A modified example of monitoring of fraudulent activity during such setting change or confirmation display of setting values will be described with reference to FIG. 164 . FIG. 164 is a time chart showing a modified example of the fraudulent activity monitoring state during setting change or setting value confirmation display.

In this example, as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent activity by a magnet, a setting operation unit capable of detecting the generation of magnetism around the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a located on the rear side of the game board 5 is used. A magnetic sensor 2470a and a game area section magnetic sensor 2470b capable of detecting the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located on the front side of the game board 5 are provided. In normal times, the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2470a is used to monitor fraudulent activity in a predetermined area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In other words, normally, the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2470a detects magnetism that should not be generated (such It monitors whether a magnetism has occurred (whether a magnet has approached), and monitors fraudulent behavior such as an attempt to change settings or display confirmation by a person other than the person who performs the setting change or confirmation display. Examples of fraudulent acts against the back side of the pachinko machine 1 using magnets include, for example, illegal metal implements and their A magnet for indirectly manipulating the illegal metal implement is installed, and the magnet and the illegal metal implement are driven through a slight gap between the pachinko machine 1 and the inside of the island facility or an opening formed by partially destroying the pachinko machine 1. An act of illegally accessing the setting change board 1311 or the setting key switch 1311a on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is conceivable. It should be noted that when a detection signal is input from the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a in the fraudulent act detection process in step S112, an act of fraudulent act using a magnet is performed on the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switch 1311a are provided. has been determined to be carried out.

Similarly, during normal times, the playing area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor fraudulent activity in a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. FIG. In other words, normally, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b monitors the area in front of the game area 5a for magnetism that should not be generated (magnetism due to unauthorized access) (whether a magnet is approaching). It also monitors cheating, such as changing the path of the game ball B flowing down the game area 5a and causing the ball to enter various prize winning openings or gates provided on the game board 5.例文帳に追加It should be noted that, in the fraud detection process of step S112, when a detection signal is input from the game area magnetic sensor 2470b, it is determined that a fraudulent act using a magnet is being performed in the area in front of the game area 5a. are doing.

In this example, two magnetic sensors, a setting operation section magnetic sensor 2470a and a game area section magnetic sensor 2470b, are provided as the magnetic sensor 2470 for detecting fraudulent activity using magnets. Sensors 2470a, 2470b may have identical performance. That is, the two magnetic sensors 2470a and 2470b are composed of a rectangular box-shaped sensor body, although illustration is omitted, and the first magnetic sensor 2470a and 2470b has directivity with strong sensitivity in the direction perpendicular to one side surface. Magnetic detection within the magnetic detection region and magnetic detection within the second magnetic detection region having directivity with high sensitivity in the direction perpendicular to the other side opposite to the magnetic detection region. It has become. It should be noted that "vertically sensitive" means that each side has greater sensitivity in the vertical direction than in the horizontal direction, and does not mean that there is no sensitivity in the horizontal direction. In other words, the magnetic detection area emitted from each side surface is a wide area surrounded by a spherical shape. The game area magnetic sensor 2470b is arranged so that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the sensor body spread horizontally or vertically when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front. , a wide range of the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the first start opening 2002, the second start opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the big winning opening 2005, etc., and other main parts of the ball flow path, etc. location) can be monitored. On the other hand, the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2470a is configured so that the first magnetic detection area and the second magnetic detection area emitted from the side surface of the sensor body described above spread in the front-rear direction when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the front, and One magnetic detection area is arranged so as to include the back side of the pachinko machine 1 so that the area where the setting change board 1311 and the setting key switches 1311a are provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 can be monitored.

As shown in FIG. 164, during the period from timing ty to timing t4, which is the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a is used to monitor fraudulent activity in a predetermined area on the back side of the pachinko machine 1. is not executed, the gaming area section magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor fraudulent activity in a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 . This is because, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, an authorized operator who changes the setting values or confirms and displays the setting values on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 operates the setting key switch 1311a. While there is no room for anyone other than such a legitimate worker to commit fraudulent acts using a magnet, the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is positioned so that it cannot be visually recognized by a legitimate worker. This is because there is a possibility that a person other than such a regular worker may commit fraudulent acts using magnets. In addition, when the regular operator who changes the setting value or confirms and displays the setting value has something that can generate magnetism, the play area magnetic sensor 2470b may detect the generation of magnetism is low, setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a is likely to detect the generation of magnetism, but setting operation unit magnetic sensor 2470a detects the generation of magnetism as a fraudulent act using a magnet. Therefore, it is possible to suppress obstruction of regular setting change and confirmation display work.

Further, during the period from timing ty to timing t4, that is, the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the vibration sensor 3005 is not used to monitor fraudulent activity. This is because, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, when the authorized operator who changes the setting value and displays the confirmation display of the setting value operates the setting key switch 1311a, the setting key switch 1311a is set to the pachinko machine. This is because the vibration may be transmitted to the vibration sensor 3005 provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 although it is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 . In other words, even if an authorized operator who changes the settings of the set values or confirms and displays the set values applies vibration, the vibration sensor 3005 is prevented from detecting the occurrence of vibration as a fraudulent act due to vibration. setting change and hindrance of confirmation display work can be suppressed. In addition, in this example, only during the jackpot game of the normal time, the monitoring of cheating using the vibration sensor 3005 is executed. Not only that, but even in the variable state, the vibration sensor 3005 may be used to monitor fraudulent activity. Then, even when monitoring fraudulent activity using the vibration sensor 3005 in the variable state or during the jackpot game, the change permission state or the confirmation display state before shifting to the variable state , the vibration sensor 3005 is not used to monitor fraud. In other words, during the period from timing ty to timing t4, which is the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor illegal activities related to magnetism. Vibration fraud monitoring is not performed.

In this example, two magnetic sensors, the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2470a and the game area section magnetic sensor 2470b, are provided. It may be possible to detect only the generation of magnetism in front of the game area 5a located at . In such a configuration, as in the above-described two magnetic sensors, the magnetic sensor 2470b on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 is used not only in the normal state but also in the change permission state and the confirmation display state. It monitors fraudulent activity in a predetermined area. In addition, instead of one magnetic sensor, a plurality of magnetic sensors are provided as the game area magnetic sensor 2470b. You may monitor. For example, a plurality of winning openings such as the first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, normal winning opening 2003, and large winning opening 2005 on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and other main parts of the ball flow path On the other hand, it is possible to detect the generation of magnetism so that each magnetic sensor among the plurality of magnetic sensors corresponds to each other, thereby monitoring fraudulent activity. In such a configuration, not only in the normal state but also in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, all of the plurality of magnetic sensors as the game area magnetic sensor 2470b are used to control the entire area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1. We monitor fraudulent activity. However, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, only a part of the magnetic sensors among the plurality of magnetic sensors as the game area magnetic sensor 2470b are used, and an important area (for example, , the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, the normal winning opening 2003, the large winning opening 2005, etc.) may be monitored.

Also, in the change permission state or confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, when the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the generation of magnetism, a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 I believe that fraudulent activity has taken place. In addition, in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, which is the period from timing ty to timing t4, when the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the generation of magnetism, at that time, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the magnetic field. When the magnetism generating time command specifying the detection of the generation of magnetism is set in the second command buffer, and when the magnetism generating time command is set in the second command buffer, the timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off arrives. Until then, the magnetism generation command set in the second command buffer is held, and the magnetism generation command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 at timing t4. In addition, the peripheral control MPU receives a magnetism generation time command from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU) at timing t4, so that the images, lamps, and speakers of the effect display device 1600 are displayed for a predetermined period from timing t4. , a magnetism generation notification is executed to notify that the generation of magnetism has been detected in a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1 . This notification at the time of magnetism generation is performed by repeating a voice saying "abnormal magnetism detection", displaying a message "abnormal magnetism detection!", and emitting lamp with brightness higher than normal. Thus, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, it is monitored whether or not the generation of magnetism is detected in a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1, and after the change permission state or the confirmation display state ends, , by executing a magnetic detection notification to the outside, the pachinko hall manager can notify that the body frame 4 is open and that the generation of magnetism is detected in a predetermined area on the surface side of the pachinko machine 1. can grasp. It should be noted that after the end of the change permission state and the confirmation display state, it is possible to simultaneously execute the above-described door opening notification and abnormal ball entry notification, but the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the generation of magnetism. If this is the case, serious fraud may be suspected, and the notification at the time of magnetism generation may be preferentially executed.

As described above, commands related to fraud monitoring, such as magnetism generation commands, are set in the second command buffer in the change permission state or confirmation display state, in the same way as the above-described door opening command and abnormal winning command. Without immediately transmitting the set command to the peripheral control board 1510, the command set in the second command buffer is held until timing t4 when the setting key switch 1311a is turned off. The command set in the second command buffer is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 . As a result, even if the setting operation section magnetic sensor 2470a detects the generation of magnetism as a fraudulent act using a magnet when changing the setting of the set value or displaying the confirmation of the set value, the magnetism generation time notification is executed. It is possible to prevent this from happening and suppress the obstruction of regular work.

In the above, when the game area portion magnetic sensor 2470b detects the generation of magnetism in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the change permission state or the confirmation display state is changed without executing the magnetic generation time notification at that time. Although the magnetism generation notification is executed after the end, if the notification does not hinder normal work, it may be executed prior to the change permission state or confirmation display state. . For example, when the game area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the generation of magnetism in the change permission state or the confirmation display state, the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control MPU ) side, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the notification by the output from the speaker are delayed, but the output from the speaker is not performed, but only the error display is performed on the 7 segments provided on the payout control board 633. For example, the control board 1310 (main control MPU) side performs simple notification without delay.

In addition, in this example, in the change permission state and the confirmation display state, the game area magnetic sensor 2470b is used to monitor fraudulent activity in a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1, but only in the confirmation display state, It is also possible to use the game area section magnetic sensor 2470b to monitor fraudulent activity in a predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 . That is, in the confirmation display state, it is possible to perform confirmation display of the setting value by short-term work, so the possibility that the play area magnetic sensor 2470b detects the generation of magnetism due to a regular worker is low, While the monitoring of fraudulent activity in the predetermined area on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is strengthened using the game area magnetic sensor 2470b, in the change permission state, the setting value will be changed by long-term work. , there is a high possibility that the play area magnetic sensor 2470b will detect the generation of magnetism due to a regular worker, and the pachinko machine 1 It is also possible not to monitor fraudulent activity with respect to a predetermined area on the surface side of the .

[15. Regarding setting value suggestions]
In the present embodiment, based on a variation pattern determined using a predetermined variation pattern table, the effect display device 1600 executes a variation effect such as a variation display of decorative symbols, but as the variation effect, the current setting It makes it possible to perform a suggestive rendition capable of suggesting a value. As for the suggestive effect, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the effect is performed every time the variable display of the special symbols (variable display of the decorative symbols) is performed 100 times in the subsequent game. , and it is possible to suggest the current setting value. Specifically, when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, every time the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol) is performed 100 times in the subsequent game, the specified variation pattern table is used, and from the specific variation pattern table, the variation pattern in which the execution of the suggestive effect is set is determined. The transition of the variation pattern table after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 169. FIG. FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing a modification of the first variation pattern setting process. 166 is a table showing the transition of the variation pattern table after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, FIG. 167 is a time chart showing execution timings of various effects based on the variation pattern, and FIG. It is a variation pattern table C used when the number of variations of the special symbols after turning on the power of the machine 1 is 500 times, and FIG.

As shown in FIG. 165, in this example, in the first variation pattern setting process (and second variation pattern setting process), the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. I'm letting Specifically, when selecting the variation pattern table at the time of reach (at the time of loss of reach) in step S2144, in addition to the current game state, special symbols after power-on of pachinko machine 1 with operation of RWM clear button 633z A table is selected according to the number of fluctuations in Similarly, when selecting the variation pattern table at the time of losing in step S2145, in addition to the current game state, the number of variations of the special symbol after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 accompanied by the operation of the RWM clear button 633z selecting a table. It should be noted that "turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z" means that the RWM clear button 633z is operated but the setting key switch 1311a is not operated, and the main control is performed without changing the settings. When only the built-in RAM is initialized (when only the main control built-in RAM is initialized, the set values before the power shutdown are maintained), the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a are turned off. It includes a case where it is operated and a setting change of the setting value is performed.

In addition to the above, when selecting a variation pattern table according to the number of variations of special symbols after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 with operation of the RWM clear button 633z, the setting of the set value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. or only initialization of the main control built-in RAM without changing the settings, the number of times the special symbols change after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 is 500 times. Different variation pattern tables are selected at one time. Further, when the setting of the set value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is changed regardless of whether the set value is 1 to 6. is 500 times, the variation pattern tables selected are different.

It should be noted that after "turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 accompanied by the operation of the RWM clear button 633z", the variation counter stored in the main control built-in RAM is used to determine the fluctuation of the special symbols after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1. I know the number of times. That is, after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z, every time the variation display of the special symbol is performed, 1 is added (counted up) to the variation number counter, and the pachinko game with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z is performed. When the machine 1 is powered on, the variation counter is cleared. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on without operating the RWM clear button 633z, the variation counter is not cleared. In addition, after "turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 with the operation of the RWM clear button 633z", whether the setting value of the set value was changed at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the main control built-in without changing the setting. Information as to whether or not only the RAM has been initialized is also stored in the main control built-in RAM.

As shown in FIG. 166, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pachinko Variation pattern table A when the number of variations of special symbols after turning on the power of machine 1 is 1 to 99 times, variation pattern table B when 100 times, variation pattern table A when 101 to 199 times, Variation pattern table B when 200 times, variation pattern table A when 201 to 299 times, variation pattern table B when 300 times, variation pattern table A when 301 to 399 times, 400 times , variation pattern table A when 401 to 499 times, and variation pattern table C corresponding to the set value when 500 times. In addition, as the variation pattern table C according to the set value, the variation pattern table C1 when the set value is 1, the variation pattern table C2 when the set value is 2, and the variation pattern when the set value is 3 The table C3, the variation pattern table C4 when the set value is 4, the variation pattern table C5 when the set value is 5, and the variation pattern table C6 when the set value is 6 are selected.

A plurality of types of variation patterns are set in each of the above-described variation pattern tables, and each variation pattern includes the variation time of the special symbol and the effect display device 1600 executed within the variation time of the special symbol. Variable production such as variable display of decorative patterns in is set. In such a variable effect, the effect of whether or not the lottery result is a win is executed during the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols is started until it is stopped. In addition, as the fluctuation pattern table, there are fluctuation pattern tables A to C at the time of reaching (when losing reach) and fluctuation pattern tables A to C at the time of losing. Tables A to C are set with variation patterns for forming a ready-to-win effect in the variable display of decorative symbols to execute a ready-to-win effect, while variation pattern tables A to C at the time of losing are set with variations in decorative symbols. A fluctuation pattern that does not form a reach in the display is set. In other words, in the variation pattern tables A to C at the time of reach (at the time of loss of reach), the variation pattern tables A to C at the time of loss indicate whether or not to form reach in the variable display of decorative symbols (whether to execute reach effect). or not), different variation patterns are set. However, for the variation pattern table C at the time of reach (at the time of loss of reach), a variation pattern table C common to the variation pattern table C at the time of loss may be used. Although details will be described later, at the time of selecting the variation pattern table C, whether the lottery result is a hit or not (reach performance, etc.) is performed at either the time of reach (when the reach is lost) or the time of loss. Since the suggestive performance A2 (roulette performance) is executed based on the variation pattern without execution, the common variation pattern table C is set so as to determine the variation pattern in which the execution of such a suggestive performance A2 is set. can be used.

As shown in FIG. 167(A), in the variation pattern table A, as a plurality of types of variation patterns, variation patterns in which execution of suggestive effect is not set are set. That is, the variation pattern table A is a "variation pattern table that does not depend on the set value" that can be used in common for any set value. A2 is never executed. In addition, the game period using the variation pattern table A is set longer than the game period using the other variation pattern tables, thereby limiting the frequent appearance of the suggestive effects A1, A2, etc. Rareness of A1 and A2 is increased. In addition, the variation pattern table A is provided as a table that can be used in common for any set value, thereby suppressing the pressure on the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 1 due to an increase in the variation pattern table. can.

Further, as shown in FIG. 167(B), in the variation pattern table B, variation patterns in which execution of the suggestive effect A1 is set are set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. In addition, in the variation pattern table B, compared with the plurality of types of variation patterns set in the variation pattern table A, a variation pattern is set by adding 3 seconds of the variation time of each special symbol, and in the added 3 seconds , the suggestion effect A1 is executed. In the suggestion effect A1, the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light (1 to 3 times) suggests whether the current set value is high or low. However, in the variation pattern in which the execution of the suggestive effect A1 is set, the number of light emission times of the light guide plate 3110, which is the content of the suggestive effect A1, is not set. Specifically, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern in which the suggestive effect A1 is set to be executed, the light guide plate 3110 emits light 1 to 3 times based on the current set value. When determining the number of times of light emission of the light guide plate 3110, the number of times of light emission of the light guide plate 3110 increases as the current set value is set higher. At the timing when the variation pattern is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a change pattern command, the current setting value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a command. It is possible to grasp which of set values 1 to 6 the value is. Thus, in the suggestion effect A1, when the light guide plate 3110 emits a large number of times, it can be expected that the current setting value is high.

Incidentally, when the peripheral control board 1510 receives the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B, the variation display of the decorative pattern is started, and the performance of whether or not the lottery result is a win is executed, and the variation of the decorative pattern is performed. The display is temporarily stopped, and then the variable display of the decorative symbols is stopped, but the suggestion performance A1 is executed after the variable display of the decorative symbols is temporarily stopped until it is stopped. In this way, since the suggestive effect A1 is executed after the effect of whether or not the lottery result is a win is executed, the visual recognition of the effect of whether or not the lottery result is a win is not hindered. do not have.

Like the variation pattern table A, the variation pattern table B is also a "variation pattern table that does not depend on the set value" that can be used in common for any set value. As a result, it is possible to suppress the pressure on the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 1 due to the increase in the variation pattern table.

Further, as shown in FIG. 167(C), the variation pattern table C is set with variation patterns in which execution of the suggestive effect A2 is set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. In addition, the variation pattern for which the execution of the suggestive effect A2 is set is a variation pattern that is not set in the variation pattern table A or the variation pattern table B, and instead of the effect of whether the lottery result will be a hit or not. It is set to execute the suggestive effect A2. Then, in the suggestive effect A2, the roulette effect is executed, and the current setting is determined depending on whether the roulette effect is stopped at "even", "odd", "high setting", "set value 6" or "?". I try to suggest a value.

As shown in FIG. 168, in the variation pattern table C, there are a plurality of types of variation patterns, including variation pattern 1 for stopping at an "even number" and variation pattern for stopping at an "odd number" as a result of the roulette effect. 2. There are prepared a variation pattern 3 that stops at "high setting", a variation pattern 4 that stops at "set value 6", and a variation pattern 5 that stops at "?". Specifically, since the current set value is 1, the variation pattern 2 is set in the variation pattern table C1 so as to stop at an "odd number" as a result of the roulette effect. Further, in the variation pattern table C2, since the current set value is 2, variation pattern 1 is set in which the game is stopped at an "even number" as a result of the roulette effect. In addition, since the current set value is 3, the variation pattern 2 is set in the variation pattern table C3 so as to stop the game at an "odd number" as a result of the roulette effect. In addition, since the current set value is 4, the variation pattern table C4 includes variation pattern 1 that stops at "even number" and variation pattern that stops at "high setting" as a result of the roulette effect. 3 is set. In addition, since the current set value is 5, the variation pattern table C5 includes variation pattern 2 that stops at "odd number" and variation pattern that stops at "high setting" as a result of the roulette effect. 3 is set. In addition, since the current set value is 6, the variation pattern table C6 includes variation pattern 1 that stops at "even number" and variation pattern that stops at "high setting" as a result of the roulette effect. 3. Variation pattern 4 is set to stop at "set value 6". In this way, since the suggestive effect A2 includes a mode in which the set values such as "high setting" and "set value 6" are more concrete than the suggestive effect A1, attention should be paid to the result of the roulette effect. In the suggestion performance A2, when the roulette performance is stopped at ``high setting'' or ``set value 6'' as a result of the roulette performance, the probability of winning the lottery result is high, so that the player can play the game with anticipation.

When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern selected from the variation pattern tables C1 to C6, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started, the variable display of the decorative symbols is temporarily stopped, and then the variable display of the decorative symbols. is stopped, but during the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative patterns to the temporary stop, the variable display of the decorative patterns is produced without executing the production of whether or not the lottery result is a win. The roulette effect is executed as the suggestive effect A2 in a state where it is displayed small in the corner of the display device 1600.例文帳に追加As described above, since the suggestive effect A2 is executed in a state where the effect of whether the lottery result is a win or not is not executed, the variable display of the decorative pattern and the determination of whether the lottery result is a win or not are performed. Visual recognition of the suggestive performance A2 is not hindered by the performance, and the degree of attention to the suggestive performance A2 can be increased.

Further, as shown in FIG. 169, in the roulette effect, a roulette display divided into 5 of "even", "odd", "high setting", "set value 6", and "?" appears on the effect display device 1600. , The lighting point moves clockwise with the signal "Roulette production start!" Then, after a predetermined time has passed, the movement of the lighting position of the roulette display slows down slowly, and the result of the roulette effect based on the variation pattern ("even number", "odd number", "high setting", "set value 6", (either "?") will cause the lighting position to stop. At this time, when the roulette performance based on the variation pattern is stopped at "even number", it is recognized that the current set value is 2, 4 or 6, and when it is stopped at "odd number". recognizes that the current set value is 1, 3, or 5, and if it stops at "high setting", recognizes that the current set value is any of 4 to 5 If it stops at "set value 6", it recognizes that the current set value is 6, and if it stops at "?" It can be made to recognize that it is. For the variation patterns 1 to 5, the variation time of the special symbol is made different, and the time until the result stops in the roulette performance executed within the variation time of the special symbol is different.

The variation pattern table C differs from the variation pattern table A and the variation pattern table B in accordance with the set values, and is referred to as a "variation pattern table depending on the set values". As a result, the execution time of the suggestive effect A2 (roulette effect) can be varied according to the set value, and the degree of freedom in designing the effect suggestive of the set value can be increased.

As described above, when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pattern is selected from the variation pattern table B each time the variation display of the special symbols in the subsequent game is performed 100 times. A suggestion performance A1 is executed based on the variation pattern, and when the variation display of the special symbol is performed 500 times, a suggestion performance A2 is executed based on the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern tables C1 to C6. . Further, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the variation pattern tables C1 to C6 corresponding to the setting value are used when the variation display of the special symbol is performed 500 times. Then, the suggestive effect A2 is executed based on the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern tables C1 to C6 corresponding to the set value. In this way, when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, every time the variable display of the special symbol in the subsequent game is performed 100 times, the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 is executed. Since the set value of is suggested, the game can be played with anticipation until the suggestion performance A1 or the suggestion performance A2 is executed.

As shown in FIG. 166, when only the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the settings when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach (at the time of reach loss) As each of the variation pattern tables, variation pattern table A when the number of variations of special symbols after power-on of pachinko machine 1 is 1 to 99 times, variation pattern table B when 100 times, and 101 to 199 times. Variation pattern table A when , variation pattern table B when 200 times, variation pattern table A when 201 to 299 times, variation pattern table B when 300 times, 301 to 399 times When it is 400 times, the variation pattern table A is selected, when it is 400 times, the variation pattern table B is selected, when it is 401 to 499 times, the variation pattern table A is selected, and when it is 500 times, the variation pattern table C0 is selected. .

As described above, the variation pattern table B is set with variation patterns in which execution of the suggestive effect A1 is set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. After the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the light from the LED 3121 causes the light guide plate 3110 to emit light one to three times in the suggestion effect A1. While the pattern is made to emit light, after only initializing the main control built-in RAM without changing the setting when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, in the suggestion effect A1, the first pattern is not emitted from the LED 3131. The light guide plate 3110 is made to emit the second pattern once. For this reason, when the suggestive effect A1 is executed, whether the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on depending on whether the light guide plate 3110 emits the first pattern or the second pattern. , it is possible to grasp whether only the main control built-in RAM was initialized without changing the setting. In other words, in the suggestive effect A1, when the light guide plate 3110 emits light from the second pattern, information about the current set value such as the number of times the first pattern is emitted (1 to 3 times) cannot be grasped, It can be understood that there is no change in the set value from before the power shutdown and the previous set value is maintained.

Further, as described above, the variation pattern table C is set with variation patterns in which execution of the suggestive effect A2 is set as a plurality of types of variation patterns. Of these, when only the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the settings when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the variation pattern table C0 is selected, but in the variation pattern table C0 , irrespective of whether the current set value is 1 to 6, a variation pattern 5 is set in which the game is stopped at "?" as a result of the roulette effect. In this respect, after the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the suggestion effect A2 does not stop at “?” as a result of the roulette effect. ?”, it is possible to grasp that the main control built-in RAM has been initialized when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. That is, in the suggestive effect A2, when the roulette effect is stopped at "?" Although it cannot be grasped, it can be grasped that there is no change in the set value from before the power shutdown and the previous set value is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 166, when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the power is turned on normally (power on without operating the RWM clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a) The number of fluctuations of special symbols at the time of power shutdown is carried over, and a fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the number of fluctuations of special symbols after power-on of the pachinko machine 1 accompanied by operation of the RWM clear button 633z last time is created. I am going to choose. That is, when the power is turned off, the fluctuation number counter stored in the main control built-in RAM is retained (backed up), and when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on without the operation of the RWM clear button 633z, the fluctuation number counter is continuously used without clearing, and 1 is added (counted up) to the variation number counter each time the variation display of the special symbol is performed thereafter. Thus, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on without operating the RWM clear button 633z, the variation counter is not cleared. When it is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times, the suggestive effect A1 and the suggestive effect A2 are not always executed. For this reason, whether the suggestive performance A1 or the suggestive performance A2 is executed in addition to when the number of times the special symbols change after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times and 500 times. How can I get people to pay attention with anticipation?

In addition, the variation number counter is incremented by 1 (counted up) each time the special symbol variation is displayed. The variation number counter is cleared, and thereafter, 1 is added (counted up) each time the special symbol variation display is performed. That is, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the variation pattern table A (1st to 99th time) → B (100th time) → A (101st to 199th time) → B (200 th time) → A (201st to 299th time) → B (300th time) → A (301st to 399th time) → B (400th time) → A (401st to 499th time) → C1 to C6 (500th time) On the other hand, when the main control RAM is initialized when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the variation pattern table A (1st to 99th time) → B (100th time) → A (101st to 199th time) → B ( 200th) → A (201st to 299th) → B (300th) → A (301st to 399th) → B (400th) → A (401st to 499th) → C0 (500th) there is

Further, even before the number of times of variation of the special symbols after turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 reaches 500 times, if the result of the lottery is a win, the number of variations counter is cleared, and then the special symbols are restarted. is incremented by 1 (counted up) each time the variable display of is performed. In other words, after power-on of the pachinko machine 1, the suggestive performance A1 and the suggestive performance A2 are executed when the lottery result is consecutive 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times. As a result, even if the lottery results are not successful over the number of times the special symbols change 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the suggestion performance A1 and the Execution of the suggestive effect A2 can be expected.

Further, as described above, when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, in the suggestion effect A1, the current On the other hand, when only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the settings when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, in the suggestion effect A1, the light guide plate 3110 Although the second pattern is emitted, information regarding the current set value is not notified. Further, when the setting of the set value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the result of the roulette effect is "even", "odd", "high setting", and "set value 6" in the suggestive effect A2. Information about the current set value is notified by stopping at either of In the suggestive effect A2, the information about the current set value is not notified by stopping the roulette effect with either "?". Therefore, when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, if the hall manager does not want to notify the player of the information about the current setting value, the pachinko machine 1 can be played again. After turning off the power of the pachinko machine 1, the power is turned on, and when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the settings. can be turned off.

In addition, in the normal state (non-time-saving state), the variation pattern tables A to C are used in the above-described order each time the special symbol variation display is performed. In this case, as a table different from the variation pattern tables A to C, the variation pattern table for the time saving state is used. In the variation pattern table in the time saving state, variation patterns in which the variation time of the special symbol is shorter than in the normal state are set as a plurality of kinds of variation patterns. Then, even when the time saving state is entered after the lottery result is a hit, by selecting a specific variation pattern table when the number of times of variation of the special symbol after the start of the time saving state reaches a predetermined number, the From a specific variation pattern table, a variation pattern in which execution of suggestive performance is set is determined, and the suggestive performance is executed based on the variation pattern. At this time, for example, in the time-saving state, by executing the suggestive performance more frequently than in the normal state, not only whether the lottery result will be successful, but also whether the suggestive performance will be executed is expected with expectation. be able to. In addition, when the time saving state ends, the variation counter is cleared, and thereafter, 1 is added (counted up) every time the variation display of the special symbol is performed.

Also, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or when only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting, after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on The variation pattern table B and the variation pattern table C are used when the number of variations of the special symbol is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times, but the number of variations of the special symbol other than this is used. Also, a specific variation pattern table may be used. For example, a specific variation pattern table may be used when the special symbols are displayed for the first time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. In this way, by selecting a particular variation pattern table when the variation display of the special symbol is the first time after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, execution of the suggestive effect is set from the particular variation pattern table. It is made possible to determine a variation pattern that is determined, and to execute a suggestive effect based on the variation pattern. In this regard, the setting change of the setting value and the initialization of the main control built-in RAM without the setting change are mostly performed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on when the hall is opened. At the first time of the variable display of the special pattern after turning on the power of the machine 1, by executing the suggestion performance, it is possible to generate the willingness to start the game positively immediately after the opening of the hall.

In addition, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or when the main control RAM is initialized without changing the setting, the special symbol after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on When the number of fluctuations is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times and 500 times, the suggestive performance A1 and the suggestive performance A2 are executed using the variation pattern table B and the variation pattern table C. For example, using the effect display device 1600, the number of fluctuations of the special symbols after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is added based on the fluctuation counter (1 fluctuation → 2 fluctuations → 3 fluctuations → . increase the display), or subtract the remaining number of fluctuation display of special symbols until executing suggestive production A1 or suggestive production A2 based on the fluctuation counter (remaining 500 fluctuation → 499 The number of fluctuations may be notified in such a manner that the display of the number of fluctuations is decreased by "-1" (variation → 497 fluctuations → . . . ). In addition, such a notification is given when the execution timing of the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 is approaching, for example, the remaining number of variable display of the special symbol becomes 10 times until the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 is executed. It may be executed from the first stage. As a result, the player can grasp whether or not the execution timing of the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 is approaching, and information about the current set value can be obtained until the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 is executed. The game can be continued with the expectation that the game will be played.

In addition, at the stage when the execution timing of the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 is approaching, as a effect different from the notification of the number of times of variation of the special symbols, the game is notified that the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 is imminent. A special premonition effect to inform the person may be executed. For example, at the stage when the remaining number of variable display of the special symbols until the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 is executed reaches 10 times, the effect display device 1600 is used to display a message such as "Suggest setting in 10 more times!" By performing the display and prompting the player to continue playing the game, it is possible to give the player the expectation of obtaining information on the current set value and allow the player to continue playing the game. In addition, the notification of the number of fluctuations of the special symbols is given when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when only the main control internal RAM is initialized without changing the setting value. In this case, the content of notification may be reset to the initial state along with the initialization of the fluctuation number counter. As a result, there is no deviation between the number of times of variation notified to the player and the timing of executing the suggestion performance A1 or the suggestion performance A2 using the variation pattern table B or the variation pattern table C, thereby preventing the suggestion performance A1 or the suggestion. It is possible to increase the reliability of the performance A2.

[15-1. Regarding a modified example of transition of the fluctuation pattern table when the main control RAM is initialized]
In the above-described embodiment, when only the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the settings when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reach (at the time of loss of reach) and at the time of deviation As each of the variation pattern tables, the variation pattern tables are selected in an order different from when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and the variation patterns are selected from the variation pattern table B and the variation pattern table C0. In the suggestive effect A1 and the suggestive effect A2 when selecting , information about the current set value is not notified. As another embodiment, when only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the settings when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 Selection is performed in the same order of the variation pattern tables as when the set values are changed at the time of turning on the power in 1, and a suggestion performance A1 when a variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern table B or the variation pattern tables C1 to C6. or in the suggestion effect A2, information about the current set value may be notified. Below, the transition of the special variation pattern table when only the initialization of the main control built-in RAM is performed without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 170 is a table showing a modification of transition of the variation pattern table after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

As shown in FIG. 170, when only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the settings when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting values that have already been set are referred to, and the settings referred to Based on the values, a variation pattern table at the time of reach (at the time of loss of reach) and a variation pattern table at the time of loss are set respectively. Specifically, similarly to the case where the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 as each of the fluctuation pattern table at the time of reaching (at the time of losing reach) and the fluctuation pattern table at the time of losing After the power is turned on, the variation pattern table A when the number of variations of the special symbol is 1 to 99 times, the variation pattern table B when it is 100 times, the variation pattern table A when it is 101 to 199 times, 200 times Variation pattern table B when , variation pattern table A when 201 to 299 times, variation pattern table B when 300 times, variation pattern table A when 301 to 399 times, 400 times When it is 401 to 499 times, the variation pattern table A is selected, and when it is 500 times, the variation pattern table C corresponding to the set value is selected in this order. In addition, as the variation pattern table C according to the set value, the variation pattern table C1 when the set value is 1, the variation pattern table C2 when the set value is 2, and the variation pattern when the set value is 3 The table C3, the variation pattern table C4 when the set value is 4, the variation pattern table C5 when the set value is 5, and the variation pattern table C6 when the set value is 6 are selected.

Also, after only initializing the main control built-in RAM without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, after changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on Similarly, in the suggestion effect A1 when the variation pattern table B is selected, when the light guide plate 3110 emits light 1 to 3 times, the light from the LED 3121 causes the light guide plate 3110 to emit the first pattern. That is, in the suggestive effect A1, it is suggested whether the current set value is high or low depending on the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light (1 to 3 times). When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a variation pattern in which the suggestive effect A1 is set to be executed, it is determined which of 1 to 3 the number of times the light guide plate 3110 emits light based on the current set value. However, when determining the number of times of light emission of the light guide plate 3110, it is determined so that the number of times of light emission of the light guide plate 3110 increases as the current set value is set higher. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, even after only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the settings of the set values, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on in the suggestion effect A1 Information about the current set value can be grasped in the same way as after the setting value is changed, and when the light guide plate 3110 emits a large number of times, it can be expected that the current set value is high. .

Also, after only initializing the main control built-in RAM without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, after changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on Similarly, the variation pattern table C corresponding to the set value is selected when the number of variations of the special symbols after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is 500 times. That is, as the variation pattern table C according to the set value, the variation pattern table C1 when the set value is 1, the variation pattern table C2 when the set value is 2, and the variation pattern table when the set value is 3 C3, when the set value is 4, the variation pattern table C4 is selected, when the set value is 5, the variation pattern table C5 is selected, and when the set value is 6, the variation pattern table C6 is selected. Then, the variation pattern tables C1 to C6 are set so that the roulette effect is executed as the suggestive effect A2, and the result of the roulette effect is to stop at any of "even", "odd", "high setting", and "set value 6". Variation patterns 1 to 4 are set, and in the suggestion performance A2, the current set value is suggested by the result of the roulette performance based on the variation pattern. As a result, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, even after only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the settings of the set values, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on in the suggestion effect A2 Information on the current set value can be grasped in the same way as after the set value is changed, and when the roulette performance stops at ``high setting'' or ``set value 6'', the result of the lottery becomes a win. Since the probability is high, the game can be played with anticipation.

As described above, when only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the setting value is changed is carried out, every time the variation display of the special symbols in the subsequent game is performed 100 times, the suggestion performance A1 is executed based on the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B, and the variation of the special symbols. When the display is performed 500 times, since the suggestive performance A2 is executed based on the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern tables C1 to C6, there is no effect difference between the suggestive performance A1 and the suggestive performance A2. For this reason, depending on the execution of the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2, whether or not the setting value was changed when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 was turned on, only the main control built-in RAM was initialized without changing the setting value. It is not possible to grasp whether the

In this modified example, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the effect display device 1600 displays an image, a lamp, and an output from the speaker to notify the setting completion time, and the setting value is set. Notifying you of any changes. Similarly, when only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker are initialized. It notifies that the main control built-in RAM has been initialized. As a result, by executing the notification at the time of setting completion and the notification at the time of initialization completion, it is possible to initialize the main control built-in RAM without changing the setting of the setting value when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on. It is possible to grasp whether only the transformation was performed. In addition, as the notification at the time of setting completion and the notification at the time of initialization completion, for example, the initial display mode of the decorative pattern in the effect display device 1600 (initial pattern combination before the start of the first fluctuation, etc.) For example, a display mode different from that in the case where only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without accompanying the initialization. These notifications are issued when the pachinko machine 1 starts to display variable special symbols after the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, or when the pachinko machine 1 is powered off again and the power is turned on (power of the pachinko machine 1 without operating the RWM clear button 633z). When the input) is performed, it ends, and depending on the end of the notification, whether the setting value was changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 was turned on, or the main control built-in RAM was changed without changing the setting value. It becomes impossible to grasp whether only initialization was performed. As a result, the player is notified of whether the setting value has been changed when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or whether the main control built-in RAM has been initialized without changing the setting value. If the pachinko machine 1 is not desired, for example, the pachinko machine 1 is powered off again and turned on (turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1 without operating the RWM clear button 633z), so that setting completion notification is made. It is possible to arbitrarily create a state in which the initialization completion notification is not executed.

In addition, in this modification, when only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting value when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the setting value before the power is cut off is maintained. , for the fluctuation number counter, since the value before the power shutdown is reset, when selecting the fluctuation pattern table corresponding to the fluctuation number counter after that, start from the beginning (variation pattern table corresponding to the first fluctuation) It will happen. In other words, when only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the settings of the setting values when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the hall manager maintains the same setting values as before the power is turned off. Only the variation number counter can be reset, and when the number of variations of the special symbol is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times and 500 times from the power-on of the pachinko machine 1, the suggestive performance A1. or the suggestive effect A2 can notify information about the current set value. On the other hand, in the above-described embodiment, when only the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the settings of the set values when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the hall manager sets the same settings as before the power is turned off. While the value is maintained, the variation number counter is reset, but when the number of variations of the special symbol is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times from the time when the power supply of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, suggestions are made. Information about the current set value is not notified by the effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2. For this reason, while maintaining the same set value as before the power is turned off, when the number of times of fluctuation of the special symbol is 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, and 500 times from the time when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, suggestions are made. In order to notify the information about the current set value by the effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the pachinko machine 1 is operated to change the setting of the set value, and the same information as before the power is turned off is performed. It is necessary to reset the setting value. In this regard, in this modification, there is no need to change the setting values when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, and it is only necessary to initialize the main control built-in RAM without changing the setting values. , and the trouble of "resetting the same set values as before the power shutdown" can be saved.

Also, in this modification, as in the above-described embodiment, when the execution timing of the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 approaches, the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A1 or the A special premonitory effect may be executed to inform the player that the suggestive effect A2 is imminent to be executed. For example, at the stage when the remaining number of variable display of the special symbol until the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 is executed reaches 10 times, the effect display device 1600 is used to display a message such as "Suggest setting in 10 more times!" By performing the display and prompting the player to continue the game, it is possible to give the expectation that the information regarding the current set value will be obtained and to continue the game. In addition, the notification of the number of fluctuations of the special symbols is given when the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, or when the main control built-in RAM is initialized without changing the setting value. In this case, the contents of the notification may be reset to the initial state. As a result, there is no deviation between the number of times of variation notified to the player and the timing of executing the suggestion performance A1 or the suggestion performance A2 using the variation pattern table B or the variation pattern table C, thereby preventing the suggestion performance A1 or the suggestion. It is possible to increase the reliability of the performance A2.

[15-2. Suggestive effect B executed at a different timing from suggestive effect A1 and suggestive effect A2]
In the above-described embodiment, the case where the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 is executed according to the lapse of the decorative symbol fluctuation time within the variable effect such as the variable display of the decorative symbol in the effect display device 1600 has been described. It is possible to execute a suggestive performance B capable of suggesting the current set value at a timing different from the execution of the suggestive performance A1 and the suggestive performance A2 regardless of the lapse of the variation time of the decorative pattern. Execution of such suggestive effect B will be described with reference to FIG.

First, as for the suggestive performance B, a lottery as to whether or not to execute the suggestive performance B is performed with a predetermined probability when the steering wheel 111 that is not operated is operated in a situation where there is no operation instruction for the steering wheel 111.例文帳に追加ing. Specifically, when the handle touch sensor 192 detects the operation of the handle 111 and a detection signal is input to the payout control board 633, the input of the detection signal is notified via the main control board 1310. It is input to the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control board 1510 performs a lottery as to whether or not to execute the suggestive effect B with a predetermined probability (1/50 lottery in this embodiment). This lottery is set so that the probability of winning is at least higher than that of the jackpot lottery, and by making it appear frequently, it becomes easier for a plurality of players to experience the suggestion performance B, or for one player. The performance B is experienced a plurality of times to improve the player's desire to continue playing the game. Then, in the lottery for whether or not to execute the suggestive effect B, when it is decided to execute the suggestive effect B (when it is elected), one of a plurality of types of suggestive patterns is selected according to the current set value. A suggestive pattern is determined, and a suggestive performance B is executed based on the determined suggestive pattern. Further, in the suggestive effect B, the current set value is suggested by the output from the lamp and the speaker provided on the body frame 4 regardless of the suggestive pattern. It should be noted that when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (at the end of changing the setting of the setting value or displaying the confirmation of the setting value), the current setting value is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a command. On the side of the peripheral control board 1510, it is possible to hold information about the current set value and to grasp which one of the set values 1 to 6 the current set value is. However, as described above in detail, at the timing when the variation pattern is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a change pattern command, the current set value is also transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as a command, and the peripheral control board 1510 side makes it possible to grasp which of the set values 1 to 6 the current set value is by that command. As a result, on the side of the peripheral control board 1510, when the execution of the suggestive effect B is determined (when the winner is won), one of the plural types of suggestive patterns is determined according to the current set value. be able to.

More specifically, in the suggestive effect B, the sounds from the speaker are "set value 1", "set value 2", "set value 3", "set value 4", "set value 5", The current set value is suggested depending on which of the "set value may be 6" is output. Further, when outputting "set value 1" as a voice from the speaker, the lamp provided on the body frame 4 is lit once, and when outputting "set value 2", the lamp provided on the body frame 4 is turned on. When the lamp is caused to emit light twice at a predetermined interval to output "set value 3", the lamp provided on the body frame 4 is caused to emit light three times at a predetermined interval to output "set value 4", the main body When the lamp provided on the frame 4 emits light four times at a predetermined interval and outputs "set value may be 5", the lamp provided on the body frame 4 emits light five times at a predetermined interval and "set value may be 6". is output, the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 is made to emit light only the number of times according to the suggestion of the set value so that the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 emits light six times at predetermined intervals. In addition, for example, "may be set value 6" can be output when the current set value is not 6, that is, even if it is any of 1 to 5, and in suggestion effect B "may be set value 6 ” is output, the current set value may be false. In the suggestive effect B, in addition to these, it suggests that the current set value is an "even number" of 2, 4, or 6, or that it is an "odd number" of 1, 3, or 5. Alternatively, it may suggest that it is 4 to 6 “high setting”.

In addition, the suggestive effect B can be executed regardless of whether it is within the variable effect such as the variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 1600, except for the execution period of the suggestive effect A1 and the suggestive effect A2. I have to. As shown in FIG. 167 (A), when executing the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table A, since the execution of the suggestive effect A1 and the suggestive effect A2 is not set, such a variation pattern It is possible to execute the suggestion performance B within the fluctuation time of the special pattern (variation time of the decorative pattern) based on it. However, in the present embodiment, if the suggestive effect B for which the execution condition has already been satisfied is still being executed, the execution condition of the new suggestive effect B is not satisfied, and the duplicate execution of the suggestive effect B is prohibited ( restrictions). Specifically, during execution of the suggestive effect B, the handle touch sensor 192 detects the operation of the handle 111, a detection signal is input to the payout control board 633, and the main control board indicates that the detection signal has been input. Even if it is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 judges that the suggestive effect B is being executed, and does not perform a lottery as to whether or not the suggestive effect B is executed. are prohibited (restricted).

As described above, the suggestive effect B of the present embodiment is executed by combining the sound from the speaker and the light emission of the lamp provided on the body frame 4, and after the sound from the speaker ends. If the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 continues to emit light at predetermined intervals (for example, even after the output of the voice "Set value may be 6"), the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 is made to emit light at predetermined intervals. processing remains), or when the sound from the speaker continues even after the light emission of the lamp provided on the main body frame 4 has ended (for example, when the sound "Maybe the set value is 1" has not finished outputting). (when the process for causing the lamp provided on the body frame 4 to emit light) is completed. For this reason, the longer of the output period of the sound from the speaker and the light emission period of the lamp provided on the body frame 4 is associated with the target period for determining that the suggestive effect B is being executed. . As a result, the overlapping execution of the suggestive effect B is reliably prohibited (restricted) as the period during which the lottery is prohibited during the suggestive effect B. - 特許庁

In addition, even under the prohibition described above, if the execution interval between suggestive effect B that is executed first and suggestive effect B that is executed later is short, the suggestive effect B before and after will be continuous. There is a concern that the light emitted from the lamps provided at 4 may be mixed and the player may misunderstand the content of the suggestion. In this embodiment, in consideration of these points, a predetermined limit extension period (for example, 5 seconds) is generated after the suggestive effect B is executed, and regardless of which execution pattern the suggestive effect B is executed, It is prohibited (restricted) so as not to perform a lottery as to whether or not to execute the suggestive performance B over a period obtained by adding a limited extension period to the execution period of the suggestive performance B.例文帳に追加As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the suggestive content due to the previously executed suggestive effect B and the later executed suggestive effect B being mixed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 167 (B), when executing the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table B, in the 3 seconds added to the variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table A, the suggestion Since the execution of the performance A1 is set, the suggestive performance B is executed during the execution period of the suggestive performance A1 within the variation time of the special symbols (variation time of the decorative symbols) based on such a variation pattern. However, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect B except for the execution period of the suggestive effect A1.

Also, as shown in FIG. 167(C), when executing a variation pattern selected from the variation pattern table C, substantially all of the variation time of the special symbol (variation time of the decorative symbol) is used as the suggestive effect A2. Since the execution of the roulette performance is set at the time, execution of the suggestive performance B is prohibited within the variation time of the special pattern (the variation time of the decorative pattern) based on such a variation pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 167(D), when the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol) based on the variation pattern is not performed, the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect B during a period in which such a variable display of special symbols (variable display of decorative symbols) is not performed.

As described above, the suggestive effect B differs from the suggestive effect A1 and the suggestive effect A2 in that the current set value is suddenly suggested when the handle 111 is operated. can be done. In addition, during the execution period of the suggestive effect A1 and the suggestive effect A2, the suggestive effect B is prohibited from being executed, and by giving priority to the suggestive effect A1 and the suggestive effect A2 over the suggestive effect B, the suggestive effect A1 and the suggestive effect A2 are executed. It is possible to prevent the visual recognition of the suggestive performance A2 from being obstructed, and to positively draw attention to the suggestive performance A1 and the suggestive performance A2. In this regard, it is preferable to make the suggestive effect A1 and the suggestive effect A2 more reliable than the suggestive effect B, such as eliminating falsehoods like the suggestive effect B.

Further, as described above, the suggestive effect B can be executed even within the variable effect such as the variable display of decorative symbols on the effect display device 1600, except for the execution period of the suggestive effect A1 and the suggestive effect A2. making it possible. In this regard, regarding the suggestive effect B, since the current set value is suggested by the output from the lamp and the speaker provided in the body frame 4, it is possible to prevent the visual recognition of the variable effect from being obstructed. can. In addition, outside of the variable effect such as the variable display of the decorative symbols in the effect display device 1600, the variable display of the special symbols (variable display of the decorative symbols) is not performed, and it is a boring time, but the handle 111 Since there is a possibility that the suggestion performance B is suddenly executed and the current set value is suggested when the is operated, the player can be motivated to start the game by operating the handle 111.例文帳に追加

Further, in this example, when the setting value is changed when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the handle 111 is operated after a predetermined condition such as closing the main body frame 4 is satisfied. , the suggestive effect B can be executed. However, if the operation of the steering wheel 111 is continued from before the predetermined condition is satisfied until after the predetermined condition is satisfied, the suggestion effect B can be executed even after the predetermined condition is satisfied. do not have. Therefore, in the case where the operation of the steering wheel 111 is continued from before the predetermined condition is satisfied until after the predetermined condition is satisfied, in order to execute the suggestive effect B, the steering wheel 111 must be moved once after the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is necessary to release the hand from and operate the handle 111 again. It should be noted that when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, not only when the setting value is changed, but also when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed, when the main control RAM is initialized, the power is turned on normally (RWM The same applies to the case where the power is turned on without operating the clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a.

In addition, in this example, although it is possible to execute the suggestive effect B when the handle 111 is operated, the suggestion of the current setting value is notified when the suggestive effect B is executed by the player's arbitrary selection. It allows you not to. In other words, when the player selects not to notify the suggestion of the current setting value, at the timing when the suggestion effect B is executed after that, the lamp and the speaker provided in the body frame 4 output the current value. I try not to suggest setting values. As a result, a player who does not need the suggestion about the current set value can choose not to be notified of the suggestion, so that the player will not be misled by the suggestion about the current set value and the result of the lottery will be a hit. You can concentrate on the production of whether or not it will be. It should be noted that the player may arbitrarily choose not to notify only some of the outputs from the lamps and speakers provided in the body frame 4 in the suggestive effect B. For example, The notification may be made depending on the output from the lamp, but may be configured not to notify depending on the output from the speaker. In addition, regarding the suggestive effect A1 and the suggestive effect A2 executed in the variable effect such as the variable display of decorative symbols in the effect display device 1600, the current set value is suggested when the suggestive effect A1 and the suggestive effect A2 are executed. The player cannot choose not to be notified.

As described above in detail, after the end of the change permission state or the confirmation display state, it is possible to extend the warning notification by the image of the effect display device 1600, the lamp, and the output from the speaker. During the period in which the alert notification is extended and executed, when the suggestive effect B is executed with the operation of the steering wheel 111 as a trigger, the output from the lamp and the speaker provided on the main body frame 4 is It may be configured to be different from the other period (after the end of the extended warning notification). For example, it may be configured not to notify only part of the outputs from the lamps and speakers provided on the body frame 4 in the suggestive effect B. For example, depending on the output from the lamps provided on the body frame 4 Notification may be made, but it may be configured not to notify depending on the output from the speaker. In this way, during the period in which the warning notification is extended and executed, priority is given to the warning notification over the suggestive effect B, thereby preventing the recognition of the warning notification from being hindered and preventing fraudulent acts by persons other than the hall manager. It is possible to maintain a situation in which the monitoring system is strengthened so that it does not happen.

Also, in this example, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect B when the handle 111 is operated. The suggestive effect B executed when the handle 111 is operated is configured to be different from the suggestive effect B executed when the handle 111 is operated for the second time or later. For example, after changing the set value at the time of turning on the power of the pachinko machine 1, the suggestive effect B executed when the handle 111 is operated for the first time is less suggestive than the second and subsequent times. It is configured to increase the reliability of Also, when the steering wheel 111 is operated, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect B with a predetermined probability, but it may be as time passes (as the number of variations of the special symbols increases). , the probability of executing the suggestive performance B is made low, and the suggestive performance B is difficult to execute even if the steering wheel 111 is operated. In this regard, since the setting value is often changed by the hall manager when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on before the hall opens, let's start the game by operating the handle 111 immediately after the hall opens. It can give rise to the desire to It should be noted that when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, not only when the setting value is changed, but also when the confirmation display of the setting value is performed, when the main control RAM is initialized, the power is turned on normally (RWM The same applies to the case where the power is turned on without operating the clear button 633z and the setting key switch 1311a.

Also, in this example, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect B when the handle 111 is operated, but instead of operating the handle 111, the suggestive effect B is executed when the effect operation section 160 is operated. It may be configured to allow Further, when the effect operating unit 160 is used as a trigger for executing the suggestive effect B, the effect operating unit 160 is also used as a trigger for executing the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2, and the effect operating unit 160 is operated. In some cases, the suggestive effect A1 or the suggestive effect A2 may be started while the suggestive effect B is allowed to be executed. In addition, instead of operating the steering wheel 111, the trigger for executing the suggestive effect B is after the setting value is changed when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (after confirming and displaying the setting value, the main control After initializing the RAM, after turning on the power normally), first, the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 (the entrance involved in the lottery for winning or not) When the ball is entered, when the ball is entered into an entrance that is not involved in the lottery for whether it is a hit or not, such as the general winning entrance 2001, and when a specific date and time is reached using the real-time clock IC, etc. may Even with such a configuration, it is possible to motivate the player to obtain information on the set value by the suggestive effect B at the timing when the suggestive effect B may be executed.

According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game control board having the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 of FIG. A control board 1310 is provided. The main control board 1310 has a test connector 1310k shown in FIG. 115 that can be electrically connected to a test harness as a wiring for extracting an output signal from the main control MPU 1310a and transmitting it to a test device for testing the pachinko machine 1. It is ready.

When the pachinko machine 1 is tested by a test device, the main control MPU of the main control board 1310 is mounted on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, whereas the test connector 1310k is mounted on the rear surface (solder surface) 1310y of the main control board 1310, which is the rear surface side.

In this way, since the test connector 1310k is mounted on the back side of the main control board 1310, when the pachinko machine 1 is produced as a test machine to be tested by a specific testing institute, or when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in a game hall Even if it is produced as a mass-produced machine to be shipped to , the area where the test connector 1310k is mounted on the surface side of the main control board 1310 will not be formed as an empty area. Therefore, the degree of freedom in arranging various electronic components on the surface of main control board 1310 can be increased.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310' of FIG. 113(a) as a game control board capable of controlling the progress of the game. . These electronic components are a ZIP type main control MPU included in the lead type shown in FIG. An SMD type Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 shown in FIG. 113(a) is used as an electronic component, and is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x' of the main control board 1310'.

The main control board 1310' has a parts list area 1310xb' in FIG. 113(a) as an information area. This parts list area 1310xb' can describe identifiers of surface-mounted electronic parts and corresponding information. Examples of information written in the parts list area 1310xb' include names of manufacturers of surface-mounted electronic parts (including abbreviations and symbols), part numbers of surface-mounted electronic parts, and the like.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 113(a), in the parts list area 1310xb', there is a parts list of electronic parts configured in a manner in which part numbers and part numbers (numbers listed in the catalog) are aligned. is printed in white (or black) as silk printing. The part number and the size of the part number are larger (for example, about 3 to 5 times larger) than the size of the part number printed in white (or black) as silk printing in the part placement area 1310xa'. is printed in white (or black) as A delimiter ":" is provided between the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) so that the part number and the part number (the number listed in the catalog) are not identified as consecutive. . With this delimiter, it is possible to distinguish and identify the part number from the part number (the number listed in the catalog). In addition to the product number (the number listed in the catalog), the manufacturer's name (including abbreviations and symbols) may be silk-screened in white (or black).

In this way, even if the display mode of the identifier attached to the surface mount type electronic component mounted on the main control board 1310′ is difficult to see, information corresponding to this identifier (manufacturer name, product number, etc.) ) are displayed in a parts list area 1310xb' provided on the main control board 1310'. Therefore, the identifier of the surface-mount type electronic component can be reliably visually recognized.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a plurality of electronic components are mounted on the main control board 1310 of FIG. A control board 1310 is accommodated in a main control board box 1320 of FIG. 115 as a sealed board box having sealing means.

Main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1301z formed in transparent cover body 1301 of FIG. It is

As described above, main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of ventilation holes 1301z, which are holes having a shape smaller than the shape of surface mount type electronic components. is removed from the main control board 1310 and replaced with an illegal electronic component, the surface mount type electronic component cannot be taken out from the vent hole 1301z, which is a plurality of holes provided in the main control board box 1320. ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a surface mount type electronic component from being replaced with an illegal electronic component.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 is provided as the winning probability control circuit, and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 is provided as the setting device. ing. The main control MPU 1310a can set a plurality of types of winning probabilities, and the setting key switch 1311a can set a plurality of types of winning probabilities by external operation.

Specifically, the main control MPU 1310a has various tables used in various lottery determinations associated with the set values (for example, a jackpot determination table that defines the ratio of jackpot determination values indicating that a jackpot has been won, a jackpot symbol A big hit pattern determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the decision, a small hit determination table that defines the ratio of the small hit determination value indicating that the small win has been won, and a ratio of the determination value of the determination value of the small hit pattern Select a small hit pattern determination table, a normal transition determination table that defines the ratio of the determination value of the transition determination from the probability variation to the normal time, etc.), or use various distribution rates associated with the set value Various tables (for example, a sorting table that defines a sorting time, a block that manages driving of an electric drive source such as a motor or a solenoid, etc.) is selected. The setting key switch 1311a has a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated so that the setting values of the pachinko machine 1 can be switched. At a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion opening formed in (for example, a position where the longitudinal direction of the rectangular insertion opening is along the vertical direction), the setting key switch 1311a is turned off as the initial position. When the setting key cylinder is turned clockwise from the initial position by 60 degrees to perform the first ON operation, the setting key switch 1311a can be turned ON. ing.

The main control MPU 1310a and the setting key switch 1311a are mounted on different substrates and electrically connected.

In this manner, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 and the setting key switches 1311a of the setting change board 1311 are mounted on different boards, respectively, so that the force associated with the external operation of the setting key switches 1311a can be applied to the setting key switches. 1311a is mounted to the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted. This can contribute to preventing the bending of the main control board 1310 which is applied. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing bending of the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 71 on which the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71, on which the setting key switches 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 are mounted as a setting device, is a lead-type electronic component. It is an insertion mounting component mounting board on which only insertion mounting components can be mounted. In this way, the main control board 1310 on which the main control MPU 1310a is mounted is a board capable of mounting surface-mounted components (SMD type), and the setting key switches 1311a are mounted to change settings. The board 1311 can be an insertion mount component mounting board on which only insertion mount components (of the SMD type) can be mounted. As a result, the stripping load of the wiring pattern and land pattern at the soldered part of the insertion mounting component (lead type) on the soldered surface of the board can be reduced compared to the surface mounting component (SMD type). As a result, it is possible to increase the strength against peeling of the solder portion.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 71 as the surface-mounted component mountable board and the setting change board 1311 shown in FIG. 71 as the insertion-mounted component mounting board are transparent boards. Each of them is housed in a transparent main control board box 1320 of FIG. 115 as a case. The transparent main control board box 1320 is sealed by the caulking portion 1303 shown in FIG. 115 using its exterior as a sealing device. A main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 as a surface mounting component mounting board is provided with a connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 as a connector electrically connected to a main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 71 as a winning probability control circuit. In addition, the setting change board 1311 shown in FIG. 71 as an insertion mounting component mounting board is provided with the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 shown in FIG. 71 as a connector electrically connected to the setting key switch 1311a shown in FIG. . The connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 and the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 are electrically connected. In this way, the main control board 1310, which is a board on which surface-mounted components can be mounted, and the setting change board 1311, which is a board on which insertion-mounted components are mounted, can be accommodated in the transparent main control board box 1320 sealed by the caulking portion 1303. Therefore, it is possible to increase the deterrence against fraudulent acts on the main control board 1310, which is a board on which surface-mounted components can be mounted, and the setting change board 1311, which is a board on which insertion-mounted components are mounted.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 as a connector provided on the main control board 1310 of FIG. The connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 is electrically connected to the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. It is Specifically, the connector MSCN of the main control board 1310 and the connector SMCN of the setting change board 1311 are electrically connected by a special connector having a floating mechanism. A special connector with this floating mechanism consists of a socket and a plug. By inserting the socket into the plug and pushing it in, the socket and the plug are mated. By moving within a predetermined distance range in a direction (for example, vertical direction) perpendicular to the direction of insertion and pushing in, an error (fitting shaft misalignment) that occurs when pushing in can be absorbed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 is provided as the game control board, and the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71 is provided as the setting change board. The main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game. The setting change board 1311 is provided separately from the main control board 1310, is electrically connected to the main control board 1310, and is capable of changing the set value in which the probability of being advantageous to the player is set. A setting key switch 1311a shown in FIG. 71 is provided as a lead-type electronic component.

The lead-type setting key switch 1311a is such that a setting key for changing setting values is inserted and removed. While the setting change board 1311 may flex as the setting key is inserted into or removed from the lead type setting key switch 1311a, the main control board 1310 does not flex.

In this way, the lead-type setting key switch 1311a is provided on the setting change board 1311, which is separate from the main control board 1310. Therefore, the operation of inserting/removing the setting key that can change the setting value ( operation), the main control board 1310 does not bend even if the setting change board 1311 bends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the main control board 1310 from bending due to the operation of the lead type setting key switch 1311a.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 are pivotally supported by the outer frame 2 shown in FIG. It has a structured front frame. The pachinko machine 1 further includes a setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 70 as a setting device. The setting key switch 1311a can set a plurality of types of winning probabilities by an external operation. Specifically, the setting key switch 1311a has a setting key cylinder into which a setting key is inserted and rotated, and can switch the setting values of the pachinko machine 1. At a position where the setting key is ready to be inserted into the insertion opening formed in the setting key cylinder 1311a (for example, at a position where the longitudinal direction of the insertion opening having a rectangular shape is along the vertical direction), the setting key switch is set to the initial position. The setting key cylinder 1311a is turned off, and the setting key switch 1311a is turned on by rotating the setting key cylinder 60 degrees clockwise from the initial position and turning it on for the first time. is now possible.

A setting key switch 1311 a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is arranged on the pivot side of the front frame on the rear surface of the game board 5 .

Specifically, the outer frame 2 forms a main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and a main body frame lower hinge portion 520 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. is coaxially rotatably supported so that the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward about the left side in front view. The left side of the body frame 4 in front view in the up-down direction where the assembly 52 is arranged is the shaft support side (closed side) of the body frame 4, and the right side of the body frame 4 in front view in the up-down direction opposite to this side is the main body. It becomes the open side of the frame 4. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the body frame 4 that constitutes the front frame.

Thus, the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is arranged on the pivot side of the front frame composed of the door frame 3 and the body frame 4 on the rear surface of the game board 5. If the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is to be illicitly altered, the front frame must be opened, and the illicit act can occur in the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Become a prominent presence. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to prevention of fraud.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the rear side of the game board 5 serves as a cover body which is pivotally supported to be openable and closable on the open side opposite to the pivotal support side of the front frame. The setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is arranged on the pivot side of the front frame on the rear surface of the game board 5 and is covered with the back cover 640, and the front frame The setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 cannot be operated unless the back cover 640 is opened after the . In this way, the rear side of the game board 5 is covered with the rear cover 640 pivotally supported to open and close on the open side opposite to the pivotally supported side of the front frame. The setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 is arranged on the pivot side of the front frame on the rear surface of the game board 5 and is covered with the back cover 640, and the back cover 640 is opened after the front frame is opened. The setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 cannot be operated unless it is opened.

Specifically, the outer frame 2 forms a main body frame upper hinge portion 510 and a main body frame lower hinge portion 520 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. is coaxially rotatably supported so that the main body frame 4 can be opened and closed forward about the left side in front view. The left side of the body frame 4 in front view in the up-down direction where the assembly 52 is arranged is the shaft support side (closed side) of the body frame 4, and the right side of the body frame 4 in front view in the up-down direction opposite to this side is the main body. It becomes the open side of the frame 4. That is, when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the open side of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the body frame 4 that constitutes the front frame. A rear cover 640 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame so as to be openable and closable covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4. It is a thing. That is, the main control board box 1320 is covered with the rear cover 640 when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame. The back cover 640 has a right side in a front view attached to the vertically extending rear end of the rearwardly extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around a vertically extending axis, and a left Since it is attached to the back cover attachment portion 551i of the base 551 and the back cover attachment portion 601a of the upper full ball path unit 600, the right side of the front view is the pivotal support side (closed side) of the back cover 640. , and the left side in front view, which is the opposite side, is the open side of the back cover 640 . That is, in the state where the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 constituting the front frame, the main control board 1310 is arranged on the pivot side (closed side) of the back cover 640. A setting change board 1311 is arranged on the open side of the back cover. Further, the setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 is provided with an insertion port for inserting the setting key, and the insertion port of the setting key cylinder is covered with the back cover 640. In order to access the setting key switch 1311a to operate the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, it is necessary to open the back cover 640. FIG. In order to open the back cover 640, it is necessary to open the body frame 4 largely (approximately 90 degrees) with respect to the outer frame 2. FIG.

Therefore, the back cover 640 must be opened so that the setting key switches 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300 cannot be operated. I have to open the frame. Therefore, if an attempt is made to tamper with the setting key switches 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311 of the main control unit 1300, the front frame must be opened so that the back cover 640 can be opened. The cheating can be conspicuous in the game hall where the machine 1 is installed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 112(a) is provided as a game control board for controlling the progress of the game. On the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the capacitor MC30 shown in FIG. a) Schmitt trigger inverter MIC30 can be mounted, and the SMD type electronic component (surface mounting) shown in FIG. type electronic component) and the corresponding substrate surface (mounting surface) 1310x are configured such that no wiring patterns or through holes for transmitting control signals are arranged at all.

In this way, on the front surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the capacitor MC30 as an insertion mounting component and the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 as a surface mounting component can be mounted in a mixed manner. The area in which the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC 30 as a component is mounted can be configured as a circuit non-formation area in which circuits such as wiring patterns and through holes are not formed. As a result, even if the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30, which is a surface-mounted component, is mounted on the surface (mounting surface) 1310x of the main control board 1310, the circuit to the Schmidt-trigger inverter MIC30, which is a surface-mounted component, is not formed except for the circuit non-formation area. Therefore, the circuit to the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30, which is a surface mount component, can be visually observed. Therefore, tampering with surface mount components can be prevented.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be played. And after operating the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 in FIG. 3 and the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 as the second operation unit, A main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 of FIG. 71 is provided as a setting change means capable of changing the setting value in which the probability of being advantageous to the player is set. The RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is provided separately from the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 . In this pachinko machine 1, as a guide means for guiding information regarding the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, there is further provided a notation serving as location information capable of conveying the location of the RWM clear button 633z.

In this way, since information about the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 is guided, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 are separated. Even if it is provided on the body, a person who operates the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 does not have to be confused about the operation procedure. By separately providing the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633, the security can be enhanced. Therefore, crime prevention can be enhanced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be played using game balls as game media. A main control board 1310 of FIG. 71, a setting change board 1311, and a payout control board 633 of FIG. 71, the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. 71, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 of FIG. 3, and the main control side power supply of FIG. It consists of the determination of step S14 in the processing at the time of input, the processing of step S16A, and the like. The progress control section is composed of the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 in FIG. 71, the main control side main processing in the main control side power-on processing in FIG. 118, the main control side timer interrupt processing in FIG. 120, and the like. . The main control board 1310, the setting change board 1311, and the payout control board 633 as game control means include the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 in FIG. 71, the Schmidt trigger inverter MIC30 in FIGS. The setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 in FIG. Electronic components related to setting control such as the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 are provided separately on a plurality of boards such as the setting change board 1311 in FIG. 71 and the payout control board 633 in FIG.

In this way, the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z, which are electronic parts related to setting control, are provided separately on a plurality of boards such as the setting change board 1311 and the payout control board 633, respectively. can be enhanced. Therefore, crime prevention can be enhanced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, a game can be played using game balls as game media. 71 main control boards 1310 are provided. The control of the game consists of the main control side main process in the main control side power-on process of FIG. 118, the main control side timer interrupt process of FIG. 120, and the like. The control of the game preparation includes the determination of step S14 in the main control side power-on processing of FIG. and the processing of step S218. The first game preparation control is the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 of FIG. When power is restored at the time of power recovery, the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key cylinder insertion port of the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311, and the setting key cylinder is opened. is rotated clockwise by 60 degrees and the first ON operation is performed to set the setting key switch 1311a to the ON state as a "predetermined set value change permission condition", and the RWM clear button 633z is operated and an operation signal is input, the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 of FIG. It is possible to set a setting change state in which a setting value in which a probability that is advantageous to the user is set can be changed. In the second game preparation control, following the first game preparation control, switching to one of a plurality of set values based on the operation of the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 in FIG. 3 as the second operation unit. is possible. The RWM clear button 633z is arranged on a payout control board 633 which is different from the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is arranged.

In this way, by arranging the setting key switch 1311a of the setting change board 1311 and the RWM clear button 633z of the payout control board 633 on different boards, crime prevention can be enhanced. Therefore, crime prevention can be enhanced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the setting change board 1311 on which the setting key switch 1311a is arranged and the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is arranged are shown as separate board cases. 115 and the payout control board box 632 of FIG. By separating the payout control board box 632 housing the payout control board 633 in which the button 633z is arranged, the security can be further enhanced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board box 1320 of FIG. 115 and the payout control board box 632 of FIG. In order to modify the main control board 1310 and the setting change board 1311 housed in the board box 1320, and the payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632, the crimped portion must be destroyed, leaving traces of alteration. can be left.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 controls the progress of the game arranged on the back side of the game board 5 in FIG. The setting change board 1311 arranged is housed in the main control board box 1320 as a caulking case together with the main control board 1310, and the payout control board 633 where the RWM clear button 633z of FIG. As the frame side, it is arranged in the body frame 4 of FIG. 4 to control the payout, and is housed in the payout control board box 632 as a caulking case. It can be arranged on the back side of the game board 5 while being accommodated in the main control board box 1320 as a crimping case together with the main control board 1310, and the payout control board 633 on which the RWM clear button 633z is arranged is used as a crimping case to control the payout. Since it can be placed on the main body frame 4 as the frame side in the state housed in the board box 632, the setting key switch 1311a is separately placed on the game board 5 side, and the RWM clear button 633z is separately placed on the main body frame 4 side as the frame side. By doing so, the security of the setting key switch 1311a and the RWM clear button 633z can be further enhanced.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 4 is provided on the front side as an openable door, and housed in the main control board box 1320 shown in FIG. 70 as a board on which electronic components are mounted. The main control board 1310 and the first key (a regular metal key possessed by a staff member such as a game hall clerk) are operated to perform the first operation (when opening the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 , when opening the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 3), the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 in FIG. 1 and the locking unit 650 of the body frame 4 in FIG. , a second key (setting key) different from the first key can be operated to perform a second operation (when changing a set value, when confirming a currently set set value). A setting key mounted on a setting change board 1311 accommodated together with the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 of FIG. and a switch 1311a. The setting key switch 1311a is capable of setting multiple types of winning probabilities (when changing the set value), and is capable of confirming the currently set set value (set value). when checking the current set value). The cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 is provided on the front side of the door frame 3, and the housing of the cylinder lock 127 is electrically connected to the ground side. The setting key switch 1311a is provided on the rear side of the door frame 3, and the housing of the setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the ground side and is insulated.

Specifically, the cylindrical cylinder body made of metal, which is the housing of the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3, is electrically connected to the frame ground on the door frame side or the ground side that is N (Neutral) of AC 24V. It is In addition, by forming the foil removal areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a can be made cylindrical ( A pair of opposing long through-holes SLH1 having long long hole shapes along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 through which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the housing can be inserted. The SLH 2 can be in a state of being electrically insulated from the solid earth (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 . For this reason, the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing that is the housing of the setting key switch 1311a is a solid ground (substrate) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. ground).

In this way, since the metal cylindrical cylinder body that is the housing of the cylinder lock 127 provided on the front side of the door frame 3 is electrically connected to the ground side, the metal cylindrical cylinder body Even if noise (electromagnetic wave noise) intrudes into the main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted, by releasing the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) to the ground side, the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted, does not fluctuate, and , the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the rear side of the door frame 3 is not electrically connected to the ground side and is insulated. Even if noise (electromagnetic wave noise) enters a cylindrical (or rectangular) housing made of metal, the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is attenuated by the cylindrical (or rectangular) housing made of metal. Thus, it is possible to prevent the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is the board on which the electronic components are mounted, from fluctuating. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to preventing malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and destruction of electronic parts.

In addition, the cylindrical cylinder body made of metal, which is the housing of the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3, is the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 or the N (neutral) of the AC 24V supplied to the pachinko machine 1. While being electrically connected to the ground side, a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing that is the housing of the setting key switch 1311a is supplied to the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 and to the pachinko machine 1. It is not electrically connected and insulated from the ground side which is the N (neutral) of AC 24V. As a result, the cylindrical cylinder body made of metal is electrically connected to the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 or to the ground side that is the N (neutral) of the AC 24V supplied to the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing is the frame ground on the door frame side of the pachinko machine 1 and the ground side that is N (neutral) of the AC 24V supplied to the pachinko machine 1 It can be insulated without being electrically connected.

Also, after the door frame 3 is opened by the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 of the main body frame 4 (that is, the front frame composed of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is locked to the outer frame 2). ), the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 housed together with the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 enables setting of multiple types of winning probabilities. (when changing the set value), and the current set value can be confirmed (when the current set value is confirmed). As a result, after the door frame 3 is opened by the cylinder lock 127 of the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 of the main body frame 4 (that is, the front frame composed of the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is 2), access the setting key switch 1311a to operate the setting key switch 1311a and access the setting value setting possible state (when changing the setting value) or the setting value confirmation possible state (set value is changed). When confirming the current set value that is currently set), the security for the setting key switch 1311a can be improved.

[16. Power board]
Next, the power supply board 630 provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 36 will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 175. FIG. 171 is a circuit diagram for explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of the power supply board, FIG. 172 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the power supply board, FIG. 173 is a view of FIG. FIG. 175 shows silk printing of electronic parts printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board (part 2). Here, first, the circuit configuration of the power supply substrate will be described, followed by a description of a method of identifying electronic components having the same shape, and a confirmation of blown fuses.

As described above, the island facility of the game hall has a transformer (not shown), which steps down the AC 100V commercial power supply voltage to the AC 24V game machine power supply voltage. When the plug of the power supply wiring (not shown) is inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the game machine power supply voltage of the island facility of the game hall, AC 24V is supplied to the power supply board 630 . The power supply board 630 creates various power supplies (various DC voltages such as DC +35V, DC +12V, DC +5V, etc.) from AC 24V supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and supplies them from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1. are doing.

[16-1. Circuit configuration of power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 171, the circuit of the power supply board 630 mainly comprises a power switch 630a, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power generation circuit 630f, and a power destruction circuit 630g. It is

AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power wire connector DCN1 through a power wire (not shown). AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 through a power line (not shown), and the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube with a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm) (The supporting terminals at both ends are made of metal), and are input to the input terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a via a Class B fusing defined by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law. Specifically, the input terminal 3 of the power switch 630a is connected to a 24V AC line 1 (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V1"), and the input terminal 1 of the power switch 630a is connected to a 24V AC line 2. (hereinafter referred to as "AC24V2") is input. Output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the noise countermeasure circuit 630b.

When a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall turns on the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 are electrically connected, and AC 24V1 is sent to various circuits of the power supply board 630 through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. As soon as the supply is started, the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 are electrically connected, and the AC 24V2 is started to be supplied to various circuits of the power supply substrate 630 via the noise countermeasure circuit 630b. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 can be powered on by turning on the power switch 630a. On the other hand, when a staff member such as a store clerk in the game hall turns off the power switch 630a, the input side terminal 3 and the output side terminal 4 are electrically disconnected, and the AC 24V1 is connected to various circuits of the power supply board 630. As the supply is interrupted, the input terminal 1 and the output terminal 2 are electrically disconnected, and the supply of AC 24V2 to various circuits of the power supply board 630 is interrupted. As a result, power to the pachinko machine 1 can be cut off by turning off the power switch 630a.

While the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall remains in the ON state, a staff member such as a game hall clerk turns on the breaker of the game hall to turn on the pachinko machine installed in the game hall. The power may be turned on all at once, and the pachinko machines installed in the game hall may be powered off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall.

[16-1-1. Noise countermeasure circuit]
The noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC that is a circuit for countermeasures against common mode noise, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC that is a circuit for countermeasures against normal mode noise, and a choke coil L1. The side terminals 4 and 2 are input to the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1.

The common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC is composed of capacitors C1 and C2 and varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2. The capacitors C1 and C2 have the same capacity and remove common mode noise. On the other hand, varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers) and have the same varistor voltage. The varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 remove noise that cannot be reduced by the capacitors C1 and C2.

One end of capacitor C1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 through power switch 630a, the other end of capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of capacitor C2, and the other end of capacitor C2 is electrically connected to AC24V2 through power switch 630a. electrically connected. One end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 through the power switch 630a, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to one end of the varistor ZNR2, and the other end of the varistor ZNR2 is through the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC24V2. The other end of the capacitor C1, one end of the capacitor C2, the other end of the varistor ZNR1, and one end of the varistor ZNR1 are electrically connected and input as the frame ground FG2 to the ground connection terminal DCN5. The ground connection terminal DCN5 is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN5 of the frame ground substrate 559 via a power ground line (not shown).

The normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC is composed of a capacitor C3 and a varistor ZNR3. The capacitor C3 removes normal mode noise generated in AC24V1 and AC24V2. The varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorbing element (surge absorber) and removes noise that could not be removed by the capacitor C3.

One end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to the AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. One end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to AC24V1 through a power switch 630a, and the other end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to AC24V2 through a power switch 630a.

AC 24V1 output from the output side terminal 4 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is also input to the power line connector DCN2 as AC 24VA. 24 VAC output from the output terminal 2 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is also input to the power line connector DCN2 as 24 VAC. . The choke coil L1 is a countermeasure component for common mode noise of AC24V1 and AC24V2, and prevents noise interference. The power line connector DCN2 is installed outside the pachinko machine 1 via the interface board power line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 37, and the CR unit power line (not shown). 24VA and 24V AC are supplied to the CR unit (not shown).

AC24V1 and AC24V2, the common mode noise of which has been reduced by the choke coil L1, are input to the rectifier circuit 630c.

[16-1-2. Rectifier circuit]
The rectifier circuit 630c is composed of N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as "FETs") Q1 and Q2, and a peripheral circuit 630ca. A peripheral circuit 630ca is a peripheral circuit for the FETs Q1 and Q2, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as resistors, diodes and Zener diodes.

The AC 24V1 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D1, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q1 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. It is directly input to the drain terminal of FETQ2 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The AC 24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D2, and is also input to the gate terminal of the FET Q2 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. It is directly input to the drain terminal of the FETQ1 without going through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The source terminals of the FETs Q1 and Q2 are respectively input to the CAI terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

AC24V1 and AC24V2, the common mode noise of which has been reduced by the choke coil L1, are rectified into direct current through switching by the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the peripheral circuit 630ca, and are connected to the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D2. 2 are output respectively. The package type of FETQ1, FETQ2, Schottky barrier diode D1, and Schottky barrier diode D2 is a so-called TO-220F, which is the same type, and is fixed to heat sink fin HS1 (see FIG. 172). ing. The heat radiation fins HS1 are soldered and fixed to the power supply substrate 630 so as to be grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 .

AC24V1 and AC24V2, the common mode noise of which has been reduced by the choke coil L1, are input to the rectifier circuit 630c as described above, and are also input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively, and the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6. , respectively, and input to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

The rectified direct currents output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 are input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the choke coil L2.

[16-1-3. Power factor correction circuit]
The power factor correction circuit 630d is composed of N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter referred to as "FET") Q3, Q4 and a peripheral circuit 630da. A peripheral circuit 630da is a peripheral circuit for the FETs Q3 and Q4, and is mainly composed of a plurality of electronic components such as resistors, diodes and inductors.

The DC whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L2 is input to the anode terminals 1 and 3 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10, respectively, and directly to the drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 without going through the peripheral circuit 630da. are entered respectively. The gate terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 receive the gate signal for the power factor correction circuit from the PFC-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit via the peripheral circuit 630da. The source terminals and drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 via the peripheral circuit 630da.

The direct current, whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L2, suppresses the generation of harmonics through switching by the FETs Q3, Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da, improves the power factor, and is applied to the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9, D10. are output from respectively. The package type of the FETs Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D9, D10 is the same as the package type of the FETs Q1, Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2 (TO-220F described above). It is fixed to the fin HS2 (see FIG. 172). The heat radiation fin HS2 is arranged parallel to the heat radiation fin HS1 with a predetermined distance, and is soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630 to be grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630. there is

The DC whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e.

[16-1-4. Smoothing circuit]
The smoothing circuit 630e is composed of a plurality of electrolytic capacitors (not shown). The negative terminals of these electrolytic capacitors are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630, and the positive terminals are supplied with direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor correction circuit 630d. The smoothing circuit 630e gently (smoothes) the pulsating current from the direct current whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d, and outputs it to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. It has the same shape as the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and has a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm. Then, it is supplied from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 as DC +35V.

[16-1-5. Power supply generation circuit]
When the DC from the smoothing circuit 630e is input to the PFC-OU terminal, the power generation circuit 630f generates DC +12 V and DC +5 V from the input DC. The power generation circuit 630f outputs the generated DC +12V from the +12V terminal and supplies it from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and also outputs the generated DC +5V from the +5V terminal and outputs it from the power supply board 630 to the pachinko machine. 1 to each substrate inside.

The power generation circuit 630f controls switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 in the power factor improvement circuit 630d and the peripheral circuit 630da by controlling output of the power factor improvement gate signal from the PFC-GATE terminal to the power factor improvement circuit 630d. to suppress the generation of harmonics.

In the power generation circuit 630f, AC 24V1 and AC 24V2, the common mode noise of which is reduced by the choke coil L1, are input to the AC-DET terminal via diodes D5 and D6. The power generation circuit 630f monitors the voltage input to the AC-DET terminal and determines whether or not to output a gate signal for the power destruction circuit from the FUSE-GATE terminal to the power destruction circuit 630g.

The plug of the power supply wiring (not shown) is not inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall, and is mistakenly inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage higher than the AC 24V power supply voltage for the game machine. When inserted, a power supply voltage higher than DC +35 V is input from the smoothing circuit 630e to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

The power generation circuit 630f is based on the power supply voltage input to the AC-DET terminal, the common mode noise of which has been reduced by the choke coil L1. is set to approximately 50 V.), the gate signal for the power supply breaking circuit can be output to the power supply breaking circuit 630g.

When the power generation circuit 630f outputs a gate signal for the power destruction circuit to the power destruction circuit 630g, the power destruction circuit 630g self-destructs and enters the short mode. When the power supply breaking circuit 630g enters the short mode and the power supply switch 630a is in the ON state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 flows through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the power supply breaking circuit 630g. A large amount of current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are fused.

A GND terminal of the power generation circuit 630 f is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 .

[16-1-6. power supply destruction circuit]
The power breakdown circuit 630g is composed of an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as "FET") Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and a capacitor C22. The drain terminal of FETQ5 is electrically connected to cathode terminals 2 of Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2. The gate terminal of the FETQ5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor 25, and the other end of the resistor R25 is electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. The source terminal of the FETQ5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R24, electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C22, and electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. The other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the other end opposite to the resistor R25 whose one end is electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5. , the other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected in addition to the other end of the resistor R25.

In the power breaking circuit 630g, when the gate signal for the power breaking circuit is input from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f to the gate terminal of the FETQ5 via the resistor R25, the FETQ5 is activated and the drain terminal of the FETQ5 is switched to the source terminal. FETQ5 is destroyed by a large current flowing toward FETQ5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of FETQ5 become overcurrent), thereby maintaining the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of FETQ5 are conductive. be done. The package type of FETQ5 is the same as the package type of FETQ1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 (TO-220F described above). , Q2, Q3, Q4, and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, they are arranged at positions not in contact with the radiating fins HS1, HS2. Specifically, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are fixed to the radiation fins HS1, HS2 arranged in parallel with a predetermined distance therebetween. , the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 fixed to the heat sink fins HS1, HS2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 have a parallel positional relationship on the back side of the package, The FET Q5 is arranged between the heat radiation fins HS1 and HS2, and the back side of the package of the FET Q5 includes FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 fixed to the heat radiation fins HS1 and HS2 and Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D1. D2, D9, and D10 are positioned perpendicular to the rear surface of the package, and are not fixed to the radiating fins HS1 and HS2 at all (see FIGS. 172 and 173). The purpose of this is to cool down the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 by absorbing the heat through the heat dissipation fins HS1, HS2 so that they are not destroyed by heat generation. On the other hand, when FETQ5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of FETQ5 (an overcurrent occurs between the drain terminal and the source terminal of FETQ5), the FETQ5 is shorted due to heat generation. This is to contribute to being destroyed in time.

In other words, the plug of the power supply wiring is not inserted into the 24V AC power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island facility of the game hall, and is mistakenly inserted into the 100V AC power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage higher than the 24V AC power supply voltage for the game machine. When it is plugged in, the power generation circuit 630f adjusts the magnitude of the power supply voltage to a predetermined value (threshold : in this embodiment, it is set to about 50V), the gate signal for the power supply breakdown circuit is output to the power supply breakdown circuit 630g to control the FET Q5 to self-destruct. As a result, the short mode state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FETQ5 are electrically connected is maintained, and the source terminal of the FETQ5 is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. When the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are turned ON, the currents flowing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 pass through the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FET Q5, which is in the short mode state in the power supply breakdown circuit 630g, to the power generation circuit 630f. A large amount of current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are fused, destroying only the power supply board 630 and breaking the plug of the power supply wiring into the commercial power supply. Even if it is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the power supply voltage, it is possible to reliably prevent each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the power board 630 from being destroyed.

In addition, the power cord plug was not inserted into the power outlet of AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for game machines of the island facility of the game hall, and was mistakenly inserted into the power outlet of AC 100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage higher than the power supply voltage for game machines of AC 24V. In the state where FETQ5 of the power destruction circuit 630g was destroyed by being inserted, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 were replaced, and the power cord plug was inserted into the AC24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for game machines in the island facility of the game hall. However, since the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed and the short mode is maintained, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g A large current flows toward the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f through the FET Q5 in the short mode state in the , a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are closed. It will be fused again. In other words, unless the power supply board 630 in which the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the FETQ5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is not destroyed, the power cord plug can be removed from the pachinko island game machine. Even if it is plugged into an AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for the game, the game cannot be started.

[16-2. Method for identifying electronic components having the same shape]
Next, a method for identifying electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630 will be described. Electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 include FETs Q1 and Q2 and Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c, FETs Q3 and Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the power factor correction circuit 630d, as described above. The barrier diodes D9 and D10 and the FET Q5 of the power breakdown circuit 630g have the same package type (TO-220F), and the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2 and FUSE3 have the same shape (diameter: 5 mm, length: 5 mm). Length: 20 mm transparent glass tube (support terminals at both ends are made of metal)).

Although the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are completely different electronic components, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are electronic parts that cannot be destroyed, and FET Q5 is the only electronic part that is destroyed. Therefore, in this embodiment, among the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 as electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630, only electrons that destroy In order to make it easier to identify the components, the silk printing printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 has characteristics different from those of the others.

Specifically, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, which are electronic components that cannot be destroyed, have white outlines as shown in FIG. 174(a). A line and a thick white line indicating the direction in which electronic components are arranged are silk-printed for Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, and silk-printed for Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, and for FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4. TSLKs 5 to 8 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 . The thick white line is the side fixed to the heat dissipation fins HS1 and HS2. In FIG. 172, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 need to be arranged adjacent to each other in order to fix them to the radiation fins HS1, HS2. HS2 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 so that the silk-printed white lines on which the HS2 is arranged and the thick white line portions of the silk-printed TSLKs 1 to 8 are connected to each other.

On the other hand, for the FET Q5, which is the only electronic component to be destroyed, as shown in FIG. Ad1 and a thick white line indicating the direction in which electronic components are arranged are printed as a silk print, and a silk print TSLK9 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 . That is, the white oblique line ad1 is represented as a characteristic pattern.

Thus, even if the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are electronic components having the same shape, the silk printing printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 Among TSLKs 1 to 9, by visually observing the white oblique line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern, which electronic component among different types of electronic components having the same shape is observed compared to other electronic components. It is possible to identify whether it is an electronic component that should be used. As a result, it is possible to extremely easily identify which electronic component is the only electronic component that will be destroyed among the different types of electronic components having the same shape.

Also, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the FETQ5 to the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall by telephone, the silk-printed TSLK9 having the white oblique line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern. By instructing to search for , the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall can accurately grasp the position of the FET Q5, so it is easy to communicate with the staff of the service center and the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall. Become.

As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the clerk of the game hall, etc., on the FETQ5 by telephone, the clerk of the game hall, etc., follows the instruction of the person in charge of the service center. In addition, it is possible to specify the FET Q5 of interest among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply substrate 630. FIG. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the FET Q5 of interest can be identified from the other electronic components FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10.

In the above example, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are electronic components having the same shape. Of the barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, a characteristic pattern is silk-printed only within the outline of the FET Q5, and the outlines of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are printed. Although the one without silk printing is shown inside, the FETQ5, which is the only electronic component that is destroyed, is shown by the arrangement method. That is, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are fixed to the radiation fins HS1, HS2 arranged in parallel with a predetermined distance therebetween. HS1 and HS2 are positioned so that the back side of the package is parallel to each other. On the other hand, the back side of the package of the FET Q5 is mutually opposite to the back side of the package of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 fixed to the heat dissipation fins HS1 and HS2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10. are perpendicular to each other. Thus, even if the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are electronic parts having the same shape, the FET Q5, which is the only electronic part to be destroyed, Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are arranged at right angles to each other. It is possible to identify whether or not it is an electronic component that should be observed in comparison with other components. As a result, it is possible to extremely easily identify which electronic component is the only electronic component that will be destroyed among the different types of electronic components having the same shape. In addition, the FET Q5, which is the only electronic component to be destroyed, is arranged perpendicular to the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10. Even if Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are electronic parts having the same shape, the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 will not be able to contact the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall. When instructing FETQ5 by phone, by instructing to search for the only package that is arranged at right angles, staff such as game hall clerks can accurately grasp the position of FETQ5, so the service center It becomes easy to communicate with the person in charge of the game hall and the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall. As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the clerk of the game hall, etc., on the FETQ5 by telephone, the clerk of the game hall, etc., follows the instruction of the person in charge of the service center. In addition, it is possible to specify the FET Q5 of interest among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply substrate 630. FIG. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the FET Q5 of interest can be identified from the other electronic components FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10.

In the above example, of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5, which are electronic components having the same shape, a characteristic pattern is silk-printed only within the outline of the FET Q5. The outlines of barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are shown without silk printing, but the FET Q5, which is the only electronic component that can be destroyed, is shown by the arrangement method. Therefore, for example, another method of indicating a specific electronic component among a plurality of electronic components having the same shape by an arrangement method will be described. FIG. 176 is a diagram showing a method of arranging a specific electronic component out of a plurality of electronic components having the same shape. As a method of arranging specific electronic components, for example, as shown in FIG. , with respect to the power supply substrate 630 having a rectangular shape, TQ1 is arranged so that the heat sink mounting surface (rear surface of TQ1) of TQ1 is parallel to the surface (mounting surface) 630 x of the power supply substrate 630 along the vertical direction, On the right side of this TQ1, TQ2 is arranged so that the heat sink mounting surface (rear surface of TQ2) of TQ2 is parallel to the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 along the vertical direction, and TQ3 is arranged on the right side of this TQ2. The heat sink mounting surface (rear surface of TQ3) is rotated by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) with respect to the straight line in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630, and TQ3 is rotated. Place diagonally. The radiator plate mounting surface of TQ1 (rear surface of TQ1) and the radiator plate mounting surface of TQ2 (rear surface of TQ2) are arranged parallel to each other. The part numbers of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3, which are FETs, are printed along the respective heat sink mounting surfaces of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 (the rear surface of TQ1, the rear surface of TQ2, and the rear surface of TQ3) when silk-printed. It may be arranged near TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 (for example, the part number of TQ1 is rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees along the heat sink mounting surface of TQ1 (the rear surface of TQ1). and arranged in the vicinity of TQ1 toward the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, and the part number of TQ2 is reversed from the part number of TQ2 along the heat sink mounting surface (rear surface of TQ2) of TQ2. It is rotated clockwise by 90 degrees and arranged in the vicinity of TQ2 toward the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630, and the part number of TQ3 is along the heat sink mounting surface of TQ3 (the rear surface of TQ3). Then, the part number of TQ3 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees), and is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle with respect to a horizontal straight line on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. (here, rotated by 45 degrees) and placed in the vicinity of TQ3), or may be placed in the vicinity of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 all in the same direction (TQ1, TQ2, TQ3 TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 without rotating the part numbers of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 counterclockwise at all. Alternatively, the part numbers of TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 may be rotated counterclockwise by 90 so that TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 are arranged in the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630. ). Thus, even if the FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 are electronic components having the same shape, the TQ3 is arranged diagonally with respect to the TQ1 and TQ2. By using electronic components, it is possible to identify which electronic component among the electronic components of the same type and having the same shape is the electronic component to which attention should be paid in comparison with other electronic components. As a result, it is possible to very easily specify which electronic component is the specific electronic component among the electronic components of the same type having the same shape. In addition, since TQ3 is arranged diagonally with respect to TQ1 and TQ2, by using this diagonally arranged TQ3 as a specific electronic component, the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can play the game. When instructing an attendant such as a hall clerk or the like to locate the FET TQ3 by telephone, by instructing to search for an FET arranged obliquely, the attendant such as a game hall clerk or the like can find the position of the FET TQ3. Since the information can be grasped accurately, it becomes easy to communicate between the person in charge of the service center and the person in charge of the game hall. As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall over the phone to instruct TQ3, which is the FET, the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall is the person in charge of the service center. TQ3, which is a notable FET among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply substrate 630, can be specified according to the instruction of . Therefore, among a plurality of electronic components, TQ3, which is an FET of interest, can be identified from TQ1 and TQ2, which are FETs of other electronic components. For the FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3, the white outline and the thick white line shown in FIG. Alternatively, for the FETs TQ1 and TQ2, the white outline shown in FIG. 174(b), a plurality of white oblique lines ad1 arranged at equal intervals in this outline, and a white line indicating the direction in which electronic components are arranged. A thick line and may be printed on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing.

Further, for TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 which are FETs, the white outline shown in FIG. A thick white line indicating the direction of arrangement may be printed on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing. The white slanted line ad1 shown in FIG. 174(b) is a straight line inclined downward to the right by 45 degrees. TQ1 is arranged so as to be parallel along the vertical direction of TQ1, and the heat sink mounting surface (rear surface of TQ2) of TQ2 on the right side of this TQ1 is parallel along the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 TQ2 is arranged so that the heat sink mounting surface of TQ3 (rear surface of TQ3) on the right side of this TQ2 is directed counterclockwise with respect to the straight line in the horizontal direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 When TQ3 is arranged obliquely by rotating it by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees), the white oblique line ad1 silk-printed with respect to TQ1 becomes a straight line inclined at 45 degrees upward to the right. A white slanted line ad1 silk-printed on TQ3 becomes a straight line inclined 45 degrees upward to the right, and a white slanted line ad1 silk-printed on TQ3 becomes a horizontal straight line (horizontal line). As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall over the phone to instruct the TQ3 which is the FET, the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall will say, "Silk-printed Please find an electronic component that has a straight horizontal white line (horizontal line).” A certain TQ3 can be specified. Therefore, among a plurality of electronic components, TQ3, which is an FET of interest, can be identified from TQ1 and TQ2, which are FETs of other electronic components.

Further, for TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 which are FETs, the white outline shown in FIG. , and are printed on the front surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 as silk printing. TQ1 is arranged so as to be parallel to the surface (mounting surface) 630x along the vertical direction, and on the right side of this TQ1, the heat sink mounting surface (rear surface of TQ2) of TQ2 is the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630. TQ2 is arranged so as to be parallel along the vertical direction, and on the right side of this TQ2, the heat sink mounting surface of TQ3 (rear surface of TQ3) is parallel to the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 along the vertical direction. , that is, when the FETs TQ1, TQ2 and Tq3 are arranged parallel to each other along the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630, TQ1 and TQ2 The white slanted lines ad1 silk-printed on TQ3 are both straight lines inclined 45 degrees upward to the right. you can Even if electronic components of the same type and having the same shape are arranged in parallel, the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can call the game hall clerk or other attendant over the phone. When instructing a certain TQ3, a game hall clerk or other staff member asks the service center staff to "find an electronic component where the silk-printed white diagonal line is a straight line (horizontal line) in the horizontal direction." As instructed, TQ3, which is a notable FET, can be specified among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630. FIG. Therefore, even if electronic components of the same type and having the same shape are arranged parallel to each other, TQ3, which is an FET to be noted among the plurality of electronic components, is replaced with TQ1, which is an FET of another electronic component. It can be identified from TQ2.

In addition to the FETs TQ1, TQ2, and TQ3 as the plurality of electronic components having the same shape, a plurality of ICs having the same shape in which circuits such as an AND circuit, an OR circuit, and a Schmidt trigger inverter circuit are respectively integrated. When arranging IC1, IC2, and IC3 on the substrate, the longitudinal directions of IC1 and IC2 are arranged along the vertical direction of the substrate and arranged parallel to each other, while the longitudinal direction of IC3 is arranged in a straight line in the horizontal direction of the substrate. On the other hand, by rotating it counterclockwise by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) and obliquely arranging it, it is possible to determine which of the electronic components of the same type and having the same shape is the specific electronic component. can be identified very easily. Further, since the IC3 is arranged obliquely with respect to the IC1 and IC2, by using the obliquely arranged IC3 as a specific electronic component, the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 can play the game. When instructing an attendant such as a store clerk in the hall to locate the IC 3 by telephone, the attendant such as a store clerk in the game hall can accurately grasp the position of the IC 3 by instructing the staff to search for an IC arranged obliquely. This facilitates communication between the person in charge of the service center and the store clerk of the game hall. As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall over the telephone to instruct the IC3, the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall follows the instruction of the person in charge of the service center. In addition, it is possible to specify IC3, which is an IC to be noted, among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the board. IC1 and IC2 can therefore be distinguished from IC1 and IC2, which are ICs of other electronic components, and IC3, which is an IC of interest among a plurality of electronic components. For the ICs IC1, IC2, and IC3, white contour lines may be printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate as silk printing. On the other hand, for the IC3, which is an IC, a white outline and a white oblique line formed along the outer circumference of the outline are printed on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate as silk printing. is a specific electronic component. In addition, while the longitudinal directions of IC1 and IC2 are arranged along the vertical direction of the substrate and arranged parallel to each other, the longitudinal direction of IC3 is oriented counterclockwise with respect to a straight line in the horizontal direction of the substrate at a predetermined angle α ( Here, although the IC 3 is rotated by 45 degrees and arranged obliquely, the longitudinal direction of the IC 3 may be arranged along the vertical direction of the substrate. In this case, the longitudinal direction of IC3 is perpendicular to the longitudinal directions of IC1 and IC2.

As described above, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are completely different electronic components, whereas the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 are the same. Although it is a type of electronic component, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the AC 24V power outlet, which is the power supply voltage for game machines of the island facility of the game hall, and the commercial power supply voltage is AC 100V, which is higher than the AC 24V power supply voltage for game machines. , the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is self-destructed as described above to maintain the short mode, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are destroyed. melts. In other words, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, and then one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are destroyed as traces of the plug of the power cord being mistakenly inserted into the AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage. there is Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 as electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630, the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 is printed so that the electronic component to be destroyed can be easily identified. We adopt silk printing that has characteristics different from others.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 175(a), the fuse FUSE3, which is an electronic component that will not be destroyed even if the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, is colored white. A silk print FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 as a silk print.

On the other hand, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which are electronic components that are destroyed as traces of the plug of the power cord being mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, are shown in FIG. 175(b). , silk prints FSLK2 and FSLK3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 as a silk print including a white outline and a solid white area ad2 within the outline. That is, the area ad2 painted solid white is represented as a characteristic pattern. Both ends of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are soldered to the power supply board 630 by supporting metal fittings (not shown). The region ad2 is visible, and the solid white region ad2 corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which is the region inside the white outline, is transparent. Visual observation is ensured through a transparent glass tube.

In this way, even if the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are electronic components having the same shape, among the silk-printed FSLK1 to 3 printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630, the white color that is represented as a characteristic pattern By visually checking the area ad2 painted solidly, it is possible to identify which electronic component among the electronic components of the same type and having the same shape is the electronic component to which attention should be paid in comparison with other electronic components. It has become. As a result, it is extremely easy to determine which of the electronic components of the same type and shape has a trace that the plug of the power cord was mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage. can be specified.

Also, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to the clerk of the game hall over the phone, the solid white area represented by the characteristic pattern is displayed. By instructing to search for the silk-printed FSLK2, 3 having ad2, the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall can accurately grasp the positions of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2. It becomes easier to communicate with a staff member such as a store clerk.

As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the fuse FUSE1, FUSE2 to the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall by telephone, the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall is the person in charge of the service center. , the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 of interest among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630 can be specified. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 of interest can be distinguished from the fuse FUSE3, which is another electronic component.

Further, as described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 are detachably attached to a support metal fitting (also called a fuse holder) that is soldered to the power supply board 630. When the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE3 are blown, It is replaceable. In the above example, the white oblique lines ad1 and the solid white area ad2, which are represented as a characteristic pattern, are silk-printed in the area inside the white outline and the area around the support fitting. However, as another example 1, at least the area inside the white outline and excluding the periphery of the support metal fitting and the area corresponding to the transparent glass tube is silk-printed with a characteristic pattern. Alternatively, silk-printing of a characteristic pattern may be omitted around the supporting metal fittings in the region inside the white outline, or the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE2, FUSE1, FUSE2, FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE2 may be printed without silk-printing the outlines of the supporting metal fittings. Only the outline of the area corresponding to the glass tube of the FUSE 3 (not limited to the area that matches the shape of the glass tube, but may be the area that overlaps with a part of the glass tube) may be silk-printed. For example, in the area corresponding to the glass tube of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, an elliptical outline different from the normal outline and the area inside the outline are silk-printed in solid white, and the glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 is printed. Silk-printing may be performed by solidly painting a normal rectangular outline and the area inside the outline in white in the corresponding area. The fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 of interest can be distinguished from the other electronic component fuse FUSE3.

Further, in the above example, of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, only the outlines of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are silk-printed with a characteristic pattern, and the outline of the fuse FUSE3 is not silk-printed. However, as another example 2, among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 as electronic parts having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, Silk printing may be performed within all outlines of FUSE3. In this case, the outlines of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 as electronic parts to be destroyed are made different from the outline of the fuse FUSE3, and the inside of the outlines is printed solidly in white by silk printing. may

Further, in the above example, of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, only the outlines of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are silk-printed with a characteristic pattern, and the outline of the fuse FUSE3 is not silk-printed. However, silk-printing is performed only on outlines for arranging the respective support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3. Silk printing may be replaced by using a fusing confirmation area formed in the area of the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the tube. Fig. 177 shows examples (a) and (b) in which it is difficult to use the fusion confirmation area, and examples (1) (c) and (d) in which the fusion confirmation area can be used. Examples (Part 2) are (e) and (f).

As described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are fused when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of 100 V AC, which is the commercial power voltage, while the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown, but the fuse FUSE3 is not blown. Therefore, the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630 has a As shown in 177(a), each of the supporting metal fittings (fuse holders) at both ends of the fuse FUSE3 has one fixed terminal and one connection terminal, so a land pattern in which a total of four terminals are inserted and soldered. and one wiring pattern 630xn in a region corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3. A foil extraction area is formed. A substrate ground (GND) (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a “solid ground”) is formed on the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630 . A region of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is a fusing confirmation region 630xc. Of the four through-holes 630xs, two through-holes 630xs through which connection terminals are inserted are connected by wiring patterns (not shown) formed on the copper foil surface on the back (solder surface) side of the power supply board 630. there is When a dark-colored (for example, green or black) resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630, as shown in FIG. A silk print FSLK1' is printed thereon as a white rectangular contour line indicating the arrangement position of the support fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3. The reason for using this dark-colored resist solution is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of a fuse is generally more silver than the color of the material. This is because a color with a different contrast makes it easier to confirm whether the fuse has blown. Note that the silk printing FSLK1′ as silk printing, which is an outline having a rectangular shape, may surround the outline of the supporting metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3, or the supporting metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3. The outline may be partially enclosed, or the outline of the support fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 may not be shown at all and silk-printed at all. In this way, for the fuse FUSE3 that does not melt when the power cord plug is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 and the surface (mounting) of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 A wiring pattern 630xn can be routed in a fusing confirmation region 630xc in a region of surface 630x. Note that the wiring pattern 630xn is not limited to one wiring pattern, and may be a plurality of wiring patterns. Also, even if the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630 is coated with a resist solution of a bright color (for example, white) instead of a dark color (for example, green or black), , and the contrast between the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse makes it possible to confirm whether the fuse has blown. In this case, a silk print FSLK1′ is printed on the light color resist as a dark color (for example, green or black) rectangular contour line indicating the arrangement position of the support fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3. (This silk-printed FSLK1' may surround the outer shape of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3, or may surround a part of the outer shape of the support metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3. (Alternatively, the outer shape of the support fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 may not be shown at all and may not be silk-printed at all). In addition, after a resist solution of a predetermined color (eg, green) is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630, silk is applied with a bright color (eg, white) so as to cover the entire resist. May be printed. Even with this configuration, blowing of the fuse can be confirmed by the contrast between the bright-colored silk print and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, an outline having a rectangular shape indicated by a chain line of bright color (for example, white) indicating the arrangement position of the support fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 is silk-printed on the back surface (solder surface) of the power supply substrate 630. (This silk printing FSLK1' may surround the outer shape of the supporting metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3, or may be the outer shape of the supporting metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3. It may surround a part of the fuse, or may not show the outline of the support fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse FUSE3 at all and may not be silk-printed at all).

On the other hand, the copper foil surface on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630 is used for the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 that melt when the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage. As shown in FIG. 177(c), the 630xp has one fixed terminal and one connecting terminal on the support fittings (fuse holders) at both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. Among the supporting metal fittings (fuse holders), two through-holes 630xs1 having a land pattern into which two terminals are inserted and soldered to the supporting metal fitting (fuse holder) at one end, and two through holes 630xs1 to the supporting metal fitting (fuse holder) at the other end. Two through holes 630xs2 having land patterns through which two terminals are inserted and soldered are formed, and a foil extraction region 630xa1 having a rectangular shape surrounding the two through holes 630xs1, and two through holes 630xs2. A foil extraction area 630xa2 having a rectangular shape is formed so as to surround the hole 630xs2. A solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface 630x on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630 . A region of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is a fusing confirmation region 630xc, and a fusing confirmation region is provided between the foil extraction region 630xa1 and the foil extraction region 630xa2. 630xc is formed and a solid ground is formed. A through hole 630xs1 through which connection terminals are inserted out of the two through holes 630xs1, and a through hole 630xs2 through which connection terminals are inserted out of the two through holes 630xs2 are made of copper on the back surface (solder surface) side of the power supply substrate 630. Wiring patterns (not shown) are formed and connected on the foil surface. When a dark-colored (for example, green or black) resist solution is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630, as shown in FIG. Silk prints FSLK2' and FSLK3' are printed on the outline lines having white rectangular shapes indicating the arrangement positions of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively. The reason for using this dark-colored resist solution is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of a fuse is generally more silver than the color of the material. This is because a color with a different contrast makes it easier to confirm whether the fuse has blown. In addition, silk printing FSLK2' and FSLK3' as silk printing which is an outline having a rectangular shape may have the same size as silk printing FSLK1' described above, or may have a different size. good too. Further, these silk-printed FSLK2' and FSLK3' may surround the outer shape of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively, or may surround the outer shape of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. , or the outlines of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 may not be shown at all and not silk-printed at all. As described above, for the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 that melt when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of 100 V AC, which is the commercial power supply voltage, the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 and the corresponding power supply board 630 Since the wiring pattern is not routed at all in the fusing confirmation area 630xc of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the device, no irregularities due to the wiring pattern and the foil removal area around the wiring pattern are formed on this fusing confirmation area 630xc. A flat surface can be formed without forming. As a result, the fuse wires (metal elements) accommodated in the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be easily visually recognized by using the fusing confirmation region 630xc, which is a flat surface, as a background. Therefore, it is possible to easily check whether or not the fuse wires (metal elements) housed in the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are broken (this aspect is referred to as "no wiring pattern in the fusing checking area of the power supply board"). Modification (1)” may be described). Also, even if the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630 is coated with a resist solution of a bright color (for example, white) instead of a dark color (for example, green or black), , and the contrast between the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse makes it possible to confirm whether the fuse has blown. In this case, silk prints FSLK2' and FSLK3' are printed on the light-colored resist as dark-colored rectangular outlines indicating the arrangement positions of the support fittings (fuse holders) for the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. (These silk-printed FSLK2' and FSLK3' may surround the outer shape of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively, or the outer shape of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. A part of the fuse may be enclosed, or the outline of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 may not be shown at all and may not be silk-printed at all. Modified example (2) that does not have a wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation area may be described). In addition, after a resist solution of a predetermined color (eg, green) is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630, silk is applied with a bright color (eg, white) so as to cover the entire resist. May be printed. Even with this configuration, blowing of the fuse can be confirmed by the contrast between the bright-colored silk print and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, silk-printing FSLK2' and FSLK3' is performed by silk-printing an outline having a rectangular shape indicated by a bright-colored (for example, white) chain line indicating the arrangement positions of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. (This silk printing FSLK2', FSLK3' may surround the outer shape of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, respectively, or the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2. The outer shape may be partially enclosed, or the outer shape of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 may not be shown at all and may not be silk-printed at all. Modified example (3) that does not have a wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation area of the substrate may be described).

In addition, the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 has , as shown in FIG. 177(e), the supporting metal fittings (fuse holders) at both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 each have one fixed terminal and one connecting terminal, so that a total of four terminals are inserted and soldered. Four through-holes 630xs having land patterns formed through the four through-holes 630xs and a rectangular foil removal area 630xa surrounding the four through-holes 630xs are formed. A solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface 630x on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630 . A region of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 in the foil-extracted region 630xa serves as a fusing confirmation region 630xc. Of the four through-holes 630xs, two through-holes 630xs through which connection terminals are inserted are connected by wiring patterns (not shown) formed on the copper foil surface on the back (solder surface) side of the power supply board 630. there is When the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply board 630 is coated with a dark-colored (for example, green or black) resist solution, the dark-colored resist solution is formed as shown in FIG. Silk prints FSLK2' and FSLK3' are printed on the resist as white rectangular outlines indicating the arrangement positions of support fittings (fuse holders) for the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively. The reason for using this dark-colored resist solution is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of a fuse is generally more silver than the color of the material. This is because a color with a different contrast makes it easier to confirm whether the fuse has blown. In addition, silk printing FSLK2' and FSLK3' as silk printing which is an outline having a rectangular shape may have the same size as silk printing FSLK1' described above, or may have a different size. good too. Further, these silk-printed FSLK2' and FSLK3' may surround the outer shape of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively, or may surround the outer shape of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. , or the outlines of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 may not be shown at all and not silk-printed at all. As described above, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of 100 V AC, which is the commercial power voltage. , of the foil extraction area 630xa, no wiring pattern is routed to the fusing confirmation area 630xc on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. With respect to 630xc, a flat surface can be formed without forming unevenness due to the wiring pattern and the foil-extracted area around the wiring pattern. As a result, the fuse wires (metal elements) accommodated in the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be easily visually recognized by using the fusing confirmation region 630xc, which is a flat surface, as a background. Therefore, it is possible to easily check whether or not the fuse wires (metal elements) housed in the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are broken (this aspect is referred to as "no wiring pattern in the fusing checking area of the power supply board"). Modification (4)” may be described). Also, even if the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630 is coated with a resist solution of a bright color (for example, white) instead of a dark color (for example, green or black), , and the contrast between the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse makes it possible to confirm whether the fuse has blown. In this case, silk prints FSLK2' and FSLK3' are printed on the light-colored resist as dark-colored rectangular outlines indicating the arrangement positions of the support fittings (fuse holders) for the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. (These silk-printed FSLK2' and FSLK3' may surround the outer shape of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, respectively, or the outer shape of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. A part of the fuse may be enclosed, or the outline of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 may not be shown at all and may not be silk-printed at all. Modified example (5) that does not have a wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation area may be described as “(5)”). After a resist solution of a predetermined color (eg, green or yellow) is applied to the copper foil surface 630xp on the surface (mounting surface) 630x side of the power supply substrate 630, a bright color (eg, white) is applied so as to cover the entire resist. may be silk-printed with Even with this configuration, blowing of the fuse can be confirmed by the contrast between the bright-colored silk print and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, silk-printing FSLK2' and FSLK3' is performed by silk-printing an outline having a rectangular shape indicated by a bright-colored (for example, white) chain line indicating the arrangement positions of the support fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. (This silk printing FSLK2', FSLK3' may surround the outer shape of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, respectively, or the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2. The outer shape may be partially enclosed, or the outer shape of the support metal fittings (fuse holders) of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 may not be shown at all and may not be silk-printed at all. Modified example (6) that does not have a wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation area of the substrate may be described).

Further, in the above example, among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, only the outlines of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are silk-printed with a characteristic pattern, and the outline of the fuse FUSE3 is not silk-printed. However, of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, the fuse that is most likely to blow may be indicated by the arrangement method. FIG. 179 is a diagram showing the arrangement method of the fuse that is the easiest to melt among the three fuses. As a method of arranging the fuses that are most likely to be blown, for example, as shown in FIG. , the longitudinal direction of the fuse F1 is along the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 (that is, the longitudinal direction of the fuse F1 is directed to the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. The fuse F1 is arranged so that the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2 is along the lateral direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 (that is, the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2 is along the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630. The fuse F2 is placed in the horizontal direction), and the longitudinal direction of the fuse F3 is oriented counterclockwise with respect to the straight line in the horizontal direction on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 at a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) to place fuse F3 obliquely. Fuse F1 and fuse F2 are arranged at right angles to each other. The part numbers of the fuses F1, F2, and F3 may be arranged near the fuses F1, F2, and F3 along the longitudinal direction of each of the fuses F1, F2, and F3 when silk-printed. (For example, the part number of the fuse F1 is rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees along the longitudinal direction of the fuse F1, and the fuse is placed vertically on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. The part number of the fuse F2 is arranged in the vicinity of the F1, and the part number of the fuse F2 is arranged in the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 without rotating the part number of the fuse F2 counterclockwise at all along the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2. The part number of the fuse F3 is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) along the longitudinal direction of the fuse F3 and the power supply board. 630 (mounting surface) 630x is arranged in the vicinity of the fuse F3 by rotating it by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees) in a counterclockwise direction with respect to a straight line in the horizontal direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x, or the fuse F1. , F2 and F3 in the same direction (the part numbers of the fuses F1, F2 and F3 are all in the same direction, the part numbers of the fuses F1, F2 and F3 are counterclockwise). The fuses F1, F2, and F3 may be arranged in the vicinity of the fuses F1, F2, and F3 toward the left-right direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630 without being rotated in any direction. It may be arranged in the vicinity of each of the fuses F1, F2, and F3 in the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 by rotating it counterclockwise by 90). Thus, even if the fuses F1, F2, and F3 are electronic components having the same shape, the fuse F3 is arranged obliquely with respect to the fuses F1 and F2. is the fuse that is the easiest to melt, it is possible to identify which electronic component is the electronic component that should be paid more attention than the other electronic components among the electronic components of the same type having the same shape. As a result, it is extremely easy to determine which of the electronic components of the same type having the same shape shows a trace that the plug of the power cord was mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage. can be specified. In addition, since the fuse F3 is arranged obliquely with respect to the fuses F1 and F2, the obliquely arranged fuse F3 is set as the fuse that is the easiest to blow. When the person in charge instructs an attendant such as a store clerk of the game hall to locate the fuse F3 by telephone, the staff such as a store clerk of the game hall instructs to search for the obliquely arranged fuse. can be accurately grasped, communication between the person in charge of the service center and the person in charge of the game hall, such as a store clerk, becomes easier. As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the clerk of the game hall or the like to open the fuse F3 by telephone, the clerk of the game hall or the like instructs the person in charge of the service center. As shown, it is possible to identify the fuse F3 of interest among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630. FIG. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the fuse F3 of interest can be identified from the fuses F1 and F2, which are the other electronic components. For the fuses F1 and F2, the white contour line shown in FIG. Other example 1 and other example 2 may be employed.) Alternatively, the wiring pattern 630xn may be routed without forming the fusing confirmation area shown in FIGS. 177(a) and (b). For the fuse F3, the white outline shown in FIG. 175(b) and the area ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted in white are silk-printed on the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. 177(c), 177(d), 177(e), and 177(f) is formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the power supply substrate 630. may be

For the fuses F1, F2, and F3, the white outline shown in FIG. 175(b) and the area ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted in white are silk-printed on the surface of the power supply substrate 630. (Mounting surface) It may be printed on 630x. The longitudinal direction of the fuse F1 is along the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 (that is, the longitudinal direction of the fuse F1 is directed to the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630). is arranged so that the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2 is along the lateral direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 (that is, the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2 is directed to the lateral direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. 3) The fuse F2 is arranged, and the longitudinal direction of the fuse F3 is turned counterclockwise with respect to the horizontal straight line of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630 by a predetermined angle α (here, 45 degrees). When the fuse F3 is obliquely arranged, the area ad2, which is silk-printed on the fuse F1 and painted in solid white, faces 90 degrees in the vertical direction, and is silk-printed on the fuse F2. The solid white area ad2 faces 0 degrees (zero degrees) in the horizontal direction, and the silk-printed solid white area ad2 faces 45 degrees with respect to the fuse F3. As a result, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall over the phone to instruct the TQ3 which is the FET, the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall will say, "Silk-printed Please find an electronic component with the solid white area facing 45 degrees.” It is designed to be identifiable. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the fuse F3 of interest can be identified from the fuses F1 and F2, which are the other electronic components.

For the fuses F1, F2, and F3, the white outline shown in FIG. 175(b) and the area ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted in white are silk-printed on the surface of the power supply substrate 630. When printed on the (mounting surface) 630x, it is assumed that the fuse F1 is arranged so that the longitudinal direction of the fuse F1 is parallel to the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630, and the fuse F1 on the right side of the power supply board 630 so that the longitudinal direction of the fuse F2 is parallel to the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply board 630. On the right side of this fuse F2, the longitudinal direction of the fuse F3 is placed on the power supply board When the fuse F3 is arranged in parallel along the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630, that is, the fuses F1, F2, and F3 are arranged in the vertical direction of the surface (mounting surface) 630x of the power supply substrate 630. If they are arranged in parallel along the line, all the solid white areas ad2 are oriented 90 degrees in the vertical direction. . Therefore, in such a case, a plurality of white oblique lines ad1' arranged at regular intervals within the outline may be silk-printed instead of the solid white area ad2. In this case, for example, the white slanted lines ad1′ silk-printed on the fuses F1 and F2 are both formed as straight lines inclined upward at 45 degrees to the right, while the white slanted lines silk-printed on the fuse F3 You may make ad1' become a straight line (horizontal line) of the left-right direction. Even if electronic parts of the same type and having the same shape are arranged in parallel, the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 calls the staff of the game hall, such as a clerk, to fuse F3. When instructing, the staff at the amusement hall, etc., follow the instructions of the person in charge at the service center, ``Please find an electronic component that has a straight horizontal line (horizontal line) with white diagonal lines printed on silkscreen''. In addition, it is possible to identify the fuse F3 of interest among the plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630. FIG. Therefore, even when electronic components of the same type and having the same shape are arranged in parallel, the fuse F3 of interest among the plurality of electronic components can be distinguished from the fuses F1 and F2, which are the other electronic components. can do.

[16-3. Fuse confirmation]
Next, confirmation of melting of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 of the same type and having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 will be described. As described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are transparent glass tubes (support terminals at both ends are made of metal). Soot adheres to the inside of the transparent glass tube. Of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are electronic components that can show traces of the plug of the power cord being mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, as described above. If the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into an AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage, it will be fused. Therefore, in this embodiment, the above-described silk printing FSLK2 and FSLK3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as silk printing for the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 so that the state of the fused fuse wires (metal elements) can be easily checked. ing. As described above, the silk-printed FSLK2 and FSLK3 correspond to the transparent glass tube except for the two ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 because the area ad2 painted in solid white is represented as a characteristic pattern. By visually observing the solid white area ad2 through the transparent glass tube, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the fuse wires (metal elements) housed in the transparent glass tubes of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are broken. be able to.

As a result, the plug of the power cord that supplies the power supply voltage to the pachinko machine 1 can be connected to AC 24V, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine, by a staff member such as a game hall clerk or a worker who installs the pachinko machine 1 (replaces the game board 5). When the power switch 630a of the power supply board 630 is turned ON by mistakenly inserting the power switch 630a of the power supply board 630 into the power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage, instead of the power outlet of the power outlet, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. Of these, the fuse wire (metal element) housed in one or both of the transparent glass tubes breaks, causing soot to adhere to the inside of the transparent glass tubes, which can cause amusement hall staff and workers to Even if you claim that "Even if you plug the power cord plug into the power outlet, the power cannot be turned on, it may be an initial failure." It's becoming

On the other hand, as the silk printing for the fuse FUSE3, the silk printing FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 as described above. In this embodiment, green is used as the resist of the power supply board 630 . Further, in the present embodiment, a region of the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 corresponding to the silk printing FSLK1 for the fuse FUSE3 is solidly coated with a green resist. No wiring pattern is laid out in the area of the transparent glass tube of fuse FUSE3 and the solid green resistor corresponding to it (that is, the clear glass tube of fuse FUSE3 and the solid green resistor corresponding to it are not laid out at all). Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the area of , no wiring pattern is formed in this area). This is done by viewing the clear glass tube of fuse FUSE3 and the corresponding area of the solid green resistor through the clear glass tube to see the fuse wire contained in the clear glass tube of fuse FUSE3. By improving the visibility of the state of the (metal element), it is possible to check whether or not the fuse wire (metal element) is disconnected.

As described above, the power line connector DCN2 of the power board 630 is connected via the interface board power line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 37, and the CR unit power line (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside the pachinko machine 1, and supplies AC 24VA and AC 24V to the CR unit (not shown). In other words, the interface board 635 functions not only as means for relaying various signals, but also as means for supplying power to a CR unit (not shown). A fuse (not shown) FUSE (in this embodiment, a transparent fuse with a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm) is found on the interface board 635 as a trace that the plug of the power cord was mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100 V, which is the commercial power supply voltage. There is only one glass tube (support terminals at both ends are made of metal), Class B fusing defined by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law) is provided, and the silk shown in FIG. A print is printed on its mounting surface. A region of the mounting surface of the interface board 635 corresponding to silk printing for the fuse FUSE (not shown) is solidly coated with a green resist. No wiring pattern is laid out at all in the region of the solid green register corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the green register area, no wiring pattern is formed in this area). This is accommodated in the clear glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) by viewing through the clear glass tube to the area of the corresponding solid green resistor. By improving the visibility of the state of the fuse wire (metal element), it is possible to confirm whether or not the fuse wire (metal element) is disconnected. A fuse FUSE (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 is provided on one of AC 24VA and AC 24V supplied from the power line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630 .

The surface (mounting surface) of the interface board 635 corresponds to the transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown) provided on the interface board 635, which melts when the power cord plug is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC 100V, which is the commercial power supply voltage. The fusing confirmation area formed in the area may be used instead of silk printing. FIG. 178 shows examples (part 1) (a) and (b) in which the fusion confirmation area can be used, and examples (part 2) (c) and (d) in which the fusion confirmation area can be used.

For the fuse (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 that melts when the power cord plug is mistakenly inserted into a 100 VAC power outlet (commercial power voltage) On the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635, as shown in FIG. Since there are two connection terminals, there are two through-holes having land patterns in which two terminals are inserted into and soldered to one end of the supporting metal fittings (fuse holders) at both ends of the fuse (not shown). A hole 635xs1 and two through-holes 635xs2 having a land pattern into which two terminals are inserted and soldered to a supporting metal fitting (fuse holder) at the other end are formed and surround the two through-holes 635xs1. and a foil extraction area 635xa2 having a rectangular shape surrounding two through holes 635xs2. A solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface 635x on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface substrate 635 . A region of the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface substrate 635 corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown) serves as a fusing confirmation region 635xc, and a fusing confirmation region 635xc is provided between the foil extraction region 635xa1 and the foil extraction region 635xa2. is formed, and a solid ground is formed. Of the two through holes 635xs1, a through hole 635xs1 through which a connection terminal is inserted, and a through hole 635xs2 through which a connection terminal is inserted out of the two through holes 635xs2 are made of copper on the back surface (solder surface) side of the interface board 635. Wiring patterns (not shown) are formed and connected on the foil surface. When a dark-colored (for example, green or black) resist liquid is applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface substrate 635, the dark-colored resist liquid is applied as shown in FIG. 178(b). Silk printing IFSLK is printed as a white rectangular contour line indicating the arrangement position of a support fitting (fuse holder) for a fuse (not shown). The reason for using this dark-colored resist solution is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of a fuse is generally more silver than the color of the material. This is because a color with a different contrast makes it easier to confirm whether the fuse has blown. The silk-printed IFSLK as a silk-printed outline having a rectangular shape may have the same size as the silk-printed FSLK1' of the power supply substrate 630 described above, or may have a different size. good too. In addition, the silk-printed IFSLK may surround the outer shape of a fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) not shown, or may surround a part of the outer shape of the fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) not shown. Alternatively, the outline of the fuse support fitting (fuse holder) (not shown) may not be shown at all and silk-printed at all. As described above, the transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown) and the fuse (not shown) provided on the interface board 635, which melts when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into an AC 100V power outlet, which is the commercial power supply voltage, is used. Since the wiring pattern is not routed at all in the fusing confirmation area 635xc on the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the corresponding interface substrate 635, the wiring pattern and the foil extraction area around this wiring pattern are not routed to this fusing confirmation area 635xc. A flat surface can be formed without forming any unevenness due to . As a result, it is possible to easily check whether or not the fuse wire (metal element) accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown) is broken or not ( This aspect may be described as "a modification (1) having no wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation region of the interface substrate"). Further, even when the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface substrate 635 is coated with a resist solution of a bright color (eg, white) instead of a dark color (eg, green or black), , and the contrast between the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse makes it possible to confirm whether the fuse has blown. In this case, on the light-colored resist, a dark-colored rectangular contour line indicating the arrangement position of a fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) (not shown) is printed as silk-printed IFSLK (this silk-printed IFSLK). may surround the outer shape of a fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) not shown, may surround a part of the outer shape of a fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) not shown, or It is also possible that the outline of the fuse support fitting (fuse holder) is not shown at all and that no silk printing is performed.) (This aspect is referred to as "Modification (2) having no wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation area of the interface board".) may be stated). In addition, after a resist solution of a predetermined color (eg, green) is applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface substrate 635, silk is applied with a bright color (eg, white) so as to cover the entire resist. May be printed. Even with this configuration, blowing of the fuse can be confirmed by the contrast between the bright-colored silk print and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, silk-printed IFSLK is printed as a silk-printed outline having a rectangular shape indicated by a bright-colored (for example, white) chain line indicating the arrangement position of a fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) (not shown). The silk-printed IFSLK may surround the outer shape of a fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) not shown, or may surround a part of the outer shape of the fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) not shown. However, the outline of the fuse support fitting (fuse holder), not shown, may not be shown at all and may not be silk-printed at all.) )”).

In addition, a fuse (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 that melts when the power cord plug is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of 100 V AC, which is the commercial power supply voltage (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "fuse not shown"). On the other hand, on the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635, as shown in FIG. and one connection terminal, respectively, four through-holes 635xs having land patterns into which a total of four terminals are inserted and soldered, and a rectangular foil extraction area surrounding the four through-holes 635xs 635xa are formed. A solid ground is formed on the copper foil surface 635x on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface substrate 635 . A region of the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface substrate 635 corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown) in the foil extraction region 635xa serves as a fusing confirmation region 635xc. Of the four through holes 635xs, two through holes 635xs through which connection terminals are inserted are connected by wiring patterns (not shown) formed on the copper foil surface on the back (solder surface) side of the interface board 635. there is When the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface board 635 is coated with a dark-colored (for example, green or black) resist solution, the dark-colored resist solution is formed as shown in FIG. Silk printing IFSLK is printed on the resist as a white rectangular contour line indicating the arrangement position of a support metal fitting (fuse holder) for a fuse (not shown). The reason for using this dark-colored resist solution is that the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of a fuse is generally more silver than the color of the material. This is because a color with a different contrast makes it easier to confirm whether the fuse has blown. The silk-printed IFSLK as a silk-printed outline having a rectangular shape may have the same size as the silk-printed FSLK1' of the power supply substrate 630 described above, or may have a different size. good too. In addition, the silk-printed IFSLK may surround the outer shape of a fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) not shown, or may surround a part of the outer shape of the fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) not shown. Alternatively, the outline of the fuse support fitting (fuse holder) (not shown) may not be shown at all and silk-printed at all. As described above, for the fuse (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 that melts when the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of 100 V AC, which is the commercial power voltage, a recessed portion is formed by forming a foil extraction region 635xa. Although formed, the wiring pattern is not routed at all in the fusing confirmation region 635xc of the surface (mounting surface) 635x of the interface substrate 635 corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown) in the foil extraction region 635xa. A flat surface can be formed on the fusing confirmation region 635xc without forming unevenness due to the wiring pattern and the foil-punched region around the wiring pattern. As a result, it is possible to easily check whether or not the fuse wire (metal element) accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse (not shown) is broken or not ( This aspect may be described as "a modification (4) having no wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation region of the interface substrate"). Further, even when the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface substrate 635 is coated with a resist solution of a bright color (eg, white) instead of a dark color (eg, green or black), , and the contrast between the bright color and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse makes it possible to confirm whether the fuse has blown. In this case, on the light-colored resist, a dark-colored rectangular contour line indicating the arrangement position of a fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) (not shown) is printed as silk-printed IFSLK (this silk-printed IFSLK). may surround the outer shape of a fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) not shown, may surround a part of the outer shape of a fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) not shown, or It is also possible that the outline of the supporting metal fitting (fuse holder) of the fuse that is not used is not shown at all and that no silk printing is performed.) (This aspect is referred to as "variation (5) having no wiring pattern in the fusing confirmation area of the interface board".) may be stated). In addition, after a resist solution of a predetermined color (eg, green) is applied to the copper foil surface 635xp on the surface (mounting surface) 635x side of the interface substrate 635, silk is applied with a bright color (eg, white) so as to cover the entire resist. May be printed. Even with this configuration, blowing of the fuse can be confirmed by the contrast between the bright-colored silk print and the color of the metal element (fuse wire) of the fuse. In this case, silk-printed IFSLK is printed as a silk-printed outline having a rectangular shape indicated by a bright-colored (for example, white) chain line indicating the arrangement position of a fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) (not shown). The silk-printed IFSLK may surround the outer shape of a fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) not shown, or may surround a part of the outer shape of the fuse support metal fitting (fuse holder) not shown. However, the outline of the fuse support fitting (fuse holder) not shown may not be shown at all and may not be silk-printed at all.) )”).

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a power switch 630a, a noise countermeasure circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor correction circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power generation circuit 630f, and a power supply breaker circuit 630g are provided on a single power supply board 630. , various electronic parts and the like are provided, but it is also possible to provide them separately on two substrates. For example, the power supply board 630 is composed of a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B. Can also be configured. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A mainly comprises the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power switch 630a, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b, and the wiring connector A shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B includes the diodes D5 and D6, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor correction circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power generation circuit 630f, the power breakdown circuit 630g, and the choke coil L2 shown in FIG. , L3, L4, a fuse FUSE3, and a wiring connector B. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via power supply wiring. The AC 24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a on the first power supply board 630A pass through the noise suppression circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring to the second power supply board 630B. When input to the connector B, it is input to the rectifier circuit 630c, is also input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, is output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and is input to the power generation circuit 630f. It will happen. Various DC voltages such as DC +35V, DC +12V, DC +5V, etc. generated in the second power supply board 630B are supplied from the second power supply board 630B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the first power supply board 630A. be.

Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a board such as a power supply board capable of generating various power sources necessary for the gaming machine based on an external power source supplied from outside the gaming machine (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014). -008221 (Fig. 2)). By the way, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the game machine instructs the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall over the phone about the specific electronic parts of the board, the parts are mounted on the board as instructed by the person in charge of the service center. There is a problem that it is difficult to specify a noteworthy electronic component among a plurality of electronic components that are displayed.

Further, conventionally, there has been proposed a game machine provided with a board such as a power supply board capable of generating various power sources necessary for the game machine based on an external power supply supplied from outside the game machine (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014). -008221 (Fig. 2)). By the way, even if the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the game machine instructs the staff such as the store clerk of the game hall over the phone to confirm whether the fuse wire of the fuse provided on the board is melted and blown. However, it is difficult to easily check whether or not the fuse wire is broken.

Although the present invention has been described above with reference to preferred embodiments, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments. and design changes are possible.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko machine was exemplified as a gaming machine, but it is also applicable to other gaming machines such as a mackerel ball machine and an arrange ball machine. It can also be applied to a slot machine that rotates a spinning drum or reel. The slot machine will now be described with reference to FIG. Figure 180 is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

The slot machine 6000 comprises a front door (front frame) 6002 and a main body (box) 6004, as shown in FIG. The front door (front frame) 6002 and the main body (box) 6004 are connected to each other via hinges (not shown). With this hinge as the center of rotation, a key is inserted into a keyhole 6005 of a metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and turned clockwise to open the front door (front frame) 6002 to the main body. It can be opened from the portion (box) 6004 .

The metal locking device is attached to the cylinder mounting frame of the metal door frame reinforcing unit (not shown) of the front door (front frame) 6002, and cooperates with the locking unit (not shown) to lock the main body (box) 6004. It is used for opening and closing and locking the front door (front frame) 6002 . The metal locking device is attached to a cylindrical cylinder body (not shown) made of metal extending back and forth, a key hole 6005 made of metal formed in the front end face of the cylinder body, and the rear side of the cylinder body. and a metal rotation transmission member (not shown) that is inserted into the keyhole 6005 and rotates together with the regular metal key. The cylinder main body of the metal locking device penetrates from the rear through the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame of the door frame reinforcing unit, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmission member is formed in a cylindrical shape (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear) with an open rear end, and is arranged at positions facing each other across the central axis from the rear end toward the front. It has a pair of cutouts. The rotation transmission member is arranged so that when the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body (box) 6004, the metal transmission cylinder 654 of the metal lock unit (not shown) is inserted from behind. By inserting the pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches, the rotation of the rotation transmission member (the key inserted into the keyhole 6005) is transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate. can be done. When the front door (front frame) 6002 is closed with respect to the main body (box) 6004 and the rotation transmission member of the locking device made of metal and the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit are in contact with each other, the metal The locking device and the locking unit are electrically connected.

The door frame reinforcement unit has the function of reinforcing the front door (front frame) 6002 to impart rigidity, and also functions as a door frame metal ground, and the main body ( It is electrically connected to a ground substrate provided inside the box 6004 . That is, the metal door frame reinforcement unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side. This ground board (not shown) collects electromagnetic noise generated in various places and can be grounded (grounded) to the island equipment of the game hall. It is electrically connected to the equipment ground.

An open switch (not shown) capable of detecting opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004 is arranged on the main body (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002. there is This open switch detects the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the body portion (box) 6004 due to the input of an electrical signal by the opening and closing operation by the metal locking device. Instead, the opening of the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004 is detected independently of the opening/closing operation by the metal locking device. In addition, the release switch is not placed near or around the metal locking device, and is positioned below the metal locking device and placed on the main body so as not to be affected by electromagnetic wave noise that enters the metal locking device. An open switch is arranged on the portion (box) 6004 or the front door (front frame) 6002 . In this manner, even if electromagnetic noise enters the metal locking device, the signal transmission line from the open switch is not affected by the electromagnetic noise.

A front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative parts. Some of these various decorative portions are not plated with decorative plating at all, while others are plated with decorative plating on the entire front and back surfaces. This decorative plating is noble metal plating such as chromium plating or hard gold plating, and has electrical conductivity, so electromagnetic wave noise may enter. Of the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit in the door frame base unit that constitutes the front door 6002 via wiring (not shown). (Some of the decorative parts are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), while the conductive member is directly attached to the metal door frame reinforcement unit.) are electrically connected). As a result, the electromagnetic wave noise entering the various decorative parts is transmitted to the metallic door frame reinforcing unit, thereby preventing the various decorative substrates provided in the various decorative parts from entering the board ground. In addition, among various decorative parts, when electromagnetic noise that enters the decorative parts with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces is transmitted to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown), the door frame metal ground wire is transferred. It is transmitted to the ground board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 through the ground board, and then transmitted from the ground board to the ground of the island facilities of the game hall through the island facility ground wire, and is removed from the slot machine 6000 . That is, the metal door frame reinforcing unit serves as the frame ground on the door frame side as described above.

In addition, an electrostatic removal pad may be provided as a static elimination unit at a predetermined location on the front surface of the front door (front frame) 6002, and when the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened from the main body (box) 6004, A static elimination pad may be provided as a static elimination unit on the open side opposite to the side on which the hinge is arranged (closed side). The static elimination pad can eliminate noise (electromagnetic wave noise) caused by electrostatic discharge.

Also, the front door (front frame) 6002 decorates the entire front surface of the slot machine 6000, and includes various decorative parts. Some of them are decorated with decorative plating on the entire surface, and among the various decorative parts, those with decorative plating on the front and back surfaces are electrically connected to the metal door frame reinforcement unit via wiring (not shown). , and the ground board provided inside the main body (box) 6004 was electrically connected to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire, but the door frame metal ground wire was The metal door frame reinforcing unit and the power supply board are electrically connected to the terminals of the power supply board of the power supply unit 620c provided inside the body portion (box) 6004 without being electrically connected to the ground board. You may make it electrically connect. The power board is supplied with AC 24V from the island facility of the game hall. This AC 24V has L (live) and N (neutral), and the L terminal of the power supply board to which L (line) is input is connected to the non-grounded side, and N (neutral) is input. The N terminal of the power supply board is connected to the ground side. Therefore, a surge protection element (surge absorber) that protects against transient excessive voltage is provided on the power supply substrate. This surge protection element (surge absorber) normally has a high resistance value and does not allow current to flow. , has the ability to return to the original normal resistance value (high resistance value). As a result, electromagnetic noise transmitted from the metal door frame reinforcing unit is transmitted from the N terminal of the power supply board to the ground side (earth) by the surge protection element (surge absorber) from the terminal of the power supply board, and is removed from the slot machine 6000. .

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door (front frame) 6002 , and a protruding portion protruding forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 . A medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 on this projecting portion. A storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged on the lower half of the front door (front frame) 6002 , and a saucer 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024 . These bet buttons 6010, 6012, starting lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, accumulation settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. It is The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004 .

In addition to the main control board 1310, the main control board box 1320 also accommodates a setting change board 1311 on which setting key switches 1311a capable of changing setting values are mounted. That is, as described above, the main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion (box) 6004. Therefore, the setting key switch 1311a is arranged inside the body portion (box) 6004. FIG. The setting change board 1311 may be housed in a board box separate from the main control board box 1320 and attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body (box) 6004. It may be attached and fixed to the housing of the power supply unit 620 c provided inside the portion (box) 6004 . On the surface (mounting surface) of the setting change board 1311, in addition to the setting key switch 1311a described above, a setting switch button for selecting and switching setting values, and a 7-segment LED display with a decimal point (so-called dot) are provided. A setting indicator 1310g composed of a single unit, the above-described setting change permission lamp 1310z, and the like may be mounted.

The setting key switch 1311a has substantially the same configuration as that provided in the above-described pachinko machine 1, and is rotated by inserting the setting key into the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing. A setting key cylinder is accommodated. A surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder is formed of non-conductive resin (insulating resin) having a predetermined length. The front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing is arranged on the same plane as the front surface of the setting key cylinder, which is provided with an insertion opening for inserting the setting key. The surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the case (or rectangular) is arranged substantially flush with the surface (rear surface) opposite to the front surface of the setting key cylinder. A state in which the setting key cylinder is accommodated in a cylindrical (or rectangular) metallic housing is a state in which the cylindrical (or rectangular) metallic housing and the setting key cylinder are electrically connected. It has become.

The configuration of the main control board 1310, the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a, the main control board box 1320, etc. (including other configurations (modifications)) is substantially the same as that provided in the pachinko machine 1 described above. , and the effect is the same, so a description thereof will be omitted, but an example will be described. Even if noise enters from the front surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the setting change board 1311, as described above, the surface of the setting change board 1311 ( By forming the foil removal areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on copper planes on the mounting surface) and the back surface (soldering surface), the rear surface of the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing of the setting key switch 1311a is formed. A pair of opposed long through holes SLH1 and SLH2 having elongated hole shapes along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 through which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the setting change board 1311 can be inserted are formed on the surface of the setting change board 1311. Since it is electrically insulated from solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface), the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a is charged and electrostatically discharged. The electromagnetic wave noise caused by the setting key switch 1311a can be attenuated by the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing or setting key cylinder of the setting key switch 1311a. As a result, it is possible to prevent electromagnetic wave noise from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311, which is caused by static electricity discharged by the person who accesses the setting key switch 1311a. , there is no influence on the board ground of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board for controlling the progress of the game, and there is no change to the ground line that transmits the board ground (ground). Therefore, it is possible to contribute to prevention of malfunction of slot machine 6000 and destruction of electronic components.

A non-conductive resin (insulating resin) is filled between the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder, and the setting key cylinder is made of a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) shape. ), and adopting a configuration in which the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing and the setting key cylinder are not electrically connected but insulated. good. Even with this configuration, even if electromagnetic wave noise intrudes from the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing, the electromagnetic wave noise will be transmitted from the front surface (mounting surface) and rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. ) are prevented from penetrating into the solid ground (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (soldering surface) of the setting change board 1311 via the foil extraction areas SINSx and SINSy formed in the . damped by the cylindrical (or rectangular) housing itself. In other words, the foil-extracted areas SINSx and SINSy can prevent electromagnetic noise from entering the board ground of the setting change board 1311 from the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing. As a result, the setting change board 1311 side can prevent the electromagnetic wave noise from entering from the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing. advance to the board ground of the main control board 1310, which is an important control board for controlling the progress of the ground, can be reliably stopped, and the ground line transmitting the board ground (ground) is not affected. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to prevention of malfunction of slot machine 6000 and destruction of electronic components.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at approximately the center of the game panel 6006. Through this display window, three variable rotators (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000, production devices (not shown) and the like are displayed. It is designed to be transparent. The three variable rotators (not shown) are attached and fixed to a body-side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the body portion (box) 6004 . On the other hand, the production device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side mounting member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door (front frame) 6002 .

On these variable rotators, translucent pattern belts printed with a plurality of patterns (for example, bells, watermelons, cherries, 7s, Vs, etc.) as pattern information are attached to the respective cylindrical frameworks. ing. Such cylindrical variable rotators are called reels or drums in game machines such as slot machines, and the output shafts of stepping motors (not shown) are connected to the respective variable rotators. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and by rotating the output shafts of the stepping motors, a plurality of types of patterns are continuously changed from the above display window from top to bottom. It looks like

The production device includes a plurality of movable production bodies (not shown), the above-described production display device 1600, various decorative substrates on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the above-described peripheral control unit 1500. Based on various commands from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control unit 1500 controls operation of a plurality of movable effect bodies, drawing control of the effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decoration boards, and the like. By performing various controls, the progress of production is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510 described above.

A predetermined number of medals as game media are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008, and the main control board 1310 starts the variable display of pattern information based on the operation of the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right The variable display of the pattern information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the lapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) under the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals to a receiving tray 6026 as a game medium.

According to this slot machine 6000, a front door 6002 is provided on the front side as a door that can be opened and closed. The first operation (when opening the front door (front frame) 6002 with respect to the main body (box) 6004) can be performed by operating the regular metal key possessed by a staff member such as a store clerk). As a first device, a metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 and a second key (setting key) different from the first key are operated to perform a second operation (set value). The main control board box as a second device in which the signal line by the operation of the second key is electrically connected to the electronic parts. A setting key switch 1311a mounted on a setting change board 1311 housed together with the main control board 1310 in 1320 is provided. The setting key switch 1311a is capable of setting multiple types of winning probabilities (when changing the set value), and is capable of confirming the currently set set value (set value). when checking the current set value). The metal locking device provided at the right end of the front door (front frame) 6002 is provided on the front side of the front door (front frame) 6002, and the housing of the metal locking device is electrically connected to the ground side. ing. The setting key switch 1311a is provided behind the front door (front frame) 6002, and the housing of the setting key switch 1311a is not electrically connected to the ground and is insulated.

Specifically, the cylindrical cylinder body made of metal, which is the housing of the locking device made of metal for the front door 6002, is electrically grounded to the frame ground on the door frame side or the N (neutral) of AC 24V. connected to In addition, by forming the foil removal areas SINSx and SINSy of the setting change board 1311 on the copper planes on the front surface (mounting surface) and the back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311, the setting key switch 1311a can be made cylindrical ( A pair of opposing long through-holes SLH1 having long long hole shapes along the vertical direction of the setting change board 1311 through which a pair of opposing mounting plate pieces protruding from the rear surface of the housing can be inserted. The SLH 2 can be in a state of being electrically insulated from the solid earth (substrate ground) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and back surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311 . For this reason, the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing that is the housing of the setting key switch 1311a is a solid ground (substrate) formed on the front surface (mounting surface) and rear surface (solder surface) of the setting change board 1311. ground).

In this way, since the housing of the metal locking device provided on the front side of the front door (front frame) 6002 is electrically connected to the ground side, if noise (electromagnetic wave noise) occurs in the metal locking device Even if it does intrude, this intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is released to the ground side so that the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is a board on which electronic components are mounted, does not fluctuate, and the front door (front frame) Since the metallic cylindrical (or rectangular) casing that is the casing of the setting key switch 1311a provided on the rear side of 6002 is not electrically connected to the ground side and is insulated, if the metallic casing Even if noise (electromagnetic wave noise) penetrates into the cylindrical (or rectangular) housing, the intruding noise (electromagnetic wave noise) is attenuated by the cylindrical (or rectangular) housing itself made of metal. It is possible to prevent the fluctuation of the ground line of the main control board 1310, which is the board on which the components are mounted. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to prevention of malfunction of slot machine 6000 and destruction of electronic components.

In addition, the metal columnar cylinder main body, which is the housing of the metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002, is the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 or the AC 24V supplied to the slot machine 6000. While electrically connected to the N (Neutral) ground side, the metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing that is the housing of the setting key switch 1311a serves as the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000. and is not electrically connected and insulated from the ground side which is N (neutral) of AC 24V supplied to the slot machine 6000 . As a result, the cylindrical cylinder body made of metal is electrically connected to the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 or the ground side that is the N (neutral) of the AC 24V supplied to the slot machine 6000. On the other hand, a metal cylindrical (or rectangular) housing is connected to the frame ground on the door frame side of the slot machine 6000 and the ground side that is the N (neutral) of the AC 24V supplied to the slot machine 6000. It can be insulated without being electrically connected.

Also, after the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened by the metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002 and a locking unit (not shown) (that is, the front door (front frame) 6002 is locked to the main body (box) 6004 ), the setting key switch 1311a mounted on the setting change board 1311 housed together with the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 enables setting of multiple types of winning probabilities. (when changing the set value), and the current set value can be confirmed (when the current set value is confirmed). As a result, after the front door (front frame) 6002 is opened by the metal locking device of the front door (front frame) 6002 and a locking unit (not shown) 6004), access the setting key switch 1311a to operate the setting key switch 1311a and access the setting value setting possible state (when changing the setting value) or the setting value confirmation possible state (set value is changed). (when checking the current set value), and the security for the setting key switch 1311a can be improved.

In addition, in the fusion game machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes the ball slot 6008', and the main control board 1310 has a predetermined number of game balls as game media inserted into the ball slot 6008', and the start lever 6014 is operated. Then, the variable display of the pattern information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018 and the right stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (jackpot game state) under the condition that the pattern information becomes a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls to a receiving tray 6026 as game media.

1 pachinko machine 3 door frame 4 body frame 5 game board 5a game area 100 door frame lower unit 120 bulging portion 123 device placement portion 130 upper plate (storage plate)
131 storage area 131a front area 131b side area 132 bottom wall 133 rear peripheral wall (peripheral wall)
134 Front peripheral wall 135 Supply port 136 Delivery port 137 Alignment portion 138 Storage luminous decorative portion (luminous decorative portion)
138a LEDs
150 door frame production device (production device)
1000 Front component 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel board 1120 Panel holder 1300 Main control unit 1310 Main control board 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board (performance control means)
1511 Peripheral control unit (effect control means)
1512 Production display control unit (production control means)
1600 effect display device (effect display means)
3000 back unit 3200 back second effect unit (front decoration)
3210 rotary decoration (pre-decoration)
3228 Back second outer decoration (front decoration)
3229 Back second inner decorative body (front decorative body)
3230 Back second inner peripheral decoration (front decoration)
3300 Back third production unit 3310 Upper unit 3311 Upper vertical ring decoration (movable decoration)
3312 First decoration 3313 Second decoration 3320 Back third upper driving motor (driving motor)
3330 lower unit 3331 lower vertical ring decoration (movable decoration)
3332 First decoration 3333 Second decoration 3340 Back third lower driving motor (driving motor)
3350 Left unit 3351 Left horizontal ring decoration (movable decoration)
3352 First decoration 3353 Second decoration 3360 Back third left driving motor (driving motor)
3370 right unit 3371 right horizontal ring decoration (movable decoration)
3372 First decoration 3373 Second decoration 3380 Back third right drive motor (drive motor)

Claims (1)

A game board is provided with a game area in which game balls can flow down, a lottery is performed based on the game balls flowing down the game area entering a predetermined start hole, and a pattern is based on the result of the lottery. and a predetermined winning game can be executed when a winning result is derived as a result of the variable display of the symbols,
a specific mode generating means for generating a specific mode in which progress of the game is disabled;
specific abnormality determination means for determining a specific abnormality;
a specific abnormality notification means for performing specific abnormality notification corresponding to the specific abnormality,
The specific mode can be canceled by a specific administrator operation,
Not only during the normal game, but also during the specific mode, the determination by the specific abnormality determination means is possible,
The specific abnormality notification is executed using a plurality of notification units,
The plurality of notification units include a back side notification unit provided on the back side of the game machine and a front side notification unit provided on the front side of the game machine,
The specific abnormality notification performed during a normal game is executed by both the back side notification section and the front side notification section, but the specific abnormality notification performed during the specific mode is performed by the front side notification section. is executed by the back side notification unit without
Further, the gaming machine is characterized in that the back-side notification unit is provided on a predetermined board of a game frame to which the game board is mounted, rather than on the game board.

Images